Tannery Etp PDF

Jajmau Tannery Effluent Treatment Association (JTETA)
Request for Proposal (RFP) for Appointment of EPC Contractor for Implementation of 20 MLD Tannery
Common Effluent Treatment Plant (CETP) upto Tertiary Treatment Along with Treated Sewage Dilution
Facility for Jajmau Leather Cluster, Uttar Pradesh
RFP No.: JTETA/CETP/001 Dated 25th August 2018
Addendum No. 1 dated: 05.10.2018
S. No. RFP Reference Existing Clause Revised Clause
1. Section 5: bid data Event Date/Location Event Date/Location

sheet of the RFP Last date and time for Date 5th October 2018 Last date and time for Date 22nd October
document receipt (upload) of bids up to 03.00 PM receipt (upload) of bids 2018 up to 03.00 PM
Last Date and time for Date 5th October 2018 Last Date and time for Date 22nd October
Submission of Power up to 3.00 PM Submission of Power 2018 up to 3.00 PM
of Attorney, Bid of Attorney, Bid
Security, copy of Security, copy of
online receipt online receipt
towards Bid processing towards Bid processing
fee, and Joint Bidding fee, and Joint Bidding
Agreement Agreement
Time and date of Date 5th October 2018 Time and date of Date 22nd October
opening bids at 3.30 PM opening bids 2018 at 3.30 PM
(Qualification (Qualification
proposals) proposals)
Time and date of to be informed later Time and date of to be informed later
opening financial opening financial
proposal proposal
Place of opening of Through website Place of opening of Through website
bid: https://etender.up.nic.in bid: https://etender.up.nic.in
Page 1 of 24
2. Glossary - "CETP "means the area required by the Selected Bidder at "means the area required by the Selected Bidder at the
Land Requirement" the Site to construct, operate and maintain the Site to construct, operate and maintain the CETP,
CETP, Common Chrome Recovery Unit, ZLD Common Chrome Recovery Unit, ZLD Facilities
Facilities excluding the Network Facilities. For the excluding the Network Facilities. For the avoidance of
avoidance of doubt it is clarified that the land doubt it is clarified that the land required by the Bidder
required by the Bidder shall not be more than shall not be more than 1,15,000 sq.m."
1,12,000 sq.m."
3. Definitions: shall comprise: Construction Price Index (CPI) means the variation
Construction Price (a) 70% of WPI; and multiple in the Price Index occurring between the
Index (b) 30% of CPI(IW), reference index date preceding the bid due date and the
which constituents may be substituted by such reference index date preceding the date of invoice, which
alternative index or indices as the Parties may is calculated by dividing the Price Index on the reference
mutually agree. index date preceding the date of invoice by Price Index by
WPI: Wholesale Price Index the reference Price Index date preceding the bid due date.
CPI: Consumer Price Index. Price Index shall comprise of:
(a) 70% of WPI; and
(b) 30% of CPI(IW),
which constituents may be substituted by such
alternative index or indices as the Parties may
mutually agree.
WPI: Wholesale Price Index
CPI: Consumer Price Index.
Page 2 of 24
4. Definitions: O&M shall comprise: O&M Price Index (OPI) means the variation multiple in
Price Index (a) 70% of CPI; and the Price Index occurring between the reference index
(b) 30% of WPI, date preceding the bid due date and the reference index
which constituents may be substituted by such date preceding the date of invoice, which is calculated by
alternative index or indices as the Parties may dividing the Price Index on the reference index date
mutually agree. preceding the date of invoice by Price Index by the
reference Price Index date preceding the bid due date.
Price Index shall comprise of:
(a) 60% of CPI; and
(b) 40% of WPI
which constituents may be substituted by such alternative
index or indices as the Parties may mutually agree.
5. Glossary: Reference - Means in respect of a specified date, the last date of the
Price Index preceding month with reference to which the Construction
Price Index or O&M Price Index is revised.
6. Glossary -After - O&M Security: means the (i) CETP O&M Security,
O&M Price Index (ii) Common Chrome Recovery Unit O&M Security,
(iii) Network Performance Security for O&M Period
and (iv) ZLD Performance Security for O&M Period.
as the context may require, and the term 'O&M
Securities' shall mean collectively, all the securities
mentioned above
7. Glossary- Appointed means the date of signing of the Jajmau CETP means the date of signing of the Jajmau CETP Project
Date Project Agreement Agreement and this date shall be same as "Effective Date"
mentioned elsewhere in this RFP document.
8. Glossary - CETP Bid means the price calculated for each Bidder, based means the price calculated for each Bidder, based on the
Price on the values provided by such Bidder in the Bid values provided by such Bidder in the Bid Price Sheet, as
Price Sheet, as a part of its Financial Proposal, to a part of its Financial Proposal, to design, construct,
design, finance, develop, construct, operate, and operate, and maintain the Jajmau CETP
maintain the Jajmau CETP.
Page 3 of 24
9. Glossary - Common means the price calculated for each Bidder, based means the price calculated for each Bidder, based on the
Chrome Recovery on the values provided by such Bidder in the Bid values provided by such Bidder in the Bid Price Sheet, as
Unit Bid Price Price Sheet, as a part of its Financial Proposal, to a part of its Financial Proposal, to design, construct,
design, finance, develop, construct, operate, and operate, and maintain the Jajmau Common Chrome
maintain the Jajmau Common Chrome Recovery Recovery Unit
Unit
10. Glossary - ZLD Unit means the price calculated for each Bidder, based means the price calculated for each Bidder, based on the
Bid Price on the values provided by such Bidder in the Bid values provided by such Bidder in the Bid Price Sheet, as
Price Sheet, as a part of its Financial Proposal, to a part of its Financial Proposal, to design, construct,
design, finance, develop, construct, operate, and operate, and maintain the Jajmau ZLD Facilities
maintain the Jajmau ZLD Facilities
11. Technical Capacity : If the Bidder does not have required experience for If the Bidder does not have required experience for
Chromium Recovery claiming Technical Capacity under 4.1.1(a) (i), the claiming Technical Capacity under 4.1.1(a) (iii) (i), the
Unit Experience Bidder will be required to nominate an experienced Bidder will be required to nominate an experienced sub-
Clause No 4.1.1 a sub-contractor which meets the criteria set out in contractor which meets the criteria set out in 4.1.1(a) (iii)
(iii) (ii) 4.1.1(a)(i) above. Such nominated subcontractor (i) above. Such nominated subcontractor will be engaged
will be engaged for the subject work in the for the subject work in the proposed Project, if the Bidder
proposed Project, if the Bidder is declared the is declared the Selected Bidder, and will be required to
Selected Bidder, and will be required to provide a provide a consent letter in the format set out in Annexure
consent letter in the format set out in Annexure 3A 3A (along with certificate(s) from the relevant
(along with certificate(s) from the relevant government body/ client).
government body/ client).
The contractor may be allowed to substitute the sub-
contractor nominated at the time of bid by equivalent
or more qualified sub-contractor, with prior
consultation, under exceptional circumstances, after
recommendation of Project Engineer and due
approval of JTETA.
Page 4 of 24
12. Clause 15.6 of the Details of the bank account of the beneficiary/JTETA for
RFP document bid security/ performance security.
Beneficiary Name: Jajmau Tannery Effluent Treatment

Association
Beneficiary Account Number: 36930451289
Name of the Bank: State Bank of India
Branch Name and address: SME Branch, Jajmau
246/268, Jajmau, Kanpur, Uttar Pradesh-208010
IFS Code: SBIN0000220
13. Section I: a) Development/Design and Construction a) Development/Design and Construction experience
Introduction experience (i) Common Effluent Treatment Plant (CETP): The
4. Qualification (i) Common Effluent Treatment Plant (CETP): The Bidder should have (A) developed and/or (B) designed,
criteria Bidder should have (A) developed and/or (B) constructed and Commissioned one CETP of at least
4.1.1. Technical designed, constructed and Commissioned one 8(Eight) MLD capacity, or 2 CETPs of at least 4 (Four)
capacity CETP of at least 8(Eight) MLD capacity, or 2 MLD capacity each or 3 CETPs of at least 3(Three) MLD
CETPs of at least 4 (Four) MLD capacity each or 3 capacity each, which shall each:
CETPs of at least 3(Three) MLD capacity each, A. have been (A) developed, and /or (B) designed and
which shall each: constructed, in the 20(Twenty) years preceding the month
A. have been (A) developed, and /or (B) designed of publication of RFP, as evidenced by the issuance of a
and constructed, in the 10(Ten) years preceding the completion certificate by the relevant client/government
month of publication of RFP, as evidenced by the body, certifying that the CETP(s) have been completed in
issuance of a completion certificate by the relevant terms of the Contract agreement or similar contract
government body/client, certifying that the executed for such CETP(s); and
CETP(s) have been completed in terms of the B. have been successfully operational for any 12 (Twelve)
Contract agreement or similar contract executed for consecutive months in the 20 (Twenty) years preceding
such CETP(s); and the month of publication of RFP, in accordance with the
B. have been successfully operational for any 12 relevant Contract agreement or similar contract executed
(Twelve) consecutive months in the 10 (Ten) years for such CETP(s) as evidenced by the issuance of a
preceding the month of publication of RFP, in completion certificate by the relevant client/government
accordance with the relevant Contract agreement or body.
similar contract executed for such CETP(s) as
Page 5 of 24
evidenced by the issuance of a completion
certificate by the relevant government body
body/client.
14. Section I: (ii) Network: The Bidder should have (ii) Network: The Bidder should have
Introduction i. (A) developed and/or (B) designed and i. (A) developed and/or (B) designed and constructed
4. Qualification constructed during last seven years, at least one during last seven years;
criteria sewerage network of minimum 12 (Twelve) km of (a) at least one sewerage network of minimum 12
4.1.1. Technical which at least 2.5 km should be more than or equal (Twelve) km and
capacity to 400 (four hundred) mm diameter and (b) 2.5 km should be more than or equal to 400 (four
a. construction of pumping stations / collection wells/ hundred) mm diameter and
Development/Design lifting stations; and. (c) construction of at least one pumping station of
and Construction ii. have been successfully operational for any 12 3MLD capacity.
experience (Twelve) consecutive months in the 7 (seven) years
preceding the month of publication of RFP, in The above eligibility criteria may be met either from a
accordance with the relevant Contract agreement or single contract or multiple contracts for items a, b & c
similar contract executed for such network, as mentioned above. For this purpose, the Company claiming
evidenced by the issuance of a completion the experience will be required to submit a certificate
certificate by the relevant government body/client. issued by the relevant Client/ government body.
15. Section I: i. The Bidder shall have operated and maintained i. The Bidder shall have operated and maintained one
Introduction one CETP of at least 8(Eight) MLD capacity or 2 CETP of at least 8 (Eight) MLD capacity or 2 (two)
4. Qualification (two) CETPs of at least 4 (Four) MLD capacity or 3 CETPs of at least 4 (Four) MLD capacity or 3 (three)
criteria (three) CETPs of 3 (three) MLD Capacity for any 24 CETPs of 3 (three) MLD Capacity for any 12 (twelve)
4.1.1. Technical (twenty-four) consecutive months in the 10 (Ten) consecutive months in the 20 (Twenty) years
capacity years immediately preceding the month of immediately preceding the month of publication of RFP,
b) Operation and publication of RFP, in accordance with the relevant in accordance with the relevant Contract agreement or
maintenance Contract agreement or similar contract executed for similar contract executed for such CETP(s). The CETP(s)
experience such CETP(s). The CETP(s) for which the Bidder is for which the Bidder is claiming O&M experience should
claiming O&M experience should have been have been developed using any technology.
developed using any technology. ii. For this purpose, the Company claiming the experience
ii. For this purpose, the Company claiming the will be required to submit a certificate issued by the
experience will be required to submit a certificate relevant Client/ government body.
issued by the Client/relevant government body.body.
Page 6 of 24
16. 4.1.2 b (i) of the RFP the Bidder may rely on the experience of its the Bidder may rely on the experience of its Associate(s)
document Associate(s) for demonstrating the Technical for demonstrating the Technical Capacity (including, if
Capacity (including, if applicable, under Clause applicable, under Clause 4.1.1). However, a Bidder
4.1.3). However, a Bidder claiming the experience claiming the experience of the Associates for Technical
of the Associates for Technical Capacity, shall Capacity, shall submit a Letter of Commitment (Annexure
submit a Letter of Commitment (Annexure 3) from 3) from such Associate that the expertise of the Associate
such Associate that the expertise of the Associate will be made available during the development and
will be made available during the development and operation of the Project
operation of the Project
17. RFP Document: The Selected Bidder shall cause the Contractor to The Selected Bidder shall cause the Contractor to provide
Article 16 B O&M provide the O&M Security in the form of bank the O&M Security/Securities in the form of bank
Security – Clause 16 guarantees issued by a Scheduled Bank in India. guarantee(s) issued by a Scheduled Bank in India / foreign
B.3 The O&M Security shall be issued in favour of bank listed with the Reserve Bank of India having its
"Jajmau Tannery Effluent Treatment Association branches in India. The Performance Security/Securities
payable at Kanpur. shall be issued in favour of "JAJMAU TANNERY
EFFLUENT TREATMENT ASSOCIATION", payable
at Kanpur
O&M security shall be submitted by the contractor

one month prior to Operation Starting Date.
The O&M security will be returned to the contractor
after three (3) months from the End Date.
18. Section IV: Bid Data "Facilities: The maximum area of land available "Facilities: The maximum area of land available and
Sheet / Page No. 62 and allocated for setting up the CETP and other allocated for setting up the CETP and other facilities is
of 724 / Reference facilities is 1,12,000 sq.m." 1,15,000sq.m."
Clause 1.6: Facilities
19. Schedule 1: Special 9. Clause 1.6.2 – Arbitration 9. Clause 1.6.2 – Arbitration
Conditions of 1.1. Dispute Resolution by Arbitration 1.1. Dispute Resolution by Arbitration
Contract If a Dispute is not resolved in accordance with the If a Dispute is not resolved in accordance with the Clause
Clause 1.6.1 of the GCC, any Party to the Dispute 1.6.1 of the GCC, any Party to the Dispute shall be
shall be entitled to refer the Dispute to arbitration to entitled to refer the Dispute to arbitration to be finally
be finally resolved in the manner set out in this resolved in the manner set out in this Clause 1.6.2 by
Page 7 of 24
Clause 1.6.2 by issuing a notice to the other Parties issuing a notice to the other Parties (Notice of
(Notice of Arbitration). This Agreement and the Arbitration). This Agreement and the rights and
rights and obligations of the Parties shall remain in obligations of the Parties shall remain in full force and
full force and effect pending the award in such effect pending the award in such arbitration proceeding.
arbitration proceeding. If a Dispute is referred to arbitration by a Party, such
If a Dispute is referred to arbitration by a Party, Dispute shall be resolved by an Arbitration Panel
such Dispute shall be resolved by a sole arbitrator constituted with three Arbitrators. Each party shall
to be appointed by mutual agreement of the Parties. select one Arbitrator and third Arbitrator shall be
If the Parties fail to appoint an arbitrator within 30 appointed by two Arbitrators selected.
days after service of the Notice of Arbitration, such
arbitrator shall be appointed in accordance with the The venue of the arbitration shall be Kanpur and the
Arbitration Act. language of the arbitration shall be English. The
The venue of the arbitration shall be Kanpur and arbitration shall be conducted in accordance with the
the language of the arbitration shall be English. The Arbitration Act.
arbitration shall be conducted in accordance with (i) The arbitration award of the Arbitration Panel shall
the Arbitration Act. be final and binding on the Parties and shall be
(i) The arbitration award of the arbitrator shall be enforceable in accordance with its terms. The Arbitration
final and binding on the Parties and shall be Panel shall state reasons for its findings in writing.
enforceable in accordance with its terms. The (ii) The costs of arbitration and the manner of bearing
arbitrator shall state reasons for its findings in such costs shall be determined by the Arbitration Panel.
writing. (iii) The arbitration shall be governed by the laws of India.
(ii) The costs of arbitration and the manner of
bearing such costs shall be determined by the
arbitrator.
(iii) The arbitration shall be governed by the laws
of India.
20. Schedule 1 Clause 2.3.6 (2) Delay of Completion - Liquidated Clause 2.3.6 (2) Delay of Completion - Liquidated
Special Conditions Damages- Delay Damages- Delay
of Contract Table for Liquidated Damages Table for Liquidated Damages – Please refer to the
Point No.15 updated table at the end of the addendum.
Page 8 of 24
21. Schedule 1 - (Point 30) GCC Clause No.1.9, 5 (b) - the Contractor
Special Conditions shall send further interim claims at monthly intervals,
of Contract giving the accumulated delay or amount claimed, and
Point No.30 such further particulars as the Project Engineer may
reasonable require; and
22. Schedule 1 - (Point 31) GCC Clause 2.3.3. Design-Build Time
Special Conditions Schedule
of Contract (1) The Contractor shall submit a detailed time
Point No.31 programme (the “Time Schedule”) to the Project Engineer
no later than 30 days after the Design-Build Starting Date.
The Contractor shall also submit a revised Time Schedule
whenever the previous Time Schedule is inconsistent with
actual progress or with the Contractor’s obligations. Each
Time Schedule shall include a description of,
(a) the order in which the Contractor intends to carry
out the Design-Build Services, including the anticipated
timing of each stage of design, Design-Build Documents,
procurement, manufacture, inspection, delivery to the
Site, construction, erection, testing and commissioning;
(b) the periods for review and any other submissions,
approvals and consents specified in the Contract;
(c) the sequence and timing of inspections and tests
specified in the Contract;
(d) the scheduled Time for Completion, the planned
Time for Completion and the planned Operations Starting
Date;
(e) all major events and activities in the production of
Design-Build Documents
(f) all major phases and monthly milestones of the
Design-Build Services and
(g) Payment Breakup Schedule for monthly payments
during the Design-Build period.
Page 9 of 24
23. Schedule 2 - Design The Contractor shall carry out and be responsible The Contractor shall carry out and be responsible for the
Build Services for the review of owner’s design and redesign review of owner’s design and redesign where necessary;
Schedule (DBSS) where necessary; and construction, Installation, and construction, Installation, commissioning, testing and
Article 1 – General commissioning, testing and conducting trial run conducting trial run including performance guarantee and
1.1 Description of including performance guarantee, Operation & reliability guarantee tests as per Schedule 16 for:
Design-Build Maintenance for 6 months and reliability guarantee
Services tests for:
Para 1
24. Schedule 4: Scope of Designs and Drawings before Effectiveness During construction period
work - Submission
required for the Construction Plan and Project Programme before
contractor table: Effectiveness
Submission and
Timeline
25. Schedule 4: Scope of "The tendering schedule is provided in Section "The tenderers are requested to inspect the site before
Work iv - Project Error! Reference ource not found., however the tendering. Tenderer will give an undertaking to the
Agreement / Page tenderers are requested to inspect the site before effect that they have visited the site and acquainted
No. 245 of 724 / tendering. Tenderer will give an undertaking to the themselves of site conditions as per the format given in
Scope of work clause effect that they have visited the site and acquainted the annexure".
iv themselves of site conditions as per the format
given in the annexure."
26. Schedule 4: Scope of To treat the Effluent to meet the discharge "To treat the Effluent to meet the parameters as per
Work - Project standards prescribed by UPPCB / CPCB and, an the performance guarantee given in Schedule 16
Agreement / Page inlet TDS concentration of 13,000 mg/l and Total (Technical Specifications of Construction Phase) under
No. 249 of 724 / Chromium of 20 mg/l to be considered for Warranty / Guarantee table."
Operation and Operation & Maintenance purposes.
Maintenance of
Components (a) to
(d) / Detailed Scope
of Works - (i)
Page 10 of 24
27. Schedule 6 d) The Project Engineer shall review the d) The Project Engineer shall review the construction
Scope of Work of construction progress of the project as per the progress of the project as per the Monthly Payment
the Project Engineer Quarterly Payment Milestones proposed by the Milestones proposed by the Contractor and provide
and his team for the Contractor and provide necessary recommendations necessary recommendations to JTETA for the purpose of
CETP Facilities to JTETA for the purpose of issuance of Milestone issuance of Milestone Construction Certificates
Construction Certificates
28. Schedule 4: Scope of Loading, unloading, bagging and disposal/ The following TSDF facilities are available near the
Work - Operation transportation of thedewatered sludge to TDSF proposed project location at Jajmau:
and Maintenance of facility in the State of Uttar Pradesh 1. Bharat oil & waste management Ltd. at Kanpur-
Components (a) to Dehat, Akbarpur, UP.
(d) / Detailed Scope 2. Ramky Enviro Engineers Ltd in at Kanpur-Dehat and
of Works - (x) additionally newly constructed one near Jajmau CETP.
3. Industrial infrastructure services (India) Ltd. UPSIDC
Leather technology park Banthar, Unnao, U.P
29. Schedule 4 - xxii. The collection and transportation of spent chrome
Scope of Works liquor from individual tannery units to CCRU using
OPERATION AND tankers.
MAINTENANCE
OF COMPONENTS
(a) TO
(d)
30. Schedule 4: 8.11 Feasibility study report on roof top solar Deleted
Submission required power plant
from the contractor – 8.12 Feasibility study report on micro hydro
submission and turbine power plant
timeline clause 8.11, 8.13 Feasibility study report for transfer of
8.12 & 8.13 generated power to Grid
31. Schedule No 5: The entire Works given in the Scope of work shall The entire Works given in the Scope of work shall be
timeline for be completed from the date of issuance of Letter of completed from the Effective Date within a period as
completion of work - intent within a period as mentioned below: mentioned below:
Clause no 1.1
Page 11 of 24
32. Schedule 7: Key Section 1.1.2: Treated Effluent Quality: Section 1.1.2: Effluent Quality
Performance The Treated Effluent shall meet the following The Treated Effluent shall meet the following
Indicators - Section requirements. requirements after Ultra Filtration (UF):
1.1.2 Treated
Effluent Quality Discharge S.No. Parameters UoM Outlet of UF
S.No. Parameters UoM
(heading to the table) standards 1 pH - 6.5 to 8.5
1 pH - 6 to 9 2 Total Dissolved mg/l <2100
2 Fixed Dissolved mg/l 2100 mg/l Solids (TDS)#
Solids (FDS)# 3 BOD3 27oC mg/l <5
3 BOD3 27oC mg/l 30 4 COD mg/l <160
4 COD mg/l 250 5 Total Suspended mg/l BDL
5 Chlorides (as Cl-) mg/l 1000 Solids (TSS)
6 Sulphates (as S4 mg/l 1000 6 Total Chromium mg/l BDL
2-)
7 Total Suspended mg/l 100 BDL – Below Detectable Level
Solids (TSS) # this parameter will be achieved by dilution with
8 Ammoniacal mg/l 50 available treated sewage with minimum quantity of 173
nitrogen MLD and TDS ≤ 600 mg/l, subject to CETP influent TDS
9 Sulphide (as S2-) mg/l 2.0 value of ≤ 13000 mg/l.
10 Total Chromium mg/l 2.0
*Notification under Environment (Protection)
Amendment Rules, 2015 for CETP
BDL – Below Detectable Level
#FDS of 2100 mg/l will be achieved by dilution
with available treated sewage
33. Schedule 9: The contractor shall proactively assist JTETA in The contractor shall proactively assist JTETA in obtaining
obtaining in all the required permits. in all the required permits.
Any out of pocket expenses incurred by the successful
bidder shall be reimbursed by JTETA at actuals
against submission of bills.
Page 12 of 24
34. Schedule 12: Terms Existing Schedule Please refer to the updated schedule given at the end of
and procedure of this addendum.
payment schedule/
Break-up of payment
for electro
mechanical works
35. Schedule 13: Price This Schedule lays down the procedure for This Schedule lays down the procedure for determining
Adjustment Clause determining the price the price adjustment to be applied to the following
no:1.1 adjustment to be applied to the following components of the contract price:
components of the contract price: (i) Design-Build Price for the Facilities, if SCC 5.1 (3)
(i) Design-Build Price for the Network, if SCC 5.1 stipulates that price adjustment will apply to Design-Build
(3) stipulates that price adjustment will apply to Price.
Design-Build Price. (ii) Price for Operation & Maintenance of the Facilities.
(ii) Price for Operation & Maintenance of the
Network.
36. Schedule 16 - Schedule 16 - Technical Specifications for Please refer to Annexure 1 of this Addendum
Technical Construction Phase
Specifications for
Construction Phase
37. Schedule 17 - Schedule 17 - General Specifications for Please refer to Annexure 2 of this Addendum
General Construction Phase
Specifications for
Construction Phase
38. Schedule 18 - List of Schedule 18 - List of Drawings Please refer to Annexure 3 of this Addendum
Drawings In drawing no.NMCG/TIN/JAJ/KNR/CETP/TTP/2017 –
Process Flow Diagram with water balance for 20 MLD
Tannery Based CETP (upto UF) at Jajmau, Kanpur –
‘Treated Tannery waste water to River Discharge’ may be
read as ‘Treated Tannery waste water to existing
Irrigation Channel’.
39. Annexure 7: Annexure 7: Financial Bid (PDF) Annexure 7: Financial Bid (Excel Sheet)
Financial Bid
Page 13 of 24
Reference to S. No. 20 of Addendum.
1. Clause 2.3.6 (2) Delay of Completion - Liquidated Damages- Delay
Time is the essence of the Contract. The Contractor shall be liable to pay
Liquidated Damages to the JTETA in accordance with GCC clause 2.3.6 (2)
if the Contractor fails to achieve various activities/ milestones as mentioned
below:
S.N Activity/Milestone Target Liquidated damages per

Completion day for delay in completion
Time of activity/Milestone
(1) (2) (3) (4)
1 Completion of works of 15% 6 months Amount equivalent to 0.05%
(cumulative) of Contract value of 10% of Contract Value for
of Design Build Services Design-Build Services -
stipulated in the signed contract rounded off to thousands of
INR
INR
INR
INR
5 Completion of works of 80% 18 Months Amount equivalent to 0.05%
INR
6 Completion of works of 90% 21 Months Amount equivalent to 0.05%
INR
Page 14 of 24
S.N Activity/Milestone Target Liquidated damages per
Completion day for delay in completion
Time of activity/Milestone
(1) (2) (3) (4)
7 Completion of works of 24 months Amount equivalent to 0.05%
contracted Design-Build [Insert of 20% of Contract Value for
Services in all respects specified Design-Build Services -
Completion rounded off to thousands of
Time] INR
Delay Liquidated Damages recovered on account of delay in completion of an

activity/activities will qualify for refund to the Contractor, if the contracted
works of the design-build services part of the contract are completed in all
respects within the stipulated period or the revised completion period if so
agreed to by the parties in accordance GCC clause2.3.4.
Page 15 of 24
Reference to S. No. 34 of Addendum.
Schedule 12
TERMS AND PROCEDURE OF PAYMENT
JAJMAU TANNERY EFFLUENT TREATMENT ASSOCIATION

(JTETA) COMMON EFFLUENT TREATMENT PLANT (CETP)
PROJECT AGREEMENT
Page 16 of 24
For clarification purposes, all payments, terms and procedures set out in Article 1 and Article
2 of this Schedule shall be separately applicable.
ARTICLE 1. Payment of Design & Build Price

1. Mobilisation Advance:
1.1 Advance payment as an interest free loan for mobilisation and cash flow support for
an amount equal to 10 % of the Design-Build Price as stipulated in the contract shall
be paid to the Contractor against ‘Bank Guarantee for Advance Payment’ for the same
amount subject to the provisions of this Contract.
(i) 5% within 30 days of effective date of contract; and
(ii) 5% on mobilization at the site including setting up of the Contractor’s office,
deployment of manpower and machinery & equipment for construction
1.2 Repayment of Mobilisation advance:
The Mobilization Advance paid to the Contractor by the JTETA shall be recovered
commencing from the date on which the payment to the Contractor has reached 20 %
of the Value of Design, Build and Commissioning Services and shall be recovered at
the rate of 15 % from each bill submitted by the Contractor for payment. The entire
amount of mobilization advance shall be recovered latest by the time payments up to
90 % of the Value of Design, Build and Commissioning Services have been claimed
by the Contractor.
Notwithstanding anything contained in this Agreement, if the Contractor fails to
complete/progress evident by the imposition of Delay Liquidated Damages, for
reasons attributable to the Concessionaire, then the Contractor shall be liable to pay
simple interest at the rate of 8% on the portion of the Mobilization Advance to be
deducted from the amount payable for that quarter of payment for a the period of
delay(as calculated against the approved construction plan) that has happened in that
quarter . Such interest will be payable from the relevant Scheduled Milestone
Completion Date until the work for the Milestone is completed, as certified by the
JTETA
1.2 Payment of Design-Build Price
1.2.1 The payment under this agreement shall be monthly. The Contractor shall submit to
the Project Engineer monthly statements of the value of the work completed less the
cumulative amount certified previously along with details of measurement of the quantity of
works executed in a tabulated form as approved by the Project Engineer. The Project
Engineer will follow procedures such as measurement, check measurements, approving
deviations etc. and certify such invoices for payment. The Contractor shall include in the
Monthly Statements only such items of works which are described in the ‘Payment Break-up
Page 17 of 24
Schedule’ appended at the end of this Schedule 12, provided such items have been completed
during the month.
1.2.2 The Project Engineer shall check the details given in the Contractor's monthly
statement and within 7 days certify the amounts to be paid to the Contractor after taking into
account any credit or debit for the month in question in respect of materials for the works in
the relevant amount and under conditions set forth in para 1.2 above, deductions for advance
payments, secured advance, other recoveries, adjustment on account of Liquidated Damages -
Operations, and other adjustments in terms of the contract and deduction of taxes at source,
as applicable under the law.
1.2.3 The value of work executed shall be determined by the Project Engineer after due check
measurement of the quantities claimed as executed by the Contractor, and only such items of
works included in the Monthly Statement will qualify for verification/payment if these have
been identified as such in the ‘Payment Break-up Schedule’ appended at the end of this
Schedule 12. For items of works not covered in the said ‘Break-up Schedule’, payment as per
rate quoted and quantity executed shall be verified for payment.
1.2.4 The Project Engineer may exclude any item certified in a previous certificate or reduce
the proportion of any item previously certified in any certificate in the light of later
information.
1.2.5 The Contractor shall submit his claim for the price adjustment, if applicable to this
contract as per SCC 5.1(3), along with his claim for payment for the work done during the
month, and price adjustment will be allowed as per formulae stipulated in Schedule 13 of the
Contract.
1.2.6 The procedure for payment during Design Build Period shall be read in conjunction
with Article 2 (3) and Article 2 (4) of this Schedule.
1.2.7 JTETA will endeavour to release the payment for the monthly payment milestone
within 7 (seven) days from the issuance of interim payment certificate by the Project
Engineer.
ARTICLE 2. Payment of O&M Prices

1. Payment of O&M Prices for Operations and Maintenance of CETP Project
a. JTETA shall pay O&M prices on a Quarterly basis, from the relevant Operations
Starting Date to the Contractor, as determined in accordance with the provisions of
this Clause and other relevant provisions of this Contract Agreement. The Quarterly
prices in respect of Operations and Maintenance services shall be paid during the
relevant Operations period as three times the quoted monthly O&M prices after
necessary price adjustments and including for Liquidated Damages – Operations
(including Power Consumption Liquidated Damages) computed as per Schedule 20 of
this Contract.
b. If the scope of O&M services is varied by the JTETA owing to variation in the CETP
Project to be operated and maintained by the Contractor during any part of the
contract period, the O&M charges payable to the Contractor shall be subject to
Page 18 of 24
adjustment on the basis of unit O&M prices provided in the Contractor’s Price
Schedule incorporated in Schedule 18 of the Contract.
c. In the event that the occurrence of the Operations Starting Date is delayed for any
reasons, O&M prices shall be paid from the date of commencement of the Operations
till the end of the relevant O&M period.
d. During the O & M Period if the CETP is not operational for a period of more than 15
days, for any reasons that part of the O & M charges such as Consumables Spares &
Maintenance and Sludge Handling will be paid for the period on pro rate basis.
2. Payments for power connection from Electricity Utility Company

The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining power connection at his cost for meeting
power requirements during the Design Build Period, and all costs of energy consumption
during this period shall be borne by the Contractor.
For meeting power requirement during Operation and Maintenance Period, the Contractor
shall approach the Electricity Utility Company for getting the required sanction and power
connection. The Owner shall assist the Contractor on best effort basis in obtaining such
power connection. The Contractor will make all payments required for obtaining the power
connection including security deposit, if any, and such amount will be reimbursed by the
Owner within 60 days of submission of Contractor’s claim.
Payment of Power Charges:
The Contractor shall be responsible for making payments directly to the Utility Company
against all bills (“Electricity Dues”) for electricity consumed in operation of the CETP
Project, if are included in the scope of the contract, as the cost of electrical energy needed for
O&M is included in the O&M price stipulated in the contract.
The Power Charges initially be borne by the Contractor, shall be reimbursed to the Contractor
by JTETA subject to a cap of the Power Charges based on the respective Guaranteed Energy
Consumption. It is clarified that the JTETA will not reimburse the Concessionaire for any
penalty amount levied on the Concessionaire, as part of its electricity bills.
(ii) The Power Charges for any given quarter of the O&M Period will be
calculated as follows:
(A) For the units of energy consumed from the grid (as evidenced
by a copy of the bill issued by the distribution licensee), the
Power Charges will be calculated by multiplying the number of
units consumed in such quarter (subject to the Guaranteed
Energy Consumption) with the Power Unit Rate.
If the Contractor procures power from outside Uttar Pradesh,

then, the Power Unit Rate will be the prevalent power unit rate
Page 19 of 24
in Uttar Pradesh or the tariff at which the Concessionaire
procures power from outside Uttar Pradesh, whichever is lower.
(B) If there is any interruption in the supply of power from the grid,
and the Contractor uses backup power supply from the DG Sets
for the O&M, then:
(I) the Contractor and the JTETA shall jointly take readings
from the meters installed at the DG Sets to determine
the number of units of energy consumed from the DG
Sets for the O&M of the relevant Facility;
(II) for each Facility, the number of units of energy

consumed from the DG Sets (determined as per (I)
above) shall be adjusted such that the aggregate of the
total number of units consumed from the grid and the
total number of units consumed from the DG Sets shall
not exceed the Guaranteed Energy Consumption for
such Facility (Adjusted DG Set Units);
(III) the quantity of diesel consumed to generate the

Adjusted DG Set Units in the relevant quarter shall be
calculated by the JTETA based on the rated specific fuel
consumption of the DG Sets specified by the
manufacturers of the DG Sets; and
(IV) the Power Charges for the Adjusted DG Set Units will
be calculated by multiplying the quantity of diesel
consumed (determined as per (III) above) with the Fuel
Price.
(C) For each Facility, the Contractor shall be liable to pay

liquidated damages to the JTETA for any units of energy
consumed beyond the Guaranteed Energy Consumption
(whether from the grid or from the DG Sets) for such Facility
(Power Consumption Liquidated Damages), which will be
calculated as follows:
(I) For excess power consumption up to 5% of the

Guaranteed Energy Consumption:
Power Consumption Liquidated Damages: (Number of

power units consumed in the relevant quarter –
Guaranteed Energy Consumption for such quarter) *
[Power Unit Rate] * 0.25
Page 20 of 24
(II) For excess power consumption between 5% and 10% of
the Guaranteed Energy Consumption:
[Power Unit Rate] * 0.5
(III) For excess power consumption above 10% of the

Guaranteed Energy Consumption:

[Power Unit Rate]
(D) The Power Consumption Liquidated Damages payable by the

Concessionaire in any quarter of the O&M Period will be
deducted from the O&M Charges payable to the Concessionaire
for such quarter. If the Power Consumption Liquidated
Damages for a quarter exceed the O&M Charges for such
quarter, then the excess amounts shall, at the discretion of the
Jal Nigam, either be adjusted against the O&M Charges for the
subsequent quarter or recovered from the O&M Security.
3. Certification of payments by Project Engineer

The Contractor shall submit all monthly statements of claims for payment during the Design-
Build Period, and quarterly bills for payment of the O&M charges & also the quarterly bills
relating to adjustment to O&M charges during the O&M Period to the Project Engineer. After
examining these bills, the Project Engineer shall forward them to JTETA along with the
Interim Payment Certificate (IPC) for the amount considered payable by him as per terms and
conditions of the Contract.
Each IPC submitted by the Project Engineer shall carry a stipulation that the Performance
Security of the required amount furnished by the Contractor continues to be valid for a
minimum of 120 days as on the date of certification of payment and the same shall be
verified by the paying authority before releasing the payment against the IPC.
4. Right to withhold
The Project Engineer / JTETA may refuse to approve any payment, because of subsequently
discovered evidence as a result of subsequent inspections or tests, nullify any such payment
previously approved and pay to such extent as may be necessary in the opinion of the Project
Engineer because (a) the work is defective (b) third party claims have been filed or there is
reasonable evidence indicating probability of such claims (c) of the Contractor’s failure to
make payment properly to sub-Contractors or for labor, materials or equipment (d) of damage
Page 21 of 24
to another Contractor or to the property of others caused by the Contractor (e) of the
Contractor’s neglect or unsatisfactory proceeding of the work (f) Contractor owes a liability
or a sum to Owner.
When the grounds for withholding payments are removed, payments shall be made for
amounts withheld to the extent the Contractor is entitled to payment.
PAYMENT BREAK UP SCHEDULE OF CIVIL, ELECTRICAL AND

MECHANICAL WORKS (EXECUTION)
This will be modified upon the approval of the Design-Build Time Schedule submitted
by the Contractor, to include monthly milestones and corresponding timelines for
achievement.
PAYMENT SCHEDULE.
1. For Civil Works
1.1. For RCC Tanks
S. Component wise
Activities
No. Payment in %
I Approval of design & drawing 3%
Ii Initial open excavation 1%
Iii Erection & fixing of cutting shoe 5%
Construction of well staining and its sinking up to 50% 25%
Iv depth BGL
Construction of well staining & sinking upto 100% depth 26%
V BGL
Vi Plugging of well, boulder filing etc. 5%
R.C.C. work in bottom of well including bottom finishing 5%
Vii with required slopes with cement concrete.
Viii Walkway and plate form 5%
Ix Beam, column including fixing of gantry girder 7%
X Stair case, ladder, grill & other miscellaneous work 3%
Xi water tightness test 5%
Xii After commissioning & trial rum 10%
Total 100%
1.2. SCREEN CHAMBER, DISTRIBUTION CHAMBER AND VALVE

CHAMBER
S. Component wise
Activities
No. Payment in %
I Approval of design & drawing 3%
Ii Initial open excavation 2%
Iii Lean concrete 5%
Iv Construction of RCC Raft 20%
Page 22 of 24
S. Component wise
Activities
No. Payment in %
V Construction of RCC side walls 35%
Vi Construction of cover blocks. 10%
Vii Construction of platform for operation of sluice valve & 10%
other miscellaneous work
Viii water tightness test 5%
Ix After commissioning & trial rum 10%
Total 100%
1.3. RCC BUILDINGS
S. Component wise
Activities
No. Payment in %
i. Approval of designs and drawings 2%
ii. Excavation 2%
iii. Sub Structure & Super structure
A Raft footing/ pile foundation 10%
B Construction of columns and beams 15%
C Wall up to plinth level including plinth beam 3%
D Wall up to lintel level including lintel beam 10%
E Wall up to slab level 5%
Roof slab & beams including support for fixing gantry 13%
F girders
iv. Doors / Windows/Ventilators/Rolling shutter
A Supply at site 3%
B Fixing in position 2%
V Flooring/ cable trunk 5%
Vi Plastering 5%
vii. Internal electrification 2%
Viii Painting/ varnishing 5%
Ix Stair case 5%
Drainage including construction of apron around the 3%
X building
Commissioning including site clearance & Misc. finishing 10%
Xii items
Total 100%
1.4. INTER PATHWAY, APPROACH ROAD, BOUNDARY WALL & FENCING

WITH GATES, LANDSCAPING AND SITE DEVELOPMENT
S. Component wise
Activities
No. Payment in %
i. Approval of designs and drawings 10%
ii. Completion of Construction 90%
Total 100%
Page 23 of 24
2. BREAK UP OF PAYMENT FOR ELECTRO MECHANICAL WORKS
S. Component wise
Activities
No. Payment in %
i. Payment to be made against supply & installation 70%
ii Payment to be made against installation 10%
iii. Payment to be made after testing at Site 10%
iv. Amount to be paid after commissioning and three months 10%
of trial run
Total 100%
3. BREAK UP OF PAYMENT FOR COLLECTION AND CONVEYANCE SYSTEM

PIPELINE
Component wise
S. No Activity
Payment in %
1 Approval of design & Drawing 2%
Ground Penetrating Radar survey, Seismic Survey,

2 Electric Tomography, Laying , Jointing & Water 2%
tightness test of pipe
3 Supply of Pipes 32%

4 Excavation of Shafts & Confined Excavation, Closed
Planking & Refilling of trenches, pits 4%
5 Trench Cutting & Installation of Product Pipe 40%
6 Construction of Composite Manholes 14%
Commissioning including site clearance & Misc.
7
finishing items 6%
Total 100%
Page 24 of 24
Annexure 1 - Schedule 16
Technical Specifications for Construction Phase
JAJMAU TANNERY EFFLUENT TREATMENT ASSOCIATION (JTETA) COMMON

EFFLUENT TREATMENT PLANT (CETP) PROJECT AGREEMENT
Page 1 of 449
Technical Specification for Component A, B, C &D
Page 2 of 449
Background:
Jajmau Tannery Effluent Treatment Association (JTETA) is implementing “20 MLD CETP
along with ‘Treated Sewage’ Dilution Facility” for Jajmau Leather Cluster, Kanpur, Uttar
Pradesh” under the scheme of the Industrial Pollution head of Namami Gange – National
Ganga Plan (NGP) of Government of India.
The proposed 20 MLD CETP project would have treatment process upto Tertiary treatment
including Ultra Filtration in Phase-I stage and an add-on Modular RO System as Phase-II, in
case it is required to be taken up later.
This RFP document covers only Phase-I of the project and comprises of Five Components
given below and the details of which are covered in next section.
a) 20 MLD (2 modules x 10 MLD) Tannery Common Effluent Treatment Plant (CETP)

Upto Tertiary Treatment along with Treated Sewage Dilution Facility,
b) Raw effluent collection and conveyance system to handle 20 MLD effluent,
c) 900 KLD (3 x 300 KLD) Common Chrome Recovery Units (CCRU),
d) 200 KLD capacity zero liquid discharge pilot plant and
e) O & M for the above (a) to (d) 60 months
Brief Concept:
The individual tannery units would have Pre-Treatment Units (PTU) to remove readily
settleable solids, with/without any chemical addition, before pumping into CETP Raw Effluent
Collection & Conveyance system. This is the most critical aspect as this will ensure the
underground sewer network is not choked and overflows do not happen. This will ensure the
design carrying capacity of the pipelines are not reduced due to accumulations of solids and
build-up of scale. The pre-treatment system will comprise of coarse and fine screens,
sedimentation tanks, sludge dewatering systems, online conductivity and flow metering
devices with centralized SCADA at the CETP for monitoring of operation of PTUs and
discharge from each Tannery unit. The responsibility of implementation of PTUs at individual
member tanneries as per the design and items provided in the TWIC DPR would be with the
SPV in order to meet the influent quality to the C&C system for efficient performance of the
CETP. For the purpose of construction of PTUs in all member tanneries, the SPV will engage
a separate contractor and the same is not part of this RFP.
Page 3 of 449
All effluents, other than the spent chrome liquor, would be discharged to the CETP through
closed pipeline instead of open drains as at present. The effluents will be conveyed mostly
through gravity and intermediate pumping stations will be installed wherever necessary. The
pipeline will be designed to avoid sludge depositing by maintaining high self-cleansing
velocities, manholes for cleaning and mobile sewer cleaning system.
A common Chrome Recovery Unit (CCRU) with capacity of 300 KLD x 3 modules has also
been proposed in the project for recovery and reuse of Chromium. Spent Chrome liquor
collection from each Tannery unit would be transported through tankers to CCRU & the
recovered chrome shall be sent through drums or sold. This is to ensure that all tanneries treat
the chrome liquor uniformly and are not encumbered in operating such systems in their own
premises.
Tannery effluent would be treated in the proposed CETP, which is designed upto Tertiary
treatment (UF) to ensure they meet the required effluent discharge standards for surface water
discharge, except TDS, before dilution with planned amount of secondary treated sewage
quantity from STP in order to meet the TDS standards of less than 2100 mg/l.
It is also proposed to implement a Zero Liquid Discharge (ZLD) based field scale pilot plant
with a capacity of 200 KLD as part of this project for carrying out the Research and
Developmental activities to demonstrate high recovery of water (>95%) and high purity sodium
chloride and sodium sulphate salts.
The sludge to be generated from the CETP, after de-watering, would either be sent for co-
processing in cement industry and / disposed to the UPPCB recognized Treatment Storage and
Disposal Facility (TSDF) site in the state of Uttar Pradesh.
SCOPE OF WORK
The general Scope of work for the project involves design, engineering, procurement,
Manufacture, shop fabrication, assembly, pre-assembly, tests and inspection at Manufacturer’s
works, packing, shipment, supply, unloading, leading to storage area, reloading, leading to
erection site, civil construction, erection & commissioning, trial run and performance testing
and the specific schedule-wise scope of work along with conceptual design, plant layout of the
area and building, PFD and P&ID has been provided along with RFP:
Page 4 of 449
COMPONENT – A: 20 MLD (2 Module x 10 MLD) TANNERY COMMON EFFLUENT
TREATMENT PLANT (CETP) UPTO TERTIARY TREATMENT ALONG WITH
TREATED SEWAGE DILUTION FACILITY.
COMPONENT – B: RAW EFFLUENT COLLECTION & CONVEYANCE SYSTEM

TO HANDLE 20 MLD EFFLUENT
Construction, Supply, Erection, Testing, & commissioning of Raw Effluent Collection &
Conveyance System and Augmentation of existing pumping Stations including Civil, Electro
Mechanical & Instrumentation works.
COMPONENT - C: COMMON CHROME RECOVERY UNITS (CCRU)
Construction, Supply, Fabrication, Erection, Testing, & commissioning of 300 cu.m /day x 3
Module (900 cu.m/day) capacity Common Chrome Recovery System
COMPONENT - D: 200 KLD CAPACITY ZERO LIQUID DISCHARGE (ZLD) PILOT

PLANT
Construction, Supply, Fabrication, Erection, Civil and Electro-Mechanical & Instrumentation

works. Testing, & commissioning of 200 KLD Zero Liquid Discharge (ZLD) Pilot Plant for
Tannery Effluent.
General Scope of Work
The general Scope of work for the project involves design, engineering, procurement,
Manufacture, shop fabrication, assembly, pre-assembly, tests and inspection at Manufacturer’s
works, packing, shipment, supply, unloading, leading to storage area, reloading, leading to
erection site, civil construction, erection & commissioning, trial run and performance testing
and the specific schedule-wise scope of work is given below:
i. The above scope of work including civil works is to be carried out in accordance
to the specifications, detailed design drawings and bill of quantities given in the
RFP Document.
ii. The scope of work also involves site development, soil investigation &
foundation design, structural design, civil work design, preparation of
architectural and construction drawings.
iii. All forms of civil works are to be carried out after approval from PMA/ NMCG
or from the competent authority identified by PMA. The approval also includes
obtaining civil / mechanical structural design, proof checking foundation and
Page 5 of 449
super - structure from third party, preferably from reputed organization viz. NITs
or IITs. Cost of vetting of Engineering Documents structural design shall be
borne by the contractor.
iv. The Scope of work is provided in Section 4 of ITB, however the tenderers are
requested to inspect the site before RFP. Tenderer will give an undertaking to the
effect that they have visited the site and acquainted themselves of site conditions
as per the format given in the annexure.
v. On approval of designs, the contractor has to prepare and submit detailed
engineering drawings and work schedule to PMA.
vi. Electrical works for A, B, C & D components including supply, installation,
erection, testing & commissioning of Electrical substation, High voltage
switchgear Panel & Medium Volt panel boards (Power Control Center, Machine
Control Center), Lighting Distribution Board, Indoor lighting, Yard and Street
Lights, Capacitor Bank with APFCR panel, Power and control cable and earth
pits etc.,
vii. Storm water drainage, Rain water harvesting structure, internal roads shall be
included in the scope of work under successful bidder.
viii. Successful Bidder shall co-ordinate with SPV for getting approval of Building
plan from local municipality, obtaining consent to establishment (CTO) from
UPPCB, Safety Certificate for Electrical Installation from Electrical
inspectorate, Additional Electrical load approval from State Electricity
Distribution Company (DISCOM), Boiler Installation from Boiler inspectorate
out of pocket expenses for the same shall be paid by SPV. All necessary
documentation support like drawings, etc., shall be provided by the contractor.
All other necessary approval of any manner including those of compliance to
statutory legislations required by the contractor for smooth and proper execution
of works shall be the responsibility of the contractor.
ix. Submission of regular progress report using Primavera or any other equivalent
software to NMCG / SPV / PMA on daily / monthly basis is also responsibility
of the Contractor.
x. All works including civil, electromechanical and instrumentation items required

to complete the entire project are under the scope of the successful tenderer. The
work includes but it is not limited to the activity covered under BOQ given in
the price schedule and work is deemed to have been accepted / awarded to the
successful tenderer on a turnkey basis. Hence any other items required for the
successful completion of above works but not included in the BOQ shall be
Page 6 of 449
included as Additional item and the same should be indicated in the technical bid
as well as financial bids with detailed specifications and quantities. The
additional items cannot be included after fixing the prices and any additional
items mandatorily required for functional completion and satisfactory operations
should be provided by the tenderer and it is deemed to be in the scope of
contractor with in the agreed price fixed. The rate fixed in the work order shall
remain until completion of the project.
xi. Bidders should quote for all of the items as per BOQ given in the Financial Bid.
However, SPV / NMCG reserves the right to modify or delete part of the project
components. In case of such modification, the price would be adjust based on
the item wise quote provided in the financial bid of the RFP document for the
respective modification / deletion of the items.
xii. Hydraulic Testing of all civil tanks.
xiii. Engineering In-charge of the PMA shall from time to time issue necessary
instructions, defects list, comments etc., also including a Punch list, if any, after
completion of erection activities. The Successful Tenderer shall rectify /
complete the points in the punch list before commencement of testing of plant
and machineries.
xiv. Preparation and submission of Basic Engineering Package, As built drawings,

O&M Manual /Standard Operating Procedure (SOP), Equipment operation and
repair manual (EORM) and On-Site Emergency Plan should be submitted before
commissioning activities.
xv. Training of operators of the O&M Agency before commissioning activities and
handing over after successful completion of PGTR and RTR.
xvi. Testing of each treatment components with fresh water

xvii. Commissioning of plant with effluent and stabilization of the plant
xviii. Engineering In-charge of the PMA shall issue the second set of Punch list, if any,
after completion of testing of plant and machineries. The Successful Tenderer
shall rectify / complete the points in the punch list before Performance Test
Guarantee Run (PGTR).
Page 7 of 449
xix. Preparation and submission of O&M Manual, Standard Operating Procedure
(SOP), Equipment operation and repair manual (EORM) and On-Site
Emergency Plan.
xx. Carry out PGTR for a duration of 72 hours with the effluent.
xxi. Carry out Reliability Test Run (RTR) for a duration of 1 month with the effluent.
xxii. Contractor has to follow Effluent analysis procedure as per APHA standard
during demonstration of PGTR, RTR.
xxiii. Training of operators of the O&M Agency for smooth transition during RTR
xxiv. Commencement of Plant Operation and procedure for handing over of the plant
to the O&M Agency and initiate commercial operation of the plant.
xxv. The costs towards Operation and Maintenance of the plant for a maximum period
of 6 months during Testing, Commissioning, Plant stabilization, PGTR and RTR
till handing over to an O&M agency. This includes costs towards Energy (the
EB bill will be paid by the SPV and deducted from the contractor’s bills),
Manpower, Chemicals, Spares and Consumables, Sludge handling and other
miscellaneous costs. In-case of the contractor being unable to complete the
PGTR and RTR as per the schedule and the completion of the above activities
and handing over of the plant to the O&M Operator exceeds beyond the
maximum allocated period of 6 months, the contractor has to bear all the above
listed O&M costs for operation of the plant till the actual date of handing over
to the O&M Operator.
Page 8 of 449
Component-A
Technical specifications for 20 MLD (2
Module X 10 MLD) Tannery Common
Effluent Treatment Plant (CETP)
Upto Tertiary Treatment Along With
Treated Sewage Dilution Facility
Page 9 of 449
Common Effluent Treatment Component
Basis of Design – Effluent Quality

The influent quality parameters to the CETP as given in Table below.
S. No. Parameters Design Parameters

1. pH 7.5-9.0
2. Total suspended solids, mg/lit 3000-5000
3. Colour, Pt.Co 300-500
4. Turbidity, NTU 1000-1300
5. COD, mg/lit 4000-7000
6. BOD @ 200C for 5 days, mg/lit 1800-3000
7. Fixed Dissolved Solids (FDS), mg/lit 20000-23000
8. Sulphate as Na2SO4, mg/lit 2500-5000
9. Chloride as NaCI, mg/lit 12000-13000
10. Total chromium as Cr, mg/lit 50-100
11. Fluoride as F, mg/lit 0.6-1.0
12. Total Alkalinity as CaCO3, mg/lit 2000-2200
13. Total Hardness as CaCO3, mg/lit 1000-1200
14. Calcium Hardness, mg/lit 300-400
15. Magnesium Hardness, mg/lit 700-800
16. Carbonate, mg/lit 1000-1200
17. Bicarbonate, mg/lit 200-500
18. Sulphide as S 100-300
19. Nitrate as NO3, mg/lit 400-500
20. Reactive silica as SiO2, mg/lit 10 to 15
21. Ammonical Nitrogen as N, mg/lit 250-500
22. Total Phosphorous as P, mg/lit 5 to 10
23. Temperature 30 to 35oC
Proposed CETP Treatment Scheme

The proposed treatment scheme would comprise of various units operation/process such as
Coarse screen, Collection well, Fine screen, Plain sedimentation, Storage & Homogenisation
tank, Primary clarifier, Pre-aeration tank/Sulphide removal system, Extended Aeration Type
Aerobic Biological reactor (two stages), Secondary clarification, LSS based Hardness removal
system, Quartz Filter & Ultrafiltration system.
Page 10 of 449
Figure 1: Process Schematic for the proposed CETP with Tertiary Treatment System up to
UF
Page 11 of 449
Screening System
In the screening system, there are two types of screens, namely coarse and fine screens,
considered to remove the floating and other solids present in the tannery waste water. Of these
two screens, coarse screen is provided in the first inlet point of CETP and fine screen will be
provided after the coarse screen. Coarse screen will be provided with manual and mechanised
system and the fine screen with mechanised system to remove the accumulated materials on
the screen with auto backwash facility. In the screening system, two separate screen channels
have been considered with peak factor at 3 and each screen channel will be able handle 10
MLD. In both the coarse and fine screens an opening of 10 mm and 3 mm is provided
respectively.
Grit Chamber
In addition to the screening system, a grit chamber is also provided in the proposed CETP to
remove the grits present in the raw effluent. There are three nos (2W+1S) of grit chambers
considered in the design. Each grit chamber is designed by considering peak factor of 3 with
surface area of 31 sq.m and detention period of 60 sec. Each grit chamber will be able to handle
10 MLD.
Pre-Settling Tank
Pre-settling tank has also been considered in the upstream of the storage and homogenisation
tank to remove flesh, hairs and other materials from the tannery waste water. In this pre-settling
tank, there is no sludge scrapper mechanism provided. The settled sludge @ 8% SC will be
pumped to the sludge thickener periodically by using 100 m3/hr sludge transfer pumps. Three
nos of Pre-setting tanks have been designed which is including one number of standby. In order
to achieve the efficient solid settling, surface overflow rate (SOR) is considered 1m3/m2/hr.
Storage and Homogenisation Tank
After settling, the pre-settled effluent will be collected in the storage and homogenisation tank
(SHT). Hydraulic retention time of 24 hrs / one day volume of effluent capacity has been
provided to make complete homogenisation of effluent and make it fit for other downstream
treatment process. Submersible flow jets and flow makers are considered in this tank for proper
mixing of effluent..
Primary Treatment System - Clariflocculator
The homogenised effluent from the SHT will be pumped to the clariflocculator system, after
dosing of lime and alum in the clariflocculator feed. Two flash mixer are considered in the
proposed treatment scheme. In Flash Mixer –I, milk of lime will be dosed to raise the alkalinity
and precipitation of chromium & other suspended solids. Likewise, Alum will be dosed as
coagulant in Flash mixer-II. After dosing of milk of lime (MOL) and alum in the raw effluent
it will be passed to the clariflocculator system to settle the sludge. Surface overflow rate (SOR)
is an important design parameter which governs the efficiency of the clarifier. As per CPHEEO
manual a SOR of 1m3/m2/hr has been considered to get maximum solid reduction efficiency in
the clariflocculator. Three no’s of primary clarifiers have been considered in the design and out
of which there are two no’s will be in operational and another one is provided as standby to
maintain continuous operation of the system during any break down period.
Page 12 of 449
Pre-aeration Tank / Sulphide Removal System
Before feeding of treated effluent from LSS to aeration tank, sulphide must be removed from
the effluent. Liquid Oxygen and catalyst MnO2 can be used for this purpose. For this, effective
aeration system is considered with necessary diffuser and blowers.
Biological Treatment - Denitrification
Due to presence of high amount of ammonical nitrogen in the tannery effluent, it is necessary
to remove them before feeding into Aerobic Treatment. Otherwise, the residual ammonical
nitrogen will affect the performance of the aerobic process. To achieve a maximum reduction
of Nitrite nitrogen, a Hydraulic Retention Time (HRT) of 10 hrs has been provided for efficient
mixing of effluent with submersible mixers provided @ 0.004 – 0.008 kW/m3.
Basis of Selection of Two Stage Aeration System
In the Proposed CETP, two stages of aeration has been considered in the design to achieve
maximum reduction of BOD and COD. Generally for low loaded extended aeration type
reactor, F/M ratio must be maintained at 0.06 Kgs MLSS/Kg of BOD. Due to difficulties in
maintaining a Low F/M ratio in a single stage reactor, the design has been done as two stages.
Based on this criteria, Aeration tank –I is designed with F/M ratio of 0.15 Kg MLSS/Kg of
BOD and aeration tank –II is designed with F/M ratio of 0.06. Following are the advantages of
two stage aeration system
1. Maximum reduction of BOD and COD

2. Low F/M ratio
3. Low sludge production than conventional activated sludge process.
4. Dissolved Oxygen (DO) meters and blowers are interlinked to reduce the energy
consumption and maintaining of required DO in the aeration tank
5. Good stabilization of sludge.
6. High Hydraulic Retention Time (HRT)
Secondary Clarifier for Biomass Settling

After biological treatment, the treated effluent along with biomass/MLSS will be allowed to
settle in the secondary clarifier to separate treated water and MLSS. Hydraulic retention and
surface overflow rate for the secondary clarifier has been considered as 6.5 hrs and 0.5 m3/m2/hr
respectively. Totally 4 no’s of clarifiers in stage-I&II for settling of MLSS.
Lime-Soda Softening (LSS) based Reactor Clarifier
The effluent from the clariflocculator will be transferred to a Reactive Clarifier to remove
suspended solids and reduce hardness for subsequent treatment with the aid of Polyelectrolyte
Lime & Soda dosing. The Reactor Clarifier is a high rate, solids contact, sludge recirculation
type clarifier which although uses minimum amount of time, space and chemicals, produce
effluent of highest quality in separating solids. It is used principally for clarification, lime
softening, silica reduction, or organic reduction of water and wastewaters containing suspended
solids, colour and organic impurities. As such, it provides a means for chemical addition and
mixing, flocculation and up flow clarification in a single unit. After completion of chemical
Page 13 of 449
reaction, chemical sludge will be formed would be settled at the bottom of the clarifier. This
sludge will be removed periodically and pumped to the sludge thickener for further thickening.
Two nos of reactor clarifier is considered in the design for the inflow of 28,186m3/day, the size
of the clarifier would be about 27m dia x 4m SWD. A sludge transfer pump with 20 m3/hr is
also provided in the clarifier to transfer the sludge to thickener for further concentrating of the
solids.
Hydrated Lime and Soda Ash Dosing System
Milk of lime and Soda ash will be dosed to remove the hardness present in the primary treated
effluent.
Service Water Connection
A Service Water Connection would be provided by JTETA and the Contractor shall construct
underground sump and overhead tanks with capacity of 10 cu.m along with necessary pipelines
for distribution of water for dosing systems, laboratory & buildings and for other necessary
requirements.
Sludge Thickener
The main sources of sludge generation in the proposed CETP would be from pre settling tank
(584 m3/day), primary clarifier (584 m3/day), secondary clarifier (195m3/day) and LSS based
reactor clarifier (584 m3/day). Prior to feeding of these sludge to thickener, it would be
collected in the common tank and then be pumped to the gravity type thickener for which two
no’s of sludge transfer cum feed pumps @ 142m3/hr have been provided along with the
thickener. A gravity type thickener is designed at the solid loading rate of 150 kgs/m2/day and
HRT of 28 hrs is provided for effective thickening of solids. To maintain a uniform overflow
rate of supernatant, there are 262 nos of weir plates have been provided with 11m3/day overflow
rate/weir plate. In addition to this a dedicated sludge thickening mechanism is also provided
for thickening of solids. Further dewatering polymer dosing system is also considered to
enhance the thickening process.
Sludge Dewatering System (Filter Press):
The thickened sludge from the thickener (1772 m3/day)would fed to the, plate and frame,
recessed type filter press for sludge dewatering and sludge cake with 50-60% solids and 50-
40% moisture will be collected and stored in the CETP premises for co-processing in the
cement industry. In the proposed CETP, 12 Nos (10 Working + 2 standby) of filter press units
have been provided for dewatering of sludge. Each Filter press would have 125 Plates and 124
chambers (52 litres). The size of each plate would be about 1300mm x 1300mm x 30mm and
each chamber can hold a volume of 51 litres. To feed the sludge from the thickener a screw
type pumps with the flow rate of 40 m3/hr have been provided. The filtrate from the filter press
will be collected in the drain sump and then would be pumped to the SHT for treating the same
along with the raw effluent.
Proposed Odour Control System Tannery CETP
Sources of odour in Tannery CETP
The odour associated with the Tannery wastewater is mainly due to the degradation or
putrefaction of organic solids generated during the processing of hides at various stages of
Page 14 of 449
Tanning process. During decomposition process, the solids are converted in to an obnoxious
sulphide / other sulphur compounds/Ammonia etc. This gaseous compounds creating air
pollution as well as health issues in the surrounding environment. Thus, the odour control
system is an integral part of the Tannery wastewater management. In view of this, in the
proposed CETP, a dedicate odour control system would be implemented in two stages to
eliminate the odour from the Tannery wastewater.
Corrosion in CETP:
Tannery CETP is highly corrosive and scale forming in nature due to production of H2S Gas
and presents of Salts in the Effluent. Therefore adequate protective control measures including
process control such as neutralization, odour control etc., is required and also periodical
maintenance of structures above water (or) partially above water by proper painting, corrosion
protection etc., is must. Therefore efforts to be made to ensure construction using non-
corrosive structure materials, machinery, instrumentation etc., Concrete with SRC cement to
avoid corrosion and avoidance of metallic structure wherever possible instead using concrete
or any other non- corrosive materials including high grade Stainless Steel / EPOXY coating
etc., is must. In this regards Tenderer has to note that coating of M.S Structure with EPOXY
paint seldom stops corrosion. Therefore use of EPOXY paint to prevent corrosion is not a good
strategy.
Proposed Approach for odour control:

The odour control system is an integral part of the Tannery wastewater management. The
proposed approach for the odour control system is given considering the following,
1. pH control
The Hydrogen sulphide is present mostly at acidic pH. Since, the sulphide gas has a tendency
of escaping at acidic pH and result in bad odour. Thus, there is a need of maintaining the pH
of the raw effluent at an alkaline pH. Therefore, an additional chemical dosing system
comprising of Sodium Hydroxide and Hydrogen Peroxide is also be proposed in the
homogenisation Tank to maintain alkaline pH and oxidation of sulphide gas respectively.
@ pH > 9
H2S ⇌ S 2- + 2H +
2. Oxidation using Air/oxygen supply

Supply of air/oxygen is also considered in the proposed system to oxidise the S 2 – and there
by controlling the odour.
S 2- O2 SO4 2 -
3. Covering of tanks
The covering of the effluent tanks is proposed, where the tanks is agitated the effluent
possibility of stripping of H2S and NH3 will occur. Therefore, the covering of the tanks
is required e.g. SHT/Clarifiers/Sludge holding tanks etc.
Page 15 of 449
4. Dedicated odour control system by providing Bio filters and Chemical dosing
system
In order to eliminate the odour from the effluent, a dedicate odour control system is proposed
and would be implemented in two stages to eliminate the odour from the Tannery wastewater.
The odour removal system would comprises of Bio trickling filter followed by Activated
carbon filter. In addition, waste gas feeding system and water spray unit are also provided along
with the bio trickling filter to feed the waste gas and wetting of the media respectively.
.
Odour control system proposed at Various Treatment Stages of the CETP
Stage-I: As the first stage of wastewater treatment is starts with the receiving of effluent at the
final collection well where wastewater is being collected from various underground piping
networks, one module of bio filter with ACF would be installed. In order to control the escaping
of odour from the sump to the atmosphere, the sump would be covered with exhaust to bio
scrubber.
Stage-2: In addition to the bio filter, an additional chemical dosing system comprising of
Sodium Hydroxide and Hydrogen Peroxide would also be provided in Homogenisation Tank.
Since, the sulphide gas has a tendency of escaping at acidic pH, there is a need of maintaining
the pH of the raw effluent at an alkaline pH in the homogenisation tank. While sodium
hydroxide is involved in maintaining the pH of the wastewater at an alkaline condition, the
hydrogen peroxide act as an oxidising agent. This tank would not be covered as like
provision given in the collection well/sump because of huge area of the tanks and there is a
possibility of removal of most of the odours in the stage-I.
Some of other treatment components of the CETP viz. Primary & secondary clarifiers,
thickeners and filter presses are also not be covered completely, as proposed in the collection
sump. Since, the maintaining of highly alkaline to slightly alkaline pH in the primary clarifiers
and secondary clarifiers respectively, the above said tanks would not be covered. Further, a
very low hydraulic detention time (in hours) provided in the treatment units viz, primary
clarifiers, secondary clarifiers, LSS based reactor clarifier is 4, 6, 4 hours respectively, these
tanks are not proposed to be covered to control the odour.
Sulphide Oxidation System in CETP:
In addition to the odour removal system, a two stage additional sulphide oxidation system is
also considered at the downstream of primary clarifiers / upstream of denitrification system.
To oxidise the sulphide from the wastewater, there is a continuous oxygen supply is required.
In order to supply the oxygen, a liquid oxygen supplying system has been proposed in the
treatment scheme.
Quartz Filter
The unit consists essentially of a mild steel rubber lined pressure vessel. It is externally fitted
with necessary pipework, valves, pressure gauges, and sampling points at the inlet and outlet.
An Electro Magnetic Flow Meter (EMFM) will be provided in the feed and backwash lines for
measurement of treated water and various regeneration flows. The bed consists of graded
Page 16 of 449
pebbles of specified sizes. Water flows downwards through the filter bed and the suspended
solids are retained on the sand surface and between the sand grains immediately below the
surface. The filtered water is evenly collected by header lateral type bottom collecting system.
The bottom collecting system is of lateral type header, which consists of a mild steel header
and PVC laterals. The complete assembly is supported with the help of necessary supporting
members. Once differential pressure exceeds 1 kg/cm2, a filter must be backwashed, thoroughly
to remove the accumulated solids from the surface of the media and then put in normal
operation / service mode.
Ultra-Filtration System
The Treated filtered effluent from Quartz filter will be transferred to Ultra filtration Unit for
ensuring that the SDI (Silt Density Index) is <3. The treated water from the filter would be
pumped through a series of auto back washable filter and let directly into the unit where the
water is forced against an array of semi –permeable UF membranes. The membranes allows
the water molecules to pass through, while the larger molecules and pollutants are screened
out. When compared to other membranes processes, Ultra filtration systems require a much
lower amount of pressure for operation. Moreover, aside from the backwash water, there is no
wastewater stream generated from the UF as the reject and / or backwash water is sent back to
the collection tank for further treatment. The proposed membranes typically would recover 85
to 87.5 % of the inlet water. The entire UF operation and CIP will be controlled by
SCADA/PLC system. To maintain the consistent operation, the UF system has been designed
as modular fashion. In the design 4 modules of UF system (323 m3/hr x 4) each with 77 nos
of membranes of in to out type have considered in the design The feed flux and Gross permeate
flux will be at the 53 and 40 LMH respectively has been considered to maintain the recovery
rate of 85-87%.
Ultra-Filtration CEB and CIP Arrangement
In the proposed treatment scheme, three stream of UF system has been provided for 20 hours
operation per day. A timed chemical backwash sequence can be incorporated to maximize
membrane life and minimize down times due to system overloading. During certain backwash
sequences, cleaning chemicals are dosed inline and are interlocked with the backwash pump to
operate only if the backwash pump is operating. Normally, cleaning chemicals such as sodium
hypochlorite, sodium hydroxide and hydrochloric acid would be used during CEB of UF
membranes.
Likewise, Cleaning in Place (CIP) will also be done apart from the CEB. The CIP (Cleaning in
Place) portion of the UF system will be performed around once every week (or as needed due
to fluctuations in water quality) with the common CIP system for the UF. The CIP regiment
shall require combination of citric acid, sodium hydroxide and sodium hypochlorite. The
cleaning solutions will be circulated through the membranes for a duration of 6 hours/as
required. Piping allowances in the original design yield easy operation of the cleaning process
with minimal manpower intervention.
Role of membrane manufacturer and required support to OEM and Owner:
i. Certifying and testing of Operation control philosophy, P&ID, Plant Layout.
Page 17 of 449
ii. Onsite Support with a site Engineer during commissioning including certifying
readiness of plant for fresh water and effluent runs.
iii. One Year onsite technical support to client after commissioning- letter of support at no
extra cost to be submitted.
The Bill of Quantities (BOQ) is indicative only and the bare minimum required for completion
of this project, the contractor is deemed to have considered all necessary components/
machinery necessary for completion of the project and this work and no claims for additional
quantity or components based on the indicative BOQ will be allowed. However, the Contractor
must supply all materials as per quantities and specifications already given in the BOQ.
Warranty/Guarantee:
 The materials and workmanship shall be guaranteed for a period of twelve (12) months
from the date of successful commissioning of the plant as a whole and handing over.
During this period if any defects are noticed, the same shall be rectified/replaced and/or
verified at your own cost.
 Membrane Warranty: Full replacement warranty within 24 months from date of supply.
(If you are OEM, technical and service backup commitment letter from the membrane
manufacturer should be submitted).
Design detail for proposed 20 MLD CETP

S.No Treatment Stages / Quantity Dimension Design basis / Specifications
Components (Nos)
Phase-I
Preliminary Treatment System
1. Coarse Screen 2 Nos Screen chamber Inflow to the system: 20,000
6.5m x1.5m x 2.0m m3/day
Peak factor: 3
Clear Spacing between bars: 10
mm
Type: Two Nos. each of manual
&mechanised Screens
2. Collection Well 1 No 16 m Dia. x 3m Inflow: 20,000 m3/day
SWD HRT : 15 mins
Volume: 625 m3 Peak factor:3
Submersible mixer: 1 No ( 5.5 kW
each)
Page 18 of 449
Components (Nos)
3. Raw effluent 3 Nos Inflow: 20,000 m3/day
transfer pumps (2W+1S) Capacity of the Pump: 1250
m3/hr@ 12.5 m Head
Total No. of Pumps: 3 Nos
(2W+1S)
kW of the Pump: 75kW
Operation hrs / day : 8 hrs
Type: Submersible
4. Fine Screen 3 Nos Rotary drum screen Inflow to the system: 20,000
(2W+1S) with auto backwash m3/day
arrangement Peak factor: 3
Clear opening : 3 mm
Type: Rotary drum screen
5. Grit Chamber 3 Nos 12.5m L x 2m W x Inflow : 20,000 m3/day
(2W+1S) 1m LD+0.5FB Peak Factor:3
Volume: 31 m3 Peak flow: 2500 m3/hr
Area of Grit chamber:31m2
Settling velocity: 0.15m/sec
Detention Period: 60 seconds
Grit storage depth: 0.33 meter
Horizontal velocity: 0.2m/sec
6. Pre-Settling Tank 3 Nos 33 m Dia. x 3.5 m Inflow:20,000m3/day
(Plain SWD Surface Overflow rate: 1m3/m2/hr
Sedimentation) Volume of each No. of Weirs: 341 Nos.
Tank: 2917 m3 Flow rate /Weir: 2m3
Depth of Weir: 0.1m
Scrapper Mechanism: 3 kW
7. Sludge withdrawal 6 Nos. Bottom sludge withdrawal pipe
pump-1 (3W+3S) Dia: 200mm
Sludge Transfer pump: 100 m3/hr
kW of sludge pump: 15kW
Page 19 of 449
Components (Nos)
8. Storage and 2 Nos 90m L x 28m W x Inflow: 28,800 m3/day
Homogenisation 6m SWD+0.3FB HRT: 24 Hrs
Tank Volume of each Energy requirement for mixing: 4
3
Tank: 14410 m – 8 W/m3
Flow makers : 6 Nos/Tank
kW of Flow maker: 5.7 kW
Flow jets: 5 Nos/Tank
kW of Flow Jet: 8 kW
9. Raw effluent 3 Nos Capacity of the each pump: 600
Transfer Pump (2W+1S) m3/hr @ 12.5 m Head
kW of the Pump: 37 kW
Type: Submersible
10. Sodium Hydroxide 3 Nos Capacity : 1000 LPH
Dosing Pump (2W+1S)
(Optional)
11. Sodium Hydroxide 1 No 10 m3
Storage Tank
(Optional)
12. Hydrogen Peroxide 3 Nos Capacity : 1000 LPH
Dosing Pump (2W+1S)
(Optional)
13. Hydrogen Peroxide 1 No 10 m3
Storage Tank
(Optional)
Primary Clarifier / Clariflocculator System
14. Flash Mixer-I 2 Nos 3.7m Lx 3.7m L x Inflow:28800 m3/day
3.7m D +0.5FB HRT: 5 mins
Volume:51m3 kW of Mixer: 3.7kW
Qty: 2 Nos
15. Lime Dosing 8 Nos 4.3m L x 4.3m W x Lime Conc. 5%
System: 4 SWD+0.5FB Lime Dosing rate: 1000 mg/lit
Page 20 of 449
Components (Nos)
Lime Preparation Volume:74 m3 Lime requirement : 28 Tons/day
& Dosing Tank Milk of Lime Dosing rate: 20
Litres/m3
16. Lime Agitator 8 Nos Suitable for RCC Shaft speed: 100 rpm, motor kW:
tank for a size of 2.2 kW
4.3 m x 4.3 m x 4.0
m: 74 m3
17. Lime Dosing Pump 4 Nos Capacity of the Pump: 12 m3/hr
(2W+2S) Kw of the pump: 3.7 kW
18. Flash Mixer-II 2 Nos 3.7m Lx 3.7m W x Inflow: 28800
3.7m D +0.5FB HRT: 5 mins
Volume:51m3 kW of Mixer: 3.7kW
Qty: 2 Nos
19. Alum Dosing 8 Nos 3.5m L x 3.5m W x Alum Conc. 10%-20%
System Alum 4 SWD+0.5FB Alum Dosing rate: 600 mg/lit
3
Preparation & Volume:49 m Alum requirement : 17 Tons/day
Dosing Tank Alum Dosing rate: 6 Litres/m3
Volume of Alum Preparation
Tank: 173m3
Volume of Dosing Tank: 173m3
20. Alum Agitator 8 Nos Suitable for RCC Shaft speed: 100 rpm, motor kW:
tank for a size of 2.2 kW
3.5m L x 3.5m W x
4 SWD+0.5FB: 49
m3
21. Alum Dosing 4 Nos Capacity of the Pump: 6m3/hr
Pump (2W+2S) Kw of the pump: 2.2 kW
22. Primary Clarifier / 3 Nos 28m Dia. x 3.5m Inflow:28800 m3/day
Clariflocculator (3W) SWD Surface Overflow rate: 1m3/m2/hr
Volume: 2106 m3 No. of Weirs: 276 Nos.
Flow rate /Weir: 2.0m3/hr
Page 21 of 449
Components (Nos)
Depth of Weir: 0.1m
Scrapper Mechanism: 2.15 kW
Bottom sludge withdrawal pipe
Dia: 200mm
23. Sludge withdrawal 6 Nos Sludge Transfer pump: 110 m3/hr
pump-2 (3W+3S) @ 30 Head
24. Polymer Dosing 2 Nos 5m L x 5m W x3m Polyelectrolyte Requirement: 58
Tank (1W+1S ) SWD Kgs/day
Volume: 75m3 Solution conc. 0.02%
Polyelectrolyte solution
requirement: 28 m3/day
25. Polyelectrolyte 4 Nos Dosing rate: 2mg/lit
Dosing Pump (2W+2S) Capacity of the Pump: 1.5m3/hr
kW of the Pump: 1.5 kW
Sulphide Removal System
26. Pre-Aeration Tank 2 Nos 33m L x 22m W x Inflow: 28190 m3/day
/ Sulphide (1+1) 6.5 m SWD + 0.5 Inlet Sulphide conc: 250 mg/lit
Oxidation Tank -I FB Outlet Sulphide conc: 75 mg/lit
Volume of the Efficiency: 70%
Tank: 4720 m3 Oxygen Requirement: 24173
Kgs/day
Theoretical Specific Oxygen
requirement: 1.0 kg / kg of S2-
HRT: 8 Hrs
Liquid Oxygen Dosing System
Requirement : 2.5 to 4 Kgs/ kg of
S2-
Air Blower requirement :(
Optional)
Page 22 of 449
Components (Nos)
Capacity of the blower: 13252
m3/hr
kW of the blower: 300 kW
Quantity: 3 Nos (2W+1S) – One
blower / Tank
No. of Fine Bubble Diffuser
(8inch Dia.): 2209 Nos / Tank
Alternative to Diffused Aeration
system: OHR Aerator
Total Air requirement: 6930
m3/hr/Tank
No. of Air Blowers: 1 Nos / Tank
Total No. of blowers (2 Working
+ 1 Standby) for 2 tanks
Capacity of each Air blower:
6,180 m3/hr
kW of the Air Blower: 150 kW
27. Pre-Aeration Tank 2 Nos 10 m L x 10m W x Inflow: 28190 m3/day
/ Sulphide (1+1) 6.0m SWD+ 0.5 FB Inlet Sulphide conc: 75 mg/lit
Oxidation Tank -II Volume of the Outlet Sulphide conc: 5 mg/lit
Tank: 600 m3 Efficiency: 90%
Oxygen Requirement: 9669
Kgs/day
Specific Oxygen requirement: 1.5
Kgs / Kg of S2-
HRT: 1 hr.
Air Blower requirement :(
Optional)
Capacity of the blower: 4986
m3/hr
Page 23 of 449
Components (Nos)
kW of the blower: 115 kW
Quantity: 3Nos (2W+1S) – One
blower / Tank
No. of Fine Bubble Diffuser
(8inch Dia): 891 Nos / Tank
system: OHR Aerator
Total Air requirement: 2,940
m3/hr/Tank
Capacity of each Air blower: 2940
m3/hr
28. Distribution Tank 1 No. 10m L x 10m W x HRT: 30 mins
-I for Aeration 6m SWD + 0.5FB
Tank Volume: 600 m3
Biological Treatment System
29. Anoxic Tank 2 Nos 35.5m L x 34m W Inflow : 28190 m3/day

x 5m SWD+0.3FB HRT: 10 hrs
Volume of each Submersible Mixers- 10 kW – 6
Tank: 6035 m3 Nos in each tank
SDNR: 0.42 g NO3-N/g MLVSS /
day
Oxygen Credit: 554 Kgs/hr.
30. Phosphoric Acid 3 Nos. Capacity : 1000 LPH
Dosing Pump (2W+1S)
(Nutrient Supply)
(Optional)
Page 24 of 449
Components (Nos)
31. Phosphoric Acid 1 No 10 m3
Storage Tank
(Optional)
32. Aeration Tank- 2 Nos Race track shape, Inflow: 28190 m3/day
(Stage-I) (1+1) 106 m L x 48m W Inlet BOD: 900 mg/lit
x 6.5m MLSS: 2100 mg/lit
SWD+0.3FB MLVSS: 1700 mg/lit
Volume of each F/M Ratio: 0.15 Kg BOD/Kg of
Tank: 29,858 m3 MLSS
DO in the Aeration Tank : 2
mg/lit
HRT: 2.0 Days
Oxygen requirement: 57501
Kgs/day/Tank
m3/hr/Tank
12000 m3/hr
No. of Air diffusers / Tank: 6000
Nos.
Total No. of Fine Bubble
Diffusers ( 9 inch): 12000 Nos
Flow makers: 6 Nos /Tank– 5.7
kW each x 2 = 12
Nos
system: OHR Aerator
Page 25 of 449
Components (Nos)
m3/hr/Tank
13320 m3/hr
33. Secondary 2 Nos 36 m Dia .x 3.5m Inflow:28190 m3/day
Clarifier-I (1+1) SWD+0.3FB Surface Overflow rate: 0.5
Volume: 3548 m3 m3/m2/hr
HRT: 6.5 hrs
No. of Weirs: 376 Nos.
Flow rate /Weir: 1.6 m3
Depth of Weir: 0.1m
Under flow SS conc: 10,000
mg/lit
34. Sludge 3 Nos Required SRS Flow: 600
Recirculation (2W+1S) m3/hr/tank
Pump-I Capacity of the Pump: 600
m3/hr@12.5m head
35. Aeration Tank- 2 Nos Race track shape, Inflow: 27961 m3/day
(Stage-II) (1+1) 106m x 47m x 6.5m Inlet BOD: 270 mg/lit
SWD MLSS: 2100 mg/lit
Volume of each MLVSS: 1700 mg/lit
Tank: 27961 m3 F/M Ratio: 0.06 Kg BOD/Kg of
MLSS
DO in the Aeration Tank : 2 mg/lit
HRT: 2.0 Days
Page 26 of 449
Components (Nos)
SRS Flow: 600 m3/hr/tank
Oxygen requirement: 46,848
Kgs/day
Total Air requirement :56,972
m3/hr
Total No. of blowers: 5 Nos. (4
Working + 1 Standby) for 2 Tanks
14245 m3/hr
No. of Diffuser / Tank: 5000 Nos/
Tank
Total No. of Fine Bubble Diffusers
(9 inch dia.): 10000 Nos
Flow makers: 6 Nos /Tank– 5.7
kW each x 2 = 12
Nos
Alternative: OHR
m3/hr/Tank
14760 m3/hr
36. Secondary 2 Nos 36 m Dia. x 3.5m Inflow: 27961 m3/day
Clarifier-II (1+1) SWD+0.3FB Surface Overflow rate: 0.5
Volume: 3548 m3 m3/m2/hr
HRT: 6.5 hrs
Flow rate /Weir: 1.6 m3
Page 27 of 449
Components (Nos)
Depth of Weir: 0.1m
Under flow SS conc: 10,000
mg/lit
37. Sludge 3 Nos Required SRS Flow: 600
Recirculation (2W+1S) m3/hr/tank
Pump-II Capacity of the Pump: 600
m3/hr@12.5m head
kW of the Pump: 37kW
Lime-Soda Softening system
38. Lime-Soda Based 2 Nos 27m Dia x 4m Inflow:27868 m3/day
Reactor Clarifier (1+1) SWD Surface Overflow rate: 1 m3/m2/hr
Volume: 2290 m3 HRT: 4 hrs
Flow rate /Weir: 2.05 m3/hr
Depth of Weir: 0.1m
Scrapper Mechanism: 2.2 kW
Bottom sludge withdrawal pipe
dia: 200mm
Sludge Transfer pump: 20 m3/hr
Sludge withdrawal velocity
considered: 0.5m/s
Sludge Transfer Pump for RC:
110 cum/hr @30m Head x 2 Nos
39. Lime Dosing Same lime dosing tank of Dosing rate : 2000 mg/lit
system Primary clarifier system shall be Concentration of Lime: 5%-10%
Preparation and used. Lime requirement: 56 Tons /day
Dosing Tank
40. Caustic Dosing 3 Nos Capacity of Caustic dosing Pump:
Pump (2W+1S) 7 m3/hr @ 20m head
Page 28 of 449
Components (Nos)
Caustic dosing requirement: 168
m3/day
41. Lime Dosing Pump 3 Nos Capacity of Lime dosing Pump: 23
(2W+1S) m3/hr @60m head
Milk of lime requirement: 564
m3/day
kW of the Pump: 3kW
42. Soda Ash Dosing 4 Nos 3.5m L x 3.5m W x Dosing rate : 1000 mg/lit
System 4m SWD+ 0.5FB Concentration of Soda ash: 10-
Preparation and Volume: 49 m3 20%
Dosing Tank Soda Ash requirement: 28 Tons
/day
43. Soda Ash Dosing 3 Nos Capacity of Soda ash dosing
Pump (2W+1S) Pump: 8 m3/hr @60m head
Soda ash solution requirement:
188 m3/day
Sludge Thickening system
44. Common Sludge 1 No 13m L x 13m W x HRT: 5 hrs

Holding Tank with 4m SWD+0.5m FB
mixer Volume: 591 m3
45. Sludge Transfer 2 Nos Capacity of the Pump:142
Pump to Thickener (1W+1S) m3/hr@30m head
kW of the Pump :18.5 kW
46. Sludge Thickener – 1 Nos 23 m Dia. x 3.5m Sources of Sludge to the
I (for bio sludge SWD +0.5m FB thickener:
and plain Volume of each TSS from Pre-Settler – 12
3
sedimentation Tank:1474 m Tons/day
sludge) Biological sludge -8 Tons/day
Total sludge: 20 Tons/day
Page 29 of 449
Components (Nos)
Thickener:
Solids loading rate: 50 Kgs/m2/day
% of volume reduction achieved in
the thickener – 29%
Slope: 1:8
Scrapper Mechanism: 3kW,
rpm:0.10
No. of Weirs: 262
Flow rate /weir: 11m3/day
47. Polyelectrolyte 2 Nos Polymer Dosing requirement: 20
Dosing Pump to (1W+1S) mg/lit
thickener Polymer conc: 0.05%
Head: 60 m
LPH: 5672
Dosing rate: 40 Litres/m3
kW of the pump: 1.1
48. Polyelectrolyte 1 No Volume:100 m3
Dosing Tank
Sludge Dewatering system (Bio sludge+ Plain sedimentation)
49. Filter Press System 4 Nos Size: 1300mm x Feed Flow: 263 m3/day @ 8% SC.
(3W+1S) 1300mm x30mm Filtrate volume: 181 m3/day
Wet Solid cake @ 20% SC: 57
Tons/day
Dry Solid cake 20 Tons/day
Type of Filter Press : Recessed
Type
No. of Filter Press : 4 Nos
(3W+1S)
No. of batches /day: 3 Nos
Cake thickness : 30mm
Chamber volume: 51 Litres
Page 30 of 449
Components (Nos)
No. of Filter Press Plates/Unit:
132 Nos
Total no. of Plates: 132 x 4 = 528
Nos.
50. Filter Press Feed 4 Nos Capacity of the Pump: 40 m3/hr
Pump (3W+1S) Pump Type: Screw
Head: 150m
51. Filter Press Power 3+1 Nos 3.7 kW
Pack
52. Sludge Thickener – 1 No 30 m Dia. x 3.5m Sources of Sludge to the
II (Primary and SWD +0.5m FB thickener:
LSS sludge) Volume of each Primary Sludge –54.2Tons/day
3
Tank:2637 m LSS Sludge -61.5 Tons/day
Total sludge: 115.7 Tons/day
Thickener:
Solids loading rate: 150
Kgs/m2/day
Slope: 1:8
Scrapper Mechanism: 3kW,
rpm:0.10
No. of Weirs: 324
53. Polyelectrolyte 2 Nos Polymer Dosing requirement: 20
Dosing Pump to (1W+1S) mg/lit
thickener Polymer conc: 0.05%
Head: 60 m
LPH: 5672
kW of the pump: 1.1
54. Polyelectrolyte 1 No Volume:100 m3
Dosing Tank
Page 31 of 449
Components (Nos)
Sludge Dewatering system (Primary + LSS sludge)
55. Filter Press System 8 Nos Size: 1300mm x Feed Flow: 1027 m3/day @ 8%
(7W+1S) 1300mm x30mm SC.
Dry Solid 103 Tons/day
Type of Filter Press : Recessed
Type
No.of Filter Press : 8 Nos
(7W+1S)
No. of Filter Press Plates/Unit:
132 Nos
Total no. of Plates: 132 x 8 =
1056 Nos.
56. Filter Press Feed 8 Nos Capacity of the Pump: 40 m3/hr
Pump (7W+1S) Pump Type: Screw
Head: 150m
57. Filter Press Power 8 Nos 3.7 kW
Pack
Tertiary Filtration System – Quartz Filters
58. Quartz Filter Feed 1 No 28mL x 20mW x Inflow: 27800 m3/day

Tank 5m SWD HRT: 2 hrs
Volume:2800 m3
59. Quartz Filter 13 Nos 4 m Dia. x 3m HOS Filter Vessel:
(12W+1S (MSRL) Inflow : 27586 m3/day
) System operation hrs: 20 hrs/day
Flow rate / Vessel: 115 m3/hr
Quantity: 13 Nos.
Page 32 of 449
Components (Nos)
Silex media:
Quantity required/Filter:
3-5mm – Bed Height- 200mm : 4.4
Tons/Filter
0.7mm – 1.2 mm – Bed Height -
800mm: 17.4 Tons/Filter
60. Quartz Filter Feed 14Nos Flow rate: 120 m3/hr @ 20m Head
Pump (12 W+2 kW of the Pump: 15 kW
S)
61. Backwash Pump 4 Nos Capacity of the Pump: 135 m3/hr
(2W+2S) @ 30m Head
Quantity: kW of the pump: 18.5
kW
62. Back wash blower 3 Nos Blower capacity: 600 m3/hr
(2W+1S) kW of the blower: 18.5kW
Ultra-Filtration System (UF)
63. Feed Tank 1 No 15m L x 20m W x Inflow: 25786 m3/day (Actual flow
5m SWD 25075 m3/day + 3% safety margin
Volume:1500 m3 @ 752 m3/day)
HRT: 1hr.
64. UF Membranes 4 Skids Auto back washable filter: 50
micron x 4 Skids = 4 Nos.
No. of membranes shall be with
respect to Gross permeate flux at
40 LMH, which is inclusive of
backwash, CIP and CEB qty and
net permeate flux at 35 LMH to
produce a nett. output of 20 MLD
(85% nett. recovery) of treated
water
Page 33 of 449
Components (Nos)
65. UF Feed Pump 5 Nos Capacity of the Pump : 551 m3/hr
(4W+1S) @ 30m Head x 4 Skids = 4 Nos
kW of the Pump : 75 kW
66. UF Backwash 3 Nos Capacity of the Pump : 650 m3/hr
Pump (2W+1S) @ 30m Head x 3 = Nos
67. Hypo Dosing 3 Nos Capacity of the Pump : 3252 LPH
Pump (2W+1S) @ 60m Head
kW of the Pump : 3.7 kW
68. Hypo Dosing Tank 1 Nos 1000 Litres
69. Caustic Dosing 2 Nos Capacity of the Pump : 4000 LPH
Pump (1W+1S) @ 60m Head
70. Caustic Dosing 1 No. 1000 Litres
Tank
71. HCl Dosing Pump 2 Nos Capacity of the Pump : 5900 LPH
(1W+1S) @ 60m Head
72. HCl Dosing Tank 1 No. 1000 litres
73. CIP Pump 3 Nos Capacity of the Pump : 689 m3/hr
(2W+1S) @ 30 m Head
74. Cartridge Filter 2 Nos Housing: SS
(1W+1S) No. of Elements : 110 Nos
Type: Wounded
Size: 40 inch long x 2.5 inch dia.
75. CIP Tank with 1 No 40 m3
Agitator
76. HCl Storage Tank 1 No 15m3
77. Caustic Storage 1 No 15m3
Tank
Page 34 of 449
Components (Nos)
78. Hypo Storage Tank 1 No 15m3
79. UF Permeate 1 No 23m L x 20m W x Inflow: 22186 m3/day
Storage Tank 5m SWD+0.5FB HRT: 2 hr
Volume: 2300 m3
80. UF Permeate 5 Nos Capacity of the Pump: 285 m3/hr
Transfer Pump (4W+1S) @ 30m Head x 4 Skids = 4 Nos
Page 35 of 449
Dilution Facility Infrastructure
S.No Item Description Specification Qty.
1. Mixing Tank Dimension: 70m x 70m x 4.9 2 Nos
m=Volume: 24 MLD
HRT: 2.5 hrs
2. Submersible Mixers Total energy requirement/Tank 10 Nos (15 kW) x
122.5 kW 2 Tanks= 20 Nos.
3. Diluted Wastewater Discharge 1200 m3/hr 6 Nos x 2 Tanks

pumps (optional) =12 Nos
(If gravity flow is possible, it
can be eliminated)
4. Online Monitoring System (as pH, Conductivity, BOD, COD, 2 Sets ( 1 for
per CPCB Guidelines) TSS, Cr, DO and Electro CETP outlet and 1
Magnetic flow meters for Dilution Tank
outlet)
(i) Mixing Tank:

In the mixing Tank, permeate from UF membrane filtration system will be received and mixed
with the treated sewage from the STP. The inlet pipe from the STP to the Mixing tank, outlet
pipe from the mixing tank and the transfer pump/s for discharge of diluted effluent has not been
considered in the scope of the CETP.
The secondary treated effluent after filtration through UF membrane filtration system would
be received at this tank. To meet the river discharge standards prescribed by SPCB/CPCB, the
Tertiary Treated Water (TTW) of the proposed CETP is required to be diluted with the
secondary treated sewage water available from STPs located in the near vicinity of the proposed
project. Both these treated effluent will be mixed thoroughly with the submersible mixers
provided in this tank. To ensure proper dilution and to maintain consistent pollutant
concentration, this tank would be designed for a hydraulic retention time of 5 hours. Therefore,
the capacity of this tank is proposed to be constructed for a capacity of 54.1 MLD (20 MLD
TTW+210 MLD Sewage = 230 MLD/24hours = 9.58 MLD x 5 hrs = 47.91 MLD). Further,
this tank is proposed to be constructed as two modules with each tank of 24 MLD. In this
modular construction, one tank would be receiving the effluent for mixing, while the other
would be ready for discharging the diluted tannery wastewater in to river.
(ii) Submersible Mixers:
In order to ensure proper mixing of sewage and tannery wastewater, suitable no.s of
submersible mixers are required to be installed in the mixing tank. Usually, a 6-8W/m3 of
specific energy requirement is required for proper mixing of effluent.
(iii) Discharge Pumps:
After adequate mixing of the effluents, the treated effluent would be pumped out from the
Mixing tank into the river, after ensuring that the river discharge quality standards are met. The
energy efficient submersible pumps or centrifugal pumps shall be installed to discharge the
Page 36 of 449
effluent. Further, low pressure & high pressure switches and VFD are required to be installed
to control the operation of the pumps. A provision for recirculation of treated water from the
pump discharge would also be provided in the pumps. This is essential to ensure that,
whenever, the pollutant concentration exceeds the discharge limit, the flow to river would
automatically be stopped and the effluent would be recycled back into the mixing tank until
the parameters are normalised. Therefore, the entire system would be automated though the
PLC /SCADA.
(iv) Online Monitoring System:

An online monitoring system with web server shall be provided in CETP Premises to monitor
quality and quantity of the effluent discharged to river/inland surface water/marine discharge
as per CPCB norms (ref. letter No. B-29016/04/06PCI-1/5401 dated 05.02.2014) issued
directions, under section 18(1) b of the Water and Air Acts to the SPCB and Pollution Control
Committees for directing the 17 categories of highly polluting including, Common Effluent
Treatment Plants (CETP) for installation of online effluent quality and common emission
monitoring systems to help track the discharges of pollutants. As Jajmau Tannery CETP falls
under the above mentioned categories, an online monitoring system with web server must be
installed in the CETP for monitoring of required data from CETP, Pumping Station and
individual member Tannery units and uploading data to CPCB / SPCB water quality watch
centres.
The online monitoring system to be installed would comprise of pH meter, Conductivity/TDS
meter, BOD, COD, DO, Cr, TSS meter, Electro Magnetic Flow Meters (EMFM) and CCTV
Camera. All the effluent quality measuring instruments would be installed at the CETP outlet
point and the mixed diluted water outlet, where tannery wastewater and sewage would be
mixed prior to discharge. All the measured values including flow (instantaneous and
cumulative values), pH, TDS, COD, BOD, TSS, Cr and DO would be recorded in the
Individual PLC/SCADA system and shall be Communicated to Centralized SCADA System.
Control & Monitoring of equipment at CETP shall be at Individual PLC/ SCADA installed at
each system and also in Centralized SCADA System
JTETA shall install GPRS based on-line monitoring system through a dedicated Vendor in all
individual member Tannery units for monitoring of Flow & TDS in raw effluent (380
individual Tannery member units), spent chrome liquor (in 279 Tannery units). The successful
Tenderer shall co-ordinate with the vendor identified by JTETA to receive minute wise data to
CETP web server. The successful Tenderer shall install a web server in the CETP for
establishment of communication between GPRS panel installed in all individual member
Tannery units and CETP web server for data capturing. The Successful Tenderer shall provide
a Dedicated Lease Line through Telecom service Provider (Minimum Speed 4 Mbps) for
Internet Connection to Webserver as per CPCB Norms.
Specification Sheet of Odour Control System:
Page 37 of 449
Specification Sheet of Odour Control System for Collection Well & Equalization Tank
Sl. No Item description Specification
1 Application To eliminate the odour from the Tannery wastewater
2 Equipment Name Odour Control System
3 Duty Continuous
4 Working Principle 1. It would be implemented in two stages to
eliminate the odour from the Tannery wastewater.
The odour removal system would comprises of
Bio trickling filter followed by Activated carbon
filter. In addition, waste gas feeding system and
water spray unit are also provided along with the
bio trickling filter to feed the waste gas and
wetting of the media respectively.
2. In addition to the bio filter, an additional chemical
dosing system comprising of Sodium Hydroxide
and Hydrogen Peroxide is also be proposed.
5 Accessories Bio trickling filter, Activated carbon filter, Chemical
Dosing System, Inter connecting ducts, Radial Fan,
Pumps, Pipes and Fittings and Valves, Control Panel,
H2S Monitor
6 Specification for Bio Type- Bio trickling filter- 11750, Total Airflow-
trickling filter 11750 m3/hr, Vessel material- HDPE or GRP,
Vessel diameter- 3800 mm, Vessel Height- 7000
mm, Total weight empty- 4000 kg, Filter area- 11,3
m2, Filter bed height- 3 m, Retention time- 10 s,
Filter media- Foamed plastic
7 Specification for Activated MOC: Filter vessel of PEHD with stainless steel
Carbon filter reinforcements, Type- AKFE 11000, Total Airflow
(m3/h)- 23.500, Nominal carbon volume (m3)- 22,
Weight of carbon (kg)- 11000 Superficial contact
time (s)- 3,3, Length (mm)- app. 11100, Height
(mm)- app. 2100, Width (mm)- app. 2000, Vessel
construction- PEHD, Filtering surface (m2)- app.
22,00
Filter depth (m)- 1, Total weight empty (kg)- app.
1400
8 Specification for Activated Type of carbon: Catalytic carbon, water re-generable
Carbon Moisture, as packed: < 5 % Apparent density
(kg/m3): 500 +/- 30 Pellet diameter (mm): 4,
Hardness no.: > 97
9 Specification for Radial Fan Type: Radial Fan, Capacity (m3/h): 23.500, Static
pressure (Pa): 3500, Material housing: Stainless Steel
316, Material impeller: Stainless Steel 316, Induction
diameter (mm):900, Fan speed (rpm): app. 1450
Motor speed 50 Hz (rpm): app. 1450 Motor power
rating (kW): app. 45, Power supply: 400 V 50 Hz
Page 38 of 449
10 Control Panel For the operation of the above described odour
control system. Made of Stainless Steel, mounted in
an air-conditioned room, completely wired and tested
according to VDE. With the following components:
1 x Siemens SPS S7 1200, x Power supply and
control power supply 1 x Fault report processing x
Frequency converter Siemens type for the fan 4 x AC
Semiconductor Motor Control for the circulation
pumps 4 x 230 V motorized valve, 4 x PH-Monitor
control 10 x Pressure control, 1 x Horn and all-round
illumination, 1 x Non-potential contacts for operating
and fault reporting, Touch panel operation.
11 H2S Monitor Type: Polytron 3000, Manufacturer: Draeger,
monitoring for: H2S, measuring range: 0.100 ppm
(for inlet), 0.20 ppm (for outlet) Output Signal: 4.20
mA, installed at the inlet and outlet of the odour
control system to measure the inlet and outlet H2S
concentration. Connected to the local control panel
for power supply and signal processing.
Original Hydrodynamic Reactor (OHR) to be installed in for Pre-Aeration Tank I & II

and Aeration Tank I & II
The OHR (Original Hydrodynamic Reactor) Technology is fluid miniaturization, mixing and
reaction technology.
Fluids are passed through special pipes (OHR AERATOR) and they are broken down into
ultrafine particles instantaneously. The ultrafine particles collide continuously with two unique
special structures. Thus, reaction of fluids are significantly accelerated.
Even though the OHR AERATOR are very simple structures, they can replace conventional
high pressure, high cost and complicated equipment.
The mixing capability of the OHR is strong enough to be able to do the same thing as the
high-pressure emulsification equipment with only 1/100 of pressure.
The OHR AERATOR is an original air diffuser with no-clogging, maintenance-free with very
strong mixing functions. Due to its strong mixing functions, OHR AERATOR is the only air
diffuser used for chemical reaction acceleration aggressively in harsh conditions.
Page 39 of 449
Specification Sheet of Original Hydrodynamic Reactor (OHR) Aerator:
Specification Sheet of OHR Aerator for Pre-Aeration Tank I & II and Aeration Tank I
& II
1. General
1.1. Application To mix oxygen in effluent by Aeration
1.2. Duty Continuous
1.3. Working Principle After discharge of large clusters of air bubbles,
oxygen is forcibly dissolved in water by centrifugal
force and impact force
1.4. Alpha Value 0.98 to 1.07
1.5. Model No AE-130N
1.6. Coverage area per unit all 6 – 7 m2
over tank aeration
1.7. Size ᴓ 145 mm x 642 H
1.8. Weight 2.9 Kgs
1.9. Air Blower Capacity per 1. Minimum: 0.5 m3/min
Unit 2. Standard: 1.0 m3/min
3. Maximum: 1.4 m3/min
1.10. Size of Fine Air bubble Approx. 100 µm
1.11. Preferable Make OHR Laboratory Corporation
2. Material of construction
2.1. Body Polypropylene
2.2. Inter Connecting Air-Pipe PP40A (Polypropylene)
2.3. Flange PP (Polypropylene)
2.4. Manufacturer Guarantee 7 Years
Page 40 of 449
Schedule of Items:
The items mentioned here are only indicative and for guidance purpose only. Bidder
may make his own asessement as per the scope of work to meet the KPIs.
Sl. No. Item Description Units Quantity

Component A: 20 MLD (2 Module x 10 MLD) Capacity
CETP (Primary, Secondary, Tertiary Treatment system
A
–up to Ultra Filtration Technology) & Sewage Dilution
facilities
I Civil Works
Construction of RCC Rectangular Tank For Manual /
I.I
Coarse Screen Chamber (2 nos)
Reinforced cement concrete RCC M30 (cement - 420
1
Kg/Cum) using sulphate resistant cement.
1.i Raft cu.m 9.12
1.ii Walls cu.m 12.80
2 Centering & Shuttering for rectangular tank
2.i Centering / Shuttering for Raft sq.m 8.00
2.ii Centering / Shuttering for wall sq.m 128.00
3 Reinforcement Works
Supply & fabricating of reinforcement steel for all
reinforced cement concrete works to all heights and depths
3.i including cost of binding wire (18 Gauge) etc., complete as MT 1.75
per the IS standards and specifications ( using corrosion
resistant steel )
4 Plastering Works
Water proof Plastering with cement mortar 1:4 (One of
cement, four of sand by volume) mixed with approved
4.i water proofing compound to an average thickness of 15
mm for outer surfaces finished neatly to one level,
including scaffolding, curing etc., complete
a) walls sq.m 128.00
b) floor area sq.m 19.50
5 White wash one coat (using white cement )
6 Miscellaneous works
6.i Providing and fixing PVC water stopper 225mm wide Rm 32.00
Labour charges for fixing following dia of pipes cutting
6.ii
and welding the pipe in resting the wall in position
a.Upto 500mm dia NB pipe nipples Nos. 2.00
b.Upto 300mm dia NB pipe Nos. 2.00
Construction of RCC Circular Tank for Collection
I.II
Well (16 Mtr Dia) (1 no)
1 Earth work Excavation
Page 41 of 449
1.i Earth work excavation in ordinary soil 0.00m to 5m cu.m 508.68
1.ii Soil refilling the excavated soil for Tank outer side cu.m 67.82
2 Plain Cement Concrete
Plain cement concrete 1:4:8 using 40mm jelly for
2.i cu.m 20.10
foundation
3
3.i Raft cu.m 80.38
3.iii RCC cover slab and rcc staircase arrangement cu.m 40.19
4 Centering & Shuttering for circular tank
4.iii Working platform and rcc staircase arrangement sq.m 200.96
per the IS standards and specifications
(using corrosion resistant steel )
6 Plastering Works
water proofing compound to an average thickness of 15
c)Working platform and rcc staircase arrangement sq.m 200.96
7 White wash one coat ( using white cement )
7.i Walls sq.m 263.76
7.ii Bottom floor sq.m 263.76
8.ii
a.2000mm dia NB pipe nipples Nos. 2.00
b.1000mm dia NB pipe Nos. 2.00
Supplying and fixing 250 x 150mm PVC encapsulated SS
8.iii Nos. 24.00
316 L rungs for steps inner side of wall
Providing and fixing of RCC Handrails for Working
8.iv Rm 36.00
platform
Page 42 of 449
Construction of RCC Rectangular tank for Fine Screen
I.III
Chamber (3 nos)
1
1.i Raft cu.m 13.68
resistant steel )
4 Plastering Works
6.ii
a.Upto 500mm dia NB pipe nipples Nos. 2.00
b.Upto 300mm dia NB pipe Nos. 2.00
Construction of RCC Rectangular tank for Grit
I.IV
Chamber (2 nos)
1
1.i Raft cu.m 24.30
3.i MT 3.34
Page 43 of 449
including cost of binding wire (18 Gauge) etc., complete as
resistant steel )
4 Plastering Works
4.i water proofing compound to an average thickness of 15 sq.m 128.00
5.i White wash one coat ( using white cement )
6.ii
Construction of RCC Circular Tank for Presettler (33
I.V
mtr dia) (3 nos)
2.i cu.m 288.49
foundation
3
3.i Raft cu.m 1442.44
3.iii Working platform and rcc staircase arrangement cu.m 287.28
3.iv Providing launder slab and wall cu.m 69.94
4.iv Providing launder slab and wall sq.m 932.58
5.i reinforced cement concrete works to all heights and depths MT 170.88
including cost of binding wire (18 Gauge) etc., complete as
Page 44 of 449
per the IS standards and specifications
6 Plastering Works
Walls sq.m 2241.96
Bottom floor sq.m 2564.60
8.ii
8.iii Nos. 72.00
8.iv Rm 114.00
platform
Construction of RCC Tank with Race Track design for
I.VI Storage and Homogenization tank (2 nos) & Flash
mixer Feed tank
1.i Earth work excavation in ordinary soil 0.00 m to 1.5m cu.m 15130.00
2.i cu.m 558.00
foundation
3
3.i Raft cu.m 3340.00
3.iv RCC cover slab and rcc staircase arrangement cu.m 3166.80
4.i Centering / Shuttering for footings & Raft sq.m 415.20
4.ii wall sq.m 9096.00
4.iv RCC cover slab and rcc staircase arrangement sq.m 6333.60
Page 45 of 449
per the standards and specifications ( using corrosion
resistant steel )
6 Plastering Works
6.i Raft sq.m 5090.00
6.ii Walls sq.m 9096.00
Working platform and rcc staircase arrangement bottom
4.iv sq.m 6333.60
beam
7 Painting works
7.i Raft sq.m 5090.00
7.iv RCC cover slab and rcc staircase arrangement sq.m 6333.60
8.ii
8.iii Nos. 80.00
Providing and applying two coats of Coal tar epoxy (400
microns thick) over one coat of epoxy primer including the
8.iv
cost of all materials, preparation of surfaces, necessary
scaffolding etc., all complete as per the specifications
8.v Raft sq.m 5040.00
8.vi Walls sq.m 5241.60
8.vii Rm 76.00
platform
Construction of RCC Rectangular Tank for Flash
I.VII
Mixer-I (2 nos)
1.i Earth work excavation in ordinary soil 0.00m to 1.5m cu.m 50.00
2.i cu.m 4.05
foundation
Page 46 of 449
3
3.i Raft cu.m 12.94
3.iii Plot form for fixing of agitator cu.m 5.25
4.iii Plot form for fixing of agitator sq.m 21.00
resistant steel )
4 Plastering Works
8.ii
8.iii Nos. 4.00
8.iv sq.m 144.00
Construction of RCC Rectangular Tank for Lime
I.VIII
Dosing System (8 nos)
Page 47 of 449
2.i cu.m 20.00
foundation
3
3.i Raft cu.m 40.00
resistant steel )
4 Plastering Works
8.ii
8.iii Rm 96.00
platform
Construction of RCC Rectangular Tank for Flash
I.IX
Mixer-II (2 nos)
2.i cu.m 4.05
foundation
Page 48 of 449
3
3.i Raft cu.m 12.94
resistant steel )
4 Plastering Works
8.ii
8.iii Nos. 4.00
8.iv sq.m 144.00
Construction of RCC Rectangular Tank For Alum
I.X
Page 49 of 449
2.i cu.m 16.20
foundation
3
3.i Raft cu.m 51.77
resistant steel )
4 Plastering Works
8.ii
8.iii Nos. 16.00
8.iv sq.m 576.00
Construction of RCC Circular Tank for
I.XI
Clariflacculator (28 mtr Dia) - 3 nos
Page 50 of 449
1.iii Solling packing for bottom of the raft slope 1:12 cm 1:7 cu.m 1846.32
2.i cu.m 226.32
foundation
3
3.i Raft cu.m 1131.58
resistant steel )
6 Plastering Works
6.i Working platform and rcc staircase arrangement sq.m 129.60
Walls sq.m 1846.32
8.ii
8.iii Rm 108.00
platform
Page 51 of 449
Construction of RCC Rectangular Tank for Poly
I.XII
Dosing (2 nos)
2.i cu.m 7.50
foundation
3
3.i Raft cu.m 31.76
resistant steel )
6 Plastering Works
6.i Raft cu.m 54.00
7 Painting works
7.i White wash one coat ( using white cement ) sq.m 561.00
8.ii
8.iii Nos. 6.00
8.iv
Page 52 of 449
a) Raft cu.m 31.76
b) Walls cu.m 66.00
Construction of RCC Rectangular Tank for Sulphite
I.XIII
Oxidation -I (2 nos)
2.i cu.m 156.40
foundation
2.iii Soil refilling the excavated soil for Tank outer side cu.m 612.00
3
3.i Raft cu.m 625.60
per the standards and specifications (using corrosion
resistant steel)
6 Plastering Works
6.i Floor slab sq.m 1452.00
7 Painting works
Page 53 of 449
8.ii
8.iii Nos. 40.00
8.iv Rm 72.00
platform
Construction of RCC Rectangular Tank for Sulphite
I.XIV
Oxidation-II (2 nos)
2.i cu.m 24.20
foundation
3
3.i Raft cu.m 96.80
per the standards and specifications
( using corrosion resistant steel )
6 Plastering Works
7 Painting works
Page 54 of 449
8.ii
8.iii Nos. 40.00
8.iv Rm 76.00
platform
Construction of RCC Rectangular Tank for
I.XV
Distribution (1 nos)
2.i cu.m 12.10
foundation
3
3.i Raft cu.m 48.40
resistant steel )
6 Plastering Works
7 Painting works
Page 55 of 449
8.ii
8.iii Nos. 20.00
8.iv Rm 12.00
platform
Construction of RCC Rectangular Tank for Anoxic (2
I.XVI
nos)
2.i cu.m 262.70
foundation
3
3.i Raft cu.m 1036.00
resistant steel )
6 Plastering Works
Page 56 of 449
7 Painting works
8.ii
8.iii Nos. 48.00
8.iv Rm 68.00
platform
Construction of RCC Racetrack shape Tank for
I.XVII
Aeration-I (2 nos)
2.i cu.m 1080.00
foundation
3
3.i Raft cu.m 5508.00
4 Centering & Shuttering for Racetrack shape tank
resistant steel )
6 Plastering Works
Page 57 of 449
6.i Raft slab sq.m 9024.00
7 Painting works
6.i Raft sq.m 9724.00
8.ii
8.iii Nos. 56.00
8.iv Rm 72.00
platform
Construction of RCC Racetrack shape Tank for
I.XVIII
Aeration-II (2 nos)
2.i cu.m 1090.00
foundation
3
3.i Raft cu.m 5450.00
4 Centering & Shuttering for Racetrack shape tank
resistant steel )
6 Plastering Works
Page 58 of 449
7 Painting works
6.i Raft sq.m 9568.00
8.ii 0.00
8.iii Nos. 56.00
8.iv Rm 72.00
platform
Construction of RCC Circular Tank for Secondary
I.XIX
Clarifier (36 Mtr Dia) (4 nos)
2.i cu.m 453.42
foundation
3
3.i Raft cu.m 2267.08
Page 59 of 449
resistant steel )
6 Plastering Works
Walls sq.m 2461.76
8.ii
8.iii Rm 224.00
platform
Construction of RCC Circular Tank for Secondary
I.XX
Clarifier (27 Mtr Dia) (2 nos)
2.i cu.m 123.09
foundation
3
Page 60 of 449
resistant steel )
6 Plastering Works
c)Working platform and rcc staircase arrangement sq.m 28.80
d)Providing launder slab and wall sq.m 527.52
7.i Walls sq.m 1512.22
7.ii Bottom floor sq.m 1230.88
8.ii
8.iii Nos. 36.00
8.iv Rm 48.00
platform
Construction of RCC Rectangular Tank for Soda
I.XXI
2.i cu.m 10.00
foundation
2.iii Solling packing for hardening the nature ground cu.m 100.00
3
Page 61 of 449
3.i Raft cu.m 30.00
resistant steel )
6 Plastering Works
6.i Raft sq.m 49.00
7 Painting works
7.i White wash one coat (using white cement )
6.i Raft sq.m 49.00
8.ii
Construction of RCC Rectangular Tank For Sludge
I.XXII
Holding Chemical (1 nos)
2.i cu.m 19.60
foundation
2.iii Solling packing for hardening the nature ground cu.m 78.00
3
3.i Raft cu.m 58.80
Page 62 of 449
resistant steel )
6 Plastering Works
6.i Raft sq.m 49.00
7 Painting works
6.i Raft sq.m 49.00
8.ii
8.iv Rm 30.00
platform
Construction of RCC Circular Tank for Sludge
I.XXIII
Thickener (23 Mtr Dia) (1 nos)
2.i cu.m 49.06
foundation
Page 63 of 449
3
resistant steel )
6 Plastering Works
Walls sq.m 286.37
8.ii
8.iii Nos. 60.00
8.iv Rm 10.00
platform
Construction of RCC Circular Tank for Sludge
I.XXIV
Thickener (30 Mtr Dia) (1 nos)
Page 64 of 449
2.i cu.m 75.44
foundation
3
resistant steel )
6 Plastering Works
Walls sq.m 715.92
8.ii
8.iv Rm 60.00
platform
Page 65 of 449
Construction of RCC Square Tank for Mixing Tank - 2
I.XXV
Nos
1.1 Earth work excavation in ordinary soil 0.00m to 1.5m cu.m 57024.00
2.1 cu.m 1036.80
foundation
2.2 Soil refilling the excavated soil for Tank outer side cu.m 1015.20
3
3.1 Raft cu.m 6220.80
3.2 Walls cu.m 1209.60
3.3 Working platform and rcc staircase arrangement cu.m 34.56
4.1 Centering / Shuttering for footings & Raft sq.m 338.40
4.2 wall sq.m 6048.00
4.3 Working platform and rcc staircase arrangement sq.m 259.20
5.1 including cost of binding wire (18 Gauge) etc., complete as MT 746.50
resistant steel )
6 Plastering Works
6.1 Raft slab sq.m 9800.00
6.2 Walls sq.m 6048.00
7 Painting works
7.1 White wash one coat ( using white cement )
7.2 Raft sq.m 9800.00
7.3 Walls sq.m 6048.00
8.1 Providing and fixing PVC water stopper 225mm wide Rm 2240.00
8.2 Nos. 80.00
Providing and fixing of SS 316 L Handrails for Working
8.iv Rm 28.00
platform and rcc staircase arrangement (50 mm dia)
Page 66 of 449
Construction of RCC Rectangular Tank For Dyke
I.XXVI
Walls (8 NOs)
2.i cu.m 28.80
foundation
3
3.i Raft cu.m 48.00
3.iii RCC working platform slab and rcc staircase arrangement cu.m 5.76
3.iii RCC working platform slab and rcc staircase arrangement cu.m 16.00
resistant steel )
6 Plastering Works
6.i Raft (floor) sq.m 200.00
6.iii RCC working platform slab and rcc staircase arrangement sq.m 76.80
7 Painting works
6.i Raft sq.m 200.00
6.iii RCC working platform slab and rcc staircase arrangement sq.m 76.80
8.i AR Tiles with cement mortar 1:5
Construction of RCC Rectangular Tank for Quartz
I.XXVII
Filter Feed
Page 67 of 449
2.i cu.m 66.00
foundation
3
4.iii RCC cover slab and rcc staircase arrangement sq.m 672.00
resistant steel )
6 Plastering Works
7 Painting works
8.ii
8.iii Nos. 40.00
Page 68 of 449
8.iv Rm 50.00
platform
I.XXVIII Construction of RCC Rectangular Tank for UF Feed
2.i cu.m 37.40
foundation
3
resistant steel )
6 Plastering Works
7 Painting works
8.ii
Page 69 of 449
8.iii Nos. 40.00
8.iv Rm 40.00
platform
Construction of RCC Rectangular Tank For UF
I.XXIX
Permeate
2.i cu.m 55.20
foundation
3
resistant steel )
6 Plastering Works
7 Painting works
Page 70 of 449
8.ii
8.iii Nos. 18.00
8.iv Rm 40.00
platform
I.XXX RCC Buildings & GI Sheet Shed
Admin Building Ground Floor with rain water harvesting -
1 sq.m 2700.00
RCC Terrace,15.0x90.0x4.0Ht
SCADA Room with rain water harvesting - RCC
2 sq.m 64.00
Terrace,8.0x 8.0x4.2Ht
Laboratory room with rain water harvesting - RCC
3 sq.m 80.00
Store room with rain water harvesting - RCC Terrace,10.0x
4 sq.m 80.00
8.0x4.0Ht
Staff rest room with rain water harvesting - RCC
5 sq.m 80.00
Conference Hall with seating arrangements for 500
peoples, Centralized AC, Audis system, Overhead
6 Projector, LED TVs, Pantry, False ceiling, etc. with sq.m 1350.00
complete First Floor with rain water harvesting - RCC
Terrace,15.0x90.0x4.0Ht
Mini Workshop with rain water harvesting - RCC
7 sq.m 64.00
Chemical house with dosing tanks with rain water
8 harvesting - GI Sheet roofing, Size: 16.0m x 12.0m x sq.m 192.00
4.0mH
PCC Room- RCC Terrace roofing with rain water
9 sq.m 420.00
harvesting Size: 12.0m x 7.0m x 4.2mH - 5 Nos
MCC Room for Pretreatment, LSS &Dilution system with
10 rain water harvesting - RCC Terrace roofing, Size: 10.0m x sq.m 210.00
7.0m x 4.2mH - 3 Nos
Filter Press room with MCC Room with rain water
11 sq.m 570.00
harvesting - RCC Terrace,38.0x 15.0 x 7.0Ht
Collection sump pump Room with staircase arrangements
12 with rain water harvesting - RCC Terrace, Size: 12.0m x sq.m 72.00
6.0m x 4.0mH
Shed for waste sludge and salt with rain water harvesting -
13 sq.m 4900.00
GI Sheet roofing, Size:
Shed for Blower with MCC Room (Above SHT) with rain
14 water harvesting - GI Sheet roofing, Size: 192.0m x 25.0m sq.m 4800.00
x 5.0mH
Shed for QF section with MCC Room with rain water
15 harvesting - GI Sheet roofing, Size: 32.0m x 16.0m x sq.m 512.00
7.0mH
Page 71 of 449
Shed for UF section with MCC Room with rain water
16 harvesting - GI Sheet roofing, Size: 50.0m x30.0m x sq.m 1500.00
7.0mH
I.XXXI Additional Cost in Civil work
1 Site cleaning and Levelling sq.m 180474.0
2 Topographical Survey & GEO Technical Investigation
2.1 Topographical Survey for CETP Area sq.m 180474.0
2.2 Topographical Survey for Pumping Station - 4 Nos. Lot 1.0
2.3 Topographical Survey for Pipe line Networking Rm 24000.0
2.4 GEO Technical Investigation for CETP Area Nos. 45.0
2.5 GEO Technical Investigation for Pumping Station - 4 Nos. Nos. 4.0
2.6 GEO Technical Investigation for Pipe line Networking Nos. 24.0
Construction of compound wall (RCC -M25 Grade
Footing, Column, Plinth beam with 230 mm Wall
3 Thickness, Brick work 1:5 ratio for wall (CM - 1:4 ratio Rm 1850.00
Plastering both side with smooth finishing) with 1.5 m
above FGL)
Water source shall be provided for construction of civil
4 L.S 1
works of component A, C & D by the Contractor
Road with storm water trench work (Road - 10 m width x
1250 m Length & 8 m width x 650 m Length, Earth Work,
Spreading and Compacting graded stone aggregate to Wet
5 mix Macadam - 250 mm Thick, Prime coat over WMM Rm 1900.00
Surface Bitumen, Tack coat over WMM Surface, 50 mm
Consolidated thick Bituminous macadam & 30 mm
Consolidated thick Bituminous Concrete)
Nalla Crossing Bridge - 4 Nos. (Bridge width - minimum
5m) - The bidder advised to visit the project site to collect
6 Lot 4.00
the required information regarding Nalla Crossing Bridge
and design accordingly
Civil works for electrical substation & entire plant
electrical equipment:
(a) Construction of RCC Building HT panel rooms, Battery
Room (b) Construction of Fire protection wall, Oil soak
pit & earth pit construction(c) Foundation for all electrical
equipment including HT Panels, LT Panels, Transformer,
7 DG set & DG Set Chimney, substation equipment Lighting Lot 1
pole & cable tray supports and Storm water drainage, (d)
Weld mesh fence to the height of 2.5 mts. and length at
actual, levelling of equipment (e) cable trench for HT &
LT Panels (f) earth excavation, refiling of cable with brick
guard over the cable with all necessary civil works to
complete the job.
I.XXXII CETP beautification work
1 Compound wall with Gate
Page 72 of 449
Excavation for foundations; in any kind of soil to the
dimensions and levels shown in the drawings. Price to
include back filling with excavated soil if suitable or
1.1 imported approved materials up to bottom of base course cu.m 446.40
underneath slab on grade, removal of extra and unsuitable
soil. Back filling shall be on layers of 200 mm thick with
watering and compacting extra., complete.
Supply and Cast Reinforced Concrete. With a minimum
cement content of 300 Kg. per cubic meter. Price to
1.2 include for painting with two coats of hot bitumen (75/25), cu.m 372.00
the strokes of each layer to be opposite to each other (for
the buried parts).
1.3 Foundations and Wall Footings, as per detailed drawings cu.m 282.72
1.4 Plastering Works
1.5 water proofing compound to an average thickness of 15 sq.m 2976.00
1.6 Miscellaneous works
Two Coats of Cement and additional external render coat
to external walls and where required including metal Lath,
angle beads, plaster stops and all required as per Lot 1
Specifications and Drawings. Price includes two coats
waterproofing external quality supercryl paint.
Providing and fixing front entrance gate of SS 316
Lot 1
material.
Providing and fixing of SS 316 L(50 mm dia) pipe for top
Rm 744.00
of the compound
Construction of entrance design wall with granite padding Rm 38.00
2 Landscaping Works
Excavation for foundations; in any kind of soil to the
dimensions and levels shown in the drawings. Price to
include back filling with excavated soil if suitable or
2.1 imported approved materials up to bottom of base course cu.m 1400.00
underneath slab on grade, removal of extra and unsuitable
soil. Back filling shall be on layers of 200 mm thick with
watering and compacting extra., complete.
Import and fill with selected Imported Approved Fill; to
the required levels where directed by the Engineer, only
and for the quantities that are extra and above the
quantities included , Filling shall be on layers not to exceed
2.2 cu.m 280.00
200 mm. thick. Price to include leveling, watering and
compacting to 95 % field density. All imported fill shall be
preapproved by engineer on a truck by truck basis and
prior to entering the site
Page 73 of 449
Supply and Well Compact Base Course, average 15 cm.
Thick, for under block pavements areas, foundations, and
2.3 where indicated in the drawings. Price includes leveling, sq.m 210.00
watering, compacting to 99%, leveling and compacting of
ground (sub-base) under base Course to min 95%
Supply and cast Plain concrete for foundations f'c 250 with
a minimum cement content of 300 Kg. per cubic meter.
2.4 Price to include for painting with two coats of hot bitumen sq.m 140.00
(75/25), the strokes of each layer to be opposite to each
other (for the buried parts).
Supply and Cast Reinforced Concrete Class 'f'c 300'. With
a
minimum cement content of 350 Kg. per cubic meter. Price
to include for painting with two coats of hot bitumen
2.5 cu.m 140.00
(75/25),
the strokes of each layer to be opposite to each other (for
the buried parts).
Walls & Retaining Walls
Supply and construct a dry stone retaining wall, minimum
base dimension 80 - 100cm and 60cm for top dimension.
Middle of wall to be filled with rubble concrete, consisting
of
2.6 sq.m 1400.00
30% rubble stone and 70% plain concrete of grade B200,
as shown in the details. Top of wall to have a concrete soft
finish. Price includes pointing .
Base dimension 100 cm
Page 74 of 449
All stone works shall be local

Stone materials, size, and texturing shall be in accordance
with detailed drawings and engineer's instructions and
approval.
Stones shall be of various lengths and 25 cm height All
cuttings
All stones shall be natural shape "Kishreh" Rates of stone

works shall include:
Supplying, storing, protection and removal of any rejected
surplus materials.
Shaping, cutting and fitting.
Mortar and backing concrete (plain concrete and/or cement
2.7 blocks and plain concrete) as indicated in the drawings. sq.m 1400.00
Painting and pointing materials of any type, and cleaning

of walls.
Supply first quality stone, natural rough textured finish
cladding facades over concrete and concrete block walls,
walls between tie beams and slab on hard core, slab beams.
Columns (As shown on details) according to Palestine
Standards Institution (NO. 113). Price to include concrete
filling of plain concrete Grade B-250, steel mesh and all
ancillaries. Price also includes cleaning and pointing of the
stone walls.
Supply and Build Stone Jamma’ in first class and first
quality. Mattabeh textured 50 mm thick for stone coping
for parapets, and wall parapets as shown on details.
Page 75 of 449
All works of this bill shall be of Concrete blocks Grade 35

of high quality standards and as per specifications.
Block works shall be measured in meter square. The net
measurement of the complete elevations, excluding all
openings and voids more than 0.1 M. S. in area.
No allowance for thickness used other than those shown in
the drawings.
Rates of Block works include:-
Vertical and horizontal joints. Cement and mortar,
Galvanized angles butter fly ties (at joints and between
walls in cavity walls.
Concrete filling at all ends including reinforcing steel to
2.8 cavities at quoins and door and window openings, reveals, sq.m 1400.00
sills for windows and the like.
Reinforced concrete beams, columns, and others as per
detailed drawings
Bond beams to the full length of the wall, min 20 cm. High
and in the same wall thickness of reinforced concrete grade
B-200 with due reinforcement steel, as specified per
drawings.
And all needed to complete job as per drawings and
specifications.
Supply and Build Concrete Block Walls, 'Grade 35’ of any
size blocks.
Hollow Blocks (10 Ten) cm. thick.
Hollow Blocks (20 Ten) cm. thick.
Supply and Install precast concrete first choice and free
from all defects, for external stairs including Treads of 8
cm thick and Risers of 8 cm. thick. Price shall include
supplying and installing. Also the price to include filling
2.9 sq.m 2800.00
under tiles with suitable filling materials and block works
forming the flights as shown in the details drawings,
cement mortar, grouting, pointing, polishing of face and all
related works
Supply and install First choice and free from all defect,
20x20cm Ceramic Blue color floor tiles for water fountain
3 sq.m 2800.00
floor. Price to include sand with cement filling (Grade B-
100), pointing with white color epoxy and cleaning on site.
Supply and install manhole covers, comprised of two steel
frames 4 mm thick steel, Base one to be embedded in
pavement, and the second one to be 4mm steel frame with
steel bottom, holding ground tiles, with ground tiles being
3.1 L.S 1
flush with the surrounding tiles. Frames to be made for
tiled one to fit snug into the ground one. Price to be
complete to include tiling works, fixing tiles into the steel
frame, paint, all parts and accessories and two steel tool bar
Page 76 of 449
for removing top frame for maintenance.
Size 60×60×5cm
Supply, install, spread, and make good minimum 30 cm
3.2 cu.m 420.00
agricultural soil in areas designated
Supply and plant trees. Price includes digging a minimum
of 1.5m for each tree for the following
3.3 Nos. 360
Palm Tree, Medjoul type not less than 2m high in good
condition
Automatic irrigation facilities (Sump, pump with starter,
3.4 L.S 1
Sprinklers with pipe & fittings,
3 Fountain Works
All mechanical works items mentioned in here and after for
all project facilities and Units shall include installation,
adjustment, testing commissioning, and all required
materials, equipment and workmanship to execute the
3.1 items of construction in accordance with the specifications, L.S 1
drawings, and supervising engineers instructions, complete
in place and ready for handing over.
Measurements for items with (L.m.) or (M2) Units will be
based on net liner distance or net area of the products
UPVC Pipes :
Supply and install UPVC PN16 pipes. The price includes
3.2 L.S 1
all fittings, valves, digging, back filling and all needed to
complete the job as shown in the drawings. Size Ø 1"
Cascade Jet
Supply and install cascade Jet of bronze, 26 L/min flow
3.3 adjusted ,5m head & 0.5" connection as shown in L.S 1
drawings, the price includes all fittings,valves,all
accessories to complete the job.
Stainless Steel Cover Supply & install 60*60cm stainless
3.4 L.S 1
steel cover for submit including frame.
Submersible Pump
Supply and install and commission of submersible pump
3.5 L.S 1
with all accessories for jet system of capacity 1.56 m3/hr.
@ 10m head
Floor Drain
3.6 L.S 1
Supply and install PVC floor drain inside pump
Water make up pipe with float
Supply and install of 1" water make up pipe with float, and
3.7 L.S 1
water level regulator valve. The price includes all fittings
to complete installation
Concrete for Precast RCC Lid with ring for 558 Nos. of
HDPE Manhole:
3.8 Supply and install of precast concrete circular manholes. L.S 1
Price includes excavation, refilling, reinforced manhole
base, concrete rings, Medium duty cast iron cover and
Page 77 of 449
plain concrete bedding with smooth sloped grooves.
Diameter 120 cm and depth 100 cm
Electrical works including all required materials,
3.9 L.S 1
Submersible pump Starter, cables, accessories Etc.,
Construction of RCC Rectangular Car parking area -
4
20.0 x 10.0 x 3.5 m(H) - 1No.Ground floor
4.1 Earth work excavation in ordinary soil 0.00m to 2m depth cu.m 148.00
4.2 cu.m 49.00
foundation
4.3 Earth refilling with excavated soil cu.m 120.00
4.4 Earth refilling in basement by soil from outstation cu.m 180.00
4.5 cu.m 72.00
Kg/Cum) using sulphate resistant cement (SRC)
Centering & Shuttering for Centering / Shuttering for
4.6 sq.m 560.00
footings , Raft , Colum and Beam
4.7 Brick work in cm 1:6 for super structure cu.m 18.00
4.8 including cost of binding wire (18 Gauge) etc., complete as MT 12.00
resistant steel )
4.9 water proofing compound to an average thickness of 15 sq.m 350.00
5 Ellish flooring concrete in cc 1:2:4 sq.m 400.00
Embankment and Stone pitching for 400 m length
5
Nalla crossing over the CETP
Formation of Embankment with RCC wall on both sides
5.1 cu.m 120.00
with 150 mm thick
5.2 Stone pitching for floor with thickness of 150 mm cu.m 180.00
Construction of underground sump & overhead tanks for
6 storage and distrubtion of Service water for dosing systems, cu.m 10.00
laboratories, buildings and other necessary requirements.
II Electro-Mechanical Works:
II.I Primary & Secondary Treatment System:
MOC of all equipment and accessories should be suitable
for application of combined Tannery effluent with pH-8 to
10, TDS: 20000 to 22000, Chlorides (as NaCl): 12000 to
Note 13000 ppm, Sulphate (as Na2SO4): 4000 to 5000 ppm,
Total Hardness (as CaCO3): 1000 to 1200 ppm, COD:
4000 TO 7000 ppm, BOD: 1800 to 3000 ppm, Sp.gravity:
1.02, Temperature: 30 to 35°C
Page 78 of 449
Manual bar Screen: Supply of Manual Bar screen with 10
mm gap between bars suitable for 1250 cu.m/hr, Velocity
of flow is 1.2 m/sec (min) and 1.8 m/sec (Max), Thickness
of bar/ Flat: 8 mm and Width as 25 mm, Size of the bar
screen: 1m Height x 1.5 m width.
1 MOC: All the wetted and non-wetted parts are in SS 316L. Nos. 2
Accessories: Hand rake- 2nos and SS 316L Foundation

Bolt & Nut.
Note: The manual bar screen is stand by for Automated

Stepped Coarse Screen.
Pen Stock for Coarse Screen: Supply of Gear operated Pen
stock arrangement for bye passing Stepped Coarse screen
and to operate Manual Bar screen in case of any
breakdown of Stepped Coarse Screen, for handling inflow
of 1,250 cu.m/ hr, Pen Stock Size: 1000 mm, Duty:
2 Nos. 4
continuous, Installation: Outdoor.
MOC: All the wetted and non-wetted parts are in SS 316L.
Accessories: Foundation Bolt and Nut in SS 316L.

Automated Stepped Coarse Screen: Supply of Automated
stepped Coarse Screen, Screen size: 10 mm with suitable
capacity for handling the nominal inflow of 1250 cu.m/ hr
with velocity of flow is 1.2 m/sec (min) and 2.5m/sec
(Max) and suitable for proposed RCC screen chamber of
6.5 x 1.5 x 2 m, Type: Automated stepped coarse screen
with conveyor arrangement along with fully automated,
self-cleaning arrangement by brush screen, backwash
cleaning arrangement with pumps, continuous operation,
Installation: Out door and Orientation: Elevated level.
Make: Jash/ Xylem/ Italprogetti or equivalent

3 Nos. 2
MOC: All wetted and non- wetted parts and fasteners are
in SS 316L.
Accessories: Gear Box, Motor, Control panel with safety

arrangement weather proof Thermo plastic enclosure,
weather proof FRP motor canopy, FRP Chain guard, Set of
Level control instrument interlock with Stepped Screen,
self-cleaning arrangement by brush screen, backwash
cleaning arrangement with pumps, Debris collection Box,
suitable size of wheel trolley 2 Nos for collecting debris
and SS 316L Foundation Bolt & Nut.
Note: For complete details refer Technical specification
Page 79 of 449
sheet.
Spares: One set of Spares as per Manufacturer
recommendation including minimum Bearing- 3 Nos., Oil
Seal - 3 Nos.
Grit Chamber / Detritor/ Vortex: Supply of Automated
Grit chamber with suitable capacity for handling the
nominal inflow of 1250 cu.m/ hr with velocity of flow is
0.8 m/s along with self-cleaning arrangement with
backwash pumps and suitable for proposed RCC chamber
size of 12.5 x 2.0 x 1 m (SWD) x 0.5 m Free Board.
MOC: All wetted and non- wetted parts are in SS 316L.
Make: Eimco KCP/ Shiv Pad or equivalent.
4 Accessories: Bridge mounted drive, Gear Box, Motor, Set Nos. 3

of Level control instrument interlock with Grit Chamber,
self-cleaning arrangement by backwash arrangement with
pumps, Debris collection Box, Rake/ Screw classifier,
Organic return pump with motor, Central Drive, Drive
control assembly and suitable size of wheel trolley 2 Nos
for collecting debris and SS 316L Foundation Bolt & Nut.
sheet.
Seal - 3 Nos.
Flow Mixer for collection well: Supply of Flow mixer with
5.5 kW capacity along with accessories suitable for
collection well mixing application with suitable for
proposed tank size of 16 m Dia X 3m SWD.
Specification: For selection, Positioning and Qty of Flow

mixer shall be done by using CFD software, Duty:
Continuous, Velocity-0.3m/sec.
MOC: All wetted parts are in SS 316L.

5 Nos. 3
Make: FLYGT/ ABS or equivalent
Accessories: Overloading tripping arrangement, triple

sealing system for maximum protection of the mechanical
shaft seal, Depth block, Lifting arrangement with SS 316L
Chain/ wire along with Chain pulley, Angular positioning
plate, Moisture in motor sensor, Water in oil sensor,
Thermal sensor, column profile tube, and control panel
with Soft starter incorporated with weather proof
(thermoplastic) enclosure with monitoring/tripping relay
Page 80 of 449
for water in oil sensor, Moisture in Motor, high winding
temperature sensor / thermal switch, reverse rotation
preventer, electronic type over load relay, single phasing
preventer and SS 316L Foundation Bolt & Nut.
sheet.
Raw effluent transfer pump for Collection well: Supply of
Raw effluent transfer Pump with capacity of 1250 cu.m /hr
with 12.5 m head along with suitable Non clog impeller
and Mechanical seal arrangement.
Make- Kishore/ KSB/ ABS/ Flygt/ Grundfos/ Kirloskar or

equivalent
MOC: Casing: CI with surfaces coated with cataphoresis

coating (Epoxy power coating), Impeller: SS 316L (CF8M)
and Shaft: SS 316L.
Pump type: Submersible, Centrifugal, Vertical type
Accessories: Motor, Double mechanical seal, Foundation

6 Nos. 3
bolts in SS 316L, Auto coupling, lifting guide pipe in SS
316L (Seamless) and 10 m length SS 316L suitable
industrial chain for Pump lifting (for lifting purpose, to
provide 3" Dia ring at every 1m once in chain with 8 mm
Dia rod), Duck foot bend, Moisture sensor in motor, Water
in oil sensor, high winding temperature sensor / thermal
switch, reverse rotation preventer, electronic type over load
relay, water level control for dry run protection and single
phasing preventer along with weather proof starter control
panel and SS 316L Foundation Bolt & Nut.
sheet.
Seal - 1 Nos. and Mechanical seal - 2 Nos.
Page 81 of 449
Presettler : Supply of Presettler mechanism with central
drive arrangement along with accessories suitable for civil
RCC tank having size of 33 m Dia x 4.0 m SWD x 0.5 m
Free board with RCC super structure/ Walkway platform,
Total volume of the tank is 2917 cu.m, Location: Out door
and Duty: Continuous.
Application: Grit Chamber outlet
MOC:
A. All wetted parts are in SS 316L.
B. Tie rod, Wheel shaft, all fasteners are in SS 316L.
C. Bottom guide bush material for settler drives shaft is
Teflon.
D. MOC of Feed pipe, Sludge pipe and over flow pipe are
in HDPE.
E. Over flow Weir in FRP.
Pre Settler Make: Shiv Pad/ Eimco KCP or equivalent
Gear Box: Speed reduction Gear box with suitable Gear
Ratio,
7 Nos. 3
Make- Radicon Greaves/ Shanthi/ Elecon/ Bonghifoli or
equivalent.
Motor Type: IE2, TEFC, Class F insulation, Make: ABB/
KEC/ CG/ ABB/
Accessories: Gear Box, Motor, Tripping arrangement,
Drive mechanism, feed well with proper support from
super structure including stiffeners and baffles made of
steel plate, Adjustable over load control with load indicator
including cut-off switches and alarm horn in weather proof
enclosure, handrail with toe guard, settler rack shaft, lower
guide bearings, FRP baffles, TOP covered with FRP Hood,
GI walk way gratings, inlet feed pipe, over flow pipe,
adjustable FRP wears, rack arm with blades, EPDM rubber
adjustable squeegees, sludge cone scrapper and desludging
pipe.
Seal - 3 Nos.
Pre settler sludge transfer Pump: Supply of Pre settler
sludge transfer pump with capacity of 100 cu.m/hr @ 30m
Head, Semi open impeller with suitable mechanical seal
arrangement.
Application: Pre settler sludge transfer to sludge holding

8 Nos. 6
tank.
Pump Make- KSB/ Kishore/ Sulzer/ Grundfos/ Johnson/

Flow serve or equivalent.
Type- Centrifugal, Horizontal, Back pull-out design, Dry
Page 82 of 449
bed.
Motor Detail: Make- ABB/KEC/CG/BB/Siemens, Type:

IE2, TEFC, Class F insulation.
MOC: All wetted parts are in SS 316L, Shaft- Suitable for

the application.
Accessories: Motor, MSEP Base frame plate, Coupling,

FRP Coupling Guard, foundation bolt & Nut are in SS
316L and FRP motor canopy.
Automated Rotary drum fine screen: Supply of Automated
Rotary drum Fine Screen with auto backwash arrangement,
Screen size: 3 mm with suitable for handling the nominal
inflow of 1250 cu.m/ hr with velocity of flow is 1.2 m/sec
(min) and 2.5m/sec (Max).
Type: Automated Rotary drum Fine Screen with screw

conveyor arrangement for continuous operation,
Installation: Out door, Orientation: Elevated level
Make: Jash/ Xylem /Italprogetti or equivalent
MOC: All wetted parts are in SS 316L

9 Nos. 3
Accessories: Gear Box, Motor, VFD, Control panel with
safety arrangement weather proof Thermo plastic
enclosure, weather proof FRP motor canopy, FRP guard,
Set of Level control instrument interlock with drum fine
Screen, self-cleaning nozzles, backwash cleaning
arrangement with pumps, Debris collection Box and
suitable size of wheel trolley 2 Nos for collecting debris
and SS 316L Foundation Bolt & Nut.
sheet.
Seal - 3 Nos.
Pen Stock for Rotary drum fine screen: Supply of Gear
operated Pen stock arrangement for Rotary drum fine
screen for handling inflow of 1,250 cu.m/ hr for flow
10 control, Pen Stock Size: 1000 mm, Duty: continuous, Nos. 3
Installation: Outdoor.
Page 83 of 449
Accessories: Foundation Bolt and Nut in SS 316L.
Flow maker for SHT 1& 2: Supply of Flow maker / Flow

Booster with 5.7 kW capacity along with accessories for
Sedimentation Homogeneous Tank (SHT) suitable for
having capacity of civil RCC tank- Race track design with
size of 90 m (L) x 28 m (W) x 6.0 m (SWD) x 0.5 m Free
Board: 14110 cum, Qty-2 Tanks.
Specification: Quantity shown for tentative only even

though for selection, Positioning and Qty of Flow maker/
Flow booster shall be done by using CFD software, Duty:
MOC:
(a) Depth block, Lifting arrangement, Angular positioning
plate- SS 316L.
(b) Casing: Cast Iron and surfaces coated with cataphoresis
coating or SS 316L.
11 Nos. 12
(c) Propellers- Polyamide/ SS 316L.
Make: FLYGT/ABS or equivalent
Accessories: Overloading tripping arrangement (Shear

pin), triple sealing system for maximum protection of the
mechanical shaft seal, Depth block, Lifting arrangement,
Angular positioning plate, Moisture in motor sensor, Water
in oil sensor, Thermal sensor, column profile tube, and
control panel with Soft starter incorporated with weather
proof (thermoplastic) enclosure with monitoring/tripping
relay for water in oil sensor, Moisture in Motor, high
winding temperature sensor / thermal switch, reverse
rotation preventer, electronic type over load relay, single
phasing preventer and SS 316L Foundation Bolt & Nut.
sheet.
Page 84 of 449
Flow Jet for SHT 1 & 2: Supply of Flow jet with 8 kW
capacity along with accessories for Sedimentation
Homogeneous Tank (SHT) suitable for having capacity of
civil RCC tank- Race track design with size of 90 m (L) x
28 m (W) x 6.0 m (SWD) x 0.5 m Free Board: 14110 cum,
Qty-2 Tanks.

coating (Epoxy power coating), Impeller and Shaft: SS
316L (CF8M).
Make: FLYGT/ABS or equivalent.
12 Accessories: Pedestal stand, Ejector Nozzle, SS 316L air Nos. 10

pipe for 10m length, 10 m length SS 316L suitable
industrial chain/ Rope for Pump lifting (for lifting purpose,
to provide 3” Dia ring at every 1m once in chain with 8
mm Dia rod), Moisture in motor sensor, Water in oil
sensor, Thermal sensor, column profile tube, and starter
control panel with weather proof (thermoplastic) enclosure
with monitoring/tripping relay for water in oil sensor,
Moisture in Motor, high winding temperature sensor /
thermal switch, reverse rotation preventer, electronic type
over load relay, single phasing preventer and SS 316L
Foundation Bolt & Nut.
sheet.
Raw effluent transfer pump for SHT: Supply of Raw
effluent transfer Pump with capacity of 600 cu.m /hr with
12.5 m head along with suitable Non clog impeller and
Mechanical seal arrangement.

equivalent

coating (Epoxy power coating), Impeller: SS 316L (CF8M)
13 and Shaft: SS 316L. Nos. 3

316L (Seamless) and 10 m length SS 316L suitable
Page 85 of 449
sheet.
Flash mixer - I for Lime: Supply of agitator for Flash
Mixer- I with 100 RPM, SS 316L solid shaft and four
blades of SS 316L suitable for 3.7 x 3.7 x 3.7 SWD x 0.5
m Free Board - 50.6 cum volume of civil RCC tank and
RCC Super Structure/ Walkway platform.
Application: Water base with Lime, solid concentration of

5%
Gear Box make: Shanthi/ Greaves Radicon/ Bonghifoli/

Elecon or equivalent make.
14 Nos. 2
Accessories: Speed reducer gear box with suitable Gear

Ratio, Motor, MSEP Base frame plate, foundation bolts in
S.S 316L, FRP motor canopy with flange type coupler and
fasteners are in SS 316L.
Seal - 3 Nos.
Flash mixer - II for Alum: Supply of agitator for Flash
Mixer- II with 100 RPM, SS 316L solid shaft and four
blades of SS 316L suitable for 3.7 x 3.7 x 3.7 SWD x 0.5
m Free Board - 50.6 cum volume civil RCC tank and RCC
Super Structure
Application: Water base with Alum
15 Gear Box make: Shanthi/ Greaves Radicon/ Bonghifoli/ Nos. 2



Page 86 of 449
sheet.
Seal - 3 Nos.
Lime Agitator: Supply of Lime Mixing agitator with 100
RPM, SS 316L solid shaft and four blades of SS 316L
impeller suitable for 4.3 m x 4.3 m x 4.0 SWD x 0.5 m
Free Board – 74 cum volume civil RCC tank and RCC
Super Structure.
Application: Water base with Lime, Solid concentration of

5%

16 Nos. 8

sheet.
Seal - 3 Nos.
Alum Agitator: Supply of Alum Mixing agitator with 100
impeller suitable for 3.5 x 3.5 x 4.0 SWD x 0.5 m Free
Board - 49 cum volume civil RCC tank and RCC Super
Structure/ Walkway platform.
Application: Water base with Alum, Solid concentration of

10 to 20%
17 Nos. 8


Page 87 of 449
sheet.
Seal - 3 Nos.
Lime Dosing Pump: Supply of Lime dosing pump, Vertical

Glandless type with capacity of 0-12,000 LPH with 60 m
head.
MOC: All wetted parts are in SS316L

5%
Make: Process Pumps

18 Nos. 4
Accessories: Dry run protection arrangement, VFD Drive
for flow control, Motor and Standard Accessories, MSEP
Base frame, foundation bolts in S.S 316 and FRP motor
Guard and fasteners SS 316L.
sheet.
Seal - 2 Nos.
Alum Dosing Pump: Supply of Alum dosing pump,
Diaphragm/ Metering type with capacity of 0 - 6000 LPH
with 60 m head.

10 to 20 %
Make: Xeed, Swelore Pumps, Milton Roy or equivalent

19 Nos. 4
Accessories: Dry run protection, VFD Drive for flow
control, Motor and Standard Accessories comprising of
PRV, Pulsation dampener, Anti siphon valve, ‘Y’ type
strainer, MSEP Base frame plate, Coupling, FRP Coupling
Guard, Foundation bolt, nut in SS 316L and FRP motor
canopy for the above pump.
sheet.
Seal - 3 Nos.
Page 88 of 449
Poly Agitator: Supply of Poly Mixing agitator with 100
impeller suitable for 5.0 x 5.0 x 3.0 SWD x 0.5 m Free
Board - 75 cum volume civil RCC tank and RCC Super
Structure.
Application: Poly, Concentration- 0.02 %

20 Motor Detail: Make- ABB/KEC/CG/BB/Siemens, Type: Nos. 2


S.S 316, FRP motor canopy with flange type coupler and
sheet.
Seal - 3 Nos.
Poly Dosing Pump: Supply of Poly dosing pump,
with 60 m head.
MOC: All wetted parts are in PP.
Poly Dosing Pump Make: Xeed, Swelore Pumps, Milton

Roy or equivalent.
21 Nos. 4
Accessories: VFD for flow control, Dry run protection,
Motor and Standard Accessories comprising of PRV,
Pulsation dampener, Anti siphon valve, ‘Y’ type strainer,
MSEP Base frame plate, Coupling, FRP Coupling Guard,
Foundation bolt, nut in SS 316L and FRP motor canopy for
the above pump.
sheet.
Seal - 3 Nos.
Page 89 of 449
Primary Clarifier: Supply of Primary Clarifier mechanism
with Central drive along with accessories suitable for civil
RCC tank having size of 28 m Dia x 3.5 m SWD x 0.3m
Free board, Total volume of the tank is 2155 cu.m with
RCC super structure/ walkway platform , Location: Out
door and Duty: Continuous.
Application: Flash Mixer-II outlet.
MOC:
A. All wetted parts are in SS 316L.
B. Tie rod, Wheel shaft, all fasteners are in SS 316L.
C. Bottom guide bush material for Clarifier drives shaft is
Teflon.
D. MOC of Sludge pipe and over flow pipe are in HDPE.
E. Over flow weirs are in FRP.
Ratio, Make-: Shanthi /Greaves Radicon/ Bonghifoli /
Elecon or equivalent.
22 Primary Clarifier Make: Shiv Pad/ Eimco KCP or Nos. 3
equivalent, Motor Type: IE2, TEFC, Class F insulation,
Make: CG/Siemens/ABB/ KEC/ CG/ BB.
enclosure, Clarifier rack shaft, lower guide bearings, FRP
baffles, inlet feed pipe, over flow pipe, overflow launder,
adjustable FRP wears, rack arm with blades , EPDM
rubber adjustable squeegees, sludge cone scrapper,
desludging pipe and SS 316L Foundation bolt & nuts.
sheet.
Seal - 3 Nos.
Page 90 of 449
Primary Clarifier sludge transfer Pump: Supply of
Clariflocculator sludge transfer Pump with capacity of 110
cu.m/hr @ 30m Head, Semi open impeller with suitable
mechanical seal arrangement.
Application: Primary Clarifier sludge transfer to Sludge
holding tank
bed.
Motor Type: IE2, TEFC, Class F insulation, Make:
CG/Siemens/ABB/ KEC/ CG/ BB.
23 Nos. 6
the application.
Accessories: Gear Box, Motor, MSEP Base frame plate,

Coupling, FRP Coupling Guard, foundation bolt & Nut are
in SS 316L and FRP motor canopy.
sheet.
Original Hydrodynamic Reactor ( OHR ) Aerator, for
Pre-Aeration tank- I:
Supply of OHR Aerator with accessories suitable for
having capacity of civil RCC tank with size of 33 m (L) x
Qty-2 Tanks to mix oxygen in effluent by Aeration with
Size of Air bubble in approx. 100 µm along with following
24 Lot 2
specifications
Preferable make: OHR Laboratory Corporation, Japan.
Material of construction: Body and flange in polypropylene
and Inter Connecting Air-Pipes are in PP40A
(Polypropylene).
Alpha Value: 0.98 to 1.07
Coverage area per unit all over tank aeration: 6 – 7 m2
Page 91 of 449
Liquid oxygen dosing system :
Supply of liquid oxygen dosing system along with Bulk
Liquid oxygen storage system, Mixflow system and
Mixflow pump as per manufacturer recommendation
OR
/ (Optional: Turbo Blowers) for Pre Aeration Tank- I:
Blower for Pre Aeration tank -I: Blower with discharge
(design) air flow is 13252 Nm3/ hr, pressure 0.75 kg/cm2,
Type-Centrifugal Turbo energy efficient high speed
Blowers. The high-speed turbo blower consists of a single
motor-impeller assembly with unique bearings lubricated
by air, Built-in VFD for capacity control with air-foil
bearing air cooled, touch screen HMI display to show
online display of parameters like Flow, Pressure, Power
and D.O, Direct connection with D.O. sensor for control &
monitoring of D.O. with complete set.
26 Make: Aerzen- Godrej/ Turbo MAX or equivalent Nos. 3
Accessories: Blowers should be supplied with Air Foil

bearing for high speed operation, Entire range is air-
cooled, Variable Speed Drive for achieving high speed,
smooth starts (reduced starting current ) & energy efficient
capacity control as part of the Blower package., Permanent
Magnet Motor, safety valve, suction filter, suction silencer,
discharge silencer, non-return valve, pressure gauge in SS
316L, anti-vibration pads, along with motor with SS 316L
isolation Butterfly valves for each Blower and Pressure
gauge for each header and main distribution lines to
determine leakage / Breakage of pipes of membrane with
SS 316L isolation Butterfly valves and SS 316L foundation
bolt & nuts.
Seal - 3 Nos.
Erection charges for above mentioned works & Obtaining
27 approval from Explosive department for Liquid oxygen Lot 3
dosing system
Page 92 of 449
Pipes and fittings with necessary valves for Liquid oxygen
dosing system / Turbo Blowers in Pre Aeration tank -I :
Supply of piping with accessories such as pipe clamp with
coupling, fasteners and supports, purge line & Erection
works for OHR aeration system in Pre aeration tank- I
along with blower header lines are in unidirectional flow.
Also the aeration piping system design for OHR / tank.
Velocity for Pipe selection: 15 to 25 m/sec. MOC: (a)
Aeration distribution, lateral lines and Blower header lines-
28 SS 316L, Sch 10, Seamless.(b) Pipe clamp with coupling, Lot 2
fasteners and supports, purge line- SS 316L(c) Valve
wetted parts are in SS 316L.Pipe make: Sumitomo,
Tubacex or equivalent. Welding: All the SS lines should be
welded with Tig welding.
Pipe make: Sumitomo, Tubacex or equivalent.
Welding: All the SS lines should be welded with Tig

welding.
Pre Aeration tank- II:
having capacity of civil RCC tank with size of 10 m (L) x
Qty-2 Tanks to mix oxygen in effluent by Aeration with
Size of Air bubble in approx. 100 µm along with following
29 Lot 2
specifications
Preferable make: OHR Laboratory Corporation, Japan
(Polypropylene).
Page 93 of 449
Liquid oxygen dosing system:
Liquid oxygen storage system, Mixflow system and
Mixflow pump as per manufacturer recommendation
OR
(Optional : Blower ) for Pre Aeration tank- II:
Blower with discharge (design) air flow is 5345 Nm3/ hr,
pressure 0.75 kg/cm2, Type-Centrifugal Turbo energy
efficient high speed Blowers. The high-speed turbo blower
consists of a single motor-impeller assembly with unique
bearings lubricated by air, Built-in VFD for capacity
control with air-foil bearing air cooled, touch screen HMI
display to show online display of parameters like Flow,
Pressure, Power and D.O, Direct connection with D.O.
sensor for control & monitoring of D.O. with complete set.
Make: Aerzen- Godrej/ TurboMAX or equivalent

31 Nos. 3
bolt & nuts.
Seal - 3 Nos.
sheet.
Erection charges for above mentioned works & Obtaining
32 approval from Explosive department for Liquid oxygen Lot 3
dosing system
Page 94 of 449
Pipes and fittings with necessary valves for Liquid oxygen
dosing system / Turbo Blower & OHR aeration system in
Pre Aeration tank -II: Supply of piping with accessories
such as pipe clamp with coupling, fasteners and supports,
purge line & Erection works for OHR aeration system in
Pre aeration tank- II along with blower header lines are in
unidirectional flow. Also the aeration piping system design
OHR / tank.
Velocity for Pipe selection: 15 to 25 m/sec.
33 MOC: Lot 2
(a) OHR aeration distribution, lateral lines and Blower
header lines- SS 316L, Sch 10, Seamless.
(b) Pipe clamp with coupling, fasteners and supports, purge
line- SS 316L
(c) Valve wetted parts are in SS 316L.

welding.
Flow mixer for Anoxic tank: Supply of Flow mixer with 10
kW capacity along with accessories suitable for Anoxic
Tank mixing application with suitable for proposed tank
size of 24 x 20 x 5.0m (SWD) x 0.5 m Free Board- 2400
cum. Tank Quantity - 2 Nos

Mixer shall be done by using CFD software, Duty:
Flow mixer Make: FLYGT/ ABS or equivalent.

34 Nos. 12
Accessories: Overloading tripping arrangement, triple
sealing system for maximum protection of the mechanical
shaft seal, Depth block, Lifting arrangement with SS 316L
Chain/ wire along with Chain pulley, Angular positioning
(thermoplastic) enclosure with monitoring/tripping relay
for water in oil sensor, Moisture in Motor, high winding
preventer, electronic type over load relay, single phasing
preventer and SS 316L Foundation Bolt & Nut.
Page 95 of 449
sheet.

Aeration tank -I (BIOT):
having capacity of civil RCC tank- Race track design with
Board: 29858 cum, Qty- 2 Tanks to mix oxygen in effluent
by Aeration with Size of Air bubble in approx. 100 µm
35 Lot 2
along with following specifications
(Polypropylene).
Blower for Aeration tank -I (BIOT-I): Blower with
discharge (design) air flow is 12000 Nm3/ hr, pressure
0.75kg/cm2, Type-Centrifugal Turbo energy efficient high
speed Blowers. The high-speed turbo blower consists of a
single motor-impeller assembly with unique bearings
lubricated by air, Built-in VFD for capacity control with
air-foil bearing air cooled, touch screen HMI display to
show online display of parameters like Flow, Pressure,
Power and D.O, Direct connection with D.O. sensor for
control & monitoring of D.O. with complete set.
Make: Aerzen- Godrej/ TurboMAX or equivalent.

37 cooled, Variable Speed Drive for achieving high speed, Nos. 7
bolt & nuts.
Seal - 3 Nos.
sheet.
Page 96 of 449
38 Erection charges for Turbo Blowers for BIOT- I Lot 1
Bypass line for BIOT
Pipes and fittings with necessary valves for providing
bypass line arrangement for BIOT I & II
39 Lot 1
MOC:
(a) Lateral lines and header lines- HDPE, PN10, PE100
(b) Valve wetted parts are in SS 316L.
Pipes and fittings with necessary valves for OHR aeration
system in BIOT- I: Supply of piping with accessories such
as pipe clamp with coupling, fasteners and supports, purge
line & Erection works for OHR aeration system in BIOT- I
along with blower header lines are in unidirectional flow.
Also the aeration piping system design for OHR / tank.
MOC:
40 Lot 2
line- SS 316L

welding.
Page 97 of 449
Flow maker for Aeration Tank - Stage I: Supply of Flow
maker / Flow Booster with 5.7 kW capacity along with
accessories for Biological Oxidation Tank (BIOT-I)
suitable for having capacity of civil RCC tank- Race track
design with size of 106 m (L) x 48 m (W) x 6.5 m (SWD)
x 0.5 m Free Board: 29858 cum, Qty- 2 Tanks.

MOC:
plate- SS 316L.
coating or SS 316L.
41 Nos. 12

phasing preventer and SS 316L Foundation bolt & nuts.
sheet.
Page 98 of 449
SRS Feed Pump for Aeration Tank (BIOT-I): Supply of
SRS Feed Pump with capacity of 600 cu.m /hr with 12.5 m
Head, with suitable impeller (Non-clog).
Application: Bio sludge from Secondary Treatment.

Make- KSB/Kishore/Grundfos/ABS/ FLYGT/ Kirloskar or
equivalent.
MOC: Casing: Cast Iron and surfaces coated with
cataphoresis coating, Impeller- CF8M (SS316L), Shaft-
SS316L.
Pump type: Submersible, Centrifugal, Vertical type.
42 316L (Seamless) and 10 m length SS 316L suitable Nos. 3
sheet.
Secondary Clarifier I: Supply of Secondary clarifier
mechanism with central driven and scum removal
arrangement suitable for civil RCC tank having size of 36
m Dia x 3.5 m SWD x 0.3m Free board with RCC super
structure/ walkway platform, Total volume of the tank is
3548 cu.m, Location: Out door, Duty: Continuous.
Application: Biological aerated Effluent
Secondary Clarifier Make: Eimco KCP/ Shiv Pad or
equivalent.
MOC: A. All wetted parts are in SS 316L.B. Tie rod,
43 Wheel shaft, all fasteners are in SS 316L.C. Bottom guide Nos. 2
bush material for Clarifier drives shaft is Teflon.
D. MOC of Sludge pipe and over flow pipe are in HDPE.E.
Over flow weirs are in FRP. Gear Box: Speed reduction
Gear box with suitable Gear Ratio, Make- Radicon
Greaves/ Shanthi/ Elecon/ Bonghifoli or equivalent. Motor
Type: IE2, TEFC, Class F insulation, Make:
Page 99 of 449
enclosure, handrail with toe guard, Clarifier rack shaft,
lower guide bearings, FRP baffles, GI walk way gratings,
inlet feed pipe, over flow pipe, overflow launder,
adjustable FRP wears, rack arm with blades , FRP
adjustable squeegees, sludge cone scrapper, desludging
pipe and SS 316L Foundation bolt & nuts.
Seal - 3 Nos.
Aeration tank- II (BIOT II):
having capacity of civil RCC tank- Race rack design with
Board: 29301 cum, Qty- 2 Tanks. To mix oxygen in
44 effluent by Aeration with Size of Air bubble in approx. 100 Lot 2
µm along with following specifications
(Polypropylene.
Blower for Aeration tank -II (BIOT- II): Blower with
lubricated by air, Built-in VFD for capacity control with
air-foil bearing air cooled, touch screen HMI display to
show online display of parameters like Flow, Pressure,
Power and D.O, Direct connection with D.O. sensor for
control & monitoring of D.O. with complete set.
Make: Aerzen- Godrej/ TurboMAX or equivalent
46 Nos. 6
bolt & nuts.
Page 100 of 449

Seal - 3 Nos.
sheet.
47 Erection charges for Turbo Blowers for BIOT- II Lot 1

Pipes and fittings with necessary valves for OHR aeration
system in BIOT- II: Supply of piping with accessories such
as pipe clamp with coupling, fasteners and supports, purge
line & Erection works for OHR aeration system in BIOT-
II along with blower header lines are in unidirectional
flow. Also the aeration piping system design for OHR/
tank.

48 Lot 2
MOC:
line- SS 316L

welding.
Flow maker for Aeration Tank -II (BIOT- II): Supply of
Flow maker / Flow Booster with 5.7 kW capacity along
with accessories for Biological Oxidation Tank (BIOT- II)
suitable for having capacity of civil RCC tank- Race rack
design with size of 106 m (L) x 47 m (W) x 6.5 m (SWD)
x 0.5 m Free Board: 29301 cum, Qty- 2 Tanks.
49 MOC: Nos. 12
plate- SS 316L.
coating or SS 316L.

Page 101 of 449

phasing preventer and SS 316L Foundation bolt & nuts.

sheet.
SRS Feed Pump for Aeration Tank(Stage -II) : Supply of
Head, with suitable impeller (Non-clog).

Make- KSB/Kishore/Grundfos/ABS/ FLYGT/ Kirloskar or
equivalent.
MOC: Casing: Cast Iron and surfaces coated with
cataphoresis coating, Impeller- CF8M (SS316L), Shaft-
SS316L.
Accessories: Motor, Foundation bolts in SS 316L, Auto
coupling, lifting guide pipe in SS 316L (Seamless) and 10
50 Nos. 3
m length SS 316L suitable industrial chain for Pump lifting
(for lifting purpose, to provide 3" Dia ring at every 1m
once in chain with 8 mm Dia rod), Duck foot bend,
Moisture in motor sensor, Water in oil sensor, high
rotation preventer, electronic type over load relay and
single phasing preventer along with weather proof starter
control panel.
sheet.
Page 102 of 449

Secondary Clarifier II: Supply of Secondary clarifier
arrangement suitable for civil RCC tank having size of 36
m Dia x 3.5 m SWD x 0.3m Free board with RCC super
structure, Total volume of the tank is 3563 cu.m, Location:
Out door, Duty: Continuous.
Wheel shaft, all fasteners are in SS 316L.C. Bottom guide
bush material for Clarifier drives shaft is Teflon.D. MOC
of Sludge pipe and over flow pipe are in HDPE.E. Over
flow weirs are in FRP.
Ratio, Make- Radicon Greaves/ Shanthi/ Elecon /
Bonghifoli or equivalent. Motor Type: IE2, TEFC, Class F
51 Nos. 2
insulation, Make: CG/Siemens/ABB/ KEC/ CG/
BB.Accessories: Gear Box, Motor, Tripping arrangement,
enclosure, handrail with toe guard, Clarifier rack shaft,
inlet feed pipe, over flow pipe, overflow launder,
adjustable FRP wears, rack arm with blades , FRP
adjustable squeegees, sludge cone scrapper, desludging
pipe and SS 316L Foundation bolt & nuts.
Seal - 3 Nos.
Caustic Dosing Pump for RC inlet: Supply of Caustic
dosing pump, Diaphragm/ Metering type with capacity of 7
cum/hr with 20m head.
Application: Sodium Hypo Chlorite, Concentration- 4 to 8

%
52 Nos. 3
Caustic Dosing Pump Make: Xeed/ Swelore/ Milton Roy
or equivalent.
Accessories: VFD Drive for flow control, Motor and

Standard Accessories comprising of PRV, Pulsation
dampener, Anti siphon valve, ‘Y’ type strainer, MSEP
Base frame plate, Coupling, FRP Coupling Guard,
Foundation bolt, nut in SS 316L and FRP motor canopy for
the above pump.
Page 103 of 449

Seal - 3 Nos.
sheet.
Caustic Storage Tank for RC inlet: Supply of Cylinder,
Vertical FRP storage tank with capacity of 15000 Ltrs,
suitable for outdoor installation.
Application: Caustic, Concentration- 48 %
53 MOC: FRP with suitable Resin. Nos. 12
Accessories: Top manual with lid and Nozzles (Nozzle

details: For Outlet, Inlet, Drain, Overflow- Dia 2” x 6”
Length from Tank (Each 1 Nos.), For LT- Dia 4” x 6”
Length from Tank (1 Nos.), For Recirculation- Dia 2” x 6”
Length from Tank (1 Nos.)
Reactor Clarifier: Supply of Reactor clarifier with Central
drive arrangement, suitable for Civil RCC tank having size
of 27 m Dia x 4.0 SWD x 0.3m Free board with RCC
Super Structure, Feed rate of 2289 cum/day, Location: Out
door, Duty: Continuous, SOR considered as 1m3/m2/hr .
Application: Lime Soda softening Treatment for
Secondary outlet, pH- 2.0 to 5, TDS- 40000 to 50000
mg/lit, Total Hardness-8000 to 12000 mg/lit.
MOC:
A. All wetted parts are in SS 316L B. All non wetted parts
are in MS with Epoxy coating to apply one coat of Epoxy
primer and two coat of Epoxy coating (500 microns
thick).C. All fasteners and Sampling pipes with Flanged
end ball valves (4nos) are in SS 316L.D. Bottom guide
bush material for Clarifier drive shaft is Teflon.E. MOC of
54 Nos. 2
inlet feed pipe, over flow pipe and Chemical feed pipes are
in HDPE.Gear Box: Speed reduction Gear box with
suitable Gear Ratio, Make- Radicon Greaves/
Shanthi/Elecon.Motor Type: IE 2, TEFC, Class F
insulation, Make: ABB/KEC/CG/BB Accessories: Gear
Box, Motor, Reactor drive mechanism, Turbine drive
mechanism, Conical reaction chamber with support from
steel plate, Turbine drive motor, rack drive with torque
control box, super structure, Adjustable over load control
with load indicator including cut off switches and alarm
horn in weather proof enclosure, handrail with toe guard,
turbine with blades, turbine shaft, rack shaft, lower guide
bearings, reaction well, FRP baffles, recirculation drum,
rotating drum, GI walk way gratings, inlet feed pipe, over
Page 104 of 449

flow pipe, overflow launder, adjustable FRP wears, rack
arm with blades.
Seal - 3 Nos.
sheet.
Soda Ash Mixing Agitator: Supply of Soda Mixing agitator
with 100 RPM, SS 316L solid shaft and four blades of SS
316L impeller suitable for RCC Tank having size of 3.5 x
3.5 x 4.0 SWD x 0.5 m Free Board - 49 cum volume with
RCC Super Structure/ walkway platform.
Application: Water base with Soda Ash, Solid

concentration of 10 to 20%

55 Bonghifoli or equivalent. Nos. 4

Accessories: Gear Box, Motor, foundation bolts in S.S

316L, FRP motor canopy with flange type coupler.
Seal - 3 Nos.
sheet.
Glandless type with capacity of 23 cu.m/ hr with 60m head
with accessories.
MOC: All wetted parts are in SS316L
Application: Water base with Lime.
Make: Process Pumps or equivalent.

56 Nos. 3
Accessories: VFD for flow control, Dry run protection,
MSEP Base Frame, Motor and Standard Accessories,
foundation bolts in S.S 316L and FRP motor Guard.
Seal - 2 Nos.
sheet.
Page 105 of 449

Soda Ash Dosing Pump: Supply of Soda Ash Dosing pump
with capacity of 8 cu.m/hr @ 30m Head, Semi open
impeller with suitable mechanical seal arrangement along
with accessories.
Application: Water base with Soda ash, Solid
concentration of 10 to 20%
Flow serve or equivalent
bed.
57 CG/Siemens/ABB/ KEC/ CG/ BB. Nos. 3
MOC: All wetted parts are in SS316L, Shaft- Suitable for
the application.
Accessories: Motor, VFD for flow control, Dry run
protection, MSEP Base frame plate, Coupling, FRP
Coupling Guard, foundation bolt & Nut are in SS 316L and
FRP motor canopy.
Seal - 2 Nos.
sheet.
Poly Agitator for Thickener: Supply of Poly Mixing
agitator with 100 RPM, SS 316L solid shaft and four
blades of SS 316L impeller suitable for 4 x 4 x 3.0 m SWD
x 0.5 m Free Board - 48 cum volume civil RCC tank.

Bonghifoli or equivalent.
58 Nos. 2
working platform, foundation bolts in S.S 316, FRP motor
canopy with flange type coupler.
Seal - 3 Nos.
sheet.
Page 106 of 449

Poly Dosing Pump for Thickener: Supply of Poly dosing
pump, Diaphragm/ Metering type with capacity of 0 - 5672
LPH with 60m head along with accessories.
Application: Poly Electrolyte, Concentration- 0.05 %

Make: Xeed, Swelore, Milton Roy or equivalent.
Accessories: Accessories: VFD for flow control, Dry run
59 protection, Motor and Standard Accessories comprising of Nos. 2
strainer, MSEP Base frame plate, Coupling, FRP Coupling
Guard, Foundation bolt, nut in SS 316L and FRP motor
Seal - 3 Nos.
sheet.
Reactor clarifier sludge transfer Pump: Supply of Reactor
clarifier sludge transfer Pump with capacity of 110 cu.m/hr
@ 30m Head, Semi open impeller with suitable mechanical
seal arrangement.
Application: Reactor clarifier sludge transfer to Thickener.
bed.
60 Nos. 4
the application.
Coupling, FRP Coupling Guard, foundation bolt & Nut are
in SS 316L and FRP motor canopy.

sheet.
Page 107 of 449

Agitator for Sludge Holding tank: Supply of sludge Mixing
agitator with 100 RPM, SS 316L solid shaft and four
blades of SS 316L impeller suitable for 13 x 13 x 4.0 SWD
x 0.5m Free Board - 591 cum volume civil RCC tank with
RCC super structure.

61 Motor Type: IE2, TEFC, Class F insulation, Make: Nos. 3


working platform, foundation bolts in S.S 316L, FRP
motor canopy with flange type coupler.
Seal - 3 Nos.
sheet.
Thickener Feed Pump: Supply of Thickener Feed Pump
with capacity of 142 cu.m/hr @ 30m Head, Semi open
impeller with suitable mechanical seal arrangement along
with accessories.
Application: Sludge transfer from Sludge Holding tank to

Thickener


bed.
62 Nos. 2

sheet.
Page 108 of 449

Sludge Thickener for Bio & Chemical Sludge: Supply of
Thickener mechanism with central drive arrangement,
suitable for Civil RCC tank having size of 25 m Dia x 3.5m
SWD x 0.5m Free board, volume of the tank is 1654 cu.m,
Location: Out door, Duty: Continuous.
Application: Sludge from Pre Settler, Primary Clarifier,
Secondary clarifier and Reactor clarifier
Thickener Make: Eimco KCP, Shiv Pad or equivalent.
Wheel shaft, all fasteners are in SS 316L.C. Bottom guide
bush material for Clarifier drives shaft is Teflon.D. MOC
of Sludge pipe and over flow pipe are in HDPE.E. Over
flow weirs are in FRP.
Bonghifoli or equivalent. Motor Type: IE2, TEFC, Class F
63 insulation, Make: CG/Siemens/ABB/ KEC/ CG/ BB. Nos. 2
drive mechanism, feed well with proper support from super
structure including stiffeners and baffles made from steel
plate, super structure, Adjustable over load control with
load indicator including cut-off switches and alarm horn in
weather proof enclosure, rack shaft, lower guide bearings,
FRP baffles,TOP covered with FRP Hood, inlet feed pipe,
over flow pipe, overflow launder, adjustable FRP wears,
rack arm with blades , adjustable squeegees, sludge cone
scrapper, desludging pipe and SS 316L foundation bolt &
nuts.
Seal - 3 Nos.
sheet.
Page 109 of 449

Filter Press Feed Pump for Bio & Chemical Sludge:
Supply of Filter Press feed Pump (Screw pump) with
capacity of 40 cu.m/hr @ 150 m Head with suitable
mechanical seal arrangement along with necessary seal
cooling and flushing arrangements.
Application: Sludge from Pre Settler, Clariflocculator,
Pump: Make- Alpha Helical/ Roto/ UT / Hydro Prokav or
equivalent.
Pump type- Screw, Horizontal
MOC:
64 Nos. 13
1. Rotor and all wetted parts are in CF8M (SS 316L)
2. Stator- Nitrile Rubber
3. Motor canopy/ Coupling guard- FRP
Accessories: Motor with VFD Drive, Dry run protection,

Over load tripping sensor, MSEP Base frame plate,
Coupling, FRP Coupling Guard, foundation bolts in SS
sheet.
Filter Press for Bio & Chemical Sludge: Supply of Filter
press suitable for feed flow is 7.3 cu.m/ hr, Operating
pressure 10 bar, Plate size 1200 x 1200 mm, cake thickness
30 mm with suitable 140 number of plates, Arrangement of
pattern vertical, Closure of filter pack Automatic
(Hydraulic power pack), Pressure closing system Operation
of filter semi-automated, Control of filter fully automated
and sludge removing chute etc.
Make: Hydro Press/ Andritz or equivalent.

65 Nos. 12
Application: Sludge from Thickener, pH- 7 to 8, Solid
concentration- 8 to 10 %
MOC:
1. Filter pack- Polypropylene
2. Filtrate cloth- PP
3. Superstructure- MSEP
4. Filtrate Tray: FRP
Accessories: VFD, Motor, Limit switch, Connecting hose,

Control panel, set of safety pressure gauge, Cable between
control panel & motor and safety device and Hydraulic oil,
Page 110 of 449

SS 316L foundation bolts and nuts, FRP Filtrate tray,
Filtrate valves, Filtrate cloth and Hydraulic power pack.
sheet.
Pipes and fittings for SHT, Primary Clarifier, SRS,
Secondary clarifier, Thickener, Filter Press: Supply of
piping, accessories and supports & Erection works for
SHT, Primary Clarifier, SRS, Secondary clarifier,
Thickener, Filter Press.
Pipe Specification:
(a) HDPE- Readymade fittings for up to 10”size.
(b) SS- Readymade fittings for all the sizes.
(c) Velocity for Pipe selection: Process lines- 0.6 to 0.8
m/sec (Gravity and pump suction lines)/ 1.2 to 1.8 m/sec
(pump delivery lines/ pressure lines)
MOC:
66 1. All gravity lines- HDPE, PN6, PE100, IS4984. Lot 1
2. Submersible pump delivery lines- SS 316L, Sch 10,
ERW.
3. All supports- MSEP.
4. Chemical dosing lines (NaOH, POLY) - HDPE, PN10,
PE100, IS4984.
5. Alum, Lime and Soda ash- PVC Pipe, Sch 40
6. Filter press lines- SS 316L, Sch 40, ERW.
7. Fasteners: SS 316L
Welding:
1. All the SS lines are welded with Tig welding
2. All the MS lines are welded with Arc welding
3. PVC lines are joined with socket welding.
4. HDPE pipes are butt fusion welding.
Lifting arrangement: Supply, Fabrication, Erection of
lifting arrangement structural material, Mono Rails (2
Nos.), Chain Block (2 Nos), SS 316 Lifting Chains with
67 required capacity for Submersible pumps, Primary Lot 1
Clarifier, Secondary Clarifier, Reactor Clarifier,
Thickener, Filter Press & Blower house, QF & UF,
Agitator / Flash mixers, Sludge storage yard, etc.,.
Page 111 of 449

Service Water Pump for Process: Supply of Service water
pump with capacity of 150 cu.m/hr @ 30m Head, MOC:
SS316L (CF8M), Closed impeller with suitable mechanical
seal arrangement.
Application: Water


68 bed. Nos. 2

MOC: All wetted parts are in CI, Shaft and Sleeve-
Suitable for the application.
Accessories: Mechanical Seal, Motor, MSEP Base frame
plate, Coupling, FRP Coupling Guard, foundation bolt &
Nut are in SS 316L and FRP motor canopy.
Service Water Pump for Gardening: Supply of Service
water pump with capacity of 50 cu.m/hr @ 30m Head,
MOC: SS316L (CF8M), Closed impeller with suitable
Application: Water


69 bed. Nos. 2

Page 112 of 449

Service Water Pump for Gardening: Supply of Service
water pump with capacity of 50 cu.m/hr @ 30m Head,
MOC: SS316L (CF8M), Closed impeller with suitable
Application: Water


70 bed. Nos. 2

Hydrogen Peroxide & Phosphoric acid Dosing Pump :
Supply of Antiscalent dosing pump, Diaphragm/ Metering
type with capacity of 1000 LPH with 20m head.
Make: Swelore/ Milton Roy/ Xeed or equivalent

71 Nos. 4
Accessories: VFD for flow control, MSEP Base Frame,
Motor, Anti siphon valve, Pulsation dampener, SS 316L
foundation bolt & nut and Pressure relief valve.
Seal - 3 Nos.
Supply, Erection, Testing & Commissioning the 33 KV
C
/ 11 KV Substation Package
Scope of work:
The scope of design, engineering, manufacture, supply,
Erection, Testing, Commissioning, completion the punch
list & successful operation of 33 / 11 KV Substation
I Package including of 33 / 11 KV, 2 Nos. of 5.0 MVA Lot 1
Transformer, OLTC, RTCC panel, 33 KV switchgear
panel, 11 KV indoor switchgear panel, switch yard items
/equipment with all accessories, HT cables including civil
works and associated items covered under this
Page 113 of 449

specification shall be included but not limited to the
following:
Make: ABB / GE / Toshiba or equivalent
33 KV CT/PT metering set, Panel board for Trivector
meter, Cable and G.I conduit pipes for State Electricity
Distribution Company (DISCOM) side.
CT PT metering set with panel as per State Electricity
Distribution Company (DISCOM) standard.
Note: The supply of CTPT metering set in the DISCOM
DP Structure shall be under scope of Contractor in-
case of non -availability of metering set at State
DISCOM side while obtaining power supply and
accordingly payment shall be made.
33 KV system
(a) 33 KV/ 110 Volts, 100VA Potential transformer, Oil
cooled and Outdoor type.
(b) 30kV, 10kA, Station Class surge arrestor.
( c) Current Transformer with suitable ratio.
(d) 1250 A, 31.5 kA (1Sec), Outdoor mounted SF6 Circuit
breaker.
( e) 1250 A, Double break, hand operated Isolator with /
without earth switch
2 Nos. of 5.0 /6.3 MVA, 33/11kV, 3 Phase, ONAN /
ONAF outdoor power transformer, Dyn11 with OLTC,
RTCC Panel (+5% to -15%) and Neutral CT of suitable
ratio. Impedance shall be 7.15 %
Transformers shall be suitable for Parallel operation.
Control and relay panel with suitable MODBUS
communicable relay , Control DC voltage: 24 Volt,
Lighting & Power Distribution Panel
11 KV System:
(a) 11 KV/ 110 /63 Volts, 100VA Potential transformer
(b) 9 kV, 5 kA, Distribution / Station Class surge arrestor.
( c) Current Transformer with suitable ratio.
(d) 1250 A, 31.5 kA (1Sec) , Outdoor mounted Vacuum
Circuit breaker.
( e) 1250 A, Double break, hand operated Isolator with /
without earth switch
Page 114 of 449

HT switchgear panel:
Supply, installation, erection, testing & commissioning of
HT switchgear panel, indoor type, 2000 Amps, 3 Phase,
350 MVA, 11 KV, 50 Hz, Aluminium busbar, switchgear
panel board along with Manual / Electrical operated Spring
charged motor with starter, Busbar, Potential transformer,
Current transformer, Circuit breaker trolley, Earthing
trolley, Earthing bus bar, Ammeter, Voltmeter, Frequency
meter, Power factor meter, Earth fault relay, over current
relay, Neutral displacement relay, Trip circuit supervision
relay, High speed tripping relay, space heater, LED
indication lamps, Ammeter / Voltmeter Selector switches,
Mechanical operation counter, illuminating lamps with
door switches
Incoming feeder : 1250 Amps, 11 KV, VCB/ Solid
insulated breaker - 2 Nos.
Bus coupler : 2000 Amps, 11 KV, VCB / Solid insulated
breaker- 1 Nos.
Outgoing feeder: 630 Amps, 11 KV, VCB/ Solid insulated
breaker -7 Nos.
Galvanized steel support structure, ACSR conductor,
Clamps and terminal connectors for switch yard equipment
with all accessories
Supply and erection of HT cable with Termination kit,
Control cable, lightning guard with spike, cable tray,
earthing, String insulator, Bus support insulator, post
insulator and hardwares.etc
Fire & Safety equipment - Fire extinguisher, MS stand
with Fire buckets and sand, First and box, Insulated Safety
Rubber gloves, Three Wire Earth discharge rod, Earthing
switch, Danger labels, Danger board, Safety charts, First
aid charts, cable route marker, earth pit marking etc.,
Outdoor & Indoor illumination system Yard lighting,
Emergency lighting for substation.
Design & Engineering works:
Engineering, Design, fabrication, manufacture, assembly,
shop testing including routine tests and inspection at
manufacturer's works
Providing all labours, materials and equipment for erection,
testing, commissioning etc., testing at shop as required
All spare parts required for the commissioning of the
equipment / system covered under this specification.
Special tools and tackles, as required, for operation and
maintenance, inspection and repair of the
equipment/systems offered.
Page 115 of 449

Inspection and expediting, handling, packing, forwarding,
port clearance, transporting, transit / storage / erection
insurances, obtaining statutory approvals and
documentation (including presentation and submission of
drawings to the statutory authorities like CEA,
furnishing completion reports, arranging for inspection
and obtaining safety certificates), erection &
commissioning and performance testing. Furnishing of
complete document / drawings for foundation arrangement
drawings along with load details of all the switchyard
equipment and transformers.
Unloading, handling and storage at site, pre-fabrication /
assembly if any, erection interconnection of switchyard
equipment by ACSR conductors/ bus bars/ cables, testing,
commissioning, trial operation, final painting and
performance testing of Switchyard equipment as specified
in this RFP document with all necessary accessories and
auxiliaries. The scope of work shall include all the
systems and equipment included in the schedule.
Providing warehousing, testing facilities, facilities for
vendor's personnel, obtaining approvals from statutory
authorities and providing required documentation, data etc.
All Equipment and Instruments required for erection, start-
up, initial filling, commissioning and performance test.
Temporary power supply for supply, erection, testing &
commissioning of electrical equipment / items.
Liasioning works including Co-ordination with local
statutory authorities, such as State Electricity Distribution
Company etc. for obtaining all the statutory approvals
needed, preparing, submitting and obtaining approval of all
electrical drawings and documents, test reports as well as
obtaining approval of the electrical installation from these
authorities obtaining safety certificates from State
distribution Company etc., Rectification of any defects /
deviation / modification pointed in during inspections.
Supply, Erection, Testing & Commissioning the 10 Nos.
II 1010 KVA DG Set for Component A, C & D (DG Sets Set 10
shall be provided for 100% standby to grid power.)
Diesel Generator set:
Supply, installation, testing & commissioning of Prime
power rating, 10 Nos.x 1010 KVA DG set rating includes
Water cooled Diesel Engine with Separate shell and tube
heat exchanger with FRP cooling tower, Alternator Set,
control panel along with Auto mains Failure &
synchronizing panel, sound proof acoustic kiosk etc.,
Engine Make: Cummins
Alternator : Stamford or equivalent
Note: For complete details refer technical specifications.
Page 116 of 449

Synchronizing panel with suitable rating Electrically draw
out type ACB Breaker with UV / Shunt Trip coil with
microprocessor board Over current relay, Short Circuit,
Earth fault, Over voltage relays, under voltage relay, AMF
panel
Bus duct with canopy suitable size Aluminium bus bars
between Alternator and Control panel
Diesel fuel tank with necessary pipe line between Diesel
tank and Engine etc. Tank size: 990 liters
1 Nos of 15000 Ltrs Diesel storage tank with pump with
necessary pipe line to each DG set 990 L Diesel tank.
Minimum height of Exhaust pipe (stack) with silencer,
thermal insulation covering with glass wool, Aluminium
Gladding etc.as per Central Pollution Control emission
norms with latics tower supports, aviation lights & lighting
arrestor at the top of structure of each chimney, same
should be connecting to separate earth pit.
12 Volt D.C, 200 AH Lead Acid Battery, along with
separate battery charger unit, Battery Charger with
necessary cable from mains to charger and charge to
batteries, end termination etc.,
(a) Providing Earth pits for Body earthing with necessary
accessories (Double clamping, Funnel) etc., using 75 mm
dia earth electrode up to 3 meter depth, Earth flat 2 run of
size 50 mm x 6 mm using G.I flat to interlink D.G set body
to earth pit and RCC cover slab with identification etc.,
complete
(b) Providing Earth pits for neutral with necessary
accessories (Double clamp, Funnel) etc., using 75 mm dia
earth electrode up to 3 meter depth, Earth flat size of
75x12 using Copper flat to interlink D.G set neutral to
earth pit and RCC cover slab with identification etc.,
complete.
(c) Providing Earth pits for lightning arrestor to be fixed at
the top of Exhaust pipe line with necessary accessories
(Double clamp, Funnel) etc., using 75 mm dia earth
electrode up to 3 meter depth, Earth flat size of 25 x 3
using Copper flat to interlink Lighting arrestor to earth pit
and RCC cover slab with identification.
(d) Supply, Laying and Termination of suitable core x
suitable size & Copper cable with necessary Lugs, Glands
etc., and Earth excavation, Sand filling, Brick guarding and
earth refilling between Control panel & D.G set
Lubricant and fuel for commissioning etc., with complete
set .
All civil works connected with D.G set platform, earth pits,
Fuel tank, Exhaust pipe etc., mounting and earth work &
refilling for cable laying etc., inclusive of all.
Page 117 of 449

Liasioning charges for state DISCOM Approval of D.G
sets
Special tools and tackles shall be provided.
Approval obtaining from Explosive department for diesel
storage tank
Electrical works for Supply, Erection, Testing &
III Commissioning the HT Switchgear Panels, Transformers,
PCC and all associated items for 20 MLD Plant
Indoor Vacuum Circuit Breaker:
Supply, installation, erection, testing & commissioning of
electrically draw out type, Indoor Vacuum Circuit Breaker,
630 Amps, 3 Phase, 11 KV, 50 Hz with Interruption
rating: 350 MVA, Short-time Current Rating for 1 Secs: 25
KA mounted in Kiosk Accessories: Manual / Spring
charged motor with starter, Potential transformer, Current
transformer, Circuit breaker trolley, Earthing trolley,
Earthing bus bar,
Three over current relay, ground/earth fault relay, Bucholz
trip relay, Differential protection relay, Restricted Earth
1 Set 5
fault relay, unbalance relay, winding temp relay, oil amp
relay, Auxiliary relays, Master trip relays and lockout
relay, Alarm& Annunciators (1 set) for alarm &
annunciation of all the faults & trips, Ammeter with
selector switch & CTs, Under voltage relay, Other
auxiliary and master trip relays and lockout relay, Digital
microprocessor based monitor for all electrical parameters
like kW, KVA, KWHr, frequency, pf, MD, voltage,
current, space heater, LED indication lamps, , Mechanical
operation counter, illuminating lamps with door switches
For complete details refer technical specification Sheet.
HT Cables for 11 KV equipment:
Supply, laying, termination of HT cables x Suitable No. of
Runs x 3 cores x Suitable size, unearthed aluminium
2 conductor, XLPE insulated , armoured power cable of Lot 5
size, hall be considered for interconnection between 11 KV
equipment of transformers, HT switchgear panel, Outdoor /
Indoor VCB.
2500 kVA Transformer with OLTC:
Supply, installation, erection, testing, commissioning of
Outdoor location 2500 kVA, 11 KV/433 V, 50 Hz , Dyn
11, Neutral Solidly earthed, Copper winding, ONAN type
3 cooling, On Load Tap Changer (OLTC) along with RTCC Set 5
panel, Neutral CT, HT terminal- Suitable to terminate 11
KV XLPE cable, LT terminal Suitable for LT bus duct,
with all accessories & fittings.
For complete details refer technical specification Sheet.
Page 118 of 449

LT Bus duct for Transformer:
LT Bus duct suitable for 4200 Amps rated Current, Three
phase and Neutral, AC, 415±10%, 50 C/S ±5%, 50kA
Short circuit current rating for one sec, fully insulated
Aluminium Bus bars (R,Y,B,N), Outdoor and Non
segregated type, enclosure of IP 55 with canopy, Earthing,
4 Nos. 5
Terminal enclosures and flanges, Flexible braided joints,
Drain plugs and vents, Gasket, mild steel hot dip
galvanized bolt, nut, spring washer, Bus support insulators,
Bus duct supports, Structural material & hardware,
painting for bus conductor and enclosures
For complete details refer technical specification Sheet
Common specifications for Power Control Centre:
Supply of Power Control Centre (PCC) using L&T/
Siemens/ /Schneider make,
Rated voltage, phase and frequency AC: 415V, Suitable
rating ACB , TPN, 50Hz , Type of construction- Single
front
1) Panel specifications: Sheet steel used for fabrication of
power control center: As per manufacturer’s standard (but
with minimum of 2.5 mm thick)
2) Panel type: Cubical, Compartmentalized, Free standing,
floor mounting, dust & vermin proof
5 3) The ACB’s microprocessor shall be connected with
Centralized PLC/SCADA system through MODBUS
communication along with necessary software to view data
& control the incomer.
4) All Air circuit breaker shall be of EDO type & suitable
Harsh Environment (Reference: L&T make , Model: C-
Power, HE ACB for Harsh Environment, specification
shall be considered in other brands).
5) All Air circuit breaker shall have Numeric
microprocessor combined multifunction protective relays
& CTs.
6) Type of construction: Front operation
7) Busbar: Continuous current rating of bus bars
(Aluminium for Both horizontal & Vertical) under site ref
ambient: Same as that of incomer breakers of PCC rating.
8) Ambient temperature for design: 50°C & Maximum
temperature of bus bars (Aluminium),
droppers(Aluminium) and contacts at continuous current
rating under site reference under site reference ambient
temperature: 80°C,
8) Short circuit withstand for bus bars and droppers- Short
time (1 Sec.) at 415 V : 40 KA (rms), Dynamic Rating: 102
KA (peak)
9) Cable Entry: Bottom & Earthling conductor: Aluminium
(50mm x 10mm)
Page 119 of 449

10) Space heaters shall be provided in the PCC panels for
moisture control and heaters shall be controlled by
Thermostat & Double pole MCB.
11) Panel wiring shall be wired 1.5 sq.mm Tri insulated
Copper wire for control wiring & 2.5 sq.mm Tri insulated
Copper wire for CT wiring.
12) Panel finish: Epoxy based (Powder coated)
13) Degree of protection as per IS: 2147: IP5214) Spare
compartment shall be considered.
14) Other specifications: Concealed type of hinges and
captive screws All doors, Min 50 mm high channel base
frames to the PCC, Total height to be 2250 mm (max), The
minimum operating height to be 300 mm, Maximum
operating height to be 1900 mm.
(15) The PCC to be extendable on both sides,
(16) Each module also to be fitted with a label indicating
the rating and duty. Module shall be complete with inter
panel wiring, Instruments, relays, and control devices to be
mounted flush on hinged door of the metering
compartment located in the front portion of the module,
Bus ways, cableways and wire ways to run in separate
segregated compartments.
Common specification for PCC panel Incoming &
Outgoing feeders
Incomer Feeder with the following specifications:
(a) 4 Pole, Suitable rating, 50 KA, Electrically Draw type,
Motorized Air Circuit Breaker (ACB) with Microprocessor
based Trip circuit with Protection relay Combined 3 Phase
Over current, earth fault relay with High Set & RS 485
Port, and Shunt release & Under voltage relay, Auxiliary
contact & Trip alarm Contact & Phase barriers, Closing
Coil, Breaker Control Switch, Local / Remote Selector
switch, etc.,
(b) Digital Multifunction meter with Modbus output to
read Voltage, Frequency, Current, KW, KVA, RKVA,
KWhr, KVAhr, RKVAhr, P.F in the incoming feeder of
PCC panel with necessary HRC fuse back up and metering
CTs with shorting terminals etc.,
(c) R,Y,B phase Indication, ACB ON (Green colour) ,OFF
( Red Colour ), Trip (Amber), Spring Charging, LED
indication lamps.
(d) ACB ON (Green colour) , OFF ( Red Colour, Actuated
type, Emergency Mush room) Push buttons.
Page 120 of 449

Outgoing Feeders with the following specifications:
(a) 3 Pole, Suitable Rating, 40 KA, Fixed type, Motorized
MCCB with Microprocessor based Trip unit with Over
current, Short Circuit, earth fault relay with CBCT and
Shunt release & Under voltage relay, Extended Rotary
handle, Spreader link, Auxiliary contact & Trip alarm
Contact & Phase barriers, Local / Remote Selector switch,
etc.,
( or )
3 Pole, Suitable Rating, 50 KA, Electrically Draw type,
based Trip circuit with Over current, Short Circuit, earth
fault relay, and Shunt release & Under voltage relay,
Auxiliary contact & Trip alarm Contact & Phase barriers,
Closing Coil, Breaker Control Switch, Local / Remote
Selector switch, etc.,
KWhr, KVAhr, RKVAhr, P.F in the Outgoing feeder of
(c) ACB / MCCB ON (Green colour) , OFF ( Red Colour )
, Trip (Amber) LED indication lamps.
(d) ACB / MCCB ON (Green colour) , MCCB OFF, ( Red
Colour, Actuated type, Emergency Mush room) Push
buttons.
Page 121 of 449

Power Control Centre (PCC-1)
Supply of PCC panel rating of 4200 Amps, 433 Volts, 50
Hz, TPN shall be Cubical, compartmentalized, free
standing, floor mounting, dust & Vermin proof, Single
front access, Bottom cable entry, Electrolyte Tinned coated
Aluminium busbar, Horizontal & vertical bus chambers for
3 Phase with neutral, 433 Volt AC, & Control Circuit,
Cable chambers with following specification:
Make: ABB/ L&T/ Siemens/Schneider / equivalent
Note: The incoming & outgoing feeder of PCC panel
ACB/ MCCB's microprocessor & Multifunction Meter
shall be connected with PLC/SCADA system through
MODBUS communication along with necessary software
to view data & control the incomer.
Quantity & Rating of PCC Panel -1:

Incoming Feeder:
5.1 Lot 1
(i) 2 Nos. of 4000 Amps, 4 Pole EDO type ACB for EB
incomer & DG incomer.
Outgoing Feeder:
(i) 4 Nos. of 400 Amps, 3 Pole, MCCB for PMCC 3,
MLDB, MPDB & Spare.
(ii) 1 No. of 500 Amps, 3 Pole, MCCB for PMCC 2.
(iii) 1 No. of 630 Amps, 3 Pole, ACB for PMCC-11
(iv) 1 No. of 1000 Amps, 3 Pole, ACB for APFC with
Harmonic filter panel.
(v) 1 No. of 1600 Amps, 3 Pole, ACB for PMCC 1.
(vi) 1 No. of 2500 Amps, 3 Pole, ACB for Sub PCC-1.
(vii) 2 Nos. of Empty compartments without switchgear for
suitable for 1000 Amps ACB.
Note:
Outgoing feeders of sub PCC panel -1 will be provided
directly in PCC Panel – 1 as per site condition. Drawing
shall be submitted for approval before fabrication.
Page 122 of 449

Sub Power Control Centre (Sub PCC-1)
Supply of sub PCC panel rating of 2500 Amps, 433 Volts,
50 Hz, TPN shall be Cubical, Compartmentalized, free
5.2 to view data & control the incomer. Lot 1
Quantity & Rating of Sub PCC Panel -1:
Incoming Feeder: (i) 1 No. of 2500 Amps, 3 Pole EDO
type ACB for incomer.
Outgoing Feeders:
(i) 4 Nos. of 500 Amps, 3 Pole, MCCB for VFD Panel – 3
Nos. & Spare.
(i) 1 No. of 1250 Amps, 3 Pole, ACB for VFD Panel – 3
Nos.
(iii) 2 Nos. of Empty compartments without switchgear
suitable for 1250 ACB & 500 Amps MCCB.
Note: Outgoing feeders will be provided directly taken
in PCC Panel – 1 as per site condition. Drawing shall be
submitted for approval before fabrication.
Hz, TPN shall be Cubical, Compartmentalized, free
front access, Bottom cable entry, Electrolyte Tinned
Coated Aluminium busbar, Horizontal & vertical bus
chambers for 3 Phase with neutral, 433 Volt AC, &
Control Circuit, Cable chambers with following
specification:
5.3 Note: The incoming & outgoing feeder of PCC panel Lot 1
Incoming Feeder: (i) 2 Nos. of 4000 Amps, 4 Pole EDO
type ACB for EB incomer & DG incomer.
Outgoing Feeder:
(i) 2 No. of 630 Amps, 3 Pole, ACB for APFC with
Harmonic filter panel & Spare.
Page 123 of 449

(ii) 1 No. of 1000 Amps, 3 Pole, ACB for PMCC 4.
(iii) 1 No. of 4000 Amps, 3 Pole, ACB for Sub PCC-2.
(iv) 2 Nos. of Empty compartments without switchgear for
suitable for 1000 Amps, 3 Pole ACB.
Note:
directly in PCC Panel – 2 as per site condition.
Drawing shall be submitted for approval before
fabrication.
5.4 Lot 1
Outgoing Feeders:
(i) 7 Nos. of 1000 Amps, 3 Pole, ACB for VFD Panel – 7
Nos.
(ii) 1 No. of Empty compartment without switchgear for
Note:
Outgoing feeders will be directly taken in PCC Panel – 2 as
per site condition. Drawing shall be submitted for approval
before fabrication.
Page 124 of 449

specification:
Incoming Feeder:
Outgoing Feeder:
(i) 3 No. of 500 Amps, 3 Pole, MCCB for APFC with
Harmonic filter panel, PMCC 5 & Spare.
(ii) 1 No. of 4000 Amps, 3 Pole, ACB for Sub PCC-3.
(iii) 2 Nos. of Empty compartments without switchgear for
Note:
5.6 Note: The incoming & outgoing feeder of PCC panel Lot 1
Outgoing Feeders:
(i) 7 Nos. of 1000 Amps, 3 Pole, ACB for VFD Panel.
Page 125 of 449

Note:
before fabrication.

specification:
5.7 Quantity & Rating of PCC Panel -4: Lot 1
Incoming Feeder:
Outgoing Feeder:
(i) 2 Nos. of 500 Amps, 3 Pole, MCCB for PMCC 6 & 10.
(ii) 3 Nos. of 800 Amps, 3 Pole, ACB for PMCC 7, 8 &
spare.
(iii) 1 No. of 1250 Amps, 3 Pole, ACB for Sub PCC-4.
(iv) 1 No. of 1600 Amps, 3 Pole, ACB for APFC with
Harmonic filter panel.
(v) 1 No. of 2000 Amps, 3 Pole, ACB for Sub PCC-5.
(vi) 2 Nos. of Empty compartments without switchgear for
suitable for 1250/1600 Amps, 3 Pole ACB.
Note:
Outgoing feeders of sub PCC panel -4 & 5 will be provided
Page 126 of 449


5.8 Lot 1
Outgoing Feeders:
(i) 13 Nos. of 100 Amps, 3 Pole, MCCB for VFD Panel &
Spare.
Note:
Page 127 of 449

before fabrication.

Incoming Feeder:
(i) 1 No. of 1600 Amps, 3 Pole EDO type ACB for
incomer.
Outgoing Feeders:
(i) 12 Nos. of 320 Amps, 3 Pole, MCCB for VFD Panel &
Spare.
suitable for 500 Amps, 3 Pole MCCB.
Note:
before fabrication.
Page 128 of 449

5.10 Lot 1
Incoming Feeder:
(i) 2 Nos. of 4000 Amps, 4 Pole EDO type ACB for EB &
DG incomer.
Outgoing Feeders:
(i) 14 Nos. of 800 Amps, 3 Pole, ACB for VFD Panel &
Spare.
(ii) 1 No. of 500 Amps, 3 Pole, MCCB for APFCR with
harmonic filter panel
(iii) 1 No. of Empty compartment without switchgear for
Note:
Sub PCC Panel shall be provided if necessary as per site
condition.
APFCR panel with Detuned Reactor, harmonic filter
6
for entire Plant load:
Common specification for APFCR panel with Detuned
Reactor & harmonic filter:
Supply and erection, commissioning of Cubical, Free
standing, Floor Mounting, Compartmentalized, Automatic
power factor controller Panel (APFCR) panel for
maintaining P.F up to 0.99 lagging with following:
(a) The panel shall be fabricated with main frame, doors:
2.0 mm CRCA Sheet, Removable Gland plate: 2.5 mm
CRCA sheet.
(b) Vertical & horizontal Busbar
(c) Cable Entry: Bottom (Entry shall be finalized during
submission of drawing)
(d) Suitable rating Heavy Duty Capacitor units, 525 V,
3Ph. Low Loss, Self-Healing Type, Triple Segmented Film
Technology plus overpressure disconnector.
(e) Detuned Low Loss Iron Core, Copper Wound
Harmonic Heavy Duty Block Reactor with High Linearity
& H Class Insulation
Page 129 of 449

(v) HRC Fuse Links, Auxiliary Contactor, Indicating
Lamps (R, Y, B, Trip), ON/OFF Illuminated Push Buttons,
Digital Multifunction meter, Auto/ Manual Switch, Air
Circulation Fan with Grill, 3 Nos of CTR, CL: 1 ,Resin
Cast /Tape Wound, Microprocessor Based APFC Relay
with Modbus output With Patented Control Characteristics
Measurement & Monitoring of harmonics, Over current
Trip Functions, Protection for Capacitors. Four Quadrant
regulation.
Make: Siemens / L&T / Epcos
Incomer feeder with following specifications:

switch, etc.,
(Or)
(a) 3 Pole, 315 Amps, 40 KA, Fixed type, MCCB with
Microprocessor based Trip unit with Over current, Short
Circuit, earth fault relay with CBCT and Shunt release &
Under voltage relay, Extended Rotary handle, Spreader
link, Auxiliary contact & Trip alarm Contact & Phase
barriers, etc.,
(b) Digital Multifunction meter, LCD display with Modbus
output to read Voltage, Frequency, Current, KW, KVA,
KVAR, P.F.
(c) 3 Nos of CTs with shorting terminals etc.,
(d) APFC relay with suitable steps, LCD display
(e) 3 Nos of R, Y, B Phase LED phase Indication lamp
(f) MCCB ON (Green colour), OFF (Red Colour), Trip
(Amber) LED indication lamps.
(g) 1 No. of Auto / Manual Selector switch
(h) 1 No. of delay Timer with 1 NO+1 NC aux. contact
(i) 1.5 sq.mm wire Control wiring & 2.5 Sq.mm CT wiring
with 1100 volts, copper, flexible, multistrand wire.
(j) 2 Nos of 6 Amps, Double Pole control MCB for
APFCR Relay.
(k) 1 Set of Terminal blocks.
Specification for Capacitor Feeders
Page 130 of 449

Specification for 5 KVAR Capacitor Unit:
(a) 1 No. of 32 Amps MCCB with Thermomagnetic release
based trip unit, spreader link, rotary handle.
(b) 1 No. of 3 pole Capacitor Duty contactor with 2 NO+2
NC aux. contact
(c) 1 Nos. Auxiliary contactor with 2 NO+2 NC aux.
contact
(d) 1 No. of 5 KVAR, 525 V, Cylindrical Heavy-Duty
Capacitor, MPP
(e) 1 No. of 7% Detuned Copper Reactor
(f) 1 Set of illuminated Push button with "ON" Green
Colour Push button and “OFF" push button with 1 NO + 1
NC contact.
(g) 6 Sq.mm, 1100 Volts, Copper flexible, multistrand
wire
(h) 1 No. of 2 Pole, 6 Amps MCB, C Curve for control
Circuit.
(i) 1 No. of Cooling Fan
Specification for 10 KVAR capacitor Unit:
a) 1 No. of 63 Amps MCCB with Thermomagnetic release
based trip unit, spreader link, rotary handle.
b) 1 No. of 3 pole Capacitor Duty contactor with 2 NO +2
NC aux. contact
c) 1 No. of 10 KVAR, 525 V, Cylindrical Heavy duty
Capacitor, MPP
d) 1 No. of 7% Detuned Copper Reactor
e) 1 set of LED Panel indicating lamps for Feeder ON
(Green) /OFF (Red).
(f) 1 Set of Non-illuminated "ON" Green Colour Push
button and “OFF" push button with 1 NO + 1 NC contact.
wire
(h) 6 Amps HRC Fuse link with fuse base for control
Circuit.
Specification for 25 KVAR capacitor Unit:
(a) 1 No. of 100 Amps MCCB with Thermomagnetic
release based trip unit, spreader link, rotary handle.
(b) 1 No. of 3 pole Capacitor Duty contactor with 2 NO +2
NC aux. contact
(c) 1 No. of 25 KVAR, 525 V, Cylindrical Heavy duty
Capacitor, MPP
(d) 1 No. of 7% Detuned Copper Reactor
(e) 1 set of LED Panel indicating lamps for Feeder ON
(Green) /OFF (Red) /Trip (Amber)
Page 131 of 449

wire
Circuit.
Specification for 2 Nos. x 25 KVAR capacitor Unit:

(a) 1 No. of 200 Amps MCCB with Thermomagnetic
release based trip unit, spreader link, rotary handle.
(b) 1 No. of 3 pole Capacitor Duty contactor with 2 NO +2
NC aux. contact
(c) 1 No. of 25 KVAR, 525 V, Cylindrical Heavy duty
Capacitor, MPP
(d) 1 No. of 7% Detuned Copper Reactor
(e) 1 set of LED Panel indicating lamps for Feeder ON
(Green) /OFF (Red) /Trip (Amber)
wire
Circuit.
300 kVAR APFCR panel with Detuned Reactor,
harmonic filter for PCC -1 Panel:
Supply of 300 KVAR panel rating of 800 Amps, 433

Volts, 50 Hz, TPN shall be Cubical, Compartmentalized,
free standing, floor mounting, dust & Vermin proof, Single
6.1 Lot 1
Note: The incoming of APFCR panel ACB/ MCCB's
microprocessor & APFC relay, Multifunction Meter shall
be connected with PLC/SCADA system through
Quantity & Rating of APFCR Panel:

Incoming Feeder:
(i) 1 No. of 800 Amps, 3 Pole EDO type ACB for incomer.
Page 132 of 449

Stage Rating & Quantity:
(i) 2 Nos. x 25 KVAR capacitor feeder.
(ii) 5 Nos of x 50 KVAR capacitor feeder.


6.2 Note: The incoming of APFCR panel ACB/ MCCB's Lot 1

Incoming Feeder:
(i) 1 No. of 630 Amps, 3 Pole MCCB for incomer.
Page 133 of 449


6.3 Note: The incoming of APFCR panel ACB/ MCCB's Lot 1


Incoming Feeder:
(ii) 2 Nos. x 10 KVAR capacitor feeder.

6.4 Lot 1

Incoming Feeder:
(i) 1 No. of 1600 Amps, 3 Pole ACB for incomer.
Page 134 of 449

(i) 2 Nos of x 25 KVAR capacitor feeder.
100 kVAR APFCR panel with Detuned Reactor, harmonic
filter for PCC -5 Panel:
6.5 Lot 1
Incoming Feeder:
(ii) 2 Nos. x 10 KVAR capacitor feeder.
Electrical works for Primary, Secondary Treatment &
IV
Dilution facility
7 Common specifications for Power Motor Control
Center (PMCC) Panel:
Supply of PMCC with following specifications:
(1) Panel preferable make: Siemens/ /Schneider/ L&T or
Standard manufacturer shall be selected after approval of
drawing & documents.
(2) Switch gear Make: Siemens/ /Schneider/ L&T
(3) Rated voltage, phase and frequency: AC, 415V AC,
Suitable rating, TPN, 50Hz & Control Voltage: 110 V AC,
50 HZ
(4) The panel shall be fabricated with main frame, doors,
Mounting plate : Main frame, Doors, load bearing
members: 1.6 mm thick, & base frame, removable Gland
plate : 2.5 mm thick.
(5) Panel type: Cubical, Compartmentalized, Free standing,
floor mounting, dust & vermin proof.
(6) Type of construction: Single front / Double front
depends on site requirement & space availability in panel
room.
(7) Busbar: Continuous current rating of bus bars
(Electrolyte tinned silver coated Aluminium for Both
Page 135 of 449

horizontal & Vertical) under site ref ambient: Same as that
of incomer feeder of MCC rating.
(8) Ambient temperature for design: 50°C & Maximum
temperature of bus bars (Aluminium), droppers
(Aluminium) and contacts at continuous current rating
under site reference under site reference ambient
temperature: 80°C,
(9) Short circuit withstand for bus bars and droppers-
Short time (1 Sec.) at 415 V : 40 KA (rms), Dynamic
Rating: 102 KA (peak)
(10) Busbar Clearance: As per IS Standard, Minimum
Clearance shall be provided for : Phase to Phase: 25.4 mm;
Phase to Neutral: 25.4 mm, Phase to earth: 19 mm &
Neutral to earth : 23 mm
(11) Busbar: Grip / Conical Type Support with Polyamide/
SMC/ DMC
(12) Cable Entry: Bottom
(13) Earthling conductor: Aluminium (50mm x 10mm)
(14) Space heaters shall be provided in the PCC panels for
moisture control and heaters shall be controlled by
Thermostat & Double pole MCB.
(15) Name Plate: Black Letters engraved on White
Traffolyte ABS double colour Plate.
(16) Panel Louvers: Fixed type, Slotted louvers with SS
fine mesh
(17) Protective Cover: Polycarbonate Sheet shall be
provided for incomer & outgoing of switchgear & busbar.
(18) Panel wiring shall be wired 1100 Volts, 1.5 sq.mm,
industrial panel wire, Copper wire for control wiring & 2.5
sq.mm Tri insulated Copper wire for CT wiring.
(Make: Polycab, Tri insulated Single core, flexible panel
wires, Minimum insulation thickness-0.8mm or equivalent
specification shall be considered in RPG/ Finolex)
(19) Panel finish: Pre-treated with 7 Tank processes, Epoxy
based (Powder coated), Paint Shade: RAL 7032, Minimum
Thickness: 80 Micron.
(20) Degree of protection as per IS: 2147: IP52
(21) Spare compartment shall be considered.
(22) Indicative size of DOL/ Star-Delta Feeder - 600 mm
(Length) x 500 mm (Depth) x 450 mm (Height), Total
height of panel to be 2250 mm (max), The minimum
operating height to be 300 mm, Maximum operating height
to be 1900 mm. The MCC panel shall be extendable on
both sides of the panel.
(23) Marshalling Chamber shall be provided at center of
the panel for Feedback signal.
(24) Other specifications: Concealed type of hinges and
captive screws All doors, Min 50 mm high channel base
Page 136 of 449

frames to the MCC. Each module also to be fitted with a
label indicating the rating and duty.
(25) Module shall be complete with inter panel wiring,
Instruments, relays, and control devices to be mounted
flush on hinged door of the metering compartment located
in the front portion of the module, Bus ways, cableways
and wire ways to run in separate segregated compartments.
(26) PVC finger Door Lock without key, lifting hooks shall
be provided.
(27) Digital Multifunction Meter with Modbus output to
MCC panel with necessary HRC fuse back up and
metering CTs with shorting terminals etc.,
(28) 10% spare starter modules with SFU, Power &
Control contactor, OLR, DIN type HRC fuses, LED
indication lamps, metering set, and Selector switch for
Ammeter, Local/ remote, Auto/ manual shall be considered
for each rating.
(29) Type of starter modules shall be considered in PMCC
panel: (i) up to 5.5 KW – D.O.L starter (ii) Above 5.5 KW
to 37 KW – Star / Delta Starter (iii) Above 37 KW – Soft
starter/ VFD. (iv) Rating of VFD/Soft starter feeder shall
be provided as per requirement.
(30) The Incomer ACB / MCCB microprocessor &
Multifunction Meter shall be connected with PLC/SCADA
system through MODBUS communication along with
necessary software to view data & control the incomer.
(31) Panel dimensions, Single / double front panel access,
cable entry shall be finalized after measurement taken by
contractor in Control room & submission, approval of
drawing.
PMCC Incomer Feeder as ACB with the following
specifications:
switch, etc.,
(c) R,Y,B phase Indication, ACB ON (Green colour) ,OFF
Page 137 of 449

( Red Colour ), Trip (Amber), Spring Charging, LED
indication lamps.
(d) ACB ON (Green colour) , OFF ( Red Colour, Actuated
type, Emergency Mush room) Push buttons.
Direct On Line starters modules with following
specifications:
(a) 1 Nos. of TPN fuse switch unit with DIN type HRC
fuse link with 1 No +1 NC Auxiliary Kit,
(b) 1 No. of 3 pole power contactor with 2 NO+2 NC aux.
contact, 110 Volt AC operated.
(c) 4 Nos. of auxiliary contactors with 2 NO+2NC aux.
contacts, 110 Volt AC operated.
(d) 1 No. of Bi-metal Over Load Relay / Electronic motor
protection relay with earth fault for submersible equipment
only.
(e) 1 No. of Digital hour meter
(f) 3 Nos. of Current Transformer with Digital ammeter.
(g) 1 set of LED Panel indicating lamps for starter ON
(Green) /OFF (Red) /Trip (Amber) 110 Volt Operated.
(h) 1 Set of Non illuminated "ON" Green Colour Push
button and Stay put Red Colour Mushroom actuator, Press
to Lock & Turn to release "OFF" push button with 1 NO +
1 NC contact.
(i) 1 No. of 2 Way (Local / Remote without Off) Selector
switch.
(i) 1 Set of 6Amps Control HRC fuses, Connect well
Make, CST type, Cable connector blocks, Terminal
protection cover, etc.,
Starter module should have local / Remote selection switch
and manual/auto (through PLC) mode operation selection.
Star Delta starters modules with following specifications:
(a) 1 Nos. of TPN fuse switch unit with DIN type HRC
fuse link with 1 No +1 NC Auxiliary Kit,
(b) 3 No. of 3 pole power contactor with 2 NO+2 NC aux.
contact, 110 Volt AC operated.
(c) 4 Nos. of auxiliary contactors with 2 NO+2NC aux.
contacts, 110 Volt AC operated.
(d) 1 No. of Bi-metal Over Load Relay / Electronic motor
protection relay with earth fault for submersible equipment
only.
(e) 1 No. of Star Delta Timer .
(e) 1 No. of Digital hour meter
(f) 3 Nos. of Current Transformer with Digital ammeter.
(g) 1 set of LED Panel indicating lamps for starter ON
(Green) /OFF (Red) /Trip (Amber) 110 Volt Operated.
(h) 1 Set of Non illuminated "ON" Green Colour Push
button and Stay put Red Colour Mushroom actuator, Press
to Lock & Turn to release "OFF" push button with 1 NO +
Page 138 of 449

1 NC contact.
(i) 1 No. of 2 Way (Local / Remote without Off) Selector
switch.
(i) 1Set of 6 Amps Control HRC fuses, Connect well
Make, CST type, Cable connector blocks, Terminal
protection cover, etc.,
Marshalling chamber for Feedback signal:
Marshalling Chamber shall be provided at center of the
panel for Feedback signal
Feeder for Control Transformer:
(a) 2 Nos of 2 /5 KVA Control transformer (440/ 110
Volts)
(b) 2 Nos. of 32/63 Amps TPN fuse switch unit with 20/50
Amps DIN type HRC fuse link.
(c) 2 Nos. of 2 Pole 32 Amps MCB.
(d) 2 Nos. of 3Pole, AC3 duty Power contactor with 1 NO
Contact.
(e) 1 No. of Timer.
(f) 2 Set of ON, OFF indication lamp.
(g) Vertical & Horizontal Control Busbar (25 X12 mm
Aluminium) for entire panel.
PMCC Panel (PMCC-1) for Preliminary treatment
system:
Supply of PMCC panel rating of 1250 Amps, 433 Volts, 50
Hz, TPN shall be Compartmentalized, free standing, floor
mounting, dust & Vermin proof, Single / double front
access, Bottom cable entry, IP 52, Electrolyte Tinned silver
coated Aluminium busbar with following indicative feeder
quantity & rating:
Incoming Feeder:
(i) 1 No. of 1250Amps, 3 Pole EDO type ACB for
incomer.
Outgoing Feeders:
7.1 (i) DOL feeder: (i) 3.7 KW - 6 Nos. (ii) 1.1 KW-3 Nos. Lot 1
(iii) 3.0 KW – 3 Nos. (vi) 10% of spare speeder for each
rating.
(ii) Star-Delta Feeder: (i) 15 KW - 6 Nos. (ii) 10% of spare
speeder for each rating.
VFD / SS Feeder & Spare feeder:

(a) Suitable Rating MCCB For outgoing feeder for
VFD/Soft starter panels.
(i) 75 KW VFD Panel - 3Nos. (ii) 37 KW VFD Panel -
3Nos. (iii) 5.7 KW SS Panel- 13 Nos. (iv) 8 KW -10 Nos.
(v) 1 No. of Spare feeder for each rating.
(b) 1 No. of 100 Amps, TPN Fuse switch units with 63
Page 139 of 449

Amps HRC fuse links for Spare.
(c) 2 No. of 32 Amps, TPN Fuse switch units with 20
Amps HRC fuse links for drum Screen.
(d) 2 Nos. of 32 A, TPN Fuse switch units with 20 Amps
HRC fuse links as spare feeder
(e) 2 Nos. of 63 A, TPN Fuse switch units with 50 Amps
HRC fuse links spare feeder
PMCC Panel (PMCC-2) for Preliminary treatment system:
quantity & rating:
Incoming Feeder:
(i) 1 No. of 400 Amps, 3 Pole MCCb for incomer.
Outgoing Feeders:
(i) DOL feeder: (i) 1.1 KW - 2 Nos. (ii) 1.5 KW-4 Nos.
(iii) 2.2 KW - 23 Nos. (iv) 3.7 KW - 10 Nos.(iv) 10%
Spare feeder for Each rating.
7.2 Lot 1
(ii) Star-Delta Feeder: (i) 15 KW - 6 Nos. (ii) 10% of spare
speeder for each rating.

((a) 2.2 KW VFD Panel - 1No.
(c) 3 Nos. of 32 Amps, TPN Fuse switch units with 20
Amps HRC fuse links as spare feeder.
Page 140 of 449

PMCC Panel (PMCC-4) for BIOT:
quantity & rating:
Incoming Feeder:
Outgoing Feeders:
(iii) 2.2 KW - 23 Nos. (iv) 3.7 KW - 10 Nos.(iv) 10%
(ii) Star-Delta Feeder: (i) 10 KW – 12 Nos. (ii) 10% of
7.3 Lot 1
spare speeder for each rating.

For outgoing feeder for VFD/Soft starter panels.
(a) 12 Nos. of 32 Amps, 3 pole MCCB for 3.7 KWSS
Panel.
(b) 3 Nos. of 100 Amps, 3 pole MCCB for 37 KW VFD
Panel.
(c) 1 No. of 100 Amps, TPN Fuse switch units with 63
(d) 2 Nos. of 32 Amps, TPN Fuse switch units with 20
PMCC Panel (PMCC-5) for BIOT:
quantity & rating:
Incoming Feeder:
Outgoing Feeders:
7.4 Lot 1
(i) DOL feeder: (i) 3.7 KW - 4Nos.(ii) 10% Spare feeder
for Each rating.
(ii) Star-Delta Feeder: (i) Rating as required (ii) 10% of
spare speeder for each rating.

(a) 12 Nos. of 32 Amps, 3 pole MCCB for 5.7 KW SS
panels.
(b) 3 Nos. of 100 Amps, 3 pole MCCB for 37 KW VFD
Page 141 of 449

panel.
Amps HRC fuse links as Control transformer & spare
feeder.
PMCC Panel (PMCC-6) for Lime Soda Softening:

quantity & rating:
Incoming Feeder:
Outgoing Feeders:
(i) DOL feeder: (i) (i) 2.2 KW - 7 Nos. (ii) 3.7 KW - 7 Nos
(iii) 10% Spare feeder for Each rating.
7.5 Lot 1
(ii) Star-Delta Feeder: (i) (i) 11 KW - 3 Nos. (ii) 15 KW - 2
Nos. (iii) 18.5 KW - 2 Nos. (iv) 10% of spare speeder for
each rating.

(a) 2 Nos. of 32 Amps, 3 pole MCCB for 2.2 KW VFD
panel.
(b) 5 Nos. of 32 Amps, TPN Fuse switch units with 20
feeder.
(c) 1 Nos. of 63 A, TPN Fuse switch units with 50 Amps
PMCC Panel (PMCC-7) for QF System:
quantity & rating:
Incoming Feeder:
7.6 Lot 1
(i) 1 No. of 800 Amps, 3 Pole ACB for incomer.
Outgoing Feeders:
(i) DOL feeder: (i) 2.2 KW & 3.7 KW - each 1 No.(ii) 10%
(ii) Star-Delta Feeder: (i) 7.5 KW - 3 Nos. (ii) 15 KW - 14
Nos. (iii) 18.5 KW - 7 Nos. (iv) 10% Spare feeder for each
rating - 1 Lot
Page 142 of 449

(a) 5 Nos. of 32 Amps, TPN Fuse switch units with 20
feeder.
(b) 1 Nos. of 63 A, TPN Fuse switch units with 50 Amps
PMCC Panel (PMCC-8) for UF system:
quantity & rating:
Incoming Feeder:
Outgoing Feeders:
(iii) 5.5 KW – 5 Nos. (vi) 10% of spare speeder for each
7.7 rating. Lot 1
(ii) Star-Delta Feeder: (i) As required.

(i) 45 KW VFD Panel – 5 Nos.
( (d) 2 Nos. of 32 A, TPN Fuse switch units with 20 Amps
HRC fuse links spare feeder
PMCC Panel (PMCC-9) for Dilution facility:
quantity & rating:
Incoming Feeder:
7.8 No. 1
Outgoing Feeders:
(i) DOL feeder: (i) As required.
(ii) Star-Delta Feeder: (i) As required.
(a) 14 Nos. of 63 Amps, 3 Pole, MCCB for 17 KW SS
panel.
(b) 2 Nos. of 63 A, MCCB as spare feeder
Page 143 of 449

Main Power Distribution board:
Supply of 433 volts, 3 Phase Neutral Power distribution
box with 500 Amps, TPN MCCB L&T/ Siemens/
Schneider make MCB as bus bar type adequate No. of
way with 63 /32 A Double pole/ Triple pole MCBs for
outgoings (for Sub Power Distribution Board)
Incomer - 500 Amps, 4 Pole TPN MCCB - 1 No.
Outgoing - 63/32/16 Amps, TPN MCB / MCCBs -1 Lot.
(As required)
Power Distribution Board (PDB)
Supply of 433 volts, 3 Phase Neutral Power distribution
box with suitable rating (Amps) bus bar type adequate No.
of way with 32/63/125 A Double pole/ Triple pole MCBs
for outgoings (for Sub Power Distribution Board)
Sub Power Distribution Board (SPDB):
Supply of adequate No. of Sub Power distribution box with
433 volts, 3 Phase Neutral (SPDB) & suitable rating
(Amps) bus bar type adequate No. of way with 6 A /16 A
/ 32 A / 63 A Double pole/ Triple pole MCBs for outgoings
(for Lab equipment,, Servo Voltage Stabilizer/On-line
8 UPS, Air Conditioner, Industrial Exhaust fans, Three Lot 1
phase/ single phase power outlet sockets)
Main Lighting Distribution Board (MLDB):
Supply of 433 volts, 3 Phase Neutral Lighting Switch
Board (LSB) with 400 A, L&T/ Siemens/ Schneider make
MCCB Fuse switch units with HRC fuse links - 3 Nos, bus
bar type, adequate No. of way with 20 A Double pole
MCBs for outgoings
Incomer - 400 Amps, 4 Pole MCCB- 1 No.
Outgoing - 63/32 Amps, TPN SFU / MCBs -1 Lot (As
required)
Lighting Distribution Board (LDB):
Supply of 433 volts, 3 Phase Neutral Lighting Distribution
Board (LDB) with suitable rating (Amps) bus bar type,
adequate No. of way with 20 A Double pole MCBs for
outgoings (SLDB)
Sub Lighting Distribution Board(SLDB):
Supply, Erection of 433 volts, 3 Phase Neutral Sub lighting
Distribution Board (SLDB) with suitable rating (Amps)
bus bar type, adequate no. of Way with 6 A, 10 A Double
pole MCBs for outgoings (LSB).
Page 144 of 449

Local Push button Stations / Cable Junction Boxes for
Primary, secondary & Dilution facility:
Supply & erection of Weather proof, Local ON/OFF push
button station with following specifications for local
control all equipment.
(a ) Enclosure shall have MOC of Thermoplastic / FRP ,
IP 65 for dosing area / high polluted area.
(b) Enclosure shall be suitable for 5 Core X 1.5 Sq.mm,
Bottom entry, 3/4" 2 Way cable entry, double compression
gland.
9 1 No. of Non illuminated "ON" Green Colour Push button Lot 1
with 2 NO + 2 NC contact.
(c) 1 No. of Emergency Stay put Red Colour Mushroom
actuator, Press to Lock & Turn to release "OFF" push
button with 2 NO + 2 NC contact without key type.
(d) Supply of accessories including Name plate, SS
fasteners, Neoprene endless moulded gasket, 2 Nos. of
Earthing, Screw type terminal blocks with Spare.
(e) Supply and fixing of cable junction box for all motors
(Incase of motor cable terminal boxes are small sizes when
compared with cable size)
Power & Control cables from individual MCC to
individual equipment of Primary, secondary & Dilution
facility:
(a) Cables for power circuits shall be provided with copper
10 conductors upto 4 sq.mm & above 4 sq.mm aluminium Lot 1
conductor cable.
(b) Cables for control circuits shall be of stranded copper
conductors with a minimum size of 5 cores x 1.5 sq.mm.
(c) Make: RPG/Finolex/Polycab.
Supply of 1100V, 3/3.5 Core x suitable size of Aluminium
Conductor, PVC Insulated and Sheathed, Armoured U.G
cable with necessary cable gland, earth work, sand
cushioning, brick guarding & earth refilling over the cable,
hume pipe protection over the cable for road crossing.
Power Cable from PMCC-1, PMCC-2, PMCC-4, PMCC 5,
PMCC-6, PMCC-7, PMCC-8,PMCC-9 panel to individual
equipment of Primary, secondary & Dilution facility: ,
Supply of 1100V, 5 Core x 1.5 sq.mm, , Copper
hume pipe protection over the cable for road crossing.
Cable from PMCC panel to push button station near
individual equipment
Control Cable from PMCC-1, PMCC-2, PMCC-4, PMCC
5, PMCC-6, PMCC-7, PMCC-8,PMCC-9 panel to
Page 145 of 449

individual equipment of Primary, secondary & Dilution
facility: ,
Incoming Cables: Supply of 1100V, 3.5 Core x suitable
size & adequate no. of cables, Aluminium Conductor, PVC
Insulated and Sheathed, Armoured U.G cable with
necessary cable gland earth work, sand cushioning, brick
11 Lot 1
guarding & earth refilling over the cable, hume pipe
protection over the cable for road crossing. Cable from
MCC panel to individual equipment, Make:
RPG/Finolex/Polycab.
Cable between PCC 1, to PMCC 1
Cable between PCC 1 to PMCC 2
Cable between PCC 1 to Sub PCC-1
Cable between Sub PCC-1 to each VFD Panels.
Cable between PCC 1 to APFCR with Harmonic filter
Cable between PCC 1 to Lighting Transformer, MLDB,
MPDB, LDB, PDB
Cable between Sub PCC-2 to each VFD panels
Cable between Sub PCC-3 to each VFD Panels.
Cable between PCC 4 to Pilot plant
Cable between PCC 5 to VFD Panels.
panel.
Suitable Runs x Suitable Core x Suitable size, 1100 Volts,
Copper Conductor, PVC Insulated and Sheathed, Armoured
U.G cable with necessary cable gland.
Page 146 of 449

Control Cable from Indoor VCB to Transformer marshalling
box:
Suitable core x 1.5 sq.mm, 1100V, Copper Conductor, PVC
Insulated and Sheathed, Armoured U.G cable with
necessary cable gland. Cable from VCB Control panel to
Emergency Pushbutton
Suitable Runs x Suitable Core x Suitable size, 1100V,
Copper Conductor, PVC Insulated and Sheathed, Armoured
U.G cable with necessary cable gland. Cable from
Transformer to RTCC Panel of Transformer
2 Core x 10 sq.mm, Copper Conductor, PVC Insulated and
Sheathed, Armoured U.G cable with necessary cable gland.
Cable from DCDB Panel to Circuit breakers of HT Panels
& LT Panels
Supply of 1100V, 3.5 Core x suitable size & adequate no.
of cables, Aluminium Conductor, PVC Insulated and
Cable between PCC to Main Light Distribution Board &
Power Distribution Board.
Supply of 4 Core x 2.5sqmm, Copper, armoured, U.G
cable with necessary cable gland from LSB panel to each
Sub LSB
cable with necessary cable gland from each Sub LSB to
each switch board.
Supply of 4 Core x 6 sqmm, Copper armoured, U.G cable
with necessary cable gland from PCC panel to each PDB
cable with necessary cable gland from PDB to each Sub
PDB boards at various locations.
Supply of 4 Core x suitable size, copper conductor
armoured, U.G cable with necessary cable gland from each
Sub PDB boards at various locations to Power sockets.
Supply of 3 core x 2.5 / 4.0 /6.0 Sq.mm. copper conductor
for each circuit from respective MCB of the PDB/Panel
Supply of cable for Fire Detection and Alarm System for
entire plant.
Lighting Transformer for entire lighting load : Supply,
installation, erection, testing, commissioning of Suitable
12 KVA rating for Entire plant lighting load, 433 KV/433 V, Lot 1
50 Hz , Dyn 11, Neutral Solidly earthed, Copper winding,
ONAN type cooling
Page 147 of 449

Lighting Circuits & Light fitting, LDB / PDB Panel for
Pretreatment, QF & UF, Dilution facility :
Supply & Wiring charges for lighting panel in suitably
sized M.S conduits, supported on walls, ceiling etc., at an
interval of 1000 mm, installation of light control switches
and receptacles housed in stove enameled steel boxes,
earthing with 14 SWG copper conductor continuous wire
run outside along the conduit and clamped at every 1000
mm interval and termination of wires at lighting panel,
light control switches, receptacles, lighting fixtures, etc., as
required including supply of all the items for the work
13 detailed above such as 650 V grade. 2.5/4mm2, copper Lot 1
conductor PVC insulated wires, 5A/15A switches, GI
conduits and accessories (such as junction boxes fabricated
from 16 SWG sheet and complete with gasket, knockouts
for conduit entire earthing terminal with bolt, nut and
washer, 14 SWG copper earthing with flexible conduit etc.,
shall be included in the Contractor's scope. All work
necessary for fixing of boxes, conduits etc., together with
supply of necessary hardware, shall be carried out by the
Contractor. Wiring for outdoor areas other shall be carried
out by means of 1.1 KV grade armoured cables with
copper conductors.
Supply, fixing of WIPRO/ Philips / CG Make, 120/150/
200 Watts, IP 66, Pressure Die Cast Aluminium, LED
street light / Flood light & fittings for roads, yard lighting
with 7 metre R.C.C pole and FRP / Thermoplastic dust
weather proof switch box & 5 A, Loadster type MCB, 6
sq.mm cable connector block etc.,
Supply of 4core x 2.5sqmm , Copper, Finolex make U.G
cable with necessary cable gland from LSB to respective
street light poles and for outdoor lighting suitable size of
Aluminium conductor cable shall be provided as per
requirement.
Supply of Wipro/Philips/CG Make, Industrial type LED
tube 18/36 Watts, twin type light fitting with reflector
shading for (i) Admin / Office Room (ii) Conference hall
(iii) PCC / MCC / HT panel room
Supply of Wipro/Philips/CG Make, Industrial type LED
tube 18/36 Watts, twin type light fitting with reflector
shading for (i) Laboratory (ii) Store room (iii) Mini work
shop (iv) Office Room (v) Conference hall
Supply of Philips/CG Make, Corrosion /weather proof 90 /
125 watts LED lamp for Aeration tank, secondary clarifier,
reactor clarifier, dilution tank and near chemical dosing
tank area (near DYKE wall) and all outdoor equipment.
Page 148 of 449

Supply of Philips/CG Make, Corrosion /weather proof ,
125 /160 /200 Watts, LED with switch box & 5 A MDS
make, Loadster type for (i) PCC Room (ii) PMCC Rooms
(iii) Chemical House (iv) Filter Press (v) Filtration section
including Primary treatment Dilution section (Note: Low /
High bay lighting fitting shall be considered for Shed)
Supply of Crompton Greaves Make ceiling fan & Exhaust
fan for (i) PCC / PMCC Room (ii) PLC/SCADA Room (i)
Laboratory (ii) Store room (iii) Office Room (iv)
Conference hall
Providing Power plug points suitable size conductor,
conduit pipes, metal boxes with 16 A, metal glad 3 pin
(for single phase with neutral supply) and 4 (for three
phase with neutral supply) pin plug and socket and 16 A
Triple/Four pole MCB
Supply of 1 No. of heavy duty wheel mounted street light
pole maintenance ladder
GI /FRP Cable Tray for Pretreatment, Secondary &
Dilution facility: Supply of suitable size G.I / FRP cable
tray shall be provided to inside & outside of the building of
plant PCC/PMCC/APFCR/PBD/LSB Panels, motors,
Junction Boxes, Push button station along with necessary
tray M.S supports.
14 Lot 1
(a) All cable trays shall be earthed and connected with
nearby main earth flats. (b) FRP cable tray shall be
provided for dosing area & High polluted area. (c) Separate
cable tray shall be provided using HT & LT cable. (d)
individual cable tray for power cable, control cable &
instrument cable.
Earthing systems for for Pretreatment, QF & UF,
15 Lot 1
Dilution facility:
Supply erection and testing of Earth pit with earth
electrodes & refilling chemical compound with necessary
all materials as per IS 3043 (For Synchronizing
panel/Indoor, outdoor HT Panels / PCC / PMCC panels,
APFCR & Motor Body, earth pits should be interlinked
with others except PLC/SCADA & VFD earth pits, Neutral
earth pit for Transformer, Common body earth pit for
Transformer Neutral & Body .
(a) Providing Earth pits for Body earthing with necessary
accessories (Double clamping, Funnel) etc., using 75 mm
dia earth electrode up to 3 meter depth, Earth flat 2 run of
size 50 mm x 6 mm using G.I flat and RCC cover slab with
identification etc., complete
(b) Providing Earth pits for neutral with necessary
accessories (Double clamp, Funnel) etc., using 75 mm dia
earth electrode up to 3 meter depth, Earth flat size of
75x12 using Copper flat and RCC cover slab with
Page 149 of 449

identification etc., complete.
(c) Providing Earth pits for lightning arrestor to be fixed at
the top of Exhaust pipe line with necessary accessories
(Double clamp, Funnel) etc., using 75 mm dia earth
electrode up to 3 meter depth, Earth flat size of 25 x 3
using Copper flat to interlink Lighting arrestor to earth pit
and RCC cover slab with identification.
Supply, Laying & termination of 2 Runs x 65 mm x 10
mm G.I flat to HT/ PCC/PMCC/APFRC panels for main
earth flat from earth pits.
Supply, Laying & termination of 2 Run x 50 mm 6 mm G.I
flat for from main earth flat to PDB/LSB & MV equipment
Supply, Laying & termination of 2 Runs x 8 SWG Green
coloured Sleeved copper earth wire from earth flat to MV
equipment rated up to 11 KW/Push button stations/Street
lights
Supply, Laying & termination of 2 Run x 25 mm x 3 mm
G.I flat for from main earth flat to MV equipment rating
from 11 to 30 KW
Supply, Laying & termination of 2 Run x 25 mm x 3 mm
G.I flat for all along with all cable trays and connected
with nearby main earth flats
Battery Charger and DC Distribution Board for entire
plant requirement: (1 working + 1 Redundant)
Supply, installation, erection, testing, commissioning of
Battery Charger and DC Distribution Board shall be Free
standing, floor mounting type, cable entry at bottom. (a)
Panel rating shall be suitable for control voltage 24 V DC
at the end of all circuit breaker, float cum boost type, full
wave and half controlled rectifier, AC & DC Voltmeter &
Ammeter, LED indication lamps, Circuit breakers,
16 semiconductor fuses, Potentiometers, selector switch, Lot 2
Automatic voltage regulator, filter, auto phase reversal
with necessary woks to complete the Job. (b) Battery bank
: 2V, 200 AH, VRLA battery with Suitable Nos. & current
rating with cable, lugs. (c) FRP battery rack arrangement.
Input & Output supply: 3 Phase, 4 Wire, 415 V AC ± 10%,
50 HZ ± 5% & suitable for control voltage 24 V DC at the
end of all circuit breaker, Incoming & Outgoing feeder : 1
Set.
Location: Main PCC Room
Page 150 of 449

Fire Detection and Alarm System for plant premises:
The scope of works including design, manufacture,
assembly, testing at manufacturer’s works, supply &
delivery for substation control room, PCC, MCC, PLC
Room, Admin building Laboratory, Store room & all
necessary location wherever required in the plant premises.
System shall be designed with following: (a) The fire &
17 smoke detection system shall consist of various types of Lot 1
fire detectors, control cabling, fire alarm panels, central
monitoring station, annunciation/control panels, local
panels. (b) The fire detection and alarm system shall be
microprocessor based, analogue addressable system &
interfaced with SCADA system. (c) System shall be
interfaced with central monitoring SCADA Panel located
in the admin building.
Fire Fighting Equipment & Safety Items for for
Pretreatment, QF & UF, Dilution facility:
The following equipment / items in required quantities
shall be provided in the electrical rooms such as PMCC &
MCC rooms (a) 6 kgs of CO 2 Fire extinguishers (b) Fire
18 Lot 1
buckets with sand (c) Stand made of steel for keeping item
(d) First and box with required medicines (e) HT / LT
Safety electrical Rubber insulated Gloves (f) HT / LT
Electrical Insulation Mat with ISI 15652 (g) Danger labels
(h) Danger board (i) Safety charts, First aid charts.
Emergency fixture for entire plant HT / LT Panel rooms :
Automatic emergency fixture with wiring circuit for
19 230/250 V AC complete with batteries & lamps, magnetic Lot 1
relay and battery charging circuit to provide lighting
continuously for about 2 hours.
MS chequered plate for for Pretreatment, QF & UF,
Dilution facility: Supply of 5 mm thick M.S chequered
plates with handle for covering all cable trenches in
20 PCC/PMCC/PLC/Distributed I/O panel rooms. Lot 1
MS Channel: Supply of suitable size M.S
Beam/Pipe/Channel for supporting cable tray, chequered
plats, push button station etc., (M.S Angle is not accepted)
Electrical Safety Certificate for entire plant::
Liasioning works including Co-ordination with local
statutory authorities, such as State Electricity Distribution
Company , Chief Electrical Inspectorate to State
Government, etc. for obtaining all the statutory approvals
21 Lot 1
electrical drawings and documents as well as obtaining
approval of the electrical installation from these authorities
obtaining safety certificates from CEIG / Electrical
Inspector, Test report from State distribution Company
Page 151 of 449

etc., Any defects / deviation / modification pointed in the
above said inspections.
Special tool & Tackles, Critical spares (as per

Manufacturer recommendation) required for electrical
equipment covering under project scope (excluding of
consumables spares) including (i) supply of Fork lift for
22 ACB withdrawal: Suitable capacity fork lift, Hand Lot 1
operated type (ii) Supply of 1 No. of heavy duty wheel
mounted street light pole maintenance ladder (iii) Special
tools & tackles for DG set & HT and LT equipment /
items.
Instrumentation for Primary & Secondary Treatment
C
Section
PLC & SCADA System with UPS & Stabilizer:
Modular based PLC panel with necessary power supply
1 Lot 1
unit, processor, memory card, communication module with
1 set of hot redundancy for power, processor units
PLC shall consists of :(a) Local Control Unit (LCU) as
local computer to handle individual PID loops with analog
input / output signals, digital inputs / outputs (b) Data
Acquisition Unit. (c) Batch Sequencing Unit shall contain a
number of external events, timing counters, arbitrary
function generators, and internal logic.(d) Local Display
shall provide analog display stations, analog trend recorder
for readout (e) Bulk Memory Unit to store and recall
process data by usually mass storage disks(f) General
Purpose Computer shall use to program by Client or third
party to perform sophisticated functions such as
optimization, advance control, expert system, etc.(g)
Central Operator Display shall contain consoles for
operator communication with the system, and display
units(h) Data Highway: A serial digital data transmission
link connecting all other components in the system shall
consist of coaxial cable with redundant data highway to
reduce the risk of data loss. (i) Local area Network with
required Cable (LAN with a port device to allow
connection to remote devices through a standard local area
network.(j) Able to configure Digital Output from
Instruments ( HART & Modbus)
Make: Siemens/Schneider/AB/ABB/Equivalent
Page 152 of 449

The programmable logic controller (PLC) shall be located
in environmentally controlled and AC cooled instrument
control panel room with false ceiling, floor tiling, and wall
painted room. This shall meet the following minimum
requirement.
The PLC shall have a single processor I/O with redundancy
& also with auto testing configuration and shall be a
microprocessor based system.
The functional capability of the Processor system shall
have logic function, sequencing, and timing function with a
range of 0 to 99.999 sec & with the least count of 0.01.
Total No. of IO’S, Power Supply, Communication Cable,
Relay Card will be decided as per Vendor requirement
Potential free/only contact with contact ratings shall be
provided for output contacts from PLC.
All output cards for driving pneumatic/motorized valves,
alarm Annunciators – 110V AC, 0.5A (Inductive) & 24V
DC and 2A (Inductive)
sheet.
I/O Tags
DO - 450 Nos, DI - 1200 Nos, AI - 220 Nos, AO - 60 Nos.
SCADA - Primary & Secondary Treatment

Lot 1
CITEC” based SCADA system with permanent licensed
software for PLC/SCADA system including PLC programs
& logic controls for 2000
Centralized SCADA ( Control & Monitor all Sections
in CETP for Component A, B, C & D, Monitoring of
Individual Tannery Member Units - 380 Nos.)
CITEC” based SCADA system with permanent licensed Lot 1
software for PLC/SCADA system including PLC programs
& logic controls for 7000 tags for Centralized SCADA
Engineering, Documentation, Programming &
L.S 1
Commissioning
Surge protection devices (Surge arrestor) - for voltage
Nos. 4
spike & lightning protection
Page 153 of 449

UPS & Servo Stabilizer (With Redundant):
7.5 kVA, On-line UPS with 8 hours power back up and
suitable servo stabilizer.
UPS
Advanced DSP Controlled UPS System, Pure Sine wave,
SPWM Technology with Gibbet's, High MOTIF and
minimum MATTER, SNMP interface – web enabled
monitoring, Full function LCD display to monitor
electrical parameters, Overload & Short circuit protection
with audible alarm, Built-in spike and surge protector,
Static bypass switch, Input Voltage: 433 Volt ± 10%,
combined variation in Voltage & frequency ± 5%, Output
voltage: 230 V AC with 8 hours power Backup, along
with Exide tubular 180 AH, suitable Nos. of batteries with
necessary cables & hardware
2 Make: Numeric/DB/Equivalent Lot 2
Stabilizer
Single Phase, Oil Cool / Air Cooled, Input Range 170V -
270V, Output Voltage 230V AC adjustable between 200V-
260V, Correction Rate 25V / 35V / 60V / Sec, Protection
Over/Under Voltage, Short-circuit, Overload, Fuse
Protection for Motor & Input Output on, LEDs Indication
Input On, Output On, Output Cut Off, Output Low Cut Off
,Output High Cut Off, Over Load, Insulation Class "B",
Built-in spike and surge protector, Mode of System Fully
automatic / manual, Mode of System Fully automatic /
manual, System Construction As Per IS : 9815-1994
Make: Servo/Equivalent
Location: Primary & Secondary Treatment
sheet.
Level transmitter :
Specification: Non- Contacting Sensor, Ultrasonic/ Radar
as per the location, UV protected LCD display with local
operator interface & backlight for night vision, remote
enclosure with indicating, transmitting and controlling
electronics, measurement accuracy shall be +/-
3 0.25%.Supply Voltage : Universal/24V DC, Output - 4-20
mA/Modbus/HART. Separate enclosure: IP 67 or IP 65
with weather proof thermo plastic canopy with sun light
protection
Make: E&H,/Krohne Marshall/Emerson/Equivalent
sheet.
Ultrasonic 5 Meter Range:
Location: Collection well, Grit chamber, Bar screen
3.1 Nos. 14
chamber for coarse & fine screen, Presettler tank, Anoxic
Tank
Page 154 of 449

3.2 Location : Storage & Homogenous Tank, BIOT Tank, Nos. 19
Distribution Tank, Day tank for Caustic
Sludge Interface Sensor for Sludge Level Measurement
3.3 No. 1
System
DO analyzer :
Sensor: LDO (Light luminous LED Type), Measuring
Range : 0 to 10 ppm , self-cleaning system with air
flushing line or water jet shall be provided to clean the
sensor to avoid coating, sensor cable length 10 m, suitable
for corrosive/scale forming effluent.
Transmitter: Microprocessor based, Display: LED or LCD
4 with backlighting, Warranty - 3 years, Housing: Die cast Nos. 4
Aluminium, Separate enclosure: IP 67 or IP 65 with
weather proof thermo plastic enclosure, Supply Voltage:
Universal/ 24V DC, Make-HACH/ WTW / E+H/
Emerson/Yokogawa/Equivalent
Location : BIOT
sheet.
pH analyzer :
Sensor: Range 0 to 14 , suitable for corrosive/scale forming
effluent, Glass Type Electrode with tip protection
Transmitter: Micro controller based 2 wire transmitter,
Large UV protected LCD display with local operator
interface, menu driven program, non - volatile memory ,
push button for calibration, process temperature
compensation, non explosive proof type, Dual / Triple
channel input will be considered in case of nearby other
analyzers, 2 No. Relay contact for future interlock, flow
5 No. 1
through assembly with 1/2" NPT process connection,
Cable Length 10 m, Junction box to be provided to avoid
cable damage, Voltage : Universal, 24V DC, Output - 4-20
mA/Modbus/HART, Mounting- Separate field mounting,
IP 67/IP 66(Nema 4X)/IP 65 weather proof thermo plastic
enclosure.
Make - Forbes Marshall,GLI/ABB/E&H/WTT/Equivalent
Location : SHT
sheet.
Pressure Gauge:
Type: SS/GLYCERIN filled, 6'' Dia, snapper arrangements
SS 316L internal & SS 316 outer casing, or corrosive/scale
forming effluent, 1/2 inch ss Nipple, Gate valve, Coupling
6 Nos. 32
for pressure gage, external zero adjustment knob. Range - 0
to 10 kg/cm2
Make: Waree/Forbes Marshall/General
Instruments/Equivalent
Page 155 of 449

Location: Collection well pump, SHT pump, Lime dosing,
Alum dosing, Poly dosing, SRS pump, Filter press feed
pump,
sheet.
Electromagnetic flow meter:Flow Head: Flange welded

along with body, Liner: PTFE, Electrode: 1.H2SO4-
Platinum,2. Hcl-Tantalum,3. Effluent, Caustic & Hypo –
Hastelloy C, Grounding Rings: Hastelloy C, End
Connection: With Flange, Protection: IP 68, Flow tube: SS
304, Coil Housing – SS316L, Flange MOC - SS316L,
Meter Housing – SS316L, The flow head should be sealed
permanently using potting compound to avoid entry of
water through cable entry, Flange: ANSI 150 class. Signal
Converter Transmitter: Cable length: 10 m, Mounting:
7
Separate-Field mounting, Type: Microprocessor based,
Output: 4-20 mA & Modbus/HART, Empty pipe detection,
Display: LED or LCD with backlighting, Parameters:
Actual flow rate in Cu.m/hr & totalizer flow in cu.m,
Housing: Die cast Aluminium, Enclosure: IP 65 with
weather proof thermo plastic canopy, Accuracy: ± 0.5%,
Supply voltage: Universal Make: Krohne Marshall
/ABB/E&H/Equivalent
Note: For Complete details refer Technical specification
sheet
Size: DN 500 for Raw Effluent Transfer pump Nos. 3
Size: DN 350 for Raw effluent transfer pump from SHT to
Nos. 3
Flash Mixer
Size: DN 150 Thickener feed from Presettler, SC,RC Nos. 4
Size: DN 200 Thickener feed from RC Nos. 2
Size: DN 400 SRS feed pump Nos. 6
Size: DN 40 Filter press feed pump Nos. 11
Size: DN 80 Caustic Transfer pump No. 1
Page 156 of 449

Variable Frequency drive:
Supply, erection and commissioning of suitable rating of
415 V, 3 Phase, Variable Frequency Drive (V.F.D) with
weather proof panel with powder coated finish consisting
of remote key pad, 4- 20 mA/Modbus output, serial
communication RS-485 and Input Chock, output chock
incase of motor distance more than 150 meters from VFD,
VFD should accept 4 - 20 mA from PLC for auto
operation, Panel consists of suitable rating, 3 Pole, 415
Volt, MCCB, 5A, 230 Volt local / Remote selection and
manual /auto through PLC mode operation selection, 6"
Cooling fan with dust filters for air inlet & outlet, Panel
indication LED lamps for R,Y,B power supply / ON / OFF
/ TRIP / MAINS ON, ON/OFF push buttons, Potentio
8
meter with fine tuning for controlling VFD frequency,
Glass envelop for monitoring VFD display panel, Control
transformer 440/230 Volt, 100 VA., 6 A MCB for
controlling primary & secondary of control transformer,
Inbuilt PLC with minimum I/O's for future interlock, Plug-
in relay, 5 pin type, 50 sq.mm bus bar type cable terminal
connector - 8 Nos. for power cable terminations & 10
sq.mm cable terminal connector - 20 Nos. VFD panel
should be made with min. 2.5 mm thick sheet steel with
powder coat finish & IP 55 protection to be provided with
stand alone type.
Make: Schneider/ABB/Hitachi/Equivalent
sheet.
10.1 75 kW Raw effluent transfer pump Nos. 3
10.2 37 kW Raw effluent transfer pump SHT to clarifier Nos. 3
10.3 37 kW SRS pump Nos. 6
10.4 37 kW Filter press feed pump Nos. 13
Soft Starters :
Supply, erection and commissioning of suitable rating with
supply voltage 415 V, 3 Phase, Soft starter with weather
proof panel with powder coated finish consisting of remote
key pad, 4- 20 mA output, serial communication RS-485,
Panel consists of suitable rating, 3 Pole, 415 Volt, MCCB,
5A, 230 Volt local / Remote selection and manual /auto
through PLC mode operation selection, 6" Cooling fan
11
with dust filters for air inlet & outlet, Panel indication LED
lamps for R,Y,B power supply / ON / OFF / TRIP /
MAINS ON, ON/OFF push buttons, Glass envelop for
monitoring soft starter display panel, Control transformer
440/230 Volt, 100 VA., 6 A MCB for controlling primary
& secondary of control transformer, Plug-in relay, 5 pin
type, 50 sq.mm bus bar type cable terminal connector - 8
Nos. for power cable terminations & 10 sq.mm cable
Page 157 of 449

terminal connector - 20 Nos. Panel should be made with
min. 2.5 mm thick sheet steel with powder coat finish &
IP 55 protection to be provided with Stand Alone type.
Make: Schneider/ABB/Equivalent
sheet.
11.1 Location : 8 kW SHT Flow maker & flow jet Nos. 28

11.2 Location : 10 kW BIOT 1 &2 Flow maker Nos. 20
11.3 Location : 4 kW Anoxic tank mixer Nos. 4
Desktop Computer:
Computer system with Control desk, Operating
system/other statuary software including antivirus software
for one year period - 1 No.
Centralized SCADA
Monitor (SMART TV): Make: Sony, LG, Display size
(diagonal)-60"; Display type: LED Smart TV ; Aspect
ratio; Widescreen (16:9); Resolution: 1920 x 1080; Built in
WIFI, Response time: 7 ms; Connectivity: 1 VGA,2 USB,
3 HDMI with 3 years limited warranty
CPU configuration: Operating system: windows 8.0,
Original OS, Processor: Intel core i5-2320 processor 3.00
gigahertz; Hard drive: 1TB ; Main circuit board: Intel;
RAM: 4GB RAM DDR3, 2GB Graphic cards; HP make
USB keyboard and optical mouse, DVD / CD ROM;
12 Software: MS office 2010 with 3 years limited Warranty No. 1
Make : HP, Lenovo, Dell
Pretreatment
Monitor (SMART TV): Display size (diagonal)-20";
Display type: LED Smart TV ; Aspect ratio; Widescreen
(16:9); Resolution: 1920 x 1080; Built in WIFI, Response
time: 7 ms; Connectivity: 1 VGA,2 USB, 3 HDMI with 3
years limited warranty
gigahertz; Hard drive: 500 GB; Main circuit board: Intel;
RAM: 2GB RAM DDR3, 2 Ethernet Ports, 3 Sub
Ports,1GB Graphic cards; HP make USB keyboard and
optical mouse, DVD / CD ROM; Software: MS office
2010 with 3 years limited Warranty
Make : HP/Lenovo/Dell/Equivalent
Page 158 of 449

Desktop Computer for CCTV Camera
(16:9); Display type: LED Smart TV ; Aspect ratio;
Widescreen (16:9); Resolution: 1920 x 1080; Built in
WIFI, Response time: 7 ms; Connectivity: 1 VGA,2 USB,
3 HDMI with 3 years limited warranty
Licensed Operating system: windows 10.0, Processor:
Intel core i7 processor 3.00 gigahertz; Hard drive: 6 TB x 6
Nos.; Main circuit board: Intel; RAM: 8GB RAM DDR3,
2GB Graphic cards; Bluetooth keyboard and optical
mouse, DVD Writer / CD ROM; Software: MS office 2017
with 3 years limited Warranty, Adobe Acrobat DC
Professional
Make: HP/Dell/Lenovo/Equivalent
Printer: Make: HP; Model: HP LaserJet 1320n (Q5928A);
Print speed: Up to 22 pages per minute; Resolution: 1200
dpi; Processor / Memory: Powerful 133MHz processor and
Nos. 2
HP Jet direct Fast Ethernet embedded print server; Two
sided printing; suitable for operating system windows 8 with
3 Years limited warranty.
13 Power & Signal cables:
Supply, of 18 Pair x 1.5 sq.mm, Copper Conductor, PVC
Insulated Armoured U.G cable with necessary cable gland,
Lot 1
for Power supply to On-line instruments. Cable PLC panel
to Field junction box . Make: RPG/Finolex/Polycab.
Supply, of 1 Triad x 1.5 sq.mm, Copper Conductor, PVC
Insulated Armoured U.G cable with necessary cable gland
for Power supply to On-line instruments. Cable from Field Lot 1
junction box to On-line Instruments. Make:
Lot 1
for Pumps DI. Cable from PLC panel to PMCC . Make:
Lot 1
for Pumps DO. Cable from PLC panel to PMCC . Make:
Supply, of 12 Triad x 1.5 sq.mm with earth shield, Copper
Conductor, PVC Insulated Armoured U.G cable with
Lot 1
necessary cable gland, for Valves & FIT DO. Cable from
Remote PLC panel to JB . Make: RPG/Finolex/Polycab.
Lot 1
PLC panel to JB . Make: RPG/Finolex/Polycab.
Page 159 of 449

Supply, of 3 Core x 1.5 sq.mm, Copper Conductor, PVC
Lot 1
for Valves & FIT DO. Cable from JB to Instruments .
Make: RPG/Finolex/Polycab.
Lot 1
for valve feed back DI. Cable from PLC panel to Field
junction box . Make: RPG/Finolex/Polycab.
for Power supply Feed Back Signals for valves DI. Cable Lot 1
from Field junction box to Valves. Make:
Singlemode Fibre optic Armored cable with Multi port
Transmission System (6 Pair) For to Connect
Individual SCADA to Centralized SCADA& For
CCTV Camera:
4 Runs x 6 Pair, Standard - IEC 60793-1-45, Attenuation-
1310 nm, Zero Dispersion Wavelength - 1300~1324 nm, Lot 1
Zero Dispersion Slope - ≤0.092 ps/nm2, Cable Cutoff
Wavelength - 1260 nm, Macro bending Loss - 0.05 dB,
Cladding Diameter - 125 ±1μm, Proof stress - ≥0.69Gpa,
with Maximum permissible fibre strain , Fibre Proof test
strain and with OLM (Optical link Module)
GI /FRP Cable Tray: Supply of suitable size G.I / FRP
cable tray shall be provided to inside & outside of the
building of plant PCC/PMCC/APFCR/PBD/LSB Panels,
motors, Junction Boxes, Push button station along with
necessary tray M.S supports.
14 (a) All cable trays shall be earthed and connected with
nearby main earth flats. (b) FRP cable tray shall be
provided for dosing area & High polluted area. (c) Separate
cable tray shall be provided using HT & LT cable.
(d)Separate cable tray for power cable, control cable &
instrument cable.
14.1 50 mm for AI Lot 1
14.4 300 mm for Power Cable Lot 1
14.5 600 mm for DO & DI Lot 1
14.6 Supply, laying of 8 SWG Copper earth wire Lot 1
Air Conditioner:
Supply, Installation of 1.5 Tons Spilt Air Conditioner (5
Star rating) along with in-built inverter for power saving,
15 No. 1
Voltage Stabilizer, Mounting frames etc. . Make:
Daikin/Voltas/LG/Equivalent
For PLC/Control desk
Page 160 of 449

Earth work:
Earth work:
Electronic Earth pit including 50mm x 3.0 m long GI earth
electrode with 600 x 600 x 3.2mm copper plate, earth back
filling compound, Cover, double clamping earth, funnel
arrangement with fine mesh, GI Bolt & Nut, earth pit
16 marking with complete accessories including civil works. Lot 1
Earth work and refilling for cable laying trench work
includes, sand cushioning, brick guarding, earth refilling,
hume pipe protection over the cable for road crashing
necessary area etc.
Location: a) VFD Panel b) Field Instruments c) PLC
Panels d) Cable Tray
PTZ CCTV IP Camera with Optic Fibre Cable/Wifi
Connectivity to connect with CPCB Webserver &
Centralized SCADA , Centralized Licensed Software
and necessary Accessories for Installation for
Component A, C, D :
Camera with night vision capability , PAN, TILT Zoom (
Horizontal 0- 260° , Vertical -5-60°, 2.8-12mm F1.4
optical auto zoom lens), Capable to Rotate camera
Horizontally & Vertically, 5x or above focal length with
centralized licensed software, with IR LED which provide
17 up to 150 feet of night vision, Weather proof rating IP 66, Lot 10
24/7 Live Streaming with Premium HD 960p 1.3
Megapixel Resolution @ 25fps, Support P2P Function,
Alarm recording which means when motion is detected
only then recording will be done, SD Card slot with 128
GB Capacity CARD, Wifi Router to support device to
operate with wireless connectivity, CE Certified and
Compatible to connect with CPCB/SPCB Server and with
necessary hardware like Wifi router required for
Installation.
Location : CETP Premises
Web server with dedicated lease line for internet
connection ( CETP, Pumping Station - 4 Nos. CCRU,
ZLD pilot & Individual member Tannery Units-380
Nos.) :
A dedicated common Web Server for CETP,
CCRU,ZLD pilot plant, pumping station & Individual
18 member Tannery Units-380 Nos. flow metering system, Lot 1
Online TDS Monitoring & Control System in Member
Tannery unit 380 Nos. for Raw effluent & Spent
Chrome, CCTV camera & Fire alarm system inside
CETP premises with maximum hosting space as per
CPCB norms. Dedicated Lease line with minimum 4
MBPS speed for Web server, developing web page &
Page 161 of 449

assisting for obtaining domain with IP address through
a telecom service provider.
Erection , Testing & Commissioning of Instrumentation
19 Lot 1
Works
III Tertiary treatment system
III.A Mechanical Works:
Quartz Filter: Supply of Quartz Filter and filter as
Cylindrical, vertical, Dish end with Size of 4.0 m Inner Dia
x 3 m HOS and design for max operating pressure of 5
kg/cm2 with necessary PP strainer arrangements with
suitable for Silex Media consist of coarse and fine quartz
medium, the approximate quantity of Silex media is - 21.8
Tons / Filter.
Application: Reactor Clarifier outlet, Feed rate as 115

cu.m/hr
MOC:
A. Vessel and Bell mouth piping’s are in MSRL consist of
Natural rubber lining.
1 Nos. 13
B. Frontal piping is HDPE- PN10.
C. Frontal Pipe Supports: SS316L
Accessories: Monkey ladder, Media unloading manhole at

side and Top manhole lid with swiveling arrangement,
vessel Lifting hook, working platform on Top with hand
rails and Toe guard, Level glass inbuilt with vessel, View
glass at top side, nozzles for inlet/ outlet for process and
backwash, water and Air vent, inlet for air scoring line,
rinsing outlet line, PP strainer, Strainer plate, Bell mouth
with multiple distribution pipe line, SS 316L foundation
bolt & nuts and complete set.
sheet.
Silex Media consist of coarse and fine quartz medium
2 0.7mm to 1.2mm Bed Height -800 mm-17.4 Tons & 3mm Tons 283.4
to 5mm - Bed Height - 200 mm-4.4 Tons-
Page 162 of 449

Quartz Filter Feed Pump: Supply of Quartz Filter feed
pump with capacity of 120 cu.m/hr @ 20 m Head, Closed
impeller with suitable mechanical seal arrangement.
Application: Reactor Clarifier outlet.


bed.
3 Motor Type: IE2, TEFC, Class F insulation, Make: Nos. 14

MOC: All wetted parts are in CF8M (SS316L)

sheet.
Quartz Filter Backwash Pump: : Supply of Quartz Filter
Back wash pump with capacity of 135 cm/hr @ 30 m
Head, Closed impeller with suitable mechanical seal
arrangement.
Application: Filtrate from Quartz Filter


4 bed. Nos. 4

MOC: All wetted parts are in CF8M (SS316L)

Page 163 of 449

sheet.
Backwash Blower for Quartz Filter: Supply of Air Blower

Twin Lobe (Roots Blowers) low speed, Air cooling system
air blower with capacity of 600 Nm3/hr @ 5mwc for
Backwash application in Quartz Filter.
Make- Everest/ Vindi Vak/ PPI or equivalent.

Accessories: Motor, MSEP Base frame, safety valve,

5 Nos. 3
suction filter, suction silencer, discharge silencer, non-
return valve, pressure gauge in SS, anti-vibration pads, V-
belt, FRP belt guard, drive and driven pulleys ( or coupling
and FRP coupling guards), set of special tools, foundation
and base bolts in S.S316, interconnecting piping with
flanges.
Seal - 3 Nos.
sheet.
Pipes and fittings for Quartz Filter system: Pipes and
fittings for Quartz Filter system: Supply of piping and
accessories for Quartz filter Feed and backwash Header
and Lateral lines and suitable supporting.
Velocity for Pipe selection:

1. Air lines- 15 to 25 m/sec
2. Process lines- 0.6 to 0.8 m/sec (Gravity, backwash outlet
and pump suction lines)/ 1.2 to 1.8 m/sec (pump delivery
6 lines/ pressure lines) Lot 1
MOC:
1. Pipe and accessories- HDPE- PN10.
2. Supporting- SS316L.
3. Blower air lines- SS316L, Sch 10, Seamless.
Welding:
1. All the SS lines should be welded with Tig welding.
2. HDPE lines are welded with Butt welding.
Page 164 of 449

Electro Pneumatic valves , Manual valves and NRVs
for Quartz Filter system : Supply of Auto/ Manual
7 Valves, Air valve and NRVs with necessary arrangement. Lot 1
MOC of Valve wetted parts: SS316L

Air Compressor for Quartz Filter System: Supply of Air
compressor along with all accessories.
Make: ELGI or equivalent.
Specification: Reciprocating compressor, Air Discharge-

Capacity to be based on no. of pneumatic instruments,
Pressure- 12 Kg/cm2.
8 Nos. 2
Accessories: Auto drain valve, 1 set of FRL along with 1
set of Air drier, Air Reservoir: 5000 liters, refrigeration air
dryer, Pre- Filter, Fine Filter, Motor, Motor Pulley, Fan,
Pressure switch, Pressure gauge, Starter, Air receiver, Ball
Valve, Safety valve, NRV assembly, Belt, Belt Guard, FRL
assembly, Dryer and auto Drain valve.
Seal - 3 Nos.
Instrumentation - (PLC/SCADA considered in Primary
B
& Secondary Treatment System)
Level transmitter :
protection
sheet.
No. 1
Location : Quartz Feed Tank
Page 165 of 449

pH analyzer :
analyzers, 2 No. Relay contact for future interlock, flow
2 No. 1
enclosure.
Location : Quartz Feed
sheet.
Turbidity analyzer:
Sensor: Measuring Range : 0 to 50 NTU , self-cleaning
system with air flushing line or water jet shall be provided
to clean the sensor to avoid coating, sensor cable length10
m .
with backlighting, Housing: Die cast Aluminium, Separate
enclosure: IP 67 or IP 65 with weather proof thermo plastic
canopy, 2 No. Relay contact for future interlock, Supply
3 No. 1
Voltage: Universal, 24 V DC, Output: 4-20
mA,/Modbus/HART, flow through assembly with 1/2"
NPT process connection, Sensor: suitable for
corrosive/scale forming effluent
Make-Forbes
Marshall/Yokogawa/Emerson/E&H/Equivalent
Location: Quartz Common Outlet
sheet.
Pressure Gauge:
SS 316L internal & SS 316L outer casing, or
corrosive/scale forming effluent, 1/2 inch ss Nipple, Gate
4 valve, Coupling for pressure gage, external zero adjustment Nos. 18
knob. Range - 0 to 10 kg/cm2
Location: Quartz feed pump, Quartz backwash pump
Page 166 of 449

sheet.
Differential Pressure Transmitter:
Range 0 to 6 Kg/cm2, SS 316L internal & SS 316 outer
casing, Supply Voltage: Universal/ 24 Volt DC & 2 wire
system, LED or LCD with backlight display, Output - 4-
20mA/Modbus/HART Enclosure: IP 65 with weather proof
5 thermo plastic canopy Nos. 13
Make: ABB/Yokogawa/ Waree/Forbes
Marshall/Equivalent Sensor: Diaphragm-Hastelloy-C
Location: Quartz Individual Skid
sheet.
Electromagnetic flow meter:
Flow Head: Liner: PTFE, Electrode: 1.H2SO4-Platinum,2.
Hcl-Tantalum,3. Effluent, Caustic & Hypo – Hastelloy C,
Grounding Rings: Hastelloy C, End Connection: With
Flange, Protection: IP 68, Flow tube: SS 316, The flow
head should be sealed permanently using potting
compound to avoid entry of water through cable entry,
Flange: ANSI 150 class. Signal Converter
Transmitter: Cable length: 10 m, Mounting: Separate-Field
6 mounting, Type: Microprocessor based, Output: 4-20
mA/Modbus/HART, Empty pipe detection, Display: LED
or LCD with backlighting, Parameters: Actual flow rate in
Cu.m/hr & totalizer flow in cu.m, Housing: Die cast
Aluminium, Enclosure: IP 65 with weather proof thermo
plastic canopy, Accuracy: ± 0.5%, Supply voltage:
Universal
Make: Krohne Marshall /ABB/E&H/Equivalent
sheet.
Size: DN 150 Quartz feed Nos. 13
Lot 1
Lot 1
Page 167 of 449

Lot 1
Lot 1
Lot 1
Lot 1
Lot 1
IV UF System
Mechanical Works:
UF feed pump: Supply of UF feed pump with capacity of
551 cu.m/hr @ 30 m Head, Closed impeller with suitable
Application: Quartz filter outlet
Pump Make- KSB/ Sulzer/ Grundfos/ Johnson/ Flow serve

or equivalent.

1 bed. Nos. 5
Motor Detail: Make- ABB/KEC/CG/BB/ Siemens, Type:

IE 2, TEFC, Class F insulation.
MOC: All wetted parts are in CF8M (SS 316L).

nut in SS 316L and FRP motor canopy.
Page 168 of 449

sheet.
UF Back wash pump: Supply of UF Back flush pump with
capacity of 650 cu.m/hr @ 30 m Head, Closed impeller
with suitable mechanical seal arrangement.
Application: UF Permeate

or equivalent.

bed.
2 Motor Detail: Make- ABB/KEC/CG/BB, Type: IE 2, Nos. 3

TEFC, Class F insulation.

sheet.
Agitator for UF CIP: supply of CIP Water Mixing agitator
316L impeller suitable for 5 x 5 x 1.6 m LD x 0.4 m Free
Board - 40 cum volume civil RCC tank with RCC super
structure.
Application: Chemical with Water.

3 Ratio, Make- Radicon Greaves/ Shanthi/ Elecon / No. 1
Motor: Make- Kirloskar/ Bharth bijilee, TEFC, Class F

insulation.
Accessories: Motor, MSEP Base frame plate, working

platform, foundation bolts in S.S 304, FRP motor canopy
with flange type coupler.
Page 169 of 449

Seal - 3 Nos.
sheet.
UF CIP pump: Supply of UF CIP pump with capacity of
689 cu.m/hr @ 30 m Head, Closed impeller with suitable
Application: Chemical solution, pH- 2 to 12.

or equivalent.

bed.
4 Motor Detail: Make- ABB/KEC/CG/BB/ Siemens, Type: Nos. 3

IE 2, TEFC, Class F insulation.
MOC: All wetted parts are in CF8M (SS 316L)

sheet.
Auto back washable basket strainer / Disk Filter for UF
feed: Supply of Auto back wash basket filter with suitable
capacity of 551 cu.m/hr feed rate and screen size 50
micron, Min. operating pressure - 2.0 to 2.5 kg/cm2.
Application: UF feed and CIP, pH- 2 to 12
Make: Amiad Filtration systems or equivalent.

5 Nos. 4
MOC: For wetted and non wetted parts including filter SS
316L
Accessories: Gear Box, Backwash control switch with

panel arrangement, Drain valve, Motor, ON/ OFF valve,
Auto backwash arrangement with DP Switch & auto valves
arrangements for self-cleaning.
Page 170 of 449

Manual Basket filter for UF Back Wash: Supply of Manual
Back wash basket filter with suitable capacity of 650
cu.m/hr feed rate with screen size 100 micron, Min.
operating pressure - 2.0 kg/cm2.
Application: UF permeate water with Chemicals, pH

range- 2 to 12
Make: Gopani, 3M or equivalent.

6 Nos. 2
MOC: For wetted and non wetted parts including filter SS
316L
Accessories: DP gauge arrangements, Drain valves

arrangements, Top manual with swiveling arrangement and
Air vent.
sheet.
UF Membrane, compressor with Skid: Supply of UF
membrane module with end connection arrangements with
compressor and Skid suitable for UF system feed flow of
25786 cu.m/day @20 hrs operation.
UF Membrane specification: IN to OUT, Gross permeate

flux: 40LMH; Feed flux: 53LMH: Recovery: 85%, Hollow
fibre, Membrane active area and , Number of membranes/
Skid as per manufacturer standard, Skid- 4 Nos.
Application: Quartz filter outlet, operating pH – 7 to 8,

Cleaning pH- 2 to 12, TDS- 20000 to 21000mg/ Ltrs
7 Lot 1
MOC: Modified PES/ Housing: UPVC
Membrane Make- Hyflux/ GE/ Ingae/ Qua or equivalent.
Membrane Accessories: Permeate adapter, couplings, ‘O’

Rings and gaskets
Specification of UF skid: Skid with proper supporting

clamp which is suitable for UF membranes, No of skid- 4,
MOC: SS 316L and necessary spares for 1 year operation.
sheet.
8 UF Membrane with accessories (for 4 Skid) Lot 1
Page 171 of 449

Air Compressor for UF System: Supply of Air compressor
along with all accessories suitable for UF system.
Make: ELGI or equivalent.
Specification: Reciprocating compressor, Air Discharge-

Capacity to be based on no. of pneumatic instruments,
Pressure- 12 Kg/cm2.
9 Accessories for Compressor: Auto drain valve, 1 set of Lot 1

FRL along with 1 set of Air drier, Air Reservoir: 5000
liters, refrigeration air dryer, Pre- Filter, Fine Filter, Motor,
Motor Pulley, Fan, Pressure switch, Pressure gauge,
Starter, Air receiver, Ball Valve, Safety valve, NRV
assembly, Belt, Belt Guard, FRL assembly, Dryer and auto
Drain valve.
Seal - 3 Nos.
10 Skid with accessories for UF system in MOC of SS316L Skid 4
NaOH Dosing Pump for CIP- UF: NaOH Dosing Pump for
CIP- UF: Supply of NaOH dosing pump, Diaphragm/
Metering type with capacity of 0-4000 LPH with 60m
head.
Make: Swelore/ Milton Roy/ Xeed or equivalent.
Application: NaOH, Concentration- 48 %, Specific

gravity- 1.5 g/cc
11 Nos. 2
Accessories: VFD for flow control, Motor and Standard
Accessories comprising of PRV, Pulsation dampener, Anti
siphon valve, ‘Y’ type strainer, MSEP Base frame plate,
Coupling, FRP Coupling Guard, Foundation bolt, nut in SS
316L and FRP motor canopy for the above pump.
Seal - 3 Nos.
sheet.
Page 172 of 449

Sodium Hypo Chloride (NaOCL) Dosing Pump for CIP-
UF: Supply of NaOCL dosing pump, Diaphragm/ Metering
type with capacity of 0-3252 LPH with 60m head.
Application: NaOCL, Concentration- 8 to 12%, Specific

gravity- 1.2 g/cc
12 Nos. 3
Seal - 3 Nos.
sheet.
HCL Dosing Pump for CIP- UF: Supply of HCL dosing
pump, Diaphragm/ Metering type with capacity of 0-5900
LPH with 60m head.
Application: HCL, Concentration- 33 %, Specific gravity-

1.14g g/cc

13 Nos. 2
Seal - 3 Nos.
sheet.
Page 173 of 449

HCL Transfer pump for UF System: Supply of HCL
Transfer pump with capacity of 6 cu.m/hr @ 30 m Head,
Closed impeller with suitable mechanical seal arrangement.
Application: HCL
Pump Make- Raj Dia or equivalent.

bed.
Motor Detail: Make- ABB/KEC/CG/BB, Type: IE 2,

14 Nos. 2
MOC: All wetted parts are in PP lined.

sheet.
Caustic Transfer pump for UF System: Supply of Caustic
Transfer pump with capacity of 5 cu.m/hr @ 30 m Head,
Application: Caustic

bed.

15 Nos. 2
MOC: All wetted parts are SS 316L.

sheet.
Page 174 of 449

Hypo Transfer pump for UF System (for day tank): Supply
of Hypo Transfer pump with capacity of 5 cu.m/hr @ 30 m
Head, Closed impeller with suitable mechanical seal
arrangement.
Application: HCL

bed.
16 Nos. 2
MOC: All wetted parts are in PP lined.

Chemical Storage Tank for HCl and NaOCL (Hypo) for
day tank: Supply of Cylinder, Vertical Chemical storage
tank with capacity of 2000 Ltrs, suitable for outdoor
installation.
Make: Sintex or equivalent.
Application:
(a) HCL, Concentration- 33 %, Specific gravity- 1.14g

17 g/cc. Nos. 2
(b) NaOCL, Concentration- 3 to 10%, Specific gravity- 1.2
g/cc
MOC: Chemical grade HDPE, CCV Model

Page 175 of 449

Chemical Storage Tank for Caustic (for day tank):
Supply of Cylinder, Vertical FRP storage tank with
capacity of 2000 Ltrs, suitable for outdoor installation.
18 MOC: FRP with suitable Resin No. 1

Length from Tank (Each 1 No.), For LT- Dia 4” x 6”
Length from Tank (1 No.), For Recirculation- Dia 2” x 6”
Length from Tank (1 No.)
Chemical Storage Tank for HCl: Chemical Storage Tank
for Caustic (for day tank): Supply of Cylinder, Vertical
FRP storage tank with capacity of 2000 Ltrs, suitable for
outdoor installation.

19 Nos. 2
MOC: FRP with suitable Resin

Chemical Storage Tank for Sodium Hypo Chloride: Supply
of Cylinder, Vertical Chemical storage tank with capacity
of 15000 Ltrs, suitable for outdoor installation.
Make: Sintex or equivalent

gravity- 1.2 g/cc
20 Nos. 2

Page 176 of 449

Chemical Storage Tank for Caustic: Supply of Cylinder,
Vertical FRP storage tank with capacity of 15000 Ltrs,
21 MOC: FRP with suitable Resin Nos. 2

Static Mixer for UF: Supply of Static Mixer consists with
mixing arrangements for UF system with suitable for
capacity of 650 cu.m/ hr with flange end type.
Application: MCF inlet line for chemical with water

22 mixing, pH- 5.0 to 7.0, TDS- 7500 to 8500mg/l. No. 1
MOC: All wetted parts are in MS with FRP lining (FRP

Lining- Bisphenol resin/ Min 5mm thickness)/ SS316L
sheet.
Pipes and fittings for UF: Supply of piping, accessories and
supports for UF Feed, Backwash, CIP, Permeate Lines.
MOC:
1. Pipe and accessories- uPVC, Sch 40, Socket joints.
2. Supporting- SS316L
3. Air lines- SS316L
4. Chemical dosing lines (NAOH, NAOCL, HCL)- HDPE,
PN10, PE100, IS4984.
5. Airline tubing: SS 316L, Sch “B” with ferrule joint.
23 Lot 1
2. Process lines- 0.6 to 0.8 m/sec (Gravity and suction
lines)/ 1.2 to 1.8 m/sec (Delivery lines)
Welding:
1. All the SS lines should be welded with Tig welding
2. All the MS lines & structural are welded with Arc
welding
3. UPVC lines are joined with suitable paste with socket
weld.
4. HDPE lines are welded with Butt fusion welding.
Page 177 of 449

Electro Pneumatic valves , Manual valves and NRVs for
UF system: Supply of Electro Pneumatic valves, NRVs and
Strainers as per the given specification.
1. All the pumps suction side strainer, suction side valve,
delivery side valve and NRV to be provided.
2. Necessary gravity and pumping lines valves to be
24 considered. Lot 1
3. Valves and NRVs to be sized based on the pipe size and
operation.
MOC of Valve wetted parts:

(a) All process lines- SS 316L.
(b) Chemical dosing lines- PP.
Instrumentation works for UF system
PLC & SCADA System with UPS & Stabilizer for UF
System & Dilution Facility Infrastructure :
Modular based PLC panel with necessary power supply
1 Lot 1
unit, processor, memory card, communication module with
1 set of Hot redundancy for power, Cold redundancy for
processor unit
PLC shall consists of :(a) Local Control Unit (LCU) as
local computer to handle individual PID loops with analog
input / output signals digital inputs / outputs of(b) Data
Acquisition Unit. (c) Batch Sequencing Unit shall contain a
number of external events, timing counters, arbitrary
function generators, and internal logic.(d) Local Display
shall provide analog display stations, analog trend recorder
for readout (e) Bulk Memory Unit to store and recall
process data by usually mass storage disks(f) General
Purpose Computer shall use to program by Client or third
party to perform sophisticated functions such as
optimization, advance control, expert system, etc.(g)
Central Operator Display shall contain consoles for
operator communication with the system, and display
units(h) Data Highway: A serial digital data transmission
link connecting all other components in the system shall
consist of coaxial cable with redundant data highway to
reduce the risk of data loss. (i) Local area Network with
required Cable (LAN with a port device to allow
connection to remote devices through a standard local area
network.(j) Able to configure Digital Output from
Instruments ( HART & Modbus)
Page 178 of 449

The programmable logic controller (PLC) shall be located
in environmentally controlled and AC cooled instrument
requirement. The PLC shall have a single processor I/O
with redundancy & also with auto testing configuration and
shall be a microprocessor based system. The functional
capability of the Processor system shall have logic
function, sequencing, and timing function with a range of 0
to 99.999 sec & with the least count of 0.01.Total No. of
IO’S, Power Supply, Communication Cable, Relay Card
will be decided as per Vendor requirement Potential
free/only contact with contact ratings shall be provided for
output contacts from PLC. All output cards for driving
pneumatic/motorized valves, alarm Annunciators – 110V
AC, 0.5A (Inductive) & 24V DC and 2A (Inductive)
I/O Tags
1.1 Lot 1
DO - 140 Nos, DI - 250 Nos, AI - 120 Nos, AO - 60 Nos.
SCADA:
1.2 software for PLC/SCADA system including PLC programs No. 1
& logic controls for 500 Tags
Surge protection devices (Surge arrestor) - for voltage
1.3 Nos. 4
spike & lightning protection
UPS & Servo Stabilizer:(With Redundant):
3 KVA, On-line UPS with 8 hours power back up and
UPS
Advanced DSP Controlled UPS System, Pure Sine
wave, SPWM Technology with Gibbet's, High MOTIF
and minimum MATTER, SNMP interface – web
enabled monitoring, Full function LCD display to
monitor electrical parameters, Overload & Short
circuit protection with audible alarm, Built-in spike
and surge protector, Static bypass switch, Input
2 Voltage: 433 Volt ± 10%, combined variation in Lot 2
Voltage & frequency ± 5%, Output voltage: 230 V AC
with 8 hours power Backup, along with Exide tubular
180 AH, suitable Nos. of batteries with necessary
cables & hardware
Make: Numeric/DB
Stabilizer
Single Phase, Oil Cool / Air Cooled, Input Range 170V
-270V, Output Voltage 230V AC adjustable between
200V-260V, Correction Rate 25V / 35V / 60V / Sec,
Protection Over/Under Voltage, Short-circuit,
Overload, Fuse Protection for Motor & Input Output
Page 179 of 449

on, LEDs Indication Input On, Output On, Output Cut
Off, Output Low Cut Off ,Output High Cut Off, Over
Load, Insulation Class "B", Built-in spike and surge
protector, Mode of System Fully automatic / manual,
Mode of System Fully automatic / manual, System
Construction As Per IS : 9815-1994
Location: UF
Level transmitter :
protection
sheet.
Nos. 6
Location: Caustic dosing, Sodium Hypo Chloride
No. 1
Location : UF Feed Tank
Radar 5 Meter Range :
Nos. 3
Location : Hcl dosing tank
Level Switch:
Specification: Float type water level switch with IP 65 and
weather proof Cable terminal with 2 NO+2 NC aux.
4 contacts – Range: 5 meter. No. 1
Location: CIP Tank
sheet.
pH analyzer :
5 Nos. 2
analyzers, 2 Nos. Relay contact for future interlock, flow
Page 180 of 449

enclosure.
Location :UF Common outlet, UF CIP

sheet.
Turbidity analyzer:
system with air flushing line or water jet shall be provided
to clean the sensor to avoid coating, sensor cable length10
m .
canopy, 2 Nos. Relay contact for future interlock, Supply
6 Nos. 2
mA,/Modbus/HART, flow through assembly with 1/2"
NPT process connection, Sensor: suitable for
corrosive/scale forming effluent
Make-Forbes
Marshall/Yokogawa/Emerson/E&H/Equivalent
Location: UF feed pump discharge, UF Common Outlet
sheet.
Pressure Transmitter :
large UV protected LCD display with local operator
interface, menu driven program, non - volatile memory,
push button for zero calibration, non explosive proof type,
1/2" NPT process connection, Mounting- Separate field
mounting, Supply Voltage: Universal, 24 V DC
Sensor: Diaphragm type, Hastelloy C-276 with filling
7 liquid, IP 67/IP 66(Nema 4X)/IP 65 weather proof thermo Nos. 15
plastic enclosure.
Make - Yokogawa/Rosemount (3051)/Honeywell( STG
14L)/Equivalent
Location: UF Skid A,B,C,D Inlet, Permeate, Reject
Recirculation, Air Compressor (Primary, Secondary,
Tertiary & UF System)
sheet.
Page 181 of 449

Pressure Gauge:
Type: SS/GLYCERIN filled, 6'' dia, snapper arrangements
SS 316L internal & SS 316L outer casing, or
corrosive/scale forming effluent, 1/2 inch ss Nipple, Gate
valve, Coupling for pressure gage, external zero adjustment
knob. Range - 0 to 10 kg/cm2
8 Nos. 35
Make: Waree, Forbes Marshall/General
Location: UF feed pump, UF individual skid, UF backwash
pump, UF CIP pump, UF dosing pumps
sheet.
Flow Head: Liner: PTFE,Electrode: 1.H2SO4-Platinum,2.
Hcl-Tantalum,3. Effluent, Caustic & Hypo – Hastelloy C,
Flange, Protection: IP 68, Flow tube: SS 316L, The flow
head should be sealed permanently using potting
Flange: ANSI 150 class. Signal Converter
9 mounting, Type: Microprocessor based, Output: 4-20
mA/Modbus/HART, Empty pipe detection, Display: LED
or LCD with backlighting, Parameters: Actual flow rate in
plastic canopy, Accuracy: ± 0.5%, Supply voltage:
Universal
sheet.
9.1 Size: DN 300 UF Individual skid Feed & permeate Nos. 8
9.2 Size: DN 80 UF Individual skid 5% cross flow Nos. 4
9.3 Size: DN 150 UF Individual skid 25 % reject recirculation Nos. 4
9.4 Size: DN 350 UF Backwash pump Nos. 2
9.5 Size: DN 400 UF CIP pump Nos. 3
9.6 Size: DN 32 for Hypo, Caustic, HCl Nos. 3
Silt Density Index Meter:
Type: Portable, handheld with sampling pump, Pump
arrangement, filter for SDI testing , 0.45 Micron, 47 mm
Dia, Package of 100 Nos., Pre-filter 5M inline, Battery
operated, Real time display of results including SDI,
10 No. 1
Current flow rate and end of test display includes SDI 5, 10
& 15 mts with 100 ML and 500 ML results.
Range: 0-20, with dual 5 - digital segment backlit LCD
display with suitable ranges.
Make: MILLIPORE, GE Osmosis
Page 182 of 449

Location: UF inlet
sheet.
of remote key pad, 4- 20 Ma & Modbus output, serial
communication RS-485 and Input Chock is mandatory,
output chock incase of motor distance more than 150
meters from VFD, VFD should accept 4 - 20 mA from
PLC for auto operation, Panel consists of suitable rating, 3
Pole, 415 Volt, MCCB, 5A, 230 Volt local / Remote
selection and manual /auto through PLC mode operation
selection, 6" Cooling fan with dust filters for air inlet &
outlet, Panel indication LED lamps for R,Y,B power
supply / ON / OFF / TRIP / MAINS ON, ON/OFF push
11
buttons, Potentio meter with fine tuning for controlling
VFD frequency, Glass envelop for monitoring VFD
display panel, Control transformer 440/230 Volt, 100 VA.,
6 A MCB for controlling primary & secondary of control
transformer, Inbuilt PLC with minimum I/O's for future
interlock, Plug-in relay, 5 pin type, 50 sq.mm bus bar type
cable terminal connector - 8 Nos. for power cable
terminations & 10 sq.mm cable terminal connector - 20
Nos. VFD panel should be made with min. 2.5 mm thick
sheet steel with powder coat finish & IP 55 protection.
Panel Type - stand-alone.
sheet.
11.1 75 kW for UF feed pump Nos. 5
11.2 90 kW for UF Backwash pump Nos. 3
11.3 90 kW for UF CIP pump Nos. 3
Desktop Computer:
Computer system with Control desk, Operating
system/other statuary software including antivirus software
for one year period - 1 No.
(16:9); Resolution: 1920 x 1080; Built in WIFI, Response
12 No. 1
time: 7 ms; Connectivity: 1 VGA,2 USB, 3 HDMI with 3
years limited warranty
RAM: 2GB RAM DDR3, 2 Ethernet Ports, 3 Sub
Ports,1GB Graphic cards; HP make USB keyboard and
Page 183 of 449
optical mouse, DVD / CD ROM; Software: MS office
2010 with 3 years limited Warranty
Make : HP/Lenovo/Dell/Equivalent
Print speed: Up to 22 pages per minute; Resolution: 1200
dpi; Processor / Memory: Powerful 133MHz processor HP
No. 1
Jet direct Fast Ethernet embedded print server; Two sided
printing; suitable for operating system windows 8 with 3
Years limited warranty.
Power & Signal cables:
13 Insulated Armoured U.G cable with necessary cable gland, Lot 1
Lot 1
Lot 1
Lot 1
Lot 1
Lot 1
Lot 1
Page 184 of 449
Transmission System (6 Pair) For to Connect
Individual SCADA to Centralized SCADA& For
CCTV Camera:
1310 nm, Zero Dispersion Wavelength - 1300~1324 nm, Lot 1
Cable Tray:
Perforated G.I Cable tray for all field instruments and
Pneumatic valve, VFD, Soft starter.
14
Supply, erection of cable tray shall be provided to valves
along with necessary tray M.S supports. (M.S Angle/flat is
not accepted)
50 mm for AI Lot 1
100 mm for AI Lot 1
200 mm for AI Lot 1
300 mm for Power Cable Lot 1
600 mm for DO & DI Lot 1
Supply, laying of 8 SWG Copper earth wire Lot 1
Air Conditioner:
Supply, Installation of 1.5 Tons Spilt Air Conditioner (5
Star rating) along with in-built inverter for power saving,
15 No. 1
Voltage Stabilizer, Mounting frames etc. . Make:
Voltas/LG/Equivalent
Earth work:
Electronic Earth pit including 50mm x 3.0 m long GI earth
electrode with 600 x 600 x 3.2mm copper plate, earth back
filling compound, Cover, double clamping earth, funnel
arrangement with fine mesh, GI Bolt & Nut, earth pit
marking with complete accessories including civil works.
16 Lot 1
Earth work and refilling for cable laying trench work
includes, sand cushioning, brick guarding, earth refilling,
hume pipe protection over the cable for road crashing
necessary area etc.
Location: a) VFD Panel b) Field Instruments c) PLC
Panels d) Cable Tray
17 Lot 1
Works
Electromechanical Works for Odour Control System
Page 185 of 449

Odour Control System for Receiving Tank/ Collection
Well and Storage and homogenization tanks:
Supply, erection, testing and commissioning of Odor
Control System for Receiving Tank/ Collection Well &
Storage and homogenization tanks suitable for tank
capacity of 602 cu.m/hr with accessories of Chemical
Scrubber (Made of PEHD) with accessories of 1 removable
demister, 1 spraying nozzle,
1 junction with PE air inlet flange, 1 fresh water inlet,
motor valve, 3 inspection openings with PE false cover, 1
glass fibre reinforced plastic support grating for tower
1 packing 1 pressure gauge as an in-situ display for exhaust Lot 1
gas, 1 pressure gauge as an in-situ display for washing
water 2 dosing nozzle for dosing of chemicals, 1 PVC
valve for the pressure line of the circulation pumps 1 PVC
pump tubing for the washer, 1 level sensor, 1 Motor valve
for Drain , 1 cell vessel for PH electrodes and redox
electrodes 2 Dosing valves for NaOH, NaOCl, 3 Pressure
transmitter for pressure loss measuring), Circulation pump
for the washing water, Storage tanks for chemicals, pipe
lines and dosing unit and Chemicals, pH control system
(NaOH), Fan, Interconnecting ductwork, H2S Monitor and
FRP ducts, Tank Covers.
Control Panel for Odour Control system: (Turnkey)
Supply of PMCC panel with suitable rating, 433 Volts, 50
mounting, dust & Vermin proof, Single front access,
Bottom cable entry, Electrolyte Aluminium busbar,
Horizontal & vertical bus chambers for 3 Phase with
neutral, 433 Volt AC, & Control busbar for single phase
110 Volt AC, Starter modules, Cable chambers along with
2 separate compartment for Instrumentation marshalling Lot 1
arrangement with following specification:
Make: ABB/ L&T/ Siemens/Schneider
Note: (a) Digital multifunction meter shall have
Modbus output & same shall be connected through
PLC system to monitor the energy reading at Central
monitoring SCADA panel located at CETP admin
building. (b) SFU shall be suitable for Harsh
Environmental. (Ref: L&T Product, HE Grade SFU)
Incomer Feeder:
3Pole, 63 Amps, MCCB for incomer with microprocessor
based Over current, Short Circuit, earth fault relay and
shunt release & under voltage relay, 3Nos.of Current
transformers, Digital Multifunction meter, R,Y,B, ON,
OFF, Trip indication lamps, 2 Nos of KVA Control
transformer with SFU, contactor, timer, indication lamp
etc.,
Page 186 of 449

DOL Feeder:
Direct On Line starters modules with Suitable rating TPN
fuse switch unit, 110 Volt AC operated 3 pole power
contactor with 2 NO+2 NC aux. contact- 1 No. & control
& feed back signal auxiliary contactors with 2 NO+2NC
aux. contacts - 4 Nos., Bi-metal Over Load Relay, Power
and control HRC fuses, 110 Volt, LED Panel indicating
lamps for starter ON/OFF/Trip, hour meter, 3 Nos. of
Current Transformer with Digital ammeter and Connect
well Make, CST type, Cable connector blocks etc., "ON"
Push button, Emergency type "OFF" push button, Terminal
protection cover
(i) Rating & quantity will be based on odor control system
requirement.
Star/Delta Feeder:
Star/Delta starters modules, Suitable ratings TPN fuse
switch unit, 110 Volt AC operated 3 pole power contactor
with 2 NO+2 NC aux. contact- 3 Nos. & Control
contactors with 2 NO+2NC aux. contacts - 4 Nos., Bi-
metal Over Load Relay, Power and control HRC fuses, 110
Volt, LED Panel indicating lamps for starter ON/OFF/Trip,
hour meter, "ON" Push button, Emergency type "OFF"
push button, Terminal protection cover, Cable connector
blocks etc.,
(i) Rating & quantity will be based on odor control system
requirement.
Rating & quantity will be based on odor control system
requirement.
3 Electrical power & control cables Lot 1
Supply of suitable Runs x 3.5 Core x Suitable sq.mm,
Aluminium Conductor, 1100 Volts, XLPE Insulated and
Cable from PCC to Dilution Panel
Page 187 of 449

Supply of 1100V, 3 Core x suitable size of Aluminium
hume pipe protection over the cable for road crossing. Cable
from MCC panel to individual equipment, Make:
Supply of 1100V, 5 Core x 1.5 sq.mm, , Copper Conductor,
PVC Insulated and Sheathed, Armoured U.G cable with
necessary cable gland, earth work, sand cushioning, brick
guarding & earth refilling over the cable, hume pipe
protection over the cable for road crossing. Cable from MCC
panel to push button station near individual equipment,
Local Push button Stations / Cable Junction Boxes
button station with following specifications for local
control all equipment.
(a ) Enclosure shall have MOC of Thermoplastic / FRP ,
IP 65 for dosing area / high polluted area.
gland.
1 No. of Non illuminated "ON" Green Colour Push button
4 Lot 1
(b) 1 No. of Emergency Stay put Red Colour Mushroom
actuator, Press to Lock & Turn to release "OFF" push
button with 2 NO + 2 NC contact without key type.
(c) Supply of accessories including Name plate, SS
fasteners, Neoprene endless moulded gasket, 2 Nos. of
Earthing, Screw type terminal blocks with Spare.
(d) Supply and fixing of cable junction box for all motors
Page 188 of 449

Lighting & Power Circuits with Light fittings / LDB / PDB
Board: : Supply & Wiring charges for lighting panel in
suitably sized G.I conduits, supported on walls, ceiling etc.,
at an interval of 1000 mm, installation of light control
switches and receptacles housed in stove enameled steel
boxes, earthing with 14 SWG copper conductor continuous
wire run outside along the conduit and clamped at every
1000 mm interval and termination of wires at lighting
panel, light control switches, receptacles, lighting fixtures,
etc., as required including supply of all the items for the
work detailed above such as 650 V grade. 2.5/4mm2,
copper conductor PVC insulated wires, 6A/16A switches,
GI conduits and accessories (such as junction boxes
5 Lot 1
fabricated from 16 SWG sheet and complete with gasket,
knockouts for conduit entire earthing terminal with bolt,
nut and washer, 14 SWG copper earthing with flexible
conduit etc., shall be included in the Contractor's scope. All
work necessary for fixing of boxes, conduits etc., together
with supply of necessary hardware, shall be carried out by
the Contractor. Wiring for outdoor areas other shall be
carried out by means of 1.1 KV grade armoured cables
with copper conductors
The minimum illumination level shall be as follows.
Control room/ Pump rooms -----250 lux
Outdoor equipment ---20 lux
Street lighting---30 lux
Light fittings / LDB / PDB Board:
(a) Supply of 433 volts, 3 Phase Neutral Lighting
Distribution Board (LDB) with 63 Amps, TPN, ELCB, bus
bar type, 12 way with 6 A Single pole MCBs for
outgoings.
(b) Supply of 433 volts, 3 Phase Neutral Power
Distribution Board with 125 Amps, TPN, ELCB, bus bar
type, adequate No. of way with 32 A Double pole/ Triple
pole MCBs for outgoings.
(c) Supply of 433 volts, metal clad power sockets with 6 /
16 A Single pole MCBs for outgoings
(d) Supply & fixing of industrial 2 X 18 /20/36 Watts,
LED tube type fitting with reflector shading for pumping
house - 1 Lot.
(e) Supply, erection of 120 / 150 / 250 Watts, LED street
lamp with RCC pole, industrial type, corrosion proof
fittings for inside & outside of pumping house - 1 Lot.
(f) Supply, erection of 48 /60/72 Watts, LED lamp,
industrial type, weather, corrosion proof fittings for
outside of pumping house - 1 Lot.
(g) Supply of ceiling fan & Exhaust fan Make: Crompton
Greaves / Almonord - 1 Lot.
Page 189 of 449

Fire Fighting Equipment & Safety Items:
The following equipment / items in required quantities
shall be provided in the electrical rooms such as PMCC &
MCC rooms (a) 6 kgs of CO 2 Fire extinguishers (b) Stand
made of steel for keeping item (c) First and box with
6 Lot 1
required medicines (d) Safety electrical Rubber insulated
Gloves (e) Electrical Insulation Mat with ISI 15652 (f)
Danger labels (g) Danger board (h) Safety charts, First aid
charts (i) Emergency fixture to provide lighting
continuously for about 2 hours
FRP Cable tray:
Supply, Erection of suitable Size, FRP cable tray, Coupler
plates, bends, reducers, tees, cross members with all
7 accessories shall be provided with necessary tray M.S Lot 1
supports, civil works Entire cable shall be laid on cable
tray only. Earthing shall be provided at regular interval and
connected with separate earth pit.
MS Channel & MS chequered plate: Supply of 5 mm
thick M.S chequered plates with handle for covering cable
8 trenches & Supply of suitable size M.S Lot 1
Beam/Pipe/Channel for supporting cable tray, chequered
plats, push button station etc., (M.S Angle is not accepted)
Supply erection and testing of Earth pit with earth
electrode & refilling chemical compound with necessary
9 all materials as per IS 3043 (For PMCC panels & Motor Lot 1
Body, earth pits should be interlinked with others except
PLC/SCADA & VFD earth pits.
Electrical Safety Certificate:
Liasioning works including Co-ordination with Electrical
Inspectorate, etc. for obtaining all the statutory approvals
10 Job 1
obtaining safety certificates from Electrical Inspectorate.
Test report / Revised test reports from Electrical
inspectorate Any defects / deviation / modification pointed
in the above said inspections.
Electromechanical Works for Sewage Dilution facilities
Page 190 of 449

Flow mixer along with Soft starter for Mixing Tank:
Supply of Flow mixer with 17 kW capacity along with
accessories for Mixing Tank suitable for having capacity of
civil RCC tank- design with size of 70m x 70m x 4.9 m :
24 MLD, Qty-2 Tanks. (Each 7 Nos.)
MOC:
plate- SS316.
1 coating or SS316. Set 14
(c) Propellers- Polyamide/ SS316.
Make: FLYGT/ABS or equivalent
phasing preventer and SS316 Foundation Bolt & Nut.
Soft Starter with by pass Contactor: Supply, erection and
commissioning of suitable rating with supply voltage 415
V, 3 Phase, Soft starter with weather proof panel with
powder coated finish consisting of remote key pad, 4- 20
mA output, serial communication RS-485, Panel consists
of suitable rating, 3 Pole, 415 Volt, MCCB, 5A, 230 Volt
local / Remote selection and manual /auto through PLC
mode operation selection, 6" Cooling fan with dust filters
for air inlet & outlet, Panel indication LED lamps for
R,Y,B power supply / ON / OFF / TRIP / MAINS ON,
ON/OFF push buttons, Glass envelop for monitoring soft
starter display panel, Control transformer 440/230 Volt,
100 VA., 6 A MCB for controlling primary & secondary of
control transformer, Plug-in relay, 5 pin type, 50 sq.mm
bus bar type cable terminal connector - 8 Nos. for power
cable terminations & 10 sq.mm cable terminal connector -
20 Nos. Panel should be made with min. 2.5 mm thick
sheet steel with powder coat finish & IP 55 protection to
be given with free standing type.
Page 191 of 449

Supply of Horizontal Split casing Centrifugal pump with
capacity of 1250 cu.m /hr @ 40 m head, all wetted parts
are in MOC of SS316 L along with necessary accessories
of base frame, Mechanical seal, Motor, FRP Motor Guard,
MS reinforced FRP Lined coupling Guard and SS316
2 Foundation Bolt & Nut. Nos. 12
MOC: SS316 L.
Pump type: Centrifugal - Horizontal Split casing
Application : Treated sewage Mixed effluent
Effluent Parameters: TDS - 2100 ppm, TSS - 5 to 10 ppm,
pH - 7.5, Solid Particle Size in 5 mm (Max.).
Pipes and fittings with necessary valves for providing

suction & delivery line arrangement for Final effluent
discharge transfer pump
3 Lot 1
MOC:
(a) Lateral lines and header lines- HDPE, PN10, PE100
(b) Valve wetted parts are in SS 316L.
Instrumentation works for Online Monitoring System

for CETP outlet (UF Permeate) and mixed diluted
water outlet
of remote key pad, 4- 20 Ma & Modbus output, serial
communication RS-485 and Input Chock is mandatory,
output chock incase of motor distance more than 150
meters from VFD, VFD should accept 4 - 20 mA from
PLC for auto operation, Panel consists of suitable rating, 3
Pole, 415 Volt, MCCB, 5A, 230 Volt local / Remote
selection and manual /auto through PLC mode operation
selection, 6" Cooling fan with dust filters for air inlet &
outlet, Panel indication LED lamps for R,Y,B power
1 Nos. 12
buttons, Potentio meter with fine tuning for controlling
VFD frequency, Glass envelop for monitoring VFD
display panel, Control transformer 440/230 Volt, 100 VA.,
6 A MCB for controlling primary & secondary of control
terminations & 10 sq.mm cable terminal connector - 20
Nos. VFD panel should be made with min. 2.5 mm thick
sheet steel with powder coat finish & IP 55 protection.
Panel Type - stand-alone.
Page 192 of 449

sheet.
Online UV Spectral Analyzer System for BOD, COD &
TSS:
Sensor
Impression Probe Type, Nano Coated lenses to avoid
build-up, coating therefore reducing maintenance, Optional
Air blast cleaning, Customizable path length for different
applications, Integrated temperature compensation, Plug
and Play, Easy to Operate, Parameter - BOD, COD, TSS,
Two beam measurement including interference
compensation for Turbidity, Color etc., Digital Interface -
Ethernet (TCP/IP), RS-232 or RS-485 (Modbus RTU,
ASCII, Trios, (SCPI)), Power supply- 12-24 VDC (± 10
%), Housing material - Stainless steel (1.4571/1.4404) or
titanium (3.7035), Installation- Immersed directly into the
Media or Bypass or on a Wall Mounting Plate with Flow
2 Lot 2
Cell.
Range: COD - 0 to 1500 ppm, BOD - 0 to 500 ppm, TSS -
0 to 1000 ppm
Controller
Control unit with TFT display 320x240 color with
capacitive touchscreen, Communication with DAS, Plug
and Play, 2 GB internal data memory (micro SD card),
Open Modbus RTU communication, Integrated data logger
with Service logbook, WiFi for communication via web
browser, USB/ TCP/IP Interface, Modbus RTU server, 1 x
relay switching contact (SPDT) (250 VAC, 2 A)/(30 VDC,
2 A), 5 x status LED, Protection Type - IP 65
Location: CETP outlet (UF Permeate/ RO Reject) and
mixed diluted water outlet
Quantity - Each 2 Nos.
pH analyzer :
3 compensation, non explosive proof type, Dual / Triple Nos. 2
analyzers, 2 Nos. Relay contact for future interlock, flow
Page 193 of 449

enclosure.
Conductivity analyzer :
large UV protected LCD display with local operator
4 Nos. 2
analyzers, Output- 4-20 mA/Modbus, flow through
assembly with 1/2" NPT process connection, Cable Length
10 m, Voltage : Universal /24V DC, Mounting- Separate
field mounting, IP 67/IP 66(Nema 4X)/IP 65 weather proof
thermo plastic enclosure. Range - As required
Sensor: suitable for corrosive/scale forming effluent,
Make - Forbes Marshall/E&H/Emerson/ABB/Equivalent
Total Chromium Analyzer:
Range: upto 20 ppm, Measuring principle - Colorimetric,
5 Nos. 2
dual beam with silicon detector, Cyclic measurement,
Output - 4-20 mA/Modbus/HART
DO analyzer :
Sensor: LDO (Light luminous LED Type), Measuring
Range : 0 to 10 ppm , self-cleaning system with air
flushing line or water jet shall be provided to clean the
sensor to avoid coating, sensor cable length 10 m, suitable
for corrosive/scale forming effluent.
6 Transmitter: Microprocessor based, Display: LED or LCD Nos. 2
with backlighting, Warranty - 3 years, Housing: Die cast
Aluminium, Separate enclosure: IP 67 or IP 65 with
weather proof thermo plastic enclosure, Supply Voltage:
Universal/ 24V DC, Make-HACH/ WTW / E+H/ Emerson/
Forbes Marshall/Yokogawa/Equivalent
Location : Mixing Tank
Level transmitter :
7 Nos. 2
0.25%.Supply Voltage : Universal/24V DC, Output - 4-20
protection
Location : Mixing Tank
Page 194 of 449

LED Scrolling Display board with 36 sqft,
Communication/Primary interface Rs232/ RS 485 with
multi drop option, LAN Ethernet Connection, Pen drive,
GPRS based remote connection, Protection Front IP68,
Rear IP65, Application readable Outdoor & direct sunlight
8 , Operating temperature 0-60 DEG C , Highly resistant to No. 1
Shock/Vibration, Enclosure GI with powder coating ,
Display Language (Hindi & English) , Display Color RGB
SMD, Input Power Single Phase, 240 volt A.C 50Hz ,
Software As per requirement, LED Features Heavy Duty
water proof LED, Surge Arrestor & Single Pole
Lot 1
Works
List of Lab instruments / Glass ware & Chemical
1 pH meter, Bench Type, Elico, 0-14 pH No. 1
2 pH meter, Pen Type, Hanna, 0-14 pH No. 1
3 Conductivity meter, Elico, 0-100ms/cm No. 1
4 Turbidity meter, Elico, 0-200 NTU No. 1
5 Muffle furnace, Scientek, 0-1000 °C No. 1
6 Microscope , Olympus, Accuracy: 10X, 40X, 100X (Lens) No. 1
7 Spectrophotometer, HACH, 340 to 900 nm No. 1
8 COD reflex heater, Sigma, 200 Deg C No. 1
9 Thermometer, 0°C to 200°C No. 1
10 BOD Incubator, Scientek, 0 to 30oC No. 1
Filtration assembly with suction pump, Technico, 760
11 Lot 1
mmHg
12 L.D.O Meter (HACH), 0 to 10 ppm No. 1
Analytical Balance, Electronic, Capacity:220gm;
13 Accuracy: 0.001gm with wind draft shield internal No. 1
calibration, Shimadzu
14 Aquarium Pump No. 1
15 Centrifuge, Remi, 15ml Tube No. 1
16 COD Digester, Hach, 0 to 250oC Lot 1
17 Hot Air oven, Scientek, 0 to 350oC No. 1
18 Hot Plate, Sigma 0 to 500oC No. 1
19 Hydrometer, 1.0 to 2.0 No. 1
20 Flocculator, Remi , 200 rpm No. 1
21 Water Distillation apparatus, Bhanu, 3 liter/hour No. 1
22 TDS Meter, Hanna, 0 to 10000 ppm No. 1
23 Refrigerator, LG,190 liters No. 1
24 Heating mantle, Sigma, 1000 ml Mantle Size No. 1
25 Fume hood, Kleanzone, Normal Size No. 1
26 Magnetic Stirrer with stirring bars, Remi No. 1
27 Hot water bath (SS), Sigma No. 1
Page 195 of 449

28 Stop watch, Racer No. 1
29 Desiccators Soda Glass No. 1
30 Flame photometer, Elico, Na, K, Ca, B Filters No. 1
31 Microbial Incubator, Fisher Scientific, FS1900220 No. 1
32 Auto Clave, Fisher Scientific, 181413 No. 1
33 Laminar Air Flow Chamber, Sun Lab No. 1
34 Fish Tank with Aerator assembly No. 1
35 Auto Sampler No. 1
36 Gas Chromatography and its related accessories No. 1
Glass wares Make: Borosil
1 Volumetric pipette, 5ml Nos. 10
5 Graduated pipette, 1ml Nos. 5
6 Graduated pipette, 2ml Nos. 5
7 Graduated pipette, 5 ml Nos. 5
8 Graduated pipette, 10 ml Nos. 5
9 Kjeldhal flask, 800 ml Nos. 3
10 Kjeldhal Distillation Setup, 800 ml Lot 1
11 Glass funnel, 25 mm Nos. 4
12 Volumetric flask, 10 ml Nos. 4
13 Volumetric flask,25 ml Nos. 4
17 Vacuum flask, 1000 ml No. 1
18 Condenser - (COD), 250 ml Nos. 12
19 BOD bottles, 300 ml Nos. 20
20 Conical flask, 250 ml, 500 ml Set 10
21 Beaker, 100 ml Nos. 10
25 Beaker, PP, 100 ml Nos. 10
29 Watch glass, Medium Nos. 5
30 Watch glass, Big Nos. 5
31 Silica Crucible, 50 ml Nos. 10
Page 196 of 449

32 Silica Crucible, 100 ml Nos. 10
33 Flat bottom flask, 250 ml Nos. 12
34 Funnel, 100 mm Nos. 5
35 Separating funnel, 500 ml Nos. 2
36 Separating funnel, 1000 ml Nos. 3
37 Measuring cylinder, 25 ml Nos. 2
43 Nessler tube, 50 ml Nos. 10
44 Nessler tube, 100 ml Nos. 10
45 Sintered crucible, 50 ml Nos. 5
46 BOD bottles,PP, 300 ml Nos. 50
47 Round clamp with stand Nos. 2
48 Tongs, Size: 6" Nos. 4
51 Spatula, Size: 8" Nos. 4
52 Spatula, Size: 10" Nos. 4
53 Bunsen burner No. 1
54 Wire brush Nos. 6
55 Wire gauge Nos. 3
56 Retard stand with clamp Set 1
57 Pipette stand with clamp Set 2
58 Burette, 50ml Nos. 5
59 Burette stand with Clamp Nos. 5
60 Standard flask,PP,100ml Nos. 3
63 Measuring cylinder,PP,25ml, 50 ml Set 5
64 Wash bottle,PP,1000ml Nos. 3
65 Butter sheet Nos. 10
66 Pipette sucker Nos. 5
67 Glass rod Nos. 10
68 Dropper with Rubber teats Nos. 10
69 Filter paper, Whatman, GFC Nos. 5
70 Filter paper, Whatman No:1 Nos. 5
Page 197 of 449

74 pH paper, 0 - 14 pH, Ranbaxy PKT 5
75 Tissue paper-Big rolls Nos. 20
76 Pestle & Mortar ID 250mm OD 285 mm No. 1
77 Micro Pipette 0.1ml to 5ml with middle Nos. 2
78 Rubber cork Nos. 10
79 Pipette sucker, 10 ml Nos. 10
80 Pipette sucker, 5 ml Nos. 10
81 Pipette sucker , 1 ml Nos. 10
82 Centrifuge tube conical bottom graduated -15 ml Nos. 5
83 Microscope Slide PKT 1
84 Microscope Cover Slide PKT 1
85 Reagent bottle, PP,Volume: 1000 ml Nos. 10
Laboratory Chemicals during Testing, Commissioning,
86 Stabilization and Performance of the plant including Lot 1
PGTR & RTR period
Integrating, Testing, Commissioning, Stabilization and
III
Performance of the plant till handing over to JTETA
Commissioning of plant with effluent and stabilization of
1 Lot 1
the plant (Duration: From 19th to 21st Month)
Rectification / Completion of Punch list issued by PMA
2 Lot 1
(Duration: 22nd month)
Preparation and submission of Engineering Package
Document, O&M Manual, O&M Manual, Standard
3 Operating Procedure (SOP), Equipment operation and repair Lot 1
manual (EORM) and On-Site Emergency Plan.(Duration:
22nd month)
Carry out Performance Guarantee & Test Run (PGTR) for
4 a duration of 72 hours with the effluent (Duration: 22nd Lot 1
month)
Carry out Reliability Test Run (RTR) for a duration of 1
5 Lot 1
month with the effluent. (Duration: 23rd month)
Training of operators of the O&M Crew for smooth
6 Lot 1
transition after RTR is completed. (Duration: 23rd month)
Handing over of the plant to the JTETA Agency after
7 successful completion of RTR and initiation of commercial Lot 1
operation of the plant. (Duration: 24th month)
Page 198 of 449

Improvements over the proposed technology (if any) for Tanneries / similar wastewater
(upto UF Stage) along with documentation based on the following parameters:
Proposed Improved Alternate

Sl. No. Description Units
Technology Technology
Chemical
1 Kgs/day
Consumption
Energy
2 kW-hr/MLD
Consumption
3 Footprint Area sq.m
Increased
4 Treatment %
Efficiency
Other
5 advantages
(If any)
The above data must be based on data generated from proven technology
Page 199 of 449

Milestone for implementation of 20 MLD (2 Module x 10 MLD) Capacity CETP (Primary,
Secondary, Tertiary Treatment system –up to Ultra Filtration Technology) – 24 Months
S. No Description Duration
1. Design, Engineering & Submission of data sheets, 1st Month
Drawings & Documents
2. Civil Construction From 2 nd to 10th months
3. Civil Tank Hydraulic Test From 11th to 12th month
4. Supply of Equipment From 2 nd to 8th months
5. Erection of Equipment From 7th to 16th month
6. PMA shall from time to time issue necessary instructions, 17th month
defects list, comments etc., also including a Punch list, if
any, after completion of erection activities. The
Successful Tenderer shall rectify / complete the points in
the punch list before commencement of testing of plant
and machineries. Rectification / Completion of first set of
Punch list points issued by PMA
7. Testing of Treatment Component with Fresh Water 18th month
8. Commissioning of plant with effluent and stabilization of
From 19th to 21st Month
the plant
9. Rectification / Completion of second set of Punch list issued
22 nd month
by PMA and O&M agencies
10. Preparation and submission of O&M Manual, Standard 22 nd month
Operating Procedure (SOP), Equipment operation and
repair manual (EORM) and On-Site Emergency Plan
should be submitted before commissioning activities
11. Carry out Performance Guarantee & Test Run (PGTR) for 22 nd month
a duration of 72 hours with the effluent
12. Carry out Reliability Test Run (RTR) for a duration of one 23 rd month
month with the effluent.
13. Training of operators of the O&M Agency before 23 rd month
commissioning activities and handing over after successful
completion of PGTR and RTR
14. Handing over of the plant to the O&M Agency after 24th month
successful completion of RTR and initiation of commercial
operation of the plant.
Warranty / Guarantee:
1. The materials and workmanship shall be guaranteed for a period of twelve (12) months
from the date of successful commissioning and complete handing over of the plant.
During this period, if any defects are noticed, the same shall be rectified/replaced at the
tenderer’s own cost.
Page 200 of 449

2. Process performance guarantee given in table below at the outlet of Tertiary Treatment
(UF System outlet) is to be ensured by the Tenderer:
Sl. Parameters UoM Treated Effluent Performance Guarantee

No. Standards for as per this Contract
discharge of Into
Inland Surface
water*
1. pH - 6 to 9 6.5 to 8.5
2. Fixed Dissolved mg/l 2100 mg/l <2100 mg/l
Solids (FDS)#
3. BOD3 27oC mg/l 30 <5
4. COD mg/l 250 <160
5. Chlorides (as Cl-) mg/l 1000 Not Applicable
6. Sulphates (as SO42-) 1000 Not Applicable
7. Total Suspended mg/l 100 BDL
Solids (TSS)
8. Ammoniacal mg/l 50 Not Applicable
Nitrogen
9. Sulphide (as S2-) mg/l 2.0 Not Applicable
10. Total Chromium mg/l 2.0 BDL

*Notification under Environment (Protection) Amendment Rules, 2015 for CETP
BDL – Below Detectable Level
# this parameter will be achieved by dilution with available treated sewage with minimum
quantity of 173 MLD and TDS ≤600 mg/l, subject to CETP influent TDS value of ≤13000
mg/l.
Page 201 of 449

Component-B
Technical specifications for Raw
Effluent Collection & Conveyance
(C&C) System To Handle 20 MLD
Effluent
Page 202 of 449

Design Flow of the proposed C&C system
The proposed C&C system is designed for a capacity of 20 MLD which includes tannery
wastewater along with inseparable sewage from the tannery units with peak factor of 3
considering units are operating on 8 hr basis.
Proposed Collection & conveyance system:
The existing open drain effluent collection & conveyance system needs to be replaced with
underground sewer pipes to improve the collection and avoid bye-passing of the inflow coming
to CETP. The following components are envisaged as part of C&C system:
(i) Raw Effluent Collection system including gravity and pressure mains of HDPE &
GRP pipe of 24.4 Km
Design & Sizing of proposed Collection & Conveyance System for the
proposed CETP project
This section provides information, instructions and criteria for design of collection and
conveyance system consist of raw effluent from member dyeing units to CETP. The broad
components of each of the units are listed below for reference.
A. Collection and Conveyance System (C&C)

 Raw effluent collection pipes
 Man holes
 Pumping stations
 Flow metering and conductivity metering system
Design Objectives
The design of collection and conveyance system are done with an objective that
 Designed collection and conveyance system shall have a system of pipes, complete with
all appurtenant facilities sufficient in size, slope and capacity to collect and convey the
required wastewater flow from individual units to the treatment facilities and discharge
points.
 Collection and conveyance system shall also be practicable, economically feasible and
must be located to minimize the cost of installation, operation and maintenance.
Page 203 of 449

Design Flow
The wastewater from the tannery processing along with inseparable sewage flow from
individual units majorly contribute to the total effluent flow in the proposed collection system.
The flow in sewers varies depending upon the quantity of production. However; the estimated
peak flows are adopted for the purpose of hydraulic design. The present water source to
tanneries is by ground water. For the purposes of hydraulic design an estimated peak flow is
adopted. The peak factor or the ratio of maximum to average flow depends on the processes
followed in the tannery units, water usage pattern, working hours etc. The discharge of effluents
especially at peak flows, needs to be transmitted to the CETP without any overflow from the
limited storage capacity inside the premises. Therefore, it is required to install larger diameter
pipe at some stretches to accommodate the increased flow during peak hours.
The design of collection and conveyance system is done considering that the individual tannery
units discharge their effluents in shifts of 8 hours or 12 hours of operation as given in the below
Flow Details considered for design of C&C System
Hours of operation Peak Flow Design Flow Remarks

considered based Factor Units considered for Raw
on tannery units effluent line system
discharge hours (Designed for 3 peak
factor i.e for 8 hr
operation)
m3/d 20000
24 1 m3/hr 833 Minimum Flow
12 2 m3/hr 1667
8 3 m3/hr 2500 Peak Flow
3.2.1 Design Criteria adopted

Minimum and maximum Velocity adopted for the proposed Sewer Network Pipelines
In the design of C&C system, flow should have adequate scouring velocities in the collection
pipes so as to cause automatic self-cleansing effect. Due to Suspended Solids and dissolved
lime present in the Tannery effluent, choking and scaling of pipelines is a major issue which
needs to be avoided by proper design. Presence of dissolved Sulphides and Sulphates add to
corrosion, scaling and generation of Poisonous H2S gas, therefore maintaining self-cleansing
velocity at minimum and maximum flowrates is vital. The generation of such a minimum self-
cleansing velocity in the sewer is important, because the unremoved depositions will obstruct
free flow, causing further deposition and thereby leading to complete blocking of the pipeline.
As the smooth interior surface of a sewer pipe gets scoured due to continuous abrasion caused
Page 204 of 449

by the suspended solids present in wastewater, it is therefore necessary to limit the maximum
& minimum velocity in the pipe.
The guide line adopted against the norms given by CPHEEO sewerage manual guide lines for
the collection system design velocity is given in the below table.
Design criteria of C&C System
S.No Criteria Value recommended Value followed considering

as per CPHEEO for the nature of tannery
Sewage effluent
1 Minimum velocity at initial 0. 6 m/s 0.8 m/s

peak flow
2 Maximum velocity 3.0 m/s 2.0 m/s for gravity line and
1.2 m/s for pumping line
3 Maximum depth of flow (D/d) 80% 50 %

in %
Source: Criteria adopted from Manual on Sewerage and sewage treatment system Nov – 2013
(Part A – Engineering, Chapter 3 Design & Construction of sewers)
As the tannery effluent characterises differ from sewage, considering the nature of the effluent
it is proposed to adopt minimum velocity as 0.8 m/s to avoid solid / silting. In the proposed
C&C system, the gravity pipes are designed for higher velocities wherever possible.
However, there are some of the stretches in the network with lesser flow, as they flow only
partly full even at the peak design flow, because of necessity of adopting the prescribed
minimum size of pipe line to the individual units (i.e 90 mm). It is difficult to attain minimum
self – cleansing velocity of 0.8 m/s. At such locations, it is recommended to adopt less than 0.8
m/s to avoid high depth of excavation and also this minimizes the number of pumping stations.
This is done on the assumption that although silting might occur at minimum flow, the silt
would be flushed out during the peak flows In such situations flushing arrangements to be
provided by the member units and it would be flushed out during peak flows by pumping the
effluent from the individual tannery units.
Design period
As per CPHEEO guidelines for sewerage system, the design period considered for various
components are given in the table below
Design period of C&C System
Components Design Period

Civil Structures for pump house 30 years
Electrical motors and pumps 15 years with space to
expand
Raw effluent and treated water pumping mains. 30 years
Page 205 of 449

Components Design Period
Pipe connection to several treatment units and other small 30 years
appurtenances
Treated water storage reservoirs and tanks (Overhead or 15 years
ground level)
Conveyance system - Pipe line. 30 years.
3.8.4 Pipe material selection

Pipelines constitute a major part of the assets in the industrial effluent management projects.
The pipe materials shall be selected based on durability, life and overall cost including
installation and maintenance costs necessary to ensure the required function and performance
of the pipeline throughout its designed period.
The factors considered in selection of pipe material are:
i) Internal pressures:
The strength of the pipe is measured by its ability to resist internal pressures and
external loads.
ii) Co-efficient of roughness:
The initial carrying capacity of the pipe and its reduction over a period with use,
is defined, for example, by the Hazen – Williams coefficient ‘C’.
Values of ‘C’ vary for different conduit materials and their relative deterioration
in service. They vary with size and shape to some extent.
iii) Hydraulics and operating conditions:
Flow velocities between 0.8 m/sec to 2.5 m/sec and head loss between 2 to 7
m/km is considered optimal Minimum and Maximum permissible diameter,
based on production constraints.
Page 206 of 449

iv) Internal and external corrosion
The life and durability of pipe as determined by the resistance of cast iron and
steel pipe to corrosion; of concrete and A.C. pipe to erosion and disintegration;
and plastic pipe to cracking and disintegration, problems influenced by the soil
conditions.
v) Laying and jointing of pipes etc.
The ease or difficulty of transportation, handling, laying and jointing under

different conditions of topography, geology and other prevailing local
conditions.
vi) The safety, economy and availability of manufactured sizes of pipes & specials
in the market.
vii) Availability of skilled personnel in construction and commissioning.
3.8.5 Selection of pipe line materials

Based on the above-mentioned parameters, the HDPE PN10 Grade shall be considered for pipe
sizes upto 350 mm & GRP PN 6 shall be considered for pipe sizes above 350 mm.
Pipe selection has been done considering, HPDE / GRP pipes are corrosive resistant to carry
the raw effluent from tannery units. Material durability, and overall cost including faster speed
of installation, joint tightness, maintenance costs and performance of the pipeline throughout
its designed period make HDPE / GRP best suited.
Selected material for Pipeline for Proposed C&C system
S.no Purpose Selected material for Proposed Pipe line
1 Raw Effluent Collection  HDPE PN 10 & GRP PN 6
The proposed effluent collection system and treated water distribution system is categorised as
4 zones and is described in the following paragraphs.
Raw Effluent Collection system Zones:
Collection Zone 1
Zone 1 covers majority of the tannery units which are located around the 150 feet road, part of
old Jajmau road and DTS road. The total number of industries covered within the Zone 1
boundary is 82 tannery units. The contours of this zone vary from 115 m to 123 m. The total
length of gravity pipe in this zone is 5.9 km. Effluent collected from Zone 1 Chabilapurwa
reaches to PS1 and then pumped to PS-3 in Wazidpur.
Collection Zone 2
Zone 2 covers majorly the units around Sheetlabazar market road and part of old Jajmau road.
The total number of industries covered within the Zone 2 boundary is 119 units. The contours
of this zone vary from 113m to 121 m. The total length of pipe in this zone is 4.45 km. Effluent
Page 207 of 449
collected from Zone 2 located in Sheetla bazar market road reachesPS2 and then pumped to
PS-3 in Wazidpur.
Page 208 of 449

Schematic diagram of Raw Effluent collection system
Collection Zone 1 Collection Zone 2 Collection Zone 4

Total units : 82 Nos Total units : 119 Nos Total units : 70 Nos
Flow : 6550 cum/d Flow : 4396 cum/d Flow : 3767 cum/d
Gravity line Gravity line Gravity line
PS-1 PS-2 PS-4
Pumping line
Pumping line Pumping line
Collection Zone 3
Total units : 109 Nos Main Pumping line

PS-3
Flow : 5291 cum/d CETP
Gravity line
Collection Zone 3
Zone 3 covers majorly the units around Wazidpur and Sanjay nagar area. The total number of
industries covered within the zone 3 boundary is 109 units. The contours of this zone vary from
113m to 121 m. The total length of pipe in this zone is 5.30 km. Effluent collected from Zone
3 located in Wazidpur will be pumped from PS3 through pumping main to the inlet well in
CETP.
Collection Zone 4
Zone 4 covers the industries located around Buriaghat, near to Ganga river bank. The total
number of industries covered within the zone 4 boundary is 70 units. The contours of this zone
vary from 119m to 128 m. The total length of pipe in this zone is 5.68 km. Effluent collected
from Zone 4 will be collected through PS 4 and pumped to PS 3. From here the total combined
flow is pumped to Inlet Chamber of CETP.
The zone wise flow & pipe line details for gravity line and pumping line are presented in table
given below
Page 209 of 449

Summary of Proposed raw effluent pipeline for various sizes and its quantities
Raw Effluent pipe line Details

Zone type Size Length of pipe line in Gravity zone Length Total
Material in Zone -1 Zone -2 Zone -3 Zone -4 of length of
mm Pumping pipeline
line in m in m
HDPE PN 10 90 740 651 564 451 - 2405
110 389 234 85 259 - 968
160 1155 574 363 553 - 2644
200 838 329 915 71 - 2154
225 164 179 59 171 - 574
250 30 261 119 233 - 642
280 208 251 126 95 - 681
315 219 725 306 431 - 1681
355 352 340 239 94 - 1026
GRP PN 6 400 453 574 678 881 2000 4586
450 504 86 142 207 0 940
500 271 246 125 104 1265 2011
630 412 0 0 0 0 412
710 0 0 0 0 1950 1950
900 0 0 0 0 1550 1550
Grand Total (A+B) 5950 4450 3721 3550 6765 24437
length in m
Manholes
The manhole is a chamber constructed at suitable intervals along the sewer lines, for providing
access for inspection, cleaning and maintenance of sewer. The manholes are proposed in all
the gravity lines and these are provided at every bend, junction, change of gradient or change
of diameter of the sewer. Manhole Material of Construction – Selection: The general material
of construction for manhole construction is Brickwork, RCC manholes and HDPE manholes.
Various MOC for Manhole selection
S.no Description Brickwork & RCC manhole HDPE manhole
1 Monolithic vs These manholes are constructed HDPE manholes are
Segmented in segments for field assembly monolithic in nature mostly
construction and requires watertight seal and may be fabricated from
materials in the field and at the a variety of shapes and
base and between each section. sections.
2 Material handling Heavier sections and material Lighter (say 1/5th to 1/10 th)
handling requires manual in weight compared with
labour RCC & brick work
3 Installation Time Higher as there would be Speed up the construction as
Masonry & Construction joints. the sections are monolithic
mostly
4 Corrosion resistance Material & joints are prone to Corrosion resistant &
Chemical environment longer service and life.
Page 210 of 449

Considering the above facts in account and also considering the nature of effluent it is proposed
to have HDPE manholes. HDPE Man holes are available ready made in market and this can
speed up the construction as compared to brickwork and RCC manholes. As HDPE is corrosive
resistant it is most suitable for conveying of tannery raw effluent. Specifications can be referred
for HDPE manholes with EN 13598-2: 2009 and ISO (ISO 9001: 2008). Maximum of 5 inlets
can be connected in a chamber. It is proposed to have watertight fitting covers with concrete.
The size of manhole varies from 1.2m to 1.8m. It is proposed to lay the sewer line between the
two manholes straight with gradient of 1in 50 from individual tannery unit to the inlet manhole
and follow slopes of in range of 1 in 300 to 1 in 500 for branch lines & main lines. For straight
sewer line manholes are provided at regular interval depending upon the diameter of the sewer.
The spacing of manhole is recommended in IS 1742-1960. The manholes are proposed to be
spaced at 30 m intervals as given in the nodal drawing. No manholes are required for recovered
water line.
Summary of proposed Manholes quantity zone wise
Zone No. of. Depth of Manhole
Manholes 0-1.5 m 1.5 m -3 m 3 m-4.5 m Above 4.5 m
Zone -1 193 50 88 33 22
Zone -2 143 35 84 11 13
Zone -3 118 59 45 14 -
Zone -4 104 40 56 8 -
Total 558 Nos 184 Nos 273 Nos 66 Nos 35 Nos
3.8.5 Pumping Stations

Pumping stations for Raw Effluent collection and conveyance:
Considering the topography and locations of units, pumping stations are planned for lifting the
raw effluent so as to discharge into another gravity pipe or to the CETP. All the pumping
Stations are proposed in the existing pumping station locations. The existing pump house
buildings can be used for housing electrical panels. The existing pump house should be
revamped including replacement of damaged doors and windows, including plastering of
damaged walls, floors, if any and painting of the entire pump house. Suction well with
screening facility (manual cleaning) would be provided for each pump house. It is
recommended to install non-clogging submersible pump sets for the pumping stations. Non
clog impeller and Mechanical seal arrangement. With Application for effluent conveyance &
range of Temperature: 35 to 40 Deg. Celsius.
It is proposed that the suction wells should be cleaned of solids regularly to ensure proper and
reliable operation of the submersible pumps. Excessive accumulation of solids in the wet well
would impede the functioning of the submersible pumps.
Page 211 of 449

The existing pump houses
Details of Proposed pumping station and Raw effluent pumps
Pumping station PS 1 PS 2 PS 3 PS 4
Effluent Volume
6550 4396 20003 3767
handling/d
No. of pumps &
3W+1S 2W+1S 5W+2S 2W+1S
capacity
300 m3 / hr @ 300 m3 / hr @ 550 m3 / hr @ 260 m3 / hr @
Submersible Pump
27 m head 27 m head 20 m head 20 m head
Retention Time
15 min 15 min 15 min 15 min
considered
6.0 x 4.6 x 2.5 5.0 x 3.6 x 2.5 9.0 x 6.0 x 6.0 5.0 x 3.0 x 2.5
Well (tank) Size (m)
m +2.5m FB m +2.5m FB m +1.1m FB m + 2.5m FB
Actual tank volume
138.0 90.0 302.4 75.0
(cu.m)
Provision of pumps in Pumping Station- JAJMAU CETP

The Pumps have been proposed considering the following
1. Safety factor of 3 (300 % flow) has been already considered for raw effluent collection and
conveyance system.
2. Number of standby pumps has been provided based on ZLD experience, no single drop of
water let-out from pumping station.
3. Standby pumps cannot be provided for lack of or poor maintenance.
Page 212 of 449

Provision of pumps in Pumping Station
Selection of pumps in Pumping Station- Jajmau CETP project
No. of pumps operated with % of
No. of Standby pumps Volumetric % of
safety factor of 3 (300% standby
Volumetric provided Flow of all Standby
Flow) i.e 8 hrs basis pump
Inflow flow per pumps pump
Sl. Pumping capacity
per day hour on 24 Total Total (Both w.r.t no.
No. Station based on
(cu.m/d) hr basis Flow No. of Flow per Flow No. of Flow per Working of
24 hrs
(cu.m/hr) (cu.m/h) pumps hour (cu.m/h) pumps hour +Standby) working
volumetric
(cu.m/hr) (cu.m/hr) (cu.m/hr.) pumps
flow
1 PS 1 6550 273 300 3 900 300 1 300 1200 33% 340%
2 PS 2 4396 183 300 2 600 300 1 300 900 50% 391%
3 PS 3 20003 833 550 5 2750 550 2 1100 3850 40% 362%
4 PS 4 3767 157 260 2 520 260 1 260 780 50% 397%
Page 213 of 449

3.8.5 Sewer Cleaning Facilities for Raw Effluent collection pipes
For efficient maintenance and periodical de-chocking and de-silting of underground Raw
Effluent pipeline between member Tannery units & CETP, a combination of sewer suction and
jetting machine is required. Two mobile sewer cleaning machines are required, one mini
machine to travel easily in the narrow roads/streets & one larger size for wide street/Roads in
the Jajmau Area. The system consists of (i) 1000 Litres capacity mini jetting machine mounted
in a 4-wheeler load auto rickshaw (like TATA ACE) for the pipeline located in the narrow
roads/streets (ii) 10000 litres capacity combination of jetting cum High pressure vacuum pump
with clean water / combination of clean water and sludge tanks mounted on a specially designed
vehicle having 11.0 Ton GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) chassis Truck for the pipeline located
in the wide street/Roads.
Mini jetting machine for narrow street/road areas
Combination of Jetting & sucking machine for the wide street/Roads
Page 214 of 449

3.8.6 Site specific Criteria to be considered in execution of C&C pipeline works
In pipe line construction work, two operations are of special importance, namely, excavation
of trenches, and laying of pipes in trenches and tunnels. Most of the trench work involves open
cut excavation; and in urban areas, it includes:
1. Removing pavement wherever required based on site conditions

2. Removal of the material from the ground, and its separation, its classification where
necessary, and its final disposal
3. Sheeting and bracing the sides of the pipe trench
4. Removal of water (if any) from the trench, by dewatering pumps
5. Protection of other structures, both underground and on the surface, whose foundations
may be affected
6. Backfilling and Replacement of the pavement after laying of pipes
7. On all excavation works, safety precautions for the protection of life and property are
essential; and measures to avoid inconveniences to the public are desirable. Such
measures and precautions include
8. Erection and maintenance of signs (to forewarn public), barricades, bridges and detours;
placing and maintenance of lights both for illumination and also as danger signals;
provision of watchmen to exclude unauthorized persons, particularly children, from
trespassing on the work; and such other precautions as local conditions may dictate.
9. Proper placement (i.e., bedding) has to be there for each pipe section that is laid.
10. There should be proper joining of pipe sections & Pipes should be covered properly
with clean fill material after laying.
11. During the construction period, the construction of effluent collection system project
components may be planned in a phased manner as follows,
Phase I – Laying of Pumping main and construction of pump houses
Phase II – Laying of pipe lines of effluent collection zones
Trenchless System to be provided for underground sewer network wherever road

crossing in the National Highways
Technology Brief:
 Trenchless technology is the science of installing, repairing and renewing underground

Pipes, ducts and cables using techniques which minimize or eliminate the need for
excavation.
 It can minimize environmental damage, Social costs and produce another to open trench
method of installation, renewal and repair it includes in, development of all kinds of
underground napping techniques, tunneling devices and specialized materials and
equipment’s.
Page 215 of 449

 Trenchless technology is basically a making of a tunnel below the surface and installing
service lines like water or gas pipes, electric or telecommunication cables etc. without
any disturbance to the public and traffic.
 It also makes it possible to install the utilities under rivers, canals, roads, railways and
other obstacles with no disruption of flow of water and traffic with minimize or no
damage to the environment.
 Demand for installation of new underground utility systems in crowded areas with
existing utility lines has improve the necessity for innovative and economic systems to
go underneath and alongside in-place facilities.
 Environmental concerns, social (indirect) costs, new and strict safety regulations,
difficult underground conditions (containing natural or artificial obstructions, high
water table, etc.) and new evolution in equipment have increased demand for trenchless
technology.
 Pipeline specification: MS with anti-corrosive protective coating or RCC – NP4 pipe
shall be provided.
Methodology:
As a first step, it is recommended to conduct ground penetrating radar survey in the plan
corridor where pipe is proposed to be laid for the entire stretch of say 5-10 m width to detect
burried utilities like pipes, cables, etc., in such corridor. Marking of the detected utilities on the
map of corridor with information of locations and depths to the top of various utilities detected.
Work to be conducted using 500 MHz antennas for best possible resolution and penetration.
Where ever required Dewatering of pits or ground by dewatering pumps can also be done based
on the site conditions.
The final step is the Drilling of the Horizontal borehole for water main pipeline under the Road
tracks in all strata with required length including fixing of pipe with (as specified by Railway,
Road authority) casing pipe to sailable size and Thickness, including installation of pipe with
required joint perfectly watertight. Etc. complete.
The work specified in this Section documents the approved construction methods, procedures,
and materials for Directional Boring, also commonly called Horizontal Directional Drilling
(HDD).
Description:
HDD is a trenchless method for installing a product that serves as a direct conduit for liquids
or gases, or as a duct for pipe, cable, or wire line products. It is a multi-stage process consisting
of drilling a pilot bore along a predetermined path and then pulling the desired product back
through the drilled space. The vertical profile of the bore alignment is typically in the shape of
an inverted arc. When necessary, enlargement of the pilot bore hole to accommodate a product
larger than the pilot bore cross section is accomplished by back reaming. This is done at the
same time the product is being pulled back through the pilot bore space. Steering the bore is
accomplished by proper orientation of the drill bit head as it is being pushed along an alignment
by an above ground hydraulic jack. Orientation and tracking of the drill bit is determined by an
above ground radio detection device which picks up a signal generated from a radio transmitter
Page 216 of 449

contained within the drilling bit. This radio signal is translated into depth and alignment. In
order to minimize friction and provide a soil stabilizing agent, a drilling fluid is introduced into
the annular space created during the boring operation. The rotation of the bit in the soil wetted
by the drilling fluid creates slurry. This slurry acts to stabilize the surrounding soil and prevents
collapse of the bore hole and loss of lubrication. Drilling fluids must be designed for the soil
and ground water conditions. In order to confine any free flowing slurry at the ground surface
during pull back or drilling, sump areas are created to contain any escaping slurry that might
damage or be hazardous in surrounding areas. All residual slurry shall be removed from the
surface and the site restored to preconstruction conditions.
Materials:
Materials must meet or exceed the following standards or equivalent Indian standards:
Material Standards for HDD Installation

Material Type Non-Pressure Pressure
Polyethylene (PE) ASTM D 2447 ASTM 2513 ASTM D 2447
High Density ASTM D 2447ASTM D ASTM D 2447ASTM D 3350ASTM
Polyethylene 3350ASTM F714 F714ASTM 2513
Polyvinyl-Chloride ASTM F 789 N/A
(PVC)
Steel ASTM A139 Grade B(1) API AWWA C200API 2B(2)
2B(2)
The Carrier pipe shall be MS with anti-corrosive protetive coating or RCC – NP4 pipe shall
be provided.
Construction Site Requirements:
(a) Excavation for entry, recovery pits, slurry sump pits, or any other excavation shall be carried
out by contractor as specified by the engineer in charge.
(b) After completing installation of the product the work site shall be restored. The work site
shall be cleaned of all excess slurry left on the ground. Removal and final disposition of excess
slurry or spoils as the product is introduced, shall be the responsibility of the boring contractor.
(c) Excavated areas shall be restored in accordance with the Standard Specifications for Road
and Bridge Construction and Roadway and Traffic Design Standards. The cost of restoring
damaged pavement, curb, sidewalk, driveways, lawns, storm drains, landscape, and other
facilities is borne by the Contractor / Permittee.
Testing:
When there is any indication a pipe has sustained damage and may leak, the work is to be
stopped and the damage investigated. The Engineer may require a pressure test. The testing
may consist of one of the following methods but shall always meet or exceed Department
testing requirements:
Page 217 of 449

(a) Manufacturer's pressure testing recommendations for the type of pipe being installed are
followed. The Department's Engineer shall be notified and at his option be present during the
test for review of the test results for compliance. The pressure test shall be performed within
24 hours. A copy of the test results shall be furnished to the Department's Engineer. If the pipe
is not in compliance with specifications, the Engineer may require it to be filled with flowable
fill.
(b) Product carrier pipes installed without a casing must meet pressure requirements set by the
Owner. If the Owner does not require pressure testing, the Engineer may require at least one
test. A copy of the test results shall be furnished to the Department's Engineer. If the pipe is
not in compliance with specifications the Engineer may require it to be filled with flowable fill.
(c) The Department requires that conduit or pipe must meet or exceed soil tight joint
requirements when leakage would not cause failure or adversely affect the integrity of the
roadway pavement or shoulders. Where leakage could adversely affect pavement or shoulder
integrity, a water tight joint is required.
Method of Measurement.
Fees paid to the Contractor / Permittee shall be based on the actual length of the installation,
measured in place along the surface of the ground, complete and accepted. No additions or
deductions will be made for sweeps in either the vertical or horizontal direction to complete
the installation.
Road crossing, cutting & restoration for pipe laying works
 During execution of works there are chances of underground utilities like electrical
lines, water supply lines, sewer lines and communication lines getting damaged
during earth work either by mechanical or manual means.
 Road (National Highways) crossing work can be done only through the trenchless
(Horizontal push bore) based on site conditions & traffic movement.
 It is proposed to lay the pipe lines in the side of existing drains to avoid excess road
cutting and road crossing.
The permission for the same has to be obtained from local bodies and highway
departments. The topographical details of the existing road network give us the idea about
the width of roads in Jajmau cluster. The details are presented in Table below.
Details of Road width and topographical survey details in Jajmau

S.No Description Range of Road levels in m as
Road width per Topographical
in m survey
1 Collection Zone 1 (Units along around 4m to 10m 113 to 119
150 feet road)
2 Collection Zone 2 (Old Jajmau Road) 2.5 m to 4.5m 113 to 119
Page 218 of 449

3 Collection Zone 3 (Wajidpur area ) 2.5m to 5.5m 112 to 118
4 Collection Zone 4 3m to 6m 113 to 117
Page 219 of 449

Proposed Odour Control System in the Pumping Stations
Sources of odour in Tannery
The odour associated with the Tannery wastewater is mainly due to the degradation or
putrefaction of organic solids generated during the processing of hides at various stages of
Tanning process. During decomposition process, the solids are converted in to an obnoxious
sulphide / other sulphur compounds/Ammonia etc. This gaseous compounds creating air
pollution as well as health issues in the surrounding environment. Thus, the odour control
system is an integral part of the Tannery wastewater management.
Odour control system proposed at Collection well in all four pumping stations
As the first stage of wastewater treatment is starts with the receiving of effluent at the collection
well where wastewater is being collected from various underground piping networks, one
module of bio filter with ACF would be installed. In order to control the escaping of odour
from the sump to the atmosphere, the sump would be covered with exhaust to bio scrubber.
Specification Sheet of Odour Control System for Collection Well in the pumping stations
1 Application To eliminate the odour from the Tannery wastewater
2 Equipment Name Odour Control System
3 Duty Continuous
4 Working Principle 1. It would be implemented in two stages to eliminate the
odour from the Tannery wastewater. The odour removal
system would comprises of Bio trickling filter followed by
Activated carbon filter. In addition, waste gas feeding
system and water spray unit are also provided along with
the bio trickling filter to feed the waste gas and wetting of
the media respectively.
2. In addition to the bio filter, an additional chemical dosing
system comprising of Sodium Hydroxide and Hydrogen
Peroxide is also proposed.
Dosing System, Inter connecting ducts, Radial Fan, Pumps,
Pipes and Fittings and Valves, Control Panel, H2S Monitor
6 Specification for Bio Type- Bio trickling filter- 11750, Total Airflow- 11750
trickling filter m3/hr, Vessel material- HDPE or GRP, Vessel diameter-
3800 mm, Vessel Height- 7000 mm, Total weight empty-
4000 kg, Filter area- 11,3 m2, Filter bed height- 3 m,
Retention time- 10 s, Filter media- Foamed plastic
Carbon filter reinforcements, Type- AKFE 11000, Total Airflow (m3/h)-
23.500, Nominal carbon volume (m3)- 22, Weight of
carbon (kg)- 11000 Superficial contact time (s)- 3,3, Length
(mm)- app. 11100, Height (mm)- app. 2100, Width (mm)-
app. 2000, Vessel construction- PEHD, Filtering surface
Page 220 of 449
Specification Sheet of Odour Control System for Collection Well in the pumping stations
(m2)- app. 22,00
Filter depth (m)- 1, Total weight empty (kg)- app. 1400
Carbon Moisture, as packed: < 5 % Apparent density (kg/m3): 500
+/- 30 Pellet diameter (mm): 4, Hardness no.: > 97
9 Specification for Radial Type: Radial Fan, Capacity (m3/h): 23.500, Static pressure
Fan (Pa): 3500, Material housing: Stainless Steel 316, Material
impeller: Stainless Steel 316, Induction diameter (mm):900,
Fan speed (rpm): app. 1450 Motor speed 50 Hz (rpm): app.
1450 Motor power rating (kW): app. 45, Power supply: 400
V 50 Hz
10 Control Panel For the operation of the above described odour control
system. Made of Stainless Steel, mounted in an air-
conditioned room, completely wired and tested according
to VDE. With the following components:
1 x Siemens SPS S7 1200, x Power supply and control
power supply 1 x Fault report processing x Frequency
converter Siemens type for the fan 4 x AC Semiconductor
Motor Control for the circulation pumps 4 x 230 V
motorized valve, 4 x PH-Monitor control 10 x Pressure
control, 1 x Horn and all-round illumination, 1 x Non-
potential contacts for operating and fault reporting, Touch
panel operation.
11 H2S Monitor Type: Polytron 3000, Manufacturer: Draeger, monitoring
for: H2S, measuring range: 0.100 ppm (for inlet), 0.20 ppm
(for outlet) Output Signal: 4.20 mA, installed at the inlet
and outlet of the odour control system to measure the inlet
and outlet H2S concentration. Connected to the local
control panel for power supply and signal processing.
Tankers for transportation of Spent Chrome from member Tannery units to Common
Chrome Recovery Unit (CCRU)
The Contractor to collect Spent Chrome liquor from each Tannery unit and transport them
through tankers to CCRU & the recovered chrome shall be sent through drums or sold, for
which 12 Nos. Tankers with GPS enable tracking system shall be provided.
Specification for Vehicle Mounted Suction Machine, 16 Ton GVW Chassis

Sr. Category Component/sub- Parameter Rating/Value/Size
No assemblies
Type Rotary Sliding vane
Vacuum Pump Cooling Air cooled
Drive Chassis side PTO
Tank rear door opening Hydraulic
Page 221 of 449
No assemblies
Tank Tank tipping /Angle Hydraulic/30 degrees.
MOC IS:2062 Gr. B
Suction Hose Dia./Length As Required.
1 Features Sludge Suction & Drain Size As Required.
valve Type Knife gate
Type Gear type
Hyd. Pump Drive Chassis side PTO
Tank Volume 8000 ltr.
2 capacity Vacuum Pump Flow/Vacuum As Required.
Hyd. Pump Displacement/rpm 16.77 cc/rev. /3500 rpm
Water level indicator Type/Qty. Tube type/02 nos.
3 Safety Pressure relief valve Size/Qty. 2"/1 nos.
Vacuum relief valve Size/Qty. 1.5"/1 nos.
GVW 16 TON
Emission Norms As per Local RTO
Chassis Engine output Min. 130 HP
Driver's Cabin Type Single (Day) Cabin
Make/model/wb/hp/SideAshok leyland/1616
PTO Provision iL/4330 mm
/160hp/Mandatory.
Make/model/wb/hp/SideBharat Benz/1617 (4 x
PTO Provision 2) / 5100 mm
4 Mounting Chassis 170/Mandatory.
Make/model/wb/hp/SideEicher/20.16/4300
PTO Provision mm/144 hp /Mandatory.
Make/model/wb/hp/SideTata/LPT1613/4225
PTO Provision mm/136 hp /Mandatory.
Make/model/wb/hp/SideAny other equivalent
PTO Provision model of other chassis
manufacturers.
Scope Customer
Side PTO Provision Provision required
Equipment length 5400 mm approx.
Equipment height 2475 mm approx.
5 Dimensions Equipment Overall width 2400 mm approx.
Overall height 3650 mm approx.
Equipment rear over 1950 mm approx.
hang
Spray-painted with two

6 Painting Surface preparation and coats of superior
finish
Equipment's Exterior quality anti-corrosive
Page 222 of 449

No assemblies
primer and two coats of
enamel metal paint.
Colour code will be as
per customer / tender
requirements.
Coated with 2 coats of
Tank's interior superior
Quality anti-corrosive
grey epoxy paint.
Source: Kam – Avida Enviro Engineers Pvt. Ltd, Pune
Page 223 of 449

Activity-Wise Milestone for Completion of Raw Effluent Collection & Conveyance System –
Total Duration - 21 Months
st
1. Design, Engineering & Submission of data sheets & 1 month
Documents
2. Civil Construction From 2 nd to 9th month
3. Civil Tank Hydraulic Test 10th month
4. Supply of Equipment’s, Pipes and accessories From 1 st to 6th month
5. Erection of Equipment’s and Pipes From 3rd to 14th month
6. PMA shall from time to time issue necessary instructions, 15th month
defects list, comments etc., also including a Punch list, if
any, after completion of erection activities. The
Successful Tenderer shall rectify / complete the points in
the punch list before commencement of testing of plant
and machineries. Rectification / Completion of first set of
8. Commissioning of plant with effluent and stabilization of From 17th to 18th month
the plant
9. Rectification / Completion of second set of Punch list 19th month
issued by PMA and O&M agencies
10. Preparation and submission of O&M Manual, Standard 19th month
11. Carry out Performance Guarantee & Test Run (PGTR) for 19th month
a duration of 72 hours with the effluent
12. Carry out Reliability Test Run (RTR) for a duration of one 20th month
month with the effluent.
13. Training of operators of the O&M Agency before 21st month
commissioning activities and handing over after successful
completion of PGTR and RTR
14. Handing over of C&C System 21st month
Schedule of Items:
Sl.
Item Description Units Quantity
No.
Component -B: Raw effluent collection and conveyance system
B
to handle 20 MLD effluent
I Civil Works
CONSTRUCTION OF RCC TANK FOR PUMP STATION-1
I.I
(6.0 x 4.6 x 5m TD)
Page 224 of 449

Sl.
No.
2.i Plain cement concrete 1:4:8 using 40mm jelly for foundation cu.m 3.92
Reinforced cement concrete RCC M30 (cement - 420 Kg/Cum)
3
using Sulphate resistant cement.
3.i Raft cu.m 15.68
3.iv Cover slab with roof beam cu.m 6.50
4 Centering & Shuttering for Rectangular tank
4.iv Cover slab with roof beam sq.m 19.50
Supply & fabricating of reinforcement steel for all reinforced
cement concrete works to all heights and depths including cost of
5.i MT 5.49
binding wire (18 Gauge) etc., complete as per the IS standards and
specifications ( using corrosion resistant steel )
6 Plastering Works
Water proof Plastering with cement mortar 1:4 (One of cement,
four of sand by volume) mixed with approved water proofing
compound to an average thickness of 15 mm for outer surfaces
finished neatly to one level, including scaffolding, curing etc.,
complete
Walls sq.m 210.00
Labour charges for fixing following dia of pipes cutting and
8.ii
welding the pipe in resting the wall in position
a.400mm dia NB pipe nipples Nos. 2
b.100mm dia NB pipe Nos. 2
I.II
(5.0 x 3.6 x 5m TD)
Page 225 of 449

Sl.
No.
3
3.i Raft cu.m 11.04
5.i MT 4.36
6 Plastering Works
complete
Walls sq.m 180.00
8.ii
I.III
(14.0 x 6.0 x 3.5m TD)
Page 226 of 449

Sl.
No.
3
3.i Raft cu.m 22.50
5.i MT 8.67
6 Plastering Works
complete
Walls sq.m 280.00
8.ii
I.IV
(5.0 x 3.0 x 5m TD)
3
3.i Raft cu.m 9.60
Page 227 of 449

Sl.
No.
5.i MT 3.96
6 Plastering Works
complete
Walls sq.m 160.00
8.ii
B.2 Electro-mechanical Works
Supply, erection and fabrication of Raw effluent collection with
individual service connections, Collection Well, Lifting stations
(Separate PLC for Pumping station/ Collection Sump including
GSM Modem), pumping mains to convey ultimate flow of 20 MLD
in ZLD CETP including Pumping & gravity flow.
I Raw effluent collection system
Supply, erection and fabrication of Raw effluent collection Pipe
1
individual service connections
1.1 HDPE Pipe, 90 mm, PE 100, PN10 Mtrs 2405
Page 228 of 449

Sl.
No.
1.10 GRP pipe, 400 mm, PN6, 248 KPA Mtrs 4586
1.17 Supply of Fittings, Fasteners and Gasket Lot 1
Fabrication, laying & erection charges, road cutting, removal of
1.18 existing pipes & other underground utilities, Transfer Pumps, Lot 1
Bedding, restoration, Hydro Testing
Pipe line crossing by trenchless technology in National Highways
1.19 m 500.00
in Jajmau
Conducting ground penetrating radar survey in a corridor of 4-6 m
width to detect buried utilities like pipes, cables, etc., in such
corridor. Marking of the detected utilities on the map of corridor
with information of locations and depths to the top of various
utilities detected. Work to be conducted using 500 MHz antennas
for best possible resolution and penetration. Road crossings without
dividers upto 30 m width
Pipeline specification: MS with anti-corrosive protective coating or
RCC – NP4 pipe shall be provided.
Dewatering of pits or ground by dewatering pumps inclusive of all
consumables diesel, oil, petrol and lubricants etc., and disposal of
water in all types of soils. 3 HP for 8 hr/day for 10 days = 3 HP x 8
hr x 10 days = 240 HP- Hr.
Manufacturing, Transporting & Stacking of encasement Pipe of
RCC/MS/DI at worksite etc. complete
Drilling of the Horizontal borehole for water main pipeline under
the Road tracks in all strata with required length including fixing of
pipe. (as specified by Railway, Road authority) with casing pipe to
sailable size and Thickness. including installation of pipe with
required joint perfectly watertight. Etc. complete.
HDPE Manhole:
Supply of HDPE Manhole with required nozzles size of 800, 1000
2.0
and 1250 mm with precast RCC lids with ring for raw effluent
conveyance and suitable for the pipeline size of 90 mm to 600 mm.
2.1 HDPE Manhole, DN 800 X 1250 Nos. 75
Page 229 of 449

Sl.
No.
2.23 Precast RCC Lid with ring for Manholes Nos. 558
3 Jetting cum suction machine
Jetting cum suction machine for cleaning of choked raw effluent
lines, 1.5 Ton GVW Truck Chassis (TATA ACE Or Equivalent)
3.1 Unit 1
mounted, Pressure Washer, Jetting
Machine with Capacity- 1000 Ltrs
Jetting cum suction machine for cleaning of choked raw effluent
lines, 16 Ton GVW Truck Chassis (TATA - 1613, Or
3.2 Equivalent)mounted, septic tank clearing Vacuum Unit 1
Suction - Jetting Combination Machine with tank capacity 9000
Ltrs
II Pumping Station -PS1 (Chabilepurwa)
II.A Mechanical works :
Automated mechanized Rake Bar Screen:
Supply of Automated mechanized Rake Bar Screen with 10 mm
1 gap between bars suitable for 820 cu.m/hr, Velocity of flow is 0.6 No. 1
to 0.8 m/sec, Thickness of bar/ Flat: 8 mm and Width as 25 mm
with suitable size & MoC are in SS 316.
Page 230 of 449

Sl.
No.
Submersible pumps for Pumping Station I: Supply of Raw
effluent transfer pump with capacity of 300 cu.m /hr with 27 m
head along with suitable Non clog impeller and Mechanical seal
arrangement.
Application: Effluent water, Temperature: 35 to 40 Deg. Celsius
equivalent
MOC: Casing: CI with surfaces coated with cataphoresis coating
(Epoxy power coating), Impeller and Shaft: SS316 (CF8M).Pump
type: Submersible, Centrifugal, Vertical type
2 Nos. 4
Accessories: Motor, Double mechanical seal, Foundation bolts in
SS316, Auto coupling, lifting guide pipe in SS 316 (Seamless) and
10 m length SS 316 suitable industrial chain for Pump lifting (for
lifting purpose, to provide 3" Dia ring at every 1m once in chain
with 8 mm Dia rod), Duck foot bend, Moisture sensor in motor,
Water in oil sensor, high winding temperature sensor / thermal
switch, reverse rotation preventer, electronic type over load relay,
water level control for dry run protection and single phasing
preventer along with weather proof starter control panel and SS316
Submersible Flow Mixer: Supply of Flow Mixer suitable for
Civil RCC rectangular tank size of 6.0 x 4.6 x 2.5 m invert level +
2.5 m FB.
For selection, Positioning and Qty of Flow mixer shall be done by

using CFD software, Duty: Continuous, Velocity-0.3m/sec.
MOC: All wetted parts are in SS316L, Propellers- Polyamide,

Profile tube, Depth block, Lifting arrangement are in SS316L.
Make: Grundfos/ Flygt/ ABS or equivalent

3 Lot 1
Accessories: Overloading tripping arrangement (Shear pin), triple
sealing system for maximum protection of the mechanical shaft
seal, Depth block, Lifting arrangement, Angular positioning plate,
Moisture in motor sensor, Water in oil sensor, Thermal sensor,
column profile tube, and control panel with Soft starter
incorporated with weather proof (thermoplastic) enclosure with
monitoring/tripping relay for water in oil sensor, Moisture in
Motor, high winding temperature sensor / thermal switch, reverse
rotation preventer, electronic type over load relay, single phasing
preventer and SS316 Foundation Bolt & Nut.
Page 231 of 449

Sl.
No.
Pipe & Fittings for Pumping Station-1 transfer Pump :
Supply of Pipes and fittings for Pumping station transfer Pump
system as per the furnished detail:
4
1. Process lines- 0.6 to 0.8 m/sec (Gravity and suction lines)/ 1.2 to
1.8 m/sec (Delivery lines)
MOC and pipe specification:
2. delivery of Submersible pumps- SS316, Sch 10, ERW Pipes.
Individual pump delivery line (SS 316)
Pipe, Size: 250 NB, MOC- SS 316, Sch 10 m 30.00
Bend- 90°, Size: 250 NB, MOC- SS 316, Sch 10, Nos. 8
SORF Flange, Size: 250 NB, MOC- SS 316, Sch 10 Nos. 20
Concentric Reducer- 100 x 250 mm, MOC- SS 316, Sch 10 Nos. 4
inch
Welding: SS lines should be welded with Tig welding- 50mm pipe 320
dia
Delivery Header line ( HDPE)
HDPE pipe, Size: 560 mm, PE-100, PAN 10 Grade IS 14333 m 35.00
HDPE Molded Tee, Size: 560 mm, PE-100, PAN-10 Grade IS
Nos. 4
14333
HDPE Molded Bend-90°, Size: 560 mm, PE-100, PAN-10 Grade
Nos. 5
IS 14333
HDPE concentric reducer-Size: 560 x 280 mm, PE-100, PAN-10
Nos. 4
Grade IS 14333,
HDPE long Collar with GI flange, Size: 280 mm, PE-100, PAN-10
Nos. 4
Grade IS 14333
Nos. 4
Grade IS 14333
Welding: HDPE pipes are welded with Butt welding. 280mm No of
10
HDPE pipe joints
Welding: HDPE pipes are welded with Butt welding. 560 mm No of
100
HDPE pipe joints
Valve for PS-1 transfer pumps delivery line: Supply of raw
4.1 effluent transfer pumps delivery line Flanged end Gate valve, Nos. 4
Class- 150, MOC: Cast iron, Size: 250NB.
NRV for PS-1 transfer pumps delivery line: Supply of NRV for
raw effluent transfer pumps delivery line. Wafer type Spring loaded
4.2 Nos. 4
, MOC: All wetted parts are in SS 316, Seat "O" ring: EPDM and
Size: 250NB
Lifting arrangements: Supply of lifting chain block with mono
rails (2 Nos) for the Raw effluent collection sump with Chain block
5 Set 1
(Required capacity) -2 Nos and Mono rail (Required capacity) -2
Nos
Lifting Structural materials:
Square Tube, MOC: SS316, Size: 150mm, Tube thickness: 6 mm m 38.00
Plate, MOC: SS316, 16 mm thickness sq.m 1.50
Page 232 of 449

Sl.
No.
Foundation bolt,nut with washer, Size: M20 x 400mm length,
Nos. 16
MOC: SS316
Lifting arrangements mechanical Fabrication work: Fabrication
Lot 1
and Erection work for lifting arrangement.
Mechanical Erection work: Erection of lifting arrangements, all
6 Lot 1
pumps, Pipe lines, Valve, NRV and accessories etc., with complete
Painting: MS supporting structure- one coat of Epoxy primer with
7 Lot 1
two coat of Epoxy paint to be painted.
Fasteners and Gasket : All fasteners, Foundation bolts and nuts &
8 Lot 1
supporting clamps for metallic items are in MOC of SS 316.
9 GI Gratings: Supply of GI gratings for 1m x1m square Lot 1
Electrical Works for Pumping station 1 (PS 1)
II.B Upgradation works in existing service connection from
DISCOM Point of supply to for increasing the electrical load:
Service connection cables
Supply, laying , terminations of suitable Runs x Suitable Core x
Suitable size, 1100 Volts, Aluminium /Copper Conductor, PVC
Insulated and Sheathed, Armoured XLPE U.G cable with
1 Lot 1
necessary cable gland, Cable tray, Supports along with necessary
hardware to complete the job.
(a) Supply From Electricity Point of supply to Metering panel (b)
From Metering panel to MCC panel
Replacing of Metering set :
Supply, erection, testing, commissioning of metering set including
energy meter, Trivector type, Digital display with all parameters
2 Lot 1
meets State Distribution Company norms, Fuses, Boards, Cable and
G.I conduit pipes and all necessary hardware to complete the
works.
MCC Panel suitable for Odour control & pumping station
equipment:
Supply, installation, erection, testing and commissioning of
Cubical, Compartmentalized, Free standing, floor mounting, dust &
vermin proof Panel, single front, Tinned silver coated Aluminium
busbar, Digital multifunction meter, LED indication lamps
Make: L&T / Siemens / ABB / Schneider or Standard
Manufacturer.
Incoming & Outgoing feeders:
3 Lot 1
(i) Suitable Rating of MCCB /TPN Fuse switch units with HRC
fuse links - 2 Nos for DG & DISCOM supply
(ii) Suitable rating 3 pole, 440 V, MCCB for outgoing feeder for
VFD panel -4 Nos & Spare - 1 No.
(iii) 63 A, TPN Fuse switch units with 100 Amps HRC fuse links -
1 No. for Power distribution board
(iv) 63 A, TPN Fuse switch units with 50 Amps HRC fuse links -
1No. for Lighting distribution board
(v) 32 A, TPN Fuse switch units with 25 Amps HRC fuse links - 2
Page 233 of 449

Sl.
No.
No. as spare feeder
(vi) Suitable rating 3 pole, 440 V, MCCB for outgoing feeder for
odour control System - 1 Lot.
Note: (a) Digital multifunction meter shall have Modbus output
& same shall be connected through PLC system to monitor the
energy reading at Central monitoring SCADA panel located at
CETP admin building. (b) SFU shall be suitable for Harsh
Direct On Line starters modules for spare feeder of flow mixer

and Dewatering pump purpose : Starter module should have
local / Remote selection and manual/auto (through PLC) mode
operation selection
(a) Switch Fuse Unit (b) HRC fuses for power circuit (c) Double
Pole MCB for control circuit (d) Power contactors as required (e) 4
Nos. of Auxiliary contactors for ON / OFF / Trip / heathy feedback
as required (f) Electronic type overload relay with single phasing
preventer , reverse rotation preventer and motor winding
temperature sensing relay (g) Start, Emergency stop Pushbutton (h)
On, off and trip indication, motor high winding temperature, seal
failure, Oil in motor chamber, reverse rotation etc., (i) Digital
Ammeter (direct operated or 3 CTs Operated) with selector switch
(j) Digital hour meter (k) Power and control circuit wiring and
termination accessories
(i) Motor rating upto 5.5 kW (ii) Spare feeder for each motor rating
- 1 Lot
Star/Delta starters modules (1 No. of Spare feeder for for Raw
effluent transfer pump ): Starter module should have local /
Remote selection and manual/auto (through PLC) mode operation
selection
(j) Digital hour meter (k) Digital timer (l) Power and control circuit
wiring and termination accessories
Page 234 of 449

Sl.
No.
VFD Panel for Raw effluent transfer pump : (Separate feeder
for Each motor)
Supply, erection and commissioning of soft starter suitable rating
with 415 V, 3 Phase, VFD with weather proof panel with powder
coated finish consisting of remote key pad, 4- 20 mA output, serial
communication RS-485, Panel consists of suitable rating, 3 Pole,
415 Volt, MCCB, 5A, 230 Volt local / Remote selection and
manual /auto through PLC mode operation selection, 6" Cooling
fan with dust filters for air inlet & outlet, Panel indication LED
4 Nos. 4
lamps for R,Y,B power supply / ON / OFF / TRIP / MAINS ON,
ON/OFF push buttons, Glass envelop for monitoring soft starter
display panel, Control transformer 440/230 Volt, 100 VA., 6 A
MCB for controlling primary & secondary of control transformer,
Plug-in relay, 5 pin type, 50 sq.mm bus bar type cable terminal
connector - 8 Nos. for power cable terminations & 10 sq.mm cable
terminal connector - 20 Nos. Panel should be made with min. 2.5
mm thick sheet steel with powder coat finish & IP 55 protection to
APFC Panel:
The 25 kVAR automatic Power Factor Correction Panel shall be
fabricated out of 2mm CRCA Sheets Modular, compartmentalized,
Free Standing, Floor Mounting, Front hinged doors for indoor use,
removable bottom gland plates for incoming cables, dust and
vermin proof (IP: 42 protection) with tinned silver coated
5 Aluminium Bus bars, complete with bus bar connection, internal Set 1
wiring, name plates, painting etc.
Incomer: MCCB, Multifunction meter with CTs, Phase Indicating
Lamps, Microprocessor based APFCR relay, Timer, Cooling fans
Outgoing: MCCB, 7% Copper wound detuned reactors, LED
Indicating Lamps, Capacitor Duty contactor, Cylindrical type
capacitor, Push button with all accessories
6 Diesel Generating set Set 1
Supply, Erection, Testing & Commissioning of 200 KVA D.G.
SET with alternator, Acoustic Enclosure, control panel for DG set,
AMF panel, 2 nos of 12V, 90 A-H, Battery with Battery Charger
with necessary cable from mains to charger and charge to batteries,
end termination,
Alternator : Stamford / Leroy somer or equivalent
Supply and Erection of Exhaust pipe with silencer, thermal
insulation covering with glass wool, Aluminium Gladding etc.as
per State PCB norms with tower supports, aviation lights, lighting
arrestor at the top of structure, earth flat connected between
Lighting arrestor & earth pit etc., complete.
Supply and Erection of Silencer & MS Class B Suitable size
Exhaust pipe with Thermal Insulation using rock wool of 64kg/m3
& 50mm thick using chicken mess and 24 SWG aluminum Sheet
and MS Supports for exhaust Piping, fuel Piping, Tanks etc.
Page 235 of 449
Sl.
No.
Supply of Diesel, Lube oil & Coolant required for commissioning
the D.G set
Supply and erection of Diesel fuel tank with necessary MS Class C
pipe between Diesel tank and Engine etc.
Providing Earth pits for Body earthing with necessary accessories
(Double clamping, Funnel) etc., using 75 mm dia earth electrode up
to 3 meter depth, Earth flat 2 run of size 50 mm x 6 mm using G.I
flat to interlink D.G set body to earth pit and RCC cover slab with
Providing Earth pits for neutral with necessary accessories (Double
clamp, Funnel) etc., using 75 mm dia earth electrode up to 3 meter
depth, Earth flat size of 75x12 using Copper flat to interlink D.G
set neutral to earth pit and RCC cover slab with identification etc.,
complete.
Providing Earth pits for lightning arrestor to be fixed at the top of
Exhaust pipe line with necessary accessories (Double clamp,
Funnel) etc., using 75 mm dia earth electrode up to 3 meter depth,
Earth flat size of 25 x 3 using Copper flat to interlink Lighting
arrestor to earth pit and RCC cover slab with identification.
Supply laying termination of size cable between Alternator and
Control panel
Supply, Laying and Termination of Copper cable with necessary
Lugs, Glands etc. Including Earth excavation, Sand filling, Brick
guarding and earth refilling between Control panel & D.G set for
engine start/Stop & Engine Fault, CT,PT, Battery charger, fuel
cooler, lighting cable, EB sensing
Special tools & tackles as required.
All civil works connected with D.G set platform, earth pits, Fuel
tank, Exhaust pipe etc., mounting and earth work & refilling for
cable laying etc., inclusive of all
Unloading & positioning Charges, Liasioning charges for CEIG,
DISCOM Approval of D.G set
Power & Control cables
Insulated and Sheathed, Armoured U.G cable with necessary cable
gland, earth work, Cable tray, sand cushioning, brick guarding &
earth refilling over the cable, hume pipe protection over the cable
for road crossing.
7 Lot 1
(a) From MCC panel to individual equipment, (b) From MCC panel
to Local Push button of individual equipment (c) From DG set to
MCC Panel (d) From PMCC panel to LDB, PDB Panel.
Note: (i) Cables for power circuits shall be used with copper
conductors upto 4 sq.mm cable size & aluminium conductors
above 6 sq.mm cable size. (ii) Cables for control circuits shall be
used with 5 core x 1.5 sq.mm, copper conductors.
Page 236 of 449

Sl.
No.
Local Push button Stations / Cable Junction Boxes: Supply &
erection of Corrosion , Weather proof, Local ON/OFF push button
station with following specifications for local control all equipment.
(a) Enclosure shall have MOC of Thermoplastic / FRP , IP 65 for
dosing area / high polluted area.
(b) Enclosure shall be suitable for 5 Core X 1.5 Sq.mm, Bottom
entry, 3/4" 2 Way cable entry, double compression gland.
(c) 1 No. of Non illuminated "ON" Green Colour Push button with
2 NO + 2 NC contact.
8 Lot 1
(d) 1 No. of Emergency Stay put Red Colour Mushroom actuator,
Press to Lock & Turn to release "OFF" push button with 2 NO + 2
NC contact without key type.
(e) Supply of accessories including Name plate, SS fasteners,
Neoprene endless moulded gasket, 2 Nos. of Earthing, Screw type
terminal blocks with Spare.
(f) Supply and fixing of cable junction box for all motors (Incase of
motor cable terminal boxes are small sizes when compared with
cable size)
Lighting & Power Circuits with Light fittings / LDB / PDB Board:
: Supply & Wiring charges for lighting panel in suitably sized G.I
conduits, supported on walls, ceiling etc., at an interval of 1000
mm, installation of light control switches and receptacles housed in
stove enameled steel boxes, earthing with 14 SWG copper
conductor continuous wire run outside along the conduit and
clamped at every 1000 mm interval and termination of wires at
lighting panel, light control switches, receptacles, lighting fixtures,
etc., as required including supply of all the items for the work
detailed above such as 650 V grade. 2.5/4mm2, copper conductor
PVC insulated wires, 6A/16A switches, GI conduits and
9 accessories (such as junction boxes fabricated from 16 SWG sheet Lot 1
and complete with gasket, knockouts for conduit entire earthing
terminal with bolt, nut and washer, 14 SWG copper earthing with
flexible conduit etc., shall be included in the Contractor's scope. All
work necessary for fixing of boxes, conduits etc., together with
Contractor. Wiring for outdoor areas other shall be carried out by
means of 1.1 KV grade armoured cables with copper conductors
Page 237 of 449

Sl.
No.
(a) Supply of 433 volts, 3 Phase Neutral Lighting Distribution
Board (LDB) with 63 Amps, TPN, ELCB, bus bar type, 12 way
with 6 A Single pole MCBs for outgoings.
(b) Supply of 433 volts, 3 Phase Neutral Power Distribution Board
with 125 Amps, TPN, ELCB, bus bar type, adequate No. of way
with 32 A Double pole/ Triple pole MCBs for outgoings.
(c) Supply of 433 volts, metal clad power sockets with 6 / 16 A
Single pole MCBs for outgoings
(d) Supply & fixing of industrial 2 X 18 /20/36 Watts, LED tube
type fitting with reflector shading for pumping house - 1 Lot.
(e) Supply, erection of 120 / 150 / 250 Watts, LED street lamp with
RCC pole, industrial type, corrosion proof fittings for inside &
outside of pumping house - 1 Lot.
(f) Supply, erection of 48 /60/72 Watts, LED lamp, industrial type,
weather, corrosion proof fittings for outside of pumping house - 1
Lot.
(g) Supply of ceiling fan & Exhaust fan Make: Crompton Greaves
/ Almonord - 1 Lot.
The following equipment / items in required quantities shall be
provided in the electrical rooms such as PMCC & MCC rooms (a)
6 kgs of CO 2 Fire extinguishers (b) Stand made of steel for
10 keeping item (c) First and box with required medicines (d) Safety Lot 1
electrical Rubber insulated Gloves (e) Electrical Insulation Mat
with ISI 15652 (f) Danger labels (g) Danger board (h) Safety
charts, First aid charts (i) Emergency fixture to provide lighting
FRP Cable tray:
Supply, Erection of suitable Size, FRP cable tray, Coupler plates,
bends, reducers, tees, cross members with all accessories shall be
11 Lot 1
provided with necessary tray M.S supports, civil works Entire cable
shall be laid on cable tray only. Earthing shall be provided at
regular interval and connected with separate earth pit.
MS Channel & MS chequered plate: Supply of 5 mm thick M.S
chequered plates with handle for covering cable trenches & Supply
12 of suitable size M.S Beam/Pipe/Channel for supporting cable tray, Lot 1
chequered plats, push button station etc., (M.S Angle is not
accepted)
Supply erection and testing of Earth pit with earth electrode &
refilling chemical compound with necessary all materials as per IS
13 3043 (For PCC/PMCC panels, APFCR & Motor Body, earth pits Lot 1
should be interlinked with others except PLC/SCADA & VFD
earth pits.
Page 238 of 449

Sl.
No.
Inspectorate, etc. for obtaining all the statutory approvals needed,
preparing, submitting and obtaining approval of all electrical
14 drawings and documents as well as obtaining approval of the Job 1
electrical installation from these authorities obtaining safety
certificates from Electrical Inspectorate. Test report / Revised test
reports from Electrical inspectorate Any defects / deviation /
modification pointed in the above said inspections.
III. Pumping Station -PS 2 (Sheetla Bazar)
III.
Mechanical works :
A
Submersible pumps for Pumping Station II: Supply of Raw

effluent transfer pump with capacity of 300 cu.m /hr. with 27 m
arrangement.

equivalent

(Epoxy power coating), Impeller and Shaft: SS316 (CF8M).
2 Nos. 3

Page 239 of 449

Sl.
No.
2.5 m FB.



3 Lot 1
Pipe & Fittings for Pumping Station-II transfer Pump :
4
Individual pump delivery line
Pipe Size: 250 NB, MOC- SS 316, Sch 10 m 30.00
inch
dia
Delivery Hader line ( HDPE)
Nos. 3
14333
Nos. 5
IS 14333
Nos. 3
Grade IS 14333,
Page 240 of 449

Sl.
No.
Nos. 4
Grade IS 14333
Nos. 4
Grade IS 14333
10
HDPE pipe joints
100
HDPE pipe joints
4.2 Nos. 3
Size: 250NB
5 Set 1
Nos
Nos. 16
MOC: SS316
Lot 1
6 Lot 1
7 Lot 1
8 Lot 1
Electrical Works for Pumping station 2 (PS 2)
II.B Upgradation works in existing service connection from
1 Lot 1
Page 241 of 449

Sl.
No.
2 Lot 1
works.
equipment:
Manufacturer.
3 Lot 1
No. as spare feeder
Direct On Line starters modules for flow mixer and
Dewatering pump purpose : Starter module should have local /
selection
Page 242 of 449

Sl.
No.
- 1 Lot

operation selection
- 1 Lot
for Each motor)
4 Nos. 3
Page 243 of 449

Sl.
No.
APFC Panel:
5 Aluminium Bus bars, complete with bus bar connection, internal No. 1
end termination,
the D.G set
complete.
Page 244 of 449

Sl.
No.

Control panel
for road crossing.
7 Lot 1
8 Lot 1
Page 245 of 449

Sl.
No.
cable size)
Page 246 of 449

Sl.
No.
(e) Supply, erection of 120/250 Watts, LED street lamp with RCC
pole, industrial type, corrosion proof fittings for inside & outside
of pumping house - 1 Lot.
Lot.
/ Almonord - 1 Lot.
FRP Cable tray:
11 Lot 1
accepted)
earth pits.
Page 247 of 449

Sl.
No.
IV Pumping Station -PS 3 (Wazidpur)
IV.A Mechanical works :
Submersible pumps for Pumping Station III: Supply of Raw
arrangement.

equivalent

2 Nos. 7

Page 248 of 449

Sl.
No.
1.4 m FB.



3 Lot 1
Pipe & Fittings for Pumping Station-III transfer Pump :
4
Pipe, Size: 350 NB, MOC- SS 316, Sch 10 m 40.00
inch
dia
Nos. 5
14333
Nos. 5
IS 14333
Nos. 7
Grade IS 14333,
Page 249 of 449

Sl.
No.
Nos. 14
Grade IS 14333
Nos. 4
Grade IS 14333
10
HDPE pipe joints
20
HDPE pipe joints
Valve for PS- 3 transfer pumps delivery line: Supply of raw
NRV for PS- 3 transfer pumps delivery line: Supply of NRV for
4.2 Nos. 7
Size: 350NB
5 Set 1
Nos
Nos. 16
MOC: SS316
Lot 1
6 Lot 1
7 Lot 1
8 Lot 1
IV.B Electrical Works Pumping station 3:
C.T / P.T metering set at State Electricity Board 11 KV DP

structure. Etc.,
1. 11 KV CT/PT metering set,
2. Panel board for Trivector meter,
1 3. Cable and G.I conduit pipes for taking supply from CT/PT Lot 1
metering set to Trivector meter at DP structure should be provided.
4. Potential transformer Ratio: 11000 / 110 Volts, Current
transformer Ratio: ---/100/5 A (The rating make of CT/PT metering
set shall be as per State Electricity Board requirements.
Page 250 of 449

Sl.
No.
Double pole structure:
Supply, installation, erection, testing & commissioning of 11 KV
Double pole structure including RS Joist, Horizontal gang operated
1.1 AB Switch, Lightning arrester, horn gap / dropout fuse, jumper, Lot 1
Bimetallic clamps, disc and post top insulator, Stay set, Earth Pit,
Supports, hardware, painting, Fencing and safety equipment
Note: For complete details refer technical specification sheet
HT Cable:
Supply, laying, termination of 11 KV unearthed Aluminium
conductor, XLPE, armoured power cable of 3 Core x 300 sq.mm.
1.2 shall be considered for interconnection between 11 KV equipment Lot 1
including earth excavation & refilling, sand cushioning and brick
guarding over the underground cables laid.
Make: Poly cab / RPG / Finolex
500 kVA Transformer:
Supply, installation, erection, testing, commissioning of Outdoor
location 500 kVA, 11 KV/433 V, 50 Hz, Dyn 11, Neutral Solidly
earthed, Copper winding, ONAN type cooling, OLTC Load Tap
2 Lot 1
Changer (Full Capacity) along with RTCC panel, Neutral CT in
Terminal box, HT terminal- Suitable to terminate 11 KV XLPE
cable, LT terminal Suitable for LT bus duct, with all accessories &
fittings. Transformer shall meet to the latest standards.
PCC / PMCC Panel suitable for Odour control & pumping
station equipment::
Make: L&T / Siemens / ABB / Schneider / Standard manufacturer
3.1 Lot 1
Note: (a) Separate PCC panel shall be provided if necessary for
getting approval from electrical inspectorate approval. (b) Digital
multifunction meter shall have Modbus output & same shall be
connected through PLC system to monitor the energy reading at
Central monitoring SCADA panel located at CETP admin building.
(c) SFU shall be suitable for Harsh Environmental. (Ref: L&T
Product, HE Grade SFU)
(i) Suitable Rating of ACB /MCCB /TPN Fuse switch units with
HRC fuse links - 2 Nos for DG & EB
(ii) 250 A, 3 Pole, MCCB, TP Based Trip unit - 8 Nos.
(iv) 32 A, TPN Fuse switch units with 25 Amps HRC fuse links - 2
No. as spare feeder
Page 251 of 449

Sl.
No.
operation selection
- 1 Lot
selection
for Each motor)
4 Set 7
Page 252 of 449

Sl.
No.
APFC Panel:
fabricated out of 2 mm CRCA Sheets Modular, compartmentalized,
end termination,
the D.G set
Page 253 of 449

Sl.
No.
complete.
Control panel
for road crossing.
7 Lot 1
Page 254 of 449

Sl.
No.
8 Lot 1
cable size)
Page 255 of 449

Sl.
No.
(e) Supply, erection of 120/250 Watts, LED street lamp with RCC
Lot.
/ Almonord - 1 Lot.
6 kgs of CO 2 Fire extinguishers (b) Fire bucket with stand (c)
Stand made of steel for keeping gloves (c) First and box with
10 Lot 1
required medicines (d) HT & LT Safety electrical Rubber insulated
Gloves (e) HT & LT Electrical Insulation Mat with ISI 15652 (f)
Danger labels (g) Danger board (h) Safety charts, First aid charts
(i) Emergency fixture to provide lighting continuously for about 8
hours
FRP Cable tray:
11 Lot 1
accepted)
earth pits.
Page 256 of 449

Sl.
No.
V Pumping Station -PS 4 (Buriaya Ghat)
Mechanical works :
Submersible pumps for Pumping Station IV: Supply of Raw
arrangement.

equivalent

2 Nos. 3

Page 257 of 449

Sl.
No.
2.5 m FB.



3 Lot 1
Pipe & Fittings for Pumping Station-IV transfer Pump :

4 Velocity for Pipe selection: Lot 1
Pipe Size: 250 NB, MOC- SS 316, Sch 10 m 30.00
inch
dia
HDPE Molded Equal Tee, Size: 400 mm, PE-100, PAN-10 Grade
Nos. 6
IS 14333
Nos. 5
IS 14333
Page 258 of 449

Sl.
No.
Nos. 3
Grade IS 14333,
Nos. 4
Grade IS 14333
Nos. 4
Grade IS 14333
10
HDPE pipe joints
20
HDPE pipe joints
4.2 Nos. 3
Size: 250NB
5 Set 1
Nos
Nos. 16
MOC: SS316
Lot 1
6 Lot 1
7 Lot 1
8 Lot 1
Electrical Works for Pumping station 4
Upgradation works in existing service connection from
1 Lot 1
Page 259 of 449

Sl.
No.

2 Lot 1
works.
equipment:
Manufacturer.
3 Lot 1
No. as spare feeder
Page 260 of 449

Sl.
No.
operation selection
- 1 Lot
selection
for Each motor)
4 Nos. 3
Page 261 of 449

Sl.
No.
APFC Panel:
end termination,
the D.G set
complete.
Page 262 of 449

Sl.
No.
Control panel
for road crossing.
7 Lot 1
8 Lot 1
Page 263 of 449
Sl.
No.
cable size)
(e) Supply, erection of 120 / 150 Watts, LED street lamp with RCC
Lot.
/ Almonord - 1 Lot.
Page 264 of 449

Sl.
No.
FRP Cable tray:
11 Lot 1
accepted)
earth pits.
VIII Instrumentation Works for Pumping station
Electromagnetic flow meter for Pumping Station:
Flow Head: Flange welded along with body, Liner: PTFE,
Electrode: Hastelloy C/Tantalum/Platinum as per design,
Grounding Rings: Hastelloy C, End Connection: With Flange,
Protection: IP 68, Flow tube: SS 304, Coil Housing – SS316L,
Flange MOC - SS316L, Meter Housing – SS316L, The flow head
1 should be sealed permanently using potting compound to avoid
entry of water through cable entry, Flange: ANSI 150 class. Signal
Converter Transmitter: Cable length: 10 m, Mounting: Separate-
Field mounting, Type: Microprocessor based, Output: 4-20 mA &
Modbus/HART, Empty pipe detection, Display: LED or LCD with
backlighting, Parameters: Actual flow rate in Cu.m/hr & totalizer
flow in cu.m, Housing: Die cast Aluminium, Enclosure: IP 65 with
Page 265 of 449
Sl.
No.
weather proof thermo plastic canopy, Accuracy: ± 0.5%, Supply
voltage: Universal Make: Krohne Marshall /ABB/E&H/Equivalent
Pumping station flow meter for PS1, PS2, PS3 & PS4
1.1 DN 500 - Pumping station 1 No. 1
1.2 DN 500 - Pumping station 2 No. 1
1.3 DN 700 - Pumping Station 3 No. 1
1.4 DN 400 - Pumping Station 4 No. 1
Level transmitter :
Specification: Non- Contacting Sensor, Type – Ultrasonic/ Radar
(as per vendor recommendation) UV protected LCD display with
local operator interface & backlight for night vision, remote
enclosure with indicating, transmitting and controlling electronics,
2 Nos. 4
measurement accuracy shall be +/- 0.25%. Power Supply Voltage :
Universal/24V DC, Output - 4-20 mA/Modbus/HART. Separate
enclosure: IP 67 or IP 65 with weather proof thermo plastic canopy
with sun light protection. Location: Pumping Station
PLC Panel with Data logger & GPRS Modem for Pumping stations
I, II , III & IV:
PLC panel for auto operation with GPRS modem for level based
auto operation, Weather proof, outdoor installation, thermoplastic
(or) sheet steel enclosure, free standing type panel board with lock
3 & key provision each 1 No., SMPS - each - 1 No., Signal Isolator - Nos. 4
each 4 Nos., Data Logger , Local display for instantaneous &
cumulative flow reading and TDS reading, RS 485 to RS 232
convertor/Scanner (if required), Shall support RF modem to export
data, Necessary Hardware & software for Data Acquisition and
Data processing as per CPCB norms
UPS with suitable batteries for Pumping stations I, II , III & IV:
Supply of 1 KVA, On-line UPS with 8 hours power back up with
suitable batteries.
Specification for UPS:

Advanced DSP Controlled UPS System, Pure Sine wave, SPWM
Technology with Gibbet's, High MOTIF and minimum MATTER,
4 SNMP interface – web enabled monitoring, Full function LCD Nos. 4
display to monitor electrical parameters, Overload & Short circuit
protection with audible alarm, Built-in spike and surge protector,
Static bypass switch, Input Voltage: 433 Volt ± 10%, combined
variation in Voltage & frequency ± 5%, Output voltage: 230 V AC
with 8 hours power Backup, along with Exide tubular 180 AH,
suitable Nos. of batteries with necessary cables & hardware
Make: Numeric/DB
5 Erection , Testing & Commissioning of Instrumentation Works Lot 1
Odour Control System for Pumping Station’s sump PS-1, PS-2,
II Lot 4
PS-3 & PS-4:
Page 266 of 449
Sl.
No.
Odour Control System for Pumping Stations sump
Construction, Supply, Erection, Testing, & commissioning of
Odour Control System for Raw effluent pumping Stations Project
including Civil, Electro Mechanical & Instrumentation works.
Supply, erection, testing and commissioning of Odour Control
System for pumping station’s sump with accessories of Chemical
Scrubber (Made of PEHD) with accessories of 1 removable
demister, 1 spraying nozzle,
1 junction with PE air inlet flange, 1 fresh water inlet, motor valve,
3 inspection openings with PE false cover, 1 glass fibre reinforced
plastic support grating for tower packing 1 pressure gauge as an in-
situ display for exhaust gas, 1 pressure gauge as an in-situ display
for washing water 2 dosing nozzle for dosing of chemicals, 1 PVC
valve for the pressure line of the circulation pumps 1 PVC pump
tubing for the washer, 1 level sensor, 1 Motor valve for Drain , 1
cell vessel for PH electrodes and redox electrodes 2 Dosing valves
for NaOH, NaOCl, 3 Pressure transmitter for pressure loss
measuring), Circulation pump for the washing water, Storage tanks
for chemicals, pipe lines and dosing unit and Chemicals, pH control
system (NaOH), Fan, Interconnecting ductwork, Control Panel,
H2S Monitor and FRP ducts, Tank Covers.
Chrome Collection System for Truck with vacuum suction
III
machine with GPS Tracking System
Truck with suction machine for collection for chrome liquor from
1 Nos. 12
member tannery units. Suction truck tanker capacity : 8500 Lts.
B.3
Performance of the system till handing over to JTETA
Commissioning of plant with effluent and stabilization of the plant
1 Lot 1
(Duration : From 17th to 18th month)
Rectification / Completion of Punch list issued by PMA (Duration :
2 Lot 1
19th month)
Preparation and submission of Engineering Package Document,
O&M Manual, Standard Operating Procedure (SOP), Equipment
3 operation and repair manual (EORM) and On-Site Emergency Plan Lot 1
(Duration : 19th month)
Carry out Performance Guarantee & Test Run (PGTR) for a
4 Lot 1
duration of 72 hours with the effluent (Duration : 19th month)
Carry out Reliability Test Run (RTR) for a duration of one month
5 Lot 1
with the effluent. (Duration : 20th month)
Training of operators of the O&M Crew for smooth transition after
6 Lot 1
RTR (Duration : 21st month
7 Handing over of C&C System (Duration : 21st month ) Lot 1
Page 267 of 449

List of Improvements over the proposed System suggested by tenderer (if any) based on
proven technology for Tanneries / similar wastewater along with documentation:
List of Improvement Reference for

Sl. No. over the proposed Details Performance earlier
System installation
Page 268 of 449

Component-C
Technical specifications for
Common Chrome Recovery Units
(CCRU)
Page 269 of 449

Common Chrome Recovery Unit (CCRU)
Design Basis for CCRU

The proposed CCRU has been designed for a volume of 900 m3/day (300 KLD x 3 Modules)
(i.e about 5%) of the total tannery effluent estimated (18 MLD). It involves various unit
operations such as collection tank, reactor, chemical dosing system and chrome regeneration
tank and supernatant collection tank.
Process Description of Chrome Recovery
Screening system:
The chrome liquor will initially be passed through a bar screen, made up of stainless steel
and then collected in the collection tank. A basket screen would also be needed in the inlet
of the reactor to remove the solids.
Collection Tank:
After screening process, all the chrome liquor will be collected into the collection tank.
Chrome liquor transfer will also be required to transfer the liquor to reaction tank.
Reaction Tank:
In the reaction tank, Magnesium oxide (MgO) will be dosed to precipitate the chromium
present in the chrome liquor. A separate MgO dosing system and an agitator would be
installed in the system to dose MgO solution to the reaction tank and for mixing of the liquor
in the tank respectively.
De-Watering of Chromium Hydroxide cakes
The precipitate settled at the bottom of the reaction tank will be decanted into a sludge
holding tank. The sludge will then be De-Watered using filter press to produce chromium
hydroxide cakes which can be sold to BCS manufacturers.
Optional reuse of Chromium Sulphate from Chrome liquor

The chromium slurry from the bottom of the reactor is moved by gravity by opening the
bottom valve into the chromium hydroxide tank. The chromium slurry is re dissolved and
acidified in the chromium hydroxide tank by adding Sulphuric acid under stirring
conditions. The recovered chrome after natural cooling for 3-4 hours, is pumped from here
to the recovered chrome storage tank. The Chemical reaction of a typical chrome recovery
process are:
Cr 2 (SO 4 ) 3 + 3MgO + 3H 2 O ---> 2Cr(OH) 3 + 3Mg SO 4
2 Cr (OH) 3 + 3H 2 SO 4 ---> Cr 2 (SO 4 ) 3 + 6H 2 O
Reuse of Recovered Chrome:
The recovered chrome in the form of solution is stored in the storage tank and reused for
chrome tanning along with required fresh basic chromium Sulphate. Depending on the site
Page 270 of 449

condition about 80% of fresh basic chromium sulphate and 20% of recovered chrome can
be used for chrome tanning. The whole process can start afresh from here.
Schematic of CCRU
Chrome Liquor
from Tanning
Chrome Liquor
Collection Tank
Screening system
Supernatant to Reactor MgO Dosing

LSS at CETP System
Chrome Chrome Slurry H2SO4 Dosing

Hydroxide Dissolving System
Tank
Filter Press Recovered

chrome to
Tanning
industries for
Reuse
Page 271 of 449

Schedule of Items:
Sl. No. Item Description Unit Quantity

Component C: 900 KLD (3 x 300 KLD) Common Chrome
Recovery Units (CCRU)
I Civil works
Construction of RCC Circular tank for Reactor with Stirrer
I.I
assy. (3 Modules x 3 m dia x 12 Nos.)
3
using sulphate resistant cement.
3.iv Providing entry slab and wall cu.m 76.30
4.iv Providing entry slab and wall sq.m 678.24
5.i MT 66.54
6 Plastering Works
complete
Walls sq.m 3165.12
Page 272 of 449

8.ii
CONSTRUCTION OF RCC RECTANGULAR TANK FOR
I.II
CHROME HYDROXIDE (3 Modules x 8 Nos)
1.ii Solling packing for bottom of the raft slope 1:12 cm 1:7 cu.m 108.00
3
5.i MT 14.04
binding wire (18 Gauge) etc., complete as per the standards and
6 Plastering Works
complete
7 Painting works
6.i Raft sq.m 37.50
8.ii
Supplying and fixing 250 x 150mm PVC encapsulated rung for
8.iii Nos. 288
steps inner side of wall
Page 273 of 449

Supply, providing and applying of FRP (3000 microns thick) over
inner surfaces of civil tanks including the cost of all applying FRP
materials, preparation of surfaces, necessary scaffolding etc.,
8.iv
complete (Includes of apply materials like bisphenol resin, three
layer of CS rough matt and one coat of finishing matt with
bisphenol resin.)
6.v Raft sq.m 576.00
6.vi Walls sq.m 270.00
CONSTRUCTION OF RCC CIRCULAR TANK FOR MgO
I.III
PREPARATION (3 Modules x 1.25 Mtr Dia x 12 nos)
3
3.ii Raft cu.m 12.72
3.iii Walls cu.m 70.65
5.i MT 7.50
6 Plastering Works
complete
Walls sq.m 282.60
CONSTRUCTION OF RECTANGULAR TANK FOR
I.IV SUPERNATANT COLLECTION - (8.0 x 5.0 x 5.0m TD) -
1No. x 3 Modules
Page 274 of 449

3
3.i Raft cu.m 56.70
5.i MT 13.11
6 Plastering Works
complete
7 Painting works
8.ii Nos. 54
CONSTRUCTION OF RECTANGULAR TANK FOR
I.V SUPERNATANT COLLECTION - (6.0 x 5.0 x 5.0m TD)- 4
Nos. x 3 Modules
3
Page 275 of 449

5.i MT 40.90
6 Plastering Works
complete
7 Painting works
8.ii Nos. 216
I.VI RCC BUILDING FOR Common Chrome recovery system
1 RCC Terrace building with rain water harvesting sq.m 2970.00
II Electromechanical works
Mechanical Items:
Manual Screen: Supply of Manual screen with 5000 micron
(5mm) perforated holes suitable for 40 cu.m/hr with peak flow of
3, Velocity of gravity flow is 0.8 m/sec (min) to 1.0m/sec (Max)
with Thickness of screen bar/ Flat is 8 mm and Width as 25 mm,
continuous operation.
1 Nos. 36
Installation: Out door, Orientation: Elevated level.
Accessories: (1) Suitable Hand rake- 2 Nos (2) Foundation Bolt &
Nut in SS316L.
Page 276 of 449

Basket filter: Supply of basket filter with 3000 micron (3 mm)
suitable for feed flow of 40 cu.m/hr, design with minimum
operating pressure of 2.0 to 2.5 kg/cm2.
2 Nos. 54
MOC: For all wetted and non-wetted parts are in SS 316L.
Accessories: Inlet and outlet valves, Pressure gauge & valves

arrangements for cleaning.
Chrome Effluent Transfer Pump: Supply of Chrome Effluent
Transfer Pump (Screw pump) with capacity of 40 cu.m/hr @ 15 m
Head to transfer chrome effluent from the collection tank to the
Reactor. Pump is capable of handling effluent with pH of 3 and
particles of up to 10 mm. All rotating parts shall be in SS 316 and
stator is made of Hypalon rubber with suitable mechanical seal
arrangement along with necessary seal cooling and flushing
arrangements.
Application: Chrome Effluent Transfer

equivalent.
3 Nos. 36

MOC:
1. Rotor and all wetted parts are in CF8M (SS 316)
Accessories: Motor, Dry run protection, Over load tripping sensor,

foundation bolts in SS316 and FRP motor canopy.
Supply of Reactor with Stirrer assembly with complete set for
Chrome recovery system with following specifications.
Main Reactor: Supply of main Reactor with processing capacity

25,000 Ltrs., applicable for the reaction of chrome liquor. Made of
8 mm- 12 mm thickness M.S. sheet with inside epoxy coating over
4 the FRP lining in 3 layers each of 1 mm thickness using Bisphenol Nos. 36
resin. Five nozzles at different levels shall be provided for
withdrawal of supernatant. Provision for chrome slurry withdrawal
with a butterfly valve at the reactor bottom.
Stirrer assembly for main Reactor: Supply of stirrer assembly

suitable for main reactor for mixing of chrome liquor and
Page 277 of 449

precipitation using MgO. The stirrer shaft shall be in SS 316 with
3 sets of SS 316 blades – one at the middle and the other two in
the bottom. The stirrer shall be driven by a suitable totally
enclosed fan cooled IP 55 and class "F“ insulation Geared motor.
All the wetted parts are in SS316L.
Supply of FRP Tank with Stirrer assembly for Chromium

Hydroxide Storage Tank with following specifications.
FRP Tank for storage of Chromium Hydroxide Storage Tank:

Chromium hydroxide tank of capacity 4.00 cu m shall be
provided for the chrome slurry discharged from the main reactor.
A circular tank made of 10-12 mm thick FRP with bisphenol resin
and inside epoxy coating which can resist acids of pH below 2 and
5 high temperature of 80º C with provision for stirrer with Geared Nos. 18
motor assembly, top cover etc., complete with baffles and a gentle
slope at the bottom.
Stirrer assembly for Chromium Hydroxide Storage Tank: The

shaft and blade of the stirrer assembly shall be in SS 316 and
driven by suitable totally enclosed fan cooled IP 55 class “F”
insulation geared motor. MOC of all the wetted parts are in
SS316L
MgO Preparation Tank with Stirrer Assembly: PP/FRP tank of
500 Ltrs capacity with a stirring system for MgO preparation. The
Magnesium oxide solution shall be prepared in the MgO
preparation tank by mixing MgO and water. The circular tank shall
be provided with stirrer assembly and an outlet valve. A suitable
support stand shall be provided for placing the MgO tank for the
6 Set 36
gravity flow of MgO solution to the Reactor.
MOC:
(1) Tank: PP. FRP with 8 mm thickness.
(2) Stirrer: All wetted parts are in SS316L.
(3) Tank supports: SS316L
Page 278 of 449

Chrome Hydroxide Slurry Transfer Pump: Supply of Chrome
Hydroxide Slurry Pump (Screw pump) with capacity of 8 cu.m/hr
@ 10 m Head to transfer the chromium hydroxide slurry from the
regeneration tank to the chrome slurry storage tank. The pumps
shall be capable of handling liquids with particles of upto 10 mm.
All rotating parts shall be in SS 316 and stator is made of Hypalon
rubber with suitable mechanical seal arrangement along with
necessary seal cooling and flushing arrangements.
Application: Chrome Hydroxide Slurry

equivalent.
7 Nos. 27

MOC:
1. Rotor and all wetted parts are in CF8M (SS 316)
Accessories: Motor, Dry run protection, Over load tripping sensor,

foundation bolts in SS316 and FRP motor canopy.
Filter Press Feed Tank with Stirrer Assembly: Supply of Cylinder,
Vertical FRP storage tank with capacity of 5000 Ltrs with stirrer
assembly, suitable for outdoor installation.
Application: Chromium hydroxide slurry storage and mixing

8 Nos. 12
MOC: FRP with Bisphenol Resin.
Accessories: Top manual with lid and Nozzles (Nozzle details: For
Outlet, Inlet, Drain, Overflow- Dia 2” x 6” Length from Tank
(Each 1 Nos.), For LT- Dia 4” x 6” Length from Tank (1 Nos.),
For Recirculation- Dia 2” x 6” Length from Tank (1 Nos.)
Page 279 of 449

Filter Press : Supply of Filter press suitable for feed flow is 10
cu.m/ day of chromium hydroxide slurry in 12 hours a day,
Operating pressure 12 bar, The feed concentration may be not
more than 1 % solids. The solid concentration of the cake shall be
at least 25 %. The recovery percentage of suspended solids shall
be atleast 85 – 90% with suitable number of plates, Arrangement
of pattern vertical, Closure of filter pack Automatic (Hydraulic
power pack), Pressure closing system Operation of filter semi-
automated, Control of filter fully automated and sludge removing
chute etc.
Make: BKS Engg/Hydro Press/ Andritz or equivalent.

9 Nos. 12
Application: Sludge from Thickener
MOC:
4. Filtrate Tray: FRP
Accessories: VFD, Motor, Automatic pressure control system,

Connecting hose, Control panel, set of safety pressure gauge,
Cable between control panel & motor and safety device and
Hydraulic oil, SS316 foundation bolts and nuts, FRP Filtrate tray,
Filtrate valves, Filtrate cloth and Hydraulic power pack.
Filter Press Feed Pump : Supply of Filter Press feed Pump
(Screw pump) with Motor capacity of 10-15 cu.m/hr @ 150 m
Head with suitable mechanical seal arrangement along with
Application: Transfer of chromium hydroxide from the

regeneration tank
Pump: Make- Alpha Helical/ Roto/ UT, Screw, Horizontal
10 Motor Detail: Make- ABB/KEC/CG/BB, Type: IE2, TEFC, Class Nos. 18

F insulation.
MOC:
2. All the rotating parts shall be in SS 316 and the stator shall be
made of Hypalon rubber
Accessories: Motor , Over load tripping sensor, MSEP Base frame

plate, Coupling, FRP Coupling Guard, foundation bolts in SS304
and FRP motor canopy.
Page 280 of 449

Electronic Chain Hoist: Supply of Electric chain hoist with
11 capacity of 3MT to lift and transfer the MgO from the store to the Set 3
MgO preparation tank. Chain length shall be in min. 15 m.
having capacity of Civil RCC rectangle tank with volume of 150
cu.m chrome liquor collection tank.
Number of Flow Mixer per tank- 2W+1S = 3 Nos.

Total number of Flow Mixer (3 Nos. x 4 Tanks) -12 Nos.
For selection, Positioning and Qty of Flow maker/ Flow booster

shall be done by using CFD software, Duty: Continuous, Velocity-
0.3m/sec.

12 Nos. 36

Supernatant Transfer Pump: Supply of Supernatant Transfer
pump with capacity of 20 cu.m /hr with 12 m head along with
suitable Non clog impeller and Mechanical seal arrangement.
Make- Grundfos/ABS/ FLYGT or equivalent.
MOC: All the wetted and non wetted parts are in SS316L (CF8M).

13 Nos. 9
Page 281 of 449

preventer along with weather proof starter control panel and
SS316 Foundation Bolt & Nut.
Trailer: Four wheel 8 Ton capacity Trailer with turn table, turn
plate, complete chassis with cross bars, wheel assembly, side
doors, platform, spring assembly, axle, disc, light and hand brake
14 assembly. Hook arrangements shall be provided for connecting Nos. 9
with the tractor. Inner surface of the trailer to be covered with
anticorrosive material or with SS 304 sheet.
Tractor: Supply of Tractor 55 hp with hook arrangement for

15 Nos. 3
connecting the trailer.
Pipes and fittings: Supply of piping and accessories with Header
and Lateral lines and suitable supporting Structural.
MOC:
1. Pipe and accessories- HDPE PAN 10
3. Chemical dosing lines( NaOH, HCl )- HDPE, PN10, PE100,
IS4984
16 Lot 3
2. Process lines- 0.6 to 0.8 m/sec (Gravity, backwash outlet and
pump suction lines)/ 1.2 to 1.8 m/sec (pump delivery lines,
pressure lines)welding:
3. HDPE lines are joined with Butt welding.
Page 282 of 449

Valves and NRVs: Supply of Valves and NRVs for the CCRU
System as per furnished detail:
1. For low pressure Valves - Butterfly valve, 150 Class, CF8M-

Disc, EPDM- Seat
17 2. For low pressure NRVs – Wafer type, 150 Class, CF8M- Disc, Lot 3
Seat ‘O’ Ring- EPDM
3. For all High pressure Valves and NRVs- Ball Valve- Flanged
end/ SCV- Flanged end, 300 or 600 Class as suitable application,
Duplex.
4. For chemical dosing – PP Ball valve, Flanged end, 150 Class.
SPARES AND SAFETY EQUIPMENT for 3 Modules:
19 Safety equipment, Weigh balance and spares for all the pumps, Lot 1
stirrer assembly and electrical controls
LAB EQUIPMENT: Lab equipment for analysis of Chrome
20 Lot 1
content
Erection, fabrication, Testing and commissioning charges for 3
21 Lot 1
Modules.
Electrical Items:
PMCC Panel for CCRU: (suitable for 3 modules x 300 KLD)
Supply of PMCC suitable panel rating of , 433 Volts, 50 Hz, TPN
shall be Compartmentalized, free standing, floor mounting, dust &
Vermin proof, Single front access, Bottom cable entry,
Electrolyte Aluminium busbar, Horizontal & vertical bus
chambers for 3 Phase with neutral, 433 Volt AC, & Control busbar
for single phase 110 Volt AC, Starter modules, Cable chambers
along with separate compartment for Instrumentation marshalling
1.0 Lot 1
arrangement with following specification:
Make: ABB/ L&T/ Siemens/Schneider
Note: (a) Digital multifunction meter shall have Modbus
output & same shall be connected through PLC system to
monitor the energy reading at Central monitoring SCADA
panel located at CETP admin building. (b) SFU shall be
suitable for Harsh Environmental. (Ref: L&T Product, HE
Grade SFU)
Incomer Feeder:
3Pole, Suitable rating, ACB / MCCB for incomer with
microprocessor based Over current, Short Circuit, earth fault relay
and shunt release & under voltage relay, 3Nos.of Current
transformers, Digital Multifunction meter, R,Y,B, ON, OFF, Trip
indication lamps, 2 Nos of KVA Control transformer with SFU,
contactor, timer, indication lamp etc.,
Page 283 of 449

DOL Feeder:
Direct On Line starters modules with Suitable rating TPN fuse
switch unit, 110 Volt AC operated 3 pole power contactor with 2
NO+2 NC aux. contact- 1 No. & control & feed back signal
auxiliary contactors with 2 NO+2NC aux. contacts - 4 Nos., Bi-
metal Over Load Relay, Power and control HRC fuses, 110 Volt,
LED Panel indicating lamps for starter ON/OFF/Trip, hour meter,
3 Nos. of Current Transformer with Digital ammeter and Connect
well Make, CST type, Cable connector blocks etc., "ON" Push
button, Emergency type "OFF" push button, Terminal protection
cover
Starter module should have local / Remote selection switch and
manual/auto (through PLC) mode operation selection.
(i) Rating & quantity shall be provided on CCRU system's
requirement.
Star/Delta Feeder:
Star/Delta starters modules, Suitable ratings TPN fuse switch unit,
110 Volt AC operated 3 pole power contactor with 2 NO+2 NC
aux. contact- 3 Nos. & Control contactors with 2 NO+2NC aux.
contacts - 4 Nos., Bi-metal Over Load Relay, Power and control
HRC fuses, 110 Volt, LED Panel indicating lamps for starter
ON/OFF/Trip, hour meter, "ON" Push button, Emergency type
"OFF" push button, Terminal protection cover, Cable connector
blocks etc.,
Starter module should have local / Remote selection switch and
manual/auto (through PLC) mode operation selection.
requirement.
VFD / SS Feeder & Spare feeder: MCCB For outgoing feeder
for VFD/Soft starter panels.
requirement.
(b) 1 No. of 100 Amps, TPN Fuse switch units with 63 Amps
HRC fuse links for Spare.
(c) 1 Nos. of 32 Amps, TPN Fuse switch units with 20 Amps HRC
fuse links as spare feeder.
(d) 1 Nos. of 63 A, TPN Fuse switch units with 50 Amps HRC
fuse links as spare feeder
Page 284 of 449

Supply & erection of Weather proof, Local ON/OFF push button
station with following specifications for local control all
equipment.
(a ) Enclosure shall have MOC of Die cast Aluminium with
Canopy , IP 65, Painting with anti corrosive, powder coated.
1 No. of Non illuminated "ON" Green Colour Push button with 2
2 NO + 2 NC contact. Lot 1
(b) 1 No. of Emergency Stay put Red Colour Mushroom actuator,
(c) Supply of accessories including Name plate, SS fasteners,
(d) Supply and fixing of cable junction box for all motors (Incase
of motor cable terminal boxes are small sizes when compared with
cable size)
Incoming cables :
Supply, laying, termination of suitable Runs x Suitable Core x
Suitable size, Aluminium Conductor, 1100 Volts, XLPE Insulated
and PVC Sheathed, Armoured U.G cable with necessary cable
3 gland for the following area: Lot 1
Cable from
(i) CETP PCC Panel to PMCC panel of CCRU,
(ii) CETP MLDB to LDB
(iii) CETP MPDB to PDB
a) Cables for power circuits shall be provided with copper
conductors upto 4 sq.mm & above 4 sq.mm aluminium conductor
4 cable. Lot 1
b) Cables for control circuits shall be of stranded copper conductors
with a minimum size of 5 cores x 1.5 sq.mm.
Supply of 1100V, Suitable No.of Core x suitable size, Copper/
Aluminium Conductor, PVC Insulated and Sheathed, Armoured
U.G cable with necessary cable gland. Cable from PMCC panel to
individual equipment's.
Supply of 1100V, 5 Core x 1.5 sq.mm, Copper Conductor, PVC
gland. Cable from PMCC panel to push button station of individual
equipment's, Make: RPG/Finolex/Polycab.
Supply of Philips/CG Make, Industrial 18 / 36 Watts, LED twin
type light fitting with reflector shading for CCRU System
Supply of Philips/CG Make, weather proof 125 watts LED lamp
for CCRU System
Page 285 of 449

Providing Power plug points suitable size conductor, conduit
pipes, metal boxes with 16 A, metal glad 3 pin (for single phase
with neutral supply) and 4 (for three phase with neutral supply) pin
plug and socket and 16 A Triple/Four pole MCB
mm, installation of light control switches and receptacles housed
in stove enameled steel boxes, earthing with 14 SWG copper
flexible conduit etc., shall be included in the Contractor's scope.
All work necessary for fixing of boxes, conduits etc., together with
(b) Supply of 433 volts, 3 Phase Neutral Power Distribution
Board with 125 Amps, TPN, ELCB, bus bar type, adequate No.
of way with 32 A Double pole/ Triple pole MCBs for outgoings.
(e) Supply, erection of 120 / 150 / 250 Watts, LED street lamp
with RCC pole, industrial type, corrosion proof fittings for inside
& outside of pumping house - 1 Lot.
Lot.
/ Almonord - 1 Lot.
Page 286 of 449

FRP Cable tray:
7 Lot 1
provided with necessary tray M.S supports, civil works Entire
cable shall be laid on cable tray only. Earthing shall be provided at
accepted)
9 Lot 1
3043 (For PMCC panels & Motor Body, earth pits should be
interlinked with others except PLC/SCADA & VFD earth pits.
C Breakup cost Instrumentation works
PLC & SCADA System with UPS & Stabilizer for 300 x 3 -
900 KLD System :
1 Modular based PLC panel with necessary power supply unit, Lot 1
processor, memory card, communication module with 1 set of Hot
redundancy for power & Processor
Page 287 of 449

PLC shall consists of :(a) Local Control Unit (LCU) as local
computer to handle individual PID loops with analog input /
output signals digital inputs / outputs of(b) Data Acquisition Unit.
(c) Batch Sequencing Unit shall contain a number of external
events, timing counters, arbitrary function generators, and internal
logic.(d) Local Display shall provide analog display stations,
analog trend recorder for readout (e) Bulk Memory Unit to store
and recall process data by usually mass storage disks(f) General
Purpose Computer shall use to program by Client or third party to
perform sophisticated functions such as optimization, advance
control, expert system, etc.(g) Central Operator Display shall
contain consoles for operator communication with the system, and
display units(h) Data Highway: A serial digital data
transmission link connecting all other components in the system
shall consist of coaxial cable with redundant data highway to
reduce the risk of data loss. (i) Local area Network with required
Cable (LAN with a port device to allow connection to remote
devices through a standard local area network.(j) Able to configure
Digital Output from Instruments ( HART & Modbus)
The programmable logic controller (PLC) shall be located in
environmentally controlled and AC cooled instrument control
panel room with false ceiling, floor tiling, and wall painted room.
This shall meet the following minimum requirement. The PLC
shall have a single processor I/O with redundancy & also with auto
testing configuration and shall be a microprocessor based system.
The functional capability of the Processor system shall have logic
function, sequencing, and timing function with a range of 0 to
99.999 sec & with the least count of 0.01.Total No. of IO’S, Power
Supply, Communication Cable, Relay Card will be decided as per
Vendor requirement Potential free/only contact with contact
ratings shall be provided for output contacts from PLC. All output
cards for driving pneumatic/motorized valves, alarm Annunciators
– 110V AC, 0.5A (Inductive) & 24V DC and 2A (Inductive)
I/O Tags - As required Lot 1
SCADA
CITEC” based SCADA system with permanent licensed software
for PLC/SCADA system including PLC programs & logic controls Lot 1
for 2000 tags for PLC
Engineering, Documentation, Programming & Commissioning L.S 1
Surge protection devices (Surge arrestor) - for voltage spike &
Nos. 4.0
lightning protection
Page 288 of 449

UPS & Servo Stabilizer (With Redundant):
5 kVA, On-line UPS with 8 hours power back up and suitable
servo stabilizer.
UPS
Advanced DSP Controlled UPS System, Pure Sine wave, SPWM
Technology with Gibbet's, High MOTIF and minimum MATTER,
SNMP interface – web enabled monitoring, Full function LCD
display to monitor electrical parameters, Overload & Short circuit
protection with audible alarm, Built-in spike and surge protector,
Static bypass switch, Input Voltage: 433 Volt ± 10%, combined
variation in Voltage & frequency ± 5%, Output voltage: 230 V AC
with 8 hours power Backup, along with Exide tubular 180 AH,
suitable Nos. of batteries with necessary cables & hardware
2 Lot 2
Make: Numeric/DB/Equivalent
Stabilizer
Single Phase, Oil Cool / Air Cooled, Input Range 170V -270V,
Output Voltage 230V AC adjustable between 200V-260V,
Correction Rate 25V / 35V / 60V / Sec, Protection Over/Under
Voltage, Short-circuit, Overload, Fuse Protection for Motor &
Input Output on, LEDs Indication Input On, Output On, Output
Cut Off, Output Low Cut Off ,Output High Cut Off, Over Load,
Insulation Class "B", Built-in spike and surge protector, Mode of
System Fully automatic / manual, Mode of System Fully
automatic / manual, System Construction As Per IS : 9815-1994
Location: Pilot Plant
Pressure gauge
Type: SS/GLYCERIN filled, 6'' Dia, snapper arrangements SS 316
internal & SS 316L outer casing, or corrosive/scale forming
3 effluent, 1/2 inch ss Nipple, Gate valve, Coupling for pressure Lot 3
gage, external zero adjustment knob. Range - 0 to 10
kg/cm2Make: Waree/Forbes Marshall/General
pH analyzer :
Transmitter: Micro controller based 2 wire transmitter, Large UV
protected LCD display with local operator interface, menu driven
program, non - volatile memory , push button for calibration,
process temperature compensation, non explosive proof type, Dual
4 / Triple channel input will be considered in case of nearby other Lot 3
analyzers, 2 No. Relay contact for future interlock, flow through
assembly with 1/2" NPT process connection, Cable Length 10 m,
Junction box to be provided to avoid cable damage, Voltage :
Universal, 24V DC, Output - 4-20 mA/Modbus/HART, Mounting-
Separate field mounting, IP 67/IP 66(Nema 4X)/IP 65 weather
proof thermo plastic enclosure.
Page 289 of 449

Level Switch:
Specification: Side wall mounted Magnetic level switch with IP 65
5 Lot 3
and weather proof Cable terminal with 2 NO+2 NC aux. contacts
Make: Forbes Marshal/E&H/Emerson/Equivalent
Level transmitter :
Specification: Non- Contacting Sensor, UV protected LCD display
with local operator interface & backlight for night vision, remote
enclosure with indicating, transmitting and controlling electronics,
measurement accuracy shall be +/- 0.25%.Supply Voltage :
6 Universal/24V DC, Output - 4-20 mA/Modbus/HART. Separate Lot 3
canopy with sun light protection. Range - 5 Meter
Application : Sulphuric acid
Location: Chrome Recovery unit
Electromagnetic flow meter for Member Units (Chrome
Recovery)
Flow Head: Liner: PFA, Electrode: Hastelloy
C/Tantalum/Platinum, Grounding Rings: Hastelloy C, End
Connection: With Flange, Protection: IP 68, Flow tube: SS 304,
The flow head should be sealed permanently using potting
compound to avoid entry of water through cable entry, Flange:
ANSI 150 class. Signal Converter
7
mounting, Type: Microprocessor based, Output: 4-20
mA/Modbus/HART, Empty pipe detection, Display: LED or LCD
with backlighting, Parameters: Actual flow rate in Cu.m/hr &
totalizer flow in cu.m, Housing: Die cast Aluminium, Enclosure:
IP 65 with weather proof thermo plastic canopy, Accuracy: ±
0.5%, Supply voltage: Universal
DN 80 - Chrome Liquor Transfer pump Nos. 9
DN 32 - Recovered Chrome Pump Nos. 9
8 Erection, fabrication, Testing and commissioning charges Lot 1
III
1 Testing of Treatment Component with Fresh Water (7th month) Lot 1
Commissioning of plant with effluent and stabilization of the plant
2 Lot 1
(From 8th to 10th month)
Rectification / Completion of second set of Punch list issued by
3 Lot 1
PMA (11th month)
Preparation and submission of Engineering Package Document,
O&M Manual, Standard Operating Procedure (SOP), Equipment
4 Lot 1
operation and repair manual (EORM) and On-Site Emergency Plan
should be submitted before commissioning activities. (11th month)
5 Lot 1
duration of 72 hours with the effluent (11th month)
Page 290 of 449

Carry out Reliability Test Run (RTR) for a duration of 1 month with
6 Lot 1
the effluent. (12th month)
Training of operators of the O&M Agency for smooth transition
7 Lot 1
after RTR is completed. (12th month)
Handing over of the plant to the JTETA after successful completion
8 of RTR and initiation of commercial operation of the plant.(12th Lot 1
month)
Process performance guarantee to be borne by the Tenderer:
Sl. No Parameters Unit Values
1. Chrome Recovery % 98 to 99%
Chromium in
2. supernatant discharge ppm Less than 2
to CETP from CCRU
Dewatered Chromium
3. % solids More than 30%
Hydroxide cake
Page 291 of 449

Milestone for implementation of 900 KLD (300 KLD x 3 Modules) Common Chrome
Recovery Unit (CCRU – 12 Months)
1. Design, Engineering & Submission of data sheets, 1st month
2. Civil works From 2 nd to 4th months
5. PMA shall from time to time issue necessary 7th month
instructions, defects list, comments etc., also including
a Punch list, if any, after completion of erection
activities. The Successful Tenderer shall rectify /
complete the points in the punch list before
commencement of testing of plant and
machineries.Rectification / Completion of first set of
From 7th to 9th month
the plant
8. Rectification / Completion of second set of Punch list
10th month
10. Carry out Performance Guarantee & Test Run (PGTR) 10th month
for a duration of 72 hours with the effluent
11. Carry out Reliability Test Run (RTR) for a duration of 11th month
one month with the effluent.
12. Training of operators of the O&M Agency before 12th month
commissioning activities and handing over after
successful completion of PGTR and RTR
successful completion of RTR and initiation of
commercial operation of the plant.
Page 292 of 449

Component -D
Technical specifications for ZLD
Based Pilot Plant
Page 293 of 449

ZLD based pilot plant for a capacity of 200 KLD
A ZLD based pilot plant for a capacity of 200 KLD is proposed in the Jajmau CETP for
carrying out the Research and Developmental activities. The proposed pilot plant would
comprises of Collection well, Bar scree, Fine screen, Plain sedimentation tank,
Homogenisation Tank, Primary clarifier, Sulphide oxidation system, Pre-denitrification
system, secondary biological treatment (ASP), Secondary clarifier, Lime-Soda softening
system, Nano filtration system, Reverse Osmosis (chloride and sulphate streams), High
Pressure RO system, Multiple Effect Evaporator (MEE) with salt recovery system and
Agitated Thin Film Dryer (ATFD) for mother liquor handling. This proposed pilot plant
would be established in the Jajmau CETP.
The main objective of the pilot plant is to evaluate the performance of the various
treatment components comprising pre-treatment, Membrane Processes (NF-RO) and
Reject Management System (RMS) with salt recovery system and optimising the plant
performance and operation and maintenance cost of the treatment units. The same inlet
effluent parameter given for 20 MLD CETP shall be considered for designing ZLD pilot
plant. The facility can also be used for trial of new upcoming technologies in the future
and for training personnel, students and researchers A detailed design basis of the
proposed pilot plant is given in table below.
Page 294 of 449

Table 1; Design Basis of the Proposed Pilot Plant
Treatment Stages / Quantity
S. No Dimension Design basis / Specifications
Components (Nos)
Preliminary Treatment System
Coarse Screen 2 Nos Screen chamber Inflow to the system: 200 m3/day
Peak factor: 3
1. Clear Spacing between bars: 10 mm
Type: Two Nos. each of manual & mechanised
Screens
Collection Well 1 No 2.3 m Dia. x 1.5 m SWD Inflow: 200 m3/day
Volume: 6.2 m3 HRT : 15 mins
2.
Peak factor:3
Submersible mixer: 1 No ( 0.06 kW)
Raw effluent transfer 2 Nos Inflow: 200 m3/day
pumps (1W+1S) Capacity of the Pump: 25 m3/hr@ 12.5 m Head
Total No. of Pumps: 2 Nos (1W+1S)
3.
Operation hrs / day : 8 hrs
Type: Submersible
Fine Screen 2 Nos Rotary drum screen with Inflow to the system: 200 m3/day
(1W+1S) auto backwash Peak factor: 3
4.
arrangement Clear opening : 3 mm
Type: Rotary drum screen
Grit Chamber 2 Nos 1.5 m L x 1 m W x 0.3 m Inflow : 200 m3/day
(1W+1S) LD+0.3 FB Peak Factor:3
Volume: 0.4 m3 Peak flow: 25 m3/hr
5. Settling velocity: 0.15 m/sec
SOR: 1950 to 2160 Detention Period: 60 seconds
m3/m2/day Grit storage depth: 0.1 meter
Horizontal velocity: 0.2 m/sec
Page 295 of 449

Components (Nos)
Pre-Settling Tank 2 Nos 4.6 m Dia. x 1.5 m SWD Inflow:200 m3/day
6. (Plain Sedimentation) Volume of each Tank: Surface Overflow rate: 1 m3/m2/hr
25m3
Sludge withdrawal 2 Nos. Sludge Transfer pump: 3 m3/hr
7.
pump-1 (1W+1S) kW of sludge pump: 0.55 kW
Storage and 1 No Volume of Tank: 200 m3 Inflow: 200 m3/day
Homogenisation Tank HRT: 24 Hrs
Energy requirement for mixing: 4 – 8 W/m3
8. Flow makers : 1 No
kW of Flow maker: 1.0 kW
Flow jets: 1 No
kW of Flow Jet: 0.6 kW
Raw effluent Transfer 2 Nos Capacity of the each pump: 9 m3/hr @ 12.5 m Head
9. Pump (1W+1S) kW of the Pump: 0.75 kW
Type: Submersible
Odor Control System
Sodium Hydroxide 2 Nos Capacity : 100 LPH
10. Dosing Pump (1W+1S)
(Optional)
Sodium Hydroxide 1 No 500 Lts
11.
Storage Tank (Optional)
Hydrogen Peroxide 2 Nos Capacity : 100 LPH
12. Dosing Pump (1W+1S)
(Optional)
Hydrogen Peroxide 1 No 500 Lts
13.
Primary Clarifier / Clariflocculator System
14. Flash Mixer-I 1 No Volume: 0.7 m3 Inflow:200 m3/day
Page 296 of 449

Components (Nos)
HRT: 5 mins
kW of Mixer: 0.75 kW
Qty: 1 Nos
Lime Dosing System: 1 No Volume:5 m3 Lime Conc. 5%
Lime Preparation & Lime Dosing rate: 1000 mg/lit
15.
Dosing Tank with Lime requirement : 200 Kgs/day
Agitator Milk of Lime Dosing rate: 20 Litres/m3
Lime Dosing Pump 2 Nos Capacity of the Pump: 200 LPH
16.
Flash Mixer-II 1 No Volume: 0.7 m3 Inflow: 200 m3/day
HRT: 5 mins
17.
kW of Mixer: 0.75 kW
Qty: 1 Nos
Alum Dosing System 1 No Volume: 2 m3 Alum Conc. 10%-20%
Alum Preparation & Alum Dosing rate: 600 mg/lit
18. Dosing Tank with Alum requirement : 120 Kgs/day
Agitator Alum Dosing rate: 6 Litres/m3
Volume of Tank: 2 m3
Alum Dosing Pump 2 Nos Capacity of the Pump: 100 LPH
19.
Primary Clarifier / 1 No 3.5 m Dia. x 3.0 m SWD Inflow:200 m3/day
20.
Clariflocculator Volume: 29 m3 Surface Overflow rate: 1m3/m2/hr
Sludge withdrawal 2 Nos Sludge Transfer pump: 3 m3/hr @ 30 Head
21.
pump-2 (1W+1S) kW of the Pump: 0.55 kW
Polymer Dosing Tank 1 No Volume: 0.5 m3 Polyelectrolyte Requirement: 0.4 Kgs/day
22. Solution conc. 0.02%
Polyelectrolyte solution requirement: 0.2 m3/day
Page 297 of 449

Components (Nos)
Polyelectrolyte Dosing 2 Nos Dosing rate: 2 mg/lit
Pump (1W+1S) Capacity of the Pump: 100 LPH
23.
Sulphide Removal System

Pre-Aeration Tank / 1 No Volume of the Tank: 70 Inflow: 200 m3/day
Sulphide Oxidation m3 Inlet Sulphide conc: 250 mg/lit
Tank -I Outlet Sulphide conc: 75 mg/lit
Efficiency: 70%
Oxygen Requirement:170 Kgs/day
Specific Oxygen requirement: 1.5 Kgs / Kg of S2-
24. HRT: 8 Hrs
Air Blower requirement :( Optional)
Capacity of the blower: 190 m3/hr
kW of the blower: 5.5 kW
Quantity: 2 Nos (1W+1S)
No. of Fine Bubble Diffuser : 32 Nos
Pre-Aeration Tank / 1 No Volume of the Tank: 9 m3 Inflow: 200 m3/day
Sulphide Oxidation Inlet Sulphide conc: 75 mg/lit
Tank -II Outlet Sulphide conc: 5 mg/lit
Efficiency: 90%
25.
Oxygen Requirement: 69 Kgs/day
Specific Oxygen requirement: 1.5 Kgs / Kg of S2-
HRT: 1 hr.
Page 298 of 449

Components (Nos)
Air Blower requirement :( Optional)
Capacity of the blower: 76 m3/hr
kW of the blower: 3.7 kW
Quantity: 2 Nos (1W+1S)
No. of Fine Bubble Diffuser : 13 Nos
Distribution Tank -II for 1 No. 10m L x 10m W x 6m HRT: 30 mins
Aeration Tank
SWD + 0.5FB
26.
Volume: 600 m3
Biological Treatment System
Anoxic Tank 1 No Volume of Tank: 85 m3 Inflow : 200 m3/day
HRT: 10 hrs
27. Submersible Mixers- 0.9 kW – 1 No
SDNR: 0.42 g NO3-N/g MLVSS / day
Oxygen Credit: 3.9 Kgs/hr.
Phosphoric Acid Dosing 2 Nos. Capacity : 100 LPH, 0.37 kW
28. Pump (Nutrient Supply) (1W+1S)
(Optional)
Phosphoric Acid 1 No 500 Lts
29.
Aeration Tank- (Stage- 1 No Volume of Tank: 400 m3 Inflow: 200 m3/day
I) Inlet BOD: 900 mg/lit
MLSS: 2100 mg/lit
30. MLVSS: 1700 mg/lit
F/M Ratio: 0.15 Kg BOD/Kg of MLSS
HRT: 2.0 Days
Page 299 of 449

Components (Nos)
Oxygen requirement: 835 Kgs/day
Total Air requirement: 866 m3/hr
No. of Air Blowers: 2 Nos
Total No. of blowers (1 Working + 1 Standby)
Capacity of each Air blower: 880 m3/hr
Total No. of Fine Bubble Diffusers: 87 Nos
Flow makers: 1 No – 0.5 kW
Secondary Clarifier-I 1 No 4.6 m Dia .x 3.0 m Inflow:200 m3/day
SWD+0.3FB Surface Overflow rate: 0.5 m3/m2/hr
31.
Under flow SS conc: 10,000 mg/lit
Sludge Recirculation 2 Nos Required SRS Flow: 9 m3/hr
32. Pump-I (1W+1S) Capacity of the Pump: 9 m3/hr@12.5m head
Aeration Tank-(Stage- 1 No Volume of each Tank: Inflow: 200 m3/day
II) 400 m3 Inlet BOD: 270 mg/lit
MLSS: 2100 mg/lit
MLVSS: 1700 mg/lit
F/M Ratio: 0.06 Kg BOD/Kg of MLSS
33. HRT: 2.0 Days
SRS Flow: 9 m3/hr
Oxygen requirement: 340 Kgs/day
Total Air requirement :413 m3/hr
Total No. of blowers: 2 Nos. (1 Working + 1 Standby)
Capacity of each Air blower: 420 m3/hr
Page 300 of 449

Components (Nos)
Total No. of Fine Bubble Diffusers: 73 Nos
Flow makers: 1 No – 0.5 kW
Secondary Clarifier-II 1 No 4.6 m Dia .x 3.0 m Inflow:200 m3/day
SWD+0.3FB Surface Overflow rate: 0.5 m3/m2/hr
34.
Under flow SS conc: 10,000 mg/lit
Sludge Recirculation 2 Nos Required SRS Flow: 9 m3/hr
35. Pump-II (1W+1S) Capacity of the Pump: 9 m3/hr@12.5m head
Lime-Soda Softening system
Lime-Soda Based 1 Nos 3.5 m Dia x 3.0 m SWD Inflow:200 m3/day
Reactor Clarifier Volume: 29 m3 Surface Overflow rate: 1 m3/m2/hr
HRT: 3.5 hrs
36.
Sludge withdrawal velocity considered: 0.5m/s
Sludge Transfer Pump for RC: 1.6 cum/hr @30m
Head x 2 Nos
Lime Dosing system Same lime dosing tank of Primary Dosing rate : 2000 mg/lit
37. Preparation and Dosing clarifier system shall be used. Concentration of Lime: 5%-10%
Tank Lime requirement: 0.4 Tons /day
Caustic Dosing Pump 2 Nos Capacity of Caustic dosing Pump: 100 LPH @ 20m
(1W+1S) head
38.
Caustic dosing requirement: 1.2 m3/day
Lime Dosing Pump 2 Nos Capacity of Lime dosing Pump: 500 LPH @60m head
39. (1W+1S) Milk of lime requirement: 8 m3/day
Page 301 of 449

Components (Nos)
Soda Ash Dosing 1 No Volume: 2 m3 Dosing rate : 1000 mg/lit
System Concentration of Soda ash: 10-20%
40.
Preparation and Dosing Soda Ash requirement: 0.2 Tons /day
Tank
Soda Ash Dosing Pump 2 Nos Capacity of Soda ash dosing Pump: 100 LPH @60m
(1W+1S) head
Soda ash solution requirement: 2 m3/day
41.
Sludge Thickening system

Common Sludge 1 No Volume: 4 m3 HRT: 5 hrs
42. Holding Tank with
mixer
Sludge Transfer Pump 2 Nos Capacity of the Pump:1 m3/hr@30m head
43.
to Thickener (1W+1S) kW of the Pump :0.37 kW
Sludge Thickener – I 1 Nos 2 m Dia. x 2.5 m SWD Sources of Sludge to the thickener:
(for bio sludge and plain +0.5m FB TSS from Pre-Settler – 85 Kgs/day
sedimentation sludge) Volume of Tank:7.9 m3 Biological sludge - 57 Kgs/day
Total sludge: 142 Kgs/day
44. Thickener:
% of volume reduction achieved in the thickener –
29%
Slope: 1:8
Page 302 of 449

Components (Nos)
Polyelectrolyte Dosing 2 Nos Polymer Dosing requirement: 20 mg/lit
Pump to thickener (1W+1S) Polymer conc: 0.05%
Head: 60 m
45.
LPH: 100
kW of the pump: 0.55
Polyelectrolyte Dosing 1 No Volume:1 m3
46.
Tank
Sludge Dewatering system (Bio sludge+ Plain sedimentation)
Filter Press System 1 No Size: 1000mm x 1000mm Feed Flow: 1.9 m3/day @ 8% SC.
x30mm Filtrate volume: 1.3 m3/day
Wet Solid cake @ 20% SC: 0.4 Tons/day
Dry Solid cake 0.14 Tons/day
Type of Filter Press : Recessed Type
47.
No. of Filter Press : 1 No
No. of batches: 1 No
No. of Filter Press Plates: 14 Nos
Filter Press Feed Pump 2 Nos Capacity of the Pump: 1 m3/hr
(1W+1S) Pump Type: Screw
48.
Head: 150m
49. Filter Press Power Pack 1 No 0.37 kW
Sludge Thickener –II 1 No 2.7 m Dia. x 2.5 m SWD Sources of Sludge to the thickener:
(Primary and LSS +0.5m FB Primary Sludge –0.38 Tons/day
50.
sludge) Volume of Tank:14 m3 LSS Sludge – 0.44 Tons/day
Total sludge: 0.82 Tons/day
Page 303 of 449

Components (Nos)
Thickener:
Slope: 1:8
Polyelectrolyte Dosing 2 Nos Polymer Dosing requirement: 20 mg/lit
Pump to thickener (1W+1S) Polymer conc: 0.05%
Head: 60 m
51.
LPH: 100
kW of the pump: 0.55
Polyelectrolyte Dosing 1 No Volume:1 m3
52.
Tank
Sludge Dewatering system (Primary + LSS sludge)
Filter Press System 1 No Size: 1000mm x 1000mm Feed Flow: 7.3 m3/day @ 8% SC.
x30mm Dry Solid 0.73 Tons/day
Type of Filter Press : Recessed Type
No. of Filter Press : 1 No
53.
Cake thickness : 30 mm
No. of Filter Press Plates: 26 Nos
Filter Press Feed Pump 2 Nos Capacity of the Pump: 1 m3/hr
(1W+1S) Pump Type: Screw
54.
Head: 150m
55. Filter Press Power Pack 1 No 0.37 kW
Tertiary Filtration System – Quartz Filters
Quartz Filter Feed Tank 1 No Volume:20 m3 Inflow: 200 m3/day
56.
HRT: 2 hrs
Page 304 of 449

Components (Nos)
Quartz Filter 1 No 1.0 m Dia. x 1m HOS Filter Vessel:
(MSRL) Inflow : 200 m3/day
System operation hrs: 20 hrs/day
Flow rate: 10 m3/hr
57.
Silex media:
Quantity required/Filter:
3-5mm – Bed Height- 200mm : 270 Kgs
0.7mm – 1.2 mm – Bed Height - 800mm: 1070 Kgs
Quartz Filter Feed 2 Nos Flow rate: 10 m3/hr @ 20m Head
58.
Pump (1W+1S) kW of the Pump: 1.1 kW
Backwash Pump 2 Nos Capacity of the Pump: 15 m3/hr @ 30m Head
59.
(1W+1S) Quantity: kW of the pump: 2.2 kW
Back wash blower 2 Nos Blower capacity: 50 m3/hr
60.
(1W+1S) kW of the blower: 3.7 kW
Ultra-Filtration System (UF)
Inflow: 200 m3/day
61. Feed Tank 1No Volume:10 m3
HRT: 1 hr.
Auto back washable filter: 50 micron
No. of Membranes / Skid : 3 Nos
Type of UF Membrane: In to Out
Membrane Active Area: 100 m2/module
62. UF Membranes 1 Skid
Gross Permeate Flux: 40 LMH
Feed Flux: 53 LMH
Recovery: 85%
Filtration & backwash cycles /day: 38 cycles /day
2 Nos Capacity of the Pump : 17 m3/hr @ 30m Head
63. UF Feed Pump
(1W+1S) kW of the Pump : 3.7 kW
Page 305 of 449

Components (Nos)
2 Nos Capacity of the Pump : 20 m3/hr @ 30m Head
64. UF Backwash Pump
2 Nos Capacity of the Pump : 100 LPH @ 60m Head
65. Hypo Dosing Pump
66. Hypo Dosing Tank 1 Nos 100 Litres
67. Caustic Dosing Pump
68. Caustic Dosing Tank 1No. 100 Litres
69. HCl Dosing Pump
3 Nos Capacity of the Pump : 22 m3/hr @ 30 m Head
71. CIP Pump
Housing: SS
2 Nos No. of Elements : 3 Nos
72. Cartridge Filter
(1W+1S) Type: Wounded
73. CIP Tank with Agitator 1 No 500 Lts
Nano Filtration System (NF) - Configuration: 2:1 (2 Stages), Recovery: 80%
Feed Tank / UF Inflow: 200 m3/day
74. 1 No Volume: 20 m3
Permeate Storage Tank HRT: 2 hr
Housing MOC: SS
2 Nos No. of Filter Elements / Vessel: 3 x 2 = 6 Nos
(1W+1S) Type: Wounded
Size: 40inch Long x 2.5 inch dia.
2 Nos Capacity of the Pump: 10 m3/hr @ 30m Head
76. NF Forwarding Pump
(1W+1S) kW of the Pump: 1.5 kW
Page 306 of 449

Components (Nos)
2 Nos Capacity of the Pump: 50 LPH @ 60m Head
77. HCl Dosing Pump
2 Nos Capacity of the Pump: 50 LPH @ 60m Head
78. SMBS Dosing pump
Antiscalant Dosing 2 Nos Capacity of the Pump: 50 LPH @ 60m Head
79.
Type of NF Membrane: DSL NF8040 (GE)
Average Flux: 13.48 LMH
Recovery: 80%
Feed TDS:23360 mg/lit ( UF Permeate)
1 Skid
80. NF Membranes Reject TDS: 38320 mg/lit
Size: 8040
Stage-I : 12 Nos
Stage-II: 6 No
Total = 18 Nos
NF System configuration: 2:1
No. of Stages: 2
81. Pressure Vessels 1 Skid Stage-I: 2 Nos – 200 PSI
Stage-II: 1 Nos - 200 PSI
Total = 3 Nos
Stage-I: High Pressure Pump Flow rate: 11.3 m3/hr @
88 m Head
NF High Pressure
82. 1 Skid kW of the Pump: 5.5 kW
Pumps
Stage-II Booster Pump / ERT: 5 m3/hr @ 85m Head.
kW of the pump: 2.2 kW
NF CIP System
83. NF CIP Tank 1 No Capacity : 1 m3
Page 307 of 449

Components (Nos)
No. of Elements : 5
2 Nos
84. Cartridge Filter Type: Wounded
(1W+1S)
Size: 40 inch long x 2.5 inch Dia
2 Nos Capacity of the Pump: 15 m3/hr @ 30m Head
85. NF CIP Pump
RO System - Configuration: 2:1 (2 stages), Recovery: 60%
Feed Tank / NF Inflow : 160 m3/day
86. 1 No Volume:16 m3
Permeate Storage Tank HRT: 2 hrs
2 Nos Capacity of the pump: 8 m3/hr@ 30m Head.
87. RO Forwarding Pump
2 Nos No. of Elements / Vessel : 3 x 2 = 6 Nos
(1W+1S) Size: 40 inch Long x 2.5 inch dia.
2 Nos Capacity of the Pump: 50 LPH @ 60m Head.
89. HCl Dosing pump
91. SMBS Dosing Pump
92. SMBS Dosing Tank 1 No. 100 litres
Antiscalant Dosing 2 Nos Capacity of the Pump: 50 LPH @ 60m Head.
93.
Antiscalant Dosing 1 No. 200 litres
94.
Tank
RO System Configuration: 2:1
Type of RO Membrane: SW30HRLE-370/34i
(FILMTEC)
95. RO Membranes 1 Skid
Average Flux: 7.7 LMH
Recovery: 60%
Feed TDS:19600 mg/lit (NF Permeate)
Page 308 of 449

Components (Nos)
Reject TDS:48000 mg/lit
Size: 8040
Stage-I : 12 Nos
Stage-II: 6 Nos
Total = 18 Nos
Stage-I: High Pressure Pump Flow rate: 8 m3/hr @ 215
m Head
RO High Pressure
96. 1 Skid kW of the Pump: 9.3 kW
Pumps
Stage-II Booster Pump / ERT: 6.5 m3/hr @ 250 m
Head.
Stage-I: 2 Nos – 450 PSI
97. Pressure Vessels 1 Skid Stage-II: 1 Nos - 1000 PSI
Total : 3 Nos
Inflow : 158 m3/day
Degassing Tower for Flow rate / hr: 8 m3/hr of RO Permeate @ pH 6.2
98. 1 No 0.6 m dia. x 1.0 m HoS
RO Permeate Hours of operation : 20 hrs/day
Degasser outlet pH: 7.2
Degasser Tower 2 Nos Air flow rate: 200 m3/hr
99.
Blowers (1W+1S) kW of the each air blower:0.37 kW
RO CIP System
100. CIP Tank 1 No Volume: 1 m3
2 Nos Capacity of the Pump:15 m3/hr @ 30m Head
101. CIP Pump
(1W+1S) kW of the Pump:2.2 kW
No. of Elements : 5 Nos
2 Nos
102. Cartridge Filter Type: Wounded
(1W+1S)
HPPTRO– Chloride stream
103. Feed Tank 1 No Volume: 7 m3 Inflow: 65 m3/day
Page 309 of 449

Components (Nos)
HRT: 2 hrs
DTRO Forwarding 2 Nos Capacity of the Pump: 3.5 m3/hr
104.
Spiral and Disc Type (ROCHEM)
105. RO Membranes 1 Skid Hybrid Type: 90 bar
Bolton Type: 120 bar
Hybrid Type: 90 bar
106. High Pressure Pump 1 Skid
Housing : SS
2 Nos
107. Cartridge Filter No. of Elements / Vessel: 1 x 2 = 2 Nos
(1W+1S)
Size: 40 inch Length x 2.5 inch dia.
108. HCl Dosing Pump
110.
HPPTRO – Sulphate Stream
Inflow: 40 m3/day
111. Feed Tank 1No Volume: 4 m3
HRT: 2 hrs
DTRO Forwarding 2 Nos Capacity of the Pump: 2 m3/hr
112.
Spiral and Disc Type (ROCHEM)
113. RO Membranes 1 Skid Hybrid Type: 90 bar
Hybrid Type: 90 bar
114. High Pressure Pump 1 Skid
Page 310 of 449

Components (Nos)
Housing : SS
2 Nos
115. Cartridge Filter No. of Elements / Vessel: 1 x 2 = 2 Nos
(1W+1S)
Size: 40 inch Length x 2.5 inch dia.
116. HCl Dosing Pump
118.
MEE-Sulphate stream
Inflow: 14 m3/day
119. Feed Tank 1 No. Volume: 7 m3
HRT: 10 hrs
Feed flow rate / FFE: 0.7 m3/hr
Feed Solid conc: 10-11%
Outlet Solid conc: 25- 30% (Sp.g-1.25)
Falling Film
120. 1 No Recovery:63%
Evaporator(FFE)
Condensate flow: 0.44 m3/hr
Concentrate flow: 0.26 m3/hr
Steam Requirement: 0.15 Tons/
Adiabatic Chiller Feed Inflow: 5.2 m3/day
121. 1 No Volume: 3 m3
Tank HRT: 10 hrs
Feed rate: 0.3 m3/hr @ 1.22 Sp.g
122. Adiabatic Chiller 1 No Operation Hrs: 15 hrs/day
Steam Requirement: 0.3 Tons/hr
Inflow: 5 m3/day
123. Feed Tank 1 No Volume: 4 m3
HRT: 15 hrs
Forced Circulation Feed flow rate: 0.25 m3/hr
124. 1 No
Evaporator (FCE) Feed Solid conc: 25-28%
Page 311 of 449

Components (Nos)
Outlet Solid conc: 45%- 50%
Condensate water Recovery:44%
Feed rate: 1 Tons/day
125. Pusher Centrifuge 1 No
Salt output rate: 0.05 Tons/hr
MEE- Chloride stream
Inflow: 28 m3/day
HRT: 10 hrs
Feed flow rate: 1.4 m3/hr
Falling Film
127. 1 No Outlet Solid conc: 30- 35% (Sp.g-1.32)
Evaporator(FFE)
Inflow: 8 m3/day
HRT: 15 hrs
Feed flow rate: 0.4 m3/hr
Feed Solid conc: 30- 35%
Forced Circulation
129. 1 No Recovery:30%
Evaporator (FCE)
Steam Requirement: 0.15 Ton
Feed rate: 1.6 Tons/day
130. Pusher Centrifuge 1 No
Salt output 0.08 Tons/hr
ATFD – Sulphate stream
131. Feed Tank 1 No Volume: 2 m3 Inflow: 1.8 m3/day
Page 312 of 449

Components (Nos)
HRT: 20 hrs
Feed rate : 0.1 m3/hr
Feed Solid conc: 40%
Agitated Thin Film
132. 1 No Condensate flow: 0.05 m3/hr
Drier
Recovery: 50-70%
Steam requirement: 0.12 Tons/hr
ATFD – Chloride stream
Inflow: 4 m3/day
HRT: 20 hrs
Agitated Thin Film
134. 1 No Condensate flow: 0.08 m3/hr
Drier
Recovery: 50-70%
Steam requirement: 0.25 Tons/hr
Common condensate Inflow: 36 m3/day
135. 1 No Volume: 27 m3
storage Tank HRT: 15 hrs
Common Recovered Inflow: 185 m3/day
136. 1 No Volume: 140 m3
water storage Tank HRT: 15 hrs
Capacity of the Pump: 13 m3/hr @ 40 m Head
Recovered water 2 Nos
137. Pumping hrs / day : 15 hrs
transfer pump (1W+1S)
Packaged boiler with capacity of 1.5 Tones Medium
138. Boiler 1 No Medium Pressure
Pressure
Solid Waste Management
ETP Sludge: 1.5 T/day
STP Sludge: 1.0 T/day
139. Digester 1 No
Fleshing Sludge: 1.5 T/day
Trimmings & Misc. Waste Sludge: 0.15 T/day
Page 313 of 449

Components (Nos)
Total Sludge: 4.15 T/day
SCADA / PLC and
140. Online monitoring 1 No Pre-treatment, RO and MEE sections
system
Page 314 of 449

Specification sheet for Boiler:

Sl.No Item description Specification
1. General
1.1. Type Medium pressure packaged Boiler
1.2. Application Steam Generation
1.3. Design, Fabrication & Testing IBR 1950 with latest Amendments
Code
1.4. Location Out door
1.6. Fuel Coal
1.7. Type of Fuel Feeding Auto/Manual feeding
2. Construction features
2.1. Shell Horizontal Multi tubular
2.2. Furnace Enclosure Water Wall with membrane Panel (Five side)
2.3. Heat recovery Air /Water Preheater
2.4. Feed Water Pump Multistage Centrifugal Pump
2.5. Reduction of fly ash Mechanical Dust Collector
2.6. Draught Balanced Mechanical Draught (FD Fan & ID Fan

with VFD control)
2.7. Feed water pump- Make Grundfos or Equivalent
2.8. Removal of Ash 1. At Outlet of Ash chute in Shell reversing

Chamber
2. At Outlet of Ash chute in Shell Outlet.
3. RAV with motor at the Bottom of MDC
4. Ash Chute at the Bottom of APH
3.1. Fire Grates Cast Iron bars
Page 315 of 449

3.2. Charging Doors Cast Iron
3.3. Boiler Tubes As per IBR 1950 with Latest Amendments
3.4. Boiler Shell As per IBR 1950 with Latest Amendments
4. Furnace Refractory
4.1. Insulation Bricks for furnace Cold Face bricks
4.2. Refractory Bricks for Furnace High Alumina 40 Bricks/IS-8 Bricks
4.3. Refractory Bricks below Fire IS-8 Bricks/IS-6 Bricks

grate
4.4. Refractory cement Super Crete Castable refractory cement
4.5. Fireclay Air setting Mortar
4.6. Expansion joints Mill boards, Ceramic Blankets
5. Insulation for Boiler
5.1. Main Shell LRB Rockwool Mattress 100mm Thickness with

density of 100 kg/cum
5.2. Water Wall Panel Membrane LRB Rockwool Mattress 100mm Thickness with
5.3. Water Wall membrane Header Ceramic Blanket 50 mm Thickness
pipe
5.4. Air/Water Preheater LRB Rockwool Mattress 50mm Thickness with
5.5. Hot Air /Flue Gas Ducts LRB Rockwool Mattress 50mm Thickness with
5.6. Steam Lines LRB Rockwool Mattress 100mm Thickness with
200mm,150mm,100mm density of 100 kg/cum
Diameter
5.7. Steam Lines below 100mm LRB Rockwool Mattress 100mm Thickness with
Diameter density of 100 kg/cum
5.8. Flange Bolt and Nuts High Tension Bolt and Nuts
5.9. Foundation Bolts 50mm Diameter, 2.5 m long, with thread portion
200 mm long, washers and Double Nuts.
5.10. Template for Civil Foundation Template As per the base plate orientation
6. Specification for MS Pipes and Fittings
Page 316 of 449

6.1. MS Pipes As per IBR 1950 with Latest Amendments and the
IBR test Certificate should to be attached
6.2. Fittings As per IBR 1950 with Latest Amendments and the
IBR test Certificate should to be attached
6.3. Specification for Fabrication of
Ducts
6.4. Air and Flue gas Ducts MS Plate 4 mm Thickness (Grade IS 2062)
6.5. Duct Flanges MS Plate 5 mm Thickness (Grade IS 2062)
7. Specification for Fabrication of Pipes:
7.1. Down Comer and Riser Pipes To be Welded by IBR Certified Welder and the
and Steam Pipes Specimen to be analyzed with X ray Testing
7.2. Hydraulic Test for steam lines Minimum 1.5 times of design working pressure
and fittings
7.3. Nozzle provision for Valve and Supply of Valve and Safety valve for steam line
Safety valve for steam line header, Flow meter and PRS under scope of
header, Flow meter and PRS employer, however necessary nozzle with flange
joints should be provided by Supplier/ Contractor.
7.4. Nozzle provision for Multi Fuel Suitable and necessary nozzle provisions should be
viz. Agro Waste/ Coal / Natural provided
gas
7.5. Emission Control for Boiler: The emission limit of Particulate Matter pollutant
for 6 TPH boiler should be within 800 mg/Nm3
and 12% of CO2 correction shall be the reference
value for Particulate Matter emission standard for
boilers. To meet the standard, Mechanical dust
collector, bag filter / wet scrubber shall be installed
as emission control equipment along with boiler.
7.6. Stack Height for the Boilers The calculation for height of stack as per CPCB’s
emission norms is given below:
H = 14 Q0.3, Where
H = Height of stack in metre
Q = Sulphur dioxide (SO2) emission rate in kg/hr.
In no case, the stack height shall be less than 30

metres. Where providing tall stacks are not
feasible using above formula, the limit of 400
mg/Nm3 for SO2 emission shall be met by
providing necessary control equipment with a
minimum stack height of 30 metres.
Page 317 of 449

7.7. Fly ash collection system Fly ash collection system shall be installed to
collect fly ash from shell reversal chamber, air
pre-heater, Mechanical Dust Collector, bag filter
/ wet scrubber and Bottom ash collection system
shall be installed at the bottom of the furnace.
Both fly ash and bottom ash shall be stored in the
respective silo and sent it for brick manufacturing
& co-processing in the Cement Industry.
7.8. Stack Emission Monitoring As per CPCB Norms
System
Schedule of Items:
The items mentioned here are only indicative and for guidance purpose only.
Bidder may make his own asessement as per the scope of work to meet the KPIs.
Sl.
Item Description Unit Quantity
No.
Component D - 200 KLD capacity Zero Liquid Discharge
(ZLD) Pilot Plant
I Civil works
Construction of RCC Circular tank for Pre-Settling
I.I
Tank (Plain Sedimentation) - 4.6 m Dia. x 1.5 m SWD
1.3 Soil packing for bottom of the raft slope 1:12 cm 1:7 cu.m 12.56
2.1 Plain cement concrete 1:4:8 using 40mm jelly for foundation cu.m 1.26
3
Kg/Cum) using Sulphate resistant cement.
3.1 Raft cu.m 1.41
3.2 Walls cu.m 2.36
3.4 Providing launder slab and wall cu.m 0.87
4.1 Centering / Shuttering for Raft sq.m 1.88
4.2 Centering / Shuttering for wall sq.m 28.26
4.4 Providing launder slab and wall sq.m 21.67
Page 318 of 449

Sl.
No.
cement concrete works to all heights and depths including
5.1 cost of binding wire (18 Gauge) etc., complete as per the IS MT 0.38
standards and specifications
6 Plastering Works
6.1 water proofing compound to an average thickness of 15 mm
for outer surfaces finished neatly to one level, including
scaffolding, curing etc., complete
a) walls sq.m 23.55
a) walls sq.m 23.55
Construction of RCC Circular tank for Pre-Settling
I.II Tank
(Plain Sedimentation) - 4.6 m Dia. x 1.5 m SWD
3
3.1 Raft cu.m 4.92
3.2 Walls cu.m 4.71
standards and specifications (using corrosion resistant steel
)
6 Plastering Works
Page 319 of 449

Sl.
No.
a) walls sq.m 47.10
a) walls sq.m 47.10
Construction of RCC Rectangular tank for bar screen
I.III
and brush screen chamber- 8 x 1.5 x 1.3m
1
1.1 Raft cu.m 6.24
1.2 Walls cu.m 4.94
2 Working platform and rcc staircase arrangement cu.m 1.44
2.2 Centering & Shuttering for rectangular tank
3 wall sq.m 49.40
4.1 Reinforcement Works
cost of binding wire (18 Gauge) etc., complete as per the MT 0.88
standards and specifications ( using corrosion resistant
steel )
5 Plastering Works
water proofing compound to an average thickness of 15 mm
5.1 Raft sq.m 16.80
5.2 Walls sq.m 49.40
6 Painting works
6.2 Raft sq.m 202.50
Page 320 of 449

Sl.
No.
Supply, providing and applying of FRP (3000 microns thick)
over inner surfaces of civil tanks including the cost of all
applying FRP materials, preparation of surfaces, necessary
6.5 sq.m 36.00
scaffolding etc., complete (Includes of apply materials like
bisphenol resin, three layer of CS rough matt and one coat of
finishing matt with bisphenol resin.)
Construction of RCC Racetrack shape tank for SHT -
I.IV
10.0 x 4 x 5.5 m TD - 1 No.
3
3.1 Raft cu.m 16.50
3.2 Walls cu.m 30.80
4.2 wall sq.m 308.00
5 cost of binding wire (18 Gauge) etc., complete as per the MT 3.31
steel )
6 Plastering Works
6.2 Walls sq.m 308.00
7 Painting works
7.2 Raft sq.m 40.00
7.3 Walls sq.m 308.00
Supplying and fixing 250 x 150mm PVC encapsulated rung
8.2 Nos. 12.0
for steps inner side of wall
Page 321 of 449

Sl.
No.
Construction of RCC Circular tank for Primary clarifier
I.V
- 3.5 Dia x 3.0 m SWD
3
3.1 Raft cu.m 2.51
3.2 Walls cu.m 8.29
)
6 Plastering Works
a) walls sq.m 25.12
a) walls sq.m 25.12
Construction of RCC Rectangular shape tank for Pre-
I.VI
Aeration -I - 4.5x 3.0 x 5.5 m TD - 1 No.
3
Page 322 of 449

Sl.
No.
2.1 Raft cu.m 6.60
4.2 walls sq.m 165.00
5.1 cost of binding wire (18 Gauge) etc., complete as per the MT 2.26
steel )
6 Plastering Works
6.1 Floor slab sq.m 10.00
6.2 Walls sq.m 195.00
7 Painting works
7.3 Walls sq.m 195.00
8.2 Nos. 12.0
I.VII
Aeration -II - 2.0 x 1.0 x 5.5 m TD - 1 No.
3
2.1 Raft cu.m 1.80
2.2 Walls cu.m 8.13
Page 323 of 449

Sl.
No.
4.2 walls sq.m 65.00
steel )
6 Plastering Works
7 Painting works
8.2 Nos. 12.0
I.VII Construction of RCC Rectangular shape tank for
I Distribution -2.0 x 1.0 x 5.5 m TD - 1 No.
3
2.1 Raft cu.m 1.80
2.2 Walls cu.m 8.13
Page 324 of 449

Sl.
No.
steel )
6 Plastering Works
7 Painting works
8.2 Nos. 12.0
Construction of RCC Rectangular tank for Anoxic - 5 x
I.IX
3.5.0 x 5.5 m TD - 1 No.
3
2.1 Raft cu.m 6.60
4.2 walls sq.m 165.00
Page 325 of 449

Sl.
No.
steel )
6 Plastering Works
6.2 Walls sq.m 195.00
7 Painting works
7.3 Walls sq.m 195.00
8.2 Nos. 12.0
I.X
Aeration -stage - I - 10.0 x 8 x 5.5 m TD - 1 No.
3
3.1 Raft cu.m 16.50
4.2 wall sq.m 308.00
steel )
6 Plastering Works
Page 326 of 449

Sl.
No.
6.2 Walls sq.m 308.00
7 Painting works
7.2 Raft sq.m 40.00
7.3 Walls sq.m 308.00
8.2 Nos. 12.0
I.XI
Aeration -stage - II - 10.0 x 8 x 5.5 m TD - 1 No.
3
3.1 Raft cu.m 16.50
4.2 wall sq.m 308.00
steel )
6 Plastering Works
6.2 Walls sq.m 308.00
7 Painting works
Page 327 of 449

Sl.
No.
7.2 Raft sq.m 40.00
7.3 Walls sq.m 308.00
8.2 Nos. 12.0
Construction of RCC Circular tank for Secondary
I.XII
clarifier-II-4.6 Dia x 3.0 m SWD
3
3.1 Raft cu.m 5.65
)
6 Plastering Works
a) walls sq.m 56.52
a) walls sq.m 56.52
I.XII Construction of RCC Circular tank for Lime Based
I clarifier-3.5 Dia x 3.0 m SWD
Page 328 of 449

Sl.
No.
3
3.1 Raft cu.m 2.51
3.2 Walls cu.m 8.29
)
6 Plastering Works
a) walls sq.m 25.12
a) walls sq.m 25.12
c) Providing RCC super structure for clarifier mechanism
cu.m 51.00
and operating platform
Providing RCC super structure for clarifier mechanism and
cu.m 51.00
operating platform
I.XI Construction of RCC Square tank for Lime and Soda
V dosing - 4.0 x 4.0 x 1.8 m SWD
Page 329 of 449

Sl.
No.
3
3.1 Raft cu.m 5.00
3.2 Walls cu.m 3.20
3.4 Rcc super structure for agitator cu.m 0.90
4.2 wall sq.m 32.00
steel )
6 Plastering Works
7 Painting works
7.2 Raft sq.m 48.00
Construction of RCC Square tank for Sludge Holding -
I.XV
2.0 x 2.0 x 1.8 m SWD- 1 No.
Page 330 of 449

Sl.
No.
3
2.1 Raft cu.m 2.25
2.2 Walls cu.m 5.60
4 Centering & Shuttering for Square tank
4.2 wall sq.m 56.00
steel )
6 Plastering Works
7 Painting works
I.XV Construction of RCC Circular tank for Bio Sludge
I Thickener - 2.0 Dia x 2.5 m SWD - 1 No.
3
3.1 Raft cu.m 2.51
Page 331 of 449

Sl.
No.
3.2 Walls cu.m 8.29
)
6 Plastering Works
a) walls sq.m 25.12
a) walls sq.m 25.12
8.2
I.XV Construction of RCC Circular tank for Bio Sludge
II Thickener-II - 2.7 Dia x 2.5 m SWD - 1 No.
3
3.1 Raft cu.m 2.51
3.2 Walls cu.m 8.29
Page 332 of 449

Sl.
No.
)
6 Plastering Works
a) walls sq.m 25.12
a) walls sq.m 25.12
8.2
I.XV Construction of RCC Rectangular tank for Quartz filter
III feed. - 4.0 x 2.0 x 3 m TD
3
2.1 Raft cu.m 6.60
4.2 walls sq.m 165.00
steel )
6 Plastering Works
Page 333 of 449

Sl.
No.
6.2 Walls sq.m 195.00
7 Painting works
7.3 Walls sq.m 195.00
8.2 Nos. 12.0
I.XI Construction of RCC Rectangular tank for NF Feed - 4.0
X x 2.0 x 3 m TD- 1 No.
3
2.1 Raft cu.m 6.60
4.2 walls sq.m 165.00
steel )
6 Plastering Works
Page 334 of 449

Sl.
No.
6.2 Walls sq.m 195.00
7 Painting works
7.3 Walls sq.m 195.00
Construction of RCC Square tank for HPRO feed - 2.0 x
I.XX
2.0 x 1.5 m TD-1No.
3
2.1 Raft cu.m 6.60
2.2 Walls cu.m 3.38
steel )
6 Plastering Works
7 Painting works
Page 335 of 449

Sl.
No.
I.XX Construction of RCC Rectangular tank for MEE feed -
I Chloride - 4.0 x 2.0 x 1.5 m TD - 1No.
3
2.1 Raft cu.m 6.60
4.2 walls sq.m 165.00
steel )
6 Plastering Works
6.2 Walls sq.m 195.00
7 Painting works
7.3 Walls sq.m 195.00
8.2 Nos. 12.0
Page 336 of 449

Sl.
No.
I.XX Construction of RCC Square tank for MEE feed -
II Sulphate - 2.0 x 2.0 x 1.5 m TD - 1 No.
3
2.1 Raft cu.m 6.60
2.2 Walls cu.m 3.38
steel )
6 Plastering Works
7 Painting works
I.XX Construction of RCC Rectangular tank for Chiller feed -
III Sulphate - 16.0 x 3.7 x 3.5 m TD - 1 No.
Page 337 of 449

Sl.
No.
3
2.1 Raft cu.m 15.50
4.2 wall sq.m 273.00
steel )
6 Plastering Works
6.2 Walls sq.m 280.00
7 Painting works
7.3 Walls sq.m 280.00
8.2 Nos. 12.0
I.XX Construction of RCC Rectangular tank for Common
IV condensate - 4.0 x 4.0 x 1.8 m SWD - 1 No.
3
3.1 Raft cu.m 2.51
3.2 Walls cu.m 8.29
Page 338 of 449

Sl.
No.
)
6 Plastering Works
a) walls sq.m 25.12
a) walls sq.m 25.12
Construction of RCC Rectangular tank for Common
recovered - 8.0 x 5.0 x 4.0 m TD - 1 No.
3
2.1 Raft cu.m 95.00
4.2 wall sq.m 900.00
steel )
Page 339 of 449

Sl.
No.
6 Plastering Works
6.2 Walls sq.m 900.00
7 Painting works
7.3 Walls sq.m 900.00
8.2 Nos. 12.0
I.XX
RCC Buildings & AC Sheet Shed
V
PLC room &MCC Room for Filtration section with rain
1 Area 189.0
water harvesting
ACC Sheet Filtration Shed for QF,NF,, RO and HPPTRO
2 Area 407.0
section with rain water harvesting
D.2 Breakup cost for Mechanical works
I Primary & Secondary Treatment System:
MOC of all equipment and accessories should be suitable for
application of combined Tannery effluent with pH-8 to 10,
TDS: 20000 to 22000, Chlorides (as NaCl): 12000 to 13000
Note ppm, Sulphate (as Na2SO4): 4000 to 5000 ppm, Total
Hardness (as CaCO3): 1000 to 1200 ppm, COD: 4000 TO
7000 ppm, BOD: 1800 to 3000 ppm, Sp.gravity: 1.02,
Temperature: 30 to 35°C
Manual bar Screen: Supply of Manual Bar screen along
with hand rake with 10 mm gap between bars suitable for
200 cu.m/ day, design with peak factor of 3, Velocity of flow
is 0.8-1.0 m/sec, Thickness of bar/ Flat: 8 mm and Width as
25 mm, MOC: SS 316 L, Accessories: Hand rake - 2 Nos
1 No. 1
With suitable Size screen and supply suitable pen stock 1
no.for by-pass arrangement.
Note: This manual bar screen is stand by for Automated

Stepped Coarse Screen.
Page 340 of 449

Sl.
No.
Automated Stepped Coarse Screen: Supply of Automated
stepped Coarse Screen, Screen size: 10 mm with suitable
capacity for handling the nominal inflow of 200 cu.m/ day
with velocity of flow is 0.8-1.0 m/sec.
Type: Automated stepped screen & screw conveyor

arrangement, fully automated & continuous operation,
Installation: Out door, Orientation: Elevated level and design
with peak factor 3.
2 No. 1
Make: Jash/ Xylem
MOC: All wetted parts are in SS 316L (CF8M).
Accessories: Gear motors, Control panel with safety

arrangement weather proof Thermo plastic enclosure
weather proof FRP motor canopy, FRP Chain guard with
suitable size of wheel trolley 2 Nos for collecting debris.
Submersible Flow Mixer for collection well: Supply of
Submersible Flow mixer with 0.06 kW capacity along with
accessories suitable for collection well mixing application
with tank size of 2.3 m Dia X 1.5 m SWD.

mixer shall be done by using CFD software, Duty:
MOC: All wetted parts are in SS316L (CF8M).
Make: FLYGT/ABS
3 No. 1
Accessories: Overloading tripping arrangement (Shear pin),
triple sealing system for maximum protection of the
winding temperature sensor / thermal switch, reverse rotation
preventer, electronic type over load relay and single phasing
preventer.
Page 341 of 449

Sl.
No.
Raw effluent transfer pump for Collection well: Supply of
Raw effluent transfer Pump with capacity of 25 cu.m /hr
with 12.5 m head along with suitable Non clog impeller and
Mechanical seal arrangement.
Make- Kishore/ KSB/ ABS/ Flygt/ Grundfos/ Kirloskar
MOC: All wetted parts are SS316L (CF8M).

4 bolts in SS316L, Auto coupling, lifting guide pipe in SS Nos. 2
316L (Seamless) and 10 m length SS 316L suitable industrial
chain for Pump lifting (for lifting purpose, to provide 3" Dia
ring at every 1m once in chain with 8 mm Dia rod), Duck
foot bend, Moisture in motor sensor, Water in oil sensor,
high winding temperature sensor / thermal switch, reverse
rotation preventer, electronic type over load relay and single
panel.
Spares: One Set of Spares as per manufacturer

recommendation including minimum bearing – 3 Nos, Oil
seal – 1 No and Mechanical seal – 2 Nos
Automated Rotary drum fine screen: Supply of
Automated Rotary drum Fine Screen with auto backwash
arrangement, Screen size: 3 mm with suitable capacity for
handling the nominal inflow of 200 cu.m/ day, design with
peak factor 3 with velocity of flow is 1.2 m/s.
Type: Automated Rotary drum Fine Screen with screw

conveyor arrangement for continuous operation, Installation:
Out door, Orientation: Elevated level
5 Nos. 2
Make: Jash/ Xylem
MOC: All wetted parts are in SS 316L
Accessories: Gear motors, Control panel with safety

arrangement weather proof Thermo plastic enclosure
weather proof FRP motor canopy, FRP Chain guard with
suitable size of wheel trolley 2 Nos for collecting debris,
supply 1 no. pen stock with suitable size for bypass
arrangement.
Page 342 of 449

Sl.
No.
Grit removal system: Supply of Automated Grit chamber
unit with suitable tank for capacity handling the nominal
inflow of 200 cu.m/ day, design with peak factor 3 with
6 Nos. 2
velocity of flow is 0.8 to 1 m/s.
MOC: All wetted parts are in SS 316L (CF8M).

Presettler: Supply of Presettler mechanism with
accessories suitable for civil RCC tank having size of 4.6 m
Dia x 1.5 m LD x 0.5m Free board with RCC super structure,
Total volume of the tank is 25 cu.m, Location: Out door and
Duty: Continuous.
Application: Grit Chamber outlet
MOC:
A. All wetted parts are in SS316L.
B. All non wetted parts are in MS with Epoxy coating to
apply 2 coat of Epoxy coating over one coat of Epoxy primer
(500 microns thick).
C. Tie rod, Wheel shaft, all fasteners are in SS316L.
D. Bottom guide bush material for settler drives shaft is
Teflon.
E. MOC of Sludge pipe and over flow pipe are in HDPE.
7 Gear Box: Speed reduction Gear box with suitable Gear Nos. 2
Ratio, Make- Radicon Greaves/ Shanthi/ Elecon.

ABB/KEC/CG/BB
Accessories: Gear Box, Motor, Tripping arrangement, Drive

mechanism, feed well with proper support from super
structure including stiffeners and baffles made of steel plate,
Adjustable over load control with load indicator including
cut off switches and alarm horn in weather proof enclosure,
handrail with toe guard, settler rack shaft, lower guide
bearings, FRP baffles, GI walk way gratings, inlet feed pipe,
over flow pipe, overflow launder, adjustable FRP wears, rack
arm with blades , FRP adjustable squeegees, sludge cone
scrapper, desludging pipe.
recommendation including minimum bearing – 3 Nos, and
Oil seal – 2 Nos
Page 343 of 449

Sl.
No.
Pre settler sludge transfer Pump: Supply of Pre settler
sludge transfer pump with capacity of 3 cu.m/hr @ 30m
Head, Semi open impeller with suitable mechanical seal
arrangement.
Application: Pre settler sludge transfer to Thickener.

Flow serve.

bed.
8 Nos. 2
Motor Detail: Make- ABB/KEC/CG/BB, Type: IE2, TEFC,
Class F insulation.
Accessories: Motor, Base frame plate, working platform,

foundation bolts in S.S 316L, FRP motor canopy with flange
type coupler.

seal – 2 Nos and Mechanical seal – 1No
Flow maker for SHT : Supply of Flow maker / Flow
Booster with 1.0 kW capacity along with accessories for
Sedimentation Homogeneous Tank (SHT).
Specification: Quantity shown for tentative only even though

for selection, Positioning and Qty of Flow maker/ Flow
booster shall be done by using CFD software, Duty:
MOC: All wetted and non wetted parts and fasteners are in
SS316L, Propellers- Polyamide/ SS316L
9 No. 1
Make: FLYGT/ABS

Page 344 of 449

Sl.
No.
preventer.
Flow Jet for SHT/ Venturi Jet Aerator: Supply of Flow jet
with 0.6 kW capacity along with accessories for
Sedimentation Homogeneous Tank (SHT).
Make: FLYGT/ ABS / Grundfos
Accessories: Pedestal stand, Ejector Nozzle, SS 316L air

10 pipe for 10m length, 10 m length SS 316 L suitable No. 1
provide 3” Dia ring at every 1m once in chain with 8 mm
Dia rod), Moisture in motor sensor, Water in oil sensor,
Thermal sensor, column profile tube, and starter control
panel with weather proof (thermoplastic) enclosure with
Motor, high winding temperature sensor / thermal switch,
reverse rotation preventer, electronic type over load relay &
single phasing preventer.
Page 345 of 449

Sl.
No.
Raw effluent transfer pump for SHT: Supply of Raw effluent
transfer Pump with capacity of 9 cu.m /hr with 12.5 m head
along with suitable Non clog impeller and Mechanical seal
arrangement
Make- Kishore/ KSB/ ABS/ Flygt/ Grundfos/ Kirloskar

11 bolts in SS316L, Auto coupling, lifting guide pipe in SS Nos. 2
316L (Seamless) and 10 m length SS 316L suitable industrial
chain for Pump lifting (for lifting purpose, to provide 3" Dia
ring at every 1m once in chain with 8 mm Dia rod), Duck
foot bend, Moisture in motor sensor, Water in oil sensor,
high winding temperature sensor / thermal switch, reverse
rotation preventer, electronic type over load relay and single
panel.

Supply of Odor Control System is suitable for Collection Well
(6.2 cum) and SHT (Sedimentation Homogeneous Tank- 200
cum) with necessary accessories of BIO Trickling Filter,
12 Lot 1
Radial Fan, Activated Carbon Filter, Dosing system and
necessary inter connecting pipelines and valves:
Effluent Concentration of Sulphide gas between 100-300 mg/l
Bio-trickling Filter : Supply of Bio-trickling Filter and filter
as Cylindrical, vertical, Dish end with Size of 1.2 m Inner
Dia x 2.8 m HOS and design for max operating pressure of 5
12.1 No. 1
kg/cm2 with necessary PP strainer arrangements with
required quantity of Foamed Plastic medium.
MOC: HDPE or GRP
Radial Fan: Supply of Radial Fan low speed, Air cooling
system air blower with capacity of 470 m3/hr @ 0.035 bar
Make- Everest/ Vindi Vak/ PPI or equivalent.
12.2 Motor Type: IE2, TEFC, Class F insulation, Make: No. 1

Accessories: Motor, Base frame, safety valve, suction filter,

suction silencer, discharge silencer, non-return valve,
pressure gauge in SS, anti-vibration pads, V- belt, FRP belt
Page 346 of 449

Sl.
No.
guard, drive and driven pulleys ( or coupling and FRP
coupling guards), set of special tools, foundation and base
bolts in S.S316L, interconnecting piping with flanges.
Activated Carbon Filter : Supply of Activated Carbon

Filter and filter as Cylindrical, vertical, Dish end with Size
of 2 m L x 0.5 m W x 1 m H and design for max operating
pressure of 5 kg/cm2 with necessary PP strainer
12.3 No. 1
arrangements with required quantity of Foamed Plastic
medium.
MOC: PHED
Sodium Hydroxide Dosing Pump : Supply of Sodium
Hydroxide Dosing Pump , Diaphragm/ Metering type with
capacity of 0-100 LPH with 60m head.
MOC: All wetted parts are in SS316L.
Application: Sodium Hydroxide, Concentration- 48 %.
12.4 Accessories: Motor and Standard Accessories comprising of Nos. 2

strainer, Base frame plate, Coupling, FRP Coupling Guard,
Foundation bolt, nut in SS316L and FRP motor canopy for
the above pump.

Oil seal – 2 Nos
Sodium Hydroxide Storage Tank : Supply of Cylinder,
Vertical Chemical storage tank with capacity of 500 Ltrs,
Application: Sodium Hydroxide Storage, Concentration- 48

%.
12.5 No. 1
HDPE Tank Specification: Cylinder, Vertical Chemical
storage HDPE tank, Make: Sintex, Chemical grade HDPE,
CCV Model, Colour: Black.
Page 347 of 449

Sl.
No.
Accessories: Top manual with lid.
Hydrogen Peroxide Dosing Pump : Supply of Hydrogen

Peroxide Dosing Pump , Diaphragm/ Metering type with
capacity of 0-100 LPH with 60m head.
Application: Sodium Hydroxide, Concentration- 12 %.
12.6 Accessories: Motor and Standard Accessories comprising of Nos. 2

the above pump.

Oil seal – 2 Nos
Hydrogen Peroxide Storage Tank : Supply of Cylinder,
Application: Hydrogen Peroxide Storage, Concentration- 12

%.
12.7 No. 1
Page 348 of 449

Sl.
No.
Flash mixer - I : Supply of Flash Mixer tank with agitator
of 100 RPM, SS 316L solid shaft and four blades of SS
316L, HRT 5 mins, Volume of Tank- 0.7 cum .

5%
MOC: All wetted and non-wetted parts of Agitator and Tank

are in SS316L.
Gear Box: Shanthi Make speed reducer gear box with

13 suitable Gear Ratio. No. 1

insulation.

type coupler.

Oil seal – 2 Nos
Flash mixer - II : Supply of Flash Mixer tank with agitator
of 100 RPM, SS 316L solid shaft and four blades of SS
316L, HRT 5 mins, Volume of Tank- 0.7 cum .

5%
MOC: All wetted and non-wetted parts of Agitator and Tank

are in SS316L.

14 suitable Gear Ratio. No. 1

insulation.

type coupler.

Oil seal – 2 Nos
Page 349 of 449

Sl.
No.
Lime Storage Tank: Supply of Cylinder, Vertical Chemical
storage tank with capacity of 5000 Ltrs, suitable for outdoor
installation.
Application: Lime Storage, Concentration- 5 %.
15 No. 1

Glandless type with capacity of 0-200 LPH with 60 m head.
Application: Water base with Lime, Solid concentration of 5

%
16 Nos. 2
Accessories: Motor and Standard Accessories, foundation
bolts in S.S 316L and FRP motor Guard.

Oil seal – 2 Nos
Lime Agitator: Supply of Lime Mixing agitator with 100
impeller suitable for 5 cum volume tank.

%.

suitable Gear Ratio.
17 No. 1
insulation.
Accessories: Motor, Base frame plate and working platform

are in S.S 316L, Handrail and foundation bolts are in S.S

Oil seal – 2 Nos
Page 350 of 449

Sl.
No.
Alum Storage Tank : Supply of Cylinder, Vertical
Chemical storage tank with capacity of 2000 Ltrs, suitable
for outdoor installation.
Application: Alum Storage, Concentration- 10-20 %.
18 HDPE Tank Specification: Cylinder, Vertical Chemical No. 1


Alum Agitator: Supply of Alum Mixing agitator with 100
impeller suitable for 2 cum volume tank.

10-20 %

19 No. 1
insulation.


Oil seal – 2 Nos
Alum Dosing Pump: Supply of Alum dosing pump, Vertical
Glandless type with capacity of 0 - 100 LPH with 60m head.

10-20 %
20 Nos. 2

Oil seal – 2 Nos
Page 351 of 449

Sl.
No.
Poly Storage Tank : Supply of Cylinder, Vertical Chemical
installation.
Application: Poly Storage, Concentration- 0.02 %.


Poly Agitator: Supply of Poly Mixing agitator with 100
impeller suitable for - 0.5 cum volume tank.
Application: Poly, Concentration- 0.05 to 0.2 %

22 Motor: Make- Kirloskar/ Bharth bijilee, TEFC, Class F No. 1

insulation.


Oil seal – 2 Nos
Poly Dosing Pump: Supply of Poly dosing pump,
with 60 m head.

23 Nos. 2
Accessories: Motor and Standard Accessories comprising of
the above pump.
Page 352 of 449

Sl.
No.
Oil seal – 2 Nos
Primary Clarifier/ Clariflucculator: Supply of

Clariflucculator mechanism with accessories suitable for
civil RCC tank having size of 3.5 m Dia x 3.0 m LD x 0.5m
Free board with RCC super structure, Total volume of the
tank is 29 cu.m, Location: Out door and Duty: Continuous.
Application: Flash Mixer outlet
MOC:
D. Bottom guide bush material for Clarifier drives shaft is
Teflon.
24 No. 1
Ratio, Make- Radicon Greaves/ Shanthi/Elecon.

ABB/KEC/CG/BB

handrail with toe guard, Clarifier rack shaft, lower guide
Page 353 of 449

Sl.
No.
Oil seal – 2 Nos
Clarifloculator sludge transfer Pump: Supply of

Clarifloculator sludge transfer Pump with capacity of 3
Application: Clarifloculator sludge transfer to Thickener.

Flow serve.
25 Nos. 2
bed.

Class F insulation.
MOC: All wetted parts are in CF8M (SS316L).
Page 354 of 449

Sl.
No.
type coupler.

OHR / Diffused Aeration system for Pre Aeration tank-

I: Supply of Diffused Aeration system for Aeration tank with
RCC tank size of 5.0 x 4.0 x 3.5 m SWD along with
necessary piping, diffuser and Blower arrangement suitable
for having capacity of 70 cum, Qty-1 Tank.
26 Nos. 32
Diffuser for Pre Aeration tank -I: Make- EDI/
SANITAIRE/ SSI, Type: Fine Bubble Disc type & non clog,
fixed type, EPDM, Diffuser Internals MOC: PVC- uv
stabilized, Size: 8", Qty: 32 Nos.
Liquid oxygen storage system, Mixflow system and Mixflow
pump as per manufacturer recommendation
OR
(Optional : Blower )for Pre Aeration tank- I: : Blower
with discharge (design) air flow is 190 Nm3/ hr, pressure 0.6
kg/cm2, Type-Centrifugal Turbo energy efficient high speed
motor-impeller assembly with unique bearings lubricated by
air, Built-in VFD for capacity control with air-foil bearing
air cooled, touch screen HMI display to show online display
of parameters like Flow, Pressure, Power and D.O, Direct
connection with D.O. sensor for control & monitoring of
D.O. with complete set.
27 Nos. 2
Make: Aerzen- Godrej/ Turbo MAX

bearing for high speed operation, Entire range is air-cooled,
Variable Speed Drive for achieving high speed, smooth starts
(reduced starting current ) & energy efficient capacity
control as part of the Blower package., Permanent Magnet
Motor, safety valve, suction filter, suction silencer, discharge
silencer, non-return valve, pressure gauge in SS316L, anti-
vibration pads, along with motor with SS316L isolation
Butterfly valves for each Blower and Pressure gauge for each
header and main distribution lines to determine leakage /
Breakage of pipes of membrane with SS316L isolation
Butterfly valves.
Page 355 of 449

Sl.
No.
Oil seal – 3 Nos
OHR / Diffused Aeration system for Pre Aeration tank/

Sulphate Oxidation Tank- II : Supply of Diffused Aeration
system for Aeration tank/ Sulphate Oxidation Tank with
RCC tank size of 2.0 x 1.5 x 3.5 m SWD along with
28 for having capacity of 9 cum, Qty-1 Tank. Nos. 13
Diffuser for Pre Aeration tank/ Sulphate Oxidation

Tank- II: Make- EDI/ SANITAIRE/ SSI, Type: Fine Bubble
Disc type & non clog, fixed type, EPDM, Diffuser Internals
MOC: PVC- uv stabilized, Size: 8", Qty: 13 Nos.
Liquid oxygen storage system, Mixflow system and Mixflow
pump as per manufacturer recommendation
OR
(Optional : Blower )for Pre Aeration tank- II: : Blower
with discharge (design) air flow is 76 Nm3/ hr, pressure 0.6
kg/cm2, Type-Centrifugal Turbo energy efficient high speed
motor-impeller assembly with unique bearings lubricated by
air, Built-in VFD for capacity control with air-foil bearing
air cooled, touch screen HMI display to show online display
of parameters like Flow, Pressure, Power and D.O, Direct
connection with D.O. sensor for control & monitoring of
D.O. with complete set.
29 Nos. 2
Make: Aerzen- Godrej/ TurboMAX

bearing for high speed operation, Entire range is air-cooled,
Breakage of pipes of membrane with SS316 L isolation
Butterfly valves.
Page 356 of 449

Sl.
No.
Oil seal – 3 Nos
Flow mixer for Anoxic tank: Supply of Flow Mixer with

0.9 kW capacity along with accessories for Anoxic tank
Mixer shall be done by using CFD software, Duty:
Make: FLYGT/ABS
30 Accessories: Overloading tripping arrangement (Shear pin), No. 1

preventer.
Phosphoric Acid Storage Tank: Supply of Cylinder,
31 Application: Phosphoric Acid. No. 1
MOC: FRP Tank with suitable resin

Phosphoric Acid Dosing Pump : Supply of Phosphoric
Acid Dosing Pump , Diaphragm/ Metering type with
capacity of 0-100 LPH with 60 m head.

32 % Nos. 2

bolts in S.S 316 L and FRP motor Guard.

Oil seal – 2 Nos
Page 357 of 449

Sl.
No.
Diffused Aeration system for Aeration tank-I (Stage I):
Supply of Diffused Aeration system for Aeration tank with
RCC tank size of 16.0 x 5.0 x 5 m SWD along with
33 for having capacity of 400 cum, Qty-1 Tank. Nos. 87
Diffuser for Aeration tank -I (BIOT): Make- EDI/
Blower for Aeration tank -I (BIOT): Blower with
lubricated by air, Built-in VFD for capacity control with air-
foil bearing air cooled, touch screen HMI display to show
online display of parameters like Flow, Pressure, Power and
D.O, Direct connection with D.O. sensor for control &

34 bearing for high speed operation, Entire range is air-cooled, Nos. 2
Breakage of pipes of membrane with SS316L isolation
Butterfly valves.

Oil seal – 3 Nos
Page 358 of 449

Sl.
No.
Flow maker for Aeration Tank - Stage I: Supply of Flow
maker / Flow Booster with 0.5 kW capacity along with
accessories for Biological Oxidation Tank (BIOT).

35 Make:FLYGT/ABS No. 1

preventer.
SRS Feed Pump for Aeration Tank (Stage -I) : Supply of
Head, with suitable impeller (Non clog).
Make- KSB/Kishore/Grundfos/ABS/ FLYGT/ Kirloskar
MOC: SS316L (CF8M).

36 Nos. 2
Accessories: Foundation bolts in SS316L, Auto coupling,
lifting guide pipe in SS 316L (Seamless) and 10 m length SS
316L suitable industrial chain for Pump lifting (for lifting
purpose, to provide 3" Dia ring at every 1m once in chain
with 8 mm Dia rod), Duck foot bend, Moisture in motor
sensor, Water in oil sensor, high winding temperature sensor
/ thermal switch, reverse rotation preventer, electronic type
over load relay and single phasing preventer along with
weather proof starter control panel.
Page 359 of 449

Sl.
No.
Secondary Clarifier I: Supply of Secondary clarifier
arrangement suitable for civil RCC tank having size of 4.6
m Dia x 3.0 m LD x 0.5m Free board with RCC Super
Structure, Total volume of the tank is 50 cu.m, Location: Out
door, Duty: Continuous.
MOC:
Teflon.
37 No. 1

ABB/KEC/CG/BB

Oil seal – 2 Nos
Diffused Aeration system for Aeration tank -II (Stage II):
Supply of Diffused Aeration system for Aeration tank with
RCC tank size of 16.0 x 5.0 x 5 m SWD along with
38 necessary piping, diffuser and Blower arrangement suitable Nos. 73
for having capacity of 400 cum, Qty-1 Tank.
Diffuser for Aeration tank -II (Stage II): Make- EDI/
Page 360 of 449

Sl.
No.
Blower for Aeration tank -II (Stage II): Blower with

lubricated by air, Built-in VFD for capacity control with air-
foil bearing air cooled, touch screen HMI display to show
online display of parameters like Flow, Pressure, Power and
D.O, Direct connection with D.O. sensor for control &

39 bearing for high speed operation, Entire range is air-cooled, Nos. 2
Breakage of pipes of membrane with SS316 L isolation
Butterfly valves.

Oil seal – 3 Nos
Page 361 of 449

Sl.
No.
Flow maker for Aeration Tank -II: Supply of Flow maker
/ Flow Booster with 0.5 kW capacity along with accessories
for Biological Oxidation Tank (BIOT).

40 Make:FLYGT/ABS No. 1

preventer.
SRS Feed Pump for Aeration Tank(Stage -II) : Supply of
Head, with suitable impeller (Non clog).
Make- KSB/Kishore/Grundfos/ABS/ FLYGT/ Kirloskar
MOC: SS316L (CF8M).

41 Nos. 2
Accessories: Foundation bolts in SS316, Auto coupling,
lifting guide pipe in SS 316L (Seamless) and 10 m length SS
316L suitable industrial chain for Pump lifting (for lifting
purpose, to provide 3" Dia ring at every 1m once in chain
with 8 mm Dia rod), Duck foot bend, Moisture in motor
sensor, Water in oil sensor, high winding temperature sensor
/ thermal switch, reverse rotation preventer, electronic type
over load relay and single phasing preventer along with
weather proof starter control panel.
Page 362 of 449

Sl.
No.
Secondary Clarifier II: Supply of Secondary clarifier
arrangement suitable for civil RCC tank having size of 4.6
m Dia x 3.0 m LD x 0.5m Free board with RCC Super
Structure, Total volume of the tank is 50 cu.m, Location: Out
door, Duty: Continuous.
MOC:
Teflon.
42 No. 1

ABB/KEC/CG/BB

Oil seal – 2 Nos
Page 363 of 449

Sl.
No.
Caustic Dosing Pump for RC inlet: Supply of Caustic
dosing pump, Diaphragm/ Metering type with capacity of
100 LPH @ 20m head .
Application:Caustic, Concentration- 48 %
43 Nos. 2
Accessories: Motor, Anti siphon valve, Pulsation dampener,
and Pressure relief valve.

Oil seal – 2 Nos
Reactor Clarifier: Supply of Reactor clarifier with Central
drive arrangement, suitable for Civil RCC tank having size
of 3.5 m Dia x 3.0 SWD x 0.5m Free board with RCC Super
Structure, Feed rate of 200 cum/day, Location: Out door,
Duty: Continuous, SOR considered as 1m3/m2/hr .
Application: Lime Soda softening Treatment for Secondary

outlet, pH- 2.0 to 5, TDS- 40000 to 50000 mg/lit, Total
Hardness-8000 to 12000 mg/lit.
MOC:
(A). All wetted parts are in SS316 L (B) All non wetted parts
are in MS with Epoxy coating to apply one coat of Epoxy
primer and two coat of Epoxy coating (500 microns thick).
(C). All fasteners and Sampling pipes with Flanged end ball
valves (4nos) are in SS316L. (D). Bottom guide bush
material for Clarifier drive shaft is Teflon. (E). MOC of inlet
44 No. 1
feed pipe, over flow pipe and Chemical feed pipes are in
HDPE.

Motor Type: IE 2, TEFC, Class F insulation, Make:
ABB/KEC/CG/BB
Accessories: Gear Box, Motor, Reactor drive mechanism,

Turbine drive mechanism, Conical reaction chamber with
support from super structure including stiffeners and baffles
made of steel plate, Turbine drive motor, rack drive with
torque control box, super structure, Adjustable over load
control with load indicator including cut off switches and
alarm horn in weather proof enclosure, handrail with toe
guard, turbine with blades, turbine shaft, rack shaft, lower
guide bearings, reaction well, FRP baffles, recirculation
Page 364 of 449

Sl.
No.
drum, rotating drum, GI walk way gratings, inlet feed pipe,
arm with blades , adjustable squeegees, sludge cone
scrapper, desludging pipe, sampling pipe, chemical feed
pipe, control panel for torque limit switch and VFD.

Oil seal – 2 Nos
Glandless type with capacity of 500 LPH with 60m head.

15 %
45 Nos. 2

Oil seal – 2 Nos
Soda Ash Storage Tank : Supply of Cylinder, Vertical
Chemical storage tank with capacity of 2000 Ltrs, suitable
Application: Soda Ash Storage .

Page 365 of 449

Sl.
No.
Soda Ash Mixing Agitator: Supply of Lime Mixing agitator
316L impeller suitable for - 2 cum volume tank..
Application: Water base with Soda Ash, Solid concentration

of 5 to 10%

47 No. 1
insulation.


Oil seal – 2 Nos
Soda Ash Dosing Pump: Supply of Soda Ash Dosing pump,
Diaphragm/ Metering type with capacity of 0-100 LPH
with 60 m head.,

48 % Nos. 2

bolts in SS 316L and FRP motor Guard.

Oil seal – 2 Nos
Common Sludge Holding Tank : Supply of Cylinder,
Application: Sludge Storage .

Page 366 of 449

Sl.
No.
Mixer/ Agitator for Common Sludge Holding Tank:
Supply of Mixer/ Agitator for Common Sludge Holding
Tank with 100 RPM, SS 316L solid shaft and four blades of
SS 316L impeller suitable for - 4.0 cum volume tank.


50 No. 1
insulation.


Oil seal – 2 Nos
Poly Agitator for Thickener: Supply of Poly Mixing
agitator with 100 RPM, SS 316L solid shaft and four blades
of SS 316L impeller suitable for 1 cum volume tank.


insulation.


Oil seal – 2 Nos
Page 367 of 449

Sl.
No.
LPH with 60m head.
Application: Poly Electrolyte, Concentration- 0.05 to 0.2 %
52 Accessories: Accessories: Motor and Standard Accessories Nos. 2

comprising of PRV, Pulsation dampener, Anti siphon valve,
‘Y’ type strainer, Base frame plate, Coupling, FRP Coupling
Guard, Foundation bolt, nut in SS316L and FRP motor

Oil seal – 2 Nos
Poly Dosing Tank : Supply of Cylinder, Vertical Chemical
installation.

Page 368 of 449

Sl.
No.
Reactor clarifier sludge transfer Pump: Supply of
Reactor clarifier sludge transfer Pump with capacity of 1.0

Flow serve.

bed.
54 Nos. 2
Class F insulation.
Accessories: Motor, Base frame plate are in S.S 316L,

foundation bolts are in S.S 316L, FRP motor canopy with
flange type coupler.

Page 369 of 449

Sl.
No.
Sludge Thickener: Supply of Thickener mechanism with
central drive arrangement, suitable for Civil RCC tank
having size of 2.0 m Dia x 2.5m LD x 0.5m Free board with
RCC Super structure, volume of the tank is 7.9 cu.m,
Application: Sludge from Pre Settler, Clarifloculator,

MOC:
Teflon.
55 Gear Box: Speed reduction Gear box with suitable Gear No. 1

ABB/KEC/CG/BB
Accessories: Gear Box, Motor, Tripping arrangement, drive

plate, super structure, Adjustable over load control with load
indicator including cut off switches and alarm horn in
weather proof enclosure, handrail with toe guard, rack shaft,
inlet feed pipe, over flow pipe, overflow launder, adjustable
FRP wears, rack arm with blades , adjustable squeegees,
sludge cone scrapper, desludging pipe.

Oil seal – 2 Nos
Page 370 of 449

Sl.
No.
Filter Press Feed Pump: Supply of Filter Press feed Pump
(Screw pump) with capacity of 1 cu.m/hr @ 150 m Head
with suitable mechanical seal arrangement along with

Pump: Make- Alpha Helical/ Roto/ UT / Hydro Prokav


Class F insulation.
56 Nos. 2
MOC:
1. All wetted parts are in CF8M (SS 316L)
2. Stator- EPDM
Accessories: Motor with VFD Drive, Over load tripping

sensor, Base frame plate, Coupling, FRP Coupling Guard,
foundation bolts in SS316L and FRP motor canopy.

Filter Press: Supply of Filter press suitable for feed flow is
1.9 cu.m/day, Operating pressure 10 bar, Plate size 1000 x
1000 mm, cake thickness 30 mm with suitable 14 number of
plates, Arrangement of pattern vertical, Closure of filter pack
Automatic (Hydraulic power pack), Pressure closing system
Operation of filter fully automated, Control of filter fully
automated and sludge removing chute etc.
Make: Andritz, Hydro Press
57 No. 1
MOC:
Accessories: Motor, Limit switch, Connecting hose, Control

panel, set of safety pressure gauge, Cable between control
panel & motor and safety device and Hydraulic oil, SS316L
foundation bolts and nuts.
Page 371 of 449

Sl.
No.
Poly Agitator for Thickener-II: Supply of Poly Mixing
agitator with 100 RPM, SS 316L solid shaft and four blades
of SS 316L impeller suitable for 1 cum volume tank.


insulation.


Oil seal – 2 Nos
LPH with 60m head.
59 Accessories: Accessories: Motor and Standard Accessories Nos. 2

comprising of PRV, Pulsation dampener, Anti siphon valve,
‘Y’ type strainer, Base frame plate, Coupling, FRP Coupling

Oil seal – 2 Nos
Poly Dosing Tank : Supply of Cylinder, Vertical Chemical
installation.

60 No. 1
Page 372 of 449

Sl.
No.

Reactor clarifier sludge transfer Pump: Supply of
Reactor clarifier sludge transfer Pump with capacity of 1.0

Flow serve.

bed.
61 Nos. 2
Class F insulation.
Accessories: Motor, Base frame plate, Coupling, FRP

Coupling Guard, foundation bolt & Nut are in SS316L and
FRP motor canopy.

Page 373 of 449

Sl.
No.
Sludge Thickener: Supply of Thickener mechanism with
central drive arrangement, suitable for Civil RCC tank
having size of 2.7 m Dia x 2.5m LD x 0.5m Free board with
RCC Super structure, volume of the tank is 14 cu.m,

MOC:
Teflon.
62 Gear Box: Speed reduction Gear box with suitable Gear No. 1

ABB/KEC/CG/BB
Accessories: Gear Box, Motor, Tripping arrangement, drive

plate, super structure, Adjustable over load control with load
indicator including cut off switches and alarm horn in
weather proof enclosure, handrail with toe guard, rack shaft,
inlet feed pipe, over flow pipe, overflow launder, adjustable
FRP wears, rack arm with blades , adjustable squeegees,
sludge cone scrapper, desludging pipe.

Oil seal – 2 Nos
Sludge digester: Supply of Sludge digester for tannery
trimming and flushing waste and bio sludge with necessary
accessories with suitable design flow.
63 Accessories: Accessories like distribution box with inlet No. 1

point, Gas collector, effluent gutter, settling zone baffle,
sludge blanket zone with sludge with drawl & monitoring
arrangement and deflector beam, etc.
Page 374 of 449

Sl.
No.
Note: Digester design to be done based on the tannery
trimming and flushing waste and Bio sludge parameters
Filter Press Feed Pump: Supply of Filter Press feed Pump
(Screw pump) with capacity of 1 cu.m/hr @ 150 m Head
with suitable mechanical seal arrangement along with

Pump: Make- Alpha Helical/ Roto/ UT / Hydro Prokav


Class F insulation.
64 Nos. 2
MOC:
1. All wetted parts are in CF8M (SS 316L)
2. Stator- EPDM
Accessories: Motor with VFD Drive, Over load tripping

sensor, Base frame plate, Coupling, FRP Coupling Guard,
foundation bolts in SS316L and FRP motor canopy.

Filter Press: Supply of Filter press suitable for feed flow is
7.3 cu.m/day, Operating pressure 10 bar, Plate size 1000 x
1000 mm, cake thickness 30 mm with suitable 26 number of
plates, Arrangement of pattern vertical, Closure of filter pack
Automatic (Hydraulic power pack), Pressure closing system
Operation of filter fully automated, Control of filter fully
automated and sludge removing chute etc.

65 No. 1
Make: Andritz, Hydro Press, B.K.S.Engineers.,
MOC:
Accessories: Motor, Limit switch, Connecting hose, Control

panel, set of safety pressure gauge, Cable between control
Page 375 of 449

Sl.
No.
panel & motor and safety device and Hydraulic oil, SS316L
foundation bolts and nuts.
Pipes and fittings for SHT, Clarifloculator, BIOT, SRS,

Secondary clarifier, Thickener, Filter Press: Supply of
piping, accessories and supports & Erection works for SHT,
Clarifloculator, BIOT, SRS, Secondary clarifier, Thickener,
Filter Press.

2. Process lines- 0.6 to 0.8 m/sec (Gravity and pump suction
lines)/ 1.2 to 1.8 m/sec (pump delivery lines/ pressure lines)
MOC:
1. All gravity lines- HDPE, PN6, PE100, IS4984
2. Submersible pump delivery lines- SS316L, Sch 10, ERW
66 Lot 1
3. All supports- SS316L
4. Diffused aeration and Blower air lines- SS316L, Sch 10,
ERW
5. Chemical dosing lines(NaOH, NaOCL, HCl, SMBS,
ANTISCALANT, POLY)- HDPE, PN10, PE100, IS4984
5. Chemical dosing lines(Sulphuric Acid)- MS, Seamless
Pipe
6. Lime and Soda ash- uPVC, Sch 40
7. Filter press lines- SS316L, Sch 40, ERW
Welding:
Electro Pneumatic valves ,Manual valves and NRVs for
SHT, Clarifloculator, BIOT, SRS, Secondary clarifier,
Thickener, Filter Press: Supply of Electro Pneumatic
valves, NRVs and Strainer as per the given specification.
1. All the pumps suction side strainer and delivery side valve
and NRV to be provided.
67 Lot 1
considered.
operation.
Page 376 of 449

Sl.
No.
Quartz Filter: Supply of Quartz Filter and filter as
Cylindrical, vertical, Dish end with Size of 1.0 m Inner Dia x
1 m HOS and design for max operating pressure of 5 kg/cm2
with necessary PP strainer arrangements with required
quantity of Silex Media consist of coarse and fine quartz
medium, the approximate quantity of silex media is - 1.34
Tons / Filter
Application: Reactor Clarifier outlet, Feed rate as 10

cu.m/hr, pH 7 to 8, TDS- 20000 to 21000.
MOC:
68 No. 1
A. Vessel and Bell mouth piping’s are in MSRL consist of
Natural rubber lining.
B. Frontal piping is HDPE/ uPVC.
Accessories: Monkey ladder, Media unloading manhole at

side and Top manhole lid with swiveling arrangement, vessel
Lifting hook, working platform on Top with hand rails and
Toe guard, Level glass inbuilt with vessel, View glass at top
side, nozzles for inlet/ outlet for process and backwash,
water and Air vent, inlet for air scoring line, rinsing outlet
line, PP strainer, Strainer plate, Bell mouth with multiple
distribution pipe line and complete set.
Silex Media consist of coarse and fine quartz medium
0.7mm to 1.2mm Bed Height -800 mm-1.07 Tons & 3mm to
69 Tons 1
5mm - Bed Height - 200 mm-0.27 Tons- Total quantity: 1.34
Tons
Quartz Filter Feed Pump: Supply of Quartz Filter feed
pump with capacity of 10 cu.m/hr @ 20 m Head, Closed
impeller with suitable mechanical seal arrangement.
Application: Reactor Clarifier outlet, pH 7 to 8, TDS- 20000

to 21000.

Flow serve.
70 Nos. 2
bed.

Class F insulation.

Coupling Guard, foundation bolt & Nut are in SS316L and
Page 377 of 449

Sl.
No.
FRP motor canopy.

Quartz Filter Backwash Pump: Supply of Quartz Filter
Back wash pump with capacity of 15 cm/hr @ 30 m Head,
Application: Filtrate from Quartz Filter, pH 7 to 8, TDS-

20000 to 21000.
Pump Make- KSB/ Kishore/.Sulzer/.Grundfos/ Johnson/

Flow serve.

bed.
71 Nos. 2
Class F insulation.

Coupling Guard, foundation bolt & are in SS316L and FRP
motor canopy.

Backwash Blower for Quartz Filter: Supply of Air Blower
Twin Lobe (Roots Blowers) low speed, Air cooling system
air blower with capacity of 50 Nm3/hr @ 5mwc for
Backwash application in Quartz Filter.
Make- Everest/ Vindi Vak/ PPI/ Horizon/ Turbo Max
Accessories: Motor, Base frame, safety valve, suction filter,

72 suction silencer, discharge silencer, non-return valve, Nos. 2
pressure gauge in SS, anti-vibration pads, V- belt, FRP belt
guard, drive and driven pulleys ( or coupling and FRP
coupling guards), set of special tools, foundation and base
bolts in S.S316L, interconnecting piping with flanges.

Oil seal – 3 Nos
Page 378 of 449

Sl.
No.
Pipes and fittings for Quartz Filter system: Supply of
piping and accessories for Quartz filter Feed and backwash
Header and Lateral lines and suitable supporting.

2. Process lines- 0.6 to 0.8 m/sec (Gravity, backwash outlet
and pump suction lines)/ 1.2 to 1.8 m/sec (pump delivery
lines/ pressure lines)
73 Lot 1
MOC:
1. Pipe and accessories- HDPE
3. Blower air lines- SS316L, Sch 10, ERW
Welding:
3. HDPE lines are welded with Butt welding.
Quartz Filter system : Supply of Auto/ Manual Valves, Air
74 Lot 1
valve and NRVs with necessary arrangement.
Air Compressor for Quartz Filter System: Supply of Air
compressor along with all accessories, Make: ELGI, Type:
Reciprocating compressor, Air Discharge- Capacity to be
based on no. of pneumatic instruments , Pressure - 12
Kg/cm2 along with auto drain valve, 1 set of FRL along
75 Lot 1
with 1 set of Air drier & Air Reservoir: 5000 liters.

Oil seal – 2 Nos
II UF System
Page 379 of 449

Sl.
No.
UF feed pump: Supply of UF feed pump with capacity of 17
cu.m/hr @ 30 m Head, Closed impeller with suitable
Application: Quartz filter outlet, pH-7 to 8.

bed.
1 Motor Detail: Make- ABB/KEC/CG/BB, Type: IE 2, TEFC, Nos. 2

Class F insulation.

Coupling Guard, foundation bolt & nut in SS316L and FRP
motor canopy.

UF Back wash pump: Supply of UF Back flush pump with
capacity of 20 cu.m/hr @ 30 m Head, Closed impeller with
suitable mechanical seal arrangement.
Application: Permeate from UF, pH-7 to 8.

bed.

Class F insulation.

Coupling Guard, foundation bolt & nut in SS316L and FRP
motor canopy.

Page 380 of 449

Sl.
No.
UF CIP Tank : Supply of Cylinder, Vertical Chemical
installation.
Application: UF CIP


Agitator for UF CIP: Supply of CIP Water Mixing agitator
316L impeller suitable for 500 Liters volume tank.
Application: Chemical with Water


insulation.


Oil seal – 2 Nos
Page 381 of 449

Sl.
No.
UF CIP pump: Supply of UF CIP pump with capacity of 22
cu.m/hr @ 30 m Head, Closed impeller with suitable
Application: Chemical solution, pH- 2 to 12.
Pump Make- KSB/ Sulzer/ Grundfos/ Johnson/ Flow serve.

bed.
Motor Detail: Make- ABB/KEC/CG/BB, Type: IE 2, TEFC,

5 Nos. 3
Class F insulation.
MOC: All wetted parts are in CF8M (SS 316), Shaft and
Sleeve- Suitable for the application.

type coupler.

Auto back wash basket filter for UF feed: Supply of Auto
back wash basket filter with suitable capacity of 17 cu.m/hr
feed rate and screen size 50 micron, Min. operating pressure
- 2.0 to 2.5 kg/cm2. Type: Cartridge
Application: UF feed and CIP, pH- 2 to 12
6 Make: Amiad Filtration systems No. 1
MOC: For wetted parts including filter SS 316 L, For non

wetted parts : SS 316L
Accessories: Motor, ON/ OFF valve, DP gauge

arrangements, with DP gauge & auto valves arrangements
for self cleaning.
Page 382 of 449

Sl.
No.
Manual Basket filter for UF Back Wash: Supply of
Manual Back wash basket filter with suitable capacity of 20
cu.m/hr feed rate with screen size 50 micron, Min. operating
pressure - 2.0 kg/cm2. Type: Cartridge
Application: UF permeate water with Chemicals, Operation

pH range- 6.5 to 8, chemical enhanced back flush pH: 2 to
12
7 No. 1
Make: Amiad Filtration systems
MOC: For wetted parts including filter SS 316 L, For non

wetted parts : SS 316L
Accessories: Motor, ON/ OFF valve, DP gauge

arrangements, with DP gauge & auto valves arrangements
for self cleaning
UF Membrane, compressor with Skid: Supply of UF
membrane module with end connection arrangements with
suitable capacity of compressor and Skid.
UF Membrane specification: Feed inside permeate outside ,

Hollow fibre, Membrane active area 100 m2, Number of
membranes/ Skid: 3,Skid- 1 No., Total - 3 Nos
Application: Quartz filter outlet, operating pH – 7 to 8,

Cleaning pH- 2 to 12, TDS- 20000 to 21000mg/ Ltrs
MOC: PVDF/Modified PES/ Housing: UPVC

8 Lot 1
Membrane Accessories: Permeate adapter, couplings, ‘O’
Rings and gaskets
Compressor Specification: Suitable capacity of oil free Air

compressor with 10 Kg/cm2 Pressure along with reservoir-
5000Ltrs, along with accessories like Refrigeration air dryer,
Pre- Filter, Fine Filter, Motor, Motor Pulley, Fan, Pressure
switch, Pressure gauge, Starter, Air receiver, Ball Valve,
Safety valve, NRV assembly, Belt, Belt Guard, FRL
MOC of UF skid: SS316L

9 UF Membrane with accessories (for 1 Skid) Nos. 3
Page 383 of 449

Sl.
No.
Air Compressor for UF System: Supply of Air compressor
along with all accessories, Make: ELGI, Type: Reciprocating
compressor, Air Discharge- Capacity to be based on no. of
pneumatic instruments , Pressure - 12 Kg/cm2 along with
auto drain valve, 1 set of FRL along with 1 set of Air drier
10 Lot 1
& Air Reservoir: 5000 liters.

Oil seal – 2 Nos
NaOH Dosing Pump for CIP- UF: Supply of NaOH dosing
LPH with 60m head.
Application: NaOH, Concentration- 48 %, Specific gravity-

1.5 g/cc
11 Nos. 2
Foundation bolt, nut in SS316 L and FRP motor canopy for
the above pump.

Oil seal – 2 Nos
Sodium Hypo Chloride (NaOCL) Dosing Pump for CIP-
UF: Supply of NaOCL dosing pump, Diaphragm/ Metering
type with capacity of 0-100 LPH with 60m head.

gravity- 1.2 g/cc
12 Nos. 2
the above pump.

Oil seal – 2 Nos
Page 384 of 449

Sl.
No.
HCL Dosing Pump for CIP- UF: Supply of HCL dosing
LPH with 60m head.

1.14g g/cc
13 Nos. 2
the above pump.

Oil seal – 2 Nos
Chemical Storage Tank for HCl: Supply of Cylinder,

1.14g g/cc
14 No. 1

Chemical Storage Tank for Sodium Hypo Chloride:
Supply of Cylinder, Vertical Chemical storage tank with
capacity of 100 Ltrs, suitable for outdoor installation.

gravity- 1.2 g/cc
15 No. 1
Page 385 of 449

Sl.
No.
Chemical Storage Tank for Caustic: Supply of Cylinder,
Vertical FRP storage tank with capacity of 100 Ltrs, suitable
16 Application: Caustic, Concentration- 48 % No. 1

Static Mixer for UF: Supply of Static Mixer consists with
mixing arrangements for UF system with capacity of 17
cu.m/ hr with flange end type.
Application: MCF inlet line for chemical with water mixing,

pH- 5.0 to 7.0, TDS- 7500 to 8500mg/l.
17 No. 1
MOC: All wetted parts are in MS with FRP lining (FRP
Lining- Bisphenol resin/ Min 5mm thickness).
Dimension specification: Diameter- Suitable for the

application, Flange standards- 150 class.
MOC: SS316L
Pipes and fittings for UF: Supply of piping, accessories and
supports for UF Feed and backwash Header and Lateral
lines with necessary Auto and manual valve arrangement and
suitable supporting.
MOC:
1. Pipe and accessories- uPVC, Sch 40, Socket joints/
SS316L, Sch10, ERW
3. Air lines- SS316L
4. Chemical dosing lines(NAOH, NAOCL, HCL, SMBS,
18 ANTISCALANT, POLY)- HDPE, PN10, PE100, IS4984 Lot 1

2. Process lines- 0.6 to 0.8 m/sec (Gravity and suction lines)/
1.2 to 1.8 m/sec (Delivery lines)
Welding:
3. uPVC lines are joined with suitable paste with socket
weld.
4. HDPE lines are welded with Butt welding
Page 386 of 449

Sl.
No.
UF system: Supply of Valves and NRVs.
19 2. Necessary gravity and pumping lines valves to be Lot 1
considered.
3. Valves and NRVs to be sized based on the pipe size
MOC of valve wetted parts: SS316L

III NF System:
MCF Feed pump for NF System: Supply of MCF Feed pump
for NF System with capacity of 12 cm/hr with minimum
pressure of 30 m head and Closed impeller with suitable
Application: UF Permeate Water, pH- 6.8 to 7.6, TDS-

22000 to 23000, Chloride- 11650, Sulphate- 2352
Pump Make- KSB/ Kishore/Sulzer/Grundfos/ Johnson, Flow

serve, Type- Centrifugal, Horizontal.
1 Nos. 2
Class F insulation.
Accessories: Base frame plate, Coupling, FRP Coupling

Guard, foundation bolts in SS316L and FRP motor canopy.

Static Mixer: Supply of Static Mixer for NF system with
capacity of 10 cu.m/ hr for MCF feed pump delivery line.
Application: MCF inlet line for dosing Chemical mixing,

2 No. 1
pH- 6.5 to 7.5, TDS- 23400, Chloride- 11613, Sulphate-
2352
MOC: Duplex Steel (2205)
Page 387 of 449

Sl.
No.
MCF for NF System: Supply of MCF Housing with
cartridge elements for feed flow of 10 m3/hr.
Cartridge Element: 5 micron, 2.5 inch Dia x 40 inch length,

PP cartridge filters, Number of elements: 3 Nos x 2 - 6 Nos
3 Nos. 2
MOC: MCF vessel is in CF8M (SS 316L)
Accessories: Cartridges, Nozzle for Feed inlet, outlet, drain,

and Air vent, Pressure Gauge for inlet, outlet and suitable
valve arrangement.
High Pressure Pump for NF System: Supply of Multistage
High Pressure Pump for NF System with capacity of 12
cm/hr @ 88 m head, Closed impeller with suitable
Application: UF Permeate Water, pH- 6.8 to 7.6, TDS-

22000 to 23000, Chloride- 11650, Sulphate- 2352
Pump: Make- Sulzar/ Grundfos/ Flow Serve/ ITT, Type-

Centrifugal, Vertical or Horizontal
4 Nos. 2
Class F insulation.


Page 388 of 449

Sl.
No.
Second Stage Booster Pump/ERT for NF System: Supply of
second Stage Booster Pump for NF System with capacity of
5 cm/hr with 85 m head and Closed impeller with suitable
Application: NF I Stage Reject, pH- 6.91, TDS- 30000 to

31000, Chloride- 12000 to 14000, Sulphate- 3500 to 4000
Pump: Make- KSB/ Sulzar/ Grundfos/ Flow Serve, Type-

Centrifugal, Horizontal.
5 Nos. 2
Class F insulation.


NF Pressure Vessel for I st Stage: Supply of NF Pressure
Vessel with accessories.
Make- Code line
Qty: 2 Nos
Size: Suitable for Filmtec NF membrane Model DSL

6 Nos. 2
NF8040 , 8” Dia x 40” Length membrane Element with 6
elements, 200 PSI FRP pressure vessel,
Type: Side entry port, Operating temperature range: 26.F (-

7.C ) minimum, 150.F ( 66.C) Maximum
Accessories: End cap, circlip, thrust ring, end connectors,

‘O’ Ring, Saddle and Strap assembly.
Page 389 of 449

Sl.
No.
NF Pressure Vessel for IInd Stage: Supply of NF Pressure
Make- Code line
Qty: 1 Nos
Size: Suitable for Filmtec NF membrane Model DSL

7 No. 1
NF8040 , 8” Dia x 40” Length membrane Element with 6
elements, 200 PSI FRP pressure vessel.

Accessories: End cap, circlip, thrust ring, and end

connectors, ‘O’ Ring, Saddle and Strap assembly.
NF Membrane: Supply of NF membrane with accessories
Application: Brine recovery from treated tannery effluent.
Qty:
1. I st Stage- 12 Nos
2. II nd Stage- 6 Nos
8 Nos. 18
MOC: Poly amide TFC
Make - GE make, DSL NF8040 , 8 inch Dia x 40 inch length

membrane element
Accessories: ‘U’ cup brine seal, Inter connectors and ‘O’

Rings.
NF Skid: Supply of NF skid with proper supporting clamp
which is Suitable for Code line pressure vessel size 8” Dia x
6” element, Pressure Range of the pressure vessel 200 PSI,
9 No. 1
Qty: 1 Skid consist of I st Stage- 2 vessels, II nd Stage- 1
vessels
MOC: SS 316L
Page 390 of 449

Sl.
No.
Agitator for NF CIP: Supply of CIP Water Mixing agitator
316 L impeller suitable for 1000 liter volume tank.


insulation.


Oil seal – 2 Nos
CIP Pump for NF: Supply of CIP Pump for NF System with
capacity of 15 cum/hr @ 30m head and Closed impeller with
suitable mechanical seal arrangement along with necessary
seal cooling and flushing arrangements.
Application: For NF cleaning water
Pump Make- KSB/ Kishore/Sulzer/Grundfos/ Johnson,Flow


Class F insulation.


Page 391 of 449

Sl.
No.
MCF for NF CIP: Supply of MCF Housing with cartridge
elements for feed flow of 15 cu.m/hr.
Cartridges Element: 5 micron, 2.5 inch Dia x 40 inch length,

PP cartridge filters - 5 Nos.
12 Nos. 2

valve arrangement.
HCl Dosing Pump for NF Online Dosing: Supply of HCl
LPH with 60 m head.
Application: HCl, Concentration- 30 to 31 %

13 Nos. 2

Oil seal – 2 Nos
SMBS Dosing Pump for NF Online Dosing: Supply of
SMBS dosing pump, Diaphragm/ Metering type with
capacity of 50 LPH @60 m Head.
MOC: All wetted parts are in PP
Application: SMBS, Concentration- 5 %

14 Nos. 2

Oil seal – 2 Nos
Page 392 of 449

Sl.
No.
Antiscalent Dosing Pump for NF Online Dosing: Supply
of Antiscalent dosing pump, Diaphragm/ Metering type with
capacity of 50 LPH @60 m Head.
Application: Antiscalent, Concentration- 1 %

15 Nos. 2

Oil seal – 2 Nos
Dosing Tank with Agitator for SMBS and Antiscalent:
Supply of Dosing Tank with Agitator for SMBS and
Antiscalent with tank capacity of 500 ltrs.
Application: SMBS and Antiscalent

Specification for Agitator: Supply of SMBS & Antiscalent

Mixing Agitator with 100 RPM suitable for HDPE tank
having capacity of 500 ltrs volume, Outdoor Installation,
continuous duty along with solid shaft, four blades, super
16 structure, working platform and hand rail with toe guard. Lot 1
Gear Box: Make- Radicon Greaves/ Shanthi/ / Elecon Make

speed reducer Gear box with suitable Gear Ratio
Motor: Make- Kirloskar/ Bharth bijilee/ TEFC/ Class F

Motor.
MOC:
(1). All wetted parts, fasteners and super structure (base
frame plate), working platform and hand rail with toe guard
are in SS316L. (2). Coupling guard/ motor canopy- FRP
Accessories: Coupling guard, motor canopy with flange type

coupler.
Page 393 of 449

Sl.
No.
Oil seal – 2 Nos

Application: HCl, Concentration- 31 %


Pipes and fittings for NF: Supply of piping, accessories and
supports for NF System.

2. Process lines- 0.6 to 0.8 m/sec (Gravity and pump suction
lines)/ 1.2 to 1.8 m/sec (pump delivery lines/ pressure lines)
MOC:
1. All gravity lines- HDPE, PN6, PE100, IS4984
2. Submersible pump delivery lines- SS316L, Sch 10, ERW
3. All supports- SS316L
18 4. Diffused aeration and Blower air lines- SS316L, Sch 10, Lot 1
ERW
5. Chemical dosing lines(NaOH, NaOCL, HCl, SMBS,
ANTISCALANT, POLY)- HDPE, PN10, PE100, IS4984
5. Chemical dosing lines(Sulphuric Acid)- MS, Class
Seamless Pipe
6. Lime and Soda ash- uPVC, Sch 40
7. Filter press lines- SS316L, Sch 40, ERW
Welding:
Air Compressor for NF System: Supply of Air compressor
19 pneumatic instruments , Pressure - 12 Kg/cm2 along with Lot 1
Page 394 of 449

Sl.
No.
Oil seal – 2 Nos
Electro Pneumatic valves ,Manual valves and NRVs for
NF System: Supply of Electro Pneumatic valves, NRVs and
Strainer as per the given specification.
20 Lot 1
considered.
operation.

IV RO System:
MCF Feed pump for RO System: Supply of MCF Feed
pump for RO System with capacity of 10 cm/hr with
minimum pressure of 30 m head and suitable head for site
condition and Closed impeller with suitable mechanical seal
arrangements.
Application: NF Permeate water, pH- 7 to 7.6, TDS- 13000

to 15000, Chloride- 8000 to 9000, Sulphate- 100 to 200

1 Nos. 2

Class F insulation.


Static Mixer: Supply of Static Mixer for RO system with
capacity of 10 cu.m/ hr for MCF feed pump delivery line.
2 No. 1
Application: MCF inlet line for dosing Chemical mixing,
pH- 6.5 to 7.5, TDS- 23000 to 24000, Chloride- 11613,
Sulphate- 2352
Page 395 of 449

Sl.
No.
MOC: Duplex Steel

MCF for RO System: Supply of MCF Housing with
cartridge elements for feed flow of 10 cu.m / hr @ 30 m
head
Application: NF Permeate water, pH- 6.5 to 7.0, TDS- 15000

to 16000, Chloride- 9216, Sulphate- 100
3 Cartridge Element: 5 micron, 2.5 inch Dia x 40 inch length, Nos. 2

PP cartridge filters, Nos. of Elements: 3 x 2 Vessels
Accessories: Cartridge, Nozzle for Feed inlet, outlet, drain,

valve arrangement.
High Pressure Pump for RO System: Supply of Multistage
High Pressure Pump for RO System with capacity of 10
cm/hr @ 215 m head, Closed impeller with suitable
Application: NF Permeate water, pH- 6.5 to 7, TDS- 12000

to 15000, Chloride- 8500 to 9000, Sulphate- 100 to 150
Pump: Make- Sulzar/ Grundfos/ Flow Serve/ ITT, Type-

Centrifugal, Vertical or Horizontal
4 Nos. 2
Class F insulation.


Page 396 of 449

Sl.
No.
Second Stage Booster Pump / ERT for RO System: Supply
of second Stage Booster Pump for RO System with capacity
of 6.5 cm/hr with 250 m head and Closed impeller with
Application: RO I concentrate, pH- 7 to 7.1, TDS- 22000 to

23000, Chloride- 12000 to 13000, Sulphate- 150 to 200
Pump: Make- KSB/ Sulzar/ Grundfos/ Flow Serve, Type-

5 Nos. 2
Class F insulation.
MOC: All wetted parts are in Duplex Steel

Guard, foundation bolts in SS316 and FRP motor canopy.

RO Pressure Vessel for I st Stage: Supply of RO Pressure
Make- Code line
Qty: 2 Nos
Size: Suitable for Filmtec RO membrane Model

6 SW30HRLE-370/34i (FILMTEC), 8” Dia x 40” Length Nos. 2
membrane Element with 6 elements, 450 PSI FRP pressure
vessel.
Type: Side entry port, Operating temperature range: 26.F

(-7.C ) minimum, 150.F ( 66.C) Maximum
Accessories: End cap, circlip, thrust ring and end connectors,

‘O’ Ring, Saddle and Strap assembly.
Page 397 of 449

Sl.
No.
RO Pressure Vessel for II nd Stage: Supply of RO
Pressure Vessel with accessories.
Make- Code line
Qty: 1 Nos
Size: Suitable for Filmtec RO membrane Model

7 SW30HRLE-370/34i (FILMTEC) , 8” Dia x 40” Length No. 1
membrane Element with 6 elements, 1000 PSI FRP pressure
vessel.

Accessories: End cap, circlip, thrust ring, and end

connectors, ‘O’ Ring, Saddle and Strap assembly.
Supply of RO membrane with accessories:
Application: Water recovery from NF Permeate.
Qty:
1. I st Stage- 12 Nos x 1 Stream - 12 Nos
2. II nd Stage- 6 Nos x 1 Stream - 6 Nos
8 Nos. 18
MOC: Poly amide TFC
Make: For Ist, IInd, IIIrd and IVth Stage- Filmtec make, RO
membrane Model SW30HRLE-370/34i, TFC, 8 inch Dia x
40 inch length membrane element
Accessories: ‘U’ cup brine seal, Inter connectors and ‘O’

Rings.
RO Skid: Supply of RO skid with proper supporting clamp
which is Suitable for Code line pressure vessel size 8” Dia x
6” element, Pressure Range of the pressure vessel from 450
to 1000 PSI,
9 Skid 1
Qty: Each skid consist of I st Stage- 2 vessels, II nd Stage- 1
vessels
MOC: SS 316L
Page 398 of 449

Sl.
No.
Agitator for RO CIP: Supply of CIP Water Mixing agitator
316L impeller suitable for 1 cum volume tank.


insulation.


Oil seal – 2 Nos
CIP Pump for RO: Supply of CIP Pump for RO System with
capacity of 15 cm/hr @ 30m head and Closed impeller with
Application: For RO cleaning water, pH- 6.5 to 7.5, TDS-

22000 to 25000

11 Nos. 2
Class F insulation.


Page 399 of 449

Sl.
No.
MCF for RO CIP: Supply of MCF Housing with cartridge
elements for feed flow of 15 cu.m/hr
Cartridges Element: 5 micron, 2.5 inch Dia x 40 inch length,

PP cartridge filters, Nos. of Elements: 5 x 2 Nos
12 Nos. 2

valve arrangement.
HCl Dosing Pump for RO Online Dosing: Supply of HCl
LPH with 60m head.

13 Nos. 2
Application: HCl, Concentration- 30 to 31 %

SMBS Dosing Pump for RO Online Dosing: Supply of
SMBS dosing pump, Diaphragm/ Metering type with
capacity of 50 LPH with 60m head.
MOC: All wetted parts are in PP
Application: SMBS, Concentration- 5 %

14 Nos. 2

Oil seal – 2 Nos
Antiscalent Dosing Pump for RO Online Dosing: Supply
of Antiscalent dosing pump, Diaphragm/ Metering type with
capacity of 50 LPH with 60m head.

15 Nos. 2
Application: Antiscalent, Concentration- 1 %

Page 400 of 449

Sl.
No.
Oil seal – 2 Nos
Dosing Tank with Agitator for SMBS and Antiscalent:

Supply of Dosing Tank with Agitator for SMBS and
Antiscalent with tank capacity of 200 Ltrs.
Specification for Dosing Tank: Supply of Cylinder, Vertical

Chemical storage tank with capacity of 200 Ltrs suitable for
Qty: Each 1 set for SMBS and Antiscalant system
Specification for Agitator: Supply of SMBS & Antiscalent

Mixing Agitator with 100 RPM suitable for FRP tank having
capacity of 200ltrs volume, Outdoor Installation, continuous
duty along with solid shaft, four blades, super structure,
working platform and hand rail with toe guard.
16 Nos. 2
Gear Box: Make- Radicon Greaves/ Shanthi/ / Elecon Make
speed reducer Gear box with suitable Gear Ratio
Motor: Make- Kirloskar/ Bharth bijilee/ TEFC/ Class F

Motor.
MOC:
(1). All wetted parts, fasteners and super structure (base
frame plate), working platform and hand rail with toe guard
are in SS316L. (2). Coupling guard/ motor canopy- FRP
Accessories: Coupling guard, motor canopy with flange type

coupler.

Oil seal – 2 Nos
Page 401 of 449

Sl.
No.
Application: HCl, Concentration- 33 %


Permeate Transfer Pump: Supply of Permeate Transfer
Pump with capacity of 13 cu.m/hr with 40 m Head, Non
clog, Closed impeller with suitable mechanical seal
arrangements.
Application: RO Permeate Water
Pump Make- KSB/ Kirloskar/ Johnson/Flow serve, Type-

18 Nos. 2
Class F insulation.

Guard, foundation bolts in SS316L and FRP motor canopy

Degassifier Tower along with air blower for RO
Permeate: Supply of Degassifier Tower with size of 0.6 m
dia. x 1.0 m H, along with suitable capacity of air blower for
19 Lot 2
200 m3/hr permeates flow with 200 ppm of CO2.
MOC: SS316L
Piping for RO System: Supply of Pipes and fittings for
RO System as per furnished detail:
20 1. For low pressure line, permeate line and CIP lines - Lot 1
SS316L, Sch 10, Seamless.
2. For all High pressure lines- Duplex, Sch40, and Seamless.
3. For chemical dosing lines- HDPE/ SS316L
Page 402 of 449

Sl.
No.
Valves and NRVs for RO System: Supply of Valves and
NRVs for RO System as per furnished detail:
1. For low pressure Valves - Butterfly valve, 150 Class,

CF8M- Disc, EPDM- Seat
21 2. For low pressure NRVs – Wafer type, 150 Class, CF8M- Lot 1
Disc, Seat ‘O’ Ring- EPDM
3. For all High pressure Valves and NRVs- Ball Type, 300
and 600 Class as suitable application, Duplex, Flanged end
4. For chemical dosing – PP Ball valve, Flanged end, 150
Class.
Air Compressor for RO System: Supply of Air compressor
pneumatic instruments , Pressure - 12 Kg/cm2 along with
22 Lot 1

Oil seal – 2 Nos
23 Erection and Fabrication:
Lifting arrangements: Supply of lifting structural's with
Chain block (3 Ton- 2 Nos for each lifting arrangement) for
the following areas: Drain Sump, SHT for Flow Jet, Blower
Lot 1
House, NT Tank, SRS Tank, Secondary Clarifier, UF
Building, NF Building, RO Building, Filter press for
Biological/ Chemical, Chemical storage godown.
Mechanical Fabrication work: Fabrication of all pipelines,
Skids and supporting structures etc., for Pre- Treatment, Lot 1
Quartz filter section, UF, NF, RO.
Mechanical Erection work: Erection of all equipment such as
filters, chemical dosing pumps, submersible pumps,
Lot 1
Centrifugal pumps, UF, NF, RO system, Degassifier tank,
Pipe lines, Valves and accessories etc., with complete
Painting: All SS pipelines - Ceramic coat, (ii) MS
supporting structure- one coat of Epoxy primer with two coat Lot 1
of Epoxy paint to be painted.
Fasteners: All fasteners, Foundation bolts and nuts &
Lot 1
supporting clamps for metallic items- SS 316L
HPRO system Chloride Stream: Supply, Installation,
erection & commissioning of HPRO System including
supply, erection& fabrication of mechanical equipment,
V Lot 1
supply, erection, testing & commissioning of electrical &
instrumentation works except civil works
HPRO section for Chloride system: Feed flow : 65 cu.m/ day
Hybrid 90 Bar RO System
Page 403 of 449

Sl.
No.
Micron Filter Feed Pump: Supply of Micron Filter Feed
Pump, Motor with one set of standby pump along with
suitable impeller and mechanical seal arrangement with
Pump: Centrifugal, Horizontal or Vertical, Multi stage,

Make- Sulzar/ Grundfos/ Flow Serve/ ITT/ Kirloskar
Motor Detail: Make- ABB/KEC/CG/BB, IP 55, Type: IE2,

1
Accessories: SS316L Base frame plate, Coupling, FRP

Coupling Guard, foundation bolts in SS316L and FRP motor
canopy.

Manual Basket Strainer:
Supply of Duplex (twin) basket filter having 50 micron mesh
with back wash arrangement.
MOC: All the wetted parts are in Duplex Steel and inter
2 connecting and back wash piping is Duplex Steel.
Make: Gopani, Amiad filtration systems, Rochem
Accessories: ON/ OFF valve, DP gauge arrangements, with

DP gauge.
Micron Cartridge Filter:
Supply of Micron Cartridge Filter with cartridge elements.
Specification of Cartridge Element: PP wound type 10

Micron Size, PP cartridge filters.
3 MOC: Cartridge Filter is in Duplex Steel.

and Air vent, Pressure Gauge for inlet, outlet with suitable
valve arrangement.
Page 404 of 449

Sl.
No.
Antiscalent Dosing Pump:
Supply of Antiscalent dosing pump of Diaphragm/ Metering
with reciprocating type, Motor with one set of standby pump.
MOC: All wetted parts are in SS316L. Make: Swelore,

Grundfos
Application: Antiscalent
Motor Detail: Make- ABB/ KEC/ CG/ BB, IP 55, Type: IE2,
4 TEFC, Class F insulation.

strainer, SS316L Base frame plate, Coupling, FRP Coupling
Guard, Foundation bolt, nut in SS316 and FRP motor canopy
for the above pump.

Oil seal – 2 Nos
Storage Tank for Anti Scalant: Supply of Chemical
Storage Tank for Anti scalant dosing system with Cylinder,
Vertical type Chemical storage tank with suitable for outdoor
installation.
Application: Anti scalant
5 HDPE Tank Specification: Cylinder, Vertical Chemical

Accessories: Top manual with lid along with following

Nozzles with Flange (including extrusion welding): Outlet/
Inlet/ Drain/ Overflow, LT and Recirculation nozzle (Each 1
No.).
Page 405 of 449

Sl.
No.
Sulphuric Acid Dosing Pump:
Supply of Sulphuric Acid dosing pump of Diaphragm/
Metering with reciprocating type, Motor with one set of
standby pump.
MOC: All wetted parts are in PVDF.
Application: Sulphuric Acid, 98% concentration and Specific

Gravity as 1.8
6 Make: Swelore, Grundfos

strainer, SS316 Base frame plate, Coupling, FRP Coupling

Oil seal – 2 Nos
Sulphuric acid Storage Tank for online dosing:
Supply of MS tank with accessories for storing Sulphuric
Acid.

Gravity as 1.8
MOC: MS
Specification: Thickness of the bottom plate is 15mm, top

7 and side plate is 12mm and nozzle flanges are 150 Class.
Accessories: Provide Suction/ Drain/ Overflow Nozzle- each

1no, Top manhole with Lid (cover) min Dia 500mm, Air
vent Nozzle 2" (Dia) x 6” (Length) - 1no, fume arrester and
Level indicator nozzle at topside 4"(Dia) x 6”(Length)- each
1 no along with Toe guard, Ladder and provide stiffeners for
tank side wall, bottom and top side.
Painting: Apply one coat of epoxy primer and two coat of

Epoxy painting on the outer surface.
Page 406 of 449

Sl.
No.
PVDF Injector/ Static Mixer for Sulphuric Acid dosing:
Supply of PVDF Injector/ Static Mixer consists with mixing
arrangements with flange end type.
Application: In Feed line for Sulphuric acid with water

8 mixing.

High Pressure Pump:
Supply of High pressure Pump having Pressure Rating of 75
Bar, Motor with one set of standby pump.
Pump Type- Option I: Centrifugal, Horizontal/ Vertical,

Multi stage, Make- Solar/ Grundfos/ Flow Serve/ ITT/
Kirloskar.
Pump Type- Option II: Triplex Plunger Pump - Plungers are

in Nickel Aluminium Bronze, Make- CAT
Pump Type- Option III: Diaphragm Pump - Diaphragms are

in Duplex, Make- Warner.
9
MOC: All wetted parts are in Duplex Steel.
Accessories: SS316L Base frame plate, Mechanical Seal

with necessary seal cooling and flushing arrangements,
Coupling, FRP Coupling Guard, foundation bolts in SS316L

Page 407 of 449

Sl.
No.
Servo Motor Control Valve (SMCV) Electrically
Actuated Valve:
Supply of servo Motor Control Valve (SMCV) with
Electrically Actuated Valve along with accessories and
suitable for 75 Bar.
MOC: Material Housing/ Material Inner Part - Duplex Steel
10 Specification: Electrical Actuator - 220 V, Body- double

seat globe, Bonnet & Blind Flange - bolted, Plug type -
Double seat, Leakage - ANSI/FCI 70.2, Seat ring - Threaded,
Guide - Top & bottom, Cv ratio - 50:1, Flow Characteristics
- Equal percentage, Linear & quick opening, Actuator -
Spring diaphragm with hand wheel, Positioner - I to P with
AFR for percentage opening through PLC.
Make - Forbes Marshall, Masonelian

ST (Spiral Tube) Module:
Supply of ST (Spiral Tube) Module with suitable membrane
with operating pressure of 75 bar.
MOC: Housing- FRP, Tie Rod/ Centre Rod- Duplex Steel,

Membrane- TFC Polyamide
11
Membrane Type - ST
Make of Pressure vessel and membrane: Rochem
Accessories: Hydraulic Connection - Flexible Rubber Hose

having operating Pressure - Upto 75 Bar with necessary
accessories.
Inline Booster Pump:
Supply of Inline Booster Pump, Motor with one set of
standby pump.
Pump Type: Centrifugal, Horizontal/ Vertical, Multi stage,

Make- Solar/ Grundfos/ Flow Serve/ ITT/ T & T/ Dickow.


Page 408 of 449

Sl.
No.
seal – 2 Nos and Mechanical seal – 1 No.
PT (Plate Tube) Module:

Supply of PT Module with suitable membrane with
operating pressure 75 bar.
MOC detail for Housing: Housing- FRP, Tie Rod/Centre

Rod - Duplex Steel.
13 MOC detail for Membrane: TFC Polyamide
Membrane Type - PT
Accessories: Hydraulic Connection - Flexible Rubber Hose.

Operating Pressure - Upto 75 Bar
Pipes and accessories:
Supply of Pipes and fittings for Hybrid RO System- ST
Module as per furnished detail.
MOC:
1. For low pressure line, permeate line- uPVC, Sch 40,
14
Make- Astral, GF.
2. For all High pressure lines- Duplex, Sch 80, and Seamless.
Welding:
1. All the Duplex lines should be welded with Tig welding
2. uPVC lines are welded with socket welding.
Valves and NRV's:
Supply of Valves, NRVs and Strainer as per the given
specification and suitable for 90 bar operating pressure..
15
considered.
operation.
MOC of Valve wetted parts: Duplex Steel

Bolton 120 Bar RO System
Page 409 of 449

Sl.
No.
Inline Booster Pump with Motor:
standby pump.

Make- Solar/ Grundfos/ Flow Serve/ ITT/ Kirloskar/ T & T/
Dickow.
16 Motor Detail: Make- ABB/KEC/CG/BB, IP 55, Type: IE2,


Coupling, FRP Coupling Guard, foundation bolts in SS316
Supply of PT Module with suitable membrane having
operating pressure of 90 bar.

Rod - Duplex Steel.
Membrane Type - PT

Actuated Valve:

18
Specification: Electrical Actuator - 220 V, Body- double
Page 410 of 449

Sl.
No.

Pipes and fittings:
Supply of Pipes and fittings for Bolton 90 Bar RO System-
RO PT System as per furnished detail.
MOC:
19 Make- Astral, GF.
Welding:
2. All the MS structural are welded with Arc welding
Supply of Rubber Hoses for Hydraulic Connections with
20
suitable size and specification.
Energy Recovery Device or Pressure Exchanger:
Supply of Energy Recovery Device or Pressure Exchanger
with standby having Max. Operating pressure: 90 Bar,
Service: SWRO, Bearings: Ceramics.
21
Make: Danfoss/ Grundfos
MOC: Duplex steel

Valves and NRV's:
specification and suitable for 90 bar operating pressure.
22
considered.
operation.
MOC of Valve wetted parts: Duplex Valve

Common work for Hybrid 90 Bar RO System and Bolton
120 Bar RO System:
Page 411 of 449

Sl.
No.
Intermediate Tank for Permeate Water Post Treatment
equipment (Common for Hybrid RO & Bolton RO):
Supply of Cylinder, Vertical HDPE storage tank with

23 storage HDPE tank, Make: Sintex, Chemical grade HDPE,

No.).
Intermediate Transfer Pump with Motor for Permeate Water
Post Treatment equipment (Common for Hybrid RO &
Bolton RO):
Supply of intermediate Transfer Pump, Motor with one set of
standby pump along with suitable mechanical seal
arrangement with necessary seal cooling and flushing
arrangements.
Pump: Centrifugal, Horizontal, Back pull out type, Make-

24
Solar/ Grundfos/ Flow Serve/ ITT/ Kirloskar

MOC: All wetted parts are in SS316L (CF8M)

Cleaning Tank for Cleaning system:
Application: Chemical solution.

25

No.).
Page 412 of 449

Sl.
No.
PVDF Ejector for Cleaning system:
Supply of PVDF Ejector consists with necessary nozzle
26 arrangements with flange end type.
MOC: PVDF.
27 suitable Chain block (Chain block 2 Nos for each lifting
arrangement).
Lifting arrangements, Skids and supporting structures etc.,
for Hybrid 75 Bar RO System- RO ST & PT and Bolton 90
Bar RO System- RO PT system (All fabrication tools,
28
cutting set, welding machine, grinding machines shall be
under scope of contractor, Skilled manpower shall be under
scope of contractor like Tig welder, Fitter & helper, welding
rods, Grinding wheel, gas etc.,).
filters, chemical dosing pumps, Multistage pumps,
Centrifugal pumps, DTRO Pressure Vessels and Membrane,
Degassifier tank, Pipe lines, Valves and accessories etc.,
29 with complete (All erection tools, tackles, crane, Fork lift,
JCP, chain pulley, rope, cutting set, welding machine &
grinding machines etc., complete set shall be under scope of
contractor, Skilled manpower shall be under scope of
contractor like Rigger, Fabricator, Welder & helper etc.,)
Painting: All Duplex/ SS pipelines - Ceramic coat, (ii) MS
30 supporting structure- one coat of Epoxy primer with two coat
31
supporting clamps for metallic items- SS 316
HPRO system for Sulphate Stream:
Supply, Installation, erection & commissioning of HPRO
System including supply, erection& fabrication of
VI mechanical equipment, supply, erection, testing & Lot 1
commissioning of electrical & instrumentation works except
civil works
HPRO section for Sulphate system: Feed flow : 40 cu.m/ day
Page 413 of 449

Sl.
No.
Micron Filter Feed Pump: Supply of Micron Filter Feed
Pump, Motor with one set of standby pump along with
suitable impeller and mechanical seal arrangement with
Pump: Centrifugal, Horizontal or Vertical, Multi stage,

Make- Sulzar/ Grundfos/ Flow Serve/ ITT/ Kirloskar

1
Accessories: SS316L Base frame plate, Coupling, FRP

Coupling Guard, foundation bolts in SS316L and FRP motor
canopy.

Manual Basket Strainer:
Supply of Duplex (twin) basket filter having 50 micron mesh
with back wash arrangement.
MOC: All the wetted parts are in Duplex Steel and inter
2 connecting and back wash piping is Duplex Steel.
Accessories: ON/ OFF valve, DP gauge arrangements, with

DP gauge.
Micron Cartridge Filter:
Supply of Micron Cartridge Filter with cartridge elements.
Specification of Cartridge Element: PP wound type 10

Micron Size, PP cartridge filters.
3 MOC: Cartridge Filter is in Duplex Steel.

and Air vent, Pressure Gauge for inlet, outlet with suitable
valve arrangement.
Page 414 of 449

Sl.
No.
Antiscalent Dosing Pump:
Supply of Antiscalent dosing pump of Diaphragm/ Metering
with reciprocating type, Motor with one set of standby pump.
MOC: All wetted parts are in SS316L. Make: Swelore,

Grundfos
Application: Antiscalent
Motor Detail: Make- ABB/ KEC/ CG/ BB, IP 55, Type: IE2,


Oil seal – 2 Nos
Storage Tank for Anti Scalant:
Chemical Storage Tank for Anti scalant dosing system:
Supply of Cylinder, Vertical Chemical storage tank with
Application: Anti scalant
5 HDPE Tank Specification: Cylinder, Vertical Chemical


No.).
Page 415 of 449

Sl.
No.
Sulphuric Acid Dosing Pump:
Supply of Sulphuric Acid dosing pump of Diaphragm/
Metering with reciprocating type, Motor with one set of
standby pump .

Gravity as 1.8
6 Make: Swelore, Grundfos


Oil seal – 2 Nos
Sulphuric acid Storage Tank for online dosing:
Supply of MS tank with accessories for storing Sulphuric
Acid.

Gravity as 1.8
MOC: MS
Specification: Thickness of the bottom plate is 15mm, top

7 and side plate is 12mm and nozzle flanges are 150 Class.
Accessories: Provide Suction/ Drain/ Overflow Nozzle- each

1no, Top manhole with Lid (cover) min Dia 500mm, Air
vent Nozzle 2" (Dia) x 6” (Length) - 1no, fume arrester and
Level indicator nozzle at topside 4"(Dia) x 6”(Length)- each
1 no along with Toe guard, Ladder and provide stiffeners for
tank side wall, bottom and top side.
Painting: Apply one coat of epoxy primer and two coat of

Epoxy painting on the outer surface.
Page 416 of 449

Sl.
No.
PVDF Injector/ Static Mixer for Sulphuric Acid dosing:
Supply of PVDF Injector/ Static Mixer consists with mixing
arrangements with flange end type.
Application: In Feed line for Sulphuric acid with water

8 mixing.

High Pressure Pump:
Supply of High pressure Pump having Pressure Rating of 75
Bar, Motor with one set of standby pump.
Pump Type- Option I: Centrifugal, Horizontal/ Vertical,

Multi stage, Make- Solar/ Grundfos/ Flow Serve/ ITT/
Kirloskar.
Pump Type- Option II: Triplex Plunger Pump - Plungers are

in Nickel Aluminium Bronze, Make- CAT
Pump Type- Option III: Diaphragm Pump - Diaphragms are

in Duplex, Make- Warner.
9
Accessories: SS316 Base frame plate, Mechanical Seal with

necessary seal cooling and flushing arrangements, Coupling,
FRP Coupling Guard, foundation bolts in SS316L and FRP
motor canopy.

Page 417 of 449

Sl.
No.
Actuated Valve:
10 Specification: Electrical Actuator - 220 V, Body- double


ST (Spiral Tube) Module:
Supply of ST (Spiral Tube) Module with suitable membrane
with operating pressure of 75 bar.
MOC: Housing- FRP, Tie Rod/ Centre Rod- Duplex Steel,

Membrane- TFC Polyamide
11
Membrane Type - ST
Accessories: Hydraulic Connection - Flexible Rubber Hose

having operating Pressure - Upto 75 Bar with necessary
accessories.
Inline Booster Pump:
standby pump.

Make- Solar/ Grundfos/ Flow Serve/ ITT/ T & T/ Dickow.


Page 418 of 449

Sl.
No.
seal – 2 Nos and Mechanical seal – 1 No.

Supply of PT Module with suitable membrane with
operating pressure 75 bar.

Rod - Duplex Steel.
Membrane Type - PT

Pipes and accessories:
Supply of Pipes and fittings for Hybrid RO System- ST
Module as per furnished detail.
MOC:
Welding:
Supply of Rubber Hoses for Hydraulic Connections with
15
suitable size and specification.
Valves and NRV's:
specification and suitable for 90 bar operating pressure..
16
considered.
operation.
MOC of Valve wetted parts: Duplex Steel

Bolton 120 Bar RO System
Page 419 of 449

Sl.
No.
Inline Booster Pump with Motor:
standby pump.

Make- Solar/ Grundfos/ Flow Serve/ ITT/ Kirloskar/ T & T/
Dickow.
17 Motor Detail: Make- ABB/KEC/CG/BB, IP 55, Type: IE2,


Coupling, FRP Coupling Guard, foundation bolts in SS316
Supply of PT Module with suitable membrane having
operating pressure of 90 bar.

Rod - Duplex Steel.
Membrane Type - PT

Actuated Valve:

19
Specification: Electrical Actuator - 220 V, Body- double
Page 420 of 449

Sl.
No.
Pipes and fittings:

Supply of Pipes and fittings for Bolton 90 Bar RO System-
RO PT System as per furnished detail.
MOC:
Welding:
Energy Recovery Device or Pressure Exchanger:
Supply of Energy Recovery Device or Pressure Exchanger
with standby having Max. Operating pressure: 90 Bar,
Service: SWRO, Bearings: Ceramics.
21
Make: Danfoss/ Grundfos
MOC: Duplex steel

Valves and NRV's:
specification and suitable for 90 bar operating pressure.
22
considered.
operation.
MOC of Valve wetted parts: Duplex Valve

Common work for Hybrid 90 Bar RO System and Bolton
120 Bar RO System:
Intermediate Tank for Permeate Water Post Treatment
equipment (Common for Hybrid RO & Bolton RO):
23
Page 421 of 449

Sl.
No.
No.).
Intermediate Transfer Pump with Motor for Permeate Water

Post Treatment equipment (Common for Hybrid RO &
Bolton RO):
Supply of intermediate Transfer Pump, Motor with one set of
standby pump along with suitable mechanical seal
arrangement with necessary seal cooling and flushing
arrangements.
Pump: Centrifugal, Horizontal, Back pull out type, Make-

24
Solar/ Grundfos/ Flow Serve/ ITT/ Kirloskar

MOC: All wetted parts are in SS316L (CF8M)

Cleaning Tank for Cleaning system:
Application: Chemical solution.

25

No.).
PVDF Ejector for Cleaning system:
Supply of PVDF Ejector consists with necessary nozzle
26 arrangements with flange end type.
MOC: PVDF.
27 suitable Chain block (Chain block 2 Nos for each lifting
arrangement).
Page 422 of 449

Sl.
No.
Lifting arrangements, Skids and supporting structures etc.,
for Hybrid 75 Bar RO System- RO ST & PT and Bolton 90
Bar RO System- RO PT system (All fabrication tools,
28
cutting set, welding machine, grinding machines shall be
under scope of contractor, Skilled manpower shall be under
scope of contractor like Tig welder, Fitter & helper, welding
rods, Grinding wheel, gas etc.,).
filters, chemical dosing pumps, Multistage pumps,
Centrifugal pumps, DTRO Pressure Vessels and Membrane,
Degassifier tank, Pipe lines, Valves and accessories etc.,
29 with complete (All erection tools, tackles, crane, Fork lift,
JCP, chain pulley, rope, cutting set, welding machine &
grinding machines etc., complete set shall be under scope of
contractor, Skilled manpower shall be under scope of
contractor like Rigger, Fabricator, Welder & helper etc.,)
Painting: All Duplex/ SS pipelines - Ceramic coat, (ii) MS
30 supporting structure- one coat of Epoxy primer with two coat
31
supporting clamps for metallic items- SS 316L
Multiple Effect Evaporator for Chloride Stream:
VII Lot 1
Capacity: feed flow 28 cu.m/day for 20 hours of operations.
Supply of new Evaporator System with capacity of 28
cu.m/day @ 20 hours of operations along with necessary
Calandria, feed/circulation/one steam ejector with standby of
vacuum pump with isolation valves, Surface Condenser,
Interconnecting piping from balance tank to evaporator, with
SS316L supporting Structures, Salt Settler etc.
MOC (Minimum Grade required):

1
a. Calandria: (i) Tubes in SS316L with 1.2mm thick confirm
to SA 213 TP 316L, (ii) Outer Shell in SS316L.
b. Product Piping in SS316L.
c. Vapour Duct in SS316L.
d. Surface Condenser: (i) Tubes in SS316L, (ii) Shell in CS.
e. Salt Settler MS with FRP lined
f. Super Structure and Supporting Structural Materials are in
SS316L
Page 423 of 449

Sl.
No.
Falling film evaporator :
Feed flow rate : 1.4 m3/hr
Water Recovery:70%
Condensate flow : 1.0 m3/hr
Concentrate flow : 0.4 m3/hr
Steam Requirement :7 Tons/hr
No.of Effects: 5
Forced Circulation Evaporator :

Feed Solid conc : 30- 35%
Recovery :30%
No.of Effects: 5
Pusher Centrifuge:
Feed rate: 1.6 Tons/day
Salt output 0.08 Tons/hr
Supply of FRP Cooling Tower with Induced draft fan, CI
Circulating pumps with CS piping.
Supply of CIP System consists of 5 Cu.m capacity HDPE
tank, Pumps of MOC SS316L, Inter connecting piping from
tank to evaporator
Supply of Spares (i) Mechanical seal of each size, (ii)bearing
of each size for all pumps, (iii) oil seal 4 sets of each size
(iv) 2 sets of Nutsche filter clothes
Supply of Standby pumps for feed, condensate and cooling
tower circulation pump
Insulation of Equipments: Insulation shall be done for all
equipment which are operating above 45 Deg C for
Evaporator plant and Chiller
Painting : All external surfaces of MS items shall be painted
with primer & Epoxy with 500 microns thickness for
ATFD for Chloride system: Supply, Erection, Fabrication,
VIII Testing and Commissioning of ATFD section for Chloride Lot 1
system: Feed flow : 4 cu.m/ day @ 20hrs Operation.
Page 424 of 449

Sl.
No.
ATFD Feed Tank: Supply of Cylinder, Vertical FRP
installation.
1 Application: FCE Concentrate

Supply of Agitated thin film dryer System with capacity of 4
cum/ day @ 20 hrs operation basis along with necessary
Agitator, feed, Condensate transfer pumps (Effluent
condensate and steam condensate), Vacuum pump with
standby for all pumps along with isolation valves, Surface
Condenser, Flash vessel, Interconnecting piping from
balance tank to ATFD, with MS FRP resin coating
supporting Structures and feed distribution perforated
arrangement at top side along with bottom tray arrangement
for mixed salt collection, Steam pipe lines, etc., for above
said ATFD system.
Application: Mixed salt recovered from mother liquor of

MEE- Chloride Stream.
2
MOC (Minimum Grade required) and Make of the
equipment:
a. Balance Tank / Feed Tank (day tank): SS316L, Shell
thickness- Min 5mm.
b. Process / Product Pipe with necessary union assembly
MOC in SS 316L.
c. Steam lines are in Seamless pipe with necessary steam
trap, bye pass line and valve arrangements.
d. Vapour Duct MOC in SS 316L.
e. Surface Condenser: (i) Dish and Tubes in SS316L (ii)
Shell in SS 316L (Steam contact area).
f. Flash vessel: MOC as SS316L.
g. Super Structure and Supporting Structural Materials are in
SS316L
Condensate flow: 0.08 m3/hr/unit
Recovery: 50-70%
Steam requirement: 0.25 Tons/hr/unit
Page 425 of 449

Sl.
No.
Specification for Feed pumps: Type of Pump- AOD Pump,
MOC- Teflon Suitable for handling 400 GPL
Specification for Condensate transfer pump: MOC as
SS316L and preferable make- KSB/ Flow Serve/ Johnson/
Solar/ Kirloskar
Specification for Gear box: Preferable make- Shanthi Gear
Box/ Greaves along with over loading tripping arrangement.
Specification for Cooling Tower: Preferable make- Blue
Chip, MOC Casing: FRP, MOC of Fan- Aluminium Alloy,
MOC of Supporting Structure and fasteners- SS316L
Specification for Cooling water Circulation pump: MOC-
SS+B26516, Preferable make- KSB/ Flow Serve/ Johnson/
Solar/ Kirloskar
Specification for Vacuum pump: Preferable make: PPI or
equivalent; MOC as SS316L with Mechanical Seal
arrangement, Make: or Blower- MOC as SS316L
(a) Pipe line velocity for process/ Feed lines- 1.2 to 1.8 m/sec
and gravity lines- 0.8 to 1.0m/ sec.
m. All the SS pipes and equipment welded by Tig.
(b) If system is designed for vacuum condition provide
mechanical seal arrangement for Stuffing Box.
(c) Provide necessary lifting arrangement for ATFD,
working platform, Staircase, Handrails with toe guard.
(d) Supply foundation bolt & nuts with MOC of SS316L for
all equipment
Circulating pumps with MS piping.
Supply of cooling water pump with standby along with
piping.
Structural & Painting
All external surfaces of MS structural should be coated with
FRP Isothalic resin (thickness min 500 microns).
Multiple Effect Evaporator and Crystallizer System for
IX Sulphate Stream: Capacity: feed flow 14 cu.m/day for 20 Lot 1
hrs of operation.
Supply of new Evaporator System with capacity of 14
cu.m/day @ 20 hours of operations along with necessary
Calandria, feed/circulation/one steam ejector with standby of
vacuum pump with isolation valves, Surface Condenser,
Interconnecting piping from balance tank to evaporator, with
MS supporting Structures, Salt Settler etc.
1
MOC (Minimum Grade required):
a. Calandria: (i) Tubes in SS316L with 1.2mm thick confirm
to SA 213 TP 316L, (ii) Outer Shell in SS316L.
b. Product Piping in SS316L.
c. Vapour Duct in SS316L.
d. Surface Condenser: (i) Tubes in SS316L, (ii) Shell in
Page 426 of 449

Sl.
No.
SS316L.
e. Salt Settler MS with FRP lined
f. Super Structure and Supporting Structural Materials are in
SS316L
Falling Film Evaporator(FFE):

2 Recovery:63%
No.of Effects: 5
Adiabatic Chiller Feed Tank: Supply of Cylinder, Vertical

FRP storage tank with capacity of 3000 Ltrs, suitable for
3 Application: FCE Concentrate

Adiabatic Chiller
Feed rate: 0.3 m3/hr @ 1.22 Sp.g
4
Operation Hrs: 15 hrs/day
Supply of Chiller with necessary steam ejector, feed pumps
(one working, one standby), cooling water pumps (one
working, one standby), Pusher centrifuge with washing
arrangement, seal tank, mother liquor transfer pump,
intermediate feed tank (as buffer between evaporator and
crystallizer) necessary process and cooling water piping and
supporting structures with isolation valves etc.,
MOC:
a. Crystallizer vessel - MSRL (Ebonite rubber)
5 b. Steam Ejector – Carbon Steel
c. Feed Pump – CF8M
d. Cooling water pump - CF8M
e. Mother Liquor transfer pump – SS316L
f. Pusher Centrifuge – SS316L.
g. Process Piping – FRP/HDPE
h. Cooling water piping - MS
i. Seal Tank – FRP
j. Intermediate feed Tank – HDPE
k. Supporting structures - MS
Page 427 of 449

Sl.
No.
Forced Circulation Evaporator (FCE):
6 Condensate water Recovery:44%
No.of Effects: 5
Pusher Centrifuge
7 Feed rate: 1 Tons/day
Salt output rate: 0.05 Tons/hr/unit
8
Circulating pumps with CS piping.
Supply of CIP System consists of 5 Cu.m capacity HDPE
9 tank, Pumps of MOC SS316L, Inter connecting piping from
tank to evaporator
Supply of Spares (i) Mechanical seal of each size, (ii)bearing
10 of each size for all pumps, (iii) oil seal 4 sets of each size
(iv) 2 sets of Nutsche filter clothes
Supply of Standby pumps for feed, condensate and cooling
11
tower circulation pump
Insulation of Equipments: Insulation shall be done for all
12 equipment which are operating above 45o C for Evaporator
plant and Chiller
Painting : All external surfaces of MS items shall be painted
13 with primer & Epoxy with 500 microns thickness for
ATFD for Sulphate Stream: Supply, Erection, Fabrication,
X Testing and Commissioning of ATFD section for Sulphate Lot 1
system: Feed flow : 1.8 cu.m/ day @ 20Hrs operation;
Page 428 of 449

Sl.
No.
Supply of Agitated thin film dryer System with capacity of
1.8 cum/ day @ 20 hr operation basis along with necessary
Agitator, feed, Condensate transfer pumps (Effluent
condensate and steam condensate), Vacuum pump with
standby for all pumps along with isolation valves, Surface
Condenser, Flash vessel, Interconnecting piping from
balance tank to ATFD, with MS FRP resin coating
supporting Structures and feed distribution perforated
arrangement at top side along with bottom tray arrangement
for mixed salt collection, Steam pipe lines, etc., for above
said ATFD system.
Application: Mixed salt recovered from mother liquor of

MEE- Sulphate Stream.
1
MOC (Minimum Grade required) and Make of the
equipment:
a. Balance Tank / Feed Tank (day tank): SS316L, Shell
thickness- Min 5mm.
b. Process / Product Pipe with necessary union assembly
MOC in SS 316L.
c. Steam lines are in Seamless pipe with necessary steam
trap, bye pass line and valve arrangements.
d. Vapour Duct MOC in SS 316L.
e. Surface Condenser: (i) Dish and Tubes in SS316L (ii)
Shell in SS 316L (Steam contact area).
f. Flash vessel: MOC as SS316L.
g. Super Structure and Supporting Structural Materials are in
SS316L
Feed rate : 0.1 m3/hr/unit
2 Condensate flow: 0.05 m3/hr/unit
Recovery: 50-70%
Steam requirement: 0.12 Tons/hr/unit
Specification for Feed pumps: Type of Pump- AOD Pump,
MOC- Teflon Suitable for handling 400 GPL.
Specification for Condensate transfer pump: MOC as
SS316L and preferable make- KSB/ Flow Serve/ Johnson/
Solar/ Kirloskar
Specification for Gear box: Preferable make- Shanthi Gear
3 Box/ Greaves along with over loading tripping arrangement.
Specification for Cooling Tower: Preferable make- Blue
Chip, MOC Casing: FRP, MOC of Fan- Aluminium Alloy,
MOC of Supporting Structure and fasteners- SS316L
Specification for Cooling water Circulation pump: MOC-
CI, Preferable make- KSB/ Flow Serve/ Johnson/ Solar/
Kirloskar
Page 429 of 449

Sl.
No.
Specification for Vacuum pump: Preferable make: PPI or
equivalent; MOC as SS316L with Mechanical Seal
arrangement, Make: or Blower- MOC as SS316L
(a) Pipe line velocity for process/ Feed lines- 1.2 to 1.8 m/sec
and gravity lines- 0.8 to 1.0m/ sec.
m. All the SS pipes and equipment welded by Tig.
(b) If system is designed for vacuum condition provide
mechanical seal arrange
4
ment for Stuffing Box.
(c) Provide necessary lifting arrangement for ATFD,
working platform, Staircase, Handrails with toe guard.
(d) Supply foundation bolt & nuts with MOC of SS316L for
all equipment
5
Circulating pumps with MS piping.
Supply of cooling water pump with standby along with
6
piping.
Structural & Painting
7 All external surfaces of MS structural should be coated with
FRP Isothalic resin (thickness min 500 microns).
Supply, erection, testing & commissioning of Medium
pressure 1.5 ton @ 10.5 bar Package boiler includes feed
tank, pumps, fan / blower, valves, Steam, water pipes &
8 fitting, safety equipment, insulation, chimney, electrical Lot 1
control panel, instruments with all accessories suitable for
multi -fuel feeding along with IBR approval & Stack
emission monitoring system as per CPCB Norms.
C Breakup cost for Electrical Work
Electrical Scope of Work:
I Design, engineering, Supply, erection, testing &
commissions of electrical works for ZLD pilot plant
PMCC Panel for Pilot Plant:
Hz, MCCB shall be Compartmentalized, free standing, floor
mounting, dust & Vermin proof, Single front access,
Bottom cable entry, Electrolyte Aluminium busbar,
Horizontal & vertical bus chambers for 3 Phase with neutral,
433 Volt AC, & Control busbar for single phase 110 Volt
1 AC, Starter modules, Cable chambers along with separate Lot 1.0
compartment for Instrumentation marshalling arrangement
with following specification:
Make: L&T/ Siemens /Schneider Electric
Note: (a) Digital multifunction meter shall have Modbus
output & same shall be connected through PLC system to
monitor the energy reading at Central monitoring
SCADA panel located at CETP admin building. (b) SFU
Page 430 of 449

Sl.
No.
shall be suitable for Harsh Environmental. (Ref: L&T
Product, HE Grade SFU)
Incomer Feeder:
3 Pole, 630 Amps, MCCB for incomer with microprocessor
based Over current, Short Circuit, earth fault relay and shunt
release & under voltage relay, 3 Nos.of Current transformers,
Digital Multifunction meter with Voltage, Current,
Frequency, KWH, KVA, KVAR, Power factor, R,Y,B, ON,
OFF, Trip indication lamps, 2 Nos of KVA Control
transformer with SFU, contactor, timer, indication lamp etc.,
DOL Feeder:
Direct On Line starters modules with Suitable rating TPN
fuse switch unit, 110 Volt AC operated 3 pole power
contactor with 2 NO+2 NC aux. contact- 1 No. & control &
feed back signal auxiliary contactors with 2 NO+2NC aux.
contacts - 4 Nos., Bi-metal Over Load Relay, Power and
control HRC fuses, 110 Volt, LED Panel indicating lamps
for starter ON/OFF/Trip, hour meter, 3 Nos. of Current
Transformer with Digital ammeter and Connect well Make,
CST type, Cable connector blocks etc., "ON" Push button,
Emergency type "OFF" push button, Terminal protection
cover
(i) Rating upto 3.7 KW only
(ii) Rating & quantity will be based on pilot plant
requirement.
Star/Delta Feeder:
Star/Delta starters modules, Suitable ratings TPN fuse switch
unit, 110 Volt AC operated 3 pole power contactor with 2
NO+2 NC aux. contact- 3 Nos. & Control contactors with 2
NO+2NC aux. contacts - 4 Nos., Bi-metal Over Load Relay,
Power and control HRC fuses, 110 Volt, LED Panel
indicating lamps for starter ON/OFF/Trip, hour meter, "ON"
Push button, Emergency type "OFF" push button, Terminal
protection cover, Cable connector blocks etc.,
(i) Motor Rating from 5.5 KW and Upto 37 KW only
(ii) Rating & quantity will be based on pilot plant
requirement.
Page 431 of 449

Sl.
No.
Rating & quantity will be based on pilot plant requirement
(c) 1 Nos. of 32 Amps, TPN Fuse switch units with 20 Amps
HRC fuse links as spare feeder.
button station with following specifications for local control
all equipment.
(a ) Enclosure shall have MOC of Thermoplastic / FRP , IP
65 for dosing area / high polluted area.
gland.
1 No. of Non illuminated "ON" Green Colour Push button
(b) 1 No. of Emergency Stay put Red Colour Mushroom
2 Lot 1
actuator, Press to Lock & Turn to release "OFF" push button
with 2 NO + 2 NC contact without key type.
(c) Supply of accessories including Name plate, SS fasteners,
Neoprene endless moulded gasket, 2 Nos. of Earthing, Screw
type terminal blocks with Spare.
(d) Supply and fixing of cable junction box for all motors
Motor Terminal junction Box:
Supply and fixing of cable junction box for all motors
Electrical power & control cables
a) Cables for power circuits shall be provided with copper
conductors upto 4 sq.mm & above 4 sq.mm aluminium
3 conductor cable. Lot 1.0
b) Cables for control circuits shall be of stranded copper
conductors with a minimum size of 5 cores x 1.5 sq.mm.
Supply of incoming cable shall be suitable Runs x 3.5 Core x
Suitable sq.mm, Aluminium Conductor, 1100 Volts, XLPE
Insulated and Sheathed, Armoured U.G cable with necessary
cable gland.
Cable from PCC to MCC Panel of Pilot plant.
Page 432 of 449

Sl.
No.
Supply of 1100V, 3 Core x suitable size of Aluminium
Conductor, XLPE Insulated and Sheathed, Armoured U.G
hume pipe protection over the cable for road crossing. Cable
from MCC panel to individual equipment.
Supply of 1100V, 5 Core x 1.5 sq.mm, , Copper Conductor,
XLPE Insulated and Sheathed, Armoured U.G cable with
necessary cable gland, earth work, sand cushioning, brick
guarding & earth refilling over the cable, hume pipe protection
over the cable for road crossing. Cable from MCC panel to
push button station near individual equipment, Make:
Supply of 4 Core x 2.5sqmm, Copper, armoured, U.G cable
with necessary cable gland from LSB panel to each Sub
LSB, Make: RPG/Finolex/Polycab.
cable with necessary cable gland from each Sub LSB to
each switch board, Make: RPG/Finolex/Polycab.
Supply of 4 Core x 6 sqmm Copper armoured, U.G cable
with necessary cable gland from PCC panel to each PDB,
Supply of 4 Core x 2.5sqmm , Copper, armoured, U.G
cable with necessary cable gland from PDB to each Sub
PDB boards at various locations, Make:
Supply of 4 Core x suitable size, copper conductor
armoured, U.G cable with necessary cable gland from each
Sub PDB boards at various locations to Power sockets,
Lighting & Power Circuits with Light fittings / LDB / PDB
Board: : Supply & Wiring charges for lighting panel in
suitably sized G.I conduits, supported on walls, ceiling etc.,
at an interval of 1000 mm, installation of light control
switches and receptacles housed in stove enameled steel
boxes, earthing with 14 SWG copper conductor continuous
wire run outside along the conduit and clamped at every
1000 mm interval and termination of wires at lighting panel,
light control switches, receptacles, lighting fixtures, etc., as
4 Lot 1
required including supply of all the items for the work
detailed above such as 650 V grade. 2.5/4mm2, copper
conductor PVC insulated wires, 6A/16A switches, GI
conduits and accessories (such as junction boxes fabricated
from 16 SWG sheet and complete with gasket, knockouts for
conduit entire earthing terminal with bolt, nut and washer, 14
SWG copper earthing with flexible conduit etc., shall be
included in the Contractor's scope. All work necessary for
fixing of boxes, conduits etc., together with supply of
Page 433 of 449

Sl.
No.
necessary hardware, shall be carried out by the Contractor.
Wiring for outdoor areas other shall be carried out by means
of 1.1 KV grade armoured cables with copper conductors

(a) Supply of 433 volts, 3 Phase Neutral Lighting
Distribution Board (LDB) with 63 Amps, TPN, ELCB, bus
bar type, 12 way with 6 A Single pole MCBs for outgoings.
(b) Supply of 433 volts, 3 Phase Neutral Power Distribution
Board with 125 Amps, TPN, ELCB, bus bar type, adequate
No. of way with 32 A Double pole/ Triple pole MCBs for
outgoings.
(c) Supply of 433 volts, metal clad power sockets with 6 / 16
A Single pole MCBs for outgoings
(d) Supply & fixing of industrial 2 X 18 /20/36 Watts, LED
tube type fitting with reflector shading for pumping house - 1
Lot.
(e) Supply, erection of 120 / 150 / 250 Watts, LED street
lamp with RCC pole, industrial type, corrosion proof fittings
for inside & outside of pumping house - 1 Lot.
(f) Supply, erection of 48 /60/72 Watts, LED lamp, industrial
type, weather, corrosion proof fittings for outside of
pumping house - 1 Lot.
(g) Supply of ceiling fan & Exhaust fan Make: Crompton
Greaves / Almonord - 1 Lot.
The following equipment / items in required quantities shall
be provided in the electrical rooms such as PMCC & MCC
rooms (a) 6 kgs of CO 2 Fire extinguishers (b) Stand made
of steel for keeping item (c) First and box with required
5 Lot 1
medicines (d) Safety electrical Rubber insulated Gloves (e)
Electrical Insulation Mat with ISI 15652 (f) Danger labels
(g) Danger board (h) Safety charts, First aid charts (i)
Emergency fixture to provide lighting continuously for about
8 hours
FRP Cable tray:
Supply, Erection of suitable Size, FRP cable tray, Coupler
plates, bends, reducers, tees, cross members with all
6 accessories shall be provided with necessary tray M.S Lot 1
supports, civil works Entire cable shall be laid on cable tray
only. Earthing shall be provided at regular interval and
connected with separate earth pit.
Page 434 of 449

Sl.
No.
MS Channel & MS chequered plate: Supply of 5 mm thick
M.S chequered plates with handle for covering cable
7 trenches & Supply of suitable size M.S Beam/Pipe/Channel Lot 1
for supporting cable tray, chequered plats, push button
station etc., (M.S Angle is not accepted)
Supply erection and testing of Earth pit with earth electrode
& refilling chemical compound with necessary all materials
8 as per IS 3043 (For PMCC panels & Motor Body, earth pits Lot 1
should be interlinked with others except PLC/SCADA &
VFD earth pits.
Inspectorate, etc. for obtaining all the statutory approvals
9 Job 1
obtaining safety certificates from Electrical Inspectorate.
Test report / Revised test reports from Electrical inspectorate
Any defects / deviation / modification pointed in the above
said inspections.
Instrumentation Work
PLC & SCADA System with UPS & Stabilizer:
Modular based PLC panel with necessary power supply unit,
1 processor, memory card, communication module with 1 set Lot 1
of Hot redundancy for power, Cold redundancy for
processor unit
PLC shall consists of :(a) Local Control Unit (LCU) as local
computer to handle individual PID loops with analog input /
output signals digital inputs / outputs of(b) Data Acquisition
Unit. (c) Batch Sequencing Unit shall contain a number of
external events, timing counters, arbitrary function
generators, and internal logic.(d) Local Display shall provide
analog display stations, analog trend recorder for readout (e)
Bulk Memory Unit to store and recall process data by
usually mass storage disks(f) General Purpose Computer
shall use to program by Client or third party to perform
sophisticated functions such as optimization, advance
control, expert system, etc.(g) Central Operator Display shall
contain consoles for operator communication with the
system, and display units(h) Data Highway: A serial
digital data transmission link connecting all other
components in the system shall consist of coaxial cable with
redundant data highway to reduce the risk of data loss. (i)
Local area Network with required Cable (LAN with a port
device to allow connection to remote devices through a
standard local area network.(j) Able to configure Modbus
instruments.
Page 435 of 449

Sl.
No.
The programmable logic controller (PLC) shall be located in
environmentally controlled and AC cooled instrument
requirement. The PLC shall have a single processor I/O with
redundancy & also with auto testing configuration and shall
be a microprocessor based system. The functional capability
of the Processor system shall have logic function,
sequencing, and timing function with a range of 0 to 99.999
sec & with the least count of 0.01.Total No. of IO’S, Power
Supply, Communication Cable, Relay Card will be decided
as per Vendor requirement Potential free/only contact with
contact ratings shall be provided for output contacts from
PLC. All output cards for driving pneumatic/motorized
valves, alarm Annunciators – 110V AC, 0.5A (Inductive) &
24V DC and 2A (Inductive)
I/O Tags - As required for Pilot Plant Lot 1
SCADA
software for PLC/SCADA system including PLC programs Lot 1
& logic controls for 2000 tags for PLC
Engineering, Documentation, Programming &
L.S 1
Commissioning
Surge protection devices (Surge arrestor) - for voltage spike
Nos. 4.0
& lightning protection
UPS & Servo Stabilizer (With Standby):
5 kVA, On-line UPS with 8 hours power back up and
UPS
Advanced DSP Controlled UPS System, Pure Sine wave,
SPWM Technology with Gibbet's, High MOTIF and
minimum MATTER, SNMP interface – web enabled
monitoring, Full function LCD display to monitor electrical
parameters, Overload & Short circuit protection with audible
alarm, Built-in spike and surge protector, Static bypass
2 switch, Input Voltage: 433 Volt ± 10%, combined variation Lot 2
in Voltage & frequency ± 5%, Output voltage: 230 V AC
with 8 hours power Backup, along with Exide tubular 180
AH, suitable Nos. of batteries with necessary cables &
hardware
Make: Numeric/DB/Equivalent
Stabilizer
Single Phase, Oil Cool / Air Cooled, Input Range 170V -
270V, Output Voltage 230V AC adjustable between 200V-
260V, Correction Rate 25V / 35V / 60V / Sec, Protection
Over/Under Voltage, Short-circuit, Overload, Fuse
Page 436 of 449

Sl.
No.
Protection for Motor & Input Output on, LEDs Indication
Input On, Output On, Output Cut Off, Output Low Cut Off
,Output High Cut Off, Over Load, Insulation Class "B",
Built-in spike and surge protector, Mode of System Fully
automatic / manual, Mode of System Fully automatic /
manual, System Construction As Per IS : 9815-1994
Location: Pilot Plant
Level transmitter :Specification: Non- Contacting Sensor,
Ultrasonic/ Radar as per the location, UV protected LCD
display with local operator interface & backlight for night
vision, remote enclosure with indicating, transmitting and
controlling electronics, measurement accuracy shall be +/-
3
0.25%.Supply Voltage : Universal/24V DC, Output - 4-20
mA/Modbus/HART. Separate enclosure: IP 67 or IP 65 with
weather proof thermo plastic canopy with sun light
protection Make: E&H,/Krohne
Marshall/Emerson/Equivalent
Location: Collection well, Grit chamber, Bar screen chamber
for coarse & fine screen, Presettler tank, Anoxic Tank,
Storage & Homogenous Tank, BIOT Tank, Distribution
Tank, Day tank for Caustic, Pre Aeration tank I&II,
Aeration Tank I&II, Quartz filter feed tank, UF Feed Tank,
3.1 Lot 1
NF Feed tank, RO Feed tank, RO Permeate tank, RO Reject
tank, HPRO Chloride & Sulphate - Feed tank, Permeate
tank, MEE Chloride & Sulphate - Feed, Condensate, AFTD -
Feed
Radar:
Location : HCL Tank
Level Switch:
Specification: Side wall mounted Magnetic level switch with
IP 65 and weather proof Cable terminal with 2 NO+2 NC
3.2 Lot 1
aux. contacts
Make: Forbes Marshal/E&H/Emerson/Equivalent
Location: Dosing tanks & CIP Tank
DO analyzer :
Sensor: LDO (Light luminous LED Type), Measuring Range
: 0 to 10 ppm , self-cleaning system with air flushing line or
water jet shall be provided to clean the sensor to avoid
coating, sensor cable length 10 m, suitable for
4 corrosive/scale forming effluent. Lot 1
with backlighting, Warranty - 3 years, Housing: Die cast
Aluminium, Separate enclosure: IP 67 or IP 65 with weather
proof thermo plastic enclosure, Supply Voltage: Universal/
24V DC, Make-HACH/ WTW / E+H/ Emerson/ Forbes
Page 437 of 449

Sl.
No.
Marshall/Yokogawa/Equivalent
Location : BIOT
pH analyzer :
Transmitter: Micro controller based 2 wire transmitter, Large
UV protected LCD display with local operator interface,
menu driven program, non - volatile memory , push button
for calibration, process temperature compensation, non
explosive proof type, Dual / Triple channel input will be
considered in case of nearby other analyzers, 2 No. Relay
contact for future interlock, flow through assembly with 1/2"
5 NPT process connection, Cable Length 10 m, Junction box Lot 1
to be provided to avoid cable damage, Voltage : Universal,
24V DC, Output - 4-20 mA/Modbus/HART, Mounting-
Separate field mounting, IP 67/IP 66(Nema 4X)/IP 65
weather proof thermo plastic enclosure.
Location : Anoxic Tank, RC Feed, UF Feed, UF Permeate,
NF- Feed, Permeate & CIP, RO - Feed, Permeate, Common
Permeate & CIP, HPRO Chloride & Sulphate- Feed,
Permeate & CIP, Condensate
Conductivity analyzer :
Transmitter: Micro controller based 2 wire transmitter, large
explosive proof type, Dual / Triple channel input will be
considered in case of nearby other analyzers, Output- 4-20
mA/Modbus, flow through assembly with 1/2" NPT process
6 Lot 1
connection, Cable Length 10 m, Voltage : Universal /24V
DC, Mounting- Separate field mounting, IP 67/IP 66(Nema
4X)/IP 65 weather proof thermo plastic enclosure.
Sensor: suitable for corrosive/scale forming effluent,
Location: Collection well, UF Skid - Feed & Permeate, NF
Skid - Feed & Permeate, RO Skid - Feed & Permeate, HPRO
Skid - Feed & Permeate, MEE System
Make - Forbes Marshall/E&H/Emerson/ABB/Equivalent
Pressure Gauge:
SS 316 internal & SS 316L outer casing, or corrosive/scale
forming effluent, 1/2 inch ss Nipple, Gate valve, Coupling
7 Lot 1
for pressure gage, external zero adjustment knob. Range - 0
to 10 kg/cm2Make: Waree/Forbes Marshall/General
Instruments/Equivalent Location: Collection well pump,
SHT pump, Lime dosing, Alum dosing, Poly dosing, SRS
Page 438 of 449

Sl.
No.
pump, Filter press feed pump, Sludge Transfer pump, Quartz
filter feed pump, Quartz filter backwash pump, Quartz Skid,
Dosing System - Caustic, HCL, SMBS, Antiscalent, UF
System - Pump, Skid, NF System - Pump, Skid, RO System -
Pump, Skid, HPRO System - Pump, Skid, MEE - Pump,
Calandria, Steam, ATFD System
ORP analyzer :
Sensor: Range -1500 mV to +1500 mV , suitable for
corrosive/scale forming effluent, Glass Type Electrode with
tip protection
Transmitter: Micro controller based 2 wire transmitter, Large
8 explosive proof type, Dual / Triple channel input will be Lot 1
considered in case of nearby other analyzers, 2 No. Relay
contact for future interlock, Output - 4-20
mA/Modbus/HART, flow through assembly with 1/2" NPT
process connection, Cable Length 10 m, Junction box to be
provided to avoid cable damage, Voltage : Universal, 24V
DC, Mounting- Separate field 67/IP 66(Nema 4X)/IP 65
weather proof enclosure.
Make - Forbes Marshall /GLI/E&H/ABB/Equivalent
Temperature Gauge:
Bimetallic Every angle Type, SS/Glycerin filled with direct
mounting, Class 1 as per EN 13190, Bayonet bezel with IP
65, snapper arrangements SS 316 internal & SS 316L outer
casing, or corrosive/scale forming effluent, 1/2 inch ss
Nipple, Gate valve, Coupling for Temperature gauge,
9 external zero adjustment knob, Stem MOC SS 316 with Lot 1
suitable diameter & Length, Over range Protection,
Connection 1/2" NPT(M) . Range - As required.
Location - Cooling Tower, MEE Chloride & Sulphate
system, ATFD
RTD with digital temperature Indicator:
MOC: SS 316 internals and SS 316L outer casing, with 4-20
mA output, LED or LCB with backlight display, Separate
enclosure: IP 67 or IP 65 with weather proof canopy,
10 Lot 1
voltage: 110 Volt AC, Make: ABB/Yokogawa/
Waree/General Instruments, Sensor: suitable for
corrosive/scale forming effluent, Make: Waree/Forbes
Marshall/ Yokogawa
Page 439 of 449

Sl.
No.
Pressure Transmitter :
Sensor: Range- 0 to 10 kg/cm2 , Diaphragm - Hastelloy C,
Transmitter: Micro controller based 2 wire transmitter, large
menu driven program, non - volatile memory, push button
for zero calibration, non explosive proof type, 1/2" NPT
11 process connection, Mounting- Separate field mounting, Lot 1
Supply Voltage: Universal, 24 V DC Sensor: Diaphragm
type, Hastelloy C-276 with filling liquid ,IP 67/IP 66(Nema
4X)/IP 65 weather proof enclosure.
Make - Yokogawa/Emerson/Honeywell/Equivalent
Location: NF Skid - Feed & Reject, RO Skid - Feed &
Reject, HPRO Skid - Feed & Reject
Absolute pressure transmitter for last vapour separator to
check vacuum in the Evaporator system, Vacuum pump and
Adiabatic crystallizer for MEE
MOC: SS 316 internals and SS 316L outer casing, with 4-20
mA output, LED or LCB with backlight display, Separate
12 enclosure: IP 67 or IP 65 with weather proof canopy, Lot 1
voltage: 110 Volt AC, Make: ABB/Yokogawa/
Waree/General Instruments, Sensor: suitable for
corrosive/scale forming effluent, Make: Waree/Forbes
Marshall/ Yokogawa, Make: Waree/Forbes Marshall/
Yokogawa
Differential Pressure Transmitter:
Range: 0 to 6 Kg/cm2, SS 316L internal & SS 316L outer
casing, Supply Voltage: Universal/ 24 Volt DC & 2 wire
system, LED or LCD with backlight display, Sensor:
Diaphragm-Hastelloy-C, Output - 4-20mA/Modbus/HART
13 Lot 1
Enclosure: IP 65 with weather proof thermo plastic canopy
Make: ABB/Yokogawa/ Waree/Forbes Marshall/Equivalent
Location: Quartz Individual Skid, NF Skid, RO Skid, HPRO
Chloride & Sulphate Skid
Note: For complete details refer technical specification sheet
Pressure Switch:
Pressure switch for HPP suction (0-10 kg/cm2 – 2 Nos.) and
delivery line (0-30 kg/cm2 – 2 Nos.), MOC: SS 316, Output
14 - 4-20 mA Lot 1
Make: Waree/ Danfos/Equivalent
Location: NF, RO, HPRO - High pressure pump & Other
location if necessary
Page 440 of 449

Sl.
No.
Turbidity analyzer:
system with air flushing line or water jet shall be provided to
clean the sensor to avoid coating, sensor cable length10 m .
15 canopy, 2 No. Relay contact for future interlock, Supply Lot 1
mA,/Modbus/HART, flow through assembly with 1/2" NPT
process connection, Sensor: suitable for corrosive/scale
forming effluent Make-Forbes
Marshall/Yokogawa/Emerson/E&H/Equivalent Location:
Quartz common Outlet Note: For complete details refer
technical specification sheet
Rota meter :
Specification: Range: As required, Breaking proof, Easy to
handle, Highly corrosion resistant, Low pressure loss,
Visible monitoring of the measured medium, Local
indication without power supply, Selectable scale,
16 Lot 1
According VDI 3513 : Class 4 (2.5), Polyamide metering
tube : -10°C to + 60°C, Glue socket : PVC (< 60°C),
Material of metering tubes: Polyamide or Polysulphone.
Make - Flow Max/Equivalent
Location : Quartz Individual skid
Flow Head: Flange welded along with body, Liner: PTFE,
Electrode: Hastelloy C/Tantalum/Platinum as per design,
Flange, Protection: IP 68, Flow tube: SS 316, Coil Housing –
SS316L, Flange MOC - SS316L, Meter Housing – SS316L,
The flow head should be sealed permanently using potting
Flange: ANSI 150 class. Signal Converter Transmitter:
Cable length: 10 m, Mounting: Separate-Field mounting,
Type: Microprocessor based, Output: 4-20 mA &
17 Modbus/HART, Empty pipe detection, Display: LED or Lot 1
LCD with backlighting, Parameters: Actual flow rate in
plastic canopy, Accuracy: ± 0.5%, Supply voltage: Universal
Note: For Complete details refer Technical specification
sheet
Location: Collection well pump, SHT pump, SRS pump,
Filter press feed pump, Sludge Transfer pump, Quartz filter
feed pump, UF System - Feed, Permeate, Cross flow &
Reject, NF System - Feed, Permeate & Reject, RO System -
Page 441 of 449

Sl.
No.
Feed, Permeate, Common permeate & Reject, HPRO System
Chloride & Sulphate - Feed, Permeate & Reject, MEE -
Feed, Condensate, Concentrate & Steam, ATFD System
Variable Frequency drive: Supply, erection and
commissioning of suitable rating of 415 V, 3 Phase,
Variable Frequency Drive (V.F.D) with weather proof panel
with powder coated finish consisting of remote key pad, 4-
20 mA & Modbus output, serial communication RS-485 and
Input Chock, output chock in case of motor distance more
than 150 meters from VFD, VFD should accept 4 - 20 mA
from PLC for auto operation, Panel consists of suitable
rating, 3 Pole, 415 Volt, MCCB, 5A, 230 Volt local /
Remote selection and manual /auto through PLC mode
operation selection, 6" Cooling fan with dust filters for air
inlet & outlet, Panel indication LED lamps for R,Y,B power
18 Lot 1
buttons, Speed increase & decrease button for controlling
VFD frequency, Glass envelop for monitoring VFD display
panel, Control transformer 440/230 Volt, 100 VA., 6 A
MCB for controlling primary & secondary of control
terminations & 10 sq.mm cable terminal connector - 20 Nos.
VFD panel should be made with min. 2.5 mm thick sheet
steel with powder coat finish & IP 55 protection to be given
with stand alone type. Location: All high pressure pump &
other location wherever flow control is required Make:
Schneider/ABB/Hitachi/Equivalent
Soft Starter with Bypass contactor :
Supply, erection and commissioning of suitable rating with
supply voltage 415 V, 3 Phase, Soft starter with weather
proof panel with powder coated finish consisting of remote
key pad, 4- 20 mA output, serial communication RS-485,
Panel consists of suitable rating, 3 Pole, 415 Volt, MCCB,
5A, 230 Volt local / Remote selection and manual /auto
through PLC mode operation selection, 6" Cooling fan with
19 dust filters for air inlet & outlet, Panel indication LED lamps Lot 1
for R,Y,B power supply / ON / OFF / TRIP / MAINS ON,
ON/OFF push buttons, Glass envelop for monitoring soft
starter display panel, Control transformer 440/230 Volt, 100
VA., 6 A MCB for controlling primary & secondary of
control transformer, Plug-in relay, 5 pin type, 50 sq.mm bus
bar type cable terminal connector - 8 Nos. for power cable
terminations & 10 sq.mm cable terminal connector - 20 Nos.
Panel should be made with min. 2.5 mm thick sheet steel
Page 442 of 449

Sl.
No.
with powder coat finish & IP 55 protection to be given with
stand alone type.
Location: Flow maker & Flow mixer
Make: Schneider/ABB/Equivalent
Desktop Computer for Centralized SCADA:

Computer system with Control desk, Operating system/other
statuary software including antivirus software for one year
period - 1 No. Centralized SCADA Monitor: Make: Sony,
LG, Display size (diagonal)-60"; Display type: LED Smart
TV ; Aspect ratio; Widescreen (16:9); Resolution: 1920 x
1080; Built in WIFI, Response time: 7 ms; Connectivity: 1
VGA,2 USB, 3 HDMI with 3 years limited warranty
gigahertz; Hard drive: 3TB ; Main circuit board: Intel; RAM:
4GB RAM DDR3, 2GB Graphic cards; HP make USB
keyboard and optical mouse, DVD / CD ROM; Software:
MS office 2010 with 3 years limited Warranty Make : HP,
Lenovo, Dell
20 No. 1.0
Pretreatment Monitor: Display size (diagonal)-20";
Display type: LED ; Aspect ratio; Widescreen (16:9);
Resolution: 1920 x 1080; Pixel pitch: 0.277 mm; Display
colour: 72% of NTSC; Brightness: 250 cd/m²; Response
time: 7 ms; Connectivity: 1 VGA,1DVI with HDCP; with
power cable, power adopter, VGA Cable, DVI-D cable,
Documentation CD, Setup Poster, Telephone Card, Cable
management clip with 3 years limited warranty.
RAM: 2GB RAM DDR3, 2 Ethernet Ports, 3 Sub Ports,1GB
Graphic cards; HP make USB keyboard and optical mouse,
DVD / CD ROM; Software: MS office 2010 with 3 years
limited Warranty Make : HP/Lenovo/Dell/Equivalent
Print speed: Up to 22 pages per minute; Resolution: 1200 dpi;
Processor / Memory: Powerful 133MHz processor and HP
21 No. 1.0
Jet direct Fast Ethernet embedded print server; Two sided
printing; suitable for operating system windows 8 with 3
Years limited warranty.
Supply of control valve with Flow indicator and totalizer
with PID control for MEE System - Feed, Condensate & Lot 1
Steam
Lot 1
Page 443 of 449

Sl.
No.
for Power supply to On-line instruments. Cable from PLC
panel to Field junction box . Make: RPG/Finolex/Polycab.
Lot 1
Lot 1
Lot 1
necessary cable gland, for Valves & FIT DO. Cable between
Remote PLC panel and JB . Make: RPG/Finolex/Polycab.
Lot 1
Lot 1
for Valves & FIT DO. Cable from JB to Instruments . Make:
Lot 1
Transmission System (6 Pair) For to Connect Individual
SCADA to Centralized SCADA& For CCTV Camera:
1310 nm, Zero Dispersion Wavelength - 1300~1324 nm,
Lot 1
Page 444 of 449

Sl.
No.
Cable Tray:
Supply of suitable size G.I cable tray shall be provided to
inside & outside of the building of plant Panels, motors,
23 Junction Boxes, Push button station along with necessary Lot 1
tray &M.S supports. Size As required
All cable trays shall be earthed and connected with near by
main earth flats
Air Conditioner:
Supply, Installation of 1.5 Tons Spilt Air Conditioner (5 Star
rating) along with in-built inverter for power saving, Voltage
24 No. 1.0
Stabilizer, Mounting frames etc. . Make:
Daikin/Voltas/LG/Equivalent
Earth work:
Earth work and refilling for cable laying trench size
1m(w)x0.75m(d) for cable between PLC panel and field
instruments, work includes, sand cushioning, brick guarding,
earth refilling, hume pipe protection over the cable for road
crashing necessary area etc.
Supply & providing earth pits consisting of Earth electrodes
of 25 mm Dia x 500 mm (Length) perforated GI pipe earth
25 pit chambers (200 mm x 200mm) shall be supplied along Lot 1
with GI bolt & Nuts and accessories for flow metering
panels
Supply & providing earth pits consisting of Earth electrodes
of 65 mm dia. X 3000 mm (Length) perforated GI pipe with
50 x 6mm GI earth flat in earth pit chambers shall be
supplied along with GI bolt & Nuts
Location: VFD Panel, Field Instruments, PLC panel, Cable
Tray
Erection, Testing & Commissioning of Instrumentation
26 Lot 1
Works
Testing of Treatment Component with Fresh Water (Duration:
1 Lot 1
From 7th Month)
Commissioning of plant with effluent and stabilization of the
2 Lot 1
plant (Duration: From 8th to 10th month)
Rectification / Completion of second set of Punch list issued
3 Lot 1
by PMA (Duration: 11th month)
Preparation and submission of Engineering Package
Document, O&M Manual, Standard Operating Procedure
4 (SOP), Equipment operation and repair manual (EORM) Lot 1
and On-Site Emergency Plan should be submitted before
commissioning activities (Duration: 11th month)
5 Lot 1
duration of 72 hours with the effluent (Duration: 11th month)
Page 445 of 449

Sl.
No.
Carry out Reliability Test Run (RTR) for a duration of 1
6 Lot 1
month with the effluent. (Duration: 12th month)
Training of operators of the O&M Crew for smooth transition
7 Lot 1
after RTR is completed. (Duration: 12th month)
Page 446 of 449

Improvements over the proposed technology (if any) for Tanneries / similar wastewater
along with documentation based on the following parameters:
Proposed Improved Alternate
Sl. No. Description Units
Technology Technology
Chemical
1. Consumption Kgs/day
Energy
2. Consumption kW-hr/MLD
3. Footprint Area sq.m
Increased
4. Treatment %
Efficiency
Other
advantages
5.
(If any)
Kindly note that the above data must be based on the data generated from proven technology
Milestone for implementation of 200 KLD capacity Zero Liquid Discharge (ZLD) Pilot Plant
– 12 Months
14. Design, Engineering & Submission of data sheets, 1st month
15. Civil works From 2 nd to 4th months
18. PMA shall from time to time issue necessary 7th month
instructions, defects list, comments etc., also including
a Punch list, if any, after completion of erection
activities. The Successful Tenderer shall rectify /
complete the points in the punch list before
commencement of testing of plant and
machineries.Rectification / Completion of first set of
From 7th to 9th month
the plant
21. Rectification / Completion of second set of Punch list
10th month
Page 447 of 449

23. Carry out Performance Guarantee & Test Run (PGTR) 10th month
for a duration of 72 hours with the effluent
24. Carry out Reliability Test Run (RTR) for a duration of 11th month
one month with the effluent.
25. Training of operators of the O&M Agency before 12th month
commissioning activities and handing over after
successful completion of PGTR and RTR
successful completion of RTR and initiation of
commercial operation of the plant.
2. Process performance guarantee:
RO Permeate Parameters
S.No Parameters Values
1. pH 7.0-7.5
2. Total Dissolved Solids, mg/l 200-230
3. Colour (Pt.Co.) BDL

4. Total Suspended Solids, mg/l BDL
5. Turbidity, NTU BDL
6. Chloride (as Cl-), mg/l 75-95
7. Sulphate ( as SO42-), mg/l 15-18
8. Chemical Oxygen Demand (as O2), mg/l BDL
9. Biological Oxygen Demand (as O2), mg/l BDL
10. Silica (SiO2), mg/l 0.2-0.5

11. Total Hardness (as CaCO3),mg/l 5-10
12. Sulphide (as S), mg/l BDL
Page 448 of 449

S.No Parameters Values
13. Total Kjeldahl Nitrogen (TKN), mg/l BDL
14. Total chromium (as Cr), mg/l BDL
Sl. No. Description Process Guarantee

1. Water Recovery More than 95% v/v
2. Salt Recovery (Both Sodium Chloride and More than 80% w/w
Sodium Sulphate)
3. Purity of Sodium Chloride and Sodium More than 95% white
Sulphate salt coloured salt
Page 449 of 449

Annexure 2 - Schedule 17
General Specifications for Construction Phase
JAJMAU TANNERY EFFLUENT TREATMENT ASSOCIATION (JTETA) COMMON

EFFLUENT TREATMENT PLANT (CETP) PROJECT AGREEMENT
Page 1 of 245
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 1: GENERAL CIVIL SPECIFICATION .............................................................. 3

SECTION 2: GENERAL MECHANICAL SPECIFICATION ............................................ 53
SECTION 3. GENERAL ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ...........................................104
SECTION 4. GENERAL INTRUMENTATION SPECIFICATIONS ................................192
Page 2 of 245
SECTION 1: GENERAL CIVIL SPECIFICATION
Page 3 of 245
1. General
1.1. Scope of work
The Contractor shall execute all the civil and structural works as per the Specifications
outlined under “General Specifications for Civil and Structural Works” for the
materials and construction requirements as per relevant Indian Standards.
1.2. Materials
1.2.1. The building materials shall conform to Indian Standards Standard quality
of materials of reputed concerns approved by the Engineers-in-charge shall
be arranged by the contractor.
1.2.2. The materials shall be supplied by the Contractor after approval by Engineer-
in-charge the required samples shall be supplied well in advance and tested
by the contractor at the site or at any approved laboratory to entire
satisfaction of the Engineer-in-charge.
1.2.3. All the certificates / manufacturer’s certificates for the materials supplied
shall be furnished to the Engineer-in charge whenever asked for.
1.3. Field laboratory / testing apparatus
1.3.1. Supplying, providing, operating and maintaining all required measuring and
testing apparatus shall be arranged at site by the contractor.
1.3.2. The Contractor shall arrange a field laboratory to house all measuring and
testing apparatus and maintain till completion of all civil / structural works.
1.4. Rejection
No separate payment shall be made for testing the quality of materials or work,
removal of rejected materials from site, replacement with best quality materials in lieu
of rejected materials, compensation for rejected materials, etc., and hence the
Contractor shall bear all the expenses/ cost.
Page 4 of 245
1.5. Drawings / Specifications
1.5.1. All Specifications and constructional drawings shall be read in conjunction

with each other and other documents forming the Contract viz., form of
Tender, Invitation to tender, Articles of Agreement , general & Special
conditions of contract etc.,
1.5.2. No deviations from the drawings / specifications shall be done without the
knowledge of Engineer-in-charge where construction needs for requirements
different from or additional to those given in drawings and specifications,
the works shall be carried out as directed by the Engineer-in-charge in
writing.
1.5.3. The Engineer-in-charge’s decision based on sound construction practices

shall be final and binding in case of conflict among specifications, drawings,
IS codes, specific additional requirement etc. and the Engineer-in-charge’s
decision shall be given in writing on such matters after due approval by the
consultants.
1.6. Local conditions
The Contractor shall visit the site and acquaint with the site conditions not limited to
the following:
1.6.1. Approach to site
1.6.2. Site location
1.6.3. Topography
1.6.4. Soil conditions
1.6.5. Physical characteristics of soil.
1.6.6. Ground Water Table
1.6.7. Extent of water logging at site due to rain and others.
1.6.8. Collection of rainfall data and other data required to carry out the
construction of underground structures without any hindrance.
1.6.9. Availability of water for construction, hydro testing etc.,
1.6.10. Availability of power for construction, testing etc.,
Page 5 of 245
1.7. Safety
1.7.1. The Contractor shall take adequate precautions or measures to ensure

complete safety and prevention of accidents at site as per Bureau of Indian
standards for safety.
1.7.2. Materials shall be transported, handled and stored in such a manner to

prevent deterioration, damage or contamination. Damaged / contaminated
materials shall not be used in the works and shall be removed from the site
immediately on identification.
1.7.3. All statutory requirements for safety of labour, materials etc., shall be
arranged by the contractor and cost for the same is deemed to have been
included in the lump sum price. The required documents should be provided
to the Engineer-in-charge before commencement of work at site.
1.8. Surveyor’s bench marks
1.8.1. The Contractor shall protect Surveyor’s Bench marks, reference lines, etc.
1.9. Temporary Roads
1.9.1. The Contractor shall construct and maintain at his own cost all temporary
roads within the boundary lines of the plant and outside the plant for leading
the materials to various sites of construction or otherwise deemed necessary
to carry on the work
1.9.2. Non-availability of access roads for the use of the contractor shall in no case
condone any delay in the execution of works or the cause for any claim for
compensation from the owner.
2. Site clearance
2.1. Scope of Site clearance:
2.1.1. This specification deals with clearance of site.
2.2. Setting out
2.2.1. The Contractor shall set out the whole area of the plant site by marking and
establishing co-ordinates and levels for every 50 meters in either direction
and at corners along the boundary line Necessary and accurate instruments
such as a Total station equipment and other survey equipment relevant to the
work shall be deployed for this purpose. The Contractor shall be responsible
for the accuracy and proper setting out with respect to co-ordinates of
Page 6 of 245
original points and levels for reference. If at any time during progress of
work, any error appears or arises in the above, the contractor shall rectify the
same at his own cost to the satisfaction of Engineers-in-charge. The checking
of any point or level by the Engineer-in-charge shall not in any way relieve
the Contractor from his responsibilities.
2.3. Forestry regulation
2.3.1. The Contractor shall familiarize himself with all local rules and regulations
governing land clearance including the special requirement for forestry areas
and shall carry out the work in strict compliance with all such requirement.
3. GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION
3.1. General
3.1.1. The objective of soil investigations is to determine the suitability or

otherwise of soil, soil parameters, characteristics of soil, etc., for design of
foundation for all structures such as water tanks, buildings, roads, pipe
supports, manholes, etc.
3.1.2. The soil investigations shall be carried out up to the desired depth in the
proposed Treatment plant area, reverse Osmosis plant area and full length of
effluent collection main and pure water distribution main.
3.1.3. It is Contractors responsibility to undertake Geotechnical investigations as

per the relevant Indian Standards and description given herein and decide the
type of foundation to be provided
3.1.4. The Contractor shall provide six (6) sets of reports with the deals not limited
to that given below to the Engineer-in-Charge along with the design
philosophy for each and every structure for pre-approval. All design and
construction drawings shall be prepared based on the investigations carried
out.
3.2. Investigations
Investigations shall be comprehensive to enable the designer to assess or determine

the following.
3.2.1. Engineering properties of soil.
3.2.2. Ground water level.
3.2.3. Characteristics of subsoil water.
Page 7 of 245
3.2.4. Location and extent of soft layers, hard founding strata, etc.
3.2.5. Type of rock and conditions of the same, faults, fissures, porosity etc.,
3.2.6. Depth and extent of scour
3.2.7. Bearing capacity of soil - rock at various depths.
3.2.8. Suitable foundation depending on the total load from the structures.
3.2.9. Suitable bedding materials for pipes, base slab of tanks, foundation of
buildings etc.
3.2.10. Settlement and differential settlement of foundations.
3.2.11. The procedures for open excavation, sheet piling, dewatering etc.
3.2.12. Electrical resistively of soil
3.2.13. Load carrying capacity of driven cat-in-situ piles / or any other.
Note:
Driven cast in situ piles shall be provided in case the soil exploration finds
requirement of deep foundation. Under reamed piles shall not be provided. Stone or
sand columns shall not be provided. All foundation work shall be carried out in
accordance with relevant Indian codes and Standards, supervision, testing, etc. shall
be carried out accordingly.
4. Materials used for Civil works
4.1. General
4.1.1. Contractor shall procure standard quality of materials, Goods, articles of

every kind whether raw, process, and manufactures, equipment, plant of
every kind from renowned reputed sources / manufactures approved by the
Engineers-in-charge.
4.1.2. The contractor shall arrange for inspection of the sources of the materials,
manufacture’s premises, etc. to assess the quality by the Engineer-in-charge
at any stage of any work.
4.1.3. The Contractor shall arrange all facilities / equipment / apparatus etc., to the
materials as specified by the relevant IS Codes at site. Confirmation tests, if
any, at an approved laboratory also shall be arranged by the contractor at his
Page 8 of 245
cost whenever required as directed by the Engineers-in-charge.
4.1.4. The contractor shall carry out the tests in the presence of the Engineers-in-
charge or his representative.
4.1.5. The acceptance criteria for the quality of the materials which are not
described under this document shall be governed by the relevant IS Codes In
case of non-availability of IS code for a particular material, the Engineers-
in-charge’s decision shall be final and binding on the contractor.
4.1.6. Required number of samples shall be provided to the Engineers-in-charge by

the contractor at any stage of work for his testing the quality of material and
workmanship.
4.1.7. A list of approved vendors for some of the materials is provided along with
this document. However, the Contractor shall inform the Engineers-in-
charge, the names of the suppliers from whom he proposes to obtain the
materials which are not indicated in the above list and obtain approval from
the Engineers-in-charge within 30 days from the date of receiving order. The
Contractor shall be responsible in case of any delay in this regard. The
Contractor shall provide necessary samples, conduct test, test certificates,
etc., to the Engineers-in-charge before obtaining approval.
4.1.8. Approval / clearance / permission for any material by the Engineers-in-

charge shall not absolve the responsibility of the Contractor or shall not
prejudice any of the Engineers-in-charge’s power under the Contract. The
contractor shall provide necessary test reports as per the specification /
relevant IS code, for the materials approved by the Engineers-in-charge
without test certificates also during the course of the work.
4.1.9. The Contractor shall provide all information of their vendors, sub-
contractors, etc., with regard to recommendation on the application, storage,
handling, quality control, maintenance etc. for the materials to the Engineers-
in-charge well in advance.
4.2. Cement
4.2.1. Generally Grade 33/43/53 Ordinary Portland cement conforming to IS:269,

Sulphate resistant Portland cement conforming to IS : 12230 shall be used
for plain and reinforced concrete works, brick work, plastering etc.,
4.2.2. Specific requirement for a particular type of cement shall be used for the
works as specified in the Contract and or as shown in the drawings or as
directed by the Engineers-in-charge at no extra cost to the owner by the
Page 9 of 245
Contractor.
4.2.3. Cement shall confirm the Bureau of Indian Standards.
4.2.4. The Contractor shall make his own arrangements to store adequate quantity
of cement at the site as per the requirement of Indian Standards.
4.2.5. The Cement stored shall be under the Custody of the contractor.
4.3. Aggregate
4.3.1. Coarse and fine aggregate shall conform to IS :codes. Specification for
coarse and Fine Aggregate form natural sources for concrete.
4.3.2. “Aggregate” in general defines both fine and coarse inert material.
4.3.3. “Fine Aggregate” is aggregate most of which pass through 4.75 mm IS sieve.
4.3.4. “Coarse Aggregate” is aggregate most of which retained on 4.75mm IS

Sieve.
4.3.5. Fine aggregate shall be material resulting form natural sand disintegration of
rock and which has been deposited by streams of glacial agencies, crushed
stone sand or crushed gravel sand, conforming to IS : 383
4.3.6. The Natural sand which be used in the work shall be clean, sharp, hard,
strong and shall be free from silt, clay, dust, vegetable substances, adherent
coating, alkali, organic matter, mica, salt, etc. which can be injurious to the
qualities / strength / durability of concrete.
4.3.7. Coarse aggregate shall be of uncrushed gravel or stone which results from
natural disintegration of rock or crushed gravel or stone when it results form
crushing or gravel or hard stone or partially crushed gravel or stone when it
is a product of the blending of the above. The natural sand which shall be
used in the work shall be clean, sharp, hard, strong and durable and shall be
free from silt, dust, vegetable substances, adherent caking, clay, alkali,
organic matter, etc.,
4.3.8. Coarse and fine aggregate shall be batched separately.
4.3.9. The Contractor shall de the required separate sieve analysis and prepare
grading curves for any / all batches of fine and coarse aggregates in the
presence of Engineers-in-charge’s representative whenever asked for to
ensure conformity with those submitted along with the mix design.
4.3.10. The Contractor shall screen by sieving and wash the aggregates before use
Page 10 of 245
in the works to obtain clean and graded aggregate. All objectionable foreign
matters shall be separated form aggregate.
4.4. Sand for masonry mortars
4.4.1. The Specification of fine aggregates under “aggregates” shall be applicable

to the sand used for mortars also and the sand shall conform to IS codes.
4.4.2. The sand which contains harmful impurities affecting the hardening, strength
or durability of the mortar shall not be used.
4.5. Sand for filling
4.5.1. Sand shall be clean, medium grained free from impurities.
4.5.2. The Contractor shall obtain approval from the Engineer-in-charge for the
sand proposed to be used for filling before commencing the work.
4.6.Steel
4.6.1. All reinforcement steel, other bars, sections, plates, angles, flats, channels,
joists, beams, sheets etc., shall be free from loose mill scales, Rust, Oil, Mud,
Paint, etc.,
4.6.2. The specification such as dimension, weight, shape, tolerance etc., shall
conform to relevant Indian Standards.
4.6.3. High strength deformed steel bars of grade Fe 415 conforming to IS codes
shall be used for civil and structural works.
4.6.4. Specific requirement for any other type of structural steel shall be shown in
the drawings or as specified in the contractor or as directed by the Engineer-
in-charge
4.6.5. The Contractor shall provide a fenced steel yard and the yard shall be
accessible for inspection of Engineer-in-Charge.
4.7.Water
4.7.1. Water used for construction of all civil and structural works shall be clean
and free from injurious deleterious materials like acid, alkali, organic
matters, oil, sugar, salt etc., Potable water shall be considered satisfactory.
4.7.2. The Contractor shall inform the change, if any, in source of water.
Page 11 of 245
4.7.3. The Contractor shall arrange the samples without any treatment.
4.7.4. The Contractor shall at his cost construct water tight RCC/brick or stone
masonry reservoir/sumps/tanks or steel tank, etc., either underground or
elevated to store the water.
4.7.5. Care shall be taken to protect water from contamination due to field drain,
mixing of subsoil or rain water containing more turbidity, etc.,
4.7.6. The capacity of the storage tanks shall be the sufficient to meet the quantity
required at any stage of construction.
4.7.7. The quality of water used for curing and hydro testing of tankages, sumps,
reservoirs, etc., shall be of the same quality as used for concreting, masonry
and plastering works.
4.7.8. The contractor shall prove that the average 28 days compressive strength of
at least four concrete cubes prepared with the quality of water as used is
90% or more of that prepared with potable water.
4.8.Bricks:
4.8.1. Bricks shall be hand or machine moulded smooth rectangular faces with sharp
corners and shall be of whole, well burnt sound, tough and uniform in colour.
4.8.2. The bricks shall be free from cracks, chips, flaws, stones or humps of any kind.
4.8.3. The Contractor shall supply samples and carry out the test either at his field
laboratory or at an approved laboratory at his cost. The contractor shall use
the bricks for any type of work after approval by the Engineer-in-charge.
4.8.4. Broken or damaged bricks shall not be used for any type of work
4.8.5. Minimum 10,000 bricks shall be always available at site till the major works
are completed.
4.9.Water bars/stops - Joints in structures
4.9.1. Water bars are continuous strips of impermeable material which are embedded
in the concrete during construction of liquid retaining structures or any other
structure so as to span a joint and provide a permanent water tight seal during
the whole range of joint movement to safeguard the structure from any undue
leakage.
4.9.2. The water stops shall be polyvinylchloride (PVC) and the performance shall
meet the requirement of IS : 12200. However, the tensile strength shall be not
Page 12 of 245
less than 14mn/sq,m and elongation and break shall be not less than 300%
4.9.3. Water bars shall be used at all expansion / contraction / construction joints as
required by the designer.
4.9.4. The water stops shall be of ribbed / plain / serrated type with a bulb at the
center/ Generally the ribbed with hollow center bulb shall be prepared.
4.9.5. The thickness of water stop shall be as per the hydrostatic pressure and other
requirement at the particular joint and as specified by the designer in the
drawings.
4.9.6. The water stops shall be able to withstand a minimum water head of 12 meters
and in no case thickness and width shall be less than 6mm and 225mm
respectively.
4.9.7. The water stops shall withstand any deflection / displacements during
construction and hence properly and securely placed in position.
4.9.8. The jointing of water bars shall be as per the recommendation of manufacturer
and the Contractor shall get prior approval from the Engineer-in-Charge.
4.9.9. The Contractor shall not provide lapped joints or gaps in joints under any
circumstances.
4.9.10. The water stops shall be stored properly as per the requirement of IS and
recommendation of manufacturer and the same shall not be kept exposed to
direct sunlight.
4.10. Joint for expansion joints
4.10.1. Liquid retaining structures
4.10.1.1. Joint fillers capable of permitting the joint movement without

developing stresses are usually compressive sheet or strip, durable
materials uses as spacers to provide gap in expansion joint, supports
for an effective sealing compound.
4.10.1.2. The gap/space in the joints being bridged by a water bar.
4.10.1.3. The joint filler shall be of thermos coal boards of 25mm thickness.
4.11. Joint Sealing Compounds
4.11.1. Joint Sealing Compounds are impermeable ductile materials which are
required to provide a water seal by strong adhesion to the concrete
Page 13 of 245
throughout the range of joint movement. This shall be elastic, weather
resistant, non- sagging, water tight and chemically resistant to water,
sewage, oils and shall have quick curing characteristic with low shrinkage.
4.11.2. Cold pouring or gun/trowel grades of polysulphide sealants shall be used as

recommended by approved manufactures.
4.12. Admixtures
4.12.1. Engineer-in-Charge may at discretion shall ask for the Contractor to use the
admixtures in concrete or other works at no extra cost to the Owner.
4.12.2. Specification for integral cement water proofing compounds shall conform to
IS : 2645 and other admixtures for concrete shall conform to IS : 9103 and the
admixtures shall be used as per the recommendation of manufacturer.
4.12.3. The admixtures having BIS certification marks procured from reputed
manufacturer only shall be allowed.
4.12.4. When admixtures are permitted or required by the Engineer-in-Charge the

designed concrete mix shall be corrected accordingly by the Contractor.
4.12.5. Prior approval from Engineer-in-Charge shall be obtained while using water
reducing admixtures in any concrete or mortar.
4.12.6. Once the proportion of admixture is established, strict check shall be

maintained not to alter the proportions of ingredients and water cement ratio
of the design mix.
4.13. Water proofing compounds
4.13.1. Water proofing compounds shall conform to IS :269 and test shall be carried
out in accordance with IS :4031 and the same shall be used as recommended
by the manufactures.
4.13.2. The proportion of the compound shall be limited to within 3% by weight of

cement.
4.13.3. The permeability of the specimen with the admixture shall be less than 25%
of the permeability that of similar specimen prepared without the use of
these compounds.
4.14. Earthwork in excavation
Page 14 of 245
4.14.1. The excavation in any soil viz,., soft, loose, hard, dense, mud, murrum,
slush, etc., any rock viz., soft, disintegrated, weathered which are not
required blasting, any rock which require blasting viz., hard rock, boulder,
etc., any rock which require controlled blasting viz., hard rock for which
general blasting is prohibited, any rock which require chiseling, wedging,
etc., viz., hard rock requiring blasting but where blasting is prohibited shall
be carried out to the correct level as specified in the drawing. No
tolerance plus or minus shall be permitted.
4.14.2. The bed of the excavation shall be made level and firm by watering,
compaction, etc.,
4.14.3. The excavated material shall not be placed within 3.0m from the edge of
excavation.
4.14.4. The Contractor shall carry out the excavation in any material met at site and
remove all excavated material to spoil heaps on site or transport for use in
filling on the site or stack for use as directed by the Engineer - in - Charge.
4.14.5. If any depression is formed due to removal of boulders, rubbish, pipelines,

etc., the same shall be made good by filling with M 10 plain cement concrete
up to the bottom layer of the footing / raft y the Contractor. The same
procedure shall be followed, if the Contractor excavates to levels lower than
the required level. However, the mix of concrete shall be decided by the
Engineer-in-charge.
4.14.6. Excavation in hard may be done by blasting or chiseling up to the formation

level which shall not exceed about 300mm form the final bottom level of
footing/raft. Further excavation shall be done either by blasting or chiseling.
Incase of blasting at this stage, small charges shall be used to minimize
occurrence of heavy cuts. All overcuts below the level of footing / raft shall
be made good by filling with M10 grade plain cement concrete.
4.14.7. The Contractor shall provide required slopes for stable formation of sides.
The sides of the excavation shall be cut sloping or shored and strutted to
hold the Pressure of the earth as per site requirements. The Contractor
shall well and effectively support the sides and ends of all excavation to
prevent settlement or damage to adjacent structures.
4.14.8. Every precaution shall be taken against slips and falls of earth, clay, sand or
other materials during excavation. In the event of any such occurring, the
Contractor shall at his own expense take all necessary remedial measures to
make good the space affected. This procedure is applicable even if the
affected area is at the outside the dimensions of excavation work carried
Page 15 of 245
out.
4.14.9. The Engineer - in - Charge shall determine in each case whether such
affected area is to be filled up with concrete, brick masonry, approved
selected excavated earth, sand, marram, etc., depends upon the criticality of
the structure to be built. If in the opinion of the Engineer - in - Charge there
is a possibility of the damage or disturbance to the newly constructed work
by such collapse, the work shall be laid bare for inspection. Any damage
shall be made good by the Contractor.
4.14.10. While excavating to specified or required levels for formation of any

structure or to specified or required limits for the face of any structures, the
Contractor shall not excavate the last 150mm.
4.14.11. Where the Contractor elects and is permitted to perform excavation with
sloping faces and without shoring, the excavated faces shall be with stable
slopes and heights. Shoring and strutting shall be used as directed when the
excavation is to be carried out in soft and slushy soil which is likely to
collapse during the work. The shoring shall be done depending on the
nature of soil and depth of excavation. Required supports shall be
driven always in advance of excavation and kept throughout the period till
and the works are completed.
4.14.12. If the bottom of any excavation that has been left exposed and is badly
affected by atmosphere, water, etc., the Contractor shall remove
deteriorated material from such portions and shall made good with M10 plain
cement concrete.
4.14.13. The Contractor shall provide required suitable drainage arrangement to protect
the foundation pits from the entering of surface water of any source.
The contractor shall keep the excavated pits / trenches dry for subsequent
works by providing all arrangements for dewatering the accumulated /
stagnated water from any source (not limited to subsoil water). The Contractor
shall lower the water table by well point pumping or any other system wherever
required. The Contractor shall take utmost care to prevent movement of subsoil
or blowing or forming cavity due to variation in head of water during pumping
when lowering the water table, dewatering, etc.,
4.14.14. The Contractor shall ensure that there is no delay in mobilizing equipment or
any other material required and keep the scheduled progress.
4.14.15. Where excavation is to be carried out below the foundation level of an

adjacent structure, the contractor shall take precautions by providing
underpinning, shoring, strutting, etc.,
Page 16 of 245
4.14.16. The contractor shall provide all arrangements to prevent side slips to avoid
slips on their own or due to surcharge of earth kept near the excavated area
or cracking of excavation top strata due to clay drying out leading to
collapse of excavated sides.
4.14.17. The Contractor shall provide lighting, fencing and other suitable measures
for protection against risk of accidents due to excavation of any type.
4.14.18. Before commencement of any construction work, all shattered and loose
materials shall be removed from the excavated pit/foundations.
4.14.19. Any Water which may accumulate in the excavation, due to any cause shall
be bailed or pumped out. Care shall be taken to prevent discharged water
from causing any damage to other structure or inconvenience to other works.
4.14.20. The Contractor shall protect the existing water mains, pipes, cables or other
underground work at his cost by proper supports or diverting the pipes,
cables, water mains etc.,
4.14.21. All fossils, coins, articles, valve of antiquity and structures and other
remains of geological or archaeological interest discovered during the
excavation or other works at the site shall be reported immediately to the
Engineer-in-charge by the Contractor since the same is absolute property of
the Govt.and the matter shall be dealt with as instructed by the Engineer-in-
Charge. The Contractor shall take precaution to prevent his labour/staff
from removing or damaging any such articles.
4.14.22. The Contractor shall remove or divert any buried / overhead pipes or cables,
etc., which is necessary to processed with work after obtaining permission
from the Engineer-in-Charge.
4.14.23. When the specified levels or limits of excavation is reached the Engineer-in-
Charge will inspect the ground exposed and if considers that any part of the
ground is by its nature unsuitable, he may direct the Contractor or excavated
further. Such further excavation shall be filled to the specified levels or
limits with concrete of specific mix, selected excavated earth or approved
imported materials like murram, etc., as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.
4.14.24. The Contractor shall keep the shoring and strutting in position till and the
relevant work in the excavated area is completed and approved. The
Contractor shall dismantle and remove the shoring and strutting only after
the permission obtained from the Engineer-in-Charge.
4.14.25. All excavated materials, shall remain the property of the Owner. The
Page 17 of 245
contractor shall not remove the excavated material which is suitable for re-
use or not suitable for re-use from the site without the permission of Engineer-
in-Charge.The disposer or excavated material within the site in and
around the structures or outside the site shall be carried out as directed by
the Engineer-in-Charge.
4.15. Earth and sand filling for site development / grading
4.15.1. Fill material
4.15.1.1. The filling material shall be free from all soft, sprig material, salt,
organic materials logs, roots, stumps, etc., white ants, rubbish, clods,
lumps, etc., and any other objectionable materials.
4.15.1.2. Approved materials whether such material is brought from Contractors

outside borrow areas or selected excavated material within the site only
shall be used.
4.15.1.3. The Engineer-in-Charge reserves the right to decide on the quality

materials which in his opinion do not meet the specification or
unsuitable for site grading intended.
4.15.1.4. Borrow areas for suitable fill material with proper access roads shall be
arranged by the Contractor and the same is subjected to inspection and
approval of the Engineer-in-Charge. The Contractor shall remove the
top soil in borrow areas and arrange trial pits for inspection. The top
soil to the extent identified (which may contain rubbish, silt, vegetation
etc.,) shall be removed and stacked separately and the same shall not be
used for any type of filling or site grading / development.
4.15.1.5. The soil either obtained from borrow areas or selected from the
excavated soil at site shall be generally granular and non-cohesive
consist of durum, sand, organic materials or any other foreign materials
and harmful objectionable materials. All colds of fill material shall be
broken or removed.
4.15.1.6. The borrow areas, access roads, etc., shall be maintained to ensure
transportation of fill material in all seasons.’
4.15.1.7. Expansive soils for any classification like black cotton soil shall not be
used as filling material and filling around foundation, plinth and other
places.
4.15.1.8. Sand for filling shall be as specified elsewhere in this document.
Page 18 of 245
4.15.1.9. Temporary work wherever required to retain sand shall be provided.
4.15.1.10. The sand shall be spread in layers not exceeding 225mm and kept
flooded with water for a minimum period of 24 hours and compacted
well.
4.15.1.11. The surface of the consolidated sand shall be dressed to the required
level.
4.15.1.12. Construction of floors, slab, pavement or any other structures on sand

fill shall be started only after necessary tests as directed by the Engineer-
in-Charge.
4.15.1.13. The filled sand shall be protected from rain, flood or any other damage.
No additional claim shall be entertained for the replacement of sand on
any
4.16. Pipe trenches
4.16.1. Trench excavation
4.16.1.1. Trench excavation means exaction of trenches into which pipes are to
be laid and term pipes mean pipes of all kinds and for whatever purpose.
4.16.1.2. The line and level of trenches shall be as shown in the approved
drawings or as directed by the Engineer-in-charge. Before commencing
trench excavation, the route of the trench shall be pegged out accurately
and the natural ground levels shall be agreed with Engineer-in-Charge.
Strong sight rails shall be then fixed and maintained at each charge of
gradient and at as many intermediate pints as may be necessary. On
these rails the centre line and the level to which the excavation is to be
carried out shall be marked. Such rails shall not be more that 30 meters
apart.
4.16.1.3. Trench excavation shall be carried out by such methods and to such
lines, dimensions and depths as shall bellow proper construction of the
works, provided always that unless the Engineer-in-charge permits
otherwise no trench excavation shall be less than 500mm in width.
The sides of trench excavation shall be vertical unless the Engineer-in-

charge premise otherwise.
Any widening or deepening of trench excavations necessary to
Page 19 of 245
accommodate curves, joints or bends or any other special/fittings as
required or when ordered by the Engineer-in-charge shall be provided.
4.16.2. Train pits of trenches.
4.16.2.1. The Engineer-in-charge may direct that trail pits shall be excavated well
ahead of the trench excavation to such depths to determine the alignment
for the trench.
4.16.2.2. Any further trail pits or trenches required to determine the position of
underground services, subsoil drains or for any other reason shall be
made and reinstated by the Contractor.
4.16.2.3. The Contractor shall arrange refilling and reinstatement of trail pits or
trenches immediately after the required information is obtained.
4.16.3. Other structures in pipeline.
4.16.3.1. The Contractor shall carry out further excavation as may be necessary
to accommodate structures such as thrust blocks and valve chambers.
Such excavation shall include for disposal of surplus material and,
where appropriate, for backfilling around the structures.
4.16.4. Land Drains :
4.16.4.1. Where land drains, mole drains or served by trench excavation they shall
be kept in effective temporary operation during construction of the
pipeline.
4.16.4.2. At the appropriate stage of refilling, the drain shall be permanently

restored as follows :
The drain on either side of excavated trench shall be cutback for atleast
300mm and a suitable length and diameter of approved pipe shall be
jointed to the existing drain and laid resting at ends on solid ground with
clay or other material preventing the subsequent run of land drainage
water into the pipe trench. During refilling, earth shall be carefully
placed and thoroughly compacted under the drain pipes to give them
adequate support.
Page 20 of 245
4.16.5. Controlled blasting
4.16.5.1. The Contractor shall assess the site conditions and submit details of
the proposed scheme to adopt controlled blasting.
4.16.5.2. When blasting is required near the existing/proposed road, structures,

building or any place or installations, only controlled blasting which
shallow shot holes may be permitted (Generally chiseling only
shall be allowed).
4.16.5.3. Controlled blasting shall be carefully designed and carried out so that
vibrations generated during the blasting do not damage the building,
other structures and installations around.
4.16.5.4. The holes shall be filled with a light charge of explosive and blast
shall be controlled by covering the hole with mild steel plate of
minimum 12mm thickness loaded with gunny bags filled with sand
or earth of 6 to 8 layer covering them with wire net mesh suitably the
whole region under blasting thickness of covering plate and the kind
of dead weight suggested by the Contractor is subject to review of
Engineer-in-charge. Steel plate, reinforcement, etc., shall be
inspected after every blasting operation and all twists, damage etc.,
and shall be removed before re-use to the satisfaction of Engineer-in-
charge. The Contractor shall use short delay detonators for blasting
purpose.
4.16.5.5. The Contractor shall ensure that the rock pieces should not fly off
and endanger the building, roads or any other structures/installation
around or persons.
4.17. Test cubes:
Compression tests of concrete cubes shall be made as per IS: 516 on 15cm.
cubes. Moulds to prepare the cubes shall be of reputed approved make
arranged by the contractor. The parts of the mould when assembled shall be
positively and rigidly held together. The moulds shall be cleaned and
oiled before placing concrete. The moulds shall conform to IS: 10086 -
Moulds for use in tests of cement and concrete.
4.18. Batching
4.18.1. The contractor shall arrange batching plant conforming to IS codes - concrete
Batching and Mixing Plant, if he so desire. All parts of the equipment shall
be maintained to keep the equipment in operating condition.
Page 21 of 245
4.18.2. Adequate number of diesel and electrically operated mixer machine’s and
weigh batchers shall be provided at site by the Contractor and continuity of
concrete work shall be ensured.
4.18.3. In case of breakdown of batching plant/batch mixers/weigh batchers, the

contractor shall rectify and resume the work without any delay and maintain
the continuity of concrete without stoppage.
4.18.4. All measuring equipment shall be maintained in a clean serviceable condition

and the accuracy shall be periodically checked.
4.18.5. The weigh batchers shall be set up on a leveled firm pavement and the needle
shall be calibrated to zero when the hopper is empty. The hopper shall be
loaded evenly.
4.19. Mixing:
4.19.1. The Contractor shall carry out mixing of concrete with approved type of
mechanical concrete mixer/batch mixing plant. Mixers shall conform to IS:
1791 and shall be equipped with automatic devices to control speed,
adjustment of water and timing of the mixing period. The mixer shall always
kept free from old hardened concrete and any other foreign materials and
ready in working condition always.
4.19.2. The worn blades shall not be used and replaced with new blades. Incase of
unsatisfactory results, leak mortar resulting in variation in consumption of
materials from that of established, three use of mixer shall be discontinued
and replaced or repaired immediately without loss of time.
4.19.3. Weigh batchers shall be kept on leveled compacted ground/pavement and the
hopper shall be loaded evenly.
4.19.4. The batches shall not exceed the capacity which can be mixed efficiently by
the mixer efficiency test/as recommended by the manufacture.
4.19.5. All the equipment shall be checked frequently to verify their accuracy.
4.19.6. The water shall not be used than established since excessive water wash away
the lime or cement from the mixture.
4.19.7. Mixing time shall be as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.
4.19.8. The cement and the aggregate shall be mixed dry until the mixture is uniform
in colour. The coarse aggregate shall then be added, mixed with water and
Page 22 of 245
the whole batch shall be mixed thoroughly.
4.19.9. The mixing shall be continued until there is a uniform distribution of materials
and the concrete is uniform in colour and consistency. Concrete shall be
remixed incase of segregation when it is unloaded from the mixer.
4.19.10. Excessive mixing shall be avoided
4.19.11. The contractor shall prepare all records, charts, etc., for batching and mixing
operation and maintain the same as directed by the Engineer-in -charge and
furnish the required copies of the same to the Engineer-in-charge as and when
required.
4.19.12. The Contractor shall not carry out any hand mixing of concrete.
4.19.13. Hand mixing whenever permitted due to unavoidable circumstances by the

Engineer-in-charge, ten percent (10%) extra cement than established shall be
added by the Contractor. The contractor shall ensure that mixing is continued
until the concrete is in uniform color and consistency during hand mixing.
4.20. Bar Bending Schedule:
Bar bending schedules shall be as per the approved drawing. The Contractor
shall fabricate the reinforcement only after satisfied himself about the
orrectness of bar bending schedules. Incase of any difficulty, the matter has
to be brought with the details of alternatives to the notice of Engineer-in-charge
for his review and clearance.
4.21. Fabrication & Erection:
4.21.1. Reinforcement shall be free from loose mill scale, oil, grease, rust, dirt,
bituminous material, etc., to ensure proper bonding between steel and
concrete.
4.21.2. No re-rolled materials, pitted and defective rods, reinforcement straightened in

a manner.
4.21.3. All reinforcement bars fixed in position shall be properly tagged for getting
approval from the Engineer-in-charge.
4.21.4. All reinforcement shall be placed, lapped and maintained in the correct position
and to lengths as shown in the drawings. Approved pre cast concrete blocks,
spacers, chains, timber templates, shall be provided to have clearance from
the form and to avoid displacement of the bars when concrete is placed
and vibrated as directed by the Engineer-in-charge.
Page 23 of 245
4.21.5. Crossing bars at all intersections of longitudinal and transverse bars shall not
be tack welded for assembly of reinforcement and the same shall be securely
tied together with approved two strands of annealed soft iron binding wire
of size not less than 16 gauge. The binding wire shall conform to IS: 280 -
Specification for mild steel wire.
4.21.6. Reinforcement steel placed in position shall not be linked or bent without
approval of the Engineer-in-charge.
4.21.7. Laps and splices of reinforcement shall be as shown in the approved drawings.
4.21.8. Number of laps for the places not shown in the drawings shall be kept as
minimum as possible and location of such laps and splices shall be as approved
by the Engineer-in-charge.
4.21.9. Welding or rods other than those shown in the approved drawings shall not be
permitted.
4.21.10. Welded joints whenever approved as a special case shall be made to prove
that the joints are of the full strength of bars connected and the welding
shall be in accordance with IS; 2751 and IS: 9417. Necessary tensile
strength tests with specimens shall be carried out to prove the weld has
the strength of parent steel.
4.21.11. Adequate care shall be taken in welding of cold working bars and bars other
than mild steel.
4.21.12. The Contractor shall obtain approval for the reinforcement placed in position
from the Engineer-in-Charge before placing the concrete.
4.21.13. Care shall be taken to avoid impact on dowel bars or extended portion of
reinforcement at every stage. The above bars shall not be used to climp since
any movement of the above bars affect the strength or concrete.
4.21.14. Laps/welds shall be staggered
4.21.15. More than one welded joint per bar shall not be permitted
4.21.16. The Contractor may be permitted to use mechanical couplers, clamps, etc., to
have splices in reinforcement as per the recommendations of manufactures and
approval of Engineer-in-charge. The Contractor shall arrange all tests to prove
such connections are having full strength.
4.21.17. Overlapping of bars shall be permitted only where bars of full length placed
in position. In other locations, overlapping shall be subject to approval of
Page 24 of 245
Engineer-in-charge.
4.22. Cover to reinforcement
4.22.1. Unless otherwise indicated in the drawings, minimum thickness of clear cover
(excluding plaster or other decorative finish or lining) shall be as follows:
Table 1: Cover to reinforcement
Sl.No Location Clearance
25mm or twice the dia of bar

a. At each end of reinforcing bar
whichever is greater
b. Columns (not in contact with earth) 40mm
Beams including lintels (not in contact 35mm or dia of bar whichever is

c.
with earth) greater
Slabs including sunshades/chaija 15mm or dia of bar whichever is

d.
(excluding slabs in contract with earth) greater
Bottom of footings, equipment

e. 75mm
foundation etc.,
Sides of footings, equipment foundation, 50mm for 16mm and above dia bars
f.
columns, plinth beams etc., 40mm for bars less than 16mm dia
g. Top of plinth beam 40mm
h. Bottom of plinth beam 50mm
Soft/base slab or any other foundation

i. 50mm
slab at bottom
j. Pile cap bottom 100mm
k. Pile cap top 50mm
l. Retaining wall, basement wall etc.,
1. Face in contact with earth 40mm
25mm or dia of bar whichever is

2. Free face
greater
m. Liquid retaining structures
Page 25 of 245
Sl.No Location Clearance

1. Face in contact with liquid
greater
Face away from liquid but in contact

2. 40mm
with earth

3. Fee face
greater
Minimum clear distance from the

face (nearer to edge f pedestals) of
pocket to the outer edge of
the pedestal shall be 80mm.

n. Cover to foundation bolts. face (nearer to edge f pedestals) of
pocket to the outer edge of
the pedestal shall be 80mm.

edge of base plate to the outer edge
of the pedestal shall be 50mm
Cover blocks shall be of pre-cast cement mortar cubes/concrete blocks having the
specified strength of concrete to be poured and/or as directed by the Engineer-in-charge.
5. Formwork
5.1.Design of form work
5.1.1. The contractor shall furnish design and drawings for formwork if desired by the
Engineer-in-charge for his review before construction. The contractor shall be
worthy responsible for design, erection, dismantling etc.,
5.1.2. The formwork shall be designed and constructed to the shapes, lines and
dimensions shown in the drawings within the tolerances specified in IS : 456
5.2.Forms
Forms shall be prefabricated standard shop built reputed make strong panels and shall
be firmly supported, stiffened, braced both horizontally and diagonally, strutted, tied
and rigid to withstand the pressure of green concrete, vibration, temperature
variations, working load, wind load etc., to produce concrete without any defamation.
Page 26 of 245
5.3.Fixing
5.3.1. The formwork shall not bulge or sag during placement of concrete and shall be
such that it can be easily dismantled without damaging the concrete of
disturburing the remainder parts.
5.3.2. Form panels and units shall be set to true dimensions and alignment and rigidly
tied to get uniform pattern on the face of concrete by providing continuous
horizontal and vertical joints in straight lines.
5.3.3. Forms shall be joined tightly by clamps to have water tight joints and to avoid
grouting. Suitable adhesive tapes shall be provided over the joints to prevent
flow of cement mortar slurry through the openings or formation of fins or other
blemishes on the surface of concrete and to avoid grouting.
5.3.4. Where use of bolts/nails is unavoidable, minimum number of straight nails shall
be used with the approval of Engineer-in-charge.
5.3.5. Ties, Clamps, bolts, etc. shall have adequate strength to withstand spacing of
panels, spreaders, props, etc.,
5.3.6. Tie rods or bolts shall not be used in the form work of liquid retaining or
basement structures.
5.3.7. Wires shall not be used in any formwork.
5.3.8. Bulging, distortion, deflection, etc., shall not be acceptable in formwork and
hence adequate care shall be taken to avoid the same.
5.3.9. No adjustment in any component of formwork is acceptable during placing and

vibrating of the concrete.
5.3.10. Sides, soffit forms, props and supports shall be in line and level and shall be
son arranged for easy removal in an approved sequence without damage to the
concrete. Provisions shall be made for removal of formwork without disturbing
props required for supporting hardened concrete.
5.3.11. Adequate camber shall be provided for beams and slabs having span more than
6.0m to offset the deflection and resume correct shape and line.
5.3.12. All rubbish, chippings, shavings, sawdust, projecting nails, dirt or any other
foreign matter shall be removed form the interior of the forms before the
concrete is placed and the surfaces which would come in contact with concrete
shall be cleaned thoroughly wetted, well treated with an approved non-staining
release agents. It should be ensured that approved agents are kept out of contact
Page 27 of 245
with reinforcement.
5.3.13. The forms shall be lined using LDPE / HDPE sheets for the soffit of slabs to
get uniform smooth form finish.
5.3.14. Formwork at the base of walls, columns, etc. shall have temporary openings for
inspection, removal of foreign matters and draining the water used for washing
the forms. The above openings shall be properly closed with the forms before
placing the concrete.
5.3.15. The chambers or fillets of all corners and angles of finished concrete shall be
formed with 45 Deg. Moulds having size of 20 x 20 mm to 50 x 50 mm as
directed by the Engineer-in-charge.
5.3.16. Providing bolts or ties or dowels as embedment for the purpose of supporting
the formwork shall not be allowed.
5.3.17. The plywood forms shall be permitted for a maximum reuse of five times.
5.3.18. The steel form shall be permitted for a maximum reuse of ten times.
5.3.19. Reuse of forms limited to the number of uses specified above shall be subjected
to the condition of forms and approval of Engineer-in-charge.
5.3.20. No burnt oil shall be used for treatment of forms.
5.3.21. Additional care shall be taken for the form work of exposed / architectural
concrete work.
5.4.Stripping of Forms
5.4.1. Forms, props and other supports of form work shall be removed with the
approval of Engineer-in-charge after consideration of character of structure,
temperature variations, materials and admixtures used in the concrete, curing,
etc.
5.4.2. Formwork shall be removed without resorting to hammering or levering to

avoid overstressing or damage to the concrete.
5.4.3. While removing the supports, care shall be taken to ensure that the concrete
take the stresses developed due to its self weight, gradually and uniformly.
5.4.4. Stripping time – Forms shall not be struck until the concrete has reached a
strength at least twice the stress to which the concrete may be subjected at the
time of removal of from work. Where possible, the formwork shall be left
longer as it would assist curing and strengthening the concrete.
Page 28 of 245
In normal circumstances and where ordinary Portland cement is used, forms may
generally be removed after the expiry of the following period.
6. Cement Mortar for Brick / Stone Masonry
6.1.1. Cement and sand shall be mixed as per the proportions approved and indicated
in the construction drawings.
6.1.2. Proportioning shall be by volume considering a bag of cement weighing 50 kg

and the required volume of dry sand in suitable boxes. The quantity of sand
shall be adjusted to allow for bulkage.
6.2. Mixing
6.2.1. Mortar shall be prepared using mechanical mixers operated manually or by

power. The Contractor shall obtain prior approval form the Engineer-in-charge
for hand mix and the same may be permitted if the quantity of work to be carried
out with the mortar is very less and the place of application of the mortar is
difficult to reach.
6.2.2. Mortar shall be prepared with specified ratio of cement and sand mixed
thoroughly.
6.2.3. The platform used for hand mixing, required quantity of water shall be added
until a stiff and workable paste is obtained.
6.2.4. Wet mortar shall not be kept for more than initial setting time of cement used.
6.2.5. The mixer shall be cleaned thoroughly with water while suspending the work
and dried to keep the mixer ready for subsequent operation. Similarly the
platform and other materials used for preparation and application of mortar
shall be thoroughly cleaned using water and dried whenever the work is
suspended.
7. BRICK MASONRY
7.1.Brick work of 230mm and more
7.1.1. Brick work of 230mm thickness and more shall be in English Bond. The Bricks
shall be laid in full mortar bed of 10mm thickness leaving about 10mm gap for
shoved joints. Mortar shall be of 1:5 (Cement : sand). The ends of the bricks
may be made up with half or cut bricks. Immediately after placing open layer
of bricks, mortar shall be filled in vertical joints form top. All the joints shall
be flushed up and laying of mortar for the bed of subsequent layer shall be
Page 29 of 245
started. The Contractor shall ensure proper packing without air trap in the
vertical joints between bricks.
7.1.2. No portion of brick work shall be raised exceeding one meter above another in
a day.
7.1.3. Brickwork shall be built true to line, level and plump and checked at the end of
day’s work.
7.2.Half (115mm) Brick work
7.2.1. Half brick walls and encasement brickwork of pipes etc., shall be in stretcher
bond.
7.2.2. Mortar shall be of 1:4(Cement : sand)
7.2.3. Every fourth course / layer if brick walls shall be reinforced with two (2)
numbers of 6.0mm diameter mild steel reinforcement bars.
7.2.4. Bedding mortar at fourth course shall be laid in two layers by embedding the
reinforcement thoroughly for full length and between the two layers.
7.2.5. Mortar using coarse aggregate less than 6mm size also shall be permitted for
reinforcing the brick walls with mild steel.
8. PLASTERING AND POINTING
8.1.1. Materials of cement mortar:
Cement and water shall conform to the specification of “cement Mortar” sand
shall conform to IS codes.
8.1.2. Ratio of cement mortar shall be as shown in the approved construction

drawings.
8.1.3. The surface of brick walls where rendering / plastering is to be carried out shall
be hacked and the joints shall be raked out to a depth of 10 to 20 mm to form
key for plastering, while the mortar of joints in green.
8.1.4. The concrete surfaces where rendering / plastering is to be carried out shall be
pocks of 30 to 5mm marked and all loose mortar at the joints shall be removed.
8.1.5. The brick masonry / concrete surfaces which are required rendering / plastering
shall be cleaned off al dust, loose materials, algae, etc., and well wetted by
washing thoroughly with water.
Page 30 of 245
8.1.6. Plastering shall not be carried out if the brick wall is in soaked condition. In
such cases the wall shall be allowed with water.
8.1.7. Application
8.1.7.1. The plastering may be applied in one or two coats as specified in the
approved drawings and /or as directed by Engineer-in-charge.
8.1.7.2. Single layer of plastering work.
8.1.7.3. The mortar shall be applied uniformly all over the surface to the
specified thickness with wooden float and trowel. All the surfaces,
corners, junctions, etc. shall be in true plane and plumb.
8.1.8. Plastering with water proofing compound
8.1.8.1. Water proof compound conforming to IS: 2645 – integral cement water
proofing compounds of reputed approved make shall be thoroughly
mixed with dry cement in the ratio as recommended by the
manufactures and approved by the Engineer-in-charge.
8.1.8.2. In case of two layers plastering work, water proof compound shall be
added in the first bottom layer or as directed by the Engineer-in-charge.
8.1.9. Pointing
8.1.9.1. Pointing shall be carried out while the mortar in the joints of masonry
is green.
8.1.9.2. Immediately after 24 hours form the time of completion of the particular
masonry work, the surface to be pointed shall be raked out and kept
wetted.
8.1.9.3. The various pointing shall be flush, weathered, grooved, raised (band)
etc., and the pointing shall be carried out as directed by the Engineer-
in-charge.
8.1.9.4. Flush pointing shall be used for all vertical and horizontal joints.
8.1.9.5. Weathered pointing shall be used for horizontal joints.
8.1.9.6. Raised (band) pointing shall be used for aesthetic appearance on walls
by projecting.
Page 31 of 245
8.1.10. Curing
The plastered surfaces shall be cured for a minimum period of 10 days

and thereafter allowed to dry slowly.
Materials
8.1.11. All materials shall conform to the relevant Indian standards and the
specification furnished in this document.
8.1.12. All steel materials (plates, built up sections / plate girders and compound
sections made out of rolled sections or any other structural material ) shall be
supplied by the Contractor conforming to IS.
8.1.13. The Contractor shall procure the material form the reputed approved mill who
has been in manufacturing line for a period of minimum last 5 years and furnish
copies of all purchases orders to the Engineers-in-charge with the details of
specified grade, quality, inspection etc.
8.1.14. At least six (6) copies of test / inspection certificates shall be furnished to the
Engineer in charge.
8.1.15. The materials shall be free from loose mill scale, slag intrusions, laminations,
cracks, pitting, seams, flaky, twists, rust, flaws or any other defect.
8.1.16. Materials shall conform to the grade, quality, thickness, weight, length,
mechanical characteristics, chemical analysis, etc., as specified and the relevant
IS codes.
8.1.17. All the materials received at site shall have identification mark section wise
and shall be accompanied by the manufacturer’s quality certificate / third party
inspection certificate with the details of grade, thickness, weight, length,
mechanical characteristics, chemical analysis, date of manufacture, batch
number etc.
8.1.18. All the section of different grade and quality shall be sorted out after inspection
and stored according to the lengths, grades and quality received at site.
8.1.19. Defective materials shall be rejected by the Engineers-in-charge and the

Contractor shall remove and replace the material as directed by the Engineers-
in-charge.
8.1.20. Welding electrodes and wires of approved reputed make who has been in
manufacturing line for a period of minimum last 5 years shall be supplied by
the contractor and the same shall be kept perfectly dry in a storage room as per
Page 32 of 245
IS : 9595 and as directed by the Engineer-in-charge.
8.1.21. All electrodes and wires, hardware, viz, bolts, nuts, washers, etc., shall be
sourced from the manufactures who have been in the manufacturing line for a
period of minimum last 5 years and the same shall be supplied with the
manufactures test and quality certificate.
8.1.22. All bolts, nuts, washers, etc., shall be sorted and stored according to the
diameter, length, thickness etc.
8.1.23. The materials which are not accompanied test/quality certificates. Chemical
analysis, mechanical charactestics etc. shall be used for fabrication after testing
at an approved laboratory and / or the contractors field laboratory as directed
by the Engineers-in-charge. The contractor shall not use any material without
approval of Engineers-in-charge.
8.1.24. All the materials shall be protected from changes in weather conditions.
8.2.Fabrication
8.2.1. All general drawings, design, fabrication drawings, erection drawings etc. all
shall be prepared by the contractor and submitted for approval.
8.2.2. The contractor shall be responsible for correctness and accuracy of all design
and drawings. Any discrepancy in the drawings brought to the notice of
contractor during fabrication or assembly or erection shall be rectified based
on fresh drawings submitted for approval.
8.2.3. At least six (6) sets of design and drawings shall be submitted for review /
approval. The drawings shall contain structural layout with the details of
elevations, sections, size, critical joints, bill of quantities etc.
8.2.4. Details of connection, splices, etc., shall be designed to develop full member
strength.
8.2.5. The contractor shall obtain approval for the changes in sections, substitutions,
etc., from the Engineers-in-charge before fabrication.
8.2.6. During fabrication and erection, the contractor shall update all fabrication and
erection drawings matching with the modifications / substitutions carried out
and submit the same with the details calculations to the Engineers-in-charge.
8.2.7. The Contractor shall arrange leveled fabrication yard / yards without any
undulation and pave the area as directed by the Engineers-in-charge.
Page 33 of 245
8.2.8. Workmanship shall be of the best quality based on good engineering practice.
Tolerance for fabrication shall be as per relevant IS Codes. The Engineers-in-
charge has the right to reject the materials fabricated faulty and deviated from
good engineering practice at any stage and the Contractor shall replace the
same at no extra cost to the owner.
8.2.9. Methods of fabrication, transportation and erection shall be such that the
finished structure is free from defects or injuries which would render it unfit
for use.
8.3.Straightening / Bending
8.3.1. All rolled materials before being used shall be straight or flat and free from
burrs, etc., materials which are not straight shall be Straightened and / or
flattened without injuring the material.
8.3.2. Cold Straightening and flattening of sections shall be by pressure and not by
hammering.
8.3.3. Mangle or leveling rolls, hydraulic bar/ section Straightening machine or any
other mechanical device shall be used for flattening and Straightening of
various plates /members.
8.3.4. Rolled sections and plates shall be bent by cold process to the required shapes
/ profiles. Heating or forging shall not be permitted.
8.3.5. All ends of beams used as stanchions shall be machined true and square. The
ends of all plates, gussets, angles, etc., shall be machined or cut true and any
burring of the edges being removed.
8.4.Cutting
8.4.1. Cutting of the members shall be kept to have minimum number of joints. Only
details of location and dimension of holes, welds, cleats etc. before
commencing cutting.
8.4.2. Required cut length, width etc., shall be marked in all members along with the
details of location and dimension of holes, welds, cleats, etc. before
commencing cutting.
8.4.3. Marking shall be carried out on suitable supports to limit eh accuracy +1mm.
8.4.4. Cutting may be shearing, cropping or washing and all adequate care shall be
take to have proper cutting.
Page 34 of 245
8.4.5. Hand flume cutting shall be done only by experts with the approval of
Engineer-in-charge.
8.4.6. Mild steel may be cut mechanically controlled torch.
8.4.7. All cuttings shall be free form distortion, burrs, clean etc. and the edges shall
be ground smooth and make straight and uniform by machining/ edge planning
as directed by the Engineer-in-charge.
8.4.8. Members shall have erection clearance not more than 2mm and seating shall
be permitted after approval from Engineer-in-charge.
8.5.Holes
8.5.1. Gas cutting shall not be permitted for making holes for bolts.
8.5.2. Holes may be punched in purlins, girts, bracings, lacing bars etc. and other
connecting angles, plates, etc. of light structures, roofing etc. to full size
through the material not over 12mm thick.
8.5.3. Members which are to be connected shall be assembled and tightly clamped or
bolted together before drilling.
8.5.4. Holes shall be punched 3mm less in diameter than the required size for the
members having thickness less than 16mm and reamed (but not drifted) after
assembly to the full diameter. Ordinary holes shall be punched 1.0 to 1.5mm
larger in diameter than the specified diameter of bolt with the approval of
Engineer-in-charge.
8.5.5. All holes for site connections shall be accurately centered so as to avoid
reaming during erection.
8.5.6. Dynamically loaded structures shall not be punched.
8.5.7. Holes for turned and fitted bolts shall be drilled to a slightly smaller diameter
and reamed to the nominal diameter of the shank or barrel in accordance with
the tolerance specified in IS : 919
8.5.8. Making holes in one operation through all the sections for the parts to be
connected with very minimum tolerance shall be permitted after the same is
clamped or bolted firmly together and the holes shall be reamed to size
subsequently. Multiple members such as flange plates shall be drilled as far as
practicable in one operation.
8.5.9. Different parts may be drilled and reamed separately with the approval
Page 35 of 245
Engineer-in-charge.
8.6.Bolting
8.6.1. Length of bolts shall be such that sufficient length of threaded portion is
projected after bolting the parts together. At least three threads shall project
through the nut. Threaded portion within the thickness of the parts bolted shall
not be permitted.
8.6.2. All nuts of bolts shall be threaded with suitable thickness of circular flat
washers.
8.6.3. Square tapered/beveled washers to afford a seating square with the axis of the
bolt shall be used where bolt heats or nuts fastened on the beveled surface/
tapered flanges of joint, angle etc.
8.6.4. Long handled manual torque wrenches, pneumatic powered wrenches, electric
wrenches may be used for tightening bolts.
8.6.5. Heads of bolts shall be forges out of the solids, truly concentric and square with
the shank which shall be perfectly straight.
8.6.6. Bolts shall be long enough for washers to project (say 6mm) beyond the nut
when tightened and the screwed portion shall be long enough for subsequent
tightening.
8.6.7. Nuts shall be secured after tightening by barring to avoid the risk of their
becoming loose to accidental removal.
8.6.8. Turned bolts shall be driven fit in the holes such that the screwed portion is
4mm less than the shank and the bearing faces of the heads and nuts shall be of
machined square.
8.6.9. Shank of turned bolts shall be sufficiently long to ensure contact through the
entire thickness of the plates. Accordingly washers, truly flat shall be provided
under the nuts.
8.7.Welding
8.7.1. General
8.7.1.1. Welding shall conform to the relevant codes of Indian standards referred
in this specification.
8.7.1.2. Sufficient number of welding sets of the required capacity, equipment

for cutting, grinding, testing etc., with all consumables, equipment
Page 36 of 245
accessories / auxiliaries etc., shall be arranged by the Contractor without
interruption of the work.
8.7.1.3. The contractor shall arrange qualified welders and personnel for
supervision to meet the quality standards. Welders/operators who have
been qualified in the tests to perform the type of work and experienced
only shall carry out the work.
8.7.1.4. The structural members which are being welded shall be protected from
dust, strong winds/storm, rain etc.
8.7.1.5. Welding plant and accessories shall be of approved make.
8.7.1.6. All welding plants shall be maintained on good working conditions

always.
8.8.Inspection
8.8.1. Inspection shall be carried out in accordance with IS: 822 and to the satisfaction
of Engineer-in-charge.
8.8.2. Engineer-in-charge shall witness and approve the qualification for welding
procedure and welder’s performance.
8.8.3. The Contractors shall give inspection call in the prescribed format along with
the internal inspection report of the Contractor well in advance to the Engineer-
in-charge. The internal inspection of the Contractor shall certify that the
shop/field welding executed is in conformity with the relevant specifications
and I.S. Codes. The materials which are inspected at shop or field shall be
properly packed, transported and erected in position. The assemblies which are
damaged during handling, transportation, erection, testing etc., shall be rejected
and the Contractor shall replace the same at no extra cost to the owner.
8.8.4. No material shall be painted before inspection and clearance by Engineer-in-

charge.
8.8.5. The contractor shall provide all facilities for inspection Engineer-in-charge or
his representative and they shall have access to inspect the shop/field work at
any stage of welding, fabrication, erection etc.,
8.9.Painting
8.9.1. The following codes shall be followed for one coat of shop painting after the
members marked for erection.
Page 37 of 245
8.9.2. Ready mixed paint, air drying, red oxide Zinc chrome, and priming:
8.9.3. Protective coatings wherever required shall be provided as per relevant Indian
standards to the satisfaction of Engineer-in-charge.
8.9.4. The priming coat shall be red oxide – zinc chromate primer or any other primer
mentioned in the drawing or elsewhere in this document. In any case, priming
shall not be commenced without the permission of Engineer-in-charge.
8.9.5. Priming shall not be done on wet surfaces.
8.9.6. All paints, brush etc., shall be of approved make and the quality shall be of the
highest degree.
8.10. Erection
8.10.1. The contractor shall prepare erection scheme with the details of erection
drawing, total weight of structure to be erected, bill of materials, plants and
equipment to be deployed, accessories, requirement of manpower, sling, hoist,
guys, cranes, staging and schedule. Capacity and number of plant and
equipment, sequence of erection, erection holes/bracings etc., and get the
approval from Engineer-in-charge.
8.10.2. The contractor shall use the approved make of plant and equipment for
erection.
8.10.3. Fire proof materials shall be used for staging, hoisting etc.,
8.10.4. While erecting the structures care shall be taken to ensure no damage due to
wind, load, self weight, impact load, etc., by properly bolting, bracing,
temporary welding or any other means.
8.10.5. All structural members shall be properly aligned, positioned, leveled,

assembled and placed strictly in accordance with drawings.
8.10.6. The Engineer-in-charge shall have free access to all parts for inspection during
erection and the Contractor shall arrange platforms, safety arrangement, etc.
The members erected faulty and the members not fabricated in conformity
with the standards laid down shall be rejected. The rejected materials shall be
removed from the site immediately.
8.10.7. Final bolting or welding shall be carried out after the structures are properly
aligned and approved by the Engineer-in-charge.
8.10.8. Any rectification / replacement shall be carried out as directed by the
Page 38 of 245
Engineer-in-charge.
8.10.9. The holes provided for erection purposes shall be plugged by welding or left
as decided by the Engineer-in-charge.
8.10.10. The bracings provided for erection purposes shall be such that no excessive
stresses are developed and the bracings shall be removed after erection
without any change to the members.
8.10.11. The temporary platform, bracings, main bolts, welds, guys, etc. and all safety
arrangement shall be removed only after clearance from Engineer-in-charge.
8.10.12. The contractor shall not use any adjacent structures, structures being erected /
constructed nearby for erection purposes.
8.10.13. The contractor shall follow IS : 7205 – safety code for erection of steel work
for erection purpose at all stages.
8.11. Grouting
8.11.1. All anchor bolts shall have coarse type threads conforming to IS : 4218 and
their assemblies shall be placed and securely held in position with necessary
templates before placing and compacting the concrete. Care shall be taken to
ensure that the bolts are not disturbed while vibrating the concrete.
8.11.2. Approval shall be obtained form Engineer-in-charge for leaving the pockets
for foundation bolts and the grouting operation shall be carried out as
described and / or directed by the Engineer-in-charge.
8.11.3. Anchor bolts for light structures such as handrails, ladders, staircases, pipe
supports, cross-overs, operating platforms which are not supporting any
equipment etc. shall be grouted using cement mortar 1:2 (Cement : Sand).
8.11.4. Non shrink grout shall of approved make and shall have a compressive
strength not less 50 N / sq mm in 28 days
8.11.5. Non-shrink grout shall be tested to IS : 403 especially for strength and
expansion capability.
8.11.6. All the locations of anchor bolts, size of pockets, etc., shall be carefully
checked to ensure that all concrete foundations are carried out in conformity
with drawings. Discrepancy, if any, shall be rectified before positioning
structural members as directed by the Engineer-in-charge
8.11.7. The contractor shall ensure that all the concrete works for foundation are
Page 39 of 245
carried out in accordance with relevant I.S. Codes and the foundations are
strong and sound.
8.11.8. Surfaces where the structural members are to be positioned shall be prepared
by removing all loose materials / mortars / aggregates, laitance, dust, grease
oil etc., The surfaces shall be leveled, hacked to form rough surface, made
thoroughly wet. All the dust shall be removed by suction or compressed air.
All free / excess water on the surface, made thoroughly wet. All the dust shall
be removed by suction or compressed air. All free/ excess water on the surface
and in the pocket shall be removed.
8.11.9. After the surface is prepared, the structural members shall be positioned
aligned, plumbed by maintain base / shoe plates with required packing, plates,
wedges, shims etc., care shall be taken to ensure that final level of base/ shoe
plates matches with drawings.
8.11.10. The forms shall be fixed all around of the erected members as per the
procedure laid down elsewhere without disturbing the anchor bolts.
8.11.11. The grouting operation shall be carried out after providing the forms. Care
shall be taken to ensure that grout is in full form around the anchor bolts and
under the base/ shoe plates. The joints of the form work shall be very tight to
avoid any leakage of grouting material.
8.11.12. The grout mixed based on the recommendations of manufactures shall be

poured continuously and care shall be taken to ensure that the grouting
material poured is reached to the required depth of foundation bolt holes and
spread uniformly under the base / shore plates. The opening provided in the
framework shall be covered immediately after placement of grout mixture.
9. Miscellaneous Structural Steel works
9.1.Hand railing
9.1.1. Handrail shall be provided for platforms/ walkways / operating platform of

equipment, staircases, steel ladders, around the openings in floor/roof/cover
etc.,
9.1.2. Handrail shall be of galvanized steel pipe of 32mm nominal bore medium
class in two rows with flush welded construction. The height of vertical rails
of similar tube /pipe and the level of top rail shall be 0.1m from the finished
level of floor. The spacing of vertical posts/rail shall not exceed 1.20m. The
second horizontal rail shall be provided at a center to center spacing not more
than 500mm form the finished level of floor. The length of cantilevered
Page 40 of 245
portion of hand rail shall not exceed 300mm. A toe/curb plate of 100mm x
6mm C.S flat shall be provided at the bottom connecting all the vertical
tubes/rails. The contractor shall furnish the drawing with al details for
approval.
9.1.3. Handrail shall be with discontinuous ends uniformly divided into sections for
aesthetic appearance. In case of difficulty, continuous hand railing shall be
permitted.
9.1.4. Suitable insert plates/base plates shall be provided in the RCC platforms and
vertical tubes/rails shall be welded / bolted as directed by the Engineer-in-
charge.
9.1.5. Two coats of paint shall be done as directed by the Engineer-in-charge after
the primer coat is approved.
9.2.Staircases
9.2.1. All staircases and landing shall be fabricated/constructed as per the approved
drawings.
9.2.2. The tread shall be minimum 250mm and the riser shall be within 150mm.
9.2.3. The clear width between the stringer shall be 1000mm.
9.2.4. Landing shall have a minimum length of 1000mm.
9.2.5. The staircase shall be provided with grating/chequered plate with necessary
bracings, cleats, nosing insert plates, struts, clips, etc. as per the approved
drawings.
9.2.6. All the facilities required for fabrication, welding/bolting, erection, painting,
etc., shall be provided at site to the satisfaction of Engineer-in-charge.
9.2.7. The pattern of grating/ chequered plate shall be as per approved drawing and
/ or as directed by the Engineer-in-charge.
9.3.Chequered Plates
9.3.1. The pattern and thickness shall be as shown in the fabrication drawings
prepared by the contractor and approved by the Engineer-in-charge.
9.3.2. The chequered plates shall be provided with necessary holes / openings,
notches, stiffeners, bracings, cleats etc. and shall be welded / bolted/screwed
after preparing the cut edges smooth and even.
Page 41 of 245
9.3.3. The chequered plate shall be cold bent on a mill for nosing of staircase treads.
9.3.4. Chequered plate shall be fixed by cadmium plated mild steel screws/bolts with
counter sunk heads at a maximum spacing of 300mm. The heads of
countersunk screws shall remain flush with the top of plate.
9.3.5. One coat of red /oxide / zinc chromate primer shall be applied on all surfaces
of chequered plate after fabrication.
9.3.6. Final two coats shall be provided as directed by the Engineer-in-charge.
9.4.C.S Rungs / Cast iron rungs for steps
9.4.1. The Contractor shall furnish drawings for approval and C.S Rungs/Cast Iron
rungs shall be provide as per approved drawing at the locations shown in the
construction drawing.
9.4.2. C.S rugs shall be of minimum 20mm dia mild steel bar bent to shape before
placement.
9.4.3. Necessary adjustment to hold C.S rugs in true level and plumb shall be made
in the formwork and special lining / coating shall be applied wherever required
as per approved drawings.
9.4.4. Cast iron rugs sourced from the reputed and approved manufacturer shall be
fixed in position and embedded in concrete adjusting the form work to hold
the steps in true line and level.
9.4.5. Samples of C.S rungs and C.I. rungs shall be made available to for approval
prior to installation.
9.5.C.S Ladders
9.5.1. C.S. Ladders shall be fabricated and erected as shown in the approved
drawings.
9.5.2. The sides / triangles of the ladders shall be of C.S angle/flat and rungs shall of
20mm diameter turned to 16mm diameter at both the ends and riveted to the
sides.
9.5.3. Safety cages shall be provided for the ladders having height more than 2.50m
from the ground level.
9.5.4. The ladders shall be fixed at top and bottom with necessary guides, brackets,
safety cage hoop attachment with the post of handrail, safety bar, foundation
bolts, insert plates, bolting/welding/screwing as per approved drawings.
Page 42 of 245
9.5.5. One coat of red oxide zinc chromate primer shall be applied after fabrication
and there upon two coats of paint shall be provided.
9.6.Hydraulic testing
9.6.1. All the liquid retaining structures (tanks, sumps, channels, concrete /
embankment reservoirs etc.), shall be tested by the contractor in accordance
with IS : 3370.
9.6.2. The Contractor shall plan sequence, method of filling, etc. to carry out the
hydro-testing in consultation with Engineer-in-charge to release the structure
for erection of equipment, lining, electrical works, etc.,
9.6.3. The Contractor shall plan sequence method of filling etc., to carry out the
hydro-testing in consultation with Engineer-in-charge to release the structure
for erection of equipment, lining, electrical works, etc.
9.6.4. Delay in hydraulic testing and rectification, if any due to leakage shall not be
acceptable and no extension of the Completion Period shall be given on this
account.
9.6.5. The contractor shall demonstrate water tightness, incase of leakage and
rectification of the same by using suitable and acceptable techniques and
refilling with water again to the needs of the leak proof requirements.
9.6.6. Hydro testing shall be carried out in accordance with IS: 3370 and as per the
guidelines given below
9.6.7. In the case of elevated tanks, whose external faces are exposed, the faces shall
show no sign of leakage and remain apparently dry over the period of
observation for seven days after allowing seven days for absorption form the
date of filling the structure to the designed level.
9.6.8. Underground tanks which are covered shall be deemed to be water tight if the
total drop in surface level over a period of seven days does not exceed 40mm
i.e., at the rate of about 6mm per day average.
9.6.9. The actual permissible drop of water level in underground tanks which are
open and subject to evaporation losses due to weather conditions can be
assessed and agreed upon to a slightly larger value than 6mm per day.
9.6.10. If the tests prove defective in hydro-testing or structure testing, the Contractor
in consultation with designers, consultants, experts and the owners shall
develop suitable method for rectification to make the structure water tight /
leak proof and to carry the designed load.
Page 43 of 245
10. Manholes, Inspection Chambers and Vent shafts
10.1. Manholes / Inspection chambers shall be constructed at places of every change

in alignment of pipeline. The junction manholes shall be constructed at places
where two or more pipelines converge at a point. Manholes shall be
sufficiently spacious. Manholes shall be constructed along the longitudinal
sections of the effluent collection line or sewers as directed by the Engineer-
in-charge.
10.2. Construction
a) The manhole shall be circular / square / rectangular and constructed in

brick work in cement mortar 1:2 (Cement:sand) and shall be plastered
with 20mm thick Cm 1:2 on both sides. Brick walls shall be constructed
200mm above the road surface or 300 mm above the ground level. The
top of the inspection chambers shall be covered with a heavy duty iron
circular frame having the ability to take the moving loads as prescribed
in the codes of practice.
b) The clear size of manhole at the bottom shall be of minimum 1.0m and
the top of hole shall be to suit cast iron cover having a minimum 560 mm
clear diameter.
c) The floors shall be of M20 grade plain cement concrete using 20mm
graded aggregated. Salt glazed or concrete or home half channel cut pipes
of required size and shape shall be embedded in the cement mortar placed
on top of concrete base to the same line and gradient as that of drain pipes.
The sides of the channel shall be benched up in concrete of M 20 grade
with a slope towards channel and plastered with 20mm thick of Cm 1:3
and finished smooth.
d) The entry and exit point of pipes in the manhole shall be provided with
bricks on edge cut to proper form and laid around the upper half of pipe
so as to form an arch. The pointing around the pipe shall be of 12mm
thick cement mortar 1:2.
e) Cast iron steps shall be provided where the invert level is more than 1.0m
form the finished road level / ground level. Approved pattern of cast iron
steps shall be provided at 150mm Center to Center. Additional hand rails
also shall be provided so as to enable access easily and safely.
f) Cast Iron frame shall be fixed in cement concrete of M15 grade all around
with splayed fillet and finished with neat cement. The manhole cover and
frame shall be painted with three coats of anticorrosive bitumastic or
Page 44 of 245
equivalent paint after fixing in position.
10.3. Inspection chambers
Rectangular inspection chambers shall be constructed wherever the depth of

invert is less than 150m from the finished level of ground / road.
All other details of construction shall be same as that described.
10.4. Vent shafts
Vent shafts shall be provided along the longitudinal sections of the effluent
collection line or sewers as required by designer.
11. Metal Doors, Windows and Ventilators
11.1. General
The type, overall size, side opening position of steel doors, windows and
ventilators shall be as per details given in IS : 1038 The size of doors,
windows and ventilators and their type shall be as directed by the Engineer-
in-charge and as per the approved construction drawings.
11.2. Fabrication
As per relevant IS code provisions. No site fabrication is permitted Standard

Brands as per approved list shall be ordered, procured and fitted.
11.3. Fixing
11.3.1. Doors, windows and ventilators shall be stacked in upright position on

leveled ground, preferably on wooden battens to keep them in true shape.
11.3.2. Doors, windows and ventilators shall be fixed without any distortion in
frames.
11.3.3. Sheet glass conforming to IS : 1761 or wired Glass conforming to IS :

5437 shall be provided
11.3.4. Glazing works in building shall conform to IS: 3548.
12. STEEL ROLLING SHUTTER
12.1. Rolling shutters shall be of the following types of Industrial grade.
12.1.1. Hand operated pull and push up to 75 Sqm area
Page 45 of 245
12.1.2. Pull and push type with ball bearings for the area more than 75 sqm but
less than 120sqm
12.1.3. Mechanical gear manually operated & electrically operated for areas
exceeding 12.0 sqm
12.2. Fabrication
Rolling shutters of approved make and passing the requirements of IS

6248 shall only be ordered, procured and fixed as directed
12.3. Fixing
Rolling shutters shall be fixed by making recesses in brickwork or

concrete structures and making them good after fixing wherever rolling
shutter is envisaged in the concrete surface adequate cover for
reinforcement or pockets without exposing reinforcement shall be
provided and grouted.
12.4. Painting
Painting shall be one coat of approved quality of red oxide / zinc chromate
primer and two coats of approved colour and make of synthetic enamel
paint.
13. Floor finish
13.1. General
13.1.1. Following floor finishes shall be provided conforming to relevant Indian

Standards Specification described herein
13.1.2. Floor finish for ground floor shall be provided on the sub-base concrete
with M20 grade plain concrete laid over well compacted rubble soiling,
compacted sand or any other approved material.
13.1.3. In - situ Cement Concrete or Granolithic Floor finish
13.1.4. Following materials conforming to relevant IS Codes and specification

furnished elsewhere in this specification shall be used. Cement Fine
Aggregate (Sand) Coarse aggregate and Water. Glass, aluminum or brass
divider - 3 mm thick strip to suit the depth of overall thickness of floor
finish (for ground floors - to be inserted into the base concrete)
13.1.5. Base course floor finish shall be of minimum 50mm thickness, plain
cement concrete mix in the proportion of 1:2:4 (Cement: Sand: aggregate)
Page 46 of 245
or M 20 grade using graded aggregate less than 10 mm
13.1.6. A thin layer of cement slurry shall be applied on the cleaned surface.
13.1.7. Suitable square or rectangular panels to match the overall dimension of

the floor shall be marked and the thoroughly mixed concrete shall be
placed. Paneling shall be carried out using cement coated MS Strips or
timber of depth equal to combined depth equal to combined depth of base
course and topping. The approved divider shall be placed in between the
panels. The concrete placed shall be beaten up with trowel and finished
smooth. Water-cement ratio shall be kept at optimum so that no excess
water arises from the floor.
13.1.8. The concrete shall be laid to the required slope wherever indicated in the
drawings and the dividers also shall be sloped in the direction of gradient.
13.1.9. Floor finish may be provided monolithically with the base concrete or on
hardened base concrete.
13.1.10. Incase of hardened sub-base, the surface shall be roughened by hacking,

cleaned and well saturated.
13.1.11. Floor shall be finished using thick cement slurry while the base course
concrete is green. The slurry shall be prepared at the rate of 3.0 kg of
cement per square meter of floor area.
13.1.12. The slurry shall be pressed immediately after it is applied and started
settling.
13.1.13. Dry cement shall not be used to finish the surface.
13.1.14. Curing shall be carried out by ponding with water for a minimum period
of 10 days.
13.2. Granite flooring
13.2.1. Granite flooring shall be laid as per the procedure of ‘Marble Flooring’
and / or as directed by Engineer-in-charge.
13.3. Acid resistant flooring
13.3.1. Acid proof flooring shall be carried out for the chemical storage area,
handling area, chemical preparation tanks, dosing tanks, etc., with acid
proof brick lining on the surface of RCC floor slab, PCC floor in ground
floor, inside and top of chemical preparation / dosing tanks, etc.,
Page 47 of 245
depending on the conditions. All the materials, laying etc., shall conform
to relevant IS Codes.
13.3.2. Materials
Materials such as bricks, primer, mastic acid proof cement mortar, etc.
shall be selected by the contractor depending on the chemical used in his
process. All the details of the above materials shall be submitted along
with the tender. Incase any change in the section of the material at the
time of approval of drawings, the same shall be carried out at no extra
cost to the owner. The materials have to be procured from the reputed
manufactures who have been in the manufacturing line for a period of
minimum last 5 years. The decision of Engineer-in-charge shall be final
and binding on the Contractor.
Laying
Laying shall be carried out as per the recommendations of Engineer-in-

charge and the same shall be provided to the Engineer-in-charge at the
time of approval of drawings.
Generally laying shall be carried out as follows:
The surface of sub base shall be roughened enough and free from dirt, oil,
scum or laitance, loose materials etc., and the acid prod flooring shall be
laid over the clean, green surface.
On top of the above prepared surface minimum two coats of primer shall
be applied. A layer of acid proof bricks shall be laid over the acid proof
mortar having a thickness not less than 10mm. Thickness of brick shall
be not less than 75mm. The dimensions of the bricks used shall be
indicted in the tender documents.
The joints and surface of the bricks shall be finished with acid proof
mortar having a minimum thickness of 10 m.
Skirting / dadding for the chemical storage area, etc. shall also be
provided as above for a minimum height of 150 m.
The surface shall be cured as per the recommendations of manufactures

of materials
13.4. White colored glazed ceramic flooring and lining
Page 48 of 245
13.4.1. White glazed tiles
Tiles conforming to IS : 777 shall be of approved make. Tiles shall be

true to shape and free from blisters, crazing, chips, welts, crawling or
other imperfections.
Tiles shall be rectangular of size 200 x 250 mm or 20 x 300mm as per the

approved drawings. The thickness of tiles shall not be less than 6mm. The
edges shall be towards base. Variation in size shall be permitted and in
such cases, the Contractor shall furnish all the details and obtain
approval from Engineer-in-charge.
Top surface of tiles shall be glazed and have either glossy of mat finish
as directed by the Engineer-in-charge.
Coloured tiles
Tiles shall be same as that of white tiles except the glazing, the shade and
design of which shall be as per the approval of Engineer-in-charge.
13.4.2. Surface preparation and laying
a) Base concrete of the RCC slab on which the tiles are to be laid shall be
cleaned, wetted and dried. Bedding shall be with cement mortar 1:3
(Cement: sand) The thickness of bedding mortar shall not be less than
10mm.
b) Mortar shall be applied, spread, tamped and corrected to proper levels

and corrected to the required levels and allowed to harden sufficiently to
have a rigid cushion for the tiles to be set and to enable placement of
wooden plank across and squat on it.
c) Neat grey cement slurry shall be spread over the above mortar.
d) Tiles soaked and cleaned shall be pressed on the above grout and gently
tapped with wooden mallet till it is properly bedded and in level with the
adjoining tiles. The joints shall be kept as thin as possible (paper joint)
not more than 1.0 mm and in straight lines or as per the pattern directed
by the Engineer-in-charge.
e) Surface shall be frequently checked with a straight edge to ensure

proper slope for the flooring. The surface shall be true to levels, slopes
etc. as per the approved drawings and directed by the Engineer-in-charge.
Approved make of white cement shall be used. Pigments to match the
shade of tiles approved shall be added to the satisfaction of Engineer-in-
Page 49 of 245
charge.
f) Surplus cement on the surface of the tiles arising at the joints shall be
cleaned off periodically. Tiles at the junction of wall and floor shall be
inserted at least for a depth of 10mm inside the wall so that skirting and
dadoing to have a levelled surface matching with the top level of
plastering on the walls.
14. General Building services/ Sanitary works
14.1. Scope of Work
Scope of work consists the following
14.1.1. Construction of overhead RCC tank on top of buildings to take care of

storage of water for drinking, toilet facilities, mixing of chemicals
(required in chemical houses, laboratory etc.) etc.,
14.1.2. Rain water down pipes with UPVC pipes with necessary bends and
specials.
14.1.3. Providing UPVC water supply pipes form overhead tank to drinking
water tap, toilet facilities etc.
14.1.4. Providing Indian / European water closets, urinals, bath rooms, wash
basins, flushing cisterns, laboratory sink, towel rods, etc. in all
buildings.
14.1.5. Providing taps and showers of approved make.
14.1.6. Glazed floor drains / channels inside the toilet, etc.
14.1.7. Drainage using stoneware pipes of 150mm dia from the buildings to the
disposal point.
14.1.8. Treatment facilities at ground level before discharging the water coming
form the laboratory.
14.1.9. Septic tanks wherever required with soak pit.
14.1.10. Interconnecting manholes, inspection chambers, etc. with covers.
14.1.11. Vent pipes
14.1.12. Provisions of half cut pipes on the plinth protection of buildings wherever
rainwater drain pipes and other drainage connects with the drains around
Page 50 of 245
the buildings.
14.1.13. Collection of floor wash and all other works.
14.2. Materials and Construction
All materials, construction and workmanship shall conform to relevant Indian

standards.
15. White and Colour wash
15.1. Specification for White Wash
15.1.1. Surface preparation
The blister holes, cracks or any other irregular surfaces on the surface to
be white washed shall be made good with lime putty or any other material.
Efflorescence, algae, fungi, etc. formed on the surface shall treated as per
IS:2395. The surface shall be cleaned thoroughly after removing all loose
particles, dirt, dust, mortar drops, etc.,
15.1.2. Mixing
The white wash shall be carried out using fat lime conforming to IS: codes
15.1.3. Application
The number of coats shall be three unless otherwise specified.
Each coat shall have uniform white appearance after it dries.
The floors, doors, windows, etc., shall be protected suitable to avoid

splashes on the surfaces of the same. The splashes on doors and
windows shall be cleaned by the contractor immediately.
15.2. General
15.2.1. Specification for colour washing shall be similar to that of white wash
and as specified in the relevant codes.
15.2.2. Mixing: The quantity of colour wash shall be prepared to complete the
job in one operation to obtain uniform colour.
15.2.3. Application: Two coats of white as described under “White wash” shall
be applied as prime coat.
Page 51 of 245
15.2.4. Similarly minimum of two coats of colour wash shall applied over the
white wash as directed by Engineer-in-charge.
15.2.5. Specification for Dry Distempering
15.2.6. Surface preparation
15.2.6.1. Surface shall be free from dirt, dust, oil, grease, loose particles etc. After
thoroughly brushed, the surface shall be made smooth by rubbing with sand
paper.
15.2.6.2. Unevenness, if any, shall be made good by applying putty made of plaster of
paris mixed with dry distemper of colour to be used. Surface shall be allowed
to dry and made smooth again by rubbing with sand paper and a coat of
distemper shall be applied over the plates.
15.2.7. Preparation of application of primer coat
Prime coat shall be applied as described under” white wash” and allowed to
dry for a minimum period of 48 hours.
15.2.8. Application
15.2.8.1. Minimum two cats of prepared distemper shall be applied using good quality
of brush as described under “White wash”. Each coat shall be allowed to dry
for 24 hours before before applying next coat. The finished surface shall be
even and uniform.
15.2.8.2. It shall be ensured that the quantity of mixture prepared shall cover all the
surfaces planned in one operation.
15.2.8.3. The floors, doors, windows, etc., shall be protected suitably to avoid splashes
on the surfaces of the same/ cleaned if any.
16. Technical specification for Road works
Internal roads within Facilities:
All internal plant roads shall be designed as flexible pavement in accordance with MORTH,
CPWD, IRC:SP-73 and IRC :37. The Minimum width of pathway should not be less than 3.5m.
Page 52 of 245
SECTION 2: GENERAL MECHANICAL SPECIFICATION
Page 53 of 245
General Mechanical Specification
Applicability
The following clauses specify general mechanical requirements and standards
of workmanship for equipment and installation and must be read in conjunction
with the particular requirements for Contract. These general specification
clauses shall apply where appropriate except where redefined in the particular
required sections of the specification which shall be applicable
List of Standards
Titles of various standards referred to in the specifications are indicated below.
This list does not necessarily cover all the standards referred to:
BS 5135 Specification for are welding of carbon manganese steels
BS 5316 Part-2 Specification for acceptance test for centrifugal, mixed flow and
axial pumps – Test for performance and efficiency
BS 6072 Method for magnetic particle flow detection
BS 6405 Specification for non-calibrated short link steel chain (Grade 30)
for general engineering purposes : Class 1 & 2
BS 6443 Method for penetrate flow detection
ASTM A-36 Specification for Structural Steel
ASTM A-216 Specification for Steel Castings, Carbon suitable for fusion welding
for high temperature service
ASTM A-276 Specification or stainless steel and heat resisting steel bars and
shapes
ASTM A-351 Specification for castings, Austenitic – Ferric (Duplex), for
Pressure containing parts
ASTM A-743 Specification for castings, Iron – Chromium, Iron – Chromium –
Nickel and Nickel Base Corrosion Resistant for general Application
ASTM A-744 Specification for castings, Iron Chromium – Nickel, Corrosion –
Resistant
IEC – 189 Low frequency cables and wires with PVC insulation and PVC
Part 1 & 2 Sheath
AWWA C 501 Cast Iron Sluice Gates
IS 5 Colours for ready mixed paints and enamels
IS 210 Grey Iron Castings
IS 318 Leaded Tin Bronze Ingots and Castings
IS 325 Three Phase Induction Motors
IS 807 Code of Practice for Design, manufacture, erection and testing
(Structural Portion) of cranes and hoists
IS 1239 Mild Steel tubes, tubular and other wrought steel fittings
IS 1536 Centrifugally Cast (Spun) iron pressure pipe for water gas and sewage
IS 1537 Vertically cast iron pressure pipes for water, gas and sewage
IS 1538 Specification for cast iron fittings for pressure pipes for water, gas and
sewage
Page 54 of 245
IS 1554 PVC insulated (Heavy duty) electric cables
IS 2062 Steel for general structural purposes
IS 2147 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures for low voltage
switch gear and control gear
IS 3177 Code of practice of electric overhead traveling cranes and gantry
cranes other than steel work cranes
IS 3624 Vacuum and Pressure gauges
IS 3815 Point hooks with shank for general engineering purposes
BS 2910 Methods for radiographic examination of fusion welded
circumferential butt joints in steel pipes
BS 3017 Specification for mild steel forged ram shorn hooks
BS 3100 Specification for steel castings for general engineering purposes
BS 3923 Methods for ultrasonic examination of welds
BS 4360 Specification for weldable structural steels
BS 4772 Specification for ductile iron pipes and fittings
BS 4870 Specification for approval testing of welding procedures
BS 4871 Specification for approval the sting of welders working to approved
welding procedures
BS 4942 Short chain link for lifting purposes
IS 5120 Technical requirements of roto dynamic special purpose pumps
IS 5600 Horizontal / vertical non clog type centrifugal pump for sludge
handling
IS 7090 Guide lines for rapid mixing devices
IS 7208 Guide lines for flocculator devices
IS 10261 Requirements for clarifier equipment for waste water treatment
IS 8413 Requirements for biological treatment and equipment
Part-II Activated sludge process and its modifications
IS 10037 Requirements for sludge dewatering equipment, sludge
Part-I Drying beds, sand, gravel and under drains
IS 6280 Specification for Sewage Screens
IS 3938 Electric Wire rope hoists
Further, following codes and standards unless specified herein shall be referred
to for pipe lines, pipe work & fittings:
IS: 210 Specification for grey iron casting

IS:290 Specification for coal tar black paint
IS:456 Code of practice for plain and reinforced concrete
IS :458 Specification for pre cast concrete pipes (with and without
reinforcement)
IS :516 Method of test for strength of concrete
IS :638 Specification for sheet rubber jointing and rubber insertion jointing
IS :783 Code of practice for laying of concrete pipes
IS :816 Code of practice for use of metal arc welding for general
construction in mild steel
IS :1367 Technical supply conditions for threaded steel fasteners
IS :1387 General requirements for the supply of metallurgical materials
IS :1500 Method for Brinnell hardness test for metallic materials
Page 55 of 245
IS :1536 Specification for centrifugally cast (spun) iron pressure pipes for
water, gas and sewage
IS :1537 Specification for vertically cast iron pressure pipes for water, gas
and sewage
IS :1538 Specification for cast iron fittings for pressure pipes for water,
gas and sewage
IS :1916 Specification for steel cylinder pipes with concrete lining
and coating
IS :2078 Method for tensile testing of grey cast iron
IS:3589 Specification for MS Spirally Welded Pipes
IS :3597 Method of tests for concrete pipes
IS :3658 Code of practice for liquid penetrant flow detection
IS :5382 Specification for rubber sealing rings for gas mains, water mains
and sewers
IS :5504 Specification for spiral welded pipes
IS :6587 Specification for spun hemp yarn
IS :7322 Specification for specials for steel cylinder reinforced
concrete pipes
IS:8329 Specification for DI pipes
IS:9523 Specifications for DI fittings
IS:4984 Specifications for HDPE pipeline
IS:14846 Specifications for valves
IS :783 Code of practice for laying of concrete pipes
IS :3114 Code of practice for laying of cast iron pipes
IS :3764 Excavation work - Code of Safety
IS :4127 Code of practice for laying of glazed stoneware pipes
IS :5822 Code of practice for laying of electrically welded steel pipes for water
supply.
IS :6530 Code of practice for laying of asbestos cement pressure pipes.
Materials
All materials incorporated in the works shall be the most suitable for the duty concerned and
shall be new and of first class commercial quality, free from imperfection and selected for
long life and minimum maintenance.
Design and Construction
a) The plant design, workmanship and general finish shall be of sound quality in
accordance with good engineering practice. Design shall be robust and rated for
continuous service, at the specified duties, under the prevailing operational site
conditions.
b) The general design of mechanical and electrical plant particularly that of wearing parts,
shall be governed by the need for long periods of service without frequent attention but
shall afford ready access for any necessary maintenance.
c) Similarly items of Plant and their component parts shall be completely interchangeable.
Spare parts shall be manufactured from the same material specification as the originals.
Page 56 of 245
d) No welding, filling or plugging of defective work will be permitted without the written
permission of the Engineer. All welding spatter shall be removed.
e) It shall be the responsibility of the contractor to ensure that all the equipment selected
is fully compatible, mechanically, electrically and also with respect to instrumentation,
control and automation.
f) It shall be the responsibility of the contractor to ensure his equipment interfaces with
any existing equipment correctly. Any interfaces must not affect the integrity of the
equipment, or invalidate any warranties or guarantees.
g) Each component or assembly shall have been proven in service in a similar application
and under conditions no less than those specified therein.
h) The equipment shall be compatible with the civil structure, when installed, with
sufficient space for operator access and maintenance procedures.
i) All materials shall be of the best commercial quality and free from any flaws, defects
or imperfections.
j) Materials shall be selected to eradicate or reduce corrosion to a minimum.
Tropicalization:
Equipment is to be designed for tropical climate suitable for Indian conditions and the city /
location where it is to be installed and the following shall apply:
i. Tropical grade materials should be used wherever possible. Some relaxation of these
provisions may be permitted where equipment is hermetically sealed.
ii. Iron and steel and in general to be painted or galvanized as appropriate in accordance
with the specification. Small iron and steel parts (other than stainless steel) of all
instruments and electrical equipment, the cores of electro-magnets and the metal parts
of relays and mechanisms are to be treated in an approved manner to prevent rusting.
Cores etc. which are built up of lamination or cannot for any other reasons be anti-rust
treated, are to have all exposed parts thoroughly cleaned and heavily enameled,
lacquered or compounded.
iii. The use of iron and steel is to be avoided in instruments and electrical relays whenever
possible. Steel screws, when used, are to be zinc, cadmium or chromium plated or, when
plating is not possible owing to tolerance limitations, shall be corrosion resisting steel.
Instruments screws (except those forming part of a magnetic circuit) are to be of brass
or bronze. Springs are to be of brass, bronze or other non-rusting material. Pivots and
other parts for which non-ferrous material is unsuitable are to be of an approved
stainless steel.
Page 57 of 245
iv. Fabrics, cork, paper and similar materials, which are not subsequently to be treated by
impregnation, are to be adequately treated with an approved fungicide. Sleeving and
fabrics treated with linseed oil or linseed oil varnishes are not to be used.
Climate
i. All part and materials used shall in all respects be suitable for the climatic conditions
of the city/location where it is to be installed. The following maximum conditions shall
be used for all design.
Maximum Ambient Temperature for Design Purpose: 45 ° C

Maximum Relative humidity: 96 %
In damp situations and wherever exposed to the weather, precaution shall be taken against
corrosion of metal work, cable armour conduit and the like
De-rating due to the climatic conditions

i. All electrical equipment including cables shall be de-rated for continuous operation in
an ambient temperature of 45 deg C in accordance with the appropriate regulations
unless otherwise specified.
ii. All materials and equipment which are subject to certification by testing authorities etc.
shall be certified as being tested at 45 deg C ambient unless other higher temperature
specified elsewhere for specific equipment/product.
Finish
Workmanship and general finish shall be of first class commercial quality and in accordance
with best practice. All covers, flanges and joints shall be properly faced, bored, fitted, fixed,
hollowed, mounted or chamfered as the case may be, according to the best approved practice
and all working parts of the plant and other apparatus, shall similarly be well and accurately
fitted, finished, fixed and adjusted.
Location and Alignment

Where individual items of equipment and mechanically located and coupled, such as alignment
motors, gearboxes and similar items depended upon correct alignment for satisfactory
operation, each shall be mounted on a common bed plate and when alighted shall be located
by means of dowels to ensure that correct re-alignment can be easily achieved when re-
assembling the items after removal for overhauls.
Coupling
Flexible couplings shall be Couplings rated at not less than the stalling torque load of the motor.
Couplings liable to impregnation by oil shall be of the all metal flexible type.
Page 58 of 245
General Service coupling shall be of the flexible multi-pin and resilient bush type, having not
less than six bushes and each bush shall have an inner sleeve to allow rotation on the pin (bushes
shall not be in direct contact with the pin). All pins shall have shoulders to allow positive
location and securing to the half coupling face.
Flexible couplings shall be supplied in matching balanced sets machined, balanced and marked
before leaving manufacturer’s works. The couplings shall be a tight fit on the shafts and secured
with hand fitted keys and fully checked for alignment shall be a tight fit on the shafts and
secured the hand fitted keys and fully checked for alignment. All necessary equipment for
checking alignment shall be supplied by the Contractor.
Where flexible coupling are used, the Contractor shall fully describe the arrangements
proposed for ensuring that the desired freedom of relative movement between the shafts is
obtained when transmitting a torques corresponding to the continuous maximum rating of the
motor.
Solidly bolted couplings shall be subject to accurate alignment and the Contractor’s proposed
alignment procedure shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. In particular, the
alignment procedures which involve rotating one half coupling only will not be accepted.
Overload release couplings shall not rely on shear pins. Release torque shall be adjustable over
a wide range and preferably without the need to change components. The coupling shall be
capable of angular alignment of 1 deg. Maximum and 1 mm displacement of shafts.
Hydraulic couplings shall be oil filled with thermal overload protection device. The coupling
shall be fully rated to transmit the motor full load power without exceeding normal working
temperature and due regard shall be taken to ambient temperatures. An enclosure around the
coupling shall be provided to prevent oil spray in the event of operation of the thermal overload
device.
Final alignment of all types of coupling shall be checked by the Contractor in the presence of
the Engineer’s Representative.
Bearings and Lubricators

The size of bearing shall be not less than that calculated for bearings and a minimum L10 basic
rating life in accordance with BS:5512 Lubricators Part 1., taking into account all
considerations of reliability materials of manufacture and operating conditions. All bearings
shall be rated and sized to ensure satisfactory running without vibration under all conditions of
operation for a minimum life of 50,000 hours running.
They shall be efficiently lubricated and adequately protected from ingress of moisture, dust and
sand and the particular climatic condition prevalent at the site. All bearings shall be to ISO
standard SI unit dimensions where practicable.
Page 59 of 245
All ball or roller bearings, except those supplied and “sealed for life” shall be arranged for
grease gun lubrication and a suitable high pressure grease gun shall be supplied.
Adequate “Stauffer” screw top pressure grease lubricator with ‘tell tale’ stems or ‘Tat” grease
nipples shall be provided for all moving parts. The position of all greasing and oiling points
shall be arranged so as to be readily accessible for routine servicing. Wherever necessary,
suitable access platform shall be provided.
The type of lubricant and intervals of lubrication, which shall be kept to a minimum (not less
than nine days), for each individual item of plant shall be entered on a working schedule, which
shall form part of the Operation and Maintenance instructions.
A list of recommended Lubricants and their equivalents Bearings shall be entered in the
Operation and Maintenance instructions
Gearboxes
The Gearboxes shall be totally enclosed dust, water and hose proof. Suitable lifting lugs shall
be provided. They shall be robustly constructed and arduous duty.
The gear case shall be manufactured from grey cast iron to IS: 210 and of a grade to ensure
high strength and wear resistance. Inspection covers shall be provided together with protected
oil level indication, breather with oil mist preventer, and drain plugs.
The gearboxes shall be designed for operation at the ambient temperatures specified without
the assistance of a cooling fan.
The mechanical service factor shall be not less than 1.5 when applied to the rated motor power
or higher as recommended by equipment manufacturer.
The gears shall be manufactured from steel to BS: 970 of grade selected by the Contractor and
entered in the Schedule of Particulars. The teeth shall be profile ground and lapped to a high
standard of accuracy and finish.
Rolling bearings shall be adequately rated to ensure a running life of not less than 50,000 hrs.
L10 life.
The input and output shafts shall have oil seals fitted to prevent the ingress of lubricant when
the gearbox is mounted in the required orientation. For example, inclined when applied to screw
pump installations.
The seals shall also prevent the ingress of dust, sand and moisture.
Lubrication of the gears shall be by a splash or forced system.
An anti-run back device shall be supplied and fitted to all gearboxes involved in screw pump
installation.
Each gear unit shall be subjected to a full load test at the inclinations specified for duration of
3.00 hrs during which time temperature, vibration and noise levels together with oil tightness
shall be recorded in the presence of the Engineers Representative.
After satisfactory completion of the tests, each unit shall be drained of lubricant. All internal
surfaces shall then be coated with suitable preservative.
Page 60 of 245
A metal label shall be securely wired to the gear case to clearly state that the gear case requires
to be coated with a suitable preservative.
The gear box shall be securely wired to the gear case to clearly state that the gear case requires
to be filled with lubricant, the type and grade of which shall be clearly identifiable.
A metal label shall be securely wired to the gear case to clearly state that the gear case requires
to be filled with lubricant, the type and grade of which shall be clearly identifiable.
General Requirements for Pipe work

The Contractor shall supply, deliver and erect all pipe work and fittings within the structures
and externally to the limits indicated on the approved drawings and in accordance with each
section of specification.
Pipe work and fittings shall be suitable for a safe working pressure equivalent to the maximum
working pressure of the system. The safe working pressure of the pumping mains shall be the
closed valve head of the pump plus the maximum suction static head. The maximum surge
pressure shall be limited to 125% of the maximum working pressure. All pipe work and fittings
shall be of adequate strength to accommodate the maximum surge pressure of the system.
Welder Qualification
Before welding work commences on pipe work, the Contractor shall satisfy the Engineer’s
Representative that the welders have previously carried out similar welding work within recent
months. When instructed by the Engineer’s Representative, the Contractor shall arrange for the
welder to produce test welds in accordance with the provisions of BS 2971.
Pipe work Installation

All pipe work, pipe fittings, jointing materials etc., shall be of the best quality free from defects
an obtained from a supplier approved by the Engineer. The installation of the pipe work shall
be carried out using skilled personnel and pipe work shall be installed according to the drawing
approved by the Engineer. Where valves are incorporated in pipe work, the valves shall be
provided with their own supports, such that no excess loading is exerted on pipe work. All pipe
work materials shall have no excess loading is exerted on pipe work. All pipe work materials
shall be off-loaded, stored on site and handled thereafter in such a manner that they are
adequately protected for damage or deterioration.
Underground Pipes
Unless otherwise state all underground pipes shall be buried in trenches which have been
excavated in accordance with the relevant section of the specification
Examining Pipes
Before being used, each pipe casting or fitting shall be properly examined and should appear
defective in any way, it shall be set apart and not used until it has been examined and passed
by the Engineer. All metal pipes which shall be buried in the ground shall, prior to their
Page 61 of 245
installation, be slung and sounded in an approved manner. Any pipe found to be faulty by this
method, shall be set aside for examination by the Engineer.
Cutting Pipe work
All pipe work shall be cut with proper pipe cutting tools. The use of hammer and chisel for this
purpose shall not be permitted. Great care shall be exercised when cutting concrete / bitumen
lined spun iron and ductile iron pipes, to ensure that there is no damage to the lining. Should
any damage to the lining take place which is to an extent which the Engineer deems to be
undesirable, then the pipe shall be rejected. The Contractor shall then prepare another pipe for
incorporation into the works. All pipes which have been cut shall have the edges dressed and
deburred.
Suppression of Noise
All plant equipments offered shall be quiet in operation. The noise level within the building
shall not be more than 85 dB (+5 percent on this over the audible frequency spectrum measured
at mid-band), “A” scale when measured along a contour 3 meters from any single item of plant
during starting, running and stopping. The noise level outside the building shall not be more
than 60 dB (+5 % on this over the audible frequency spectrum measured at mid-band), “A”
scales when measured along a contour 3 meters from the external wall. Noise test measurement
shall be made on completion of the installation of the plant at Site to verify that it complies
with this Clause. Plant which fails to comply with the noise level limits when tested which
render it liable for rejection unless it is satisfactorily modified at the Contractors expense by
the programmed commissioning date.
Page 62 of 245
Specification Sheet of Steeped Coarse Screen
Specification Sheet of Stepped Coarse Screen

1. General
1.1. Preferable make Jash/ Xylem/ Italprogetti or equivalent
1.2. Tannery Effluent
Application
2.1. Type Stepped coarse screen with conveyor

arrangement along with fully automated,
self-cleaning arrangement by brush screen,
backwash cleaning arrangement with
pumps, continuous operation, Installation:
Out door and Orientation: Elevated level.
2.2. Screen Size 10 mm
2.3. Drive transmission Gear drive with Motor
2.4.
Material of construction
3. Wetted Parts SS 316L
3.1. SS 316L
Non wetted parts
3.2. Fasteners SS 316L
3.3. Accessories Gear Box, Motor, Control panel with safety
arrangement weather proof Thermo plastic
enclosure, weather proof FRP motor
canopy, FRP Chain guard, Set of Level
control instrument interlock with Stepped
Screen, self-cleaning arrangement by brush
screen, backwash cleaning arrangement
with pumps, Debris collection Box, suitable
size of wheel trolley 2 Nos for collecting
debris and SS 316L Foundation Bolt & Nut.
Page 63 of 245
Specification Sheet of Automated Rotary Drum Fine Screen
Specification Sheet of Automated Rotary Drum Fine Screen

1. General
1.1. Preferable make Jash/ Xylem/ Italprogetti or equivalent
Application
2.1. Type Automated Rotary drum Fine Screen with

screw conveyor arrangement for
continuous operation, Installation: Out
door, Orientation: Elevated level
2.2. Screen Size 3 mm
3.1. SS 316L
Wetted Parts
3.2.
Non wetted parts SS 316L
Gear Box, Motor, VFD, Control panel with
4. Accessories
safety arrangement weather proof Thermo
plastic enclosure, weather proof FRP
motor canopy, FRP guard, Set of Level
control instrument interlock with drum fine
Screen, self-cleaning nozzles, backwash
cleaning arrangement with pumps, Debris
collection Box and suitable size of wheel
trolley 2 Nos for collecting debris and SS
316L Foundation Bolt & Nut.
Specification Sheet of Submersible Pump

1. General
1.1. Preferable pump make Kishore/ KSB/ ABS/ Flygt/ Grundfos/ Kirloskar/
Page 64 of 245

equivalent
1.2. Application Tannery effluent
1.4. Maximum size of particles 100 mm
2.1. Type of pump Submersible, Centrifugal, Vertical type
2.2. Impeller Non-clog design
2.3. Drive transmission Inbuilt motor
2.4. Specification for Mechanical seal:
Mechanical seal
1. Suitable double Mechanical seal to be provided.
2. Preferable make of the Seal faces are in Tungsten
carbide, Silicon carbide, Carbon and packing are in
Teflon/ PTFE[A1].
3. Preferable make of the Seal manufacturer are
Leak proof/ Burgmann/ Flow serve Sanmar/ Eagle
Poonawalle or equivalent.
3.1. Pump housing SS 316L (CF8M)
3.2. Impeller and Shaft SS 316L (CF8M)
3.3. Seals Double mechanical Seal
3.4. Base plate Auto coupling arrangement
3.6. Primary shaft seal SS 316L
3.7. Secondary shaft seal SS 316L
Motor, Double mechanical seal, Foundation bolts in
4. Accessories
SS 316L, Auto coupling, lifting guide pipe in SS 316L
(Seamless) and 10 m length SS 316L suitable
provide 3" Dia ring at every 1m once in chain with 8
mm Dia rod), Duck foot bend, Moisture sensor in
motor, Water in oil sensor, high winding temperature
sensor / thermal switch, reverse rotation preventer,
electronic type over load relay, water level control for
dry run protection and single phasing preventer along
with weather proof starter control panel and SS 316L
Page 65 of 245

Specification Sheet of Pre Settler
Specification Sheet for Pre Settler for Pre Treatment System
Item description Specification

Sl.No
1. General
Application Tannery effluent
1.1.
Preferable Make Eimco KCP Ltd, Shiv Pad or equivalent
1.2.
Location Out door
1.3.
Duty Continuous
1.4.
Operating hours 24
1.5.
Construction features
2.
Central Drive with Gear Box
2.1. Drive Mechanism
Gear box accessories Oil level indicator, Lubrication point, with easy
2.2.
accessible fittings to drain the lubrication oil ,Lifting
hook, Cooling fan
Material of construction
3.
MOC of all wetted parts SS 316L
3.1.
All fasteners SS 316L
3.2.
Sampling pipes with ball
3.3. SS 316L
valves Flanged end- 4nos
Feed inlet pipe flanged end
3.4. HDPE
from sidewall to reaction
well with
Motor canopy and FRP
3.5.
chain/belt/pulley guards
Super Structure RCC Super Structure
3.6.
Accessories Gear Box, Motor, Tripping arrangement, Drive
4.
structure including stiffeners and baffles made of steel
plate, Adjustable over load control with load indicator
Page 66 of 245
Specification Sheet for Pre Settler for Pre Treatment System

Sl.No
including cut-off switches and alarm horn in weather
proof enclosure, Clarifier rack shaft, lower guide
bearings, FRP baffles, inlet feed pipe, over flow pipe,
overflow launder, adjustable FRP wears, rack arm with
blades, FRP adjustable squeegees, sludge cone scrapper,
Specification Sheet of Grit Removal System
Specification Sheet of Grit Removal System

1. General
1.1. Preferable make Eimco KCP/ Shiv Pad or equivalent.
1.2. Tannery Effluent for remove the inorganic
Application
particles to prevent damage to the pumps
2.1. Type Automated

3. Material of construction All wetted parts are in SS 316L
Bridge mounted drive, Gear Box, Motor, Set

4. Accessories
of Level control instrument interlock with
Grit Chamber, self-cleaning arrangement by
backwash arrangement with pumps, Debris
collection Box, Rake/ Screw classifier,
Organic return pump with motor, Central
Drive, Drive control assembly and suitable
size of wheel trolley 2 Nos for collecting
debris and SS 316L Foundation Bolt & Nut.
Page 67 of 245

1 To eliminate the odour from the Tannery wastewater
Application
2 Odour Control System
Equipment Name
3 Duty Continuous
4 Working Principle 1. It would be implemented in two stages to
eliminate the odour from the Tannery
wastewater. The odour removal system would
comprises of Bio trickling filter followed by
Activated carbon filter. In addition, waste gas
feeding system and water spray unit are also
provided along with the bio trickling filter to feed
the waste gas and wetting of the media
respectively.
2. In addition to the bio filter, an additional
chemical dosing system comprising of Sodium
Hydroxide and Hydrogen Peroxide is also be
proposed.
Dosing System, Inter connecting ducts, Radial Fan,
Pumps, Pipes and Fittings and Valves, Control Panel,
H2S Monitor
6 Specification for Bio Type- Bio trickling filter- 11750, Total Airflow-
trickling filter 11750 m3/hr, Vessel material- HDPE or GRP, Vessel
diameter- 3800 mm, Vessel Height- 7000 mm, Total
weight empty- 4000 kg, Filter area- 11,3 m2, Filter
bed height- 3 m, Retention time- 10 s, Filter media-
Foamed plastic
Carbon filter reinforcements, Type- AKFE 11000, Total Airflow
(m3/h)- 23.500, Nominal carbon volume (m3)- 22,
Weight of carbon (kg)- 11000 Superficial contact
Page 68 of 245

time (s)- 3,3, Length (mm)- app. 11100, Height
(mm)- app. 2100, Width (mm)- app. 2000, Vessel
construction- PEHD, Filtering surface (m2)- app.
22,00
Filter depth (m)- 1, Total weight empty (kg)- app.
1400
Carbon Moisture, as packed: < 5 % Apparent density
(kg/m3): 500 +/- 30 Pellet diameter (mm): 4,
Hardness no.: > 97
9 Specification for Radial Fan Type: Radial Fan, Capacity (m3/h): 23.500, Static
pressure (Pa): 3500, Material housing: Stainless Steel
316, Material impeller: Stainless Steel 316, Induction
diameter (mm):900, Fan speed (rpm): app. 1450
Motor speed 50 Hz (rpm): app. 1450 Motor power
rating (kW): app. 45, Power supply: 400 V 50 Hz
10 Control Panel For the operation of the above described odour
control system. Made of Stainless Steel, mounted in
an air-conditioned room, completely wired and tested
according to VDE. With the following components:
1 x Siemens SPS S7 1200, x Power supply and
control power supply 1 x Fault report processing x
Frequency converter Siemens type for the fan 4 x AC
Semiconductor Motor Control for the circulation
pumps 4 x 230 V motorized valve, 4 x PH-Monitor
control 10 x Pressure control, 1 x Horn and all-round
illumination, 1 x Non-potential contacts for operating
and fault reporting, Touch panel operation.
11 H2S Monitor Type: Polytron 3000, Manufacturer: Draeger,
monitoring for: H2S, measuring range: 0.100 ppm
(for inlet), 0.20 ppm (for outlet) Output Signal: 4.20
mA, installed at the inlet and outlet of the odour
control system to measure the inlet and outlet H2S
concentration. Connected to the local control panel
for power supply and signal processing.
Page 69 of 245
Specification Sheet of Flash Mixer-Agitator
Specification Sheet of Flash Mixer-Agitator

1. General
1.1. Preferable make Eimco KCP / Sri Venkateswara Engg.
Works/ G.K. Technology., or equivalent
1.2. 1. Lime with tannery effluent mixing
Application
2. Alum with tannery effluent mixing
3.1. Type Axial Flow design
3.2. Impeller Propeller Type
3.3. Drive transmission Motor
3.4. Speed 100 RPM
4.1. Impeller SS 316L

4.2. Shaft SS 316L
4.3. Base plate SS316L
4.4. Super Structure RCC Structure
Speed reducer gear box with suitable Gear
5. Accessories
Ratio, Motor, Base frame plate, foundation
bolts in S.S 316L, FRP motor canopy with
flange type coupler and fasteners are in SS
316L.
Specification Sheet for Flow Jet for SHT
Specification Sheet For Flow Jet for SHT

General
1.
1.1. Preferable make ABS, Flygt or equivalent
The flow Jet is a mechanical Mixing device, utilizing
1.2. Working principle
Page 70 of 245
the pumping effect of a centrifugal pump. The
discharge from the pump is guided through the
ejector, A reduction nozzle in the ejector increases the
velocity of the fluid, thus increasing the dynamic
pressure and decreasing the static pressure.
Application Atmospheric air and water is mixed in the ejector
1.3.
before leaving the flow Jet and mixing the wastewater
Maximum particle size 100 mm
1.4.
1.5. Location SHT Tank inside
1.7. RPM 1460
1.8. Service Continuous
1.9. Inlet Cond.(Press/Temp) ATM
1.10. Orientation of Flow Horizontal
Type of impeller Channel
2.1.
Type of seal cooling Oil
2.2.
Drive transmission Motor
2.3.
Drive Directly coupled with motor
2.4.
SS 316L (CF8M)
3.1. Pump housing
3.2. Impeller SS 316L (CF8M)
3.4. Base plate SS 316L (CF8M)
3.5. Air inlet pipe with ejector SS 316L

Pedestal stand, Ejector Nozzle, SS 316L air pipe for
4. Accessories
10m length, 10 m length SS 316L suitable industrial
chain/ Rope for Pump lifting (for lifting purpose, to
Page 71 of 245
provide 3” Dia ring at every 1m once in chain with 8
mm Dia rod), Moisture in motor sensor, Water in oil
sensor, Thermal sensor, column profile tube, and starter
control panel with weather proof (thermoplastic)
enclosure with monitoring/tripping relay for water in
oil sensor, Moisture in Motor, high winding
preventer, electronic type over load relay, single
Specification Sheet for Flow Maker for SHT & BIOT
Specification Sheet For Flow Maker

General
1.
1.1. Preferable make FLYGT/ ABS or equivalent
Working principle The Flow maker is a mechanical Mixing device by
1.2.
driven with motor and gear box. The mixing done
through 3 Nos polyimide blades. It is supported in
a depth block accessary and positioned and lifted by
guide rails.
The vertical mixing unit positioned in horizontal
1.3. Application
orientation and mixing the wastewater at SHT tank
1.4. Location SHT and BIOT Tank inside
1.6. RPM 34.62
Type of impeller Propeller type
2.1.
2.2.
2.3.
Page 72 of 245
Specification Sheet For Flow Maker
Drive Gear drive
2.4.
2.5. Material of construction
SS 316L
2.6. Pump housing
2.7. Impeller Polyimide
2.9. Depth block SS 316L
2.10. Supporting leg SS 316L
3. Accessories Overloading tripping arrangement (Shear pin), triple

sealing system for maximum protection of the
mechanical shaft seal, Depth block, Lifting
arrangement, Angular positioning plate, Moisture in
motor sensor, Water in oil sensor, Thermal sensor,
incorporated with weather proof (thermoplastic)
enclosure with monitoring/tripping relay for water in
oil sensor, Moisture in Motor, high winding
preventer, electronic type over load relay, single
Specification Sheet for Flow Mixer for Collection well and Anoxic Tank
Specification Sheet For Flow Mixer

General
1.
1.1. Preferable make ABS, Flygt or equivalent
Working principle The Flow mixer is a mechanical Mixing device by
1.2.
driven with motor and gear box. The mixing done
through 3 Nos blades. It is supported in a depth
block accessary and positioned and lifted by guide
rails.
Page 73 of 245
The vertical mixing unit positioned in horizontal
1.3. Application
orientation and mixing the wastewater at Collection
well and Anoxic Tank.
Collection well and Anoxic Tank inside
1.4. Location

Flow Mixer capacity For selection, Positioning and Qty of Flow mixer shall
1.6.
be done by using CFD software, Duty: Continuous,
Velocity-0.3m/sec.
1.7. RPM 34.62

Inside the Collection well and Anoxic Tank
1.9. Installation
Type of impeller Propeller type
2.1.
2.2.
2.3.
Drive Gear drive
2.4.
3 Material of construction
SS 316L
3.1 Pump housing
3.2 Impeller SS 316L
3.3 Seals Mechanical Seal
3.4 Depth block SS 316L
3.5 Supporting leg SS 316L
3.6 Fasteners SS 316L
4. Accessories Overloading tripping arrangement, triple sealing system

for maximum protection of the mechanical shaft seal,
Depth block, Lifting arrangement with SS 316L Chain/
Page 74 of 245
wire along with Chain pulley, Angular positioning
(thermoplastic) enclosure with monitoring/tripping
rotation preventer, electronic type over load relay,
single phasing preventer and SS 316L Foundation Bolt
& Nut.
Specification Sheet of OHR Aerator:
Specification Sheet of OHR Aerator for Pre-Aeration Tank I & II and Aeration Tank I & II

1. General
1.1. To mix oxygen in effluent by Aeration
Application
1.3. Working Principle After discharge of large clusters of air bubbles,
oxygen is forcibly dissolved in water by centrifugal
force and impact force
1.4. Alpha Value 0.98 to 1.07
1.5. Model No AE-130N
1.6. Coverage area per unit all 6 – 7 m2
over tank aeration
1.7. Size ᴓ 145 mm x 642 H
1.8. Weight 2.9 Kgs
1.9. Air Blower Capacity per 1. Minimum: 0.5 m3/min
Unit 2. Standard: 1.0 m3/min
3. Maximum: 1.4 m3/min
1.10. Size of Fine Air bubble Approx. 100 µm
1.11. Preferable Make OHR Laboratory Corporation
Page 75 of 245
Specification Sheet of OHR Aerator for Pre-Aeration Tank I & II and Aeration Tank I & II

2.1.
Body Polypropylene
2.2. Inter Connecting Air-Pipe PP40A (Polypropylene)
2.3. Flange PP (Polypropylene)
2.4. Manufacturer Guarantee 7 Years
Specification Sheet of Turbo Blower
1 General
1.1 Preferable make Aerzen- Godrej/ Turbo MAX or equivalent
Diffused aeration system in Pre Aeration and
1.2 Application
Biological Tank
1.3 Location Outdoor
2 Construction features
Single stage high speed radial centrifugal Turbo
2.1 Type of Blower
energy efficient high speed Blowers
2.2 Type of cooling Air-foil bearing air cooled
The high-speed turbo blower consists of a single
motor-impeller assembly with unique bearings
2.3 Rotor
lubricated by air, built-in VFD for capacity
control
2.4 Drive transmission Motor
2.5 Sound level Within 85 Decibel
Spiral casing and blower bell
3.1 Cast aluminium
mouth
Machined cast stainless steel material 17- 4PH
3.2 Impeller
equivalent to SUS630 high structural strength
Page 76 of 245
3.3 Bearing Anti-Friction air foil bearing

3.4 Base plate SS 316L
Blowers should be supplied with Air Foil bearing
for high speed operation, Entire range is air-
cooled, Variable Speed Drive for achieving high
speed, smooth starts (reduced starting current ) &
energy efficient capacity control as part of the
Blower package., Permanent Magnet Motor,
safety valve, suction filter, suction silencer,
4 Accessories discharge silencer, non-return valve, pressure
gauge in SS 316L, anti-vibration pads, along with
motor with SS 316L isolation Butterfly valves for
each Blower and Pressure gauge for each header
and main distribution lines to determine leakage
/ Breakage of pipes of membrane with SS 316L
isolation Butterfly valves and SS 316L
foundation bolt & nuts.
Specification Sheet for Primary & Secondary Clarifier for Pre Treatment System

Sl.No
General
5.
Application Tannery effluent
5.1.
Preferable Make Eimco KCP Ltd, Shiv Pad , G.K. Technologies or
5.2.
equivalent
Location Out door
5.3.
Duty Continuous
5.4.
Operating hours 24
5.5.
Construction features
6.
Central Drive with Gear Box
6.1. Drive Mechanism
Gear box accessories Oil level indicator, Lubrication point, with easy
6.2.
accessible fittings to drain the lubrication oil ,Lifting
hook, Cooling fan
Page 77 of 245

Sl.No
MOC of all wetted parts SS 316L
7.1.
All fasteners SS 316L
7.2.
Sampling pipes with ball
7.3. SS 316L
Feed inlet pipe flanged end
7.4. HDPE
from sidewall to reaction
well with
Motor canopy and FRP
7.5.
Super Structure RCC Super Structure
7.6.
Accessories Gear Box, Motor, Tripping arrangement, Drive
8.
structure including stiffeners and baffles made of steel
plate, Adjustable over load control with load indicator
including cut-off switches and alarm horn in weather
proof enclosure, Clarifier rack shaft, lower guide
bearings, FRP baffles, inlet feed pipe, over flow pipe,
overflow launder, adjustable FRP wears, rack arm with
blades, FRP adjustable squeegees, sludge cone scrapper,
Specification Sheet of Thickener for Bio & Chemical Sludge

1. General
1.1. Application After biological treatment Tannery effluent
1.2. Preferable Make Eimco KCP Ltd, Shiv Pad, G.K. Technologies or
equivalent
2.1. Drive Mechanism Central Drive with Gear Box
Page 78 of 245
2.2. Gear box accessories Oil level indicator, Lubrication point, with easy
accessible fittings to drain the lubrication oil
,Lifting hook, Cooling fan.
3.1. MOC of all wetted parts SS 316L
3.2. Super structure foundation SS 316L
bolt and nuts
3.3. All fasteners SS 316L
3.4. Sampling pipes with ball SS 316L
3.5. Feed inlet pipe flanged HDPE
end from sidewall to
reaction well with
3.6. Motor canopy and FRP
3.7. Super Structure RCC Super Structure
4. Accessories Gear Box, Motor, Tripping arrangement, drive
structure including stiffeners and baffles made from
steel plate, super structure, Adjustable over load
control with load indicator including cut-off switches
and alarm horn in weather proof enclosure, rack
shaft, lower guide bearings, FRP baffles, inlet feed
pipe, over flow pipe, overflow launder, adjustable
FRP wears, rack arm with blades , adjustable
squeegees, sludge cone scrapper, desludging pipe and
SS 316L foundation bolt & nuts.
Specification Sheet of Filter Press for Bio & Chemical Sludge
Specification Sheet For Filter Press for Bio & Chemical Sludge (Semi automated)

1. General
1.1. Preferable Make Andritz, Hydro Press or equivalent
1.2. Application Biological and Chemical sludge from Thickener
1.3. Location In door
Page 79 of 245
Specification Sheet For Filter Press for Bio & Chemical Sludge (Semi automated)

1.5. No of cycles 3 Max.
1.6. Operating hrs 8 Max.
2.1. Arrangement of filter plate Vertical
2.2. Closure of filter pack Manual
2.3. Pressure closing system Hydraulic
2.4. Automatic Hydraulic Hydraulic cylinder with double acting
closing
2.5. Thickness’ of the guide
1.5mm SS 316L sheet
plate for roller
2.6. MS with hard chrome plating (Min 120 microns) in the
Hydraulic cylinder
outer surface
2.7. MS Fabricated with size of 400mm width x 40mm
Tie bar
thick
2.8. Arrangement of moving bed
Mounted at filter press Centre
and filter plate
2.9. Feeding inlet Centre
2.10. Air permeability for filter 5 to 10 Ltrs/ decimeter sq./ min
cloth
3.1. Pigment added Polypropylene / Colour- Grey

Filter plate
3.2. Pigment added Polypropylene / Colour- Grey
Filter plate handle
3.3. Filter plate outlet Pigment added Polypropylene / Colour- Grey
3.4. Filtrate tray FRP with Bisphenol resin
3.5. Guide wheel for moving bed MS bar with 200mm dovetail Polypropylene guide bush
3.6. Filter cloth and thread Polypropylene / Type: butterfly cloth
3.7. Filter press structure MS material with epoxy painting (500microns)
4. Accessories Motor with VFD Drive, Control panel Dry run
protection, Over load tripping sensor, Base frame plate,
Coupling, FRP Coupling Guard, foundation bolts in SS
Specification Sheet of Agitator
Page 80 of 245
Specification Sheet of Agitator

1. General
1.1. Preferable make Sri Venkateswara Engg. Works, G.K.
Technologies., or equivalent
1.2. Lime, Alum Mixing, Soda Ash, Poly, SMBS,
Application
Antiscalnt and CIP for UF, NF, RO and
HPPRO.
2.1. Type Axial Flow design

2.2. Impeller Propeller Type
2.4. Speed 100 RPM
3. Material of construction for Lime,
Poly, Soda Ash
3.1. Impeller SS 316L
3.2. Shaft SS 316L
3.3. Base plate SS 316L
3.4. Super Structure RCC Structure
4 Material of construction for SMBS, Anti Scalant, CIP for UF
4.1 Impeller SS 316L
4.2 Shaft SS 316L
4.4 Super Structure RCC Structure
4.5 Fasteners SS 316L
Motor, Gear Box, Shaft, Propeller, Bearing
5 Accessories
Block and Bearing, Lovejoy Coupling, Base
Frame
Specification Sheet of Quartz Filter
Page 81 of 245
1. General
1.1. Application Tannery Effluent
1.2. Location In door
1.4. Flow method Feed in Top and Back wash at Bottom
1.5. Rating pressure kg/cm2 3
1.6. Mech. Design Pressure kg / 6
cm2
1.7. Hydro Test Pressure kg / cm2 9
1.8. Operating Temperature o C : Ambient
1.9. Mech. Design Temperature °C 50
1.10. Dished ends Tori spherical (IS: 4049)
1.11. Corrosion Allowance in mm 2
2.1. Type of Filter Cylinder, Vertical, Dish end
2.2. Shell Dia in m 4.0

2.3. Shell Height in m (HOS) 3.0
2.4. Leg height in m 1.0
2.5. Shell Thickness in mm 10.0
2.6. Dish Thickness in mm 12.0
2.7. Rubber Lining Thickness in mm 5.0 (Min)
2.8. Patch plate thickness in mm 10mm for Shell area and 12mm for Dish area
2.9. Leg pipe size in mm 250 NB, Sch 40, Seamless
2.10. Base plate thickness in mm 16.0

2.11. Strainer plate in mm 16.0
2.12. 10.0
Stiffener for Leg pipe in mm
2.13. Flange specification ANSI B16.5 150#, SORF
2.14. Nozzles, Bell Mouth Seamless, ‘C’ Class Pipe
Page 82 of 245
2.15. Handrails Dia 1-1/4” x 1.0m Ht, GI Pipe
2.16. Monkey Ladder Min 500mm Width x 1” ‘B’ Class Pipe
2.17. Media height in inside of Filter 1000 mm bed height
2.18. Specification of Media Media consist of coarse, fine and quartz medium
(pebbles, Coarse sand and fine sand)
2.19. Feed distribution System Inverted Bell Mouth
2.20. Painting on non-wetted parts One coat of epoxy primer and Two Coats of
Epoxy paint (Colour: For Quartz Filter- Ivory)
2.21. Manual for man entry and Dia- 500 mm with Hinge type swiveling
Media loading and un loading arrangement
2.22. No. of Man holes with Covers 3 No’s.
3.1. MOC of Filter Shell, Dish Mild Steel IS‐2062 Gr.A
3.2. Nozzles, Leg pipe, Manholes Mild Steel
3.3. MOC of Filter Shell inside MS with Rubber lining, Natural Rubber with min
5 mm Thickness
3.4. MOC of frontal Piping HDPE, PE100, PN 10, IS 4984 (for reference)
3.5. MS with Rubber lining for all area (Natural
Bell Mouth Rubber) with min 5 mm with thickness (Refer
enclosed drawing)
3.6. All fasteners SS 316L
3.7. Pipe line Supports SS 316L
3.8. Provide frontal pipe supports (6 SS 316L
No’s)
3.9. Strainer PP
3.10. Strainer Plate 16 mm MS plate with Natural Rubber lining (min
5 mm thickness)
3.11. Ladder, Hand Rails, Toe Guard Mild Steel
4. Accessories Quartz filter consist of Quartz media (pebbles,
Coarse sand and fine sand), Monkey ladder, Top
manual with lid, Lifting hook, working platform
on Top with hand rails and Toe guard, Level glass
for inbuilt with vessel, View glass with lamp at
Page 83 of 245
top side along with nozzle for inlet, outlet, Drain
Nozzle, PP Strainer, Strainer plate, Media
unloading manual, Bottom manual, Air vent
nozzle, Bell mouth with multiple distribution
system and pipe supports
Specification Sheet of Centrifugal Pump
Specification Sheet of Centrifugal Pump for Quartz Feed Pump, Quartz Backwash
Pump
1. General
1.1. Preferable pump make Pump Make- KSB/ Kishore/ Sulzer/
Grundfos/ Johnson/ Flow serve or
equivalent
Application
1.5. Construction features
1.6. Type of pump Horizontal back pullout centrifugal

1.7. Impeller Closed
1.8. Coupling Love joy, SW
1.10. Following points to be considered while
Mechanical seal
selecting the Mechanical seal:
1. Suitable Mechanical seal to be selected
with reference to seal manufacturer since
application of the liquid is high salinity. If
necessary seal cooling and flushing
arrangements to be considered.
2. Preferable make of the Seal faces are in
Tungsten carbide, Silicon carbide, Carbon
and packings are in Teflon/ PTFE.
3. Preferable make of the Seal
manufacturer are Leak proof/ Burgmann/
Page 84 of 245
Specification Sheet of Centrifugal Pump for Quartz Feed Pump, Quartz Backwash
Pump
Sanmar/ Eagle Poonawalle or equivalent.
2.1. Casing CF8M (SS 316L)

2.2. Impeller CF8M (SS 316L)
2.3. Shaft CF8M (SS 316L)
2.4. Shaft sleeve CF8M (SS 316L)
2.5. Casing ring CF8M (SS 316L)
2.6. Impeller ring CF8M (SS 316L)
2.7. Mechanical seal SS 316L
2.8. Base Frame SS 316L
2.9. Motor canopy and coupling Guard
FRP
2.10. Accessories Mechanical Seal, Motor, Base frame plate,
Coupling, FRP Coupling Guard, foundation
bolt & Nut are in SS 316L and FRP motor
canopy.
Note: For complete details refer Technical
specification sheet.
Specification Sheet for Backwash Blower
Specification Sheet For Backwash Blower for Quartz Filter

1. General
1.1. Preferable make Make- Everest/ Vindi Vak/ PPI or equivalent.
1.2. Application Filtration backwash application
1.5. Pressure in Kg/cm2 0.5
1.6. Differential Pressure in Kg/cm2 0.5
1.7. RPM 1420
Page 85 of 245
Specification Sheet For Backwash Blower for Quartz Filter
1.9. Installation Indoor
1.11. Orientation of Flow Vertical
2.1. Type of Blower Twin lobe Blower
2.2. Type of cooling Air
2.3. Rotor Twin lobe
2.4. Coupling Love joy
2.6. Sound level Within 85 Decibel
2.7. Drive Vee belt driven
2.8. Direction of Rotation Clock wise as viewed pulley end
3.1. Main casing side (plate & Rotor) C.I .Gr. F.G. 200 : IS 210 (1993)
3.2. Shaft EN 19 (BS970:1995)
3.3. 20MnCr5/16MnCr5/BS970-3/AISI5120,Hardened
Gears
& Ground
3.4. Seals LIP seals
3.5. Bearing Anti-Friction
3.6. Base plate SS 316L
3.7. Motor and pulley- Guard FRP
4. Accessories Base frame, Safety valve, Bellows in SS 316L for
delivery line, Suction filter, Suction silencer,
Discharge silencer, non-return valve, Pressure
gauge in SS 316L, Anti- vibration pads, V- belt,
FRP belt guard, Drive and driven pulleys (or
coupling and FRP coupling guards), set of
special tools, Oil level indicator, Foundation and
base bolts in S.S316L, Interconnecting piping
with flanges and one set of spares like bearings,
filters etc.
Page 86 of 245
Specification Sheet of UF Membrane
Specification Sheet of UF Membrane

1.1. Preferable make Hyflux/ GE/ Ingae/ Qua or equivalent.
1.2. System Designation Ultra-Filtration System
1.3. Membrane Type Capillary Multipore
1.4. MOC PVDF/Modified PES/ Housing: UPVC
1.5. Membrane Specification IN to OUT, Gross Flux: 40LMH;
Recovery: 85%-90%, Hollow fibre
1.6. Membrane Accessories Permeate adapter, couplings, ‘O’ Rings
and gaskets
Static Mixer for UF

I General
1 Designation UF - static mixer
2 Location In door
Effluent treatment (HCL, Caustic and
3 Service
Sodium Hypo Chloride)
4 Working pressure 5.5 kg/cm2
5 Process description Dispersion
II Material of construction and specifications:
1 Elements MSFRP
2 Cartridge MSFRP
3 FRP lining thickness / side (mm) 5 mm
4 Total shell thickness / side (mm) 13 mm
5 End connections Flanged type
6 Element type Spiral type
Auto Backwash Filter
I GENERAL
1 System designation UF auto back washable filter
Page 87 of 245
2 Degree of filtration (microns) 50

3 Design pressure (kg/cm2) 10
4 Minimum operating pressure (kg/cm2) 2.5
5 Design temperature (deg.c) 50
6 Flange standard ANSI b16.5 # 150
Pressure drop allowed at 50% clog
7 0.5
conditions (kg/cm2)
Pressure drop in clean condition
8 ≤ 0.1
(kg/cm2)
9 Proferrable Make Amiad or equivalent
10 Location Outdoor
11 Drain valve 3/4"
12 Differential pressure switch set at 0.5 kg/cm2
direct pipe mounted vertical, bottom
13 Mounting arrangement
entry side exit
II Flushing
online with suction scanning
1 Method of cleaning
technology
5 Cleaning cycle activation dp/timer push button
6nos. of 1 ½” dia spring loaded
scanner nozzle s mounted on suction
6 Cleaning nozzle
scanner radially for cleaning the screen
element
III Material of construction
1 Body and lid SS316L
Non wet parts: lifting
2 SS316L
lugs,nuts,bolts,flanges,etc.
3 Gaskets Synthetic rubber
4 Strainer elements SS316L
5 Flushing valve diaphragm type Diaphragm natural rubber (wet part)
Gear Box, Backwash control switch
with panel arrangement, Drain valve,
Motor, ON/ OFF valve, Auto
IV Accessories
backwash arrangement with DP Switch
& auto valves arrangements for self-
cleaning.
UF Feed Pump
Page 88 of 245
1. General
1.1. Preferable pump make KSB/ Kishore/ Sulzer/ Grundfos/ Johnson/
Application
Mechanical seal
3. Preferable make of the Seal manufacturer
are Leak proof/ Burgmann/ Sanmar/ Eagle

FRP
Page 89 of 245
canopy.
F Backwash Pump

3. General
3.1. Preferable pump make KSB/ Kishore/ Sulzer/ Grundfos/ Johnson/
Application

Mechanical seal
6. Preferable make of the Seal manufacturer
are Leak proof/ Burgmann/ Sanmar/ Eagle

Page 90 of 245
FRP
canopy.
Specification Sheet of HCL Dosing Pump

1. General
1.1. Pump make Swelore/ Milton Roy/ Xeed or equivalent.
1.2. Application HCL (Concentration 33%)
1.3. Temperature Ambient
1.6. Maximum size of particles 2mm
1.7. Suction lift in m Included in delivery head
1.9. Horizontal mounting, Reciprocating type, Positive
Type of pump
displacement , Electro-mechanical Diaphragm pump
1.10. Coupling Love joy or suitable arrangement
1.11. Drive transmission Electric Motor
2.1. Liquid End (all wetted parts) PP
2.2. Valve & Valve seat PTFE- Teflon
2.3. Diaphragm PTFE- Teflon
2.4. Plunger CS
2.5. Packing Glandless Design
2.6. Pressure Relief Valve PP or equivalent
2.7. Base frame SS 316L
2.8. Accessories VFD for flow control, Motor and Standard Accessories
comprising of PRV, Pulsation dampener, Anti siphon
Page 91 of 245

valve, ‘Y’ type strainer, Base frame plate, Coupling,
FRP Coupling Guard, Foundation bolt, nut in SS 316L
and FRP motor canopy for the above pump.
Page 92 of 245
Specification Sheet of Caustic Dosing Pump

1. General
1.2. Application Caustic (Concentration 48 to 50 %)
Type of pump
2.1. Liquid End (all wetted parts) PP
2.4. Plunger CS
2.8. VFD for flow control, Motor and Standard Accessories
Accessories
comprising of PRV, Pulsation dampener, Anti siphon
valve, ‘Y’ type strainer, Base frame plate, Coupling,
FRP Coupling Guard, Foundation bolt, nut in SS 316L
and FRP motor canopy for the above pump.
Specification Sheet of Hypo Dosing Pump

1. General
Page 93 of 245
1.2. Application Sodium Hypo Chloride (Concentration 8 to 12%)
2.1. Horizontal mounting, Reciprocating type,
Type of pump
Positive displacement, Electro-mechanical
Diaphragm pump
3.1. Liquid End PP
3.4. Plunger CS
4. VFD for flow control, Motor and Standard
Accessories
Accessories comprising of PRV, Pulsation
dampener, Anti siphon valve, ‘Y’ type strainer, Base
frame plate, Coupling, FRP Coupling Guard,
Foundation bolt, nut in SS 316L and FRP motor
Specification Sheet of Air Compressor

1. General
Page 94 of 245
1.1. Preferable make ELGI / Ingersol Rand / Chicago Pneumatic
1.2. Application Filtration auto valve operation
1.3. Location Filtration Section
1.5. Working pressure 9 kgf/ cm2
1.6. Compressor RPM 690
1.8. Installation Indoor
1.10. Orientation of Flow Vertical
2.1. Drive Vee belt driven
2.2. Direction of Rotation Clock wise as viewed pulley end
2.3. Compressor stages Single
3. Accessories Auto drain valve, 1 set of FRL along with 1 set
of Air drier, Air Reservoir, refrigeration air
dryer, Pre- Filter, Fine Filter, Motor, Motor
Pulley, Fan, Pressure switch, Pressure gauge,
Starter, Air receiver, Ball Valve, Safety valve,
NRV assembly, Belt, Belt Guard, FRL
Specification for Sludge transfer pump (Screw pump)
1 General
Alpha Helical/ Roto/ UT / Hydro Prokav or
1.1 Pump make
equivalent.
1.2 Application Chemical & Bio Sludge
1.3 Location Out door
Page 95 of 245
1.4 Duty Continuous

1.5 Maximum size of particles 3 – 5 mm
1.6 Suction lift in mtr Included
2.1 Type of pump Horizontal type- Positive displacement screw pump
2.2 Impeller Screw type
2.3 Coupling Love joy
Following points to be considered while selecting
the Mechanical seal:
1. Suitable Mechanical seal to be selected with
reference to seal manufacturer since application of
the liquid is high salinity. If necessary seal cooling
and flushing arrangements to be considered.
2.5 Mechanical seal
Tungsten carbide, Silicon carbide and packing’s are
in Teflon/ PTFE.
Leak proof/ Burghmann/ Sanmar/ Eagle
poonawalle or equivalent.
3.1 Body Casing CF8M (SS 316L)
3.2 Rotor CF8M (SS 316L)
3.3 Stator EPDM
3.4 Stuffing box packing Mechanical seal
3.6 Motor and pulley guard FRP
Motor with VFD Drive, Dry run protection, Over
load tripping sensor, Base frame plate, Coupling,
4 Accessories
FRP Coupling Guard, foundation bolts in SS 316L
and FRP motor canopy
Reactor Clarifier
Page 96 of 245
Sl.No
1 General
1.1. Application For Lime Soda Softening
1.4. SOR considered 1 m3/m2/hr
1.5. Slurry generation considered 8%

Oil level indicator, Lubrication point,
2.1 Gear box accessories with easy accessible fittings to drain the
lubrication oil ,Lifting hook, Cooling fan
2.2 Central drive shaft MS pipe schedule 40 with FRP lining
3.1 MOC of all wetted parts SS 316L
MS with Epoxy coating 2 coat of Epoxy
3.2 MOC of all non-wetted parts coating and over one coat of Epoxy
primer
Super structure foundation bolt and
3.3 SS 316L
nuts
3.4 All fasteners SS 316L
Sampling pipes with ball valves
3.5 SS 316L
Flanged end- 4nos
3.6 Chemical dosing pipes CPVC
Feed inlet pipe flanged end from
3.7 FRP
sidewall to reaction well with
Lining for Turbine drive output shaft
3.8 flange and rake drive output FRP
shaft flange.
3.9 Guide material for centre drive shaft Teflon bush
Motor canopy and chain/belt/pulley FRP

3.10
guards
3.11 Turbine speed control through Variable Frequency Drive (VFD)
Page 97 of 245
Sl.No
3.12 Super Structure RCC Super Structure
Gear Box, Motor, Reactor drive
mechanism, Turbine drive mechanism,
Conical reaction chamber with support
from super structure including stiffeners
and baffles made of steel plate, Turbine
drive motor, rack drive with torque control
box, super structure, Adjustable over load
control with load indicator including cut
4 Accessories off switches and alarm horn in weather
proof enclosure, handrail with toe guard,
turbine with blades, turbine shaft, rack
shaft, lower guide bearings, reaction well,
FRP baffles, recirculation drum, rotating
drum, GI walk way gratings, inlet feed
pipe, over flow pipe, overflow launder,
adjustable FRP wears, rack arm with
blades.
Specification for Thickener Feed pump
1 General
1.1 Pump make KSB / Johnson / Sulzer
1.2 Application Chemical & Bio Sludge
1.4 Duty Continuous
1.5 Maximum size of particles 2 to 3 mm
2.1 Type of pump Horizontal back pullout centrifugal
2.2 Impeller Semi Open
2.3 Coupling Love joy, SW
Following points to be considered while selecting

2.4 Mechanical seal
the Mechanical seal:
Page 98 of 245
1. Suitable Mechanical seal to be selected with

reference to seal manufacturer since application of
the liquid is high salinity and acidic. If necessary
seal cooling and flushing arrangements to be
considered.
carbide, Silicon carbide, Carbon and packing’s are
in Teflon/ PTFE.
Leak proof/ Burghmann/ Sanmar/ Eagle
poonawalle or equivalent.
3.1 Casing CF8M (SS 316L)
3.2 Impeller CF8M (SS 316L)
3.3 Shaft CF8M (SS 316L)
3.4 Shaft sleeve CF8M (SS 316L)
3.5 Casing ring CF8M (SS 316L)
3.6 Impeller ring CF8M (SS 316L)
3.7 Stuffing box packing Mechanical seal
3.8 Base Frame SS 316L
Motor canopy and
3.9 FRP
Coupling Guard
Motor, Base frame plate, Coupling, FRP Coupling
4 Accessories Guard, foundation bolt & Nut are in SS 316L and
FRP motor canopy.
Specification for Lime dosing pump
1 General
1.1 Pump make Process Pumps
1.2 Application Lime
Page 99 of 245

1.4 Duty Continuous
1.5 Maximum size of particles 5mm
2.1 Type of pump Vertical Glandless pump
2.2 Impeller Open
3.1 Casing CF8M (SS 316L)
3.2 Impeller CF8M (SS 316L)
3.3 Shaft CF8M (SS 316L)
3.4 Shaft sleeve CF8M (SS 316L)
3.5 Casing ring CF8M (SS 316L)
3.6 Impeller ring CF8M (SS 316L)
3.7 Base Frame SS 316L
Motor canopy and
3.8 FRP
Coupling Guard
VFD for flow control, Dry run protection, Base
4 Accessories Frame, Motor and Standard Accessories,
foundation bolts in S.S 316Land FRP motor Guard.
Specification Sheet of CIP Pump for UF System

1. General
1.1. Preferable pump make KSB/ Kishore/Sulzer/Grundfos/ Johnson, Flow serve or
equivalent
1.2. Chemical mixed water
Application
Page 100 of 245

1.5. Maximum size of 2 to 3mm
particles

1.11. Following points to be considered while selecting the
Mechanical seal
Mechanical seal:
1. Suitable Mechanical seal to be selected with reference
to seal manufacturer since application of the liquid is
high salinity. If necessary seal cooling and flushing
carbide, Silicon carbide, Carbon and packings are in
Teflon/ PTFE.
3. Preferable make of the Seal manufacturer are Leak
proof/ Burgmann/ Sanmar/ Eagle Poonawalle or
equivalent.

2.3. Shaft SS 316L
2.4. Shaft sleeve SS 316L
2.6. Stuffing box packing Mechanical seal
2.8. Motor canopy and
FRP
coupling Guard
2.9. Accessories
Motor, Common base frame SS 316L, SS 316L
foundation bolts, Love joy coupling, SS 316L coupling
guard with SS 316L bolt and nuts, FRP motor canopy.
Specification Sheet of Hydro Chloric acid Dosing Pump
Page 101 of 245

Specification Sheet of Hydro Chloric acid Dosing Pump

1. General
1.1. Pump make Swelore/ Milton Roy/ Xeed or equivalent
1.2. Application HCL (Concentration 33%)
1.6. Maximum size of 2mm
particles
Type of pump
2.1. Liquid End PP
2.4. Plunger CS
2.8. VFD for flow control, Base Frame, Motor, Anti siphon
Accessories
valve, Pulsation dampener, SS 316L foundation bolt &
nut and Pressure relief valve.
Preferred Makes for Mechanical equipments
S. No. Description Preferable Make
1. Automated Coarse Bar Screen Huber / Headworks / Ekoton or equivalent
2. Grit Removal System Huber / Ekoton or equivalent
3. Odour Control System Liku Tech / Italprogetti or equivalent
Page 102 of 245

S. No. Description Preferable Make
Italprogetti / Huber/ Headworks / Ekoton or
Rotary Fine Drum Screen
4. equivalent
5. Submersible Pumps ABS/ Flygt/ Grundfos or equivalent
6. Flow Jet / Venture Jet Aerator ABS, Flygt or equivalent
7. Flow Maker / Flow Mixer Flygt / ABS or equivalent
OHR, Japan / Fine bubble diffuser : SSI / EDI /

Diffuser for Diffused Aeration System
8. SANITAIRE or equivalent
Turbo Blower for Diffused Aeration
Aerzen / Turbo MAX or equivalent
9. System
Andritz / Hydro Press / Adhithana Engineering
Filter Press for Bio & Chemical Sludge
10. corporation LLP or equivalent
Primary Clarifier, Secondary Clarifier, Eimco KCP Ltd / Dorr Oliver / Shiv Pad (Jash)
11. Reactor Clarifier & Thickener or equivalent
KSB/Sulzer / Grundfos / Flow serve / Johnson
Centrifugal Pump dry bed pumps
12. or equivalent
13. Dosing Pump Swelore/ Milton Roy or equivalent.
14. Air Compressor ELGI / Ingersol Rand / Chicago Pneumatic
15. Screw pump for sludge application Alpha Helical / Roto or equivalent.
Hyflux / GE/ Dow / Hydranautics (Flow bath -

Ultra-Filtration Membrane
16. Out to In with air scouring arrangement)
Horizontal Spilt case pump for diluted Flow serve / KSB / Kirloskar / KSB / Ebara or
17. wastewater discharge or equivalent
Page 103 of 245

SECTION 3. GENERAL ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Page 104 of 245

GENERAL ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
The Contractor shall supply the equipment and carry out the electrical services as per the
scope of work and specifications given in the foregoing paragraphs.
E.1 Power, control, lighting & earthing scheme
a) AC, 3 phase, 33 KV, 50 C/S power supply will be provided by the client in the 33 KV
substation of State DISCOM at the battery limit and the successful bidder shall tap this
power supply and further distribute the same at the required voltage by providing
required electrical equipments for powering the electrical drives /equipments/items of
his scope of work as well as for lighting of the plant.
b) The ON & OFF control of electrical equipments/drives shall be carried out either from
PMCC/MCC or from the local ON/OFF push button stations or from the
instrumentation panel cum control desk. Required interlocks shall be routed through
the PMCC/MCC for effective auto stop or start operations of electrical drives.
c) Lighting scheme for the plant shall be provided for all the rooms, outdoor located
equipments and roads, bye lanes & yard.
d) Earthing scheme shall be provided for the all the plant electrical equipments & shall
be with required number of earth pits with plate or pipe electrodes, copper flats of
required sizes for the transformer & DG set neutral and required sizes of GI flats/wires
for body earthing of all the electrical equipments/items
e) DG set shall be provided for standby powering of electrical equipments/drives during

EB power failure.
f) Client will be provided temporary power supply within the battery limit, during erection
& commissioning of electrical items / equipments. Contractor shall be arranged to
further work as required on their own cost also unit consumption charges & other
charges shall paid by respective contractor.
E.2 Scope of work

a) Design, manufacture, inspection & testing at works, supply at site, erection, final check-
up, painting, testing & commissioning of the electrical equipments as detailed in the list
of items/equipments and other items/equipments which are not listed but required for
the project from the point of view of operation & maintenance as well as fulfilling
statutory requirements of Electrical Inspectorate , DISCOM etc.,
b) Co-ordination with local statutory authorities, such as state DISCOM, Electrical

Inspectorate to State Government, etc for obtaining all the statutory approvals needed,
preparing, submitting and obtaining approval of all electrical drawings and documents
Page 105 of 245

as well as obtaining approval of the electrical installation from these authorities
obtaining safety certificates from state Electrical authorities, Test report / Revised test
reports from State DISCOM etc., Any defects / deviation / modification pointed in the
above said inspections, the same should be attended by the successful bidder without
any extra cost.
c) Preparation and submission of As-Built drawings on soft-copy installation, operation

and maintenance manuals of the equipments supplied along with their catalogues.
E.3 List of equipment/items

a) The list of main electrical equipment/ items to be supplied is given in Table 1.
Table 2: List of Main Electrical Equipment/Items to be Supplied
Sl.No Description
33 / 11 KV Substation structure with Isolators, Lightning Arrester, earthing system

1. and other electrical items / equipments, C.T / P.T metering set at State DISCOM Etc.,
2. 33 KV indoor / outdoor CTPT metering panel at consumer end.
33 & 11KV switchgear panel boards with VCBs, protective relays, metering and
3. annunciation systems and equipments / items
33 / 11 KV power transformer with OLTC, RTCC panel & 11 KV / 433 V power
4. transformer with OLTC, RTCC panel
5. LT Power Control Center
6. LT Bus duct
7. LT Power & Motor Control Center
8. LT distribution boards for power, lighting and ancillary/auxiliary units/systems
9. Local start / Stop Push Button station
10. LT power capacitor banks, detuned reactors with APFC board / panel
11. LT motors
Cabling system, comprising of HT & LT cables, glanding & termination kits/
12. accessories, cable trays with accessories.
Lighting system for internal & external (street/road, yard & outdoor erected
equipments) lighting of plant area comprising of distribution boards, lighting fixtures,
13. poles, switches, sockets, conduits, receptacles wires cables and other required
hardware necessary for complete lighting work, ceiling fan, exhaust fans, plug
sockets
Earthing system comprising of required no. of earth pit stations with pipe or plate
14. electrodes, earthing strips/flats of required sizes and lightning arrestor system with all
required materials/items & earth pits.
Page 106 of 245

Sl.No Description
Safety equipments comprising of fire extinguishers, fire buckets, safety charts, danger
15. boards/label, first aid box with medicines, electrical insulation rubber mats, safety
gloves, Earth trolley to be provided in HT /LT room, etc.
16. D.G. set with all associated items/equipment
Note
 The design, manufacture, testing at works and supply of above electrical equipments along with
their accessories / hardware shall conform to technical specification & other requirements listed
in the following pages and also to the norms & requirements of Indian Electricity Rules, Indian
Electricity Acts, State DISCOM, Relevant Indian Standards Specifications and IEC
specification.
 Items other than those mentioned above, but are required for the plant erection completion as
well as from the view of O&M and to satisfy the statutory bodies requirement shall also be
considered and provided by the successful bidder.
 If the distance between the Substation and the HT VCB panel in the Switch board room is more
than 25 meters, one number outdoor mounted HT VCB panel with all the required protective
relays and measuring instruments shall be supplied and installed just after the substation. The
24 V DC control supply shall be taken for trip / close circuit from battery bank to be located in
the PCC room.
E.4 System design parameters
The electrical equipment/items selected for this project shall be suitable for operation of technical
parameters specified in Table 2.
Table 3: Characteristics for Design of Electrical Equipment

Characteristics Value
Incoming power supply 33KV AC, 3Ph, 50 C/S
Plant power distribution voltage AC, 415 V, 3Ph, 4 wires, 50 Hertz
Lighting and space heating AC, 230 V, 1Ph, 2 wires
D-C alarm, control and protection 24 V, 2 wire, d-c
AC control AC, 230 V, 1Ph, 2 wires
Potential transformer secondaries AC, 110 V, 3Ph, 50 Hertz
Control transformer secondary AC, 110 V, 3Ph, 50 Hertz
Ambient temperature (Design) 50 deg. Centigrade
Page 107 of 245

Characteristics Value
System earthing Solidly earthed
Voltage variation (on the LT side) Plus, or minus 10% of rated voltage
Frequency variation (on the LT side) Plus, or minus 5% of rated frequency
Combined voltage and frequency variation Plus, or minus 10%
Fault level 350 MVA (33 KV) , 40 KA (415 V)
E.5 Technical specifications of electrical equipment
E.5.1 11 KV VCB Switchgear Panel Board with Circuit Breakers & associated
electrical equipment.
The manufacture and supply of 11 KV indoor switchgear panel board comprising of

HT panels for the control of transformer primary circuit) equipped with vacuum circuit
breakers and associated electrical equipments shall conform to the following
requirements. If distance between DP structure and 11 KV indoor VCB panel in the
switch board room near transformer is more than 25 metres, one number outdoor
mounted 630 Amps, 11 KV, VCB should be provided.
a) The operating mechanism shall be of conventional design for operation of very short
stroke required in vacuum interrupted. The mechanism shall be fitted with motorized
spring charged closing mechanism with manual release. Manual charging facilities shall
also be provided for the operation. Quick O-CO operation shall be possible. The closing
spring when charged shall be held by a latch which shall be released either by manual
means or by a solenoid to close the circuit breaker. During motor charging the spring
shall automatically get recharged immediately after a closing operation. The
mechanism shall be retained in the "ON" position (circuit breaker closed) by an over
toggle linkage and trip solenoid to open circuit breaker. These springs shall be
incorporated in the drive assembly and shall be fully encapsulated. The trip free
mechanism shall be suitable for repeated auto reclosing duty. The spring charging time
shall be less than ten seconds. The spring charging motor shall be in totally enclosed
construction.
b) Separate segregated compartment for potential transformer shall be provided. The

potential transformer connections shall be through moulded contacts. The potential
transformer shall be housed in a separate withdrawable truck arrangement. Automatic
shutter shall be provided to cover the live parts when potential transformer is withdrawn
outside the cubicle. The Potential transformer unit shall not be housed inside the
incomer VCB breaker unit.
Page 108 of 245

c) Adequate space for entry and termination of required number of 3 core XLPE cable
connections and mounting shall be considered in the cable chamber for terminations of
cables.
d) Separate trolley mounted earth switches (Fully rated) shall be provided. Indicators for
indication of live R, Y, B phases shall be provided to warn if the earth switch is in the
ON or OFF position, with the additional security that the design has been tested against
a full fault make of three seconds. Driving handle for drawing out / insertion of trolley
shall be provided in the earth switch trolley. Separate trolleys with earth switches (one
for cable end earthing and one for bus bars earthing) shall be provided.
e) Driving handle for drawing out / insertion of circuit breaker, rectifier unit for the spring
charging motor, power pack unit for tripping, CR surge suppressor and transport trolley
shall be provided in the breaker.
f) Circuit Breaker shall be provided with anti-pumping feature, breaker close / trip control
switch, local remote switch, local ON/OFF switch, operation counter, indication lamps
for CB on, CB off, trip circuit healthy, spring charged discharged condition and space
heater with toggle switch. In addition to above, the breaker shall be provided with
mechanical close / trip knob, mechanical ON/OFF indicator and mechanical spring
charged / free indicator.
g) Numerical Multifunction combined microprocessor relay shall be provided instead

static & electromagnetic relay.
h) The 11KV panel with VCB for controlling the transformer shall be equipped with
i instantaneous phase over current relay with IDMT characteristic for
phase faults & One instantaneous relay for ground/earth fault
ii Bucholz trip relay
iii Differential protection relay
iv Restricted Earth fault relay
v Relay for protection against unbalance current caused due to
unbalanced incoming voltage or caused due to any other fault in the
system
vi Relay for winding temp high trip
vii Relay for oil temp high trip
viii Auxiliary relays
ix Master trip relays and lockout relay.
x Alarm& Annunciators (1 set) for alarm & annunciation of all the faults
& trips
xi Digital Ammeter with selector switch & CTs
xii Under voltage relay.
xiii Other auxiliary and master trip relays and lockout relay.
xiv Voltmeter (0-15 KV, 144 sq.mm size) with selector switch
xv Ammeter (0-630 amps, 144 sq.mm size) with selector switch
xvi Digital microprocessor-based monitor for all electrical parameters like
kW, KVA, KWHr, frequency, pf, MD, voltage, current etc. to be
Page 109 of 245

provided. The MD meter shall be equipped additionally with the
required hardware & software for alarm & annunciation as well as
tripping of the breaker in case if the MD exceeds the set MD value.
i) Battery charger with required number of batteries (24VDC, 200Amp hour) for auxiliary
power required for close/trip coils and for relays & annunciation as well as control
circuits shall be supplied with the panel board and shall be loop wired with the above
systems.
j) Brief technical particulars of 33 KV & 11 KV switch gear panel is given in Table 3.1
& 3.2
Table 4: Technical Particulars of Outdoor 33 KV Switchgear Panel

1. Location Outdoor
2. Quantity 3 Nos.
3. Rated voltage, frequency and phase 33 KV, 50 Hz, 3 Phase
4. Incomer 1 No.
5. Outgoing 1 No.
6. Fault level 350 MVA
7. Reference design ambient temperature 50 Deg. C
8. Continuous current rating 1250 Amps
9. Bus bar material Aluminium
10. Bus bar insulation Fully insulated by encapsulation in epoxy
resin with mould caps protecting all
joints/ The Aluminium bus bars and
jumpers shall be covered by special heat
shrink insulating sleeves. The bolted
connection shall be covered by flexible
insulating shrouds and the bus bars
support shall be rigid enough for all
thermal and electrodynamics stresses
created out of three (3) second short time
current.
11. The construction of the VCB panel Metal clad using high-grade CRCA steel
Board to be provided with (minimum thickness of 2.5 mm)
12. Switchgear panel enclosure Dust and vermin proof, Corrosion proof
suitable tannery application
13. Degree of protection IP 55 (Kiosk)
Page 110 of 245

14. A screw type racking arrangement for Required
easy insertion and withdrawal of the
breaker to render perfect contact pressure
independent of operator force. A positive
interlock to ensure the circuit breaker
insertion to or withdrawal from SERVICE
position only when it is open.
15. Automatic safety shutters to cover the live Required

parts when circuit breaker is not in-
SERVICE position.
16. Independent safeties shutters for upper Required
and lower disconnect contact, each
independently pad
17. Pressure release flaps at the stop of the Required
panel at a suitable safe height.
18. Separate flaps in circuit breaker, bus bar, Required
cable compartment.
19. Foolproof interlocks as per IS / IEC. Required
20. Epoxy moulded stationery disconnect Required
contacts to provide effective segregation
between phases and phases to earth.
21. Fully segregated separate compartment Required
for low voltage devices like relays,
meters, control switches, indicating
lamps, in the top portion of the switch
gear panel & Separate fully segregated
compartments to house circuit breaker,
bus bar, cables, instruments, potential
transformers and current transformers in
33 KV SF6 switchgear panel board
22. The relays and meters to be Required
mounted in the hinged door.
23. Earthing bus Aluminium (50 mm x 6mm.)
24. Circuit breaker type SF6 Breaker
Circuit breaker operating mechanism Motorized spring charged closing
mechanism with manual release.
Manual charging facilities shall also be
provided for the operation
Rated normal current 1250 amps
Page 111 of 245

Rated short circuit making current 63 KA peaks
Circuit breaker phases 3
25. Auxiliary control voltage for
Closing / tripping coil 24 VDC
26. Spring charging motor 240 VAC
27. Potential transformer
Primary 33000/√3 V
Secondary 110/√3 V
Burden / phase 200 VA (minimum)
Accuracy class 1
Type Epoxy
Fuses (HRC) To be provided
28. Current transformer
Quantity Two sets (1 for measurement and other
one for protection)
Ratio --/5A & --/5 A
Burden 15 VA
Accuracy class 1 for metering & 5 P 10 for protection
Type Cast resin
Class of insulation E
29. Distinct service position for VCB circuit Required to be provided
breaker trolley
30. Test position with latching and locking Required to be provided
facilities for VCB circuit breaker trolley
31. The manufacture, testing and supply of IS 3427, IS 12729, IS 13118, IEC 298, IEC
33 KV switchgear to conform to 694, BS 5227.
Table 4: Technical Particulars of Indoor 11 KV Switchgear Panel

1. Location Indoor
2. Rated voltage, frequency and phase 11 KV, 50 Hz, 3 Phase
3. Incomer Refer SLD
4. Outgoing Refer SLD
5. Fault level 350 MVA
6. Reference design ambient temperature 50 Deg. C
Page 112 of 245

7. Continuous current rating of each V C B Refer SLD
8. Bus bar material Aluminium
9. Bus bar insulation Fully insulated by encapsulation in epoxy
resin with mould caps protecting all
joints/ The Aluminium bus bars and
jumpers shall be covered by special heat
shrink insulating sleeves. The bolted
connection shall be covered by flexible
insulating shrouds and the bus bars
support shall be rigid enough for all
thermal and electrodynamics stresses
created out of three (3) second short time
current.
10. Cable entries Suitable for 11 KV(UE) Suitable Core x
Suitable size XLPE aluminum conductor
cable
11. The construction of the VCB panel Metal clad using high-grade CRCA steel
Board to be provided with (minimum thickness of 2.5 mm)
12. Switchgear panel enclosure Dust and vermin proof.
13. Degree of protection IP 4X
14. A screw type racking arrangement for Required
easy insertion and withdrawal of the
breaker to render perfect contact pressure
independent of operator force. A positive
interlock to ensure the circuit breaker
insertion to or withdrawal from SERVICE
position only when it is open.
15. Automatic safety shutters to cover the live Required

parts when circuit breaker is not in-
SERVICE position.
16. Independent safeties shutters for upper Required
and lower disconnect contact, each
independently pad
17. Pressure release flaps at the stop of the Required
panel at a suitable safe height.
18. Separate flaps in circuit breaker, bus bar, Required
cable compartment.
19. Foolproof interlocks as per IS / IEC. Required
20. Epoxy moulded stationery disconnect Required
contacts to provide effective segregation
Page 113 of 245

between phases and phases to earth.
21. Fully segregated separate compartment Required
for low voltage devices like relays,
meters, control switches, indicating
lamps, in the top portion of the switch
gear panel & Separate fully segregated
compartments to house circuit breaker,
bus bar, cables, instruments, potential
transformers and current transformers in
11 KV VCB switchgear panel board
22. The relays and meters to be Required
mounted in the hinged door.
23. Earthing bus Aluminium (50 mm x 6mm.)
24. Circuit breaker type hermetically sealed vacuum interrupter
Circuit breaker operating mechanism Motorized spring charged closing
mechanism with manual release. Manual
charging facilities shall also be provided
for the operation
Rated normal current 630 amps
Rated short circuit making current 63 KA peak
Circuit breaker phases 3
25. Auxiliary control voltage for
Closing / tripping coil 24 VDC
26. Spring charging motor 240 VAC
27. Potential transformer
Primary 11000/√3 V
Secondary 110/√3 V
Burden / phase 200 VA (minimum)
Accuracy class 1
Type Epoxy
Fuses (HRC) To be provided
28. Current transformer
Quantity Two sets (1 for measurement and other
one for protection)
Ratio --/5A & 630/5 A
Burden 15 VA
Accuracy class 1 for metering & 5 P 10 for protection
Type Cast resin
Class of insulation E
29. Distinct service position for VCB circuit Required to be provided
breaker trolley
Page 114 of 245

30. Test position with latching and locking Required to be provided
facilities for VCB circuit breaker trolley
31. The manufacture, testing and supply of IS 3427, IS 12729, IS 13118, IEC 298, IEC
11 KV switchgear to conform to 694, BS 5227.
Note:
(1) Routine test as per IS indicated above shall be carried out at works before despatch of the
panel. Type test certificate conducted on similar type of panel with breaker shall be furnished
for approval before despatch.
E.5.2 Power Transformer
a) The manufacture and supply of the power transformer shall conform to the following
requirements and also satisfy the regulations of CEIG & local DISCOM authorities,
b) The transformer tank shall be made from high-grade plate steel, suitably reinforced by
means of stiffeners made of structural steel sections and equipped with detachable
radiators made from pressed steel,
c) The transformer core shall be constructed from high grade, non-ageing, cold-rolled,
grain oriented, silicon steel laminations coated with insulation varnish.
d) Current transformers for restricted earth fault protection and differential protection shall
be housed in the respective winding terminals of the transformer with secondary leads
brought out for remote connection with respective relays in the HT panel.
e) The transformer shall be suitable for parallel operation.
f) LT neutral earthing shall be brought out through 1.1 KV rated bushing both inside
the cable box for forming the 3 phase, 4 wire system and outside the cable box for
direct connection to earth by means of 50 x 6mm copper earthing conductor,
g) The rating of the transformer shall be carefully selected, keeping in view of the
anticipated maximum demand, connected load including lighting load, diversity factor,
inrush current of large capacity motors, pf the motors and system as 0.85, overload
factor for the transformer as per table 6, clause 3.4.7.2 of IS 6600 and loading of the
transformer not exceeding 80% capacity of the transformer rating. However, the
capacity of the transformer selected should not be less than three fourth of the capacity
of the connected load allowing the diversity factor, excluding lighting load,
h) Transformer shall be supplied complete with insulating oil required for first filling. Oil
soak pit should be constructed below ground level if oil quantity in the transformer
exceeds more than 2000 litres.
Page 115 of 245

E.5.3 On Load Tap Changer applicable for 5 MVA, 33 KV and 2.5 MVA,11 KV
transformer including RTCC panel.
a) The manufacture and supply of the On-Load Tap Changer shall conform to the
following requirements and also satisfy the regulations of state DISCOM authorities.
b) This shall be designed suitable for local manual as well as local electrical operation and
Remote electrical operation with provision for parallel operation.
c) On Load tap changer shall include the following
I. An oil immersed tap selector and arching switch or arc suppressing tap
selector, provided with reactor or resistor for reduction of make and break
arcing voltages and short circuits.,
II. Motor driven mechanism, Control and protection devices.
III. Local/Remote tap changer position indicator.
IV. Manual/Electrical operating device.
V. Voltage tapping range on H.V. side will be (+5%) to (-15%) insteps of
1.25%.
d) The on-load tap changer shall be designed so that the contacts do not interrupt arc within
the main tank of the transformer. The tap selector and arcing switch or arc suppressing
tap selector switch shall be located in one or more oil filled compartments, the
compartment shall be provided with oil surge relay. Those compartments shall be
designed so as to prevent the oil in tap selector compartments from mixing with the oil
in the transformer tank.
e) A suitable pressure relieving arrangement should be provided to take care of sudden

pressure rise in the compartment. But this should, in no way, affect the performance of
the Oil Surge relay provided for this compartment. Oil surge relay with trip float
arrangement shall be provided for OLTC compartment.
f) The tap changer shall be capable of permitting parallel operation with future
transformers of the same type as Master or Follower.
g) The manual operating device shall be so located on the transformer that it can be
operated by an operator standing at the level of the transformer track. It shall be strong
and robust in construction.
h) The control scheme for the tap changer shall be provided for independent control of the
tap changers when the transformers are in independent service. In addition, provision
shall be made so that under parallel operation the tap changer will give alarm and visual
indication for becoming out of step. Visual indication during the operation of motor
shall also be incorporated. The control scheme of the tap changer of the transformer to
run in parallel will be furnished, if required. The tap change control must ensure step
by step operation under all operating conditions.
Page 116 of 245

i) Necessary interlock blocking independent control when the units are in parallel shall be
provided.
j) Under parallel operation, as may occur if the contactor controlling one tap changer
sticks, the arrangement must be such as to switch off supply to the motor so that an out
of step condition is limited to one tap difference between the units.
k) Gear for the tap change driving motors shall be housed in a local kiosk mounted on the
transformer. The motors shall be suitable for operation with 3- phase 400 volts, 50 cycle
external power supply.
l) The OLTC should have been Type Tested.
E.5.4 Remote Tap Changer Control Panel
a) The supplier shall furnish, separate Remote Tap Changer Control (RTCC) panel to be
installed in Control Room for remote operation.
I. Raise and Lower Push Button Switch

II. Remote tap position indicator and other required devices. One chart showing
the voltage corresponding to tap position indicator shall be engraved on a metal
sheet and the same shall be fixed near the tap position indicator on the RTCC
(panel).
III. An indication lamp showing tap changing in a progress
IV. Master, Follower and Independent selecting switch and other accessories
required for complete operation of tap changer.
V. Name plate of each component
VI. Winding & Oil temperature (O degree – 150 degree) repeaters, to be connected
to winding and oil temperatures meters housed in the main Transformer
Marshalling Box at out door.
b) Complete particulars of the tap changing gear including the capacity of the motor shall
be provided. An under-voltage relay shall be incorporated to monitor the 110 Volt AC
control circuit voltage circuit supply. Similarly, audible and visual indication shall be
provided in RTCC panel.
c) Brief technical particulars and requirements of the power transformer are specified
below: Table 5
Page 117 of 245

Table 5: 33 / 11 KV power transformer, OLTC with RTCC Panel
Sr. Particular Requirement
no
1 Transformer Rating, 5 / 6.3 MVA Power transformer, AC, 33 KV/11 V, 50 Hz ,
Operating voltage, Dyn 11.
frequency, Vector group
2 Installation location Outdoor
3 Maximum operating temp 50 Deg C
(for Design purpose)
4 % impedance at principal 7.15
tap
5 Neutral Solidly earthed
6 Type of cooling ONAN / ONAF (Mineral oil filled)
7 Winding (Primary & Copper
Secondary)
8 Winding Connection on Delta
Primary
9 Winding Connection on Star
secondary
10 Type of tap changer Full capacity ON Load Tap Changer
11 Tap range & tap steps Voltage tapping range on H.V. side will be (+5%) to (-15%)
insteps of 1.25%.
12 HT terminal 36 KV Class, Porcelain bushing with plain sheds for
heavily polluted atmosphere.
13 LT terminal 12 KV Class Porcelain bushing with plain sheds for heavily
polluted atmosphere
14 Noise level and vibration To be maintained below the value specified in respective
level IS.
15 Temperature rise of oil and 50 deg C and 55 deg C respectively,
winding to be restricted to
16 Accessories & Fittings Steel tank, Core, Primary Windings, Secondary
Windings, On Load Tap changing mechanism, RTCC
panel, Inspection manhole, lifting lugs for transformer
and the core, two earthing terminals on opposite ends of
the transformer tank, name plate, rating plate, diagram
plate, detachable radiator banks complete with top and
Page 118 of 245

no
bottom shut-off valves, air release plug, drain valve,
thermometer pockets with thermometer & temp sensing
devices for measuring oil temperature, temperature
sensing element and a 150 mm diameter dial type top oil
temperature indicator with adjustable ungrounded
alarm/trip contacts, one grounding terminal for
connection of grounding conductor, Conservator
complete with filling plug, sump, drain valve, shut-off
valve on the pipe connection between transformer tank
and conservator, weather proof dehydrating breather with
activated alumina or silica gel as the dehydrating agent,
150 m diameter dial type Magnetic type oil level gauge
with low oil level alarm contact mounted on the
conservators, oil sampling device, gas detector relays
with separate alarm and trip contacts complete with shut-
off valves, explosion vent with diaphragm for relieving
pressure from the transformer, an equalizer pipe
connecting the pressure relief device to the transformer,
adequate number of air vent for relieving trapped air
during oil filling and during maintenance, waterproof/
dustproof terminals boxes for magnetic oil level gauge,
separately mounted waterproof dust-proof marshalling
box housing the oil temperature indicator and
marshalling facilities for electrical devices mounted on
transformer, four jacking pads for lifting the transformer
with jacks, wheel with accessories for clamping the
wheel mounted transformer to the foundation.
17 On Load Tap Changer Steel tank consisting of Fixed and moving contacts, motor
with RTCC panel drive mechanism, insulating oil, brake, Protective motor
switch, locking device prepared for padlock, Air vent,
Position indicator, Counter, Shaft for hand crank,
Emergency stop, Tap-change in progress indicator, Heater,
Thermostat, Terminal blocks, Raise/Lower switch,
Local/Remote switch, Door-operated switch for lamp, Hand
crank, Descriptions and circuit diagram
18 Tests to be carried out at Routine test to be carried out. Type test certificate to be
works furnished.
19 The manufacture, testing to IS 2026, IEC 76, BS 171, IS 2029, IS 3639 & latest
and supply of Power amendment.
Page 119 of 245

no
Transformer and
accessories to conform
Table 6: 11 / 0.433 KV Distribution transformer, OLTC with RTCC Panel

no
1 Transformer Rating, 2500 KVA Distribution Transformer, AC, 11 KV / 433 V,
Operating voltage, 50 Hz , Dyn 11
frequency, Vector group
2 Installation location Outdoor
3 Maximum operating temp 50 Deg C
(for Design purpose)
4 % impedance at principal 5
tap
5 Neutral Solidly earthed
6 Type of cooling ONAN (Mineral oil filled)
7 Winding (Primary & Copper
Secondary)
8 Winding Connection on Delta
Primary
9 Winding Connection on Star
secondary
10 Type of tap changer Full capacity ON Load Tap Changer
11 Tap range & tap steps ±5% to ±7.5% & 2.5 %
12 HT terminal Suitable to terminate 11 KV XLPE 3C x 300 sq.mm U.E.
aluminium conductor cable
13 LT terminal Suitable for LT bus duct
14 Noise level and vibration To be maintained below the value specified in respective IS.
level
15 Temperature rise of oil and 50 deg C and 55 deg C respectively,
winding to be restricted to
16 The insulation class Class A
Page 120 of 245

no
17 Accessories & Fittings Steel tank, Core, Primary Windings, Secondary
Windings, On Load Tap changing mechanism, RTCC
panel, Inspection manhole, lifting lugs for both the
transformer and the core, two earthing terminals on
opposite ends of the transformer tank, name plate, rating
plate, diagram plate, detachable radiator banks complete
with top and bottom shut-off valves, air release plug,
drain valve, thermometer pockets with thermometer &
temp sensing devices for measuring oil temperature,
temperature sensing element and a 150 mm diameter dial
type top oil temperature indicator with adjustable
ungrounded alarm/trip contacts, one grounding terminal
for connection of grounding conductor, Conservator
complete with filling plug, sump, drain valve, shut-off
valve on the pipe connection between transformer tank
and conservator, weather proof dehydrating breather with
activated alumina or silica gel as the dehydrating agent,
150 m diameter dial type Magnetic type oil level gauge
with low oil level alarm contact mounted on the
conservators, oil sampling device, gas detector relays
with separate alarm and trip contacts complete with shut-
off valves, explosion vent with diaphragm for relieving
pressure from the transformer, an equalizer pipe
connecting the pressure relief device to the transformer,
adequate number of air vent for relieving trapped air
during oil filling and during maintenance, waterproof/
dustproof terminals boxes for magnetic oil level gauge,
separately mounted waterproof dust-proof marshalling
box housing the oil temperature indicator and marshalling
facilities for electrical devices mounted on transformer,
four jacking pads for lifting the transformer with jacks,
wheel with accessories for clamping the wheel mounted
transformer to the foundation.
On Load Tap Changer Steel tank consisting of Fixed and moving contacts, motor
with RTCC panel drive mechanism, insulating oil, brake, Protective motor
switch, locking device prepared for padlock, Air vent,
Position indicator, Counter, Shaft for hand crank,
Emergency stop, Tap-change in progress indicator, Heater,
Thermostat, Terminal blocks, Raise/Lower switch,
Local/Remote switch, Door-operated switch for lamp, Hand
crank, Descriptions and circuit diagram
Page 121 of 245

no
18 Tests to be carried out at Routine test to be carried out. Type test certificate to be
works furnished.
19 The manufacture, testing to IS 2026, IEC 76, BS 171, IS 2029, IS 3639 & latest
and supply of Power amendment
Transformer and
accessories to conform
E.5.5 Power Control Centre

The manufacture & supply of Power Control Centre shall conform to the following
requirements.
Table 7: Power cum Motor Control Centre

Location: Indoor,
Normal system voltage: AC, 415V, TPN
System frequency: 50 Hz ±5%,
1. Principal Parameter Ambient temperature: 50 Deg C,
Maximum operating temp: 80 Deg C,
Short circuit current rating for one sec: 40kA (RMS),
Dynamic Rating :102 KA (peak)
Type: Cubical, Free standing, floor mounting, dust &
vermin proof,
Power control center Bus duct: Top entry,
2.
panel Cable entry: Bottom,
Extendable: on both sides,
Degree of protection: IP 52
Incomer feeder:
(a) Suitable ratings of 4 Pole EDO type ACB with
microprocessor based Numeric protective relays & CTs.
3. Feeder arrangement
(b) Maximum Demand Controller, Protective relay for
under/over voltage protection
(c) Electronic type multifunction meter with necessary
Page 122 of 245

measuring CTs to read Voltage, Frequency, Current, KW,
KVA, Maximum Demand in KVA, RKVA, KWhr,
KVAhr, RKVAhr., P.F in the incoming feeder of PCC
panel with necessary HRC fuse back up and metering
CTs. etc.,
Outgoing feeders:
Suitable amps 3 pole, EDO type ACBs / MCCB with
Accessories: Numeric protective relay for earth fault &
under/over voltage, Electronic type multifunction meter
with necessary measuring CTs to read voltage,
Frequency, Current, KW, KVA, Maximum Demand in
KVA, RKVA, KWhr, KVAhr, RKVAhr., P.F in the
outgoing feeder of PCC panel with necessary HRC fuse
back up and metering CTs etc.,
Empty compartment without switchgear for future
provisions– 2 Nos.
Both incomers shall be interlocked mechanically as well

as electrically
Doors: 1.6 mm CRCA sheet,
Partition Sheets: 1.6 mm CRCA sheet,
Frame: 1.6 mm CRCA sheet,
4. Panel Construction
Gland plate (Removable):2.5 mm CRCA sheet,
Concealed type of hinges and captive screws All doors,
Type: Single front / Back door bolted
MOC: Aluminium (Tinned Alloy coated)
Continuous current rating of bus bars: Same size of
incomer breakers of PCC rating.,
5. Bus bar Entire panel of bus bar bus bar should be same size.
(Main bus bar, horizontal & Vertical),
Extendable bus bar provision in ends.
Earthing bus bar: Aluminium (50mm x 10mm) – Both
Page 123 of 245

ends
Numeric relay with CTs Over current relay, Earth fault relay, Under voltage relay,
6.
for protection Over voltage relay
Electronic type multifunction meter with necessary
measuring CTs to read Voltage, Frequency, Current,
KW, KVA, Maximum Demand in KVA, RKVA, KWhr,
7. Measuring Instruments
KVAhr, RKVAhr., P.F in the incoming feeder of PCC
panel with necessary HRC fuse back up and metering
CTs
Ammeter with selector switch & CTs (3 way & OFF),
Voltmeter (0-500 Volts) with selector switch (6 way)
(RY, YB, BR, RN,YN,BN), Breaker control switch,
Local / Remote Selector switch, LED indication lamps
Instruments &
8. for Phase (Red, Yellow & Blue), LED indication lamps
Accessories
for Phase (Breaker ON, OFF, TRIP, Fault indication
lamps), Illuminating lamps with door switches, Heater &
Heater switches with thermostat, Mechanical operation
counter
The minimum operating height to be 300 mm
Maximum operating height to be 1900 mm.
9. Operating Size
Total height to be 2250 mm (max)
Min 50 mm high channel base frames to the PCC
Interior shall be glossy white colour
10. Finishing Exterior shall be RAL 7032 Siemens Grey colour or
suggestion of client
Field Test report, Type test certificate conducted shall be
furnished for approval before despatch, Routine test as
11. Test report
per IS indicated above shall be carried out at works
before despatch of the panel.
Panel GA drawing, Schematic drawing, Bill of Material,
12. Drawing & Document
O & M Manual
Page 124 of 245

Bus Bar Sizing
13. To be submitted for approval before fabrication of panel
calculation
5.5.1 Feeder modules requirement in PCC

While designing the PCC for the plant the following details as detailed in table- 8 which are
the minimum requirement shall be considered by the bidder and any other feeder modules
required over & above the said requirement shall be considered by the bidder
Table- 8
S. No Feeder module for Qty required Type Remark
1 Incomer no.1 1 (one) ACB, 4 Pole PI refer clause 5.3.1(a)
controlled for details.
2 Incomer no.2 (DG set) 1 (one) ACB, 4 Pole PI refer clause 5.3.1(a)
3 Bus coupler 1 (one) ACB, 4 Pole PI refer clause 5.3.1(a)
4 PMCC Panel 1 (one) each ACB / PI refer clause 5.3.1(a)
MCCB, 3 Pole for details.
controlled
5.5.1 Incomer Feeder and Bus Coupler Modules/Panels (Draw out type) Detail
1) Two incomers and one bus coupler shall be considered in the PCC. Both incomers and
bus coupler shall be interlocked mechanically as well as electrically to achieve at a time
the following condition
a) Incomer No. 1 ON, Bus coupler ON and incomer No. 2 OFF.

b) Bus coupler ON, incomer No. 2 ON and incomer No. 1 OFF.
c) Bus coupler OFF, incomer No. 2 ON and incomer No. 1 ON.
2) The incomer feeder module shall have the following features:
a) Motorized operated spring charged ACB unit (4 Pole, 415 VAC),

b) Digital multifunction meter with RS 485
c) Digital Voltmeter
d) Digital Ammeter with CTs and selector switch.
e) On/Off / Trip/ Spring charging/ Trip circuit healthy indication lamps
Page 125 of 245

f) R, Y, B indication lamps.
g) Breaker Control Switch / Local /Remote selector switch
h) Emergency pushbutton
i) Shunt coil & closing coil
j) Bus bars (RYB) extended down from the incomers for connection of incoming cables
without any problem
k) Microprocessor based numeric Protective relays for overload protection on all the
three phases, earth fault protection on all the three phases, under voltage relay, reverse
power protection, restricted earth fault, aux relays for Master trip relays etc.
l) Bus coupler unit shall have motorized operated spring charged ACB (having the
rating of the incomer ACB) without any protective relays as well as metering but with
all other items mentioned.
m) The current rating of the ACB provided in the incomer panel shall be equivalent to
the total sum of the current (Amps) of the total operating load of the plant including
power, lighting, auxiliary/utility loads and spares loads of the Plant.
n) All Air circuit breaker shall be of EDO type with microprocessor based protective
relays & CTs.
o) All Air circuit breaker shall be suitable for Harsh environmental. (Reference from L
& T electrical standard Products catalogue for C Power HE ACB for Harsh
environment.) The equivalent specification shall be meet in other reputed brands.
p) Multifunction Meter shall have Modbus output, LCD display, Class 1 Accuracy &
read Parameter of Voltage (L-L & L-N), Current (Line & Phase), Frequency, Power
factor, Run Hour, Phase Angle, Interrupts, Total Harmonics Distortion, Neural
Current.
q) The incoming feeder of PCC panel’s ACB/ MCCB microprocessor & Multifunction
Meter shall be connected with PLC/SCADA system through MODBUS
communication along with necessary software to view data & control the incomer.
3) Draw out type ACB / Fixed type MCCB controlled feeder modules shall be fed from this
PMCC. This ACB / MCCB controlled feeder module shall be equipped with
a. Motorized operated spring charged ACB unit (3 P, 415 VAC) or Motorized
Fixed type MCCB unit (3 P, 415 VAC)
b. Digital multifunction meter with RS 485
c. Digital Voltmeter
d. Digital Ammeter with CTs and selector switch.
e. On/Off / Trip/ Spring charging/ Trip circuit healthy indication lamps
f. R, Y, B indication lamps.
g. Breaker Control Switch / Local /Remote selector switch
h. Emergency pushbutton
i. Shunt coil & closing coil
Page 126 of 245

j. Bus bars (RYB) extended down from the incomers for connection of incoming
cables without any problem Bus bars (RYB) extended down from the incomers
for connection of incoming cables without any problem.
k. The current rating of the ACB shall be equivalent to the total sum of the current
(Amps) of the total operating load including power, lightening etc, spares loads
& auxiliary/utility loads of the respective plants.
l. All Air circuit breaker shall be of EDO type with microprocessor based
protective relays & CTs.
m. All Air circuit breaker shall be suitable for Harsh environmental. (Reference
from L & T electrical standard Products catalogue for C Power HE ACB for
Harsh environment.) The equivalent specification shall be meet in other reputed
brands.
n. Multifunction Meter shall have Modbus output, LCD display, Class 1 Accuracy
& read Parameter of Voltage (L-L & L-N), Current (Line & Phase), Frequency,
Power factor, Run Hour, Phase Angle, Interrupts, Total Harmonics Distortion,
Neural Current.
o. The outgoing feeder of PCC panel’s ACB/ MCCB microprocessor &

Multifunction Meter shall be connected with PLC/SCADA system through
MODBUS communication along with necessary software to view data & control
the incomer.
E.5.5.A. Power & Motor Control Centre
The manufacture & supply of Power & Motor Control shall conform to the requirements as
detailed in Table- 9
Table 9: Technical Particulars of Power & Motor Control Centre
Sl.No Description Requirement

1 System Voltage
1.1 Power supply 415 V AC ±10 %, 3 Phase, 4 Wire, 50 HZ
±5%c
1.2 AC Control Supply 110 V AC
1.3 DC Control Supply 24 V DC
1.4 Ambient temperature for design 50ºC
1.5 Maximum temperature of bus bars
(Aluminium), droppers (Aluminium) 80ºC
and contacts at continuous current
Page 127 of 245

rating under site reference under site
reference ambient temperature
1.5 Short circuit withstand for bus bars (a) Short time (1 sec) at 415 V
and droppers
40 KA (rms)
(b) Dynamic Rating:102 KA (peak)
2 Incoming Supply Refer SLD Drawings.
3 Panel type PMCC will be free standing,
compartmentalized, Dust & vermin Proof
3.1 Panel Access Single / Double front panel access depends on
site condition.
3.2 IP Protection Degree of Protection Shall be provided IP42
with louvers for greater than 1600 Amps and
IP 52 for less than 1600 Amps
3.3 Operating Height Operating height shall be provided between
300 mm to 1900 mm, Panel total height: 2250
mm.
4 Cable Entry Cable entry from Bottom
5 Fabrication
5.1 Main Frame, Doors, Load Bearing 1.6 mm thickness CRCA Sheet
Members
5.2 Mounting plate 1.6 mm thickness CRCA Sheet
5.3 Gland Plate 2.0 mm thickness CRCA Sheet
5.4 Base frame 1.6 mm thickness CRCA Sheet
5.5 Stiffener 900 mm & Above doors
5.6 Gasket Neoprene Moulded endless Rubber gasket for
Joints & doors
6 Painting
6.1 Pretreatment The CRCA sheet steel panel enclosure
components shall be pre-treated with 7 tank
Process, (i.e.., Decreasing, derusting,
Phosphating, Passivation before the application
of Powder Coat.
6.2 Paint Shade The CRCA sheet steel panel enclosure
components shall be painted with Electrostatic
powder coat of minimum or not less than 80
Micron of all panel -RAL 7032 (Light Grey)
6.3 Base frame & Partition plate Exterior & Interior - Black
7 Busbar
7.1 Busbar type Electrolyte Grade of Tinned coated
Aluminium, Horizontal & Vertical busbar shall
be the panel incomer rating.
7.2 Busbar Current Carrying Capacity
Page 128 of 245

7.3 Rating Refer SLD & BOQ Drawings.
7.4 Busbar clearance Minimum busbar clearance shall be as per the
IS standards
7.4.1 Phase to Phase Minimum 25.4 mm
7.4.2 Phase to Neutral Minimum 25.4 mm
7.4.3 Phase to Earth Minimum 19 mm
7.4.4 Neutral to Earth Minimum 23 mm
7.5 Control Busbar 25 x 6 mm Tinned coated Aluminium bus bar
for entire panel
7.6 Busbar Color Coding Red, Yellow, Blue, Black & Green heat
Shrinkable PVC sleeve.
7.7 Busbar Support Grip / Conical Type support with Polyamide,
PA 66 / SMC /DMC
8 Control Wiring Control wiring shall be carried out with 1100
Volts Grade, PVC insulated multi standard
copper flexible cable ISI wire of the following
Colour standard.
8.1 AC Power Circuit 1.5 Sq.mm Red, Yellow, Blue, Black & Green
8.2 CT & PT Circuit 2.5 Sq.mm Red, Yellow, Blue, Black & Green
8.3 AC Control Circuit
8.3.1 Phase Control Wiring 1.5 Sq.mm Red wire
8.3.2 Neutral Control Wiring 1.5 Sq.mm Black wire
8.4 DC Control Circuit
8.4.1 Positive Control Wiring 1.5 Sq.mm Blue wire
8.4.2 Negative Control Wiring 1.5 Sq.mm White wire
8.4.3 PLC I/O Wiring 1.5 Sq.mm wire
8.5 Earth wire All hinged door shall be earthed through 2.5
Sq.mm Green with Yellow Strip wire.
8.6 Power Circuit
8.6.1 Feeder rating up to 37 KW Power circuit wiring with Red, Yellow, Blue,
Black wire
8.6.2 Feeder rating above 37 KW Busbar with Red, Yellow, Blue, Black wire
9 Wire Ferrule Each wire with printed Alpha Numeric

ferrules.
10 Name Plate Black Letters engraved on white Traffolyte
ABS double colour plate.
11 Door Lock Keyless Lock with PVC finger shall be
provided.
12 Lifting hooks Eye Bolt type
13 Terminal
13.1 Power Screw type terminal for up to 9.3 KW & Stud
type terminal for Above 11 KW
Page 129 of 245

13.2 Control Control Terminals (Plug in Type - Screw Less)
14 Indication Lamp LED indication shall be provided with the
following Colour standard.
14.1 Phase indication lamp Red, Yellow, Blue Colour
14.2 "ON" Indication Green Colour
14.2 "OFF" Indication Red Colour
14.2 "TRIP" Indication Amber Colour
14.2 "Spring Charging" Indication Yellow Colour
15 Digital Multifunction Meter LCD display, Accuracy Class: 1.0,
Input voltage: 50-550 V AC,
Aux Supply: 90-300 VAC / DC,
CT Operated, Flush mounting, CT/ PT site
programmable,
4 Parameters display
15.2 Reading Voltage (V), Current (I), Frequency (HZ), Kilo
Watt (KW), Kilo Watt Hour (KWH), Power
factor (PF), KVA, RKVA, KWHr, RKVAhr
for all Phase.
15.3 Output RS 485 / Modbus
16 Feeder standard Fuse Protected Selection with Type 2 Co-
Ordination as Per IS /IEC 60947-4-1
17 Space heater Space heater with Thermostat, 230 V AC in
cable chamber.
18 Illumination Light Illumination light, 230 V AC in cable chamber.
19 Panel extension Both side extension facility
20 Panel Louvers Fixed type, Slotted Louvers with SS Fine mesh
21 Protective cover Polycarbonate Sheet shall be provided for
Incoming & outgoing terminals of SFU,
MCCB
22 Protective cover Polycarbonate Sheet shall be provided for
vertical Busbar
5.5.A.1 Incomers Feeders Modules / Panels (Draw out type) Detail

(I) One incomer in the PMCC is to be considered. The incomer feeder module shall have the
following features:
a. Motorized operated spring charged ACB unit (3 P, 415 VAC) or Motorized Fixed
type MCCB unit (3 P, 415 VAC)
b. Digital multifunction meter with RS 485
c. Digital Voltmeter
d. Digital Ammeter with CTs and selector switch.
e. On/Off / Trip/ Spring charging/ Trip circuit healthy indication lamps
f. R, Y, B indication lamps.
Page 130 of 245

g. Breaker Control Switch / Local /Remote selector switch
h. ON / OFF (Emergency) pushbutton
i. Shunt coil & closing coil
j. Bus bars (RYB) extended down from the incomers for connection of incoming
cables without any problem.
k. Microprocessor based combined Protective relays for overload protection on all the
three phases, earth fault protection on all the three phases, under voltage relay,
Master trip relays etc.
l. The current rating of the ACB provided in the incomer panel shall be equivalent to
the total sum of the current (Amps) of the total operating load of the plant including
power, lightening, auxiliary / utility loads and spares loads.
5.5.2 Outgoing Feeder Modules Details
1) The outgoing motor starter feeder modules (Non-draw out type) shall be any of the
following depending upon the requirement of control:
a. DOL starter
b. Auto Star – delta starter
c. VFD / Soft starters
a. The DOL contactor starter module shall be considered for control of motors rated up to
and including 5.5 KW /7.5 HP and shall be equipped with:
a) Main Load Break Switch (TPN)
b) HRC fuses for power circuit
c) Double Pole MCB for control circuit
d) Power contactors as required
e) 4 Nos. of Auxiliary contactors for ON / OFF / Trip / heathy feedback as required
a) Overload relay / Electronic type overload relay with single phasing preventer,
reverse rotation preventer and motor winding temperature sensing relay
f) Start, Emergency stop Pushbutton
g) On, off and trip indication
h) Local Push button station
i) Digital Ammeter (direct operated or 3 CTs Operated) with selector switch
j) Digital hour meter
k) Separate indicating lamps for submersible type equipment to indicate motor high
winding temperature, seal failure, Oil in motor chamber, reverse rotation etc,
l) Power and control circuit wiring and termination accessories
b. The automatic Star Delta (ASD) contactor starter module shall be considered for control
of motors of rated from 10 HP and up to 50 HP & shall be equipped with:
a) Main Load Break Switch (TPN)

b) HRC Fuses for power circuit and DP MCB for control circuit
c) Power contactors as required
d) 4 Nos. of Auxiliary contactors for ON / OFF / Trip / heathy feedback as required.
e) Overload Relay / Electronic type overload relay with single phasing preventer,
reverse rotation preventer and motor winding temperature sensing relay
f) Start, Emergency stop Pushbutton
g) On, off and trip indication
h) Digital Ammeter with 3 CTS
Page 131 of 245
i) Digital hour meter
j) Separate indicating lamps for submersible type equipment to indicate motor high
winding temperature, seal failure, Oil in motor chamber, reverse rotation etc,
k) Power and control circuit wiring and termination accessories
l) Electronic timer with relays
c. The Variable frequency drive module shall be considered for control of motors of rated
above 50 HP & shall be equipped with
a) Main Load Break Switch (TPN) / Moulded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB)
b) HRC fuses for power circuit and DP MCB for control circuit
c) Power and auxiliary contactors as required
d) Start, Emergency stop and reset PB with potentiometer for speed control.
e) On, off and trip indication
f) Digital Multifunction meter with CTS and selector switch
g) Power and control circuit wiring and termination accessories
h) Input / Output choke.
d. Soft starter with bypass contactor shall be considered for control of flow maker / flow
mixer for smooth operation.
2) Module size (Minimum requirement): As per manufacturer’s standards and also

confirming to the requirement of State DISCOM.
3) Quantity requirement of motor starter feeder modules:
a) 10% spare motor feeder modules on each rating of motors over & above the normal
working quantity requirement of the Plant electrical drives shall be considered.
b) 1 No. switch fuse unit module of rating 100 Amps over & above the plant requirement
such as MLDB, MPDB, Outdoor plant lighting DB etc.
c) 1 No. switch fuse unit modules of rating 63 Amps over & above the plant requirement
such as Instrument panel cum control desk, UPS, Battery charger panel etc.
4) The rating of the electrical items / components in the DOL/Star Delta / VFD motor feeder
modules shall conform to recommendation of the panel manufacturer with due regard
given to derating conditions and operational factors. However minimum requirement of
the rating of the main contacts of the power contactors shall be 16Amps & that of the
Aux contactor shall be 5Amps.
5) DOL starter modules shall be considered for motors up to & including 7.5HP, ASD starter
modules shall be considered for motors of rating 10 HP & above and up to & including
50HP, VFD modules shall be considered for motors of rating above 50 HP.
6) SFU/FSU controlled modules shall be considered for Main LDB, Main PDB,
Ancillary/utility equipments like EOT crane, Clarifier switch board, Filter press unit,
Page 132 of 245

Ventilation system, Battery charger unit, UPS, Instrumentation panel cum control desk
etc requiring electrical power for their operation/control & shall be equipped with suitable
rated TPN SFU/FSU
7) Feeder module equipped with TPN SFU/FSU unit, TPN power contactor, Timer, A/M
selector switch, Auxiliary contactor and other required electrical equipments required for
power and timer-controlled lighting scheme for street/road/outdoor section.
5.5.5 Bus bars.
The specification of busbars shall conform to details mentioned in the following table.
Sr.
Particular Requirement
No
Bus bar material for both Horizontal run Aluminium. (Both vertical and
a
&Vertical droppers horizontal shall be of same size)
b Bus bas sleeving Required
The current rating of the both the horizontal
c Same as that of the incomer
and vertical bus bars
d Bus bar joints Bolted type & to be insulated
In busbars chambers located in the top
e Location of the horizontal busbars
of PMCC/MCC
The Temperature rise of the horizontal and In no case exceed 55 deg. C with silver
vertical bus bars and main bus link including plated joints and 40 Deg. C with all
f
all power contacts when carrying 80% of the other types of joints over an ambient
rated current along the full run to be of 50 deg. C.
5.5.6 Contactor Type Motor Starter

a) Motor starter contactors shall be of the full voltages, star/delta or direct-on-line as the
case may be and also all break single throw, electromagnetic type suitable for motor.
Three pole contactors shall be furnished for 3 phase motors and two pole contactors
shall be furnished for single-phase motors. Reversing contactors shall be provided with
electrical interlocks between forward and reverse contactors.
b) Contactors shall be suitable for uninterrupted duty as defined in IS: 2959. Contactor for
reversing motors shall be rated for class AC 4 duty in accordance with IS 2959. All other
contactors shall be rated for class AC 3 duty.
Page 133 of 245

c) Main contacts of the contactors shall be silver faced.
d) Insulation class of coils shall be class B.
e) Required number of auxiliary contactors shall be considered. Auxiliary contactors shall

be rated for 10A with 4NO + 4NC.
f) Contactors shall be provided with a three element, positive acting, ambient temperature
compensated, time lagged, hand reset type of thermal overload relay with adjustable
settings. Relays shall be either direct connected or CT operated the setting range shall be
properly selected in accordance with the rating of motor selected.
g) The power contactors shall be rated for 125% of feeder full load current. Minimum shall
not be less than 16A. All power contactors shall be provided with at least two pairs of
NO and NC auxiliary contacts as spare in addition to the required number of contacts.
5.5.7 Air Circuit Breakers
a) Air circuit breakers shall be 3 pole air break type and shall be of the vertical isolating
pattern with horizontal draw out facilities. These shall be power operated by a motor
operator spring charging type of mechanism. The tripping spring shall be charged by
the closing acting, to enable quick tripping. Closing of the circuit breaker shall
automatically initiate recharging of the springs to enable the mechanism to be ready for
the next closing stroke. Charging time for the springs shall not exceed 30 seconds. It
shall be possible to manually charge the springs in an emergency. Transfer from motor
to manual charging shall automatically disconnect the charging motor. The charging
mechanism shall be provided with mechanical indicators to show charged and
discharged conditions of the spring. Failure of any spring, vibration or mechanical
shock shall not cause tripping or closing of the circuit breaker.
b) Means shall be provided to manually open and close the breakers slowly when the
operating power is not available, for maintenance and adjustments.
c) All operating mechanisms shall be provided with ON-OFF mechanical indicators in

addition to ON, OFF electrical indications.
d) A local manual trip device shall be provided on the operating mechanism.
e) Closing coils and other auxiliary devices shall operate satisfactorily at all voltages
between 80 - 110% of the rated control voltage. Trip coils and associated trip relays
shall operate satisfactorily between 50 - 110% of the rated control voltage.
f) The rated breaking capacity of the ACB shall not be less than 35 MVA and the short
circuit withstand current for one second duration shall not be less than 40 KA.
Page 134 of 245

g) All Air circuit breaker shall be of EDO type with microprocessor based protective
relays & CTs.
h) All Air circuit breaker shall be suitable for Harsh environmental. (Reference from L &
T electrical standard Products catalogue for C Power HE ACB for Harsh environment.)
The equivalent specification shall be provided in other reputed brands.
i) The ACB microprocessor shall be connected with PLC/SCADA system through

MODBUS communication along with necessary software to view data & control the
incomer.
5.5.8 Switch and Fuse
The specification of this item shall conform to details mentioned in the following table.
Sr.no Particulars Requirement

Low voltage air-break, load break, fault make, group
operated, heavy duty, quick make and quick break type.
(With silver plated switch contacts and stainless-steel
contact springs for use on three phase system, triple pole
1 Switch type with fuses for phases and a link for neutral wire. For
use on single phase system and d-c systems, the switches
shall be of the two-pole type. Switches for controlling
motor circuits shall be capable of breaking locked rotor
current of the associated motor.
Mechanical ON-
2 Required to be provided on the switches
OFF indication.
Low voltage
switches and
To comply with the requirements of IS 4064 & Fuses shall
3 composite units
comply with the requirements of IS 2208.
of switches and
fuses
Low voltage Interlocks so that the fuses are not accessible unless the
composite units switch is in fully open condition &it is not possible to
of switches and close the switch when the fuse cover is open, but an
4 fuses to be authorized person may override the interlock and operate
provided with the switch. After such an operation the cover shall be
prevented from closing if the switch is left in the ON
position.
5 Type of all fuses. HRC DIN Type fuse with size
Page 135 of 245

Sr.no Particulars Requirement
Fuses to be
6 Visible indicators to show that they have operated
provided with
SFU with SFU shall be suitable for Harsh environmental.
standing for (Reference from L & T electrical standard Products
7
Harsh catalogue for Harsh environment.) The equivalent
Environment specification shall be provided in other reputed brands.
Current Vs time
To be furnished for the approval of the
8 characteristics of
Consultant/Engineer.
fuses
5.5.9 Current Transformers

a) Current transformers for high voltage equipment shall be of the resin cast type.
b) No multi-ratio current transformers are acceptable.
c) Identification labels shall be fitted giving type, ratio, rating, output and serial numbers
d) Magnetization characteristics, calculated performance and protection settings shall be

provided by the contractor.
e) Metering CT's shall have an accuracy class of 1.0 whereas protection CT's shall have an
accuracy class 1.5
f) The VA burdens for metering and protection CT's shall be 15 VA each respectively. It
shall be suitable for digital protective & metering device.
5.5.10 Relays
a) All relays shall be enclosed in rectangular shaped, dustproof cases & all relays shall be
suitable for flush mounting, with only the dust tight covers projecting from the front of
the panel.
b) All relays shall be accessible for setting and resetting from the front. Access to setting
devices shall be possible only after the front covers of the relays are removed. Resetting
facilities shall however be accessible external to the relay case & all relays shall be
provided with positive action flag indicators visible from the front.
c) Auxiliary relays shall be rated to operate satisfactorily between 70% and 110% of the
rated voltage. Tripping relays shall be rated to operate satisfactorily between 50% and
110% of the rated voltage.
Page 136 of 245

d) Electronic type overload relay with single phasing preventer, reverse rotation preventer
and motor winding temperature sensing relay for submersible type equipment starters.
5.5.11 Control and Selector Switches

a) Control and selector switches shall be of the rotary type, having enclosed contacts, which
are accessible by removal of the cover.
b) Control and selector switches for instruments shall be flush mounted on the front of the
panels Local/Remote selector switches shall be located on modules.
c) All control switches shall be of the spring return to normal type. Circuit breaker control
switches on switchgear cubicles shall be lockable in the trip position & Control switches
shall have momentary contacts.
d) Selector switches shall be of the stay-put maintained contact type.
e) Control switches shall be provided with pistol grip handles. Selector switches shall be
provided with round, knurled handles. All handles shall be black in colour.
5.5.12 Indication Instruments and Meter
a) Indicating instruments & meter shall be LED / LCD display, digital type & calibrated at
site.
b) Indicating instruments shall be mounted flush on the panels with only flanges projecting
outside the panel.
c) CT / PT shall be site programmable and CT secondary shall be site selectable.
d) Instruments shall have an accuracy of class 1.0 or better.
e) Viewing of multifunction shall be scroll mode.

f) Constant viewing (4 parameter / 1 Parameter) shall be provided as required.
g) PCC / PMCC panel Multifunction Meter shall have Modbus output, LCD display, Class
1 Accuracy & read Parameter of Voltage (L-L & L-N), Current (Line & Phase),
Frequency, Power factor, Run Hour, Phase Angle, Interrupts, Total Harmonics
Distortion, Neural Current.
Page 137 of 245

5.5.13 Indicating Lamps
a) Indicating lamps shall be of the LED type only.
b) Separate indicating lamps for submersible type equipment to indicate motor high winding
temperature, seal failure, Oil in motor chamber, reverse rotation etc,
5.5.14 Push Buttons
a) Start and stop push buttons shall be coloured green and red respectively. All other push
buttons shall be of black colour.
b) All push buttons shall be of the push to actuate the contact type.
c) Emergency stop push buttons without key type shall be stay put actuated type, “Press” to
“lock”, “Turn” to “Release” mush room headed, Red colour, auxiliary contact. Push
button knobs for emergency stop-push buttons shall be recessed to prevent accidental
operation.
d) Emergency stop push buttons with key type shall be provided only for particular
requirement.
5.5.15 Space Heaters
a) Adequately rated anti-condensation strip type space heater with thermostat rated for
operation on a 240 V single phase, 50 Hz AC system shall be provided, one for each
vertical cubicle of PMCC/MCC.
b) Each space heater shall be complete with on & OFF switch and with HRC fuse in the
phase and link in the neutral and thermostat to control space heater ON and OFF
depending upon the temperature setting.
5.5.16 Cubicle Lighting

Each PMCC cubicle cable alley shall be provided with suitable interior lighting
controlled by 6 amps SPN MCB.
5.5.17 Safety Shutters (applicable for draw out design)
a) MCC cubicles shall be provided with safety shutters operated automatically by the
movement of the carriage, to cover the stationary isolated contacts where they are
withdrawn. Module padlocking facilities shall be provided for locking the shutters
positively in the closed position. It shall however be possible to open the shutters
intentionally against the spring pressure for testing purposes.
Page 138 of 245

b) LT incoming and starter modules shall be provided with laminated insulating sheet
partitions to cover the stationary contacts when the module is withdrawn.
5.5.18 Starter module alignment (applicable for drawn out design)
The moving portions shall be fitted with positive guides so as to ensure correct with
alignment of the isolating contacts in both circuit or earth positions.
5.5.19 Contacts
The contacts shall be made of silver faced copper. The contacts shall be adjustable for
wear and tear, and shall be easily replaceable.
5.5.20 Test Operation Facilities (applicable for draw out portion)
All starter modules shall be provided with testing facilities to test the operation of the
starter components. A separate test position shall be provided in the cubicle/ module.
5.5.21 Wiring for Control & Protective Circuits
a) All wiring for control, protective, alarm and indication circuits on all equipments shall be
carried out with at least 650V grade, PVC insulated, stranded tinned copper, 1.5 sq.mm
conductors. Wiring for CT circuits shall be carried out wiring 2.5 sq.mm conductors.
b) Power & Control wiring shall be tri insulated type panel wiring & industrial type.
c) All wiring shall be run on the sides of the panels and shall be neatly bunched and cheated
with affecting access to equipment mounted on the panel.
d) All wiring shall be taken to terminal blocks without joints or tees in their runs.
e) Instrument transformer Red, Yellow or Blue determined by the phase with which the wire
is associated.
f) Engraved core identification ferrules, marked to correspond with the wiring diagram shall
be fitted to each wire and each core of multicore cables terminated on the panels. Ferrules
shall fit tightly on the wires, without falling off when the wire is removed. Ferrules shall
be of yellow colour with black lettering.
g) All wires forming part of a tripping circuit shall be provided with an additional red ferrule
marked "T". Each wire shall be identified by a letter to denote its function followed by a
number to denote its identify, at both ends. Unused cores of multicore cables shall be
provided with ferrules at both ends and connected to spare terminals.
Page 139 of 245

h) Spare auxiliary contact of electrical equipment shall be wired to terminal blocks.
5.5.22 Control Wiring Terminal Blocks
a) Terminal blocks shall be of the 650 V grade, Clip-on type.

b) Screw type Terminal blocks shall be provided up to 9.3 KW & stud type terminal block
(CST) above 11 KW feeder.
c) Terminals shall be numbered for identification and grouped according to function.
d) Terminals for circuits with voltage exceeding 125 V shall be shrouded. Terminal blocks
at different voltages shall be segregated into groups and distinctively labelled.
e) Current transformer secondary leads shall be brought to terminals blocks, where a facility
shall be provided for short circuiting and grounding the secondary.
f) Terminals blocks shall be arranged with at least 100 mm clearance between any two sets.
g) Separate terminals stems shall be provided for internal and external wiring respectively.
h) All wiring shall be terminated on terminal blocks, using crimping type of lugs.
5.5.23 Test Terminal Blocks
a) Test terminal blocks shall be provided for secondary injection and testing of relay
equipment. A suitable metering block shall be provided where specified for the
connection of a portable precision instrument to be operated when required for specific
plant testing purposes.
b) The terminal blocks shall be provided with suitable shorting links or alternatively shall
be of the type suitable for use with a portable test plug-in arrangement.
5.5.24 Erection, Inspection & Testing
1. The PMCC shall be offered for inspection after assembly and the tests (routine &
acceptance) indicated below shall be carried out
a) Routine test on the component of the MCC

b) High voltage test on the power circuit and on the control circuit
Page 140 of 245

2. The following routine and acceptance tests shall be carried out on the MCC during final
inspection.
a) Measurement of resistance of the main circuit

b) Operation tests
c) One-minute power - frequency voltage dry withstands tests on auxiliary and power
circuits.
3. Among other tests on switchgear and components, the following routine tests shall be
carried out on assembled switchgear during final inspection.
a) One-minute power - frequency voltage dry withstand test on the main circuits.
b) One-minute power frequency voltage dry withstand test on the auxiliary circuits.
5.5.25 Motor Control Center (MCC)
The technical particulars and specification details mentioned for PMCC are applicable
for MCC also. The incomer shall be provided with load break TPN SFU/FSU with
suitable rated CT operated ammeter with selector switch, Voltmeter with selector switch
and R, Y, B indication lamps for knowing the availability of power supply in the incomer
cable, KW & KWHr meter
5.5.26 Feeder modules requirement in PMCC
While designing the PMCC for the plant the following which are the minimum
requirement of the plant shall be considered by the bidder and any other feeder modules
required over & above the said requirement shall be considered by the bidder.
Sino Feeder module for Qty required Type

1 Incomer no.1 1(one) ACB controlled
ACB MCCB
2 APFC with capacitor bank 1(one)
controlled
SFU/FSU
3 Main LDB & Main PDB 1(one) each
controlled
SFU/FSU
4 LDB for Street/Road/Outdoor lighting 1(one)
controlled
Page 141 of 245

Sino Feeder module for Qty required Type
Motor starter feeder modules for control of
5 As required DOL
motors of rating up to and including 7.5 H.P
6 motors of rating above 7.5H.P and up to & As required Auto Star-Delta
including 50 H.P
7 As required VFD
motors of rating above 50 H.P
Other ancillary/utility loads like EOT crane,
One each for each SFU/FSU
Battery charger, UPS, Clarifier switch
8 ancillary /utility
board, Filter press unit. ventilation system, controlled
equipments
Instrumentation panel & control desk, etc
MCC for other units in Pretreatment plant for SFU/FSU
9 which power supply could not considered 1(one)
from PMCC controlled
DOL, ASD, FSU,

10 Spare feeder modules As required
SFU
5.5.27 Orientation of PCC / MCC Panel:

(a) Clear space around panels when draw out / door open condition shall be minimum 1.0
m.
(b) Space between 2 panels facing opposite direction shall be minimum 2 meter when
draw out / door open conditions.
5.6 Applicable Standards

The contractor shall follow latest Indian Standards or International standard. Refer respective
equipment for applicable standards.
S. No Equipment Standard
IS - 2516, 8828/ BS - 5311, 4752/ IEC
1. Circuit breakers
- 65, 157
Air break switches air break disconnectors air
break switch disconnectors and fuse
2.
combination units for voltage not exceeding IS-4064/BS-5419/ IEC.408
1000 V AC or 1200 V DC
3. Current transformer IS-2705/BS-3998/ IEC-44, 186
4. Voltage transformer IS-3156/BS-3941/ IEC-44, 186
5. Electrical Relays IS-3231, 3842
Page 142 of 245

S. No Equipment Standard
Contractors for voltage not exceeding 1000 V
6. IS-2959, 8544/ BS-5424/IEC-158
AC or 1200 V DC
7. Control switches IS-6875/BS-4794/ IEC-377
8. High voltage fuse IS-9385/BS-2692/ IEC-282
9. Low voltage fuse IS-9224/BS-1362/ IEC-269
10. Electrical direct acting indicating instruments IS-1248/BS-89/ IEC-51
11. A.C. electricity meters of induction type IS-722, 8530/BS-5685 IEC-145, 211
Porcelain post insulators for system with
12. IS-2544
nominal voltages greater than 1000 volts
Resistance wire, tapes and strips for heating
13. IS-3725
elements
14. A.C. electricity meters of induction type IS-722, 8530/BS-5685/ IEC-145, 211
Porcelain post insulators for system with
15. IS-2544
nominal voltages greater than 1000 volts
Resistance wire, tapes and strips for heating
16. IS-3725
elements
Wrought aluminum and aluminum alloy bars,
17.
rods tubes and sections for electrical purposes IS-5082
18. Toggle switches IS-3452/BS-3676
Metal enclosed switch gear and control gear for
19. voltage above 1000V, but not exceeding
IS-3427/BS-162
11000V
General requirement for switchgear and control
20.
gear for voltage not exceeding 1000 volts IS-4237/BS-5486/ IEC-439
Degree of protection provided by enclosures for
21. IS-2747/IEC-144
low voltage switchgear and control gear
Dimensions for panel mounted indicating and
22. IS-2419
recording electrical instruments
Marketing and arrangement for switchgear, bus
23.
bars, main connection and auxiliary wiring IS-375
Code of practice for selection, installations and
24. IS-10118
maintenance of fuses
25. Insulating mat for Electrical purpose IS-15652
26. IE Rules Indian Electricity Rules 1956
27. IE Act Indian Electricity Act 2003
E.5.7 HT and LT Cables

The manufacture and supply of cables shall conform to the following.
5.7.1 HT Cables
Page 143 of 245

a) HT cables shall be unearthed aluminium conductor, XLPE, armoured power cable of
size Core x Suitable size be considered for interconnection between HT equipments.
5.7.2 LT Cables (XLPE Insulated Heavy Duty)
5.7.3 General requirement
a) Cables shall be capable of operating satisfactorily under a power supply system voltage
variation of +/- 10%, a frequency variation +/- 5% and a combined voltage and frequency
variation of +/- 10%.
b) Cables shall normally be laid under the following conditions
i. In air - Ambient temperature of 50C
ii. In ground - Ground temperature of 40C

iii. In conduits - 120C cm/watt
iv. In conduits - Space factor of not more than 60%
v. In trays - Single layer, touching each other
c) The conductor temperature when carrying rated current and under short cut condition for
1100V XLPE insulated cables shall be 70C and 160C respectively.
d) Current ratings of PVC cables shall be arrived on the basis of the circuits being protected
by class p fuses contactor with a setting not exceeding 1.5 times and rated current for
installation in air, and not exceeding 1.3 times the rated current for installation in ground.
e) The manufacture, supply & testing of cables shall conform to IS1554 latest revision
f) Cables for power circuits shall be of copper conductors with a minimum size of 4 sq.mm.
g) Cables for power circuits shall be of Aluminium conductors with a minimum size of 6
sq.mm.
g) Cables for control circuits shall be of stranded copper conductors with a minimum size
of 1.5 sq.mm. Copper conductor cables shall be designated by the absence of the letter
indicating the aluminium conductor.
Page 144 of 245

5.7.4 Rating
The Contractor shall ensure that the current rating of each cable selected is adequate for
its duty under both normal and possible fault conditions. In accessing the rating and
cross section required for each cable the following factors should be considered.
a) Fault level and duration as governed by circuit protection relays and fuse gear.
b) Conditions of ambient temperature and method of installation.
c) Voltage drop under steady state and transient conditions from MCC panel to Individual
equipments. (allowed voltage drop + 5% of the supply voltage 415V)
d) Voltage drop under steady state and transient conditions from PCC panel to MCC Panel.
(allowed voltage drop + 2.5% of the supply voltage 415V)
e) Loading under steady state and transient conditions.
f) Disposition of cables whether in air or laid in ground in groups or otherwise.
g) Cable capacity should be one and half times of starting current of the motor.
5.7.5 Sizes of the control cables form MCC to local start/stop PB stations
(i) 5 Core x 1.5 Sq.mm. ywy cables (for local start / stop PB station (Without ammeter).
(ii) Suitable no. of core, 1.5 mm ywy cable for controlling submersible type equipment.
5.7.6 Size of the lighting cable from LDB/Panel to Lighting circuit

3C 2.5 Sq.mm. copper conductor for each circuit from respective DPMCB of the
LDB/Panel (each single-phase lighting circuit shall have a total of 1000 watts max. only)
and for outdoor lighting suitable size of aluminium conductor cable shall be provided as
per requirement.
Note
1) The routine & acceptance tests as per relevant IS shall be carried out at the
manufacturer’s works:
5.7.7 Applicable Standards

a) PVC insulated cables heavy duty : IS: 1554
b) Cross linked polyethylene insulated

PVC sheathed cables : IS: 7098
c) For cables : IEC540/304/141
5.7.8 Cabling system for complete Plant

The cabling system shall cover the design as per relevant national/international standards.
It shall be the responsibility of the contractor to work out a detailed layout for the
Page 145 of 245

complete plant cable system. The layout drawing shall be furnished for the approval
before commencement of installation including cable trays, cable racks, accessories, tray
supports, conduit etc.
5.7.9 Cable layout

The following points shall be noted while planning cabling system for the Plant
a) Inside the building cables shall be laid in cable trays in built up RCC cable trench.
b) Outside the building also the cable from the PMCC to the drives and other electrical
equipments shall be laid in buried underground.
5.7.10 Cable trays, Accessories and tray supports
a) Installation work shall comprise installation of G.I. cable trays and vertical raceways
{perforated mild steel (2.5 mm thick) with formed flanges & hot dip galvanized to 100
microns thickness} as per approved layout drawings. All steel sections such as angles,
channels, brackets, & GI coupler plate. GI elbows, GI dropouts, GI tees, GI bends etc
required for supporting the trays shall be hot dip galvanized (100-micron thickness)
b) The Contractor shall also include earthing of cable trays at distances not exceeding 10 m
length by means of 25 x 3 mm GI flat. Nuts, both & washers are also of GI (100-micron
thickness).
c) FRP cable tray shall be provided for entire plant , chemical storage area, chemical dosing
system & heavily polluted area.
S. No Item description Specifications
1. Purpose Electrical/Instrument Cable Laying
2. Make Sintex / Kemrock or equivalent

3. Type Ladder
4. Size As per site requirement
5. Material of construction FRP
6. Length of each cable tray As manufacturer standards
7. Height of the Channel for Runner 100mm
8. Cable tray Width As per site requirement

9. Thickness of the Channel 4mm
Rung Size 25 X 3mm Sq. Pipe
10.
Page 146 of 245

11. Rung Spacing 300mm
12. Deflection Test Certificate As per NEMA FG1.1994

Resin: Glass Fiber Ratio 40: 60
13.
Cable tray fixing arrangements:
14. Coupler Plate Material FRP
15. Coupler Plate Width 75mm
16. Thickness of Coupler Plate 3mm
17. Painting Colour L.Grey
18. Material for Nuts/Bolts/Washer SS 316
5.7.11 Conduits, pipes and ducts
a) The Contractor shall supply and install G.I. conduits as per requirement. All
accessories/fittings required for making the installation complete, including but not
limited to, ordinary and inspection tees or galvanized steel bushings, male and female
reducers and enlarges, wooden plugs, caps, square headed male plugs, nipples, gland
sealing fittings, junction boxes, pull boxes, conduits, outlet boxes, splice boxes, terminal
boxes, glands, gaskets and box covers, saddles and all steel supporting work shall be
supplied by the contractor. Conduit fittings shall be of the same material as the conduits.
b) Flexible metallic conduits shall be used for termination of connections to equipment such
as motors or other electrical equipment to be disconnected at periodic intervals.
c) When one or more cables are laid through a conduit, conduit size shall be such that the
total cross-sectional area of the cable does not exceed 60% of the internal cross-sectional
area of the conduit.
d) All bends and sets shall be formed in the conduit itself. The radius of bends shall not be
less than that given in Indian Electricity Regulations / relevant Indian Standards.
5.7.12 Installation of cables

a) The Contractor shall lay, test and commission the cables specified in the technical
specification in accordance with approved drawings and instructions issued by the client.
Contractor's scope of work includes shifting from store to site, unloading, laying, fixing,
jointing, bending, and glanding & terminating of the cables. The Contractor shall also
supply the necessary materials and equipment required for jointing and terminating of the
cables.
b) Civil work such as excavation, laying of sand and bricks on cables laid, closing the
excavation, making earthing pit chambers, foundation and pedestal for electrical
Page 147 of 245
equipments, grouting of cable tray supports in walls, making entry for cable conduits
in walls and making good the surface to original one, embedding concealed conduits,
junction boxes etc. in wall, ceiling and making good the surface, foundation for RCC
street lighting poles, providing covers, chequered plates on cable trenches etc.
c) Sharp bending and kinking of cables shall be avoided. The bending radii for various types
of cables shall not be less than those specified below:
650 / 1100 V XLPE : 10 times the overall dia of the cable.

insulated cables
d) Power and control cables shall be laid in separate cable racks / trays. H.T and L.T cables
should be laid in separate cable trench. Metallic H.T and L.T cable route markers shall
be provided wherever necessary.
e) Where groups of LV power and control cables are to be laid along the same route, suitable
barriers to segregate them physically shall be employed.
f) When power cables are laid in the proximity of communication cables, minimum
horizontal and vertical separation between power and communication cables shall be
normally 600 mm, but in any case, not less than 460 mm for single core cables and 300
mm for multicore cables. Power and communication cables shall be far as possible, cross
at right angles to each other.
g) Where cables cross roads and water, oil, gas or sewage pipes, the cables shall be laid in
reinforced spun concrete or steel pipes. For road crossings the pipe for the cable shall be
buried at not less than one-meter depth.
h) In each cable run some extra length (minimum of 1mtr at both ends) shall be kept.
i) Control cable terminations shall be made in accordance with wiring diagrams, using
colour codes established by the Client / Consultant for the various control circuits, by
code marked wiring diagrams.
j) Metal sheath and armour of the cable shall be bonded to the earthing system of the station.
The size of conductor for bonding shall be appropriate with the system fault current.
k) All new cables shall be megger tested before laying and termination. After laying and
termination are completed all L.V. Cables shall be megger tested. 1100 / 650 Volt grade
cables shall be tested by 1000-volt megger.
l) Cable cores shall be tested for
Page 148 of 245

 Continuity,
 Absence of cross phasing,
 Insulation resistance to earth,
 Insulation resistance between conductors.
r) Contractor shall furnish all testing kit and instruments required for field testing.
5.7.13 Power and control cable terminations
a) Suitable double compression type cable glands shall be provided for LV/MV power,
lighting and control cables.
b) Raychem / Safe kit/equivalent make heat shrinkable /push on type cable termination kits
shall be used for glanding and termination of HT cable.
E.5.8 LT Motors
Manufacture and supply of LT motors shall conform to the following requirements.
5.8.1 Design requirements
The motors shall conform to IS: 325, BS 296, BS 170, BS 3979, BS 4999 and BS 5000
as applicable. Additionally, the specific requirements mentioned in the following clauses
shall also be met with.
5.8.2 Performance and characteristics
Motors shall be capable of giving rated output without reduction in the expected life span
when operated continuously under the following supply conditions
 Variation in supply voltage +/- 10%

 Variation in supply frequency +/- 5%
 Combined voltage and frequency variation +/- 10%
 Ambient Temperature 50C
5.8.3 Insulation
a) The insulation shall be given tropical and fungicidal treatment for successful operation
of the motor in hot, humid and tropical climate.
Page 149 of 245

b) The motors shall be provided with Class F insulation with temperature rise limited to that
of class B insulation.
5.8.4 Enclosure
Enclosures for indoor & outdoor use shall be with a degree of mechanical protection not
less than IP 55 to IS 2147 and totally enclosed fan cooled and cooling standards shall be
IC.41 in each case. For outdoor use the motors shall be provided with rain hood to prevent
direct rain water from falling on them. Totally enclosed motors shall be provided with
suitable means of breathing and drainage to prevent accumulation of condensate.
5.8.5 Other requirements
a) Motors shall be suitable for starting and accelerating the load with the applicable method
of starting, without exceeding acceptable winding temperatures, when the supply voltage
is 80% of rated motor voltage.
b) The locked rotor current of the motor shall not exceed 600% of full load current (subject
to tolerance as per the applicable standard).
c) Motors shall be designed to withstand 120% of rated speed for two minutes without any
mechanical damage, in either direction of rotation.
d) Two independent earthing points shall be provided on opposite sides of the motor, for
bolted connections. These earthing points shall be in addition to earthing stud provided
in the terminal box.
e) The features of the motor are given in below tale
Sl. No Description Specification

TEFC, SQ Cage, Induction, energy efficient IE2
1. Type of motor
/ IE3, Class “F” insulation
2. Rated Voltage 415 v AC ± 10%, 3 Phase
3. Rated Frequency 50 HZ ± 5%
4. Supply system fault level 16 MVA
5. Supply neutral Solidly Earthed
6. Type of duty S1 (Continuous)
7. Type of cooling Air (Fan cooled)
Operating Ambient
8. 50 deg C (max) and 5 deg C (min)
Temp
Page 150 of 245

9. Winding Insulation class Class F
10. Environment Tropical
Enclosures for indoor & outdoor use shall be
with a degree of mechanical protection not less
than IP 55 to IS 2147 and totally enclosed fan
cooled and cooling standards shall be IC.41 in
each case. For outdoor use the motors shall be
11. Motor Enclosure
provided with rain hood to prevent direct rain
water from falling on them. Totally enclosed
motors shall be provided with suitable means of
breathing and drainage to prevent accumulation
of condensate.
DOL/Auto Star – Delta/Auto transformer /
12. Starting method
variable frequency drive
(i) DOL Starter for motor rating up to and
including of 5.5 kW
(ii) Star - Delta Starter for motor rating above 5.5
kW and including of 37 kW
13. Starting method (iii) VFD / SS for motor rating above and
including of 37 kW
(iv) VFD / Soft starter shall be provided based on
process operation requirements in case of below
motor rating of 37 kW
Starting current Starting current shall be considered for IE 2 /
14.
restriction IE 3 Efficiency Motor.
For motor rated 22 KW and above (separate
15. Space heater
terminal box shall be provided for space heater).
Weather proof construction designed for outdoor
service & to eliminate entry of dust and water,
16. Terminal Box gaskets of neoprene or approved equivalent shall
be provided at cover joints and between box and
motor frame. It shall be suitable for bottom entry
Page 151 of 245

of cables. It shall be capable of being turned
through 360 degrees in steps of 90 degrees. The
terminals shall be of the stud type with necessary
plain washers, spring washers and check-nuts.
They shall be designed for the current carrying
capacity and shall ensure ample phase to phase
and phase to ground clearances. Separate
terminal boxes shall be provided for Stator Leads
& Space Heaters.
1. Below 200 W shall be 240V
2. 200 W to 300KW shall be 415V
General Motor rating
17. 3. Motors above 300 KW and up to 2000 KW
philosophy
shall be 6.6 KV.
4. Motors above 2000 KW shall be 11 KV.
E.5.9 Local ON/OFF Push Button Stations

Local ON / OFF push button stations shall be installed near each drive for on and off
operations of the respective drives locally. Manufacture and supply of shall conform
to the following.
a) Constructed in dust and vermin proof as well as Corrosion / weather-proof
enclosure [Theromplastic) & with a degree of protection not less than IP65,
suitable for mounting on wall or steel structures.
b) Provided with inscription plates of rear engraved Perspex with white letters on
black background. The letter size shall be 6 mm.
c) Provided with two earthing terminals suitable for 12 SWG G.I. wire.
d) Provided with removable undrilled gland plate and cable glands for two Nos. 5C
x 1.5 Sq.mm copper conductor. PVC insulated armoured cable. The cable entry
shall be from the bottom.
e) Provided with Start/Stop push buttons of momentary contact push to actuate type
and all the push buttons shall be fitted with two normally open and two normally
closed contacts rated to carry and break 6 Amps at 415 Volts. The contacts of the
push buttons shall be wired to a terminal board. No of terminals shall be min 7
and rated 6 Amps 415 VAC.
f) Provided with integral escutcheon plates marked with its function.
1. Make HANSU / FLP / Equivalent
Page 152 of 245

IP 65, dust, vermin and weatherproof suitable for
2. Degree of protection
outdoor installation without any canopy.
Material of Thermoplastic suitable for harsh environmental
3.
Construction depends on site condition.
Epoxy powder Coated 60 Micron, Light grey
4. Finishing
shade 631 as per IS5
3/4" Cable Bottom, it should be Suitable for 5
5. Cable Entry Core x 1.5 Sq.mm Copper armoured aluminium

XLPE cable
All external hardware’s used will be Stainless
6. Hardware
Steel
Earthing is provided on both sides of the
enclosures by 5mm screw with two plain washers
7. Earthing
and spring washer of brass 1 No. in inside & 2
Nos in Outside shall be provided
Each P.B. Station will be provided with
nameplate giving equipment description, Name
8. Name plate
plate shall be non- corrosive and clear marking,
fixed by rivet / Screwed.
9. Gasket Endless gasket, Moulded Neoprene
10. "Start" Push button Green in Colour, 1 NO +1NC. Contacts

Red in Colour, Type shall be Stay put Mushroom
11. "Stop" Push button head actuator, Press to Lock, Turn “to Release,
1 NO + 1NC Contacts
Clip on Terminal blocks suitable for Din tail
Mounting
12. Terminal block
Spare 2 Nos. shall be Provided
Make: Connect well / Elemex
13. Wiring Copper, 1.5 Sq.mm Pre-wiring
14. Mounting Suitable for Wall/ Structure
15. Test Report Routine test
Page 153 of 245

E.5.10 33 KV switchyard with Associated Electrical Equipment
a) The supply of 33 KV switch yard includes structure with ISMC support with concrete
foundation, Isolator with operating down pipe with suitable guide, handle and lock,
lightning arrester, bimetallic clamps, porcelain insulator, bushings, stay wire, etc.
b) The substation yard shall be uniformly levelled and spread with 38 mm blue granite
jelly to a depth of 15 cms over a layer of sand and fencing shall be provided for the
substation up to a height of 1.8 m with suitable gate and lock.
c) The supply and erection of Substation with associated electrical equipments shall
confirm to rules and regulations as well as safety requirements of state DISCOM
authorities.
d) The 33KV gang operated disconnecting switches shall have isolator with copper blade
suitable for 33 KV, 1250 Amps, 350 MVA, triple pole, gang operated three insulator
stock per pole, titling type, double break per phase, air break isolating suitable for
operation 3 phase, 50 c/s, 33KV AC supply horizontal mounting type suitable for
outdoor installation conforming to the latest IS standard and all the other required
accessories shall also be provided. The Isolator shall be complete with, GI operating
down pipe complete with hand pad lock key, handle earthing wire etc., complete,
Auxiliary switch with necessary contacts (NO and NC) shall be provided in the DP
structure and interlocked with substation incoming control SF6 Breaker to achieve
the tripping of SF6 while opening the GOD.
e) Lighting arresters shall be rated for 30 KV, 10 KA (33 KV) for providing surge
protection.
f) Lock should be provided for AB switch operating handle.
k) Each structure shall be provided with suitable stay. Each stay wire shall be earthed
unless on insulator has been placed in it at a height of not less than 3 meters from the
ground. The stay wire shall be stranded GI wire and the stay rod shall be protected at
ground level by concrete muffing and by enclosing in GI pipe to prevent corrosion.
l) Earthing system with required earth pit stations & other earthing materials (GI Flats,
strips and wires) for the Substation and associated equipment/items shall be done as per
the requirement of State DISCOM
E.5.11 CT-, PT, Metering panel

a) Electronic microprocessor based trivector meter shall be provided in a separate
HT metering panel to measure the parameters like KW, KVA, KVAR, V, Amps,
KWHr, MD, frequency, pf, total demand etc. CTs and PTs for necessary inputs
Page 154 of 245

to this trivector meter shall be provided in the HT metering panel at consumer
end.
b) A separate 33 KV CT/PT metering set, meter box for Trivector meter, cable and
G.I conduit pipes for taking supply from CT/PT metering set to Trivector meter
at State DISCOM structure should be provided. The rating, make of CT/PT
metering set shall be as per State DISCOM requirements.
c) The supply of CT/PT metering set in the DISCOM DP structure shall be under
the scope of Contractor, incase of non-availability of metering set at state
DISCOM side while obtaining power supply and accordingly payament will be
made..
E.5.12 Lighting system

a) This section covers supply and installation of all equipment/items necessary for a
complete lighting system. Equipment shall include lighting panels, lighting distribution
boards, lighting fixtures, poles, cables, switches; exhaust fans, ceiling fans, receptacles,
conduits, wires and miscellaneous hardware necessary to complete lighting work.
b) It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to work out a detailed layout for the lighting
fixtures in order to provide the specified level of illumination. The Contractor shall be
responsible for measuring the levels of illumination after installation and establish
compliance with the Enquiry Specification. The number and type of fixtures offered shall
be indicated in his Tender. The final layout of the lighting fixtures shall be furnished for
the approval before commencement of installation. Control of lighting circuits should be
with miniature circuit breaker.
c) Following points shall be considered while designing the lighting system.
1) In each lighting circuit only 1000 watts single phase lighting load is permitted.
2) The lighting fixtures offered shall comply with the following requirements
(i) The fixtures shall be suitable for operation on a nominal supply of 230 volts. Single
phase, 50 Hz A.C. 2 wire with a voltage variation of +/- 10%.
(ii) All fixtures shall be designed for minimum glare. The finish of all parts of the fixtures
shall be such that no bright spots are produced, either by direct light source or by
reflection.
(iii) For multi lamp LED fittings, the circuit should be designed in such a manner as to
reduce the stroboscopic effect to the minimum.
Page 155 of 245

3) The lighting fixture shall comply with the following requirements:
(i) For multi lamp fittings, a separate choke shall be provided for each lamp.
(ii) All lighting fixtures shall be supplied complete with lamps and all necessary
accessories and control gears for their satisfactory operation.
(iii) Lighting fixtures shall be equipped with all components required for their satisfactory
performance. Lighting fixtures shall be of high power factor type and shall be
supplied complete with lamps, control gear and accessories. All lighting fixtures shall
be complete with necessary mounting accessories.
5.12.1 Fixtures schedules

a) For switchgear rooms and office areas where false ceiling is not provided, Decorative
fitting suitable for 2 x 18 /36 W LED fittings wall / ceiling / pendent mounting shall be
used. The fitting shall consist of perforated steel side panels, a pair of end plates and white
egg box type polystyrene louvered or reversible type louvers screening at the bottom.
b) For general stores, pump houses and compressor room, Industrial fitting suitable for 2 x
18/36 w LED fittings with vitreous enamelled reflector shall be used. Fitting shall
comprise of basic channel and vitreous enamelled open ended closed top reflector painted
white inside grey outside. Specially designed catches on the reflectors shall allow easy
and quick removal for cleaning and shall provide access to the control gear.
c) For chemical solution preparation areas and also for stores where chemicals of corrosive
nature are stored, Industrial LED fittings totally enclosed suitable for installation in a dust
a vapour laden and corrosive atmosphere shall be used. The fitting shall have aluminium
housing. A clear acrylic cover in a frame shall be secured to the housing by toggles.
Gaskets shall be provided to render the fitting dust, moisture and vapour proof. All steel
parts shall be cadmium plated and passivated. The fitting shall be suitable for 2 x 18/36
W watts, 4 (Four) feet LED fittings with internal wiring and all accessories and two (2)
19 mm conduit knockouts in the rear mounting surfaces.
d) For general outdoor area illumination, general purpose integral flood light fixture with
150/200 W LED lamps shall be used. The body of the fixture shall be constructed of spun
aluminium and the interior shall act as a reflector. This can have either a polished or matt
finish to provide a narrow or wide-angle beam as may be required. A heat-resisting front
glass shall be provided & fitted with a weather-proof gasket. The lamp holder shall be
mounted on an adjustable rod to allow for focusing and the complete unit shall be
mounted on a stir-up and cast aluminium base, finished in aluminium colour.
e) For pump houses and machinery service area, Industrial totally enclosed low bay (integral
with control gear) fitting with for 70 / 90 /120 watts LED lamp shall be used. The fixture
Page 156 of 245

shall consist of anodized aluminium reflector, suspension assembly and housing for its
control gear.
f) For roads, Street light fittings of integral type and weather proof suitable for
90/120/150/200 watts LED lamps shall be used. Fitting shall comprise of deep drawn
reflector designed for semi cut-off light distribution, heat resistant glass reflector bowl
for better light distribution without glare.
g) For outdoor platforms, walk ways and outdoor equipments, Industrial outdoor type screw
neck well glass light fitting of vapour proof and dust-tight with cast iron body finished in
shoving grey outside and white inside complete with clear screw neck well glass,
tropicalised gasket, cadmium plated and passivated wire guard with BC lamp holder with
top entry suitable for 90 / 120W LED fixture with IP 65 enclosure of fixture shall be used.
h) For battery room and chlorine area, Indoor corrosion proof industrial lighting fitting
suitable for 2 x 18 / 36 W LED consisting of seamless aluminium pipe type mounting
rail, cast aluminium control gear box, cast aluminium end box accommodating starter
holder, drip cum vapour proof lamp holder shall be used.
i) Automatic emergency fixture (Instalite) for 230/250 V AC complete with batteries of 6

Volts each 18 watt lamps, relay and battery charging circuit to provide lighting
continuously for about 2 hours shall be used in control room and MCC room.
j) Lightening arrestor and Aviation lighting shall be provided in the tallest structure of the
Plant.
k) Following, in general, forms the guidelines of selection of light fittings in locations

indicated below.
i For control room 2 x 18 / 36 W LED white lamp fixtures with mirror optics
suitable for installation in false ceiling shall be considered.
ii For chemical solution preparation areas 2 x 18 /36 W LED white lamp in

corrosion resistance fixture shall be considered.
iii 90 / 120 W LED lamp well glass fitting shall be considered for outdoor equipment
lightings.
iv 120 / 150 W LED lamp street light fixtures shall be considered for street
lighting.
v 150 / 200 W LED flood light fixture shall be considered for flood / area lighting.
Page 157 of 245

vi One (1) No. main lighting distribution board and sub lighting panels (qty as
required) shall be considered for controlling lighting network.
vii One (1) No. main PDB distribution board and sub PD panels (qty as required)
shall be considered for controlling small power equipment.
viii LDB / PDB should have bus bar arrangement for R, Y, B & N. Tapping should
be taken from these bus bars for outgoing feeders.
ix In all indoor rooms, lighting circuit shall have conduit wiring and all outdoor area
lighting circuit shall be done through cabling. In control room and switch gear
room lighting wiring shall be in concealed conduits.
Note
The Contractor shall furnish make and type of lighting fixture, fans and lighting
distribution boards including all its components. Contractor shall also submit
calculations for illumination levels in various areas along with his lighting, fans and
receptacles layout drawings for approval.
5.12.3 Lighting system requirements

a) The design, manufacture and performance of equipment shall comply with all currently
applicable statutes, regulations and safety in the locality where the equipment will be
installed. Nothing in this specification shall be construed to relieve the Contractor of his
responsibility.
b) The following minimum requirement shall be considered while designing lighting for
indoor area:
 Maintenance factor 0.7

 Ceiling reflection factor 0.3
 Wall reflection factor 0.5
 Floor reflection factor 0.1
 Minimum mounting height 3.0 meters
 The minimum illumination level shall be as follows.
i. MCC /Control room/Office rooms-----250 lux

ii. Chemical house/compressor plant -----200 lux
iii. Chemical solution preparation area----200 lux
iv. Blower & compressor rooms and pump rooms ---200 lux
v. Laboratories/Store rooms---------------200 lux
vi. Other indoor rooms----------------------200 lux
vii. Passage/Corridor/Toilet-----------------100 lux
viii. Outdoor equipment ---------------------- 20 lux
Page 158 of 245

ix. Conference rooms-----250 lux
x. Road/Street lighting/Yard lighting---30 lux
xi. Electrical switch board rooms----------250 lux
c) The Contractor shall supply, install, test and commission a complete system of lighting
fans and power receptacles in accordance with the approved lighting drawings and in
accordance with relevant Indian Standards.
d) In addition to the above, the installation shall conform to other relevant Standard Codes
of Practice and Indian Electricity Rules.
e) The Contractor shall supply all lighting switches, ceiling fans, power receptacles,
distribution boards and lighting panels complete with switch fuse, junction boxes, pull
boxes, terminal blocks, glands conduits and accessories (elbows, tees, crosses, bends etc).
and supporting and anchoring materials to make the installation complete. The Contractor
shall also supply all lighting fixtures complete with LED lamps and lighting cables. All
materials, fittings and appliances used in the electrical installation shall conform to the
I.S Specifications.
f) Wiring shall be colour coded so as to enable easy identification of phase, neutral and DC
conductors.
g) Receptacle and lighting fixtures shall be fed from different circuits / lighting panels.
h) All receptacles and switches to be installed in offices, control rooms and other
decoratively finished areas shall be flush mounted within the wall and those in other areas
shall be wall or column mounted.
i) Socket outlets shall not embody fuse as an integral part of them. The switch controlling
the socket outlet shall be in the live conductor.
5.12.4 Lighting panels

a) The lighting panels shall be dust-tight, vermin-proof, sheet steel enclosed type. Sheet
steel for fabrication shall be at least 2.0 mm thick and shall have a smooth surface free
from flaws and warps. Louvres and vents if provided shall be properly screened to prevent
entry of insects and foreign materials.
b) Sheet shall be degreased, pickled and phosphated before painting. painting shall consist
of two coats of suitable epoxy primer and two coats of approved final epoxy paints.
c) The switches shall be heavy duty as per I.S.4047 and the fuses shall be of HRC type.
Page 159 of 245

d) The panels shall be provided with adequate size cable gland for incoming circuits. Cable
glands shall be of single compression type suitable for armoured cable. It shall be possible
to take out outgoing circuits from top or bottom. The Knock out plates for conduit entries
at top and bottom for outgoing circuits and for spare circuits on each panel shall be
provided.
e) Circuit identification tag shall be provided on each incoming and outgoing circuit and
shall be in the form or engraved or screen painted or anodized aluminium/plastic sheet.
f) The panels shall be provided with two distinct earthing terminals for connecting earthing
conductor of size of 25 mm x 3 mm galvanized iron flat.
5.12.5 Receptacles
a) Decorative and industrial type receptacle units of approved make of 6 A and 16 A rating
with switches conforming to I.S. 3854 and sockets conforming to I.S. 1293 shall be
provided in the PMCC & MCC rooms. The units shall be mounted flush on stove
enamelled sheet steel boxes generally conforming to I.S. 5133.
b) Three phase receptacles of 32 Amps rating with switches shall be provided in all the
floors of the Plant. They shall be connected by feeder cables from the nearby power
distribution boards.
5.12.6 Lighting installation

A. Lighting Panel / Distribution Boards - Installation
Installation work shall include mounting of lighting panels / distribution boards at
appropriate locations as per approved drawing. All work and supply items including civil
work required for mounting & also earthing of panels shall be carried out by the
Contractor.
B. Lighting Fixtures, Ceiling Fans, Receptacles, etc., Installation
The scope of installation work shall include mounting of lighting fixtures, ceiling fans,
and receptacles units etc., at locations shown on relevant approved drawings. All work
and supply items associated with installation, such as provision and fixing of wooden
blocks, ball sockets, hooks etc., as required drilling holes in walls, ceilings, etc., or any
civil work including scaffolding, provision of ladders, etc., shall form part of the
Contractor's work.
C. Wiring
a) The work shall comprise wiring from lighting panel in suitably sized GI conduits,
supported on walls, ceiling etc., at an interval of 1000 mm, installation of light control
switches and receptacles housed in stove enamelled steel boxes, earthing with 14 SWG
copper conductor continuous wire run outside along the conduit and clamped at every
1000 mm interval and termination of wires at lighting panel, light control switches,
receptacles, lighting fixtures, etc., as required.
Page 160 of 245

b) Supply of all the items for the work detailed above such as 650 V grade. 2.5/4mm2, copper
conductor PVC insulated wires, 6A/16A switches, GI conduits and accessories (such as
junction boxes fabricated from 16 SWG sheet and complete with gasket, knockouts for
conduit entire earthing terminal with bolt, nut and washer, 14 SWG copper earthing with
flexible conduit etc., shall be included in the Contractor's scope. All work necessary for
fixing of boxes, conduits etc., together with supply of necessary hardware, shall be carried
out by the Contractor.
c) Wiring for outdoor areas other than MCC room shall be carried out by means of 1.1 KV
grade armoured cables with copper conductors.
D. Applicable Standards
i Industrial luminaries with metal reflector IS 1777/BS 5225/IFC 162

ii Ballast IS 1554
ii 3 pin plugs & sockets IS 1293
iv General safety requirements for luminaries IS 1913
v Luminaries for street lighting IS 2149
vi Fitting for rigid steel conduits for electrical IS 2667
wiring
vii Code of practice for interior illumination IS 3646 and 6665
viii Switches for domestic & similar purposes IS 3854
ix Ceiling roses IS 371 / BS 67
x Code of practice for lighting of public IS 1944
thoroughfares
xi Electric ceiling type fans & regulator IS 374
E. 5.12.7 Street light Pole

Street light pole shall be suitable for harsh environment & MOC of the Street light pole is RCC
with suitable height based on site’s level condition.
E. 5.12.8 LED General specifications/ Features:
a) High bright white power LEDs shall be used in the luminaries and the wattage of these
LEDs shall be greater that one watt.
b) LED efficiency shall be greater than 100 Lumens/watt.(manufacturcr shall submit the
proof)
Page 161 of 245

c) LED shall be operated at a forward current less than 90% of its rated current.
d) The LEDs used in the luminaries shall have minimum angle of 110°
e) Colour rendering index (CRI) of the LEDs used in the luminaire shall be greater than 70.
f) The Contractor shall submit the Manufacturer test certificate & photo biological safety
report.
g) Life span of LEDs used in the luminaries shall be greater than 50,000 hours at 70% light
output
h) The luminarie light output (Lux) shall be constant. The voltage variations / fluctuations
in the specified voltage range shall not impinge upon the Lux levels it produces.
i) Maximum +/+2% is allowed throughout the input voltage range.
j) Colour temperature e of the luminaire shall be made from S000K to 6500K.
k) The illumination of the luminaire shall be uniform without dark bands or abrupt
variations and shall be soothing lo the eye.
l) Light uniformity ratio (F min/Favg) shall be more than 0.4
m) The luminairc shall work on single phase three wire system.(Phase, neutral & earth).
E.5.13 Earthing Scheme

5.13.1 The scope of work for the earthing system shall be as follows but not limited to:
a) The complete scope of work for earthing system shall be collection of data, design of the
earthing system as per IS 3043 & regulations of CEIG and Indian Electricity Rules,1956,
preparation of layout drawings, supply, installation of required earthing materials, testing,
commissioning and approval to the satisfaction of Electrical inspector. Nothing in this
standard shall be construed to relieve the Contractor from his responsibility.
b) The successful bidder shall base his earthing calculations on actual measurements to be
carried out.
c) Earthing system for the plant shall be provided with its own independent earthing pits
with plate or pipe electrodes and interconnections which in turn will be inter-connected
to form an integrated system for the entire complex. Conductors required for
interconnection with adjacent earthing grids shall also be supplied and installed by the
Contractor.
d) Double clamping, funnel fitted arrangement for all earth electrodes.
e) Earthing system for H.V equipment should be segregated from L.V earthing system.
5.13.2 Installation requirements
a) The installation work shall include unloading, storing, laying, fixing, jointing /
termination, testing and commissioning associated with safety earthing system of plant.
Page 162 of 245

b) The Contractor shall supply and install copper wire/ GI steel strips required for system
and individual equipment grounding. All work such as cutting, bending, supporting,
coating, drilling, brazing, clamping, bolting and connecting onto structures, pipes,
equipments frames, terminals, rails or other devices shall be in the Contractor's scope of
work. The excavation, trenching and back filing shall be carried out by the Contractor as
required, together with the supply of all material.
c) Installation work shall be in accordance with approved earthing drawings (to be prepared
by Contractor).
d) All earthing conductors to be buried in the ground shall be laid 600 mm below grade level
and 1500 mm away from buildings. Backfill shall be placed in layers of 150 mm,
uniformly spread along the trench and consolidated.
e) Earth pits shall be constructed according to the stipulations of I.S. 3043. Except as noted
earth electrodes shall be fabricated in accordance with I.S.3043. The minimum spacing
between two adjacent earth electrodes shall not be less than 6 meters. Earth electrodes
shall be located in concrete inspection chambers with suitable lids and provided with
facilities for the periodic testing of the earth resistivity. Electrodes shall as far as
practicable be embedded below the permanent moisture level.
f) Metallic frame of all electrical equipment shall be earthed by two separate and distinct
connections with the earthing system.
g) Cable armour shall be bonded to the earthing system. Metal pipes and conduits through
which cables run shall be efficiently bonded and earthed. Electrical conduits, pipes and
cable tray sections shall be bonded ensure electrical continuity and connected to earthing
conductor at regular interval.
h) All underground connections for the earthing system shall be welded, connection to
equipment and devices shall be normally of the bolted type.
i) Neutral connection shall never be used for equipment earthing. Metallic conduits and
pipes shall not be used as earth continuity conductor. On completion of the installation,
continuity of all conductors and efficiency of all bonds and joints shall be tested.
j) The earth resistance shall be tested in the presence of Engineer-in-Charge's

Representative. All equipments necessary for the test shall be furnished by the Contractor.
k) The work of embedment of earthing conductor in RCC floors / walls along with provision
of earth plate inserts / pads / earth risers shall be done by the Contractors when the floors
/ walls are cast.
Page 163 of 245

l) The tap connections (earthing leads) from the floor embedded main earthing grid to the
equipment of more than 500 mm long shall be embedded in the floor where required. The
concrete cover over the conductor shall not be less than 50 mm.
m) Earthing conductors along their run on walls and columns shall be supported by clearing
/ welding at intervals of 750 mm and 1000 mm respectively.
n) Wherever earthing conductors cross underground service ducts and pipes, it shall be laid
300 mm below them.
o) Wherever main earthing conductor crosses cable trenches, they shall be buried below the
trench floor.
p) Earth pits shall be treated with salt and charcoal.
q) Following forms, the guidelines on the selection of earthing stations with earth electrodes
and earthing flats / wire
(i) Earth pit stations for LT system shall be with GI pipe earth electrodes of 65mm dia,
3mm thick 3mtr long GI pipe providing with 12mm dia through holes, 150 mm
intervals staggered along with the main electrode. The main electrode shall be
coupled to a 19mm dia GI pipe of suitable of length at one end through a reducing
socket of size 40mm x 19mm size. The other end of 19mm dia GI pipe is required
to be provided with a funnel with wire mesh. GI check nuts, GI nut washers, etc.
(ii) Earth pit stations for Transformer & DG set neutral earthing and for HT system shall
be with GI plate electrodes of 600mm x 600mm x 12mm size. There shall be a
19mm dia GI pipe of suitable length with a funnel with wire mesh, GI checkouts, GI
nut washers etc.
(iii) A suitable pit of 200mm diameter to be dug all around the main electrode, the pit
shall be filled with alternate layer of coal or charcoal and salt in 150mm thick layers
up to the entire length of the main electrode.
(iv)An inspection chamber of size 300mm x 300mm size in CC 1:3:6 with 150mm thick
side walls, 100mm thick at bottom shall be provided. The inspection chamber shall
be covered with MS or CI frame and cover. The cover shall be hinged to the frame
and provided with padlocking arrangements. Inspection chamber frame and cover
shall be furnished with anticorrosive primer and numbered.
(r) Earthing strip of the following sizes shall be provided for the various equipment as
specified in the following table.
Page 164 of 245

Details of Earthing Strip
System Size Material Nos. of
Runs
(mm x mm)
Main earthing grid 65 x 10 GI Flat GS 2
11 KV panel 50 x 6 GI Flat GS 2
Transformer 50 x 6 GI Flat GS 2
PMCC & MCC 50 x 6 GI Flat GS 2
415 LT Motors
 0.25 to 1 HP 16 SWG Cu wire copper 2
 2 HP to 10 HP 10 SWG Cu Wire copper 2
 15 - 40 HP 25 x 3 GI Flat GS 2
 Above 40 HP 25 x 6 GI Flat GS 2
 HT motors 50 x 6 GI Flat GS 2
Lighting distribution board, 25 x 6 GI Flat GS 2
panels,
Auxiliary board sub boards 25 x 6 GI Flat GS 2
etc.
Street lighting poles 10 SWG copper 2
Local push button stations 16 SWG copper 2
Junction boxes, lighting, 16 SWG copper 2
Fixtures, small motors
Transformer neutral 50x6 Flat Copper 2
Note: The galvanizing of earth flats, wires, strips, shall be done by the hot dip
process and minimum thickness of galvanizing shall not be less than 100 microns.
5.13.3 Testing of earthing system
The Contractor shall ensure the continuity of all conductors and joints. The Contractor
shall carry out earth continuity tests, earth resistance measurements and other tests, which
are necessary to prove that the system is in accordance with the design, specifications,
code of practice and Electricity Rules. The Contractor shall have to bear the cost of all
such tests and provide necessary instrument, apparatus etc., required for testing.
Page 165 of 245

5.13.4 Lightning Protection System
The lightning system shall be provided in the Plant as per Latest IS standard /
E.5.14 Fire Fighting Equipment & Substation Safety Items

The following equipments / items in required quantities shall be provided in the electrical
rooms such as PMCC & MCC room, substation room, transformer yard and structure
yard.
a) 6 kgs of Fire extinguishers & 6 kgs of Dry powder Fire extinguishers
b) Fire buckets with sand,
c) Stand made of steel for keeping item (a) & (b) above as required,
d) First and box with required medicines,
e) Safety Rubber (insulated Gloves) (12 KV rating),
f) Rubber mats - working voltage : 36 KV; BDV: 65KV
g) Rubber mats - working voltage : 12 KV, BDV: 45KV
h) Rubber mats - working voltage : 3.3 KV, BDV: 30KV
i) Danger labels,
j) Danger board,
k) Safety charts, First aid charts
l) Steel cub-board to store items (d) & (e)
m) Earth discharge rod.
n) Cable route Marker
E.5.15 440 V Power Capacitors & Control Panel.
5.15.1 General Design Features

a) The capacitor bank shall be complete with the required capacitors along with the
supporting post insulators, steel rack assembly, Aluminium bus bars, copper connecting
strips, foundation channels, fuses, fuse clips, etc. The steel rack assembly shall be hot dip
galvanized.
b) The capacitor bank may comprise of suitable number of single phase units in series
parallel combination. However, the number of units in series shall be such that failure of
one unit shall not create an over voltage on the units in parallel with it, which will result
in the failure of the parallel units. The complete banks with its accessories shall be metal
enclosed (in sheet cubicle), indoor floor mounting and free standing type.
c) Necessary louvers shall be provided in the capacitor bank cubicle to ensure proper
ventilation.
d) Each capacitor case and the cubicle shall be earthed to a separate earth bus in the
cubicle,
Page 166 of 245

e) Each capacitor unit/bank shall be fitted with directly connected continuously rated, low
loss discharge device to discharge the capacitors to reduce the voltage to 50 volts within
one minute in accordance with the provisions of IS:2834.
f) Each unit shall be non-inflammable dielectric immersed self cooled and hermetically
sealed.
g) Each unit shall satisfactorily operate at 135% of rated KVAR including factors of over
voltage, harmonic currents and manufacturing tolerance. The units shall be capable of
continuously withstanding satisfactorily any over voltage up to a maximum of 10% above
the rated voltage, excluding transients.
h) The APFC system shall be equipped with the matching reactors for power factor
correction and harmonic suppression as well as surge suppression devices.
i) The APFC system shall be equipped with the microprocessor based controller with four
quadrant measurement.
j) The system shall be self adoptable with short time reaction for extremely fluctuating
power levels.
k) The system shall be provided with data acquisition module to store all the parameters of
power for a minimum period of a month.
l) CTs with required ratio shall be provided in the incomers of the PMCC & MCC and
interconnected with the APFC relay in the APFC panel.
5.15.2 Criteria for selection of capacitor bank rating and design of capacitor
a) The rating of the bank and the individual units shall be selected in a such a way that the
improvement of power factor from 0.75 lag to 0.98 lag is obtained and 0.98 lag is
maintained throughout irrespective of addition or deletion of load. The automatic power
factor control relay shall be put into operation and select the capacitors addition or
deletion requirement based on the load at that particular moment or period to maintain
the power factor at 0.98 lag throughout.
b) The capacitor shall be of the self healing type with a very low loss dielectric.
c) All the material employed in the manufacture of capacitor shall be nontoxic and
biodegradable.
d) The expected life of the capacitor shall not be less than 1,60,000 hours
Page 167 of 245

e) The pf correction capacitor shall be designed in such a way that they, not only, withstand
high RMS current, but also to work under sustained harmonic overloads.
f) The capacitors shall be characterized by the dielectric impregnated with biodegradable

synthetic oil.
g) The dielectric shall consist of films of polypropylene and paper.
5.15.3 Unit protection

Each capacitor unit shall be individually protected by an HRC fuse suitably rated for load
current and interrupting capacity, so that a faulty capacitor unit shall be disconnected by
the fuse without causing the bank to be disconnected. Thus, the fuse shall disconnect only
the faulty unit and shall leave the rest of the units undisturbed. An operated fuse shall
give visual indication so that it may be detected during periodic inspection. The fuse
breaking time shall co-ordinate with the pressure built up within the unit to avoid
explosion. Mounting of pressure built up within the unit to avoid explosion. Mounting of
the individual fuse may be internal or external to the capacitor case.
5.15.4 Control panel requirement
The control equipment shall be mounted in a panel made of 3mm CRCA sheet steel. The
panel shall be indoor type conforming to IP52 class of enclosure. This panel shall consist
of:
a) ACB / MCCB (TPN, 440 V AC) for incomer supply isolation.
b) The incomer panel shall be provided with PF meter, CTS & Ammeter with Ammeter
selector switch, voltmeter with voltmeter set switch ON/OFF indication, KVA meter,
KVAr meter.
c) Power contactors suitable for capacitor ON/OFF duty.
d) Relays responsive to current/voltage/KVAR as required for automatic switching.
e) Sequencing devices timers and automatic sequential switching of the capacitors in and
out of circuit.
f) Auto - manual selector switch
g) Push button for opening and closing the power circuit.
h) Red & Green lamps for each capacitor ON/OFF indication.

Page 168 of 245
i) Protective relays to protect the healthy capacitor units when one unit fails in a service
connection.
5.15.5 Power factor correction relay

a) The relay shall be microprocessor based digital solid state type and switching device shall
be solid state relay giving signal to contactors for switching ON/OFF preset number of
capacitor units.
b) The relay shall be suitable for automatic/manual control of power factor correction
capacitors on three phase system. It shall detect the power factor lagging and leading
reactive power (KVAR) component above present levels and then switch the appropriate
number of capacitors "IN" or "OUT" to achieve the optimum average power factor
without system operating under leading power factor condition.
c) This relay/device shall have low VA burden and final switching of approximate capacitor
banks shall be achieved by switching of contractors/breakers through initiation of this
device series connection.
d) The relay shall be provided with facility to automatic self adjustment to any capacitor
step value.
e) The relay unit/controller shall be microprocessor based with four quadrant measurement.
It shall be provided with digital indication of power factor, preset parameters and
specified installation data, no-volt relay feature to immediately disconnect all capacitor
in the event of power failure, over temperature / over voltage / harmonic over load
protection, remote fault alarm indicator, power factor correction fault, LEDs for banks on
inductive load, capacitive load, manual mode indication, remote alarm tripped,
multiplication factor indication, and power ON, manual bank and programming on
button, manual bank and programming Off button, Manual / Automatic button, alarm
reset button, data scrolling button and 3 digit display.
f) Technical characteristics shall be as follows:
 Voltage input, 240 to 415 V

 Voltage tolerance + 15%
 Frequency, 50 Hz
 voltage consumption, 15 VA
 Current input (by CT), 5A
 Current consumption, 0.2 VA
 Maximum admissible overload, 30 In for 10 sec.
 Switching interval, 25 sec. and 60 sec. internally select
 Switching contacts, 6A – 250 VAC
 Ambient temperature, 50 deg C
Page 169 of 245
 Degree of protection, IP 40 (min)
5.15.6 Technical particulars
The technical particulars are given in the following table.
Technical particulars for Reactive power compensation and Harmonic Filter Panel:
S. No Description Specification
1. Rated capacity Suitable for maintain Unity P.F for inductive type load
(except VFD operated inductive loads)
2. Voltage 440 KV
3. Frequency 50 Hz
4. Phases Three (3)
5. Ambient temperature 50 deg C
(operating)
6. Capacitance tolerance - 5 to + 10%
7. Installation Internal
8. Service Continuous
9. Protection degree IP 52
10. Discharge resistor Internal
11. Earthing bus 50 x 6 mm Aluminium
12. Capacitor bank connection No.of. banks with Single phase Capacitor shall be provided.
13. Type of switching Automatic switching responsive to pf through PF
servicing relay.
14. Switching taps Min. 8
15. Protection devices Internal fuses and discharging resistors, unbalance current
protection, over current and earth fault protection, over and
under voltage protection, monitoring of internal enclosure
temperature, HV-HRC fuse with failure indication,
Earthing switches, quick discharge transformers.
16. Switchgear Switching components with tested capacitive switching
ability are used like Vacuum or SF6 contactors and Circuit
breakers
17. Reactor Depending on the harmonic level of the network to which
the bank is connected, and the number of steps needed, the
banks can be fitted with air-cored or iron cored damping
reactors or harmonic reactors.
18. Accessories Voltage indicators, ventilation fans, cooling units,
anticondensate heaters, earthing terminals, arc containment
relief vents, enclosure illumination, key locks, electrical
Page 170 of 245

Technical particulars for Reactive power compensation and Harmonic Filter Panel:
locks, key interlocking systems, bottom or side wall cable
entries, door contact switches.
g) Each outgoing panel shall have capacitor unit with suitably rated MCCB for power
control of the capacity unit, one no. ammeter with ASS, auto / manual selector
switch, ON / OFF indication lamps, capacitor unit failed due to fault indication
lamp, Power contactor, etc.
h) Indicating lamps (RYB) – 3 Nos. Incomer ON OFF,Trip indication shall be
provided in the incomer.
i) Auto / manual selector switch and ON/OFF PBs.
5.15.7 Tests
a) All tests shall be conducted in accordance with the latest edition of IS:2834 and as
applicable for the controls.
b) Type test certificates for similar capacitor units shall be furnished.
5.15.8 Drawings
Drawings showing the general arrangement and control scheme shall be submitted for
approval before proceeding with the fabrication works.
E.5.16 Maintenance Free Lead Acid Batteries

a) For control, annunciation and emergency lights one bank of maintenance free lead acid
batteries shall be provided.
b) The specification of the maintenance free lead acid batteries shall conform to the
following.
 This shall be suitable to work in an ambient temperature of 50 ºC.
 The DC system voltage shall be 24VDC.
 The ampere hour capacity of battery at 27 º C at 10 hour rate to give final cell
voltage of 1.75 V/cell shall be 40.
 The momentary load / duration shall be 35 Amps. per one minute.
 The continuous load / duration shall be 4 Amps. for ten hours.
 The initial / final cell voltage shall be 2.15 / 1.75 volts.
Page 171 of 245

 The method of charging shall be float cum boost charging.
E.5.17 Battery Charger and DC Distribution Board

a) One (1) No. Battery Charger and 1 No. DC Distribution Board shall be provided.
b) The manufacture and supply of these items shall conform to the following
requirements.
 The nominal DC system voltage shall be 24 volts.
 The DC system earthing shall be unearthed.
 The ambient temperature for design shall be 50 º C.
 The bus bar shall be copper.
 The total continuous DC load shall be 4 Amps.
 Battery Details :
a. Float / Trickle charging current of the battery shall be 200 mA.

b. Boost charging current and voltage shall be 6 Amps. and 24 V respectively.
c. Maximum time for boost charging of battery shall be 10 hours.
Note
 All required installation accessories and hardware along with battery racks, rubber mats
and pads, accessories for testing and maintenance like center zero DC volt meter, hydro
meters, pocket thermo meter, PVC aprons, PVC gloves, cell lifting straps etc. shall be
provided.
 Drawings, documents, catalogues pertaining into batteries, battery charger and DC
distribution board shall be furnished for approval before manufacture.
 Routine test as for IS shall be carried out on all the above items for approval before
despatch.
 Type test certificate carried out on similar rated items shall be furnished for approval
before despatch.
 Applicable standards - IS 1651, IS 1652, IS 6304.
E.5.18 LT Bus Duct

a) Technical particulars of bus duct:
Sr. No Particular Requirement

i Quantity One (1) number
ii Suitable for voltage Three phase and Neutral, AC,415±10%
iii Suitable for 50C/S ±5%
Page 172 of 245

Frequency
iv Ambient Temp for 50 deg C
design
v Rated Current for
design
vi Short circuit current 30 KA(RMS)
rating for one sec
vii Bus bars (R, Y, B, N) Elecctrolyzed Tinned silver coating Aluminium (fully
insulated encapsulation in epoxy resin with moulded caps
protecting all joints)
viii Installation The bus duct to be provided for electrical connections
Location(outdoor) between the secondary side of the power transformers and the
PMCC shall be of the non-segregated phase type.
ix Type Outdoor and Non segregated type
x Bus duct enclosure IP 55 with canopy
xi Painting The inside of the bus enclosure shall be treated with a matt
paint of black colour, to facilitate efficient heat dissipation. The
bar enclosure with above painting shall be designed so as not
to exceed the temperature rise specified.
xii Temperature raise Under normal operating conditions, the hot spot temperature of
the enclosure shall not exceed 70 degree centigrade. The size
of the Bus bar shall be suitably designed for current rating
mentioned and for a temperature rise of 55 deg C over 50 deg
C ambient for conductor / Silver plated joints and 40 deg C for
other types of joints. Calculations of shall be submitted to the
purchaser along with OGA drawings.
xiii Bus Bar Sizing and To be submitted for approval
supports in the Bus
Duct
xiv Terminal enclosures Three-phase terminal enclosures shall be provided with
and flanges flanged ends with drilling dimensions to suit the flanges at
equipment terminals.
xv Drain plugs and vents Filter type drain plugs shall be installed at low points along the
run of the bus duct to drain out automatically any moisture
condensing within the bus enclosure. The drain plugs shall be
fitted with porous filter elements which will permit the escape
of moisture but prevent the ingress of dust. The filter elements
shall be easily removable for cleaning purposes.
xvi Gaskets The material of the gasket shall preferably be neoprene, closed
cell sponge rubber or equivalent. Flange gaskets shall be
provided at the equipment terminal connections.
xvii Miscellaneous The bus duct shall not have any through bolts. All nuts and
hardware bolts shall be mild steel hot dip galvanized. M.S. spring
washers shall be provided for making satisfactory joints.
Clamps splice plates etc. shall be provided wherever necessary.
xviii Earthing Necessary earthing arrangement shall be provided with clamps
to receive the station earthing bus at two separate points. All
accessories and hardware required for the earthing
Page 173 of 245

(GI flat of 50mm x 10 arrangement shall be provided.
mm size)
xix Hot spot temperature When carrying the rated current under normal operating
of the busbars conditions hot spot temperature shall not exceed 85 degree
centigrade. Also, the temperature of the bus shall not exceed
250 degree centigrade while carrying the specified short circuit
current for one second when a fault occurs at the operating
temperature.
xx Painting of the bus A coat of matt black paint shall be given to facilitate heat
conductor dissipation. The bare conductor with above painting shall be
designed to carry the normal rated current without exceeding
temperature rise.
xxi Bus bar joints Adjacent sections of the bus conductors shall be bolted rigid
joints & the connectors shall be of the same material as the
conductor and these shall be silver plated to ensure an efficient
connection. The bolting schedule and contact pressures shall
uniform to accepted codes of practice.
xxii Bus bar terminal Flexible branded Aluminium be provided at the equipment
connections terminal connections. Bimetallic connectors shall be provided
between the bus bar. The joints shall be capable of 25mm
settlement of the equipment mounting pads. The joints shall
be suitably designed to take care of the vibration at the
terminals as well as the expansion and contraction of the bus
bars. Suitable splice plates and bimetallic connectors shall be
provided wherever necessary.
xxiii Bus support insulators The insulators shall be mounted on resilient pads provided in
the bus enclosure. The insulators shall be preferably made of
porcelain / SMC /DMC/Fibre glass/epoxy. For bus ducts with
voltage rating up to 1100 volts, "PERMALI" wood or
equivalent type of non-hygroscopic insulating supports are
acceptable. The insulators shall possess sufficient mechanical
strength to withstand the forces due to momentary short circuit
currents of magnitude detailed in this specification. The
spacing of the bus insulators shall be decided giving due factor
of safety. As a consequence of current loading and variation in
external temperatures in the external sections of the bus duct,
condensation of moisture may take place on the surface of the
insulators. Hence the insulators shall have a high creepage
distance and a withstand voltage rating sufficient to provide
specified insulation under highly humid conditions.
xxiv Bus duct supports i. The material of the supporting structure shall be
fabricated from standard steel sections with epoxy
paint finish.
ii. The mechanical strength of the supporting structures
shall be designed to withstand the dead weight of the
bus duct and also the short circuit forces under
Page 174 of 245

maximum fault conditions and also the wind load and
forces due to seismic accelerations.
iii. The accessories & hardware: used for the supporting
structures shall include supporting members, brackets,
hangers, longitudinal beams, channels, nuts, bolts,
insulating pads, insulating washers and all other
hardware which are necessary for the erection and
support of the entire bus duct installation. All the
accessories and hardware of ferrous material shall be
hot dip galvanized.
iv. Methods of supports for the indoor portion of the bus
duct shall be from the floor or ceiling beams and for the
outdoor portion of the bus duct it shall be from the
ground below or suitable foundations in the ground.
xxv Earthing Each supporting structure shall be securely connected at two
points to the plant earthing system by means of 50mm x 10mm
GI flat.
E.5.19 Diesel Generating Set with Control Panel

5.19.1 Scope of work
This specification covers the design, manufacture, and supply delivery at site of work,
installation, performance testing and commission of the Prime power rating DG set with
Control Panel (with acoustic housing for Low noise & Eco friendly) for continuous
operation at rated load and speed. The rating of the D.G set shall be provided for 100%
equal rating to E.B power. (To meet PCB conditions)
5.19.2 Design requirement of alternator
An alternator of the generating set shall be brush less, self excited, self regulated, and
screen protected and drip proof. Class of protection shall be IP 23. The alternator shall be
provided with automatic voltage regulation. Class of insulation shall be F. Set shall be
capable of developing required rated power at 1500 RPM at 0.8 lagging power factor.
The voltage shall be maintained between ± 5 % of the rated voltage AC 415 Volt from
no load to full load under all working conditions. The alternator can supply unbalanced
loads to the extent of 20% of the rated current in one or two phase. The generator shall
run smoothly without undue vibrations and noise. The alternator shall have a good motor
starting ability up to thrice the full load current drawn during motor starting for a short
duration and frequent starting of motors.
5.19.3 Construction
Page 175 of 245

a) The alternator armature winding shall be housed in stator and field winding shall be
provided on rotor.
b) The stator frame shall be fabricated in such a way to ensure correct distribution of air
flow over the sector core and winding. The stator packs shall be made from low silicon.
Steel with coating for proper welding of packs.
c) The rotor core shall be built up of high quality low silicon steel sheet. The rotor shall be
wet wound for four poles using compound epoxy resin.
d) End shields shall be of cast iron construction spigoted to the frame of stator of generator
set shall be foot mounted with ball and roller bearing on end shields.
e) Ventilation for the alternator shall be with a centrifugal fan, fitted at the drive end of the
rotor.
f) The shaft of the set shall be of high grade carbon steel machined and ground on fitting
surfaces. It shall be designed for overload conditions. A large sheet steel terminal box
shall be provided with sufficient space for cabling and gland arrangement. It shall have
removable panels for easy access.
g) The alternator shall be coupled to the diesel engine through flexible coupling.
5.19.4 Base frame
Base frame shall be provided for mounting of Generator set on foundation. The base
frame shall be in sturdy construction and welded fabrication from MS structural sections
confirming to IS 2062 – 1992.
5.19.5 Wave form
a) The generator shall be designed to have a voltage wave form within the limits specified
in IS 4722.
b) The generator shall be designed for 415 V, 3 phase, 50 HZ under normal conditions,
output voltage of the generator shall be held within + / - 5 % of the related voltage from
no load to full load at any power factor between 0.8 to 1 inclusive of 4 % primer mover
speed variation.
5.19.6 Design requirements of the diesel engine
a) The prime mover i.e. the diesel engine to drive the generator shall be turbocharged four
strokes, compression ignition and mechanical direct injection type and shall be capable
of cold starting at room temperature without external heating.
Page 176 of 245

b) The engine shall be provided to utilize the available diesel to generate electricity using
100 % diesel. The power output of the engine is mainly determined by the quantum of
diesel supplied.
c) The engine shall be provided with automatic 12 / 24 V battery starting device with
provision of ammeter and voltage regulator in charging circuit.
d) 13/25 V, 25 plates 200 AH Lead Acid heavy duty battery with float and boost type battery
charger with 2 nos. batteries shall be provided.
e) The engine shall be capable of operating continuously on full load. Suitable adjustable
governor shall be provided to control the engine speed within 3 % of its rated speed under
any condition of load up to the full load rating. The governor shall be set to maintain rated
up to at maximum load.
f) Any manual device fitted to the engine which could prevent the engine starting, shall
return automatically to the normal position.
g) Engine shall be so balanced so as to produce minimum noise and vibration. Engine after
correction for altitude and ambient temperature shall have bare engine house power rating
as per requirement.
h) The engine shall be water cooled with a separate shell and tubes heat exchanger and FRP
cooling tower Arrangement shall be made for temperature indicator in cooling system
and tripping of engine on temperature going high.
i) The air cleaner shall be oil bath type with adequate size to prevent foreign matter entering
the engine.
j) The exhaust shall be fitted with a suitable silencer and total back pressure shall be not
exceeding the engine marker’s recommendation. The exhaust pie shall be brought out of
the generator room and exhaust shall be discharged in the open space outside the
generator room when exhaust system rises above the generator room means shall be
provided to prevent a condensable flowing into the engine. The exhaust piping shall be
adequately insulated. Arrangement shall be making for temperature indicator in exhaust
system. Exhaust gas turbo charger & intercooler shall also be considered for heat recovery
from the exhaust gas. The height of exhaust pipe should be provided as per CPCB / State
PCB norms. Aviation lamp, lightening arrestor should be provided at the top of exhaust
pipe supporting structure.
k) The engine shut down system shall be manually as well as electrically operated and return
automatically to starting position after use.
Page 177 of 245

l) The fuel oil shall be HSD. The tank of capacity having 15,000 litres storage capacity shall
be provided along with motorized pump and counter (Unit in litres) for pumped qty. The
tank shall be of welded steel construction confirming to IS 2062 for mild steel
underground storage tank for fuel oil. The tank shall be fitted with an indicator to indicate
the level of fuel in the tank and a valve for opening and closing. The fuel oil tank shall be
painted with epoxy paint form inside and shall be provided with connections for fuel
supply, fuel overflow return, fill gauge, vent and drain pipes. Fuel oil piping shall be of
heavy duty Galvanized iron. The work includes initial filling of HSD oil in tank. The
storage tank should be buried 15 metres away from any electrical system / building.
Approval from departments of explosive, Fire, Police, local authorities and fuel supplier
should be obtained for installation of 15000 litres underground fuel storage tank.
m) In addition to 15000 litres capacity underground tank, a 990 litres capacity diesel tank
along with the D.G set should be provided.
n) An electric motor driven fuel transfer pump of the positive displacement type shall be
provided for 15000 litre fuel tanks. In addition, a manually operated emergency pump
shall also be provided.
o) One full flow strainer and one full flow filter shall be provided for engine. Strainer shall
be locked on the pump and the filter on the discharge side of the pump. When the engine
fuel pump and the high pressure injector equipment are contained in the common housing
the fuel filter may be located between the strainer and the engine fuel pump. The strainer
shall be of the metal edge or screen type with a maximum opening of 0.15 mm. The
strainer and filter shall have inlet and outlet connections plainly marked and shall be
mounted in accessible locations. It shall be possible to change strainer and filter elements
without disconnecting the piping or disturbing the other engine components. A pressure
gauge with a red line limit shall be provided at the inlet side.
p) The engine fuel pump shall be of the positive displacement engine driven type and shall
be capable of supplying an adequate quantity of fuel under all conditions of operation. A
relief valve shall be provided to prevent the build up of excessive pressure if the discharge
line becomes clogged. An auxiliary fuel oil pump automatically operated by a direct
current motor shall be provided where required for prompt positive station. Power for this
motor will be supplied form the battery. Excess fuel shall be returned to the day tank.
q) The starting mechanism shall be by means of a battery powered electric starter D. C motor
having high starting torque to overcome full engine compression shall be provided.
Engine shall be provided with lead acid 12 volt 25 Plates 200 AH. Battery with a float
and boost type battery charger. The charger unit shall be capable of charging the battery
in position. Provision for manual starting by crank handle shall also be provided.
r) The engine shall be fitted with a speed control device which will control the speed under
all conditions of load. Electronic speed governor shall be considered in the governing
Page 178 of 245

system. Engine should be provided with an adjustable governor capable of regulating
engine speed and maximum load conditions of pump. The governor shall be set maintain
rated pump speed at maximum pump load. Electronic speed monitoring device including
starting and over speed control shall be provided. Engine shall be provided with an over
speed shut down device. It shall be set to shut down the engine at a speed 20 % above the
rated engine speed. The governor shall be suitable for operation without external power
supply.
s) Automatic pressure lubricating arrangement shall be provided by pump driven by the

crank shaft, taking suction form sump and delivery through oil cooled and wire mesh
filters to a main supply header fitted in the bed plate casing. High pressure oil shall be
supplied to main and big end bearings, cam shaft bearing cam shaft chain and gear drive,
governor, auxiliary drive gear etc. Gear shall be lubricated at reduced pressure through a
reducing valve and the cams by an oil bath.
t) A metal guard shall be provided over the coupling, fly wheel and other moving parts. The
engine shall be mounted on a base plate of fabricated steel construction. Adequate access
shall be provided to the big and main bearings, camshaft and governor drives, water jacket
etc.
u) Indicator shall be mounted directly on the cylinder head and located in such a way as so
to permit preparation of the indicator cards without removing the valve operating covers.
v) The engine shall be provided with intake and discharge duct work, inlet filter dampers
etc. as necessary for efficient and trouble free operation. Intake air shall be taken from
inside the building in which engine is located but the exhaust should be discharged
outside the building. The exhaust duct shall be adequately sized for minimum pressure
drop as per relevant codes / standards and should be clearing man height.
w) The fly wheel shall have graduated markings around the periphery to facilitate checking
of valve and fuel pump timings.
5.19.7 Design requirements of the control panel Board
a) The engine shall be provided with a control panel board. The panel shall be mounted on
a suitable steel frame and installed near the DG set. The bottom of panel shall be at safe
and convenient level (300mm) from the floor and shall be placed in such a way that it is
easily accessible. The panel shall be fabricated out of 3 mm thick MS sheets (CRCA).
b) The panel board shall house the following:
 Synchronization operation of the DG sets based on the load requirements.

 Auto Mains Failure function
 Start – stop button for starting the engine.
Page 179 of 245

 Audio visual indication for low lubricating oil pressure, high cooling water outlet
temperature, exhaust temperature, low oil level and over speed.
The entire control device including relays, indicating lights internal wiring etc. shall be
provided to indicate:
 Incoming power supply
 Impulse lines from safety instruments.
 Group indication for fault on control panel.
Following auxiliary equipments/ instruments shall also be provided:

 Fuel strainer at fuel oil pump suction in an accessible position,
 Sludge and sediment trap in fuel oil system and removal arrangement,
 Fuel oil level gauge on day tank,
 Temperature indicator in lubricating oil outlet,
 Pressure gauge for lubricating oil system,
 Engine speed indicator,
 Lubricating oil sump level indicator,
 Voltmeter and ammeter in battery charging circuit,
 Over speed trip relay,
Construction details of control panel board.

A. Enclosure & Protection
 The enclosure shall be metal cold comprise of standard prefabricated cold rolled sheet
steel (3 mm thick) assembled to form a free standing dead front structure.
 The enclosure shall be totally enclosed dust and vermin proof housing confirming to
protection class IP 55. It shall have opening for natural ventilation. The opening shall
be louvered with wire mesh.
 Doors and openings shall be provided with neoprene gaskets.
 The panel shall provide aluminium bus bars of required capacity with supports and
terminations.
 The draw out carriage on the board shall have three positions viz. service, test and
draw out. Automatic safety shutters shall be provided to ensure inaccessibility of all
live parts, after the breaker is drawn out. It shall not be possible to draw out the
carriage with the air circuit breaker closed. Suitable interlocks shall be provided to
prevent faulty operation.
 All metal surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned and degreased. The fabricated
structure shall be pickled and then rinsed to remove trace of acid. A coat of zinc
chromate primer shall then be rinsed to remove trace of acid. A coat of zinc chromate
primer shall then be applied. Thereafter synthetic enamel paint shall be applied in 2
coats. The steel part of panel shall be cadmium plated to prevent corrosion.
 The panel shall be provided with Air circuit breakers and other equipments/items etc
as detailed below.
Page 180 of 245

 a. Air circuit breaker
 Air circuit breakers shall be horizontal withdrawal type. It shall comprise identical
poles operated through a common shaft.
 Operating mechanism shall be motor charged spring operated mechanism Breaker

shall be indoor type and rating shall be as under: -
Rated Voltage 415 Volts
Rated Frequency 50 Hz
Rated Current …………
Rated Breaking Current 40 KA
 Four poles air circuit breaker shall be provided with Microprocessor based over
current and earth fault relay with protection current transformer, over load, short
circuit release and under voltage release, TNC switch and automatic voltage regulator
shall be provided in the panel.
B. Other items
 Instrument transformer, Current transformer, Voltage transformer, Measuring
instrument, viz. Ammeter & voltmeter with Selector switches, KW meter, KWH
meter, P.F. meter and frequency meter. Auxiliary equipments. Relays and
contractors, tripping & protective relay, Fuses, Push buttons, control switches,
indicating lamps etc.
 Provision to take NO LOAD trial of generator set without disturbing the EB system.
 Generator set’s ACB of control panel shall close only if 415 Volts ACB in Power
cum motor control center is in open condition.
 ACB shall be provided with under voltage relay to trip the ACB in case of failure of
supply.
 Generator set shall stop either by reset to normal P.B. or stop PB of control panel or
stop PB at generator set.
 Mechanical & electrical interlock shall be provided.
 Special Tools for operation and maintenance of the DG Set should be supplied
C. Earthing
4 nos of earthing pits are to be provided for generator set (2 Nos. for body earth and 2 nos
for neutral). The earth electrode shall be of G.I. plate of 600 mm x 600 mm x 12 mm size.
Suitable size copper strip shall be provided for neutral earthing.
D. Inspection & Testing
 Manufacturer shall conduct all tests required to ensure that the equipment conform to
the requirements of the specification and is following requirements of applicable
codes. The particulars of proposed tests shall be submitted to client for approval
before conducting the tests.
Page 181 of 245

 Performance test of the generator set to determine the power developed, power factor,
voltage, ampere and guaranteed overall efficiency at the prime mover rated speed
shall be carried out at manufacturer’s shop and at work site.
E.Installation, testing & commissioning
 Specification covers complete installation including laying of concrete foundation as

recommended by the manufacturer of generator sets final check up, performance
testing and commissioning of diesel generating set and accessories for the guaranteed,
co-coordinated, commercial operation of the same to the entire satisfaction of the
Engineer – In – Charge.
 In accordance with the specific installation instructions as shown in manufacturers

drawings or as directed by the Engineer – In – Charge, the Contractor shall unload,
erect, install, test and place to commercial use. The generator set shall be installed in
a neat workmanlike manner so that it is levelled, plumb, square and properly aligned
and oriented.
 Manufacturer’s drawings, instructions and recommendations shall be correctly

followed in handling, setting, testing and commissioning of generator set and
accessories.
 The contractor shall furnish all supervisor, labour, tools, equipment, rigging materials
and incidental materials such as bolts, nuts, wires, anchor, concrete foundation bolts,
etc. required to completing installation and testing of generator set.
 Where assemblies are supplied in more that one section the contractor shall make all
necessary mechanical and electrical connections between sections including
connections between bus bars / wires, all insulators and bushings shall be protected
against damage during installation.
 The contractor shall supply diesel oil, lubricants and other consumables require for
testing and commissioning of generator set and it includes initial filling of HSD oil
in tank at full level.
 Generator set furnished with finished coats of paint shall be touched up by the
contractor at site before handing over the set to the line agency.
 Earthing system shall be provided to ensure equipment safety, personal safety and to
facilitate protection during earth fault conditions. The earthing shall be obtained by
sinking galvanized iron plate of 600 mm x 600 mm x 12 mm size. Alternative layers
of charcoal and sand shall be provided for covering the plate electrode as may be
required. A GI pipe of 40 mm dia meter shall be installed with top funnel for watering
Page 182 of 245

the pit. The pit shall be further refilled by soft earth up to ground level GI pipe of
shall be fixed to plate electrode though earth bus as per drawing.
 The earth plate shall be finally connected to the electrical equipments (Generator set
& Control panel) by a 50 mm x 6 mm GI flat in duplicate.
 The earth pit shall be covered by brick masonry chamber in cement motor of CM 1:6
cement plaster on inside and outside in CM 1:3 shall be done.
 The chamber shall be of the size 500 mm x 500 mm and shall be provided with a
hinged mild steel cover with frame.
 After successful conduct of test after erection, the generator set shall be
commissioned by the contractor.
 During commissioning, the contractor shall supply all materials and labour to
supervised, operate keep in operation, adjust tests service, repair and do all things
necessary to keep the set running.
 Vibration, nose level and alignment shall be checked.
F. Selection criteria for deciding rating of DG set
 The DG Set shall be Prime power rating applicable for supplying to varying
electrical load for unlimited hours
 The DG Set shall be loaded up to 80% capacity only and balance 20% shall be spare
capacity.
 The 80% capacity shall include the total of all operating loads (input KW to the
electrical equipment), lighting load, spare feeder loads.
 The DG Set should deliver the output without any drop of voltage when a large
capacity motor is started with the other loads are fed by this DG set and should take
the inrush current of the large capacity of the motor at the time of starting of the same.
Description Particulars
Electrical System
System voltage 415 Volts
Page 183 of 245

System frequency 50 Hz
Voltage variation + 10%
Frequency variation + 5%
Combined Variation + 10 %
System Three phase four wire earthed
Alternator
Rating To be decided as per requirement (100% standby to E.B
power)
Voltage 415 Volts, 50 Hz 3 Phase with neutral
Power factor 0.8 lagging
RPM 1500 RPM
Insulation class H
No. of brushes Brushless
Excitation Self excitated
Regulation Self regulated with automatic voltage regulator
Degree of protection IP 23 weather proof
Enclosure type SPDP
Terminal box As required to accommodate the cables
Material of terminal studs Brass wit spring loaded nuts and washers
Space heater One number of space heater of adequate rating to be
provided separate terminal box for space heater cable.
Name plate Stainless steel with engraved
Earthing terminals Two nos stand type of suitable size
Greasing arrangement Grease nipples with relief valve / plug
Lifting hook To be provided of adequate capacity
Diesel engine
Rating Suitable to meet required H.P on continuous basis for
alternator
Mounting arrangement Skid mounted
Page 184 of 245

Starting method Push button start through portable and chargeable batteries
Coupling method Engine to be coupled to alternator with suitable flexible
coupling
Cooling system Separate Shell and tube type Heat Exchanger with FRP
cooling tower
General for coupling system Suitable size/ removable type of guard to be provided for
coupling
Exhaust system Consisting of pipe lengths, silencer, supports, insulations
etc. to meet CPCB/ State PCB consent norms. Aviation
lamp, lightening arrestor shall be provided. A separate earth
pit shall be provided for lightening arrestor. Adequate size
of copper earth strip shall be provided for lightening
arrestor earthing. The earth strip should be separated from
metal structure using insulator.
Fuel system A complete closed fuel feeding system with necessary
piping, values, fuel filters with removable cartridge suitable
fuel feed pump, oil pressure gauge of suitable range, service
tank of adequate capacity with fuel level calibrated
indicator.
Lubricating system A complete closed loop lubricating system to be provided
and engine should have suitable sump of adequate capacity.
There should be a facility to check level of lubricating oil.
Adequate safety device e.g. Pressure switch etc to be
provided for protecting engine from any failure of oil
system.
Air Filter An oil bath air filters to be fitted in the air intake path.
Type of fuel High speed diesel and gas
Control panel
AIR circuit breaker 40 KA 415 Floor mounted free standing control panel supplied with
volt, 50 Hz. draw out type diesel generating set should comprise of Auto Mains
failure function & Synchronizing of DG set function.
AC Ammeter with selector 1 No.
switch
AC Voltmeter with selector 1 No.
switch
Frequency Meter 1 No.
Page 185 of 245

KW Meter 1 No.
KWH Meter 1 No.
Power Factor Meter 1 No.
Control Circuit Fuses 1 Set
Current transformer 3 Nos.
Potential transformers 1 No.
Indication lamps for set 1 Set
ON/OFF and load ON/ OFF
indication
Audio visual Annunciators 1 Set
comprising of lamps, hooter,
push buttons etc for low oil
pressure, high water temperature
over speed etc.
Control circuit wiring 1 Set
Interlocking with isolator and 1 Set
earthing switch to avoid parallel
operation
Over current relay and earth 1 Set
fault relay
Under voltage relay 1 Set
Over voltage relay 1 Set
Earthing terminal 2 Nos.
Documentation
Drawing of equipment with Following documentation to be supplied with the
dimensions to be provided, generator set.
including elevation, plan,
sectional views and foundation
details
Maintenance manual with 2 copies
recommended maintenance
schedule
Test report and certificates 2 copies
Recommended list of spares 2 copies
Page 186 of 245

G. Emission & Noise Control for D.G Set:
The emission limit for D.G set shall be as per the Environment (Protection) (Second
Amendment) Rules, 2015
The calculation minimum height of stack as per as per the emission norms is given
below:
H = h+0.2 x √KVA, where
H = Height of stack in metre
h = Height of the building in metre where the generator set is installed. In this case
height of acoustic enclosure of the D.G set shall be considered since D.G sets will be
housed in the acoustic enclosure.
KVA = Total Generator capacity of the set in KVA
H. Noise limit for diesel generator sets

The maximum permissible sound pressure level (upto 1000 KVA) is within 75 dB(A)
at 1 metre from the enclosure surface. For which, the diesel generator sets should be
provided with integral acoustic enclosure at the manufacturing stage itself.
Governing: The governor shall be Electronic type confirming to Class A1
E.5.20 Technical Specification for Fire Detection and Alarm System

This specification of works includes the design, manufacture, assembly, testing at
manufacturer’s works, supply & delivery, properly packed of Fire and Smoke Detection &
Alarm System with all materials and accessories for efficient and trouble-free operation.
The following equipment shall be furnished with all accessories: -
a) Smoke and heat detectors and installation.
b) Manual call point for buildings.
c) Fire detection alarm panels which shall be SCADA compatible.
d) All wiring & accessories to complete the installation.
e) All installation hardware.
f) All relevant drawings, data & instruction manuals.
General Requirement: All equipment and material shall be designed, manufactured and
tested in accordance with the latest applicable Indian Standards except where modified and/or
supplemented by this specification.
Page 187 of 245

1. The Smoke and heat detection system shall consist of
various types of fire detectors, control cabling, fire
alarm panels, central monitoring station,
annunciation/control panels, local panels.
2. The fire detection and alarm system shall be
General microprocessor based, analogue addressable system &
interfaced with SCADA system.
3. System shall be connected with central monitoring
SCADA Panel in the admin building.
Location Fire detectors shall be provided for building including

substation control room, HT & LT Panel rooms
(PCC/PMCC), battery room, Laboratory & store room
& all necessary location wherever required in the
plant premises. Fire detectors shall be located at
strategic location in various rooms of the building as
per the latest IS.
Operation The operation of any of the fire detectors / manual call point
should result in the following:
a) A visual signal exhibited in the alarm panel indicating
the area where the fire is detected.
b) An audible alarm (Hooter) sounded in the panel.
c) An external alarm sounded in the building, location of
which shall be decided during detailed engineering.
d) An alarm should be signaled to the Control Room.
Detection & Alarm 1. Each zone shall be provided with two zone cards in
system the panel so that system will remain healthy even if
one the cards become defective.
2. The control panel shall be suitable for 230V AC
power supply.
The detector cable and the other control cable shall be

Cabling armoured, screened and twisted FRLS type in external areas
and shall be of unarmoured FRLS type inside building (in
conduits)
Tests All equipment shall be completely assembled wired, adjusted

and routine tested at the factory as per relevant standards.
Following tests shall be performed on the system
a) Response characteristics of fire detectors.
b) Performance test on fire extinguisher as required in
the code.
c) A comprehensive visual and functional check for the
fire alarm panel.
Page 188 of 245

d) Verification of wiring as per approved schematic.
e) Testing of fire detection panel.
Site Test All the detectors installed shall be tested for actuation
by bringing a suitable smoke source near the detector
creating a stream smoke over the detector. After each
test smoky atmosphere should be cleared so that the
detector shall reset.
Certify proper operation of all detectors and call points.
One of each type of extinguisher shall be tested for its
performance.
E.5.21 Electrical Insulation Rubber Mat
a) Electrical insulation rubber mat confirms with IS 15652:2006 & made up of synthetic
insulating rubber and MOC of the Elastromeric polymer, Anti-skid without metallic
derivatives.
Class/User Voltage's Thickness (mm)

A / 0 to 3.3 KV 2.0
B / 3.3 to 11 KV 2.5
C / 11 to 33 KV 3.0
E.5.22 Battery Limit

a) Power supply at AC, 33KV, 3 phases, and 50 cycles per second will be provided in the
point of supply of State DISCOM at the Battery limit. The Contractor shall tap this
power supply from this 33 KV structure and further transmission as well as distribution
of power supply to the proposed Plant along with the other work as detailed shall be
implemented by the Contractor.
b) Client will be provided temporary power supply within the battery limit, during erection
& commissioning of electrical items / equipments. Contractor shall be arranged to
further work as required on their own cost also unit consumption charges & other
charges shall paid by contractor.
E.5.21 Preferred Makes of Equipment

Sl. No Item description Preferable make
1. Power Transformer / Distribution Prolec GE / ABB / Siemens / Schneider
Transformers Electric or equivalent
Page 189 of 245

2. Diesel Generator set Engine Make: Cummins
Alternator: Stamford / Leroysomer or
equivalent
3. Power Control Centre (PCC L&T / Siemens / Schneider Electric
Panel) / Machine Control Centre
(MCC Panel)
4. Power and Control Cables Finolex / Polycab / RPG
5. Lighting Fixtures Philips / Crompton Greaves / Wipro
6. Power Capacitors Siemens / L&T / Schneider Electric /
Crompton Greaves / Epcos
7. Ammeter, Voltmeter, KWhr meter Automatic Electric / Enercon / MECO
Instruments Pvt. Ltd
8. High Tension (H.T) Panels & Siemens / /Schneider Electric / Areva /
Vacuum Circuit Breakers (VCB) Toshiba / ABB
9. Air Circuit Breaker (ACB) L&T / Siemens / Schneider Electric
10. Micro Processor / Numeric L&T / Siemens / Schneider Electric
Protective Relay (Over Current
/Voltage, Under Voltage, Short
Circuit (Shut Release) / Earth
Fault/ Phase Sequential Relay /
Differential Relay/ Neutral
displacement / Lockout)
11. Motor BB / Kirloskar / ABB / Crompton
Greaves / Siemens
12. Switch Fuse Unit / Fuse Switch L&T / Siemens / Schneider Electric
Unit
13. HRC Fuse (Power & control) L&T / Siemens / Schneider Electric
14. Miniature Circuit Breaker ABB / Havells / Legrand
15. Contractor (power & Auxiliary) L&T / Siemens / Schneider Electric
16. Electronic type OLR / Single
phasing preventer / Temperature Minilec / L&T
sensing relay / Reverse rotation
Page 190 of 245

preventer
17. Terminal Connector in the PCC / Elmex / Connect well / Salzer
MCC / Control Panels
18. Local start / stop Push Button Siemens / Teknic / L&T
station
19. Pilot Indication Lamp L&T / Siemens
20. Selector / Control Switches L&T / Siemens / kaycee
21. Battery Exide/ AMCO / Amar Raja
22. Digital Microprocessor based
power monitor with digital port for L&T / AMP / Alacrity
remote transmission
23. Automatic Power Factor Control L&T / Siemens
Relay
24. Potential Transformers & Current KAPPA / AE
Transformers
25. Automatic Power Factor Control L&T / Siemens
Panel Board
26. Power & Lighting Distribution Havells / Legrand / L&T / Rittal /
board and Junction Boxes Siemens
27. Exhaust fans / Ceiling fans Crompton Greaves / Usha/ Orient
Page 191 of 245

SECTION 4. GENERAL INTRUMENTATION SPECIFICATIONS
Page 192 of 245

1. Scope of Work:
Instrumentation & Control System for as per detailed specifications given and
Bill of Quantities. The work includes but is not limited to the activities covered
under the B.O.Q and the work is taken by the contractor on a turnkey basis. Test
Certificates (Dry/Wet) wherever as applicable and Manual, Test Certificate,
Warranty Certificate shall be provided by vendor during supply of instruments.
1.1 Design requirements
1.1.1 The instrumentation and Control system shall be designed, manufactured,

installed and tested to ensure the high standards of operational reliability. All
electronic components shall be adequately rated and circuits shall be designed
so that changing of components their characteristics shall not affect plant
operation.
1.1.2 Instruments offered shall be complete with all the necessary mounting
accessories.
1.1.3 Electronic instruments shall utilize solid state electronic components, integrated
circuits, microprocessors, etc. with proven design and shall be suitable for
continuous operation.
1.1.4 All digital outputs from the instruments shall be voltage free. The switch
contacts of the relays shall be rated for the voltage of the circuit in which they
are to be wired.
1.1.5 Unless otherwise specified, the normal working range of all indicating
instruments shall be between 20% and 80% of the full scale range.
1.1.6 The field instruments & the instruments mounted outside the control room in
open areas shall be mounted at a convenient height of approximately 1.2 meters
above grade platform and protected by canopy. Lockable enclosure shall be
provided for all the field mounted instruments.
1.1.7 The instruments shall be designed to work at the ambient temperature of 50

degrees C, as well as high humidity, dust and corrosive atmosphere. The
Page 193 of 245

instruments shall be given enough protection against corrosion and all the
wetted parts of the instruments shall be non-corrodible.
1.1.8 All field instruments, as well as cabinets and panel mounted instruments shall
have tag plates or name plates permanently attached to them.
1.1.9 The performance of all instruments shall be unaffected for the ±10% variation
in supply voltage and ±5% variation in frequency simultaneously.
1.1.10 The power supply of all on-line Instruments, PLC, Desktop shall be from
UPS/Servo Stabilizer.
1.1.11 All Instruments from Member unit & CETP shall be connected to web server
as per CPCB Norms.
1.1.12 Data Logger shall be installed in Member Tannery unit PLC Panel to avoid
data loss and to increase Data density.
1.2 Control & Instrumentation scheme.
1.2.1 All the sumps/tanks from which water/effluent is drawn by the pumps shall be
provided with Ultrasonic/Radar type level transmitter/transducers for
measurement of levels and also stop the pumps through PLC when the liquid
level is low - low in the tank. This is mainly to avoid pumps running dry. In
addition, the level transmitter shall also send the signals through PLC to the
alarm & annunciator panel for annunciation of low-low, low, high and high-
high levels.
1.2.2 Flow measurement employing electromagnetic flow measurement units as

shown in P&ID shall also be provided for instantaneous as well as Cumulative
measurement & recording of flow.
1.2.3 Measurement and control of all Analyzers at required locations in the plant shall
be implemented by installation of sensors and transmitters in the field and
controllers in the panel.
1.2.4 For automatic operation of equipments/ drives of the plant, interlocking

functions, PLC based PC system shall be provided in the plant with adequate
Hardware memory and Licensed Antivirus Software CD.
1.2.5 Surge Protection devices shall be installed for all Instruments, PLC devices to
protect Electronic equipments from Surge
1.2.6 Local / Remote selection system shall be considered for selection of start & stop
operation of drives either from local (Field) or from remote (Instrument control
panel).Start / Stop operations of all electrical driven equipments shall be carried
out from the Instrument panel cum control desk or from Local ON/OFF PB
station or from PMCC/MCC. In addition, Auto / Manual selection system for
selection of Auto / Manual mode operations of pumps shall be considered.
Page 194 of 245

2. Supply of equipment
The instrumentation for the plant shall include the following meters, controls
and panels.
2.1 Electromagnetic flow sensor, transmitter and panel instruments
2.2 Ultrasonic / Radar type Level measurement sensors/transducers,

transmitters and panel mounted indicating & recording and
controlling instruments, Level switch
2.3 pH sensing, measurement and control system
2.4 ORP sensing, measurement and control system
2.5 NTU sensing, measurement and control system
2.6 Conductivity sensing, measurement and control system
2.7 DO sensing, measurement and control system
2.8 FRC sensing, measurement and control system
2.9 Pressure Gauge, Pressure Transmitter, Pressure Switch
2.10 RTD with temperature Indicator
2.11 Temperature Gauge
2.12 Silt density index
2.13 VFD
2.14 Soft starter
2.15 Rotameter
2.16 Motorised Valve
2.17 UPS & Servo Stabilizer
2.18 Surge protection device
2.19 PLC/SCADA
2.20 HMI
2.21 Web Server

Power, Supply, Signal cables & Earthing, Junction box, Execution, Tests and
Preferred Makes
Page 195 of 245

Flow Transmitter
 Flow measurement & totalizer/integrator system:
 This system shall comprise of electromagnetic and vortex flow sensor, transmitter
(located in the field) and panel mounted indicating totalizer to measure the
instantaneous as well as totalized flow quantity of the medium.
 Flow Head: Liner: PTFE, Electrode: 1.H2SO4-Platinum,2. Hcl-Tantalum,3. Caustic &
Hypo – Hastelloy C, Grounding Rings: Hastelloy C , End Connection: With Flange,
Protection IP 68, Flow tube: SS 304, The flow head should be sealed permanently after
termination of cable using potting compound to avoid entry of water through cable
entry
 Signal Converter (Transmitter): Supply Voltage: Universal, Cable length: 10 m,
mounting: Separate-Field mounting, Type: Microprocessor based, Analog Output: 4-
20 mA, Digital Output: HART / Modbus, Display: LED or LCD with backlighting,
Cummulative reading shall be directly read from the Transmitter itself to PLC, Empty
pipe detection Parameters: Actual flow rate in Cu.m/hr & totalizer flow in Cu.m,
Housing: Die cast aluminum, Enclosure: IP 65 with weather proof canopy or IP 67, IP
68 shall be considered for installation of flowmeter in pits / underground. Flow
measurement Accuracy: ±1% and Analogue output from display value: ±0.1% of full
scale.
Technical Specification sheet for Flow transmitter
1. Flow tube SS 304
2. Connection Type Flange welded along with body, ANSI 150#
RF
3. Flange Material SS 316L
4. Housing Material SS 316L with fully welded design
5. Coil Housing SS 316L
6. Liner Material PTFE
7. Electrode Type Flush Type
8. Electrode Material Hastelloy C/Platinum/Tantalum based on the
application
9. Meter Housing SS 316L
10. Sensor Cable Length 10Mtrs.
11. Cable Entries 1/2" NPT(F)
12. Coil Excitation Pulsed DC
13. Grounding Type Hastelloy C
14. Enclosure Class IP-67/IP-68(Special case)
Page 196 of 245

15. Fluid Tannery Effluent
16. Fluid property Liquid
17. Pressure rating Kg/cm2 16 Bar
18. Min Conductivity micro >5 micro Siemens
19. SP Gravity 1
20. Temperature (Nor/Max) Amb / 65°C
21. Viscosity(Cp) 1
22. Vacuum Possibility No
23. (b)Transmitter Type Electronic, SMART
24. Mounting Remote Mounted
25. Housing material SS 316L
26. Accuracy ±0.50% of measured value
27. Transmitter output 4-20 mA & Modbus/HART Signal
28. Power Supply Universal
29. Local indication LCD display with IR Switches and totalizer
30. Enclosure class IP 65/67
31. Cable entries 1/2" NPT,2Nos.
32. Load Driving Capability 600 Ohms
33. Calibration Test Certificate required for 3 point Wet
Calibration
34. Certifications Required
35. Make ABB/Forbes
Marshall/Siemens/E&H/Equivalent
Data sheet for Vortex type Flow meter :
1. Flow tube SS316 L
2. Connection Type Flanged, ANSI 150# RF
3. Working Principle Vortex
4. Connection Material SS316
5. Tube Material SS316 L
6. Bluff body SS316 L
7. Meter Casing Standard
8. Sensor Cable Length 10 Mtrs.
9. Cable Entries 1/2" NPT(F)
Page 197 of 245

10. Grounding Grounding Rings, SS316
11. Enclosure Class IP-67/IP-68(Special case)
12. Fluid Steam
14. Pressure rating Kg/cm2 11/ 12
15. SP Gravity 1
16. Temperature (Nor/Max) Amb / 240°C
17. Temperature Sensor In built
18. Vacuum Possibility No
19. (b)Transmitter Type Electronic, SMART
20. Mounting Remote Mounted
21. Housing material Die cast aluminum
22. Accuracy ±0.50% of measured value
23. Transmitter output 4-20mA/Modbus/HART Signal
25. Local indication LCD display with IR Switches and totalizer
26. Enclosure class IP 65/67
27. Cable entries 1/2" NPT,2Nos.
28. Load Driving Capability 600 Ohms
29. Certifications Required
ABB/Forbes
30. Make
Marshall/Siemens/E&H/Equivalent
Level measurement system:

The specifications of the liquid level measurement system shall conform to the following:
Data sheet for level transmitter:
S. No Service Level Measurement

1. Material Inside Tank Effluent, Acid, Caustic, Sulphuric Acid
& Hypo, SMBS, Antiscalent
Page 198 of 245

S. No Service Level Measurement
3. Specific Gravity As per Chemical Standard
4. Type of instrument Ultrasonic/Radar
5. Pressure in Tank Atmospheric
6. Temp (Deg c.) (Nor/Max.) Amb / 65°C
7. Nozzle Material/ Projection & Type ASTM A106/ 150 mm (Hold)
Sensor
8. Range (Configurable) Ultrasonic: 0 to 10 Meters, Radar: 0 - 40
Meters.
9. Accuracy ±0.03% of MV
10. Blocking distance 60mm
11. Operating frequency 70 kHz for Ultrasonic, 24 - 26 GHz(K-
Band) for Radar
12. Housing material F12 Aluminum coated
13. Type of Antenna/ Seal 80 NB Std PTFE Clad
14. Process Connection PTFE SS 316L Flanged, 150# RF
15. Mounting Direct on the Tank
16. Transmitter
17. Type 2 Wire Type, SMART
18. Power supply 24 VDC, 2 Wire
19. Transmitter output 4-20 mA, Modbus/HART, programmable
relay contacts
20. Local indication Integral
21. Display Digital
22. Remote Indication Yes
23. Enclosure class WP to IP 65
24. Area Classification Safe
25. Cable entry 1/2'' NPT(F),2 Nos.
26. Make E & H/Emerson/Equivalent
Level Switch:
Page 199 of 245

The specifications of the liquid level measurement system shall conform to the following:
Sl.No Description Specification
1. Fluid/type Water + Chemical
2. Agitator NO
3. Tank height As Per Design
4. Number of floats 1 Nos - LOW for the tank
5. Float material PP
6. Float cable length As per Tank design
7. Cable material PVC
8. Float size 55mmThick & 106mm Dia
9. Adjustable stopper/material YES/PP
10. Maximum pressure 2Kg/cm2
11. Maximum temperature 40 Deg. Centigrade
12. Protection housing Weather Proof Box with 4 Terminals/

Gland
13. Make E&H/Yokogawa/Emerson/Equivalent
pH Measurement system
This system shall comprise of a sensor and transmitters located in the field and indicating
controller located in the panel for measurement of pH value of the process media & self-
cleaning system with Air flushing line shall be provided to clean the sensor to avoid coating
of foreign materials.
Data sheet for pH meter
1. Instrument Range 0-14 pH, Programmable Span
2. Sensors
3. Type Combination electrode
4. Electrode connection VP6 type
5. Temperature rating -10º C – 60º C
6. Pressure rating Bar
7. Shaft material Glass
Page 200 of 245

8. Diaphragm Single Pore - 1 nos.
9. Temperature sensor Built in Pt 1000 / Pt 100
10. Reference electrolyte Polisolve
11. Reference electrode EVEREF – B
12. Electrode head PG 13.5
13. Cable Low noise Co-axial cable of required length
14. Sensor length 120 mm
15. Transmitter
16. Type Microcontroller based, 2-wire transmitter
17. pH Range / Resolution / Accuracy 0 – 14 pH, Programmable Span / 0.01 pH / +/-

0.01 pH
18. Temperature Range / Resolution / -20º C TO +200º C / 0.01º C / +/-
Accuracy 0.1 º C
19. Span 0 pH – 14pH
20. Display 2 Line Dot-matrix 10 characters per line LCD
display, programmable along with conversion
factor.
21. Keypad 3 button keypad for user friendly menu
interface
22. Comm. Protocol HART Communication Protocol
23. Current output 4-20 mA, Modbus, programmable relay
contacts
24. Calibration Single/Dual Point Calibration
25. Temperature compensation Automatic or Manual (PT 100/ PT 1000)
26. Power requirements 12 – 36 VDC with maximum load 600 Ώ @ 24

VDC
27. Power consumption Less than 53 mW
28. Enclosure material Sheet Metal Enclosure
29. Cable glands 2 pin, 6 pin Terminal Blocks
30. Mounting type Panel
31. Cut out dimensions 92 x 92 x 160 mm
32. Protection class IP 54 (front)
33. Ambient temperature operating -20 to +60º C
34. range
Maximum relative humidity 90% Non-Condensation
35. Holder type Flow through assembly
36. MOC PP
Page 201 of 245

37. Holder connection NPT process connection
38. Make HACH/ WTW /E+H/ Emerson/ Forbes
Marshall
ORP Analyzer:
controller located in the panel for measurement of ORP value of the process media & self-
Data sheet for ORP Analyzer

1.
2. Instrument Range - 500 to + 500 mV

Sensors
3. Type Combination electrode
4. Electrode connection VP6 type
5. Temperature rating -10º C – 60º C
6. Pressure rating 6 Bar
7. Shaft material Glass
8. Diaphragm Single Pore - 1 nos.
9. Temperature sensor Built in Pt 1000
10. Reference electrolyte Polisolve
11. Reference electrode EVEREF – B
12. Electrode head PG 13.5
13. Cable Low noise Co-axial cable of 5 meters
14. Sensor length 120 mm
Transmitter
16. pH Range / Resolution / Accuracy 0 – 14 pH, Programmable Span / 0.01 pH / +/-
0.01 pH
17. Temperature Range / Resolution / -20º C TO +200º C / 0.01º C / +/- 0.1º C
Accuracy
Page 202 of 245

18. Span 2pH – 14pH
20. Keypad factor.
3 button keypad for user friendly menu
interface
21. Comm. Protocol HART Communication Protocol
contacts
23. Calibration Single/Dual Point Calibration
25. Power requirements 12 – 36 VDC with maximum load 600 Ώ @
24 VDC
27. Enclosure material Sheet Metal Enclosure
28. Cable glands 2 pin, 6 pin Terminal Blocks
29. Mounting type Panel
30. Cut out dimensions 92 x 92 x 160 mm
31. Protection class IP 54 (front)
32. Ambient temperature operating -20 to +60º C
range
33. Maximum relative humidity 90% Non-Condensation
34. Electrode holder
35. Holder type Flow through assembly
36. MOC PP
37. Holder connection NPT process connection
38. Make Yokogawa/ABB/Emerson/Forbes
Marshall//E&H/HACH/GLI/Equivalent
Turbidity Analyzer:
controller located in the panel for measurement of Turbidity value of the process media &
self-cleaning system with Air flushing line shall be provided to clean the sensor to avoid
coating of foreign materials.
Page 203 of 245

Data sheet for Turbidity Analyzer
1. Instrument Range 0.02-50 NTU
2. Measuring principle 900 Scattering Light
3. Cleaning Ultrasonic Cleaning
4. Temperature rating 1– 50 deg.c
5. Operating pressure 14 Bar built in pressure regulator
6. Sample flow 0.1 Lit/Min to 1 Lit/Min
7. Accuracy <10 NTU: 0.0001NTU
<40 NTU: +/- 2% of reading or 0.02
NTU whichever is greater
>40 NTU: +/-5% of reading
8. Response time less than 5 sec
9. Displayed resolution 0.0001 NTU
10. Display type Multi Line LCD
11. Calibration Reusable calibration cuvettes (With
Traceable Liquid Standard)
12. Enclosure protection IP66
13. Enclosure material ABS
14. Wetted parts Nylon, glass, silicon, PP, SS 304
15. Outputs 4-20 mA, Modbus, programmable relay
contacts

17. Make Forbes Marshall /HACH /Yokogawa
/ABB/Equivalent
Conductivity Analyzer:
controller located in the panel for measurement of Conductivity value of the process media
Data sheet for Conductivity Analyzer

1. Instrument Range Cell Constant: 0.01, 0.1, 1, 10 Conductivity
Page 204 of 245

Range: 0.01 µS/cm to 100 milliS/cm
Sensors
2. Type 2 Pole cell, Retractable type

3. Cell constant K=0.01 to 1
4. Electrode connection 1 “NPT
5. Temperature rating 150ºC
6. Pressure rating 6 bar
7. Electrode material SS 316
8. Temperature sensor Pt 100 /1000
9. Cable Integrated 3-meter cable
Transmitter

11. 0 to 5000 μS/cm / 1 / Better than 0.5% of FS
Conductivity Range / Resolution /
12. 0 to 1000 mS/cm / 1 / Better than
Accuracy
0.5% of FS
13. Temperature Range / Resolution / -20º C TO +200º C / 0.01º C / +/- 0.1 º C
Accuracy
14. Span 5% of selected range
factor.
16. Keypad 3 button keypad & magnetic pin programming
for user friendly menu interface
17. Communication protocol HART Communication Protocol
contacts
19. Calibration Single Point Calibration for Process
21. Power requirements 12 – 36 VDC with maximum load 600
Ώ @ 24 VDC
23. Enclosure material Die-cast Aluminum (LM6) with epoxy paint
(Non - corrosive)
Page 205 of 245

24. Mounting type 2" Pipe Type (Vertical)
25. Protection class IP 67
26. Maximum relative humidity 90% Non-Condensation
Electrode holder
27. Holder type Direct

28. MOC PP
29. Holder connection ½” Inlet & Outlet tapping
30. Make Forbes
Marshall/HACH/Yokogawa/E&H/Equivalent
Dissolved Oxygen Analyzer:

controller located in the panel for measurement of DO value of the process media & self-
Data sheet for Dissolved Oxygen Analyzer

General
1. Instrument Range 0 to 20 ppm

Sensors
2. Type Optical DO sensor
3. Supply voltage 7 to 30 V DC
4. Body Material SS 316L
5. Temperature rating 0 – 130 deg c #
6. Pressure rating 12 Bar at 130 deg C
7. Shaft material Din 1.4435
8. Temperature sensor Built-in NTC 22k ohm in built
9. Optical source Blue / Red LED
10. Do sensor Black silicon coated luminophore
11. Sensor Cable
10 m terminated with quick-disconnect plug
12. Electrical connection Vario pin
13. Process connection Pg 13.5
14. Shaft diameter 12 mm
15. Shaft length 120 mm
Page 206 of 245

16. Wetted Materials Sensor Cap: Acrylic; Probe Body: CPVC,
Polyurethane, Viton, Noryl, 316 Stainless
Steel
17. Cable type VP8 connector
Transmitter
18. Type 4-wire, Microprocessor based
19. Display type 3 ½ digit , 14 mm height, LCD display
20. Mounting Wall/ pipe mount
21. Analog output 4-20 mA, Modbus/ HART, programmable
relay contacts
22. Temperature compensation Auto / manual
1 / 2 points - zero & slope,
23. Calibration
electronic/chemical
24. Accuracy +/- 0.03 pH
25. Repeatability +/- 0.1% FSD
26. Zero & span adjustment From front panel keyboard
Incorrect - programming, asymmetry
27. Diagnostics potential, slope potential, temperature sensor
open/short
28. Enclosure material PBT
30. Power supply Universal
31. Dimensions As per Vendor Design
32. Housing material SS 316L
33. Electrode Holder type Float type
34. Holder MOC PP
35. Electrode connection Outer Threaded
36. Process connection NA
37. Make HACH/ WTW / E+H/ Emerson/ Forbes
Marshall
Data sheet for FRC Analyzer:

controller located in the panel for measurement of FRC value of the process media & self-
Data sheet for FRC Analyzer
Page 207 of 245

Sensor
1. Measurement Range 0 to 10 ppm
2. Lower Detection Limit 30 ppb
3. Resolution 1 ppb
4. Accuracy +/- 3 %
5. Repeatability 30 ppb
6. Response time 140 seconds
7. Pressure Limit 0.5 bar
8. Sample Flow Rate 30 to 50 L / Hour
9. Cable Length 1m
10. Cable Connection 5 pin , M12 Connector
11. Material Corrosion –resistant Material
12. Operating Temperature 0 to 45 deg C
13. Power 12 vdc
14. Mounting Flat, Vertical Surface
Transmitter
15. Type 4-wire, Microprocessor based
16. Display type 3 ½ digit, 14 mm height, LCD display
17. Mounting Wall/ pipe mount
18. Analog output 4-20 mA, Modbus, programmable relay
contacts
19. Temperature compensation Auto / manual
20. Calibration 1 / 2 points - zero & slope,
electronic/chemical
21. Accuracy +/- 0.03 pH
22. Repeatability +/- 0.1% FSD
23. Zero & span adjustment From front panel keyboard
24. Diagnostics Incorrect - programming, asymmetry
potential, slope potential, temperature sensor
open/short
25. Enclosure material PBT
27. Power supply Universal
28. Make Yokogawa/Forbes
Marshal/Emerson/HACH/Equivalent
Pressure Gauge
Pressure gauges SS 316 filled with Glycerin shall comply with IS 3624/ BS 1780. For
arduous duty where the gauge is subject to pressure pulsations and/or vibration, it shall be
Page 208 of 245

provided with a glycerin filled dial. In chlorine applications the diaphragm shall be
tantalum. For other fluids an appropriate non- corrosive diaphragm material shall be used.
The zero and span of pressure gauge shall not change by more than ±0.1 % of the span per
ºC changes in ambient temperature. The gauges shall be of precision type. Manual Zero
Adjustment Knob to be provided for Calibration The range of the pressure gauge shall be
selected in such a way that the operating pressure shall be indicated at 60% of the full
scale. For example: If the operating pressure is 6 Kg/Sq.cm, the pressure gauge shall be
selected with a range of 0 to 10 Kg/Sq.cm.
Data sheet for Pressure Gauge

1. Service Pressure gauge shall be provided in the
delivery headers of all pumps, blowers and
compressor and at location shown in P & I
drawings
2. Type Chemical sealed diaphragm type with
bourdon SS 316L filled with Glycerin
3. Accuracy ± 1 % of full scale
4. Dial size 150 mm
5. Glass Shatterproof
6. Over range protection 25% above maximum pressure
7. Connection Flanged bottom entry
8. Housing material Die cast aluminum
9. Wetted parts & internal parts SS 316
10. Accessories Snubbers, isolation valve and drain valve
Impulse tubing and fittings
Diaphragm seal shall be provided
11. Case SS 316L
12. Window Shatter proof glass
13. Pointer travel Not less than 200 deg and not more than
270 deg arc
14. Make Forbes Marshall/Waree/General
Pressure transmitter:
Pressure Transmitter: SS 316 internal & SS 304 outer casing, with 4-20 mA output, LED or
LCD with backlight display, Enclosure: IP 67 or IP 65 with weather proof canopy, Voltage:
24 Volt DC, make: Sensor: suitable for corrosive/scale forming effluent
Data sheet for Pressure transmitter
Page 209 of 245

1. Transmitter DP based
2. Type Microprocessor based
3. Power Supply from 24-volt D.C
4. Wiring system 2 wire system
5. Display LED or LCD
6. Accuracy 0.01 %
7. Sensor Suitable for corrosive /scale forming liquor
8. Mounting Separate field mounting
9. Enclosure IP 67 or IP65
10. Output 4- 20 Ma / Modbus
11. Housing Die cast aluminum
12. Diaphragm Hastelloy C
13. Filling Fluid Silicon DC 200
14. Make ABB/Yokogawa/Forbes
Marshal/Emerson/Equivalent
Data sheet for Pressure Switch
1. Make Switzer/Indfoss/GIC/Equivalent
2. Type Bellows
3. Range Low and High as specified
4. Location High Pressure Pump suction
5. Mounting Field
6. Repeatability +/-0.5% FSR
7. Sensing Element- Type/Material Bellows /316 L SS
8. Wetted Parts 316SS
9. Maximum Working
Pressure/Temperature 18Kg/cm2 & 170 Deg.C
10. Contact Form & rating 1xSPDT-230VAC at 15 Amps

11. Micro Switch type Snap Acting
12. Enclosure Die Cast Aluminum.
Page 210 of 245

13. Protection Class IP67
14. Process Connection 1/2" NPT(F) With 316 Adaptor
15. Electrical Connection 1/2" NPT(F) With MS Adaptor
16. Cable Gland 1/2 NPTM Nickel Plated Brass Double
Compression Weather Proof
17. Mounting 2" Pipe-U Bolts& Nuts
Data sheet for RTD with Indicator

1. Pressure (Max) Kg/Cm² Atm
2. Temperature (Max) °C 120°C
3. Accuracy ±0.25 % Of. FSD. Class A
4. Type 2xPt-100, 3 Wire System
5. Leads Cu. Leads
6. Sheath O.D. 6 mm
7. Sheath Material SS 316
8. Connection 3 wire
9. Size As specified
10. Calibration As Per IEC 60751
11. Assembly Nipple Union Nipple
12. Material SS 316
13. Nipple Size 1/2 " NPT
14. Cover Type Screwed Cap & Chain
15. Material Die Cast Aluminum
16. Cable Entry 1/2"NPT (F); 2 Nos.
17. Enclosure IP 65
18. Area Classification Safe
19. Make M/s. General Instruments
20. Remote Indicator
21. Display LED/LCD
Page 211 of 245

22. Power Supply Universal/24 V DC
23. Relay Contact 2 Nos.
24. Output 4-20 mA/ Modbuswith programmable
relay
25. Configuration High low alarm with offset option
26. Make Emerson/Yokogawa/Equivalent
Data sheet for Temperature Gauge

1. Type Bimetallic, Every Angle Type
2. Mounting Direct Mounted
3. Dial Size 150 mm
4. Material SS 304
5. Colour White with Black Figures
6. Case Material SS 304
7. Bezel Ring Bayonet
8. Lense Shatter Proof Glass
9. Protection Category IP - 65
10. Connection Bottom
11. Accuracy +/-1% of FSD
12. Movement SS 304
13. Zero Reset External
14. Material SS 316L
15. Diameter 10mm
16. Over Range Protection ±130% of FSD
17. Connection 1/2"NPT(M) adjustable Gland in
Double Compression Nickel-Plated
Brass
Silt density index
Data sheet for Silt density index
Page 212 of 245

1. Discrete Outputs One Normally-Open Form A, 2 Amp, 30
VDC/240VAC
2. Analog Outputs Four 4-20 mA (optional)
3. Serial Ports One RS-232 (RJ Connector) for data
download
4. User Interface 4 x 20 LCD with backlight; 4 Keys, Tactile
5. Power Universal
6. Enclosure NEMA 4X enclosure
7. Mounting Wall Mounting
8. Electrical All connections via removable screw
terminals.
9. Make MILLIPORE, GE Osmosis
10. Accessories Booster Pump, SDI Paper
Data sheet for Variable Frequency Drive

1. Application Constant Torque Application
2. Rated input voltage 3 Phase, 415 V
3. Rated input frequency 50 HZ
4. O/P voltage 3 phase maximum equal to input voltage
5. Ambient temperature Maximum 60º c
6. Switching frequency 2 to 16 kHz adjustable
7. Control input/output 6 programmable logic
input,3AI,1AO,1fault change over
relay,1 configurable relay
8. Communication Rs-485 Modbus serial line
9. Acc/dec ramp 0.1 to 999.9 seconds, linear
10. Motor protection Over lode protection
11. Protection Short circuit, over voltage, under
voltage, phase loss, ground fault, over
temp.
Page 213 of 245

12. Standard function 2 wire /3 wire control, ramp stop, fast
stop, freewheel stop, ramp switching,+/-
speed, reference switching, keypad,
motor switching, automatic restart, fault
management, PID regulator.
13. Panel Powder Coated Rittal make Free
standing Panel with 2 mm thick sheet
metal with necessary air louvers, air
filters, 6 inch Panel cooling fan, Potentio
meter (10K ohms) for speed variation,
Panel Indicator for 3 phase power
supply, Drive Run/Stop, Trip. Selector
switch for selecting pump 1 or 2, Control
& power contactors for selection of
pump 1 or 2. 32 Amps SFU with 20
Amps fuse 3 Nos, Input Choke – 1 No.
for suppressing the surge through
incoming power supply
14. Make Schneider/ABB/Hitachi/Equivalent
Data sheet for Soft starter with By pass Contactor

1. Power Supply Main Voltage 220 ... 460 Vac (+10%, -
15%)
Control Voltage 90 ...250 Vac
Frequency 50 / 60Hz (+/- 5Hz)
2. Enclosure IP00 Protected Chassis
3. Duty Cycle 300% rated current during
10 Hour
4. Control Inputs Digital One input for Start/Stop
(90 - 250 Vac)
One input for Fault Reset
(90 - 250 Vac)
5. Control Outputs Digital One relay output for Run
indication (1 Amp - 250V)
One relay output for Ful
Voltage indication (1 Amp
- 250V)
Page 214 of 245

6. Communication Serial Interface RS-232C
7. Safety Protections Motor overload*
Locked rotor*
Over current*
Phase sequence*
Phase loss*
* Can be disabled SCR overload
8. Control Pedestal Voltage 30 … 80% of line voltage
Features
Accel Ramp 1 ... 20 seconds
Decel Ramp Off ... 20 seconds
Motor Current 30 ... 100% of SSW-05
rating
Fault Reset Manual or Automatic
9. Ambient Temperature 32 ... 131ºF (0 - 55ºC)
Humidity 0…90% Non- Condensing
Altitude 0 ... 1000m (3,300 ft) -
Standard Operation at
Rated Current
Up to 4000m (13,200 ft) –
With Current Derating
(1%/100m (328 ft) above
1000m (13,200 ft))
10. By pass Contactor Required
11. Conformities Low Voltage UL 508 - Industrial
Control Equipment
IEC 60947-4-2
EMC EMC Directive 89
/ 336 / EEC -
Industrial Environment,
Class A
Page 215 of 245

Data sheet for Rotameter
1. Range 300-3000 LPH at 20 Deg C (water)
2. Meter Body Powder coated M.S
3. Float SS 316
4. Wetted Parts SS 316
5. Packings Neoprene PTFE or Silicon
6. Tube Borosilicate Glass
7. Scale Length 175mm
8. Temperature Maximum Upto 200 Deg C Depends on Gland Materials
9. Connection Top & Bottom Flanged # 150
10. Accuracy +/- 2% of full scale
11. Repeatability 0.50%
12. Range 10:01
13. Flange Material SS 316
14. Make Flow Max/Eureka/Flow Tech
15. Model FSG-7
Datasheet for Motorized valve:
S.No. Description Specification

1. Ball valve Electrically operated
2. Application Remotely controlled valve on board
3. Voltage 24 V
4. Operating current@ max. torque .2 A ± 10 % @ 13.8 V 1.2 A ± 10 % @ 27.6 V 4.1 A ±
5 % @ 27.6 V
5. Quiescent current 50 ± 5 mA 25 ± 5 mA 60 ± 5 mA Max.
6. Torque 40 Nm (29.5 ft.lb)
7. Max. pressure 60 bar (870 psi)
8. Operation Open/Close
Page 216 of 245

S.No. Description Specification
9. Angle of rotation 90˚
10. Direction of rotation Left/right
11. Operating time open-close 12 s 25 s
12. Position indication Limit Switch feedback Visual indicator
13. Manual override Available
14. Protection IP 68
15. Ball valve material SS316
16. Relevant CE Standards EN55014 (EMC Directive 2004/108/EC) : ISO8846
(RCD 94/25/EC amended by 2003/44/EC)
UPS & Servo Stabilizer

Advanced DSP Controlled UPS System, Pure Sine wave, SPWM Technology with IGBT’s,
High MTBF and minimum MTTR, SNMP interface – web enabled monitoring, Full function
LCD display to monitor electrical parameters, Overload & Short circuit protection with
audible alarm, Built-in spike and surge protector, Static bypass switch.
Data sheet for UPS & Servo Stabilizer

1. Input Specification Voltages 120, 208, 240, or 277 VAC
Voltage Range 3 & 5 KVA -20% to +15%
Frequency Slew rate of 2 Hz/sec
2. Input circuit breaker provided
protection to the unit, load
Protection
and personnel. Input Circuit
Breaker will be higher
interruption rated (10, 42,
and 65 KAIC)
Input Current Sinusoidal, .95 PF under all
line/load conditions
Number of Wires 2 Wires Plus Ground
3. Output Available Output Ratings 3 KVA / 2.1 KW
Specification
(KVA or KW to be specified) 5.0 KVA / 3.5 KW
7.5 KVA / 5.2KW 10KVA /
7KW
Page 217 of 245

12.5 KVA / 8.75 KW
15KVA/ 10.5KW
20 KVA / 14 KW
15 KW
Output Voltages (All voltages Same voltage as Input or
are standard and present on all Multiple Output 120/240,
systems with output 120/208, or 120/277 VAC
transformer)
Voltage Regulations ± 3% No Load to Full Load,
High Line to Low Line
Frequency 60 Hz +/-0. 5 HZ (when on
inverter)
Output Wave Form Sine Wave
Harmonic Distortion <5 % THD; <3% Single
Harmonic
Crest Factor 3 to 1
Overload 125% for Ten (10) Minutes;
150% Surge for 10 seconds
Internal electronic overload
protection. Circuit breaker
Protection
provides inherent overload
protection. Factory
selectable voltage 120, 208,
240, or 277 for input or
output voltage
Efficiency 90% typical
Isolation Complete from line. Output
neutral bonded to ground
Noise Isolation 120 dB Common-Mode: -60
dB Transverse- Mode
Power Connections Hard Wired (Terminal Block)
Optional Output Receptacle
Panels w/NEMA Type
Receptacles and Overcurrent
Protection
Page 218 of 245

4. 2 Wires Plus Ground (120 or
277 VAC Output) 3 Wires
Number of Wires
Plus Ground (120/240 VAC
Output)
5. Monitoring and Indicators Internal Liquid Crystal
Communication Display for all alarms
Contacts (electrically dry Closing contacts for each of
the following conditions:
Rated for 120 VAC
Unit on Battery
@ 2 amps or 24
Low Battery
VDC @ 5
Summary Alarm
amps)
UPS On
Input Fail
Local Display 160-Character LCD Display
Computer communications RS-232 Interface Port RS-
485 Interface Port
6. Environmental Agency Listings (Product UL1778, CSA Listed to
specifications listings) UL924/A for outdoor
application
Surge with stand ability ANSI C62.41-1980
Categories A & B
Temperature 0° to +40°C (Operating) -
20° to +40°C (Storage)
Relative Humidity 0 to 95% Non-Condensing
Altitude Up to 6,000 Feet (1,829
Meters)
859 BTU/Hour 3 KVA
1,314 BTU/Hour 5 KVA
Heat Dissipation 2,629 BTU/Hour 10 KVA
@full load 3,287 BTU/Hour 12.5 KVA
Page 219 of 245

Audible Noise 57 dB measures on “response
curve A”
7. Physical Dimension (W x D x H) 39” (W) x 20” (D) x 74.5”
specification (H)
3 KVA: 1246 lbs, battery
included
5 KVA: 1399 lbs, battery
Weight
included
HE unit and Battery Cab
7.5 KVA: 1935 lbs
10 KVA: 1080 lbs, 1771 lbs
(battery) 12.5 KVA: 1305 lbs,
2075 lbs (battery) 15 KVA:
1545 lbs, 2549 lbs (battery)
20 KVA: 1999 lbs, 2549 lbs
(battery)
The UPS manufacturer shall warrant the UPS against defects in materials and workmanship for
one (1) years. The warranty shall cover all parts and labor for one
(1) year. Maintenance contract packages shall also be available.
FABRICATION
All materials and components making up the UPS shall be new, of current manufacture, and
shall not have been in prior service except as required during factory testing. The UPS shall be
constructed of replaceable subassemblies. All active electronic devices shall be solid-state.
a) Wiring
Wiring practices, materials, and coding shall be in accordance with the requirements of the
National Electrical Code (NFPA 70) and other applicable codes and standards.
b) Cabinet
The UPS unit comprised of: power module, battery module, control module, system
interconnect module and user interface module housed in a single freestanding enclosure and
meets the requirements of IP20. The UPS cabinet shall be anodized aluminum with a customized
coating to meet NEMA 3R requirements.
c) Cooling
The UPS shall be forced air cooled by internally mounted fans. The fans shall be redundant in
nature to ensure maximum reliability. The fans shall be easily replaceable without the use of
special tools.
Page 220 of 245

COMPONENTS
Input Converter
General
Incoming AC power shall be converted to a regulated DC output by the input converter for
supplying DC power to the inverter. The input converter shall provide input power factor
correction to .95 or greater regardless of the nature of the load and input current shall be
sinusoidal with less than 7 % total harmonic distortion regardless of load.
AC Input Current Limit
The input converter shall be provided with AC input over current protection. The unit has the
Input Circuit Breaker.
Input Protection
The UPS shall have built-in protection against under voltage, Overcurrent, and over voltage
conditions including low-energy surges introduced on the primary AC source and the bypass
source. The UPS cabinet shall contain an optional input breaker sized to supply full (up to the
20 KVA model) rated load and to recharge the battery at the same time.
Input Converter
Input Converter shall automatically monitor and correct the input current to be sinusoidal (power
factor correction)
Battery Recharge
To prolong battery life, the UPS shall contain battery charging. When an equal number of power
modules and battery modules are fitted the battery charger shall be able to recharge the internal
batteries to 90% charge in less than ten hours at nominal input voltage and nominal ambient
temperature.
Inverter
General
The inverter shall convert DC power from the input converter output, or the battery, into precise
regulated sine wave AC power for supporting the critical AC load.
Overload
The inverter shall be capable of supplying current and voltage for overloads exceeding 100%
and up to 125% of full load current. A visual indicator / alarm shall indicate overload operation.
For greater currents or longer time duration, the inverter shall have electronic current-limiting
protection to prevent damage to components. The inverter shall be self-protecting against any
magnitude of connected output overload. Inverter control logic shall sense and disconnect the
inverter from the critical AC load without the requirement to clear protective fuses. The load
shall be transferred to bypass when any of the above conditions are exceeded.
Maximum Load Alarm
The user receives an alarm when the unit is overloaded (greater than 100%) such that the UPS
will alarm before an overload condition.
Page 221 of 245

Output Frequency
A microprocessor-controlled oscillator shall maintain the output frequency of the inverter. The
oscillator shall hold the inverter output frequency to +/- 0.5% for steady state and transient
conditions. The inverter shall track the bypass continuously providing the bypass source
maintains a frequency within the user selected synchronization range. If the bypass source fails
to remain within the selected range, the inverter shall revert to the internal oscillator.
Output Protection
The UPS inverter shall employ electronic current limiting.
Battery over Discharge Protection
To prevent battery damage from over discharging, the UPS control logic shall control the
shutdown voltage set point. This point is dependent on the levels set by the manufacturer of the
particular battery system employed.
Display and Controls
General
An internal panel will consist of a four line by twenty-character LCD display for additional
alarm/configuration information. The unit shall also provide the data via RS232 / RS485.
If there is a fault condition, the UPS shall attempt to maintain conditioned power to the load, or
at minimum transfer to bypass.
There shall also be indication on each module should the module fail and need to be replaced.
In addition to a visual fault signal, the UPS shall also record fault occurrences in a rolling event
log. The event log on the standard unit shall record up to 255 occurrences, with the oldest events
discarded first, etc. The user shall have access to the event log through the RS 232 / RS 485
Buses. Every alarm and/or event recorded in the event log will contain a time and date stamp.
Automatic Battery Test
The UPS shall initiate an automatic battery testing periodically, at a programmed day and time
of day. The user will be able view the log of predetermined battery tests via the RS232 / RS 485.
Should a failure of the battery occur, the UPS will immediately return to normal mode and fault
signals (visual and remote via serial ports) shall be communicated. No remote (via serial/contact
closures) indication of the battery test shall be communicated during the duration of the
automatic battery test.
The automatic battery test factory settings shall be enabled at a once a month at regular interval.
Bypass
General
A bypass circuit shall be provided as an integral part of the UPS. The bypass shall have an
overload rating of 300% rated full load for 10 cycles and 1000% for sub-cycle fault clearing.
The bypass control logic shall contain an automatic transfer control circuit that senses the status
of the inverter logic signals, and operating and alarm conditions. This control circuit shall
provide a transfer of the load to the bypass source, without exceeding the transient limits
specified herein, when an overload or malfunction occurs within the UPS.
Page 222 of 245

Automatic Transfers
The transfer control logic shall automatically activate the bypass, transferring the critical AC
load to the bypass source, after the transfer logic senses one of the following conditions:
Inverter overload capacity exceeded Inverter over temperature
UPS fault condition
For inverter overload conditions, the transfer control logic shall inhibit an automatic transfer of
the critical load to the bypass source if one of the following conditions exists:
Inverter/Bypass voltage difference exceeding preset limits (±15 % of nominal) Bypass
frequency out of preset limits (± 5 % of nominal frequency)
UPS fault condition present
Internal Battery
Flame retardant, valve regulated, gas recombination, lead acid batteries shall be used as a stored-
energy source for the specified UPS system. The expected life of the battery shall be 10 years
or a minimum 250 complete discharge cycles. For extended battery reserve time, additional
battery modules may be added, if the frame size allows, external battery cabinets shall be also
be available as an option.
COMMUNICATIONS
The UPS shall allow for flexibility in communications. The UPS shall be able to communicate
through two communications ports simultaneously; the media of either communications port
may change without affecting the operation of the UPS. The use of relay contacts shall not
affect the operation of the two communications ports.
Relay Contacts
The relay contacts shall be available through at least one DB-9F communication connector, and
shall be compatible with the AS 400 systems. The UPS shall communicate via relay contact
closure the following information:
Low Battery On Bypass
Summary Alarm UPS On
Input Fail
One connector to provide relay contacts shall be fitted on all UPS models as standard. Relay
contacts shall be rated 48 VDC, 1 A. Additional signals such as on bypass and summary alarm
shall be provided.
UPS Status Information
Page 223 of 245

The software shall be able to retrieve all status information present in the UPS (and available on
the display). Retrieval of data shall be through either serial communications or through a
network connection via RS 232 / RS 485
MODES OF OPERATION
NORMAL: During normal operation, utility (or generator) power is converted to DC, drawing
sinusoidal input AC current at unity power factor under all load conditions, this converter
supplies DC power to the Inverter and Battery Charger sections. The Inverter supplies the load
through the Static Bypass Switch (SBS) without using the energy stored in the battery.
EMERGENCY: Upon loss of input power or when power exceeds the specified input limits,
the control logic shall allow the inverter to draw energy from the battery without interruption to
the load and disconnect the input line. The transfer to battery shall be uninterrupted - "no break”
power transfer. The inverter shall supply power from the batteries, through the Static Bypass
Switch, to the critical load. The output shall be sinusoidal and within specified limits. If power
is not restored before the batteries have been exhausted, the UPS shall completely shut down -
protecting the batteries from possible damage.
Failure: In the event of a component failure in either the Rectifier/Converter or the Inverter the
unit’s SBS will transfer the load, without interruption to the utility power and will alarm
providing visual and closed contacts for remote enunciation.
RECHARGE: Upon restoration of input utility power and before the batteries are completely
exhausted, the UPS shall automatically return to normal operation. This retransfer to normal
operation shall be uninterrupted. The battery charger shall automatically recharge the
batteries to full capacity.
Data sheet for Servo Stabilizer
S. No Particulars Single Phase Three Phase

1. Capacities 0.5 KVA to 50 KVA 3 KVA to 1000 KVA
2. Input Voltage Range 195 V to 265 V 340 V to 460 V
Normal Wide 170 V to 270 V 300 V to 465 V
Extended 140 V to 270 V 240 V to 465 V
3. Output Voltage 220 V / 230 V / 240 V 380 V / 400 V / 415 V
4. Regulation + / - 1% + / - 1%
5. Efficiency >96% >96%
6. Input Frequency 50 Hz + / - 3Hz 50 Hz + / - 3Hz
7. Wave from Same as Input Same as Input
8. Effect of Power factor Nil Nil
9. Motor drive Heavy duty AC Synchronous Heavy duty AC
Motor Synchronous Motor
10. Indication Mains On Output On Low Mains On Output On
Cut-off High Cut-off Low Cut-off High Cut-off
Page 224 of 245

S. No Particulars Single Phase Three Phase
11. Metering Analog Voltmeter to read Analog Voltmeter to read
Input & Output Voltage with Input Voltage with
Selector Switch Selector Switch, Analog
Voltmeter to read Output
Voltage with Selector
Switch, Analog Current
meter for above 50 KVA.
12. Rate of Correction 35V/Sec or up to 105V/Sec 35V/Sec or up to
105V/Sec
13. Operating 0 45” C 0 45” C
Temperature
14. Duty cycle Continuous Continuous
15. Nature of Cooling Air Cooled / Oil Cooled Air Cooled / Oil Cooled
16. Protection(Optional) Over Voltage Under Voltage Over Voltage Under
Over Load. Short Circuit Voltage
Over Load. Short Circuit
17. Stabilizer Standard As per IS 9815 As per IS 9815
18. Oil Standard As per IS 335 As per IS 335
Surge protection devices

Two numbers of surge protection devices (SPDs) shall be provided for each signal and power
loop for field instruments located outdoors. One SPD shall be provided in the field near
transmitter and the other SPD of the loop shall be mounted in the control panel/ console. SPDs
shall also be provided in the 240 V AC incoming power supply to panels/ consoles. Surge
protection devices (SPDs) shall be suitable for withstanding the surge arising out of high energy
static discharge / lightning discharges and protect the instrument to which it is connected against
damage. SPDs shall provide protection through the use of quick acting semiconductors like
Tranzorb, Zener diodes; visitors and an automatic disconnect and reset circuit. SPDs shall be
passive and shall require negligible power for operation. During the occurrence of a surge it
shall clamp on the allowable voltage and pass the excess voltage to the ground. The SPD shall
be self-resetting to minimize the down time of the measurement loop.
SPDs shall have a weather proof casing and shall be suitable for field/back of panel mounting.
There should be total isolation between input, output and ground terminals. The rating and type
of SPDs shall be as per the instrument manufacturer’s recommendation and shall be subject to
Employer’s representative’s approval.
IEC 62305-1,2,3,4,5-54, IEC 61643-11-21, IEC
1. Standard
62561- Part 1-7, IS 3043:1987, NEC SP30:2011
Page 225 of 245

Voltage Protection
2. Level & Breaking As per design
Capcity
3. Type 1 & 2 Based on the requirement
4. Surge Arrester type Signal & Voltage Protection
5. Mounting Mode Fixed

6. Response type < 1 ns
Specification of PLC Panel

Fabrication shall be of 3 mm thick, CRCA sheet steel, suitably braced internally for structural
rigidity and strength. Front panels or sections containing instruments shall be not less than 3
mm CRCA thick stretcher levelled sheet steel, reinforced to prevent warping or distortion.
All sections shall be descaled, decreased, filled, ground and finished. The enclosure when
fabricated of steel shall be finished with two rust-resistant phosphate prime coats and two air
dry silicone alkyd finish coats of enamel which shall be applied by either the hot air spray or
conventional cold spray methods. The final finish shall be smooth, free of runs, and uniform in
tone and thickness. All panel equipment shall be mounted and wired on within the cabinet.
Wiring shall comply with latest local code. All wiring within the panel shall be grouped together
with harnesses or ducts and secured to the structure. All wiring shall be numbered in accordance
with the numbering system used on the wiring/connection diagrams. Wiring and connection
diagrams shall conform to ISA S5. An Instrument Loop Diagrams and shall be submitted as part
of the shop drawings for approval. Power and low voltage DC signal wiring shall be routed in
separate wire ways. Crossing of the two system wires shall be at right angles. Parallel troughs
of different systems shall be separated by a minimum of 300 mm. All wiring shall terminate in
a master terminal board, rigid type and numbered. The master terminal board shall have a
minimum of 25 percent spares. Terminal blocks shall be arranged in vertical rows and separated
into groups. (Power, AC control, DC signal). Terminal blocks shall be barrier type with the
appropriate voltage rating (600 volts minimum). They shall be the raised channel mounted type
for DIN rail mounting (marshalling). Wiring trough for supporting internal wiring shall be pastil
type with snap on covers. Wiring connections to the terminal strips shall be with snap on covers.
Double-centering beads shall position conductors in the connection space and shall allow both
solid and standard conductors to be inserted without the need for crimping or tinning the
conductors. Wire and tube makers shall be the sleeve type with heat impressed letters and
numbers. DIN rail mounted terminal strips shall be provided for the purpose of connecting all
control and signal wiring. Direct interlock wiring between equipment will not be allowed. Only
one side of a terminal block row shall be used for terminal wiring. The field wiring side of the
terminal shall within 150 mm of the side panel or adjacent terminal. Wiring troughs shall not be
filled to more than 60 percent visible fill. Wiring trough covers shall be match marked to identify
placement. If component identification is shown on covers for visibility, the ID shall also appear
on the mounting sub-panel. A plug-in header with socket outlets and flexible plug-in leads shall
Page 226 of 245
be supplied for instrument power supplies. A spare switched socket outlet shall be provided. An
overhead internal light shall be provided. Front layout shall be submitted for approval. Print
storage pockets shall be provided on the inside of each panel. Its size shall be of sufficient size
to hold all of the prints required to service the equipment. Reduced drawings shall be provided
to be stored in these pockets.
The instrument panels shall include:
• Strip heater
• Ventilating fan
• Intake louvers
• Gasketed door
The heater voltage shall be 230 volts AC. The heater shall have an on/off switch mounted inside
the enclosure. The ventilating fan shall be thermo statistically controlled. The intake louvers
shall be fully baffled with filters and insect screens.
All components shall be mounted in a manner that will permit servicing, adjustment, testing and
removal without disconnecting, moving or removing any other component. Components shall
be mounted on plates on the inside of panels in such a manner that allows for removal of the
components without removal of the plate. Components shall not be mounted directly to the
enclosure. Mounting shall be rigid and stable unless shock mounting is required otherwise by
the manufacture to protect equipment from vibration Components mounting shall be oriented in
accordance with industry standard practices. All internal components shall be identified with
suitable plastic or metal engraved tags attached with drive pins adjacent to (not on) each
component identifying the component in accordance with the drawing, specifications, and
supplier's data.
PLC/SCADA:
PLC system shall have a redundancy for Processor, Power module, Comminication module. The
application program shall include software for functions like interlock and shutdown logic,
programming/program modification, documentation etc. Two sets copies of application
program shall be supplied.
The system shall be of modular construction and expandable in the future by additional of
modules. All field signals shall be provided with galvanic isolation the system shall be able to
operate satisfactorily from 5 deg to 50 deg c (ambient temperature) and 20 to 80% of non-
condensing humidity.
The system shall have the capability of detecting open sensors. The I/O rack processor shall
have separate power supplies.
The programming of the system shall be as per logic and/or ladder diagrams.
Configuration shall be offered as per requirement of the project and process system
Each I/O shall be electrically isolated from external control circuits. The minimum isolation
level between I/O and logic circuits shall be 1000V DC. In addition, each I/O shall be protected
against the reversal of polarity of the power supply voltage to I/O.
Isolation shall be provided between the programming panel and related sub system.
Page 227 of 245

I/O racks of PLC shall have 10% usable spare slots for installation of I/O modules of each type
in the future and these racks shall be part of the offer.
It shall be possible to extend the memory by additional 20% at a later stage in the processor
system.
Relays shall be used to interface process input/output with the PLC and 20% additional relays
shall be provided as spare each input shall be provided with filters to filter out any noise in the
input line or noise because of input contact bouncing The interrogation voltage to the
input/output contact shall be powered from separate power supply and shall not be a part of
PLC. The power supply shall be at one point.
Potential free/only contact with contact ratings as detailed below shall be provided for output
contacts from PLC. All output cards for driving pneumatic valves, alarm Annunciators – 110V
AC, 0.5A (Inductive) 24V DC and 2A (Inductive). All LT motors/pumps/compressor output
cards # 240V AC, 5A (Inductive). Each output shall be short circuit proof and protected by a
fuse. Visual indication of fuses blown must be provided for each output.
Manual operation/forcing of any element connected to the PLC shall be possible from key board.
It shall be possible to modify and/or delete the application program without affecting the
outputs.
Start and stop of rotating electrical machineries as well as opening and closing of pneumatic
valves shall be possible from the instrumentation panel cum control desk through the PLC
console. All such displays shall be user configurable. Limit switch shall be provided in
pneumatic valves, to be interlinked with PLC/ SCADA to know the status of open and close
condition and interlock with respective equipment’s for ON/OFF.
The PLC printer shall be able to print the following:

i. Ladder/logic diagram
ii. Diagnostic messages
iii. Processor alarms and alarm report
iv. Diagnostic report on demand
v. Shut down reports
vi. I/O map
Event of history of all on-line measurement parameters, equipment ON/OFF, valves

open/close status. 3 mm thick CRCA sheet steel shall be used for fabrication of cabinets,
doors, as well as top, bottom and sides of the cabinets.
The Cabinet finish shall include sand blasting, grinding, chemical cleaning surface finishing
and two coats of high grade paints with wet sanding between two coats. Three coats of
paint in the cabinet Colour shall be given for non-glossy high satin finish. The Colour of
the cabinet shall be battle-ship grey.
The cabinet size shall be minimum 2100 mm high, 1200 mm wide and 1000 mm deep.
Front and rear access doors shall be provided. The construction of the cabinet shall be
modular and be able to accommodate 19” standard electrical racks. Each I/O module shall be
provided with separate terminals for individual inputs and outputs. One Sq.mm stranded
copper conductor wiring shall be used for inter cubicle and internal signal wiring shall be
Page 228 of 245

with 1.5 sq.mm stranded copper conductor. Two sq.mm cables/wires shall be used for power
wiring.
Earthing of cabinet, console and other equipment’s of the PLC system shall be provided with
earthing rings. These shall be connected to the main earth bus by means of a 25 x 3 mm GI
flat. A separate electronic earth pits shall be provided for PLC modules for interconnecting
earth pit and PLC module shall be used 10 sq.mm flexible multi strands copper cable.
Specification of CPU and I/O Modules
1. Redundancy PLC system shall have a redundancy for
Processor, Power module & Comminication
module
2. Processor type CPU Module
Sequential + Process control
3. I/O Capacity 1024 or more Discrete/Digital 1/0 256 or more
Analog 1/0 (All exclusively) Present 110
break-up required is as given overview.
4. CPU Type 32bit processor, HOT Redundant
5. User Memory Flash EPROMIEEPROM/battery backed RAM
6. Memory capacity 400 KB without extension card and 1000 KB
with extension card or more
Should be sufficient to have a minimum of 32
PID closed loops, 400 logic gates 100
timers/counters, 1024 words, 2048 bits etc .
7. Memory scan time Should be 0.15 ms/KB or better
8. Battery back up Required for RTC and memory
9. Overall Scanning time (Total Should not be more than 100 ms with maximum
time taken for I/O scan, logic I/Os and full memory.
execution, communication etc.)
10. Communications with OCS/ Ethernet IEEE802.3 (integrated Ethernet Port)
server with Modbus TCP/IP
11. Diagnostic indication Like Processor failure, RUN/STOP mode
status, Memory fault, Communication fault,
110 Interface or Address fault, Power Supply
fault, etc. should be provided by LEDs.
12. Floating point math Shall be available
13. Programming port It should be possible from OCS/Server
through communication port. If programming
port is separate, the supplier should supply at
necessary hardware so that it can be
programmed from Server or programming PC.
14. Mounting of CPU Shall fit to suppliers back plane bus
Datasheet of DI Module
Page 229 of 245
1. Type 24 V DC (Sinking type)
2. Type of input Potential free
3. No. of inputs 16/32* channels/ module
4. Input voltage range 0-30 v
5. Trigger voltage 12-30 v
6. Input current 10 mA max
7. Response Time 10 mS max
8. Optical Isolation 1500 V AC
9. Status of I/Os By on board LEDs for each Input
10. Power up and By LED on module
Module/channel error
indicator
11. Built-in Protection Against Short circuit, over-Voltage, Overload
and Reverse polarity (inversion)
12. Failure condition OFF (logic 0)
Table 5: Datasheet of DO Module
1. No. of outputs per 16/32* outputs per module.
2. Type Potential free, both NO and NC
contacts should be provided. If output
modules are not potential free then
the supplier shall provide relay
modules inside the PLC cabinet and
wire those with DO modules.
3. Relay contact rating 5A/230Y ac
4. Response time 15 ms ON -to- OFF and OFF- to- ON
5. Power up and Module/channel error By LED on module
indicator
6. Status indication Separate LED for each o/p
7. Isolation 1500 v AC for DO module
8. Protection With fuse
9. Built-in Protection Against Short circuit, over-Voltage,
Overload
and Reverse polarity (inversion)
Page 230 of 245

10. Failure condition OFF/ De-energized
Datasheet of AI Module for Single Ended Analog Inputs

1. Input type Current/Voltage Current: 4-20 mA
DCVoltage:0-10V,0-5V, l -5V DC
2. Type Single ended (sinking), shared channel
with common ground.
3. No. of channels 32/16 per module
4. Resolution 12 bit or better
5. Accuracy +/- 0.25 % (minimum) or better
6. Scan time IOO mS max
7. Input impedance (4-20 mA DC) 250 ohms max.
8. Isolation 1000 Vrms AC from 1/0 to Bus
1OOOVrms AC Channel to Ground
9. CMRR 80 dB or more
10. Reverse polarity protection Should be provided
11. Quantity As required
12. Calibration It should be possible to calibrate the
IO channels in the module by user.
13. Filtering and scaling scaling and (numeric) filtering of
measurement s based on configuration
parameters,
Datasheet of AI Module for Differential Ended Analog Inputs
1. Input type Current/Voltage Current: 4-20 mA DC
Voltage:0-10V,0-5V,1-5V DC
2. Type Differential ended (isolated inputs)
3. No. of channels 32 per module
5. Accuracy +/- 0.2 % (minimum) or better
6. Scan time 100 mS max
7. Input impedance (4-20 mA DC) 250 ohms max.
8. Isolation 200V DC Channel to Channel 1000
Vrms AC from I/O to Bus 1OOOVrms
AC Channel to Ground
Page 231 of 245
9. CMRR 80 dB or more
10. Reverse polarity protection Should be provided
11. Quantity As required
12. Calibration It should be possible to calibrate the
IO channels in the module by user.
13. Filtering and scaling Scaling and (numeric) filtering of
measurements based on configuration
parameters,
Datasheet of AO Module
1. Output range Current: 4-20 mA DC
2. Type Shared Output, common ground
3. No. of channels 4/8* channels/module
4. Isolation 1000 Vrms AC from 1/0 to Bus l000
Vrms AC Channel to Ground
5. Scan time 100 ms max
7. Accuracy +/- 0.25 % of FS or better
8. Load driving 600 ohm
9. CMRR 80dB or more
10. Failure condition 4mA or less
11. Protection Overload & Short Circuit protection
D/O Relay Module:

PLC interface, Pluggable Miniature Relay consisting of basic terminal block with push in
connection. Input Voltage: 24V DC (coil side) Contact Side:
single contact 1-PDT, Maximum S w i t c h i n g voltage: 250VAC/DC
Preferred make: Phonix, Telemachanique or Equivalent
Specification for HMI Panel
The panels have seven inch and 65536 colour TFT touch screen display with front of panel
IP65F protective rating.
1. Common specification
- 24V DC input voltage
- 9MB of user memory
- WVGA 800 x 480 display with LED backlight
- Built-in Ethernet port, RS422, RS-232 ports and USB device port
Page 232 of 245

- Built-in SD card slot
- Vertical display capability
- Operator name and password protection
2. Gate way function
Sequence programs and parameters can easily be modified at the worksite The GOT SIMPLE
acts as a transparent gateway to enable programming, start up, and adjustment of devices. Users
do not have to bother with changing cable connections.
3. Logging function
GOT SIMPLE collects and manages the data from multiple connected devices. The data can
be collected at an arbitrary timing and can be used for data analysis and feedback
4. Start from the SD card
Useful for replacement or maintenance the screen data and all the necessary system data to
make a HMI operate can be transferred to a memory card in advance from an office PC. By
inserting the memory card, the HMIs can be started quickly.
5. Recipe functions
Recipe information such as material blend and machine conditions are saved in the HMI. This
information can be written from the HMI to programmable controllers. New data can also be
read and stored in the HMI.
Technical Specification sheet for GPRS Modem
The GPRS MODEM at consumer meter end should have suitable interface facility to connect
with the meter by using the RS 232 cable. The GPRS MODEMR shall also be retrofitted on
optical port/RS232 port of the meter.
Compatible with various standard meters like Secure, L&T, Genus & DLMS compliant Meters.
Shall have meter detect and meter data read feature which enables communication with all
popular Indian energy meters including DLMS meters using built-in meter specific protocol
stack. Shall have auto restart feature with built-in watchdog timers and intelligence. Shall have
on-line tamper detection feature through which GPRS MODEM will continuously pole the
meter for any new tamper and will send the event to the server and also to a set of pre-
programmed mobile numbers as an SMS alert. Shall have program over the air (POTA) feature
which will reduce the manual field visits and also save project time and. The modem firmware
shall be reprogrammed from the server remotely. Remote start/stop and restart feature. Auto
recover feature in case modem / network hanging · Comprehensive self-diagnosis feature
which will create log file with all at a periodicity and link check for communication. On
demand SMS request through SMS for Instantaneous Parameters. Real time outages, alarms as
alerts to server and to configured mobile numbers Automatic GPRS connection (no AT
Page 233 of 245

commands required) and watchdog for reliable Communication. Inbuilt 3 Phase Power supply
as well as operational on single phase · Automatic pushing of meter data at configured regular
intervals · On line monitoring of vital Instantaneous parameters like voltages, currents energies,
powers, power factors. IP (internet protocol) based Communication, enabling simultaneous
data access from thousands of GPRS Modems. Shall use meter supported baud rate to read
meter data and shall use maximum network supported baud rates to push the data to server.
Shall have a configuration over the air feature through which all the GPRS MODEM
operational settings will be configured. Shall have a configurable scheduled meter read and
data transmit feature to enable grouping of the meters so that the loading on the server is equally
distributed from all the field installed modems. Shall have selective on-demand meter read
feature through which server can send an on demand request to modem to read the selective
parameters from the meter.
Power Supply Section:- Input specifications:- The offered GPRS MODEMs should capable of
operating on three phase supply drawn from the meter input itself. Auxiliary power supply will
not be acceptable. · The GPRS MODEM shall have three phase AC input supply and should
be capable of proper functioning within the power supply range of 77 AC P-P to 470V AC P-
P, 50 Hz so that same GPRS MODEM shall be used for DTR meters, HT and LT Trivector
meters. However the GPRS MODEM should also be capable of operating on single phase
230V, 50 Hz power supply. The GPRS MODEM shall be suitably protected against surges. ·
Average Power consumption of the GPRS MODEM shall not be more than 3.5 VA under idle
and during data transfer.
Withstand capacity against surges should be according to Indian conditions i.e. 6.0 kV. Input
terminals: The power supply input shall be a suitable two core integrated cable coming out
from AMR box. The GPRS MODEM shall have capability to work under continuous power
on condition.
GSM/GPRS Section:- The GSM/GPRS module shall comply with the following:
The module shall operate in dual Band GSM 900/1800MHz. The module shall be compliant
with ETSI GSM Phase 2+ Standard. Class 4 (2W) @ 900 MHz · Class 1 (1W) @ 1800 MHz.
The module shall support Point-to-Point transmission and Cell Broadcast features. It shall have
auto dial feature.
Serial binary and suitable data format for data transfer. Short messaging service (SMS)
features. · Text and PDU · Point to point (MT/MO) · Cell broadcast .GPRS MODEM should
support both data and SMS transmission.
SIM Card Section:- For placing the SIM Card, a SIM Card Holder shall be provided on the
motherboard and shall be accessible only by opening/sliding the cover, GPRS MODEM shall
not be opened for replacing the SIM card. The SIM Card supported shall be of 1.8V/3V
Interface. Interlocking facility shall be provided under the device cover. SIM card slot/cover
shall be sealed to avoid access to unauthorized. The offered GPRS MODEM shall comply for
ESD as per IEC61000-4-2.
Communication Interface & Capabilities:- RS232 Serial Link supporting up to 115,200 bauds
with an auto-bauding option shall be provided. However the data transfer rate for remote meter
reading shall depend on meter compatibility. The RS232 output shall be provided on a 9-pin
female//RJ11 connector which can be connected to electronic energy meter’s optical / serial
Page 234 of 245

communication port through suitable communication cable. The GPRS MODEM shall be
suitably pre-configured for meter reading & transferring the data to the DC. GPRS MODEM
should be Quad band GPRS MODEM capable of operating at 900 and 1800 MHz GSM
transmission. GPRS MODEM should support both Data and SMS transmission. It should have
both GSM and GPRS features.
RF section:- A SMA interface shall be provided on the GPRS MODEM to which either a fixed
or a wired (with magnetic base) Dual Band built-in Antenna of minimum -6dbi gain can be
connected. Provision shall also be made to connect 14dbi high gain external yagi antenna to
improve poor signal strength. Network Identification Section:- For determining the health of
the device an LED shall be provided on the GPRS MODEM which will depict the current
functioning status (power up/ registered in network/transmitting data). Data Features for
GSM/GPRS module: Internet Services: TCP, UDP, HTTP, FTP GPRS Data transmission
features:- GPRS Class B Multi slot class 12 or class B Multi slot class 10. Packet channel
support: PBCCH Coding Schemes: CS1 to CS4 compliant with SMG32 (Release 97)
EMI/EMC Specifications:- The GSM/GPRS MODEM shall meet the following EMI/EMC
specifications: Electrostatic Discharge IEC61000-4-2. Fast Transient Burst IEC61000-4-
4.Surges Immunity IEC61000-4-5 ,Conducted Emission CISPR22 (class B).
Mechanical Specifications:- The Mechanical Specifications of the GPRS MODEM shall be as
follows: GPRS MODEM shall be compact, as this device will be placed in a compact meter
boxes, Mounting Arrangement: Easy mounting arrangement with a hook provision on the
GPRS MODEM supported with the screw fixing arrangement. so that it will be comfortably
fixed inside the meter Box. The GPRS MODEM shall comply with IP55 rating. Sealing
Arrangement: The Top and Base Cover shall have a suitable sealing arrangement so that the
GPRS MODEM cannot be tampered. The GPRS MODEM shall be a compact model housed
in a polycarbonate/ engineering plastic enclosure.
Environmental specifications:- The GPRS MODEM shall meet the following environmental
specifications: Temperature: -10 degrees to +55 degree and Humidity: up to 95% RH (non –
condensing).
Functional specifications:- The GPRS MODEM should be an intelligent device and capable
of providing the following functionalities on GSM/ GPRS network: The GPRS MODEM
should be capable for long duration data transfer to central station as per configuration via
suitable GPRS MODEMR software. When the GPRS MODEM is busy in collecting the data
from the meter and the request comes to get the data, then priority shall be given to request
from central station software. Power Outage Notification: In the event of an outage, the GPRS
MODEM should be able to send the outage alert to Data center, there after SMS to predefined
number to notify the outage event with date and time of occurrence/restoration. The GPRS
MODEM should be capable of operating with SIMs of local GSM/GPRS/ Service provider in
the area. GPRS MODEM should be capable for continuous working for 24 hours every day
under field conditions, even when enclosed in Metering Cubicles at Consumer sites. Software
shall have facility for Auto-Scheduler to enable automatic/Unattended data collection during
night hours.
Data transfer in push Mode: By default GPRS MODEM should be configured for push mode
of data transfer i.e. GPRS MODEM shall automatically establish a session with Static IP of
MDA Server at DC at specified time (once in hour/day/week/month) for the purpose of meter
Page 235 of 245

reading through GPRS only. This configuration of the GPRS MODEM shall be configurable
remotely. If GPRS MODEM could not establish connection to the Server placed at Data center
at specified time, then it shall retry the same as configured.
Data transfer in pull Mode: In case the data is required on demand from the Data center end
(Server end), then connection shall be established from head end to the device. User shall have
option to get the meter data available in the memory of intelligent AMR, invoke the Modem to
read & upload the meter data. Provision to generate reports of successful automatic meter
reading (AMR) Calls and unsuccessful AMR calls separately shall be provided. Provision for
flexible scheduling of meter reading by AMR software automatically on a pre-defined hourly,
daily, weekly or monthly basis. Provision shall be made to read the groups of energy meters in
one go from the AMR software and the searchable by Meter number, or as a separate group.
Technical Specification sheet for Web server
This is for uploading data to the central
server from the client. Any authenticated
client with proper credentials can upload
data to the server. Only real time data
1. Data upload
(delay of max 2 min) will be accepted
through /real-time upload URL and any
delayed data should be uploaded using
/delayed Upload URL
This is for downloading the configuration
from the server. Any approved client
2. Configuration Download
software can download the configuration
from the server
When the Configuration Download Flag is
set to “True” in the response of the Real-
time Upload or Delayed Upload, the client
software should use the /getConfig URL to
Acknowledge Configuration download the configuration from the
3.
Download Central Server. Once the configuration is
updated in the Analyser, the client should
update the Central Server with the status of
the configuration update. Till the status is
updated to success, client will be asked
Page 236 of 245

continuously to update the configuration by
setting the Configuration Download flag to
“True”.
When the Remote Calibration Update Flag
is set to “True”, the client software should
using this URL for downloading the
4. Calibration download service
configuration required for calibration. The
remote calibration data and sequence should
be updated to the Calibrator locally
After successful download of the Remote
Calibration Configuration and updating the
Calibration Update local calibrator or analyser who will be
5.
Acknowledgement performing the calibration, the client
software should acknowledge the status of
calibration status using this URL
When the Diagnostic Update Flag is set to
“True”, the client software should using this
URL for uploading the diagnostic
6. Diagnostic Upload service
information including any internal state of
the analyser as per the analyser make and
model.
7. Standard Specification As per CPCB Norms
SPECIFICATION FOR DATA ACQUISITION SYSTEM FOR FLOW, pH, ORP,

PRESSURE AND PROCESS EQUIPMENT OPERATING STATUS
Data storage and retrieval for 5 years
Trend chart on daily, monthly or yearly basis or between any two dates specified.
Alarm with acknowledgement
A display mimicking the CETP with the current values being indicated.
Print out in a suitable form as required by the CETP Company.
Page 237 of 245

Should be Compatible with MS office and Windows operating system.
Data storage and retrieval must be possible even in case of failure of computer.
Event his tor y fo r all on-line me as u ri ng p ar amete rs like p H/ ORP/ Pressure/ Flow
with instantaneous/ cumulative flow, level, and all pumps/equipment’s ON/OFF status.
Recording of values/event of history in hourly, daily, weekly, monthly, yearly basis. The
period shall be selectable to view any period. The report shall be generated in excel sheet
to take print outs.
Routine and type tests shall be conducted at the manufacturer’s works in the presence of
Employer’s representative before dispatch of the PLC system.
Technical Specification for CCTV Camera with Sunshield

1. Image Sensor 1/4 " Sony Super HAD II CCD
2. Color System NTSC
3. Resolution 650 TVL Color (700 TVL B/W)
4. S/N 50 dB (AGC Off)
5. Zoom Ratio 12x Optical zoom, 32x digital zoom
6. Focal Length f=3.8(Wide) – 45.6(Tele)mm
7. View Angle 52.8˚(W) ∼ 4.49˚(T)
8. Iris F1.6(Wide)-F2.7(Tele)
9. Mini Illumination Color:0.5 lux,B/W:0.2 lux Color

DSS:0.001 lux ,B/W DSS:0.0004 lux
10. Focus Auto
11. Iris Adjustment Auto
12. Shutter Speed Auto (x128~1/60 sec~1/10,000 sec)
13. IR LED Yes
14. Night Vision 150 feet
15. WDR On/Off
Page 238 of 245

16. DIS On/Off
17. DNR On/Off
18. AGC Auto
19. White Balance Auto /Outdoor / Indoor/One Push /

Manual
20. BLC/HLC On/Off
21. Flickerless On/Off
22. Brightness Adjustable (0-96)
PTZ
23. Pan/Tilt Range Horizontal:360 °(Endless) / Vertical:

90 °
24. Speed Preset : 400°/ sec, Manual:0~360°/sec
(proportional to zoom ratio）
25. Preset 127
26. Auto Scan 8
27. Pattern 4
28. Group 8
29. Other functions Auto Flip, Park Position, Power Up
30. Communication RS-485
31. Protocol
32. Privacy zone 8 zones could be programmed
33. Alarm I/O 2CH Input / 1CH Output
General
34. Input Voltage 12VDC/24VAC
35. Dimension 199.3mm*183.6Hmm（with

Sunshield）
36. Working Temp -30℃~ 50℃
37. Optional Bracket Mounts Wall Mount/Flush Ceiling

Mount/Pendant Mount
Page 239 of 245

38. SD Card Slot 128 GB
39. CE Certified Yes
40. IP Rating IP 66 with Weather Proof Canopy
41. Software Licensed
42. Support Internet Access Yes
43. Standard Specification Refer CPCB Norms
Instrument Power Supply and Signal control Cables

1.1 Supply of Cables
1.1.1 Signal cables are to be considered for transmitting the analog signal from their
respective field instrument to respective panel instrument in the control panel. All
signal cables for carrying 4 to 20mA, 1-5V, low level transducer outputs, etc.,
shall be copper PVC insulated twisted pairs (constructed with 24-30 twists per
meter), individually screened with tinned copper drain wire, overall screened,
steel wire armored and overall PVC sheathed. Screening shall provide a minimum
of 95% coverage of copper braid or Mylar blackened Aluminum foil. Individual
shields in multi-core cable shall be insulated from each other and from the overall
shield and armoring. Multi-stranded cable of a minimum conductor size of
24/0.20 mm plain copper to BS 6360 shall be used.
1.1.2 Cables (Armoured, PVC insulated, PVC sheathed and with copper conductors of
minimum 1.5 sq.mm dia) are to be considered for (i) transmitting the digital signal
from all on-line measuring instruments, limit switches of pneumatic valves to the
instrument panel cum control desk (ii) for field powering (110V or 230 V AC) to
field instruments.
1.1.3 Cables entering control panels shall be gland sealed to prevent the intrusion of gas
and moisture. Single compression cable glands shall be used for termination of
cables.
1.1.4 The rated working voltage shall be 110V Rms and the maximum working voltage
shall be 600 V Rms. The continuous current rating shall be at least 5A.
1.1.5 Insulation between conductors and the earth shall not be less than 10 mega ohms
at 500 V.
1.1.6 Different types of signals shall be segregated from each other’s and shall be
contained in separate cables.
1.1.7 Strict segregation shall be followed with not more than one type of signal run in
any multicore cable.
Page 240 of 245

1.2 Instrumentation circuit routes
1.2.1 Signal cables shall not be run in the same conduit, duct, or cable tray as power
cables. Separate installation in GI cable tray, GI rigid steel conduit or GI steel
trenching is to be carried out.
1.2.2 Wherever signal and power cables cross they shall do so at right angles.
1.2.3 All cables running from the field instruments to the control panel shall be a single,
continuous length, without joints, except at marshalling boxes. The boxes shall
have terminal blocks with 20 percent spares in addition to terminals for all wires
including spare wires. Special care shall be exercised to carry earthling lines
through marshalling boxes with the least possible resistance. Multi-core cables
shall be used between marshalling boxes and control panels.
1.3 Laying of cables
1.3.1 A minimum distance of 300mm shall be maintained between the cables carrying
low voltage AC and DC signals and a minimum distance of 600mm shall be
maintained between cables carrying HT and LT signals. Cable shall be laid 0.75
m below ground level. Each instrumentation and power supply cable shall be
terminated to individual panel or terminal box. Identification of each cable shall
be by proper ferrules at each junction as per the cable schedule to be prepared by
the Contractor.
1.3.2 Cables shall be laid in accordance with the layout drawings and the cable schedule
which shall be prepared by Contractor and submitted for the Employer’s
representative’s approval. The instrument cables shall be laid in overhead GI cable
trays properly supported in pedestals etc.
1.3.3 All cable routes shall be carefully measured. Cables shall be cut to the required
lengths, leaving sufficient amount for the final connection of the cable to the
terminals on either end. Various cable lengths cut from the cable reels shall be
carefully selected to prevent undue wastage of cables. A loop of 1 meter shall be
left near each field instrument & near the panel before terminating the cable.
1.3.4 Cables shall be complete uncut lengths from one termination to the other.
1.3.5 All cables shall be identified close to their termination point by cable numbers as
per the cable interconnection schedules. Identification tags shall be securely
fastened to the cables at both the ends.
1.3.6 Cables shall be rigidly supported on structural steel and masonry, using
individually cast or malleable iron galvanized clips, multiple cable supports, or
cable trays.
1.4 Instrumentation earthing system
1.4.1 Earthing system shall comply with the regulations and conform IS 3043. The
earthing arrangements shall be as follows.
Page 241 of 245
1.4.2 Earth electrodes (65 mm dia perforated GI pipe) in earth pit chambers shall
provide adequate conductive capacity for the system.
1.4.3 200mm x 200mm inspection pits shall allow ready access to the electrodes
connections. An earth continuity conductor of 50 x 6 mm GI flat between each
control panel earth bar and the earth electrodes shall be supplied.
1.4.4 A bolted removal tinned copper link mounted in a suitably located link base shall
be supplied.
1.4.5 The earth electrodes shall be suitably grouped and connected.
1.4.6 All metal works, other than current carrying parts of the instrumentation system,
shall be properly bonded to the earth using 8 SWG GI wire.
1.4.7 The construction of earth pit chamber shall confirm to IS 3043.
1.4.8 No of earth pits shall be minimum Two.
1.5 Junction boxes
1.5.1 In order to make the most economic use of cable ladder/tray and duct capacity,
multicore cabling shall be utilized in order to connect instrumentation groups by
using suitably located sub-distribution junction boxes.
1.5.2 The junction boxes shall have weather protection suitable for the area in which
they are to be installed and for the type of circuit. They shall be readily accessible
for maintenance and clearly labeled. Junctions boxes shall be constructed of die
cast aluminum and provide degree of protection as per IP 65.
1.5.3 Wires and terminals for the digital and analog signals shall be segregated within
junction boxes.
1.6 EXECUTION
1.6.1 Instrumentation and accessory equipment shall be installed in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions. The Contractor shall obtain in the field all
information relevant to the placing of process control work and in case of any
interference with other work; he shall proceed as directed by the Employer’s
representative and furnish all labor and materials necessary to complete the work
in an approved manner.
1.6.2 The work shall be executed in full accordance with local codes and rulings.
1.6.3 All piping to and from field instrumentation shall be provided with necessary
unions, test tees, couplings, adapters, and shut-off valves.
1.6.4 Brackets and hangers required for mounting of equipment shall be provided. They
shall be installed in a workman like manner and not interfere with any other
equipment.
1.6.5 The screen on each process instrumentation cable shall be continuous from source
to destination and be earthed as directed by the manufacturer of the
Page 242 of 245

instrumentation equipment but in no case shall more than one earth point be
employed for each screen.
1.6.6 All signed and control cabling between any two building shall be through buried
100 mm dia. UPVC conduit encased in reinforced concrete. An additional 100mm
dia conduit shall be provided as a spare.
1.7 TESTS
1.7.1 The test plan shall be submitted for approval as part of the project plan.
1.7.2 The Contractor shall provide the services (free of charge) of the servicemen, all
special tools, calibration equipment and labour to perform the tests during
commissioning. Certified copies of the tests shall be furnished in duplicate to the
Employer’s representative.
1.7.3 After installation, check-out and final adjustment of all panels, instruments,
meters, monitoring and control devices, a performance check shall be made.
Meters shall be tested at 0 percent, 25 percent, 50 percent 75 percent and 100
percent of scale. All status and alarm switches as well as all monitoring and
control functions shall also be checked. Each device shown on the Process and
Instrumentation diagrams shall be checked & signature of the Employer’s
representative shall be obtained as being acceptable. Testing shall be done from
the signal source (from the panel) to the final element or device including all field
wiring.
1.7.4 If, during running of the tests, one or more points appear to be out by more than
specified amount, adjustments or alterations shall be made as necessary to bring
equipment up to specification performance. After such adjustments, the tests shall
be repeated for all specified points to insure compliance.
1.8 PREFERRABLE MAKE

Preferable make of Instrument Items:
Sl.
Item description Preferable Make
No
Electromagnetic Flow sensor,
1. Forbes Marshall/ /E&H / ABB
transmitter
2. Electrical Actuator El- O- Matic/ Rotex or Equivalent
3. Vortex type steam flow meter Forbes Marshall / E & H/ Emerson or Equivalent
Ultrasonic / Radar Level

4. E & H / Emerson or Equivalent
Transmitter
5. Level Switches E&H / Yokogawa / Emerson or Equivalent
Page 243 of 245

Sl.
No
Conductivity sensor,
6. Forbes Marshall / HACH / Yokogawa or Equivalent
transmitter
pH sensor, Transmitter ABB / HACH / Yokogawa / ForbesMarshall /
7. E&H/GLI or Equivalent
ORP sensor, transmitter Yokogawa / ABB / Emerson/ Forbes Marshall/ E&H
8. / HACH
9. Turbidity sensor, transmitter HACH / Yokogawa /E&H / Forbes Marshall
DO sensor, transmitter Yokogawa / Forbes Marshal / Emerson / HACH

10.
11. Pressure Gauges-SS Forbes Marshall / Waree / General Instruments
Silt Density Index MILLIPORE / GE Osmosis

12.
13. DP indicators & switches Switzer / Indfoss / GIC or Equivalent
14. Temperature Gauge Forbes Marshall / Wika or Equivalent
15. Vacuum Gauge Forbes Marshall / Wika or Equivalent
16. Pressure Transmitter Yokogawa/Forbes Marshal/Emerson or Equivalent
17. Pressure Switch Switzer / Danfoss or Equivalent
18. RTD with indicator Emerson / Yokogawa or Equivalent
19. Vacuum sensor with Indicator Forbes Marshall / Emerson / E & H or Equivalent
20. Motorised valve Auma/ Fluidtech or Equivalent
21. Surge Arrestor OBO Bettermann or Equivalent
22. PLC with I/O’s Schneider / Siemens / AB / ABB or Equivalent
23. Panels Rittal or Equivalent
24. UPS Emerson / Numeric or Equivalent
25. Stabilizer Servo or Equivalent
26. HMI Panel Schneider / Siemens or Equivalent
27. Web Server Approved Vendor of CPCB
Page 244 of 245

Sl.
No
It should be respective original equipment
Wealth proof enclosure for on-
28. manufacturer’s supply or Hensel, MOC: Thermo
line measuring instrument
plastics
29. Instrument cables RPG / Finolex / Polycab or Equivalent
Page 245 of 245

List of drawings for Component ‐ A

1. PROPOSED PLANT LAYOUT FOR 20 MLD TANNERY CETP IN JAJMAU
2. HYDRAULIC FLOW DIAGRAM (HFD) FOR 20 MLD TANNERY CETP IN JAJMAU
3. PROCESS FLOW DIAGRAM
4. PROCESS AND INSTRUMENTATION DIAGRAM
5. ELECTRICAL SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM
6. ONLINE CONTROL & MONITORING SCHEMATIC DRAWING
7. PLC ARCHITECTURE
8. TOPOGRAPHICAL SURVEY DRAWING
9. GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATIONS REPORT
10. MASS BALANCE
11. CIVIL STRUCTURAL DRAWING

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
LEGEND
GROUND FLOOR
Tag
NAME OF THE COMPONENT DIMENSIONS UOM CAPACITY QTY
no.
AUTOMATED STEPPED COARSE
1 6.5 x 1.5 x 2m 2
SCREEN
A COLLECTION WELL - CLOSED TANK A
NE 2 16 Dia x 3m Ht cu.m 625 1
N (COVERED WITH RCC SLAB)
E
AUTOMATED ROTARY DRUM FINE
NW
3 6.5 x 1.5 x 2m 3
SCREEN
SE
4 GRIT CHAMBER 12.5 x 2 x 1m cu.m 31 2
W
S PRE SETTLING TANK - CLOSED
SW 5 33 Dia x 3.5m Ht cu.m 2917 3
TANK (COVERED WITH FRB HOOD)
STORAGE AND HOMOGENISATION
MAIN RO ENTRANCE 6 TANK - CLOSED TANK (COVERED 90 x 28 x 6m cu.m 14410 2
AD BRIDGE
WITH RCC SLAB)
COMMON CHROME 2 3 7 FLASH MIXER - I (LIME) 3.7 x 3.7 x 3.7m cu.m 51 2
NALA
RECOVERY PLANT 8 LIME PREPARATION & DOSING TANK 4.3 x 4.3 x 4m cu.m 74 8 B
1 4
EXISTING 9 FLASH MIXER - II (ALUM) 3.7 x 3.7 x 3.7m cu.m 51 2
10 m WIDE ROAD
B MAIN RO
SUBSTATION AD ALUM PREPARATION & DOSING
EXISTING ROAD
STORE 10 3.5 x 3.5 x 4m cu.m 49 8

TANK
ZLD PILOT 5 5 6 MA PRIMARY CLARIFIER /
I 11 28 Dia x 3.5m Ht cu.m 2154 3
PLANT WORKSHOP
N CLARIFLOCCULATOR
8 m WIDE ROAD
33 / 11 KV RO
A 12 POLY DOSING TANK 5 x 5 x 3m cu.m 75 2
SUBSTATION D
LAB 58 13
PRE-AERATION TANK / SULPHIDE
33 x 22 x 6.5m cu.m 4720 2
(AREA - 50 x 40 m) OXIDATION TANK - I
EXISTING 48 6
PORTICO
5 11 16 14
PRE-AERATION TANK / SULPHIDE
10 x 10 x 6m cu.m 600 2
ADMIN OXIDATION TANK - II
MEETING
ROOM - 2 10 m WIDE ROAD 7
10 m WIDE ROAD
BUILDING DISTRIBUTION TANK FOR AERATION
MEETING 15 10 x 10 x 6m cu.m 600 1
ROOM - 1
8 m WIDE ROAD TANK
OFFICE - 2
8 16 ANOXIC TANK 35.5 x 34 x 5m cu.m 6035 2 C
14 16 BIOT - I (AERATION TANK - I)
C OFFICE - 1
11 11 9 13 13 56A 17 106 x 48 x 6.5m cu.m 29858 2
14 18 SECONDARY CLARIFIER-I 36 Dia x 3.5m Ht cu.m 3548 2
10 19 BIOT - II (AERATION TANK - II) 106 x 47 x 6.5m cu.m 29301 2
EXISTING CETP AREA FOR FUTURE 10 m WIDE ROAD 20 SECONDARY CLARIFIER-II 36 Dia x 3.5m Ht cu.m 3548 2
EXPANSION 10 m WIDE ROAD 12 27 Dia x 4m Ht cu.m 2290
15 54 15 49 21 REACTOR CLARIFIER 2
BRIDGE
SODA ASH PREPARATION AND
19 19 17 17 22 3.5 x 3.5 x 4m cu.m 49 4
EXISTING ROAD
DOSING TANK
18 18 23 CHEMICAL SLUDGE HOLDING TANK 13 x 13 x 4m cu.m 591 1
22 SLUDGE THICKENER (BIO) - CLOSED
24 23 Dia x 3.5m Ht cu.m 1474 1
20 MLD TANK (COVERED WITH FRB HOOD)
SLUDGE THICKENER (CHEMICAL) -
CETP D
24A CLOSED TANK (COVERED WITH FRB 30 Dia x 3.5m Ht cu.m 2637 1
20 20 HOOD)
A
D
NAL
25 FILTER PRESS SYSTEM 38 x 15 x 7m sq.m 570 1
10 m WIDE ROAD
QUARTZ FILTER FEED TANK -
10 m WIDE ROAD 26 CLOSED TANK (COVERED WITH RCC 28 x 20 x 5m cu.m 2800 1
SLAB)
EXISTING ROAD 62 23 21 21 27 QUARTZ FILTER SYSTEM 32 x 16 x 7m sq.m 512 1
59 59 UF FEED TANK - CLOSED TANK
60 28
(COVERED WITH RCC SLAB)
15 x 20 x 5m cu.m 1500 1
24A 10 m WIDE ROAD 10 m WIDE ROAD UF PERMEATE TANK / RO FEED
BRIDGE
29 TANK - CLOSED TANK (COVERED 23 x 20 x 5m cu.m 2300 1
WITH RCC SLAB)
51 sq.m 1350
48 ADMIN BUILDING 15 x 90 x 4m 1
49 SLUDGE STORAGE YARD sq.m 4900.00 1 E
25 24
56B 51 UF SYSTEM 50 x 30 x 4.5m sq.m 1500 1
DETAILS FOR ADMIN BUILDING 61 61
EXISTING ROAD
E
TRANSFORMER & DG SET PCC
15 BRIDGE 56 sq.m 1900 1
AREA, A & B
10
STORE
27 26 28 29 58 FLASH MIXER FEED TANK 0

48 59 SFT I & II 0
15
WORKSHOP
SCADA
60 CHEMICAL STORAGE TANKS 45 x 10 x 1.2m sq.m 450 1
41
ROOM
A
PUMP HOUSE 61 MIXING TANK 70 x 70 x 4.9m cu.m 24010 2
8
NAL
16
LAB
30 62 CHEMICAL HOUSE WITH DOSING TANKS 16 x 12 x 4.0m sq.m 192 1

AREA FOR FUTURE EXPANSION
FIRST FLOOR / ABOVE THE TANKS
8
PORTICO
8
MEETING 54 BLOWER HOUSE 192 x 25m sq.m 4800 1

11
ROOM - 2
55 CONFERENCE ROOM 15 x 90 x 4m sq.m 1350 1
MEETING 55
10
ROOM - 1
F
41
CONFERENCE
10
OFFICE - 2 HALL
F
10
OFFICE - 1
15 30
GROUND FLOOR PLAN FIRST FLOOR PLAN AREA FOR EXISTING 130 MLD STP
G NOTE: ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN METER UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED G
LEGEND
AREA AREA
Sl.No. DESCRIPTION
(ACRES) (SQ.M) PROJECT TANNERY WASTE MANAGEMENT AT JAJMAU, KANPUR
CLIENT NATIONAL MISSION FOR CLEAN GANGA - NEW DELHI
1 CETP
TAMILNADU WATER INVESTMENT COMPANY LIMITED.,
a AREA FOR 20 MLD TANNERY CETP 24.44 98905 PROJECT twic POLY HOSE TOWERS, SPIC ANNEX BUILDING,
DEVEOLPER No.86, FIRST FLOOR, MOUNT ROAD,
b AREA FOR SLUDGE STORAGE YARD 1.21 4897 GUINDY, CHENNAI - 600 032
c SUBSTATION 0.49 1983 TITLE PROPOSED PLANT LAYOUT FOR 20 MLD TANNERY CETP IN JAJMAU
COLOR & LINE LEGEND
H H
2 AREA FOR ZLD PILOT PLANT SYSTEM 0.76 3100 DRG.NO TWIC/2016/UP/LAYOUT/01/REV-0 SHEET 01 OF 01
BOUNDARY
3 AREA FOR COMMON CHROME RECOVERY PLANT 1.52 6151 EXISTING 0 NTS 3/8/18
D.R NNK / KMM KR GB SH
4 AREA FOR FUTURE EXPANSION 16.17 65438 NALA
DRAWN. REVED.B APPD. ISSUED
TOTAL AREA 44.59 180474 PHASE I - UPTO ULTRA FILTRATION TECHNOLOGY REV SCALE DATE GEN. BY
BY Y BY . BY
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
A A
RAW EFFLUENT FROM FROM DRAIN WATER

TANNERY INDUSTRIES
+4.00 +4.00 +3.50
+3.50
+5.00m +3.00 +3.00 +3.00 +2.75 +2.50
+2.50 +2.25
+4.00m +2.00
+3.00m 0.50 LIQUID 0.50 +0.30
B
+2.00m 0.00 OXYGEN AUTOMATED GRIT
B +1.00m ROTARY CHAMBER
DRUM FINE TO BIO
±0.00m SCREEN
SLUDGE
THICKENER -2.50
-1.00m AUTOMATED STEPPED -3.00 -3.00 -3.00 FLASH MIXER 1&2 -3.00 -2.75
TO SLUDGE -3.75
-2.00m COARSE SCREEN HOLDING TANK
-3.00m PRESETTLING TANK
ANOXIC TANK
-4.00m COLLECTION WELL SHT FLASH MIXER SULPHIDE OXIDATION TANK 1 & 2 DBT-I
-5.00m PRIMARY CLARIFIER BIOT-I SFT-I
FEED TANK
C
QF - B/W UF - B/W
PIT
TO COLLECTION
WELL
ULTRA FILTRATION
QF
SKID FROM UF PERMEATE
TANK
TO UF
+3.75 PERMEATE TANK
+3.00 D
+4.00m +2.00 +1.75 +1.75 +1.50
+1.50 +1.50 +1.25
D +3.00m +1.00
+2.00m 0.00
+1.00m
±0.00m - 2.00
-1.00m -3.00 -2.75
-3.50
-2.00m - 4.00 UF CIP
-4.50 -4.75
-3.00m TO SLUDGE
HOLDING TANK TO SLUDGE UF FEED TANK
-4.00m DBT-II HOLDING TANK
-5.00m SECONDARY CLARIFIER - I TO SLUDGE
BIOT-II SECONDARY CLARIFIER - II HOLDING TANK
SFT-II REACTOR CLARIFIER QF FEED TANK
+3.00 +2.90 F
+4.00m
F +3.00m +1.00
+2.00m
+1.00m
- 2.00 - 2.00
D D
±0.00m
-1.00m - 3.00
-2.00m
-3.00m MIXING TANK SLUDGE THICKENER (BIO) FILTER PRESS (BIO) SLUDGE THICKENER FILTER PRESS (CHEMICAL)
-4.00m UF PERMEATE TANK / RO FEED TANK CHEMICAL SLUDGE HOLDING TANK (CHEMICAL)
-5.00m WITH MIXER
G G
PROJECT TANNERY WASTE MANAGEMENT AT JAJMAU, KANPUR

LINE LEGEND TAMILNADU WATER INVESTMENT COMPANY LIMITED.,

PROJECT twicPOLY HOSE TOWERS, SPIC ANNEX BUILDING,
COMPONENTS HYDRAULIC FLOW DIAGRAM DEVELOPER No.86, FIRST FLOOR, MOUNT ROAD,
GUINDY, CHENNAI - 600 032
MAIN PROCESS LINE TITLE HYDRAULIC FLOW DIAGRAM (HFD) FOR 20 MLD TANNERY CETP IN JAJMAU
H H
PERMEATE LINE DRG.NO TWIC/2016/UP/HFD/01/REV-0 SHEET 01 OF 01
BACKWASH LINE NOTE :
0 NTS 23.7.18
1. ALL THE LEVELS ARE IN METERS UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED
REJECT LINE COLOR & LINE LEGEND DR NNK KR GB SH
DRAWN. APPD.
SLUDGE LINE PHASE I - UPTO ULTRA FILTRATION TECHNOLOGY REV SCALE DATE
BY
GEN. BY REVED.BY
BY
ISSUED. BY
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CETP capacity
Raw effluent from Member Tannery 3 20000
Industries (m /day)
19460 17.46 MLD TWW @ 13000 mg/l TDS
2 MLD Sewage @ TDS 600 mg/lit

Coarse Screen Chrome liquor-540 m3/day
(Manual & Mechanised step screen)
19460
Collection
Well
19460
Fine Screen
( Mechanised Rotary Drum)
19460
Grit Chamber / Detritor
19460
Pre-Settling
Tank
( Plain
Sedimentation)
584
251
18876 1%
42% 28800
8183 Storage and Homogenisation Tank
199
NaOH Dosing
H2O2 Dosing 28800 593
Flash Mixer-I Lime Dosing system 699
28800
Flash Mixer-II Alum Dosing system
28800
Polyelectrolyte dosing
Primary
Clarifier
610
28190
Sulphide Oxidation Tank - I & II

699
28190
H3PO4 dosing 906 1322

Anoxic Tank / Denitrification Tank
Bio Sludge
28190 Thickener-I Filter Press-I Sludge for Disposal
313 63
47650 19460 100% 20 T/day
Biological Oxidation Tank -I
Filter Press-II Sludge for Disposal

1009 310
115 T/day
Secondary 229
Clarifier-I
Nitrate Feed
27961
47421
Chrome Liquor from Tannery Industries
Biological Oxidation Tank -II
19460
540
Common Chrome Recovery Unit 11 Recovered chrome for Reuse
(CCRU) in member units
529
Secondary
Clarifier-II 93
Supernatant storage Tank
27961 1208
529
Chemical
Sludge
Thickener-
27868 II 1009
Glauber's salt
Anhydrous Sodium sulphate
LSS- Reactor 597
Clarifier
529
27800
Quartz Filter
14% 2724
Auto backwashable Micron Filter

(50 micron)
25075 Secondary treated sewage from
31344 STP (173 MLD)
1557 Ultrafiltration system (UF)
8% Recovery (85% to 87.5 % )
14% 2734 Phase-I 6269
Catridge Filter (5 micron)
UF permeate
20785 83%
Reverse Osmosis System
Diluted treated tannery wastewater to river
(Recovery 65-70%) Mixing Tank
discharge @ < 2100 mg/l TDS
6% 1167.6 Phase-II (add on) 7728 RO Reject
11889
Permeate for reuse in member units
WATER BALANCE
NAME OF THE
Legend NATIONAL MISSION FOR CLEAN GANGA ( NMCG )
CLIENT
RO Recovered water for reuse in member
Raw effluent line/Treated effluent Recovery m3/day 11889 59.45%
PRCOESS FLOW DIAGRAM WITH WATER BALANCE FOR A 20 MLD
Tannery units of CETP
TITLE
TANNERY BASED CETP (Up to UF) AT JAJMAU, KANPUR
Chemical sludge/thickener overflow/filtrate This Process Flow Diagram (PFD) contains confidential property
information of Tamilnadu Water Investment Company Limited, RO Reject for disposal m3/day 7728 38.64%
Chrome supernatant any unauthorised exhibition or copying of this material is strictly Bio sludge to SLF m3/day 63 0.31%
Bio sludge/ Thickener overflow/filtrate prohibited unless otherwise authorised in writing by TWIC, Losses Chemical sludge to Cement Industry 3
m /day 310 1.55% DRG. NO NMCG/TAN/JAJ/KNR/CETP/TTP/2017 SHEET
Chennai. Recovered chrome for reuse at member 3
m /day 11 0.05% 1 NTS 01.11.2017
Tannery units
Phase-I Components TOTAL m3/day 20000 100.00%
REV SCALE DATE DRAWN BY GEN. BY REVWD. BY APPD. BY ISSD. BY
Phase-II Components
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
LIME DOSING ALUM DOSING
A HYDROGEN PEROXIDE
DOSING
A
ODOR
CONTROL
TO BIO SODIUM HYDROXIDE
DOSING SYSTEM
SLUDGE
PG PG
THICKENER
NV
NV
PG PG PG
NRV
NRV
NV
NV
AUTOMATED ROTARY
BFV
BFV
BFV
DRUM FINE SCREEN
NV
NV
NV
SP SP
NRV
NRV
NRV
NV
NV
NV
PRE SETTLING TANK FLASH MIXER - I FLASH MIXER - II
RAW EFFLUENT FROM ODOR SP LIME DOSING ALUM DOSING B
AUTOMATED CONTROL
SP SP
GRIT CHAMBER
TANNERY INDUSTRIES STEPPED COARSE SYSTEM TO BIO
B FLOW MAKER SHT FLOW JET
BFV
BFV
BFV
SCREEN SLUDGE SODIUM HYDROXIDE HYDROGEN PEROXIDE
THICKENER DOSING DOSING
PG PG
AUTOMATED ROTARY
NV
NV
DRUM FINE SCREEN
NRV
NRV
NV
NV
SP SP
FLASH MIXER - I FLASH MIXER - II

AUTOMATED GRIT CHAMBER
PRE SETTLING TANK
STEPPED COARSE
SCREEN COLLECTION WELL
AUTOMATED ROTARY FLOW MAKER SHT FLOW JET FLASH MIXER FEED TANK C
DRUM FINE SCREEN TO BIO
C SLUDGE
PG PG
THICKENER
NV
NV
NRV
NRV
NV
NV
GRIT CHAMBER
SP SP
PRE SETTLING TANK

SECONDARY CLARIFIER
II SLUDGE RE
POLY DOSING
LT LDO PHOSPHORIC ACID
CIRCULATION LINE
TORQT PLC
LT LDO DOSING
D
M
TORQS
D TORQT PLC
LT LDO M
TORQS
TO
CHEMICAL
PG PG SLUDGE
HOLDING TO
NV
NV
TANK DBT - II
FROM FLASH
NRV
NRV
SULPHIDE OXIDATION TANK - 1

NV
NV
MIXER - II SP SP
(PRE AERATION TANK) SULPHIDE OXIDATION TANK - 2 ANOXIC TANK - I
PRIMARY CLARIFIER / CLARIFLOCULATOR
POLY DOSING (PRE AERATION TANK) SECONDARY CLARIFIER
LDO PHOSPHORIC ACID I SLUDGE RE BIOT - I (AERATION TANK) SECONDARY CLARIFIER - I
TORQT PLC
LT DOSING
CIRCULATION LINE
TORQT PLC
E
TORQS
M
LT LDO LT LDO
E TORQS M
TO
CHEMICAL DT 1 FOR BIOT (AERATION TO
PG PG SLUDGE TANK) DBT - II
HOLDING
NV
NV
TANK
FROM FLASH
NRV
NRV
NV
NV
MIXER - II
PRIMARY CLARIFIER / CLARIFLOCULATOR
SP SP
SULPHIDE OXIDATION TANK - 1
POLY DOSING
(PRE AERATION TANK) SULPHIDE OXIDATION TANK - 2 ANOXIC TANK - II BIOT - I (AERATION TANK) SECONDARY CLARIFIER - I
(PRE AERATION TANK)
TORQT PLC
TO ANOXIC TANK-I TO ANOXIC TANK IIF
M
TORQS
F LIME DOSING
SODA ASH DOSING
PG PG PG PG
TO
CHEMICAL TORQT PLC TORQT PLC
NV
NV
NV
NV
PG PG
SLUDGE LT LDO TO BIOT DBT - II
NV
NV
M M
HOLDING TORQS TORQS
NRV
NRV
NRV
NRV
NV
NV
NV
NV
TANK TO BIO TO BIO
FROM FLASH
NRV
NRV
SLUDGE SLUDGE
NV
NV
SP SP SP SP
MIXER - II SP SP
THICKENER THICKENER
TO
PRIMARY CLARIFIER / CLARIFLOCULATOR PG PG CHEMICAL
PG PG SLUDGE
NV
NV
HOLDING
NV
NV
TANK
NRV
NRV
NV
NV
TO BIO
FROM SECONDARY
NRV
NRV
QF FEED TANK
NV
NV
G SP SP SLUDGE G
CLARIFIER - I THICKENER
SP SP
AERATION TANK - II SECONDARY CLARIFIER - II REACTOR CLARIFIER

LIME DOSING
TORQT PLC
LT LDO CAUSTIC DOSING SODA ASH DOSING
TORQS M
TO BIOT DBT - II TORQT PLC
TORQS M
DEVELOPER No.86, FIRST FLOOR, MOUNT ROAD,
DBT FOR AERATION TANK - II TO GUINDY, CHENNAI - 600 032
PG PG
CHEMICAL
SLUDGE
NV
NV
PG PG
HOLDING TITLE PROCESS AND INSTRUMENTATION DIAGRAM FOR PRE TREATMENT SYSTEM
H H
NV
NV
TANK
NRV
NRV
NV
NV
AERATION TANK - II SECONDARY CLARIFIER - II TO BIO DRG.NO TWIC/2016/UP/P&ID/01/REV-0 SHEET 01 OF 05
PRE TREATMENT SECTION
NRV
NRV
SLUDGE
NV
NV
SP SP
THICKENER
SP SP
0 NTS 23.7.18
REACTOR CLARIFIER DR NNK KR GB SH
DRAWN. APPD.
REV SCALE DATE GEN. BY REVED.BY ISSUED. BY
BY BY
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
PG PG
FROM PRIMARY FROM PRE SETTLER
NV
GV
NV
GV
A CLARIFIER A
FROM SECONDARY
NRV
NRV
NV
NV
CLARIFIER - I
GV
GV
PG PG FROM SECONDARY SP SP
FROM REACTOR CLARIFIER - II
CLARIFIER
BFV
BFV
NV
NV
NRV
NRV
NV
NV
PG PG PG PG PG PG PG PG PG PG
SP SP
GV
GV
GV
GV
GV
GV
GV
GV
GV
GV
NV
NV
NV
NV
NV
NV
NV
NV
NV
NV
NRV
NRV
NRV
NRV
NRV
NRV
NRV
NRV
NRV
NRV
NV
NV
NV
NV
NV
NV
NV
NV
NV
NV
GV
GV
GV
GV
GV
GV
GV
GV
GV
GV
BFV
BFV
SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP B
B
CHEMICAL SLUDGE HOLDING TANK
SLUDGE THICKENER SLUDGE THICKENER FILTER PRESS FEED PUMP FILTER PRESS FEED PUMP FILTER PRESS FEED PUMP FILTER PRESS FEED PUMP FILTER PRESS FEED PUMP
(CHEMICAL) (BIO)
FILTER PRESS FILTER PRESS FILTER PRESS FILTER PRESS FILTER PRESS FILTER PRESS FILTER PRESS FILTER PRESS FILTER PRESS FILTER PRESS
TO PRE-AERATION TANK - I TO PRE-AERATION TANK - II TO AERATION TANK - I TO AERATION TANK - II

BFV
BFV
BFV
BFV
BFV
BFV
BFV
BFV
BFV
BFV
BFV
BFV
BFV
BFV
BFV
BFV
BFV
BFV
F
FILTER PRESS FILTER PRESS
NRV
NRV
NRV
NRV
NRV
NRV
NRV
NRV
NRV
NRV
NRV
NRV
NRV
NRV
NRV
NRV
NRV
NRV
F
PG PG PG PG PG PG PG PG PG PG PG PG PG PG PG PG PG PG
AIR BLOWER AIR BLOWER AIR BLOWER AIR BLOWER AIR BLOWER AIR BLOWER
LIST OF COMPONENTS LIST OF COMPONENTS

G G
S.No DESCRIPTION SIZE/CAPACITY QTY S.No DESCRIPTION SIZE/CAPACITY QTY
1 COLLECTION WELL 16m Øx 3m H - 625cu.m 1 18 SECONDARY CLARIFIER - I 36 m Ø x 3.5m Ht - 3548cu.m 2
2 RAW EFFLUENT TRANSFER PUMP 1250 cu.m/hr 3 19 SLUDGE RE CIRCULATION PUMP - I 600 cu.m/hr 3
3 PRESETTLER 33 m Ø x 3.5m Ht - 2917cu.m 3 20 AERATION TANK - II 29301 cu.m 2
4 SLUDGE WITHDRAWAL PUMP 100 cu.m/hr 6 21 SECONDARY CLARIFIER - II 36 m Ø x 3.5m Ht - 3548cu.m 2
5 STORAGE AND HOMOGENIZING TANK 14410 cu.m 2 PROJECT TANNERY WASTE MANAGEMENT AT JAJMAU, KANPUR
22 SLUDGE RE CIRCULATION PUMP - II 600 cu.m/hr 3
6 RAW EFFLUENT TRANSFER PUMP 600 cu.m/hr @ 30m head 3 23 REACTOR CLARIFIER 27 m Ø x 4 Ht - 2055 cu.m 2 CLIENT NATIONAL MISSION FOR CLEAN GANGA - NEW DELHI
7 FLASH MIXER -1 3.7m x 3.7m x 3.7m - 51cu.m 2 24 CHEMICAL SLUDGE HOLDING TANK 13m x 13m x 4m - 591cu.m 1
8 LIME AGITATOR 4.3m x 4.3m x 4m - 74cu.m 8
25 THICKENER FEED PUMP 142 cu.m/hr 2 TAMILNADU WATER INVESTMENT COMPANY LIMITED.,
9 FLASH MIXER -2 3.7m x 3.7m x 3.7m - 51cu.m 2
26 SLUDGE THICKENER (BIO) 23 m Ø x 3.5m Ht - 1474cu.m 1
10 ALUM AGITATOR 3.5m x 3.5m x 4m - 49cu.m 8 DEVELOPER No.86, FIRST FLOOR, MOUNT ROAD,
27 SLUDGE THICKENER (CHEMICAL) 30 m Ø x 3.5m Ht - 2637cu.m 1 GUINDY, CHENNAI - 600 032
11 PRIMARY CLARIFIER/CLARIFLOCULATOR 28 m Ø x 3.5m Ht 3
12 SLUDGE WITHDRAWAL PUMP 100 cu.m/hr @ 30m head 6 27 FILTER PRESS (BIO) 4
TITLE PROCESS AND INSTRUMENTATION DIAGRAM FOR PRE TREATMENT SYSTEM
H PRE AERATION TANK /SULPHATE OXIDATION 33m x 22m x 6.5m - 4720cu.m 28 FILTER PRESS (CHEMICAL) 8 H
13 2 FILTER PRESS FEED PUMP(BIO) 40 cu.m/hr @ 150m head
TANK - I 28 4 DRG.NO TWIC/2016/UP/P&ID/01/REV-0 SHEET 02 OF 05
PRE AERATION TANK /SULPHATE OXIDATION 10m x 10m x 6m - 600cu.m 29 FILTER PRESS FEED PUMP (CHEMICAL) 40 cu.m/hr @ 150m head 8
14
15
TANK - II
DISTRIBUTION TANK FOR AERATION TANK 10m x 10m x 6m - 600cu.m
2
1
29
30
AIR BLOWER FOR PRE AERATION TANK - I
AIR BLOWER FOR PRE AERATION TANK - II
3
3
PRE TREATMENT SECTION 0 NTS 23.7.18
DR NNK KR GB SH
16 ANOXIC TANK 30.5m x 34m x 5m - 6035cu.m 2 31 AIR BLOWER FOR AERATION TANK - I 6
17 AERATION TANK - I 29858 cu.m 2 DRAWN. APPD.
32 AIR BLOWER FOR AERATION TANK - II 6 REV SCALE DATE
BY
GEN. BY REVED.BY
BY
ISSUED. BY
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
D
BLOWER LINE
355 NB 355 NB BACKWASH BACK WASH 355 NB

355 NB 355 NB 355 NB
A TU PH A
710 NB 710 NB QF OUTLET 710 NB 710 NB 710 NB 710 NB
630 NB 630 NB QF INLET 630 NB QF INLET 630 NB
TO UF FEED TANK
FM
FM
FM
FM
FM
FM
FIT
FIT
FIT
FIT
FIT
FIT
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
FI
FI
FI
FI
FI
FI
AV-BFV
AV-BFV
AV-BFV
AV-BFV
AV-BFV
AV-BFV
DPT DPT DPT DPT DPT DPT
QF OUTLET
QF OUTLET
QF OUTLET
QF OUTLET
QF OUTLET
QF OUTLET
AV-BFV
AV-BFV
AV-BFV
AV-BFV
AV-BFV
AV-BFV
AV-BFV
AV-BFV
AV-BFV
AV-BFV
AV-BFV
AV-BFV
B
AV-BV
AV-BV
AV-BV
AV-BV
AV-BV
AV-BV
B
QF INLET
QF INLET
QF INLET
QF INLET
QF INLET
QF INLET
BFV BFV BFV BFV BFV BFV BFV BFV BFV BFV BFV BFV
NV NV NV NV NV NV
AV-BFV
AV-BFV
AV-BFV
AV-BFV
AV-BFV
AV-BFV
AV-BFV
AV-BFV
AV-BFV
AV-BFV
AV-BFV
AV-BFV
PG PG PG PG PG PG
BFV BFV BFV BFV BFV BFV

630 NB
AV-BFV
AV-BFV
AV-BFV
AV-BFV
AV-BFV
AV-BFV
PG PG PG PG PG PG
BV
BV
BV
BV
BV
BV
D D D D D D C
D D D D D D
C D D D D D D
QUARTZ FILTER - 07 QUARTZ FILTER - 08 QUARTZ FILTER - 09 QUARTZ FILTER - 10 QUARTZ FILTER - 11 QUARTZ FILTER - 12
D
BLOWER LINE
355 NB 355 NB BACKWASH 355 NB 355 NB BACK WASH 355 NB
710 NB QF OUTLET 710 NB 710 NB 710 NB 710 NB
630 NB 630 NB QF INLET 630 NB QF INLET 630 NB 630 NB D
D
FM
FM
FM
FM
FM
FM
FIT
FIT
FIT
FIT
FIT
FIT
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
FI
FI
FI
FI
FI
FI
AV-BFV
AV-BFV
AV-BFV
AV-BFV
AV-BFV
AV-BFV
DPT DPT DPT DPT DPT DPT
QF OUTLET
QF OUTLET
QF OUTLET
QF OUTLET
QF OUTLET
QF OUTLET
AV-BFV
AV-BFV
AV-BFV
AV-BFV
AV-BFV
AV-BFV
AV-BFV
AV-BFV
AV-BFV
AV-BFV
AV-BFV
AV-BFV
AV-BV
AV-BV
AV-BV
AV-BV
AV-BV
AV-BV
QF INLET
QF INLET
QF INLET
QF INLET
QF INLET
QF INLET
NV NV NV NV NV NV
AV-BFV
AV-BFV
AV-BFV
AV-BFV
AV-BFV
AV-BFV
AV-BFV
AV-BFV
AV-BFV
AV-BFV
AV-BFV
AV-BFV
PG PG PG PG PG PG E
BFV BFV BFV BFV BFV BFV
E
630 NB
AV-BFV
AV-BFV
AV-BFV
AV-BFV
AV-BFV
AV-BFV
PG PG PG PG PG PG
BV
BV
BV
BV
BV
BV
D D D D D D
D D D D D D
D D D D D D
QUARTZ FILTER - 01 QUARTZ FILTER - 02 QUARTZ FILTER - 03 QUARTZ FILTER - 04 QUARTZ FILTER - 05 QUARTZ FILTER - 06
355 NB F
QF BACKWASH
F PUMP
FROM REACTOR
630 NB
CLARIFIER
180 NB
180 NB
180 NB
180 NB
180 NB
180 NB
180 NB
180 NB
180 NB
180 NB
180 NB
180 NB
180 NB
180 NB
NRV BFV
NRV BFV
NRV BFV
NRVBFV
NRVBFV
NRVBFV
NRVBFV
NRVBFV
NRVBFV
NRVBFV
NRVBFV
NRVBFV
NRVBFV
NRVBFV
NRVBFV
NRVBFV
NRVBFV
PG PG PG PG PG PG PG PG PG PG PG PG PG PG LT
PG PG PG
NV NV NV NV NV NV NV NV NV NV NV NV NV NV NV NV NV
G G
BFV
BFV
BFV
BFV
BFV
BFV
BFV
BFV
BFV
BFV
BFV
BFV
BFV
BFV
QF BACKWASH BLOWER
225 NB
225 NB
225 NB
225 NB
225 NB
225 NB
225 NB
225 NB
225 NB
225 NB
225 NB
225 NB
225 NB
225 NB

QUARTZ FILTER FEED PUMP
LIST OF COMPONENTS TAMILNADU WATER INVESTMENT COMPANY LIMITED.,
TWST /QUARTZ FILTER FEED TANK PROJECT twicPOLY HOSE TOWERS, SPIC ANNEX BUILDING,
S.No DESCRIPTION SIZE/CAPACITY QTY GUINDY, CHENNAI - 600 032
1 QUARTZ FILTER 4.0m Ø X 3.0m 13 TITLE PROCESS AND INSTRUMENTATION DIAGRAM FOR QUARTZ FILTER SYSTEM
H H
2 QUARTZ FILTER FEED TANK 28 x 20 x 5m - 2800cu.m 1 DRG.NO TWIC/2016/UP/P&ID/01/REV-0 SHEET 03 OF 05
3 QUARTZ FILTER FEED PUMP 120 cu.m/h @ 30m head 14 QUARTZ FILTER SYSTEM 0 NTS 23.7.18
4 QUARTZ FILTER BACKWASH PUMP 130 cu.m/h @ 30m head 4 DR NNK KR GB SH
DRAWN. APPD.
5 QUARTZ FILTER BACKWASH BLOWER 600 m3 3 REV SCALE DATE GEN. BY REVED.BY ISSUED. BY
BY BY
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
A A
RECIRCULATION
TO UF FEED TANK
REJECT TO CIP TANK
PERMEATE TO CIP TANK
CIP INLET
BACKWASH INLET B
PH
B UF OUTLET
FI AI FIT FM FI AI FIT FM
FI AI FIT FM FI AI FIT FM
TU
BFV
BFV
BFV
BFV
AV-BFV
AV-BFV
AV-BFV
AV-BFV
AV-BFV
AV-BFV
BFV BFV
AV-BFV
BFV BFV
AV-BFV
BFV BFV
BFV
BFV BFV
BFV
BFV
BFV
FI FI
FI
AV-BFV
AV-BFV
AV-BFV
FI
AV-BFV
AV-BFV
AV-BFV
AV-BFV
AV-BFV
AV-BFV
CIP INLET
AV-BFV
AV-BFV
AV-BFV
AI
CIP INLET
AI
CIP INLET
AI PIT
CIP INLET
AI PIT PIT PG
NV
PIT PG
NV
PG FIT
NV
NV
PG FIT
NV
NV
FIT
NV
FIT PG PIT
NV
PG PIT PG PIT
PG PIT FM DPT FM
NV
AV-BFV NV
FM DPT UF OUTLET
NV
NV
UFM-1
FM DPT UF OUTLET
NV
AV-BFV NV
UFM-1
DPT UF OUTLET
NV
AV-BFV NV
UFM-77
UFM-77
UFM-1
UF OUTLET
UFM-77
UFM-1
UFM-77
ABF
ABF C
AV-BFV
ABF ABF FM FM
UF INLET
FM
AV-BFV
UF INLET
FM UF REJECT AV-BV
AV-BFV
UF INLET
UF REJECT AV-BV
AV-BFV
UF INLET
UF REJECT AV-BV
AV-BFV
NV
UF REJECT AV-BV
NV
FIT
NV
FIT
NV
FIT
AV-BFV
C FIT
AV-BFV
AV-BFV
AV-BFV
AI AI D
AI AI D D PIT
D PIT PIT
PIT FI FI
FI
AV-BFV
FI D BFV BFV
AV-BFV
AV-BV
D BFV BFV
AV-BFV
AV-BV
D BFV BFV
AV-BFV
AV-BV
D BFV BFV D
AV-BV
D D
D
D D
D D BFV
BFV BFV
BFV
D D
ULTRA FILTRATION D ULTRA FILTRATION D ULTRA FILTRATION
D
AIR COMPRESSOR
SDI TU
FM
FIT
AI
FI
D
PG PS DPT
ABF
QF BACKWASH QF Filtrate
PAL
DI
BFV NB
BFV NB
200 NB
200 NB
water NaOH Dosing E

NRV BFV
NRV BFV
NRV BFV
NRV BFV
NRV BFV
NRV BFV
NRV BFV
NRV 200
NRV 200
pump
Static mixer
LT
FM
FIT
E HYPO Dosing
AI
FI
PG PG PG PG PG TDS pH TSS BOD / COD /
pump PHIC
PG PG PG PG
CHROMIUM
NV NV NV NV NV NV NV NV NV HCL Dosing
pump AI
HCL
PHIT
BFVNB
BFVNB
250 NB
250 NB
NaOH LT
BFV
BFV
BFV
BFV
BFV
BFV
BFV
250
250
NaOCL NV
QF BACKWASH
UF FEED PUMP
BFV
BFV
BFV
PUMP
TREATED SEWAGE
UF FEED TANK
NRV
NRV
NRV
FROM STP
NRVBFV
NRVBFV
NRVBFV
PG PG PG
FM
FM
FIT
FIT
NV
NV
NV
PG PG PG
AI
AI
FI
FI
F
pH BFV NV NV NV
BFV
BFV
BFV
BFV
TSS UF PERMEATE
BFV
BFV
BFV
TANK/ RO FEED
TANK UF BACKWASH
TDS LT
PUMP
NRV
NRV UF CIP PUMP

BOD / COD / UF CIP TANK WITH AGITATOR
CHROMIUM D
PG PG
LDO
BFV
BFV
NV
NV
TO RIVER DISCHARGE
G LT LDO LT G
LDO
NRV
NRV
BFV
BFV
PG PG PROJECT TANNERY WASTE MANAGEMENT AT JAJMAU, KANPUR

NV
NV
LIST OF COMPONENTS TAMILNADU WATER INVESTMENT COMPANY LIMITED.,
S.No DESCRIPTION SIZE/CAPACITY QTY
UF PERMEATE GUINDY, CHENNAI - 600 032
1 UF FEED TANK 20 x 15 x 5m - 1500 cu.m 1 TRANSFER PUMP
2 UF FEED PUMP 551 cu.m/ H @ 30m head 5 TITLE PROCESS AND INSTRUMENTATION DIAGRAM FOR UF SYSTEM
H H
3 UF BACKWASH PUMP 1301 cu.m/ H @ 30m head 2 DRG.NO TWIC/2016/UP/P&ID/01/REV-0 SHEET 04 OF 05
BFV
BFV
UF PERMEATE TANK / RO FEED TANK
4 CIP TANK 40 cu.m 1
5 UF CIP PUMP 689 cu.m/ H @ 30m head 3 MIXING TANK MIXING TANK 0 NTS 23.7.18
6 UF SKID 4 UF SYSTEM DR
DRAWN.
NNK KR GB
APPD.
SH
REV SCALE DATE GEN. BY REVED.BY ISSUED. BY

7 UF MEMBRANE / SKID 77 BY BY
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
SYMBOL LEGEND
PTLT
PTLT PG SL.NO. SYMBOL DESCRIPTION
NRV BFV
PG PRV
BV
NRV BFV
PRV NV PD D
NV BV PD D BV
BV PG LG ST DP PG
1 PG PRESSURE GAUGE
PG LG PG PRV FM REACTOR CLARIFIER
ST DP
NV
A PRV D A
FM FLASH MIXER 1 2 PS PRESSURE SWITCH
NV
D NV BV
NV BV
BV DP BV PD
BV
BV DP BV PD 3 CI CONDUCTIVITY INDICATOR
BV
BV
BV SODA ASH DOSING TANK BV
LIME DOSING TANK BV D ST
D ST LIME DOSING PUMP SODA ASH DOSING PUMP 4 FM FLOW INDICATOR
LT
5 LS LEVEL SWITCH
PTLT 6 LT LEVEL TRANSMITTER
PG
NRV BFV
PRV
NRV BFV
BV
BV
NV PD D
BV PG
7 LG LEVEL GAUGE
PRV B
PG LG PG NV BV D
ST DP PRV FM FLASH MIXER 1 PG PD 8 DPT DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE
NV
D LG
B NV BV PG
ST DP
BV
NV PRV FM UF SYSTEM 9 PHI pH INDICATOR
NV
BV DP PD D
BV
BV BV
LIME DOSING TANK BV
BV DP BV PD 10 SDI SLIT DENSITY INDICATOR
BV
D ST LIME DOSING PUMP
BV
CAUSTIC SODA STORAGE BV
TANK (13 TANKS) D ST CAUSTIC SODA DOSING PUMP 11 LDO LUMINESCENT DISSOLVED OXYGEN
PTLT PTLT 12 TI TEMPERATURE INDICATOR
PG
NRV BFV
PRV
NV BV PD D 13 TU TURBIDITY METER
BV
PG LG ST DP PG
14 ORP OXYGEN REDUCTION POTENTIAL
NRV BFV
PRV FM FLASH MIXER 2
NV
D BV
NV BV PG
PRV C
BV PG NV BV PD D 15 AV-BFVAUTO BUTTERFLY VALVE
BV DP PD
BV
C BV LG
ALUM DOSING TANK BV
ALUM DOSING PUMP NV ST DP PG
PRV FM UF SYSTEM 16 AV-BV AUTO BALL VALVE
ST
NV
D D
BV
BV
17 PS PEN STOCK
BV DP PD
BV
BV
PTLT HCL STORAGE TANK BV 18 NV NEEDLE VALVE
PG (2 TANKS) D ST HCL DOSING PUMP
NRV BFV
PRV
NV BV PD D
PTLT
19 NRV NON RETURN VALVE
BV
PG LG ST DP PG
PRV FM FLASH MIXER 2 20 GV GATE VALVE
NV
D
NV BV
BV
21 BV MANUAL BALL VALVE
BV DP PD
NRV BFV
BV
BV D
ALUM DOSING TANK BV
ALUM DOSING PUMP
BV PG
PRV
22 BFV MANUAL BUTTERFLY VALVE
D ST NV D
D PG PD
LG
PG BV
23 ST STRAINER
NV ST DP PRV RM UF SYSTEM
NV
D
PTLT BV 24 PD PULSATION DAMPENER
PG BV BV PD
NRV BFV
PRV ST
BV D BV 25 PRV PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE
BV
NV PD HYPO STORAGE TANK BV DP
BV
PG LG ST DP PG (2 TANKS) D SODIUM CHLORITE DOSING PUMP 26 CENTRIFUGAL PUMP
PRV FM CLARIFLOCULATOR
8
NV
D
NV BV DPT
BV
BV DP PD 27
9 AUTO BASKET FILTER
BV
BV
POLY DOSING TANK BV
D ST POLY DOSING PUMP
E
PG
28 MICRON CARTRIDGE FILTER
PRV
E NV BV PD D
ST DP PG 29 HIGH PRESSURE PUMP

PRV FM FILTER PRESS
NV
D
BV
BV DP BV PD 30 DOSING PUMP
BV
PTLT
BV PG
31
NRV BFV
D ST
NV BV PD
PRV
D
STATIC MIXER
BV
PG LG ST DP PG
PRV FM CLARIFLOCULATOR
32 D DRAIN TO SHT
NV
D
NV BV ABBREVIATION
BV DP BV PD WW - Waste water
BV
BV F
POLY DOSING TANK BV MS - Medium pressure steam
D ST POLY DOSING PUMP LS - Low pressure steam
F
PC - Pure condensate
IG - Inert gas
PTLT
PG
CW - Cooling water
NRV BFV
PRV PP - Polypropylene
NV BV PD D
BV MS - Mild steel
PG LG ST DP PG
PRV FM REACTOR CLARIFIER GI - Galvanized Iron
NV
D
NV BV CS - Cast steel
BV DP BV PD MS - Flow medium
BV
BV
LIME DOSING TANK BV
ST LIME DOSING PUMP
D
G PTLT G
PG
CHEMICAL DOSING SYSTEMS
NRV BFV
PRV
NV BV PD D
BV
PG LG ST DP PG
PRV FM REACTOR CLARIFIER
NV
D
NV BV
BV DP BV PD
BV
BV
LIME DOSING TANK BV
D ST LIME DOSING PUMP
PTLT
PG
twicPOLY HOSE TOWERS, SPIC ANNEX BUILDING,
NRV BFV
PRV PROJECT
NV BV PD D DEVELOPER No.86, FIRST FLOOR, MOUNT ROAD,
H BV GUINDY, CHENNAI - 600 032 H
PG LG ST DP PG TITLE PROCESS AND INSTRUMENTATION DIAGRAM FOR CHEMICAL DOSING SYSTEMS
PRV FM REACTOR CLARIFIER
NV
D
NV
BV
BV
DP BV PD
COLOR & LINE LEGEND DRG.NO TWIC/2016/UP/P&ID/01/REV-0 SHEET 05 OF 05
BV
0 NTS 23.7.18
BV DR NNK KR GB SH
SODA ASH DOSING TANK
D
BV
ST SODA ASH DOSING PUMP Phase I Upto Ultra filtration technology REV SCALE DATE
DRAWN.
BY
GEN. BY REVED.BY
APPD.
BY
ISSUED. BY
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Note: Legend
DISCOM DP
STRUCTURE Sl.No. Name of the Equipment Symbol
From 33 KV 1. This HT & LT equipment's Single Line Diagram is indicative only. The
Incomer Contractor is free to design the electrical system as per the 1 Transformer (TFR)
A A
requirements & same shall be obtained approval from State
Lightning Lightning
Arrester Arrester
Electrical Inspectorate. 2 Vacuum Circuit Breaker (VCB)
2. 33 KV power supply will be made available by state DISCOM up to 3 Bus duct

33KV Isolator 33KV Isolator their double pole structure. The contractor shall tap power supply
from 33 KV Double pole structure. 4 Air Circuit Breaker (ACB)
M 3. The supply of CT PT metering set in the DISCOM DP Structure shall
33 KV CT 5
CTPT Metering set be under scope of Contractor in-case of non -availability of metering Power Control Center (PCC) PCC B
B set at State DISCOM side while obtaining power supply and

accordingly payment shall be made. 6 Power & Motor Control Center (PMCC)
33 KV, 1250 PMCC
Amps SF6
Breaker 7 Lighting Distribution Board (LDB) LDB
33KV
Isolator 8 Power Distribution Board (PDB) PDB
33KV
Isolator 9 Moulded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB)
C
10 Switch Fuse Unit (SFU / SDF)
C 33KV 33KV
Isolator Isolator
33 KV, 1250 33 KV, 1250

Amps SF6 Amps SF6
Breaker Breaker
CT CT D
D
Lightning Lightning
Arrester Arrester
33/11 KV, 33/11 KV,

5 /6.3 MVA 5 / 6.3 MVA
transformer transformer
DYn11,OLTC DYn11,OLTC
E
E
Lightning Lightning
Arrester Arrester
CT CT
3 Core, 12 KV, 400 SQ. MM 3 Core, 12 KV, 400 SQ. MM
UE, AL.XLPE.CABLE UE, AL.XLPE.CABLE
11 KV INDOOR SWITCHGEAR PANEL
F
12KV, 1250 12KV, 1250

Amps VCB Amps VCB
Bus coupler
11 kV, 2000 Amps, Aluminium Busbar 2000 Amps
630 630 630 630 630

Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps
G
3 Pole 3 Pole 3 Pole 3 Pole 3 Pole G
VCB VCB VCB VCB VCB
TFR-1 TFR-2 TFR-3 TFR-4 TFR-5 TAMILNADU WATER INVESTMENT COMPANY LIMITED.,
PROJECT twic POLY HOSE TOWERS, SPIC ANNEX BUILDING, No.86, FIRST FLOOR,
Preliminary Secondary Secondary Tertiary Dilution DEVELOPER
MOUNT ROAD, GUINDY, CHENNAI - 600 032, TAMILNADU, INDIA.
treatment treatment treatment treatment system
H Section system system System TITLE ELECTRICAL SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM FOR 33 / 11 KV Substation, HT Panels H
& Transformer
DRG.NO TWIC/2018/UP/SLD/01/REV-0 SHEET - 01 OF 32
PAPER SIZE A3
0 NTS 03/08/2018
REV SCALE DATE DRAWN. BY GEN. BY REVED. BY APPD. BY ISSUED. BY
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Legend
Sl.No Description Legend

Vacuum Circuit Breaker, Electrically
A 1 Draw out type
KV VCB
A
Potential Transformer (Epoxy From HT Switch gear Panel

2 Moulded)
Current transformer (Cast Resin
3 Type) 1 Run x 3 core x 300 sq.mm, 12 KV, 1 Run x 3 core x 300 sq.mm, 12 KV,
Alu. UE,UG XLPE cable Alu. UE,UG XLPE cable
4 HRC Fuse
B
Under Voltage Relay
5 27
B ( 50 % to 90% ) Indoor Type VCB panel Indoor Type VCB panel
30
6 Annunciator
7 Oil temperature Auxiliary relay 49 R G A W B R G A W B

Indicates Digital meter Indicates Digital meter
8 Winding temperature Auxiliary relay 49A 11KV 110V (0-15 KV) 11KV 110V (0-15 KV)
3 3 3 3
Instantaneous Over current relay CL: 1 200VA
VSS V CL: 1 200VA
VSS V
9 50 2A 2A 2A 2A
(400% - 1600 %) C
(45-55 HZ) (45-55 HZ)
C
Instantaneous Earth Fault Relay ( 11KV,400 A 11KV,400 A
10 50N F F
200% - 800 % ) 350 MVA 350 MVA
IDMT Over Current relay
11 51 VTR VTR
( 50% - 200 % ) Numerical Multifunctional Numerical Multifunctional
200/5A combined Microprocessor To trip outgoing 200/5A combined Microprocessor To trip outgoing
12 Shunt Trip Coil 52T CL: 5P10 based Relay (27, 50, 50 N, 51, feeders CL: 5P10 based Relay (27, 50, 50 N, 51, feeders
15VA 51N, 52 TS, 52T, 60, 64, 86) 15VA 51N, 52 TS, 52T, 60, 64, 86)
13 Trip Circuit Supervision Relay 52TS (0-200A) (0-200A) D

Energy Manager - Digital Energy Manager - Digital
D 200/5A Microprocessor Based 200/5A Microprocessor Based
14 Fuse Failure Relay 60
CL: 1 KW, KWHr, KVA, PF, F, V, CTR ASS A CL: 1 KW, KWHr, KVA, PF, F, V, CTR ASS A
15VA A, MDI Meter. 15VA A, MDI Meter.
15 Buckholz Auxiliary Relay 63
Annunciator (30) 30 Annunciator (30) 30
Neutral Voltage Displacement Relay Oil Temp.-High & Very high Oil Temp.-High & Very high
16 64
Oil Level - Low Oil Level - Low
Winding Temp.-High & Very high Winding Temp.-High & Very high
17 Closing Coil 84
Bucholz - Alarm / Trip Bucholz - Alarm / Trip
18 Lockout Relay 86 E
E
19 Maximum Demand Indicator MDI 1 Runs x 3 core x 300 sq.mm, 12 KV, 1 Runs x 3 core x 300 sq.mm, 12 KV,
Alu. UE,UG XLPE cable Alu. UE,UG XLPE cable
20 Voltmeter Selector Switch VSS
21 Ammeter Selector switch ASS
11/ 0.433 KV, 11/ 0.433 KV,
22 Voltmeter V
2500 KVA , OLTC, 2500 KVA , OLTC,
DYn11, DYn11, F
23 Ammeter A
Transformer Transformer
F
24 Kilo Watt Meter KW
25 Kilo Watt Hour Meter KWHr
26 Kilo Volt Ampere Meter KVA

4200 Amps, 4200 Amps,
27 Power Factor meter PF Aluminium Aluminium
Busduct Busduct
28 Frequency meter F
G G
29 Current transducer CTR CLIENT NATIONAL MISSION FOR CLEAN GANGA - NEW DELHI
30 Voltage Transducer VTR
PCC No. 1 PCC No. 2 (BIOT-STAGE-1) PROJECT TANNERY WASTE MANAGEMENT AT JAJMAU, KANPUR
31 Indication Lamp Rating 4200 Amps Rating 4200 Amps
Busbar Aluminium Busbar Aluminium PROJECT
twic POLY HOSE TOWERS, SPIC ANNEX BUILDING, No.86, FIRST FLOOR,
Working KW 1617 Working KW 1637 DEVELOPER
Standby KW 653 Standby KW 587
H Location PCC Room Location PCC Room TITLE ELECTRICAL SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM FOR HT PANEL WITH TRANSFORMER H

PAPER SIZE A3
0 NTS 03/08/2018
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
A A
From HT Switch gear Panel
1 Runs x 3 core x 300 sq.mm, 12 KV, 1 Runs x 3 core x 300 sq.mm, 12 KV, 1 Runs x 3 core x 300 sq.mm, 12 KV,
Alu. UE,UG XLPE cable Alu. UE,UG XLPE cable Alu. UE,UG XLPE cable
B
Indoor Type VCB panel Indoor Type VCB panel Indoor Type VCB panel
R G A W B Indicates Digital meter R G A W B Indicates Digital meter R G A W B Indicates Digital meter

11KV 110V (0-15 KV) 11KV 110V (0-15 KV) 11KV 110V (0-15 KV)
3 3 3 3 3 3
CL: 1 200VA
VSS V CL: 1 200VA
VSS V CL: 1 200VA
VSS V
2A 2A 2A 2A 2A 2A C
(45-55 HZ) (45-55 HZ) (45-55 HZ)
C
11KV,400 A 11KV,400 A 11KV,400 A
350 MVA F 350 MVA F 350 MVA F
Numerical Multifunctional VTR Numerical Multifunctional VTR Numerical Multifunctional VTR

200/5A combined Microprocessor To trip outgoing 200/5A combined Microprocessor To trip outgoing 200/5A combined Microprocessor To trip outgoing
CL: 5P10 based Relay (27, 50, 50 N, 51, feeders CL: 5P10 based Relay (27, 50, 50 N, 51, feeders CL: 5P10 based Relay (27, 50, 50 N, 51, feeders
15VA 51N, 52 TS, 52T, 60, 64, 86) 15VA 51N, 52 TS, 52T, 60, 64, 86) 15VA 51N, 52 TS, 52T, 60, 64, 86)
(0-200A) (0-200A) (0-200A) D

Energy Manager - Digital Energy Manager - Digital Energy Manager - Digital
D 200/5A Microprocessor Based 200/5A Microprocessor Based 200/5A Microprocessor Based
CL: 1 KW, KWHr, KVA, PF, F, V, CTR ASS A CL: 1 KW, KWHr, KVA, PF, F, V, CTR ASS A CL: 1 KW, KWHr, KVA, PF, F, V, CTR ASS A
15VA A, MDI Meter. 15VA A, MDI Meter. 15VA A, MDI Meter.
Annunciator (30) 30 Annunciator (30) 30 Annunciator (30) 30
Oil Temp.-High & Very high Oil Temp.-High & Very high Oil Temp.-High & Very high
Oil Level - Low Oil Level - Low Oil Level - Low
Winding Temp.-High & Very high Winding Temp.-High & Very high Winding Temp.-High & Very high
Bucholz - Alarm / Trip Bucholz - Alarm / Trip Bucholz - Alarm / Trip
E
E
1 Runs x 3 core x 300 sq.mm, 12 KV, 1 Runs x 3 core x 300 sq.mm, 12 KV, 1 Runs x 3 core x 300 sq.mm, 12 KV,
Alu. UE,UG XLPE cable Alu. UE,UG XLPE cable Alu. UE,UG XLPE cable
11/ 0.433 KV, 11/ 0.433 KV, 11/ 0.433 KV,

2500 KVA , OLTC, 2500 KVA , OLTC, 2500 KVA , OLTC,
DYn11, DYn11, DYn11, F
Transformer Transformer Transformer
F
4200 Amps, 4200 Amps, 4200 Amps,

Aluminium Aluminium Aluminium
Busduct Busduct Busduct
G G
PCC No. 3 (BIOT-STAGE-2) PCC No. 4 PCC No. 5 PROJECT TANNERY WASTE MANAGEMENT AT JAJMAU, KANPUR
Rating 4200 Amps Rating 4200 Amps Rating 4200 Amps
Busbar Aluminium Busbar Aluminium Busbar Aluminium PROJECT
twic POLY HOSE TOWERS, SPIC ANNEX BUILDING, No.86, FIRST FLOOR,
Working KW 1532 KW Working KW 1968 KW Working KW 1838 KW DEVELOPER
Standby KW 312 KW Standby KW 529 KW Standby KW 800 KW
H Location PCC Room Location PCC Room Location PCC Room TITLE ELECTRICAL SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM FOR HT PANEL WITH TRANSFORMER H

PAPER SIZE A3
0 NTS 03/08/2018
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Legend
1010 KVA DG Set with 1010 KVA DG Set with
Acoustic enclosure Acoustic enclosure Sl.No. Name of the Equipment Symbol
Synchronizing Panel 2000 Amps LT Busduct 2000 Amps LT busduct 1 Transformer (TFR)
A A
2 Vacuum Circuit Breaker (VCB)
3 Bus duct
4 Air Circuit Breaker (ACB)

2000 Amps,
2000 Amps,3pole, 3pole,
ACB, EDO type, MP ACB, EDO type, 4000 Amps, 5 Power Control Center (PCC) PCC B
based O/L, S/C, E/F MP based O/L, 3pole,
B relay unit, U/V, S/T ACB, EDO type, 6
S/C, E/F relay Power & Motor Control Center (PMCC) PMCC
Release MP based O/L,
unit, U/V, S/T
Release S/C, E/F relay
unit, U/V, S/T 7 Lighting Distribution Board (LDB) LDB
Release
8 Power Distribution Board (PDB) PDB
9 Moulded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB)

4000 Amps, Alu. 415 V C
Busduct 10 Switch Fuse Unit (SFU / SDF)
C
PCC No. 1
Rating 4200 Amps
Busbar Aluminium
Working KW 1617
Standby KW 653 Mechanical & Electrical
Interlock
Location PCC Room 4000 Amps, 4pole ACB, EDO
type, Motorized Spring Charged
Microprocessor based O/L, S/C, D
E/F relay unit, U/V, S/T Release
D CT
3
EM ASS
415V, 4200 Amps, Aluminium Busbar
9 9 9 9
1600 Amps 500 400 2500 Amps 630Amps 1000 Amps 400 500 250
3 Pole Amps Amps 3 Pole 3 Pole 3 Pole Amps Amps Amps E
EDO, ACB, 3 Pole 3 Pole EDO, ACB, EDO, ACB, EDO, ACB, 3 Pole 3 Pole 3 Pole Empty
E
MP Based MCCB, MCCB, MP Based MP Based MP Based MCCB, MCCB, MCCB, Comp.
Trip unit MP based MP based Trip unit Trip unit Trip unit MP based MP based MP based
trip unit trip unit trip unit trip unit trip unit
12Runs x 3.5 3 Runs x 3.5 2 Nos. of empty

5 Runs x 3.5 1 Run x 3.5 2 Runs x 3.5 2 Runs x 3.5 1 Run x 3.5 1Run x 3.5
core x 300 core x 300 Compartment
core x 300 core x 300 core x 300 core x 300 core x 120 core x 240
Sq.mm Sq.mm without switchgear
Sq.mm Sq.mm Sq.mm Sq.mm Sq.mm Sq.mm
Aluminium Aluminium for accomdation of F
Aluminium Aluminium Aluminium Aluminium Aluminium Aluminium
Armoured Armoured ACBs in Future use.
F Armoured Armoured Armoured Armoured Armoured Armoured
XLPE UG XLPE UG 9 9 9 9
XLPE UG Cable XLPE UG XLPE UG XLPE UG XLPE UG XLPE UG
Cable (or) Cable (or)
Cable Cable Cable Cable Cable
Busduct Busduct
PMCC No. 1 Control Panel CP-1 (PMCC-3) PMCC No. 11 MLDBNo. 1 SPARE
Rating 1250 Amps Rating 250 Amps Rating 630 Amps Rating 250 Amps
Busbar Aluminium Busbar Copper Busbar Aluminium Busbar Copper
Section PT Section PT Section Section PT Location PCC Room
Working KW 464 KW Working KW 90 KW (Approx) Working KW 200 KW Approx.
Standby KW 167 KW Standby KW -- KW Standby KW 0 KW
G Location PT Location Odour Location Pilot palnt G

PMCC No. 2 SubPCC No. 1 APFCR No. 1 (APFC +AHF) MPDBNo. 1
Rating 400 Amps Rating 2500 Rating 300 KVAR Rating 400
Busbar Aluminium Busbar Aluminium Busbar Aluminium Busbar Copper PROJECT TANNERY WASTE MANAGEMENT AT JAJMAU, KANPUR
Section Pretreatment Section Pretreatment Location PCC Room Location PCC Room
Working KW 118 KW Working KW 850 KW TAMILNADU WATER INVESTMENT COMPANY LIMITED.,
Standby KW 61 KW Standby KW 425 KW DEVELOPER
Location PT System Location Pre-aeration tank MOUNT ROAD, GUINDY, CHENNAI - 600 032, TAMILNADU, INDIA.
H TITLE ELECTRICAL SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM FOR HT PCC-1 H

PAPER SIZE A3
0 NTS 03/08/2018
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
A A
PMCC No. 1
Rating 1250 Amps
Busbar Aluminium
Section Pretreatment
Working KW 454 KW
Standby KW 167 KW
Location PT System
B
B
CT 9 9 9 9 9
9 9 9 9 3
EM ASS
G G

DEVELOPER
H TITLE ELECTRICAL SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM FOR PMCC-1 PANEL H

PAPER SIZE A3
0 NTS 03/08/2018
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
A A
PMCC No. 2
Rating 400 Amps
Busbar Aluminium
Working KW 118 KW
Standby KW 61 KW
Location PT System
B
B
9 9 9 9 9
9 9 9 9
G G

DEVELOPER
H TITLE ELECTRICAL SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM FOR PMCC-2 PANEL H

PAPER SIZE A3
0 NTS 03/08/2018
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
A A
PMCC No. 3
Rating 250 Amps
Busbar Aluminium
Working KW 90 KW (Approx.)
Standby KW -- KW B
B Location Odour control

9 9 9 9 9
9 9 9 9
G G

DEVELOPER
H TITLE ELECTRICAL SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM FOR PMCC-3 H

PAPER SIZE A3
0 NTS 03/08/2018
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Legend
Sl.No. Name of the Equipment Symbol
1 Transformer (TFR)
A A
SubPCC No. 1 2 Vacuum Circuit Breaker (VCB)

Rating 2500 Note:
Busbar Aluminium/Copper VFD feeders shall be connected
directly in respective PCC Panel
3 Bus duct
Section Pretreatment without Sub-PCC Panel as per site
Working KW 850 KW conditions. Drawing shall be submitted 4 Air Circuit Breaker (ACB)
Standby KW 425 KW 2500 Amps, 3pole ACB, EDO for approval.
Location Pre-aeration tank type, Motorized Spring Charged 5 Power Control Center (PCC) PCC B
Microprocessor based O/L, S/C,
B
E/F relay unit, U/V, S/T Release 6 Power & Motor Control Center (PMCC)
CT PMCC
3
EM ASS 7 Lighting Distribution Board (LDB) LDB


1250 Amps 1250 Amps 1250 Amps C
3 Pole 3 Pole 500 Amps 500 Amps 500 Amps 500 Amps, 10 Switch Fuse Unit (SFU / SDF)
C 3 Pole
EDO, ACB, EDO, ACB, EDO, ACB, 3 Pole 3 Pole 3 Pole 3 Pole
Empty
MP Based MP Based MP Based MCCB, MCCB, MCCB, MCCB,
Comp.
Trip unit Trip unit Trip unit MP based MP based MP based MP based
Trip unit Trip unit Trip unit Trip unit
2 Runs x 3.5 2 Runs x 3.5 2 Runs x 3.5 1 Run x 3.5 1 Run x 3.5 1 Run x 3.5 2 Nos. of empty
core x 300 core x 300 core x 300 core x 300 core x 300 core x 300 Compartment
D
Sq.mm Sq.mm Sq.mm Sq.mm Sq.mm Sq.mm without switchgear
D Aluminium Aluminium Aluminium Aluminium Aluminium Aluminium for accomdation of
Armoured Armoured Armoured Armoured Armoured Armoured ACBs in Future use.
XLPE UG XLPE UG XLPE UG XLPE UG XLPE UG XLPE UG
Cable Cable Cable Cable Cable Cable
VFD No. F1 VFD No. F3 VFD No. F5 SPARE

Rating 1000 Rating 1000 Rating 400 9 9 9 9
Busbar Copper Busbar Copper Busbar Copper
Section Preaeration Section Preaeration Section Preaeration
E
KW 315 KW KW 315 KW KW 110 KW
E
VFD No. F2 VFD No. F4 VFD No. F6

Rating 1000 Rating 400 Rating 400
F
F 9 9 9 9
G G

DEVELOPER
H TITLE ELECTRICAL SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM FOR SUB-PCC 1 PANEL H

PAPER SIZE A3
0 NTS 03/08/2018
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Legend
A A
3 Bus duct

2000 Amps,
unit, U/V, S/T
Release

4000 Amps, Alu. 415 V C
C
PCC No. 2 (BIOT-STAGE-1)
Rating 4200 Amps
Busbar Aluminium
Working KW 1637
Standby KW 587 Mechanical & Electrical
Interlock
D CT
3
EM ASS
9 9 9 9
4000 Amps 1000 Amps

3 Pole 3 Pole 630 E
EDO, ACB, EDO, ACB, Amps Empty
E
MP Based MP Based 3 Pole Comp.
Trip unit Trip unit MCCB
12 Runs x 3.5
core x 300 3 Runs x 3.5 2 Run x 3.5 2 Nos. of empty
Sq.mm core x 300 core x 300 Compartment
Aluminium Sq.mm Sq.mm without switchgear
Armoured Aluminium Aluminium for accomdation of F
F
XLPE UG Cable Armoured Armoured ACBs in Future use.
9 9 9 9
(or) LT Busduct XLPE UG XLPE UG
as per site Cable Cable
reqd.
SubPCC No. 2 PMCC No. 4 APFCR No. 2

Rating 4000 Rating 800 Amps Rating 200 KVAR
Busbar Aluminium/Copper Busbar Aluminium Busbar Aluminium
Section PT Section PT Location PCC Room
Working KW 1375 KW Working KW 262 KW
Standby KW 550 KW Standby KW 57 KW
G Location BIOT (Stage-1) Location BIOT(Stage-1) G

DEVELOPER
H TITLE ELECTRICAL SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM FOR PCC - 2 PANEL H

PAPER SIZE A3
0 NTS 03/08/2018
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Legend
1 Transformer (TFR)
A A

Rating 4000 Note:
Busbar Aluminium VFD feeders shall be connected
3 Bus duct
directly in respective PCC Panel
Section Pretreatment without Sub-PCC Panel as per site
Working KW 1375 KW conditions. Drawing shall be submitted 4 Air Circuit Breaker (ACB)
Standby KW 550 KW 4000 Amps, 3pole ACB, EDO for approval.
Location Aeration tank type, Motorized Spring Charged 5 Power Control Center (PCC) PCC B
B
CT PMCC
3


1000 Amps 1000 Amps 1000 Amps 1000 Amps 1000 Amps 1000 Amps 1000 Amps 1000 Amps C
C 3 Pole 3 Pole 3 Pole 3 Pole 3 Pole 3 Pole 3 Pole 3 Pole
EDO, ACB, EDO, ACB, EDO, ACB, EDO, ACB, EDO, ACB, EDO, ACB, EDO, ACB, EDO, ACB, Empty
MP Based MP Based MP Based MP Based MP Based MP Based MP Based MP Based Comp.
Trip unit Trip unit Trip unit Trip unit Trip unit Trip unit Trip unit Trip unit
2 Runs x 3.5 2 Runs x 3.5 2 Runs x 3.5 2 Runs x 3.5 2 Runs x 3.5 2 Runs x 3.5 2 Runs x 3.5 2 Runs x 3.5 1 No. of empty
core x 300 core x 300 core x 300 core x 300 core x 300 core x 300 core x 300 core x 300 Compartment
D
Sq.mm Sq.mm Sq.mm Sq.mm Sq.mm Sq.mm Sq.mm Sq.mm without switchgear
D Aluminium Aluminium Aluminium Aluminium Aluminium Aluminium Aluminium Aluminium for accomdation of
Armoured Armoured Armoured Armoured Armoured Armoured Armoured Armoured ACBs in Future use.
XLPE UG XLPE UG XLPE UG XLPE UG XLPE UG XLPE UG XLPE UG XLPE UG
Cable Cable Cable Cable Cable Cable Cable Cable
VFD No. F1 VFD No. F3 VFD No. F5 VFD No. F7

Rating 800 Rating 800 Rating 400 Rating 400 9 9 9 9
Busbar Copper Busbar Copper Busbar Copper Busbar Copper
Section Preaeration Section Preaeration Section Preaeration Section Preaeration
E
KW 275 KW KW 275 KW KW 275 KW KW 275 KW
E
VFD No. F2 VFD No. F4 VFD No. F6 SPARE

F
F 9 9 9 9
G G

DEVELOPER
H TITLE ELECTRICAL SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM FOR SUB-PCC 2 PANEL H

PAPER SIZE A3
0 NTS 03/08/2018
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
A A
PMCC No. 4
Rating 800 Amps
Busbar Aluminium
Working KW 262 KW
Standby KW 37 KW 800 Amps, 3pole ACB, EDO
Location PT System type, Motorized Spring Charged B
B E/F relay unit, U/V, S/T Release
CT 9 9 9 9 9
9 9 9 9 3
EM ASS
G G

DEVELOPER
H TITLE ELECTRICAL SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM FOR PMCC-4 H

PAPER SIZE A3
0 NTS 03/08/2018
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Legend
A A
3 Bus duct

2000 Amps,
unit, U/V, S/T
Release

4000 Amps, Alu. 415 V C
C
PCC No. 3 (BIOT-STAGE-2)
Rating 4200 Amps
Busbar Aluminium
Working KW 1532 KW
Standby KW 312 KW Mechanical & Electrical
Interlock
D CT
3
EM ASS
9 9 9 9
4000 Amps
3 Pole 500 Amps, 500 Amps, 500 Amps, E
EDO, ACB, 3 Pole MCCB, 3 Pole MCCB, 3 Pole MCCB, Empty
E
MP Based MP Based MP Based MP Based Comp.
Trip unit Trip unit Trip unit Trip unit
12 Runs x 3.5
core x 300 2 Runs x 3.5 1 Run x 3.5 2 Nos. of empty
Sq.mm core x 240 core x 400 Compartment
Aluminium Sq.mm Sq.mm without switchgear
Armoured Aluminium Aluminium for accomdation of F
F
XLPE UG Cable Armoured Armoured ACBs in Future use.
9 9 9 9
(or) LT Busduct XLPE UG XLPE UG
as per site Cable Cable
reqd.
SubPCC No. 3 PMCC No. 5 APFCR No. 3 ( APFC+AHF) SPARE

Rating 4000 Rating Rating 100 KVAR
Busbar Aluminium
400 Amps
Busbar Aluminium
Section PT Busbar Aluminium Location PCC Room
Working KW 1375 KW Section Pretreatment
Standby KW 275 KW Working KW 157 KW
G Location BIOT (Stage-2) Standby KW 37 KW G
Location BIOT-STAGE II

DEVELOPER
H TITLE ELECTRICAL SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM FOR PCC PANEL -3 H

PAPER SIZE A3
0 NTS 03/08/2018
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Legend
1 Transformer (TFR)
A A

Rating 4200 Note:
Busbar Aluminium Outgoing VFD feeders shall be
connected directly in respective PCC
3 Bus duct
Section Pretreatment Panel as per site conditions. Drawing
Working KW 1375 KW shall be submitted for approval. 4 Air Circuit Breaker (ACB)
Standby KW 275 KW 4000 Amps, 3pole ACB, EDO
Location Aeration tank type, Motorized Spring Charged 5 Power Control Center (PCC) PCC B
B
CT PMCC
3


1000 Amps 1000 Amps 1000 Amps 1000 Amps 1000 Amps 1000 Amps C
C 3 Pole 3 Pole 3 Pole 3 Pole 3 Pole 3 Pole
EDO, ACB, EDO, ACB, EDO, ACB, EDO, ACB, EDO, ACB, EDO, ACB, Empty
MP Based MP Based MP Based MP Based MP Based MP Based Comp.
Trip unit Trip unit Trip unit Trip unit Trip unit Trip unit
3 Runs x 3.5 3 Runs x 3.5 3 Runs x 3.5 3 Runs x 3.5 3 Runs x 3.5 3 Runs x 3.5 1 No. of empty
core x 300 core x 300 core x 300 core x 300 core x 300 core x 300 Compartment
D
Sq.mm Sq.mm Sq.mm Sq.mm Sq.mm Sq.mm without switchgear
D Aluminium Aluminium Aluminium Aluminium Aluminium Aluminium for accomdation of
Armoured Armoured Armoured Armoured Armoured Armoured ACBs in Future use.
XLPE UG XLPE UG XLPE UG XLPE UG XLPE UG XLPE UG
Cable Cable Cable Cable Cable Cable

Rating 800 Rating 800 Rating 400 9 9 9 9
E
E

F
F 9 9 9 9
G G

DEVELOPER
H TITLE ELECTRICAL SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM FOR SUB-PCC PANEL -3 H

PAPER SIZE A3
0 NTS 03/08/2018
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
A A
PMCC No. 5
Rating 400 Amps
Busbar Aluminium
Working KW 157 KW
Standby KW 37 KW
Location BIOT-STAGE II
B
B
9 9 9 9 9
9 9 9 9
G G

DEVELOPER
H TITLE ELECTRICAL SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM FOR PMCC PANEL -5 H

PAPER SIZE A3
0 NTS 03/08/2018
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Legend
A A
3 Bus duct

2000 Amps,
unit, U/V, S/T
Release

4000 Amps, Alu. 415 V C
C
PCC No. 4
Rating 4200 Amps
Busbar Aluminium
Working KW 1968 KW
Interlock
D CT
3
EM ASS
9 9 9 9
1250 Amps 800 Amps 2000 Amps 800 Amps 1600 Amps 800 Amps 250
3 Pole 500 Amps 3 Pole 3 Pole 3 Pole 500 Amps 3 Pole 3 Pole Amps E
EDO, ACB, 3 Pole EDO, ACB, EDO, ACB, EDO, ACB, 3 Pole EDO, ACB, EDO, ACB, 3 Pole Empty
E
MP Based MCCB, MP MP Based MP Based MP Based MCCB, MP MP Based MP Based MCCB, Comp.
Trip unit based trip Trip unit Trip unit Trip unit based trip Trip unit Trip unit MP based
unit unit trip unit
9 Runs x 3.5 1 Run x 3.5 2 Nos. of empty

4 Runs x 3.5 1 Run x 3.5 3 Runs x 3.5 2 Runs x 3.5 5 Runs x 3.5
core x 300 core x 400 Compartment
core x 300 core x 400 core x 300 core x 300 core x 300
Sq.mm Sq.mm without switchgear
Sq.mm Sq.mm Sq.mm Sq.mm Sq.mm
Aluminium Aluminium for accomdation of F
Aluminium Aluminium Aluminium Aluminium Aluminium
Armoured Armoured ACBs in Future use.
F Armoured Armoured Armoured Armoured Armoured
XLPE UG XLPE UG 9 9 9 9
XLPE UG Cable XLPE UG XLPE UG XLPE UG XLPE UG
Cable (or) Cable (or)
Cable Cable Cable Cable
Busduct Busduct
SubPCC No. 4 PMCC No. 7 PMCC No. 8 APFCR No. 4 (APFC +AHF) SPARE
Rating 1000 Rating 630 Amps Rating 630 Amps Rating 500 KVAR
Busbar Aluminium Busbar Aluminium Busbar Aluminium Busbar Aluminium
Section PT Section PT Section PT Location PCC Room
Working KW 341 KW Working KW 269 KW Working KW 232 KW
Standby KW 67 KW Standby KW 93 KW Standby KW 75 KW
G Location Filter Press Location QF system Location UF System G

PMCC No. 6 SubPCC No. 5 Control Panel CP-2 /PMCC-10 SPARE
Rating 400 Amps Rating 1600 Rating 400 Amps
Busbar Busbar Busbar PROJECT TANNERY WASTE MANAGEMENT AT JAJMAU, KANPUR
Aluminium Aluminium Aluminium
Section Pretreatment Section Pretreatment Section PT Section
Working KW 107 KW Working KW 660 KW Working KW 122 KW (Approx) TAMILNADU WATER INVESTMENT COMPANY LIMITED.,
Standby KW 39 KW Standby KW 255 KW Standby KW -- KW DEVELOPER
Location LSS Location UF HPP Location CCRP MOUNT ROAD, GUINDY, CHENNAI - 600 032, TAMILNADU, INDIA.

PAPER SIZE A3
0 NTS 03/08/2018
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Legend
1 Transformer (TFR)
A A
SubPCC No. 4 SubPCC No. 5 2 Vacuum Circuit Breaker (VCB)

Rating 1000 Rating 1600
Busbar Aluminium Busbar Aluminium
Section PT Section Pretreatment 3 Bus duct
Working KW 341 KW Working KW 660 KW
Standby KW 67 KW Standby KW 255 KW 4 Air Circuit Breaker (ACB)
Location Filter Press Location UF HPP
1000 Amps, 3pole ACB, EDO 1600 Amps, 3pole ACB, EDO
type, Motorized Spring Charged type, Motorized Spring Charged 5 Power Control Center (PCC) PCC B
Microprocessor based O/L, S/C, Microprocessor based O/L, S/C,
B
E/F relay unit, U/V, S/T Release E/F relay unit, U/V, S/T Release 6 Power & Motor Control Center (PMCC)
CT CT PMCC
9 9 9 9
3 3
EM ASS EM ASS 7 Lighting Distribution Board (LDB) LDB

415V, 1000 Amps, Aluminium Busbar 415V, 1600 Amps, Aluminium Busbar

C
100 Amps 100 Amps 320 Amps 320 Amps 320 Amps 320 Amps 10 Switch Fuse Unit (SFU / SDF)
C
3 Pole 3 Pole 3 Pole 3 Pole 3 Pole 3 Pole
MCCB, MP MCCB, MP MCCB, MCCB, MCCB, MCCB,
based based MP based MP based MP based MP based
Trip unit Trip unit Trip unit Trip unit Trip unit Trip unit
1 Runs x 3.5 1 Runs x 3.5 1 Runs x 3.5 1 Runs x 3.5

core x 50 core x core x core x D
Sq.mm 185Sq.mm 185Sq.mm 185Sq.mm
D Aluminium Aluminium Aluminium Aluminium
Armoured Armoured Armoured Armoured
XLPE UG XLPE UG XLPE UG XLPE UG
Cable Cable Cable Cable
9 9 9 9
VFD No. F1-F12 SPARE VFD No. F1-F5 VFD No. F6-F8 VFD No. F9-F11 SPARE
Rating 100 Amps Rating 250 Amps Rating 315 Amps Rating 315 Amps
Busbar Copper Busbar Copper Busbar Copper Busbar Copper
Section Filterpress Section Filterpress Section Filterpress Section Filterpress
E
KW 40 KW KW 75 KW KW 90 KW KW 90 KW
E
G G

DEVELOPER
H TITLE ELECTRICAL SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM FOR SUB PCC PANEL 4 & 5 H

PAPER SIZE A3
0 NTS 03/08/2018
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
A A
PMCC No. 6
Rating 400 Amps
Busbar Aluminium
Working KW 107 KW
Standby KW 39 KW
Location LSS
B
9 9 9 9 9
9 9 9 9
G G

DEVELOPER

PAPER SIZE A3
0 NTS 03/08/2018
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
A A
PMCC No. 7
Rating 800 Amps
Busbar Aluminium
Section PT
Working KW 269 KW
Standby KW 93 KW
Location QF system
800 Amps, 3pole ACB, EDO
type, Motorized Spring Charged B
B
CT 9 9 9 9 9
9 9 9 9 3
EM ASS
G G

DEVELOPER
H TITLE ELECTRICAL SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM FOR HT PANEL WITH TRANSFORMER H

PAPER SIZE A3
0 NTS 03/08/2018
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
A A
PMCC No. 8
Rating 630 Amps
Busbar Aluminium
Section PT
Working KW 232 KW
Standby KW 75 KW
Location UF System
B
9 9 9 9 9
9 9 9 9
G G

DEVELOPER
H TITLE ELECTRICAL SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM FOR PMCC PANEL-9 H

PAPER SIZE A3
0 NTS 03/08/2018
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
A A
Control Panel CP-2 /PMCC-10
Rating 400 Amps
Busbar Aluminium
Section PT Section
Working KW 122 KW (Approx)
Standby KW -- KW
Location CCRP
B
9 9 9 9 9
9 9 9 9
G G

DEVELOPER
H TITLE ELECTRICAL SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM FOR PMCCPANEL -10 H

PAPER SIZE A3
0 NTS 03/08/2018
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

A A
Acoustic enclosure Acoustic enclosure
Synchronizing Panel 2000 Amps LT Busduct 2000 Amps LT busduct
9 9 9 9
B
2000 Amps,
B 2000 Amps,3pole, 3pole,
ACB, EDO type, MP ACB, EDO type, 4000 Amps,
relay unit, U/V, S/T ACB, EDO type,
S/C, E/F relay
unit, U/V, S/T
unit, U/V, S/T
Release
4000 Amps, Alu. 415 V 9 9 9 9

Busduct
PCC No. 5
Rating 4200 Amps
Busbar Aluminium
Working KW 1838 KW
Interlock
D
D type, Motorized Spring Charged

CT
3
EM ASS

E
E
800 Amps 800 Amps 800 Amps 800 Amps 800 Amps 800 Amps 800 Amps 800 Amps 800 Amps 800 Amps 800 Amps 800 Amps 800 Amps 500
3 Pole 3 Pole 3 Pole 3 Pole 3 Pole 3 Pole 3 Pole 3 Pole 3 Pole 3 Pole 3 Pole 3 Pole 3 Pole Amps
EDO, ACB, EDO, ACB, EDO, ACB, EDO, ACB, EDO, ACB, EDO, ACB, EDO, ACB, EDO, ACB, EDO, ACB, EDO, ACB, EDO, ACB, EDO, ACB, EDO, ACB, 3 Pole Empty
MP Based MP Based MP Based MP Based MP Based MP Based MP Based MP Based MP Based MP Based MP Based MP Based MP Based MCCB, Comp.
Trip unit Trip unit Trip unit Trip unit Trip unit Trip unit Trip unit Trip unit Trip unit Trip unit Trip unit Trip unit Trip unit MP based
trip unit
2 Runs x 3.5
2 Runs x 3.5 2 Runs x 3.5 2 Runs x 3.5 2 Runs x 3.5 2 Runs x 3.5 2 Runs x 3.5 core x 300 1 No. of empty F
2 Runs x 3.5 2 Runs x 3.5 2 Runs x 3.5 2 Runs x 3.5 2 Runs x 3.5 2 Runs x 3.5 Compartment
F core x 300 core x 300 core x 300 core x 300 core x 300 core x 300 core x 300 core x 300 core x 300 core x 300 core x 300 core x 300 Sq.mm
Sq.mm Sq.mm Sq.mm Sq.mm Sq.mm Sq.mm Aluminium without switchgear
Sq.mm Sq.mm Sq.mm Sq.mm Sq.mm Sq.mm
Aluminium Aluminium Aluminium Aluminium Aluminium Aluminium Armoured for accomdation of
Aluminium Aluminium Aluminium Aluminium Aluminium Aluminium ACBs in Future use.
Armoured Armoured Armoured Armoured Armoured Armoured Armoured Armoured Armoured Armoured Armoured Armoured XLPE UG
XLPE UG Cable XLPE UG XLPE UG Cable XLPE UG XLPE UG Cable XLPE UG XLPE UG Cable XLPE UG XLPE UG Cable XLPE UG XLPE UG Cable XLPE UG Cable
Cable Cable Cable Cable Cable Cable PMCC No. 9
Rating 630 Amps
Busbar Aluminium
VFD No. F1 VFD No. F3 VFD No. F5 VFD No. F7 VFD No. F9 VFD No. F11 Section PT SPARE
Rating 630 Amps Rating 630 Amps Rating 630 Amps Rating 630 Amps Rating 630 Amps Rating 630 Amps Working KW 238 KW
Busbar Copper Busbar Copper Busbar Copper Busbar Copper Busbar Copper Busbar Copper Standby KW 0 KW
G Section Dilution pump Section Dilution pump Section Dilution pump Section Dilution pump Section Dilution pump Section Dilution pump Location Dilution system G
KW 200 KW KW 200 KW KW 200 KW KW 200 KW KW 200 KW KW 200 KW

VFD No. F2 VFD No. F4 VFD No. F6 VFD No. F8 VFD No. F10 VFD No. F12
Rating 630 Amps Rating 630 Amps Rating 630 Amps Rating 630 Amps Rating 630 Amps Rating 630 Amps TAMILNADU WATER INVESTMENT COMPANY LIMITED.,
Busbar Copper Busbar Copper Busbar Copper Busbar Copper Busbar Copper Busbar Copper DEVELOPER
Section Dilution pump Section Dilution pump Section Dilution pump Section Dilution pump Section Dilution pump Section Dilution pump
KW 200 KW KW 200 KW KW 200 KW KW 200 KW KW 200 KW KW 200 KW

PAPER SIZE A3
0 NTS 03/08/2018
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
A A
PMCC No. 9
Rating 630 Amps
Busbar Aluminium
Section PT
Working KW 238 KW
Standby KW 0 KW
Location Dilution system
B
9 9 9 9 9
9 9 9 9
G G

DEVELOPER

PAPER SIZE A3
0 NTS 03/08/2018
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
A A
APFCR No. 1,2,3,4,5
Rating --
Busbar Copper
Location PT/MEE/RO
B
CT
3
EM ASS
9 9 9 9
--Sq.mm, Copper flexible --Sq.mm, Copper flexible

Multistand cable Multistand cable C
---Amps, TPN MCCB, ---Amps, TPN MCCB,

Thermal Magnetic Thermal Magnetic
Release with S/C, O/C release with S/C, O/L
Protection Protection
---KVAR ---KVAR
Capacitor Duty Capacitor Duty
contactor contactor D
D
7 % Copper Wound 7 % Copper Wound
Detuned reactor Detuned reactor
---Sq.mm, copper
flexible, multistrand wire ---Sq.mm, copper
flexible, multistrand wire
E
-- KVAR, 440 VAC, MPP, -- KVAR, 440 VAC, MPP,
Heavy Duty Capacitor Heavy Duty Capacitor
G G

DEVELOPER
H TITLE ELECTRICAL SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM FOR APFCR WITH HARMONIC FILTER H
PANEL
PAPER SIZE A3
0 NTS 03/08/2018
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Tannery Etp PDF

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Tannery Etp PDF

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Jajmau Tannery Effluent Treatment Association (JTETA)

S. No. RFP Reference Existing Clause Revised Clause

1. Section 5: bid data Event Date/Location Event Date/Location

Beneficiary Name: Jajmau Tannery Effluent Treatment

O&M security shall be submitted by the contractor

S.N Activity/Milestone Target Liquidated damages per

Delay Liquidated Damages recovered on account of delay in completion of an

TERMS AND PROCEDURE OF PAYMENT

JAJMAU TANNERY EFFLUENT TREATMENT ASSOCIATION

ARTICLE 1. Payment of Design & Build Price

1.2 Repayment of Mobilisation advance:

1.2 Payment of Design-Build Price

ARTICLE 2. Payment of O&M Prices

2. Payments for power connection from Electricity Utility Company

If the Contractor procures power from outside Uttar Pradesh,

(II) for each Facility, the number of units of energy

(III) the quantity of diesel consumed to generate the

(C) For each Facility, the Contractor shall be liable to pay

(I) For excess power consumption up to 5% of the

Power Consumption Liquidated Damages: (Number of

(III) For excess power consumption above 10% of the

Power Consumption Liquidated Damages: (Number of

(D) The Power Consumption Liquidated Damages payable by the

3. Certification of payments by Project Engineer

PAYMENT BREAK UP SCHEDULE OF CIVIL, ELECTRICAL AND

1. For Civil Works

1.1. For RCC Tanks

1.2. SCREEN CHAMBER, DISTRIBUTION CHAMBER AND VALVE

1.3. RCC BUILDINGS

1.4. INTER PATHWAY, APPROACH ROAD, BOUNDARY WALL & FENCING

3. BREAK UP OF PAYMENT FOR COLLECTION AND CONVEYANCE SYSTEM

Ground Penetrating Radar survey, Seismic Survey,

3 Supply of Pipes 32%

Technical Specifications for Construction Phase

JAJMAU TANNERY EFFLUENT TREATMENT ASSOCIATION (JTETA) COMMON

a) 20 MLD (2 modules x 10 MLD) Tannery Common Effluent Treatment Plant (CETP)

b) Raw effluent collection and conveyance system to handle 20 MLD effluent,

c) 900 KLD (3 x 300 KLD) Common Chrome Recovery Units (CCRU),

d) 200 KLD capacity zero liquid discharge pilot plant and

e) O & M for the above (a) to (d) 60 months

COMPONENT – B: RAW EFFLUENT COLLECTION & CONVEYANCE SYSTEM

COMPONENT - C: COMMON CHROME RECOVERY UNITS (CCRU)

COMPONENT - D: 200 KLD CAPACITY ZERO LIQUID DISCHARGE (ZLD) PILOT

Construction, Supply, Fabrication, Erection, Civil and Electro-Mechanical & Instrumentation

General Scope of Work

x. All works including civil, electromechanical and instrumentation items required

xii. Hydraulic Testing of all civil tanks.

xiv. Preparation and submission of Basic Engineering Package, As built drawings,

xvi. Testing of each treatment components with fresh water

Basis of Design – Effluent Quality

S. No. Parameters Design Parameters

Proposed CETP Treatment Scheme

1. Maximum reduction of BOD and COD

Secondary Clarifier for Biomass Settling

Proposed Approach for odour control:

2. Oxidation using Air/oxygen supply

Design detail for proposed 20 MLD CETP

29. Anoxic Tank 2 Nos 35.5m L x 34m W Inflow : 28190 m3/day

Sludge Thickening system

44. Common Sludge 1 No 13m L x 13m W x HRT: 5 hrs

58. Quartz Filter Feed 1 No 28mL x 20mW x Inflow: 27800 m3/day

3. Diluted Wastewater Discharge 1200 m3/hr 6 Nos x 2 Tanks

(i) Mixing Tank: